Terramodel TML List

TML List of Terramodel commands available from Geocomp Systems

Detailed Description

MANUAL

SOURCE

About TMLs

Modify elevations of 2D contours.

Create a 3D set joining points offset from horizontal and vertical alignments.

Filter superfluous points from a DTM.

Export MCA file for Topcon 3D-MC Machine Control.

Report 3D lengths and angles of sets.

Create a 3D set joining points offset from a roadway.

Modify elevations of individual contours.

Create 3D points.

3D Visualiser.

Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display.

Report about Terramodel version number and modules.

Convert .DWG and .DXF files to R2000 .DWG or R10 .DXF files.

Set, clear or list the current active alignment.

Set the active station.

Add prefix or suffix to names of selected points, sets or plines.

Add a new vertex into a pline.

Add prefix or suffix to selected point numbers.

Add a new point into a set.

Add a prefix and suffix to selected text.

Add an image located by pline boxes.

Add the depth indicated by an isopach layer to the points contained within a DTM layer.

Add coordinate mapping systems.

Add tide corrections to depth records.

Adjust a lot to match a specified area.

Label a pipe with airvalve blocks.

Create, edit and delete command aliases.

Alias editor

Examples in ALIAS.INI installed with Geocomp Update

ALIAS.INI

Import alignments from an ASCII text file.

Import alignments offsets from a text file.

Make text perpendicular to alignment.

Zoom to extents

Enable menus for entry by keyboard.

Report angle-right between points.

Draw a pline arc from any three parameters.

Create an arc pline by two locations and a radius.

Create an arc set by two points and the radius.

Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.

Replace arc segments in sets with points and arcs or chords.

Toggle visibility of set arc centres.

Report the area inside plines or sets.

Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.

Add mastersheet images to plotboxes.

Configure ASCII points import or export format

Import an Ashtech points file

Renumber points in chainage|station order.

Relayer objects to match Asset_ID attribute.

Modify elevation of contours by crossing pline.

Import an AusGeoid DAT or TXT file

Create line, block and text features based on field codes.

Enable automatic saving of project files.

Create a clockwise set joining points.

Compute average coordinates of points

Compute volumes by average end-area between DTMs

Report on installation of pre-cast road barriers.

Create, enter and edit basin parameters for a point.

Create a point at the intersection of two bearings or two lines.

Import a pipe survey from Business Center.

Create a point at the intersection of a line and an arc.

Add a datum angle to bearing text.

Draw a set of best fit through selected 3D points.

Draw a curve or plane of best fit through selected points.

Draw an arc of best fit through selected points.

Create a line of best fit through selected points.

Create an elevation view of points.

Extend borehole DTMs to specified offsets.

Import boreholes from a CSV.

Import LandXML points within boundaries without new lines.

Create a coloured image from depths.

Create a breakline set.

Create a pline with right angles.

Filter excess points from breaklines.

Check for crossing sets on a layer.

Place blocks or symbols at points relative to an alignment.

Reread a block

Create, place, list or purge blocks.

Modify the direction of blocks.

Create an array of blocks for a legend.

Bluetop report.

Import boreholes from a file.

Draw a pline box by two corners.

Create pline boxes from dynaview extents.

Add images located by named pline boxes.

Break a pline or set into two parts.

Break a pline within a vertical curve.

Add brackets to selected text.

Build a DTM layer from contours, points and text.

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides.

Report Compute-A-Grade ditch.

Label objects with predefined callout text.

Configure plotter carousels.

Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.

Create a catenary pline.

Create an initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return.

Recentre views based on chainage of active alignment.

Recentre views based on chainage of road alignment.

Create superelevation slope alignment from existing crossfall.

Set the start chainage of a horizontal alignment pline.

Report changes to files in your most recent Geocomp Update.

Check attributes.

Check and correct roadway alignment registration.

Check road DTM and add breaklines across roads.

Replace selected attributes based on a dictionary.

Change colour bylayer to colour by colour number.

Change elevation by point name

Replace characters in names based on a dictionary.

Replace selected text based on a dictionary.

Report chainage, offset and height difference for selected selected points from DTM.

Convert stationing text to chainage text.

Create a circular pline.

Remove superfluous points from sets and plines.

Clear text from the message scroll window.

Clip plines and sets to boundaries and delete objects.

Clip objects outside multiple boundaries.

Close the current project without exiting Terramodel.

Close selected sets and plines.

Open Windows command prompt.

Modify the color of selected objects.

Modify the color of points relative to a tunnel design.

Change the colour of plines by contour interval.

Modify the colour of points by contour interval.

Modify the colour of selected objects.

Modify the colour of points relative to a tunnel design.

Modify colours and linetypes of selected objects by layer.

Command line.

Toggle on or off the visibility of the command line.

Place a compass rose.

Compactor Grid Settings.

Report road thickness conformance.

Modify elevation of contours by labels.

Connect plines or sets across a gap.

Help Table of Contents.

Extract pline contours from a DTM.

Create plines at a specified contour elevation.

Configure contour settings.

Compute volumes from contour plines.

Convert degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS) to decimal degrees or decimal to DMS.

Convert sets to plines or plines to sets.

Set slope convention.

Convert between coordinate systems with a look-up table that emphasises USA and UTM.

Display the Coordinate Scroll.

Copy selected objects to a new location or layer.

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob.

Copy one roadjob into a different roadjob.

Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name.

Recover a lost coordinate scroll dialog.

Count the number of objects of each type in each view.

Import lists of layers in layer lists.

Check for crossing sets or plines.

Toggle on|off arrowheads (crowfeet) from leader lines.

Coordinate System Manager.

Report construction staking.

Create AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file from .CSV. or .MAP.

Create table of text from .CSV or *.TXT file.

Report attribute names to a .CSV file.

Import coordinates with attributes from a .CSV file.

Create a cul-de-sac alignment

Select the current layer.

Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement

Insert or edit a pline curve.

Compute arc properties.

Move a design DTM and balance cut or fill volumes.

Export data to Civilcad ASCII .AS5.

Import data from Civilcad .AS5 file.

Export data to Civilcad Version 4 ASC.

Import data from Civilcad Version 4 .ASC.

Reverse the direction of closed anticlockwise sets.

Import Datamine binary data.

DC File Editor

Create a point at the intersection of two distances or arcs.

Show and create dead regions.

Determine the angle between two bearings.

Delete missing blocks and external text.

Delete layer lists.

Delete objects between two locations.

Delete selected objects from a project.

Delete a selected segment from a set or pline.

Delete null (dead) triangles.

Create a depth surface DTM from plines with elevations representing depths.

Create depth surfaces from boreholes.

Change numeric names to alphanumeric.

Change numeric names to alphanumeric with separator.

Project batters from a design DTM to another DTM.

Modify elevation to design roadway elevation.

Configure design settings

Remove spikes from a DTM.

Data Format Editor

Trimble diagnostic report

Label dimensions between two locations or along segments.

Break sets and plines into segments.

Display 12D Model attributes.

Display feature attributes.

Configure how objects are displayed.

Report the distance between two locations.

Divide a line into intervals.

Import a USGS DLG (optional format) file

Export a USGS DLG-O file.

Dimension between two locations.

List Terramodel documents.

Drafting settings.

Toggle dragging on or off.

Import Drag Head log file.

Report drainage details to a CSV file.

Create sets where selected plines cross a DTM.

Label a drill hole.

Label a set segment of a drain with the grade.

Report volumes and surface areas of ponds in a DTM.

Import DTED DT1 files.

Export DTM layer to Leica 1200 DBX database files.

Export DTM layer to LandXML triangles.

Relink all DTM layers and redraw the display.

Change the current DTM layer.

Project a cone onto a DTM.

Create set lines around drainage catchments.

Create a set around a DTM edge.

Interpolate a grid over a DTM.

List DTM information by layer for selected points.

Match overlapping DTMs at a match line.

Create points by comparison with two DTMs.

Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM.

Create sets from DTM links.

Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing.

Report the points with the highest and lowest elevations in a layer.

Relink the current DTM layer and refresh.

Project sets onto a DTM.

Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.

Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.

Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.

Import elevations from .DXF files.

Change the name of layers in a .DXF file.

Create dynaviews.

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs.

Report roadjob volumes by end-area.

Edit any object.

Edit initialisation file TMODWIN.INI

Haul road efficiency calculator.

Change the name of selected points and plines to match their elevations.

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected objects.

Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from a DTM.

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Show elevation and grade of a profile at a chainage.

Create an ellipse.

Interpolate elevations onto contour plines.

Import a Geopak alignment from EMXS.

Define error ellipse attributes.

Evaluate DTM breaklines.

Import ESRI Shapefile (.SHP, .SHX and .DBF) data.

Export ESRI Shapefile (.SHP, .SHX and .DBF) data.

Execute an external program

Exit Terramodel

Explode blocks, text, tables, dynaviews and complex linetypes.

Open Windows File Explorer.

Export data using scripts.

Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format.

Export script manager.

Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format.

Extend a pline or set to boundaries or by a distance.

Toggle point number labels.

Toggle symbol labels.

Toggle preset symbol labels.

Display temporary point markers.

Toggle elevation labels.

Toggle point name labels.

Favourite commands.

Import ASCII points by square regions in separate project files.

Export Trimble feature code library (.FCX) from AutoDraft (.ADC).

Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two set segments or two pline segments.

Filter vertices in plines.

Filter duplicate points within 3D tolerance.

Move three-point-arc points onto tangents.

Fix breaklines connected to points in other layers.

Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records.

Fix layers.

Add dictionaries to GCSPELL.

Fix lost Raw Data Editor window.

Fix lost 3D visualiser windows.

Import 12D Model .FLD field file.

Copy objects from an elevation view into a plan view.

Copy objects from a plan view into an elevation view.

List or change fonts of selected text.

Design a forest road.

Report offsets for a forest road

Export Nikon FM 700 Full Road Geometry (.FRG) file.

Edit feature attributes.

Export feature attributes to CSV.

Import feature attributes from a survey file.

Export feature attributes to MapInfo files.

Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

Remove characters in a name by a range of character positions.

Modify point names to include chainage|station and offset.

Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL.

Report chainage and offset from master HAL.

Report chainage and design offset As-Built report from HAL and VAL.

Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs.

Report chainage, offset and rake from HAL and VAL.

Report chainage, offset, lean and rake of a wall from HAL and VAL.

Create mid-points on short plines.

Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs.

Round elevations.

Helmert transformation.

Places blocks or symbols by group.

List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.

Report thickness between two DTMs at selected points.

Import 12D Model .12DA or .12DAZ file.

Export 12D Archive file.

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL.

Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format.

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL, sorted by chainage and offset.

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along alignment set.

Delete selected plines and sets with total length inside a specified range.

Modify colours and linetypes by group, name or layer.

Modify colour based upon AutoDraft report.

Project from points on a set to a DTM.

Report chainage and elevation along a VAL.

Compute the cut and fill volumes of selected boundaries.

Change the default Callout Style.

Check a DTM Edge boundary.

Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM.

Bowditch adjustment (compass rule) of a lot or traverse.

Create isopachs at intersection of two DTMs.

Create multiple isopachs between two DTMs.

Test attribute records.

Create attribute database records for an object.

Place chainage labels on xlines.

Create 3D points along HAL and VAL at 2D distances.

Create 3D points along HAL and VAL at 3D distances.

Report distance and direction with 3D components to the message scroll.

Compute and label ellipsoidal distance and direction.

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM, with horizontal alignment and labels.

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured perpendicular to DTM.

Remove duplicate points on a layer with tolerances.

Report visible layers in layerlists.

Create a DTM from the upper or lower regions of two DTMs.

Create a DTM from the upper (or lower) components of multiple DTMs.

Find and report a nominated point by number.

Create points at centroids of plines and sets.

Move points onto a HAL or line.

Report and label cross section from strings.

Create cross sections in a .CSV file at strings intersecting xlines.

Affine Transformation.

Move intersection point and update Xlines in a roadjob.

Create a 3D set by vertical or perpendicular offsets.

3D Conformal adjustment.

Rotate points, text or blocks in 3D by steps.

Find the closest or perpendicular 3D distance.

Create a set through three points.

Compare points in two layers by coordinates.

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using search ranges.

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using alignment.

Report pile differences

Report pile rakes

Label points in two layers with differences.

Show obstructions in profile view.

Report point elevation minus roadway elevation.

As-built roadway report.

Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design.

Compare DTM triangles within tolerance of roadway design.

Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway.

Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set.

Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, for multiple surfaces, to a comma-delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials to a CSV.

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages.

Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage to .CSV.

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM within one surface material.

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM within selected surface materials.

Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances.

Compute cut volumes between surfaces within boundaries.

Create road resheet design profiles.

Create profiles from shapes in a roadway.

Create a point on a line at an elevation.

Grade a set from points with known elevations.

Intersection Design.

Change the group of selected objects.

Modify, list or highlight contourable or non-contourable points.

Transform ellipsoidal elevations to geoidal elevations.

Modify elevations by grade between two sets.

Modify elevations by grade between two sets perpendicular to HAL.

Swap in X,Y or Z.

Create 3D points from cross sections.

Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from a layer.

Remove selected duplicate sets, plines and text.

Report Quality Assurance from Geodimeter as-built survey.

Report radial setout.

Create a point at a distance along a line between two points.

Intersect a batter defined by two sets with a DTM.

Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets.

Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows.

Create points by manually entering station | chainage, offset and elevation.

Import points by chainage, offset and elevation.

Import points by chainage, offset and elevation with tilt.

Create breaklines at changes of grade, valleys or ridges.

Move points onto nearest perpendicular Xlines.

Move points onto nearest skewed Xlines.

Add points into sets with connecting breaklines.

Modify zero elevations (Z = 0.00) to no elevation (Z = *).

Combine elevation of point and DTM.

Solid hatch along lines.

Report satellite horizon curtain.

Interpolate elevations from VAL.

Select start station | chainage for multiple selected HALs.

Show distance and grade between sets or plines at cursor.

Report on Geodimeter .JOB file.

Change elevation of text to match subject.

Renumber points to match their point names.

Report areas of lots and compare the sum against a boundary.

Report horizontal alignment.

Report DTM areas.

Select objects less than or greater than specified length.

Join multiple plines or sets.

Move objects relative to an alignment or point.

Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM.

Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.

Create a DTM layer at points offset from another DTM.

Extend DTM to point.

Extend DTMs by a horizontal distance.

Report or move duplicate points.

Mirror or rotate point labels.

Report crossfall between two 3D sets.

Delete set segments greater than a nominated length.

Select points between two DTM layers.

Create sets parallel to an alignment using a table of offsets.

List registered horizontal alignments to select the active alignment or current road job.

Insert a block graphically and interpolate elavations.

Prefix name with first four characters of layer name.

Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna.

Adjust points for a new vertical or slope alignment.

Create a roadjob

Adjust vertically

Adjust slope difference

Orient text to along a set or pline.

Report and label angle-right between locations.

Draw a pline or set arc from any three parameters.

Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.

Report areas, lengths or volumes of plines by region and layer list.

Delete or select text objects containing Bad Rec EAT codes.

Create a bench set.

Modify colours of block definitions.

Create points at insertion point of blocks.

Match extents of boundaries

Draw a pline box by three locations.

Create chords from arcs, spirals and splines.

Import a profile from file of chainage and elevation.

Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file.

Create new DTM surfaces clipped at boundaries.

Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative objects.

Modify elevations of points in contours.

Import contours from Geocomp (.CON) file.

Export contours to Geocomp (.CON) file.

Export contours to a simulator (.TXT) file.

Modify elevations of labelled contours.

Convert sets to plines and plines to sets.

Convert between coordinate systems with a look-up table that emphasises Australia and New Zealand.

Create corbels along a road job.

Copy selected objects onto a layer.

Import and string comma-delimited ASCII (.csv) coordinate data.

Compute dam volumes in increments.

Export cross sections at intersecting sets to DC file.

Delete sets and points in sets.

Label dimensions with more options than DIM.

Label lots with dimensions.

Add points into sets based on maximum horizontal distance.

Compute dredging volumes.

Create sets where selected plines cross a DTM.

Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .DTP file.

Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh.

Create multiple DTM boundaries.

Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor.

Remove triangles from a DTM edge.

Create superelevation slope alignments from a DTM.

Import a Geocomp .DTM file onto a layer.

Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file.

Roadway volume report in columns.

Edit 12D Model attributes.

Modify the elevation of selected objects.

Import DEM grid files in ESRI format.

Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes into components.

Extend or trim multiple plines to a boundary.

Import .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file.

Export .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file.

Create paths flowing from locations on a DTM.

Insert or expand arcs along sets and plines.

Filter excess points from straights and arcs in sets.

Create a set that follows segments or links.

Fix .XML files with long lines.

Create points on a grid pattern.

Import Leica .GEO coordinate data.

Import GPX GPS data.

Report the cut and fill volumes of regions.

Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format.

Import alignment in Topcon | Civilcad GC7 | GTS format.

Export alignment in Topcon | Civilcad GTS format.

Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets.

Delete selected registered HALs.

Edit the main horizontal alignment graphically.

Import Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).

Create a pline HAL from a registered horizontal alignment with offsets.

Export Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).

Report elevations of roadway surfaces.

Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file.

Report key, version and path configuration

Locate objects.

Display the chainage and offset from a selected alignment at the cursor.

Import surfaces from Industry Foundation Classes (.IFC) files.

Import DOS Geocomp Points and Strings.

Insert points into sets.

Create points with incrementing point numbers.

Create text with incrementing numbers or letters.

Replace circles with tree blocks

Report areas and subtract internal areas.

Design ramps for pivot irrigation.

Merge pivot irrigation ramps into DTM.

Check pivot irrigation boom.

Create pivot irrigation profile.

Join points with gaps

Create sets from points by feature and string in name.

Import points from Google Earth (.KML or .KMZ).

Export to Google Earth, NearMap or Web Map Services (WMS).

Label and draw grid in polygons.

Label intersection points.

Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text.

Label points in a set with pipeline peg labels.

Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border.

Import lidar point clouds in .LAS or .LAZ format.

Export point in .LAS point cloud format.

Relayer and recolour objects by name and mapping file.

Export Trimble Alignment Planning linear features .LFA

List points with invalid coordinates.

Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels.

Import Geocomp long section .LNG

Label lot corners with two elevations or a difference

List the coordinates of selected points.

Assign point properties by text from Topcon Magnet Field.

Import a contour .MAP file.

Create a layer map file.

Display temporary vertex markers on visible plines.

Close gaps in contours.

Import a list of road materials.

Export a list of road materials.

Merge multiple regions or DTMs.

Import multiple .PTS or CSV files.

Assign contour elevations to multiple 2D plines.

Export sets to a Trimble Roading .DC file.

Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .RLN files.

Export multiple alignments to a Leica 1200 LandXML file

Compute volumes between pairs of DTM surfaces.

Rename objects to match a selected object.

Name points sequentially along a set.

Select all points near selected sets or plines.

Import Quantm grid data.

Import NMEA log data.

Select objects with no elevations (2D).

Import data in Wavefront .OBJ format.

Export DTM to Wavefront .OBJ format.

Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.

Select all points in selected sets.

Modify the elevation of one contour pline or set.

Export data to Geocomp .PTS and .STR format.

Place building pads at nominated elevation within a lot.

Pan by keypad with North = 8.

Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points.

Create a CSV file of pavement depths in a format suitable for use in Paveset paving machines.

Create pile points along an alignment.

Import a HP-GL or HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT or .000) plot file into sheet view.

Import Geocomp .PLT plot file into sheet view.

Edit profile IPs graphically.

Create profiles from multiple HALs and DTMs.

Import TPSetout/TPStakeout points.

Check minimum distances between points on sets.

Import points from an ASCII file.

Output points to an ASCII file.

Change elevation or name of points on layer by the nearest selected text within tolerance.

Purge all unused blocks.

Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM.

Interactive quick profile or cross section.

Move a HAL or VAL IP and recompute roadway volume.

Redraw all views and reset the view scale for point labels.

Renumber points in set order.

Start a new report in P3Pad editor.

Move or copy objects from one view to another.

Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river.

Create Geodimeter Roadline3D Files from sets.

Rotate objects around a location by angle or deflection.

Report runway conformance

Multiply X, Y or Z by scale factors.

Report elevation of a DTM at the cursor.

Import Lidar Scan data and filter by many variables.

Export alignment in Sokkia .SDR format.

Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes.

Check spelling of text.

Export DTMs to surface models in .STL format

Create points at strata from table of materials and depths.

Modify text by text style.

Create a DTM of a subgrade by depth boundaries.

Create plines to transition to subgrade templates.

Export Quantm special zones .SZA

Create a coordinate table.

Label batter with block showing direction of slope.

Import Quantm terrain data.

Export Quantm terrain data.

Locate images by world files (.TFW, .JGW, .PDW or .WLD).

Copy roadway templates to stations| chainages.

Define regions by tracing inside or outside selected plines, sets or text.

Set default text style using the command line.

Export a set to Trimble .TTA and .TTX.

Create the swept path of a vehicle.

Adjust text aspect to right alignment.

Export or report selected text.

Export files to Leica UMC 3D Machine Control.

Break sets and plines into segments.

Delete selected registered VALs.

Create a pline VAL from a registered vertical alignment with offsets.

Import Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).

Export Geocomp vertical alignment .VER (.VER).

Change tunnel wrap status of a layer.

Create or replace xlines with chainage labels on a roadway.

Import LandXML points and parcels.

Export roadjob in LandXML format.

Create a set at the intersection of slopes from two segments.

List Geodimeter directory and delete files.

Transform ASCII coordinate files.

Measure bearing and distance.

Report measured values from objects.

Establish the GPS geodetic system.

Geodimeter File Editor.

Raise low points where triangles are steep.

Export GeoNav details.

Import GeoNav details.

Report areas of golf course fairways, greens, bunkers and tees.

Export points to Topografix/Mapsource GPS eXchange Format (.GPX).

Export files to Leica GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders and dozers.

Generate a grid of points, interpolate elevations from a DTM and generate a report.

Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.

Create a grid of points or plines using grid settings.

Transform from grid to ground or ground to grid.

Configure current grid settings.

Compute the cut and fill volume in selected grid cells.

Change the name of each object to match its group.

Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format.

Geocomp Systems Support web page.

Geodimeter Software Tools.

Create a horizontal alignment by entering curves into a table.

Manage registered horizontal alignments.

Report horizontal and vertical alignments.

Create set by three offsets from a set.

Compute the area of a basin.

Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries.

Hatch the region enclosed by selected objects.

Hatch regions within closed boundaries with a pre-defined hatch pattern.

Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries with a user-defined hatch pattern.

Design a haul road.

List basin hydrograph.

Calculate curve number for a basin.

Hydrology cover sheet.

Hydrology default settings.

Hydrographic Data Management System.

About HDMS.

HDMS data binning.

Colour by depth.

Contour by depth.

Compare sounding lines.

Create a grid of blocks coloured by depth.

Label depths.

Label and clash depths.

Label survey events.

Smooth a DTM surface.

Label hydrographic runlines.

Round, truncate or restore depths.

Adjust sounding time.

Label trackplots.

Draw hydrographs.

Show elevation differences with colours

Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

Help for GeoCalc 4.20.

Help for Geodimeter File Editor.

Help for Import-Export.

Help for Raw data editor.

Help for Terramodel.

Help for Toolbox.

Help for Visualizer.

Help for 3D Visualizer.

Generate basin hydrographs.

Import GeoNav .GPT depths.

Hide or reveal a set segment.

List hydrographs.

HYDROpro NavEdit.

Register one horizontal alignment.

List reach hydrographs.

Route hydrographs through a pond.

Route hydrographs through a reach.

Import HYDROpro .HPT depths.

Report properties of the selected object.

Report a deflection angle between two bearings or three locations.

Display the station | chainage and offset.

Display only objects in the same group.

Create points at intersections of selected lines.

Make layer list visible.

Image manager.

Change file locations for Image Manager.

Island manager.

Download or import survey data using a script.

Import Geocomp Cross Sections (.CES).

Import script manager.

Import cross sections into a Roadway.

Create text from incrementing numbers.

Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files.

Insert elevations from text into sets.

Report which sets use a point.

Create sets with elevations interpolated or extrapolated from specified points.

Interpolate elevations between contours.

Modify elevations of points with name "tm_2d".

Insert points into a set.

Design irrigation bays.

Enter elevations on irrigation bay grid point elevations.

Generate grid of irrigation bay points.

Create an irrigation bay results table.

Report drain or channel grades and widths.

Compute parameters for trapezoidal channel flow.

Generate a single DTM from multiple irrigation bays.

Compute haul distance for a irrigation bay design.

Set or edit irrigation bay text attributes.

Generate irrigation bay tables and reports.

Recalculate totals in irrigation bays results table.

Traffic island template editor.

Convert a Geodimeter job file to a Geodimeter raw data file.

Reverse-engineer Geodimeter job file from points.

Join plines or sets with common ends.

Close gaps in contours and join.

Join pairs of text records together.

Import data from Keays transfer (TR?) files.

Export data to Keays transfer (TR1) files.

Export DTM layer to Kork format.

Suffix point names with deflection angles.

Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set.

Label segment with radius as text along.

Label contour plines with text.

Label a closed pline with coordinates.

Label horizontal alignment intersection points.

Label horizontal alignments with names in plotboxes.

Change lot area labels to show alternative area.

Label points with offset text.

Label intersection points

Label points with point labels and symbols.

Label a registered horizontal alignment with intersection points

Label a registered vertical alignment with intersection points

Label set segments with dimensions.

Label sets with lot number and area.

Label a station | chainage using text with a leader line.

Create a table of attribute text for dimensions of short segments in selected sets.

Label a vertical alignment.

Label the grade or distance between points.

Label points with EAT text.

Label selected points with EAT text showing point number, elevation or name.

Create a surface of troughs.

Change the name of points, sets and plines to match their layers.

Select the current layer from the toolbar.

Rename layers, colours or linetypes based on .map file.

Create a new layer.

Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order.

Create and edit layers and their visibility and selectability.

Set visibility of layers.

List summary information by layer for selected points.

Organise layer multiple lists.

Make only layers in selected objects or layerlist visible or invisible.

Create parallel sets for subdivisions.

Enter 3D sets from plans.

Relayer and colour selected objects based on the first four characters in the name.

Report coordinates.

Modify layer, colour and name.

Add or edit three-wire level loop attributes.

Report level loops.

Add or edit single wire level (stadia) loop attributes.

Import gridded ASCII lidar data.

Import ASCII lidar data.

Export points to ASCII lidar data.

Evenly space points where coordinates are wrong.

Modify linetype.

Load or purge linetype definitions.

Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar.

Draw samples of all loaded linetypes.

Modify linetype to Bylayer.

Configure DTM links.

Toggle on or off the DTM link display.

List information about objects.

List plines and sets and their curves.

List and create a table of loaded fonts.

List groups used by selected objects.

List geometry of lots

List as-constructed pipe data.

List reference files.

List text objects.

Report the number of objects on each layer.

Assign a layer list to multiple dynaviews

Create and edit layer lists.

Create a table showing the block, lot, area and % area of lots.

Layer list report

Create a coordinate table of points including latitudes and longitudes.

Change the linetype of the current layer.

Load or reload an attribute definition file (.ADF).

Change the line colour of the current layer.

List details of selected objects.

Create closed sets from sets or plines enclosing selected text.

List details of selected plines.

List the coordinates of the selected points.

Change the default colour for new points on the current layer.

List the coordinates and radiations of the selected points.

Label long sections in Geocomp-style.

Label long sections in United Kingdom-style.

List names and point numbers of sets

List the unused point numbers within the specified point number range.

Label one vertical curve.

Add or remove layer name prefix.

Play a keystroke macro.

Record a keystroke macro.

Magnify the view scale by a factor.

Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS data.

Import Magellan GPS data.

Export Magellan GPS data.

Import MapInfo .MIF and .MID files.

Export MapInfo .MIF files.

Create sets from point names using MAP file.

Scale an exploded masshaul diagram.

Create a masshaul diagram.

Masshaul import and export locations.

Modify objects by matching properties of a another object.

Modify objects to match properties of a picked object.

Material manager.

Create a matrix of copies of selected objects.

Import MDL ALS *.CDU data.

Configure measurement units.

Configure the menus.

Merge two DTMs.

Toggle on or off the message scroll.

Label and report slopes at triangle centroids.

Import a cut|fill volume report for mass haul analysis.

Install Microsoft Sans Serif Windows font.

Import a MineMap .SVY file.

Copy objects to a mirror image.

Mirror dynaviews about their Y axes.

Make an internal unit block.

Convert external blocks to internal blocks.

Display temporary vertex markers.

Import Survey, Design and Models from Moss GENIO data.

Create MOSS .MIN file from MOSS GENIO features.

Export Moss GENIO data.

Import terrain models from Moss GENIO data within a boundary.

Move objects to another location.

Move a pad DTM and report volumes.

Import Mincom Minescape grid data.

Move text leader line location.

Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes.

Create multiple copies of objects.

Create a Digital Terrain Model from multiple layers.

Create segments, or whole sets or plines, at repeated offsets.

Import MultiPlane RTK Survey or FieldLevel XML.

Create multiple dynaviews.

Import VAL from .MX report.

Modify the names of selected objects.

Change the layer of selected objects to match name.

Change lot names by text.

Change the case of names.

Rename points in selected sets to match set names.

Modify names of radius points.

Rename unnamed sets or points to match names.

Start a new Terramodel project.

Copy a roadway template to a station | chainage.

Change the current view mode to the next open view.

Modify the name of points to station | chainage.

Pipe node properties.

Draw a table of set or pline information

Nikon NS-95 Database Utility

Import NSW SCIMS report.

Import an NZGeoid .SID file

Group objects to a dynaview or sheet for ASAP.

Enable running snap modes.

Report vertical differences between obstructions.

Turn off selected objects.

Turn off all objects in selected views.

Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.

Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset from multiple sets.

Create set offset from previous set.

Create set at vertical perpendicular offset from a set.

Create pline or set at a horizontal offset from a segment.

Create plines or sets at a horizontal offset

Create plines or sets at a horizontal offset though a location.

Select points or radius points on selected sets.

Count the number of objects of each type in each view.

Count each type of record in each view to P3Pad.

Turn on selected objects.

Turn on all objects in selected views.

Turn on all objects in a selected group.

Open an existing project.

Generate an email containing a report of the currently attached dongle.

Print a report of the currently attached dongle.

Create circle from average radius and report offsets.

Make non-contourable points under overhangs.

Create cross sections from points along Xlines.

Roadline 2D Editor

Roadline 3D Editor

Create a rectangular set.

Create DTM from lots and text.

Lower all points in a pad by an increment.

Set the shift value used in PADUP and PADDOWN.

Raise all points in a pad by an increment.

Select the current palette and colourmap.

Move a location on a view to another cursor position.

Create a parabola.

Create parking bays

Copy from a reference project.

Phase editor.

Phase manager.

Edit phase names.

Import photo coordinates.

Create point in a set where it crosses another line.

Pipe properties.

Import pipe survey attributes from a CSV file.

Create pipes from pipe survey attributes.

Break a pipe set into two pipes at a point.

Edit pipe and node elevations.

Compute flow rate.

Create a pipe chart.

Draw all pipes.

Edit default pipe and node settings.

Delete a segment from a pipe set with Asset_ID attributes.

Draw a pipe branch.

Design a pipe branch.

List pipe attributes.

Report dimensions and cover of a pipe set.

Join pipes with Asset_ID.

List pipe branches.

List pipe branches.

Pipe and node label default settings.

List large pipes.

List small pipes.

Label pipes at obstructions.

Enter the flow rate for a pipe.

Report pipe survey attributes for selected sets.

Report the results for the pipe or node.

Scale pipe flow rate Q for nodes.

Solve the design of selected pipe branches.

Pipe summary report.

Swap pipe Asset_ID attribute with String_No.

Modify pipe velocities.

List pipe water surface profile.

Create points at pipe welds from alignment and survey.

Draw pipes that cross the alignment.

Plan settings for Automatic Sheet Assembly and Production.

Export points and sets to Leica 1200 database files

Display Plan and Profile views, tiled horizontally.

Display Plan and Sheet views, tiled vertically.

Balance cut or fill volumes to many design DTMs.

Create a pline

Filter excess vertices from straights in plines.

Display only plines with no names.

Plot a plan to a printer.

Create pline plotbox in sheet units.

Plot parameter settings.

Create plotter configurations.

Modify the elevation and colour of contour plines.

Create a point.

Configure point numbering.

Create an n-sided regular polygon.

Pond definition from contours.

List pond data.

Define pond outlets.

Pond summary report.

Enter pond volume.

List points showing heights as depths.

Export files to Leica PowerGrade on UMC 3D Machine Control for graders.

Display Plan, Profile and Sheet views, tiled vertically.

Display Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views, tiled quarterly.

Display Plan, Profile and Xsect views, tiled vertically.

Display Plan, Profile, Xsect and Super views, tiled quarterly.

Divide a lot (a closed set) into multiple lots of predetermined area.

Display the previous view.

ASAP Project Data Management - Client data.

ASAP Project Data Management - General Information.

ASAP Project Data Management - Project location.

ASAP Project Data Management - Link text to data.

ASAP Project Data Management - Staff data.

Report the serial number and modules on the currently attached dongle.

Create profiles from masked DTM layers.

List and edit project variables.

Enter and view user information about a project file.

Enter and view survey information about a project file.

Plan Set Plotboxes

Plan Set Index

Plan Set Manager - ASAP

Plan Set Settings

Plan Set Sheet Assembly

Create surveyed points perpendicular to a horizontal alignment.

Plan Set Type - ASAP

Create points at the insertion point of selected 3D blocks.

Change the case of alpha point numbers.

Report chainage |station, offset and elevation at xlines.

Create a catchment boundary around a point.

Select points inside or outside closed objects.

Join selected points by sequential point number.

Edit point label blocks.

Relayer and recolour points by name and mapping file.

Create points for testing AutoDraft.

Create a boundary around points.

Rename points to match their point numbers.

Copy points from plan to profile view relative to a HAL.

Export a coordinate list.

Create a .TRV file from the selected points.

Replace feature attributes of sets with attributes of points.

Import point data from an ASCII file.

Modify elevation of a point by elevation or vertical angle.

Change elevation by distance and slope from a point.

Output points to an ASCII file.

Display Plan, Xsect, Profile and Super views, tiled quarterly.

Isolate or unisolate the current layer.

Display profiles between two locations.

Create a set by bearings and distances.

Import a Qsurv Grid .QDG file

Export a Qsurv Grid .QGD file.

Export Qsurv alignments and cross sections.

Quickly isolate or change the visibility of layers.

Move intersection point and recompute roadway volume.

Compute elevations by railway cant.

Report railway tracks at monument points.

Create offset alignments for a railway with cant.

List rainfall database.

List rainfall report totals.

Display and report the highest and lowest elevations within a boundary or along a set.

Import Carlson .RW5 survey file.

Create a table of arc properties.

Select the road design criteria.

Road design settings.

Raw data editor.

Road job workflow guide.

Import a Caice alignment file.

Road DTM Settings.

Report roadjob data.

Import a Geopak alignment from RDS.

Edit roadway vertical alignment design criteria.

Edit a vertical alignment by design criteria.

Create cross section plots in the sheet view from a roadjob.

Create cross sections plots in a Geocomp style.

Create Xlines along a road alignment.

Define reach parameters.

Add ATTRIB values from a Trimble .DC file and add to point names.

Replace segments in a set with a single segment

Recentre the window of the active view.

Restore the most recent changes made by Undo.

Refresh the display of the active view window.

Refer selected objects to a parent/reference object.

Add reference files.

Change the paths of reference project files.

Reference file manager.

Register multiple alignments.

Change groups to match layer names.

Relayer selected objects.

Relayer selected sets or plines if they are closed.

Relayer objects to the layers of their reference objects.

Remove DTM links

Remove edge and diagonal segments joining a square grid of points.

Renumber individual points.

Renumber selected points.

Renumber lots.

Renumber records to display over other records.

Report bearings and distances of set segments.

User-defined reports.

Solve a 3-point resection problem.

Import Reson ASCII depths.

Create table of arc properties.

Create a kerb return elevation table.

Reveal all hidden segments of selected sets.

Reverse the direction.

Move objects from one view to another.

Reverse record numbers.

Reference Guide.

Create a rainfall graph.

Link objects to photos and text for a golf course using attributes.

Round corners (vertices) of a pline.

Import descriptions of road jobs.

Create a DTM from any surface in the roadway cross-sections.

Road design editor display grid

Road Job Manager

Report road jobs.

Road materials.

Create profiles from road job surfaces.

Create roadjobs from registered HALs.

Roadway report.

Export alignment or road strings to Leica RoadRunner or iCON.

String points created from road cross sections.

Define Significant Points in a roadjob.

Report roadway details at a location.

Roadway manager.

Rotate around a specified point.

Rotate points in 3D using three pairs of points.

Recentre display.

Rotate, translate and scale.

Open an external file.

Save current project.

Save current project with a new name.

Multiply eastings and northings by scale factors.

Multiply elevations by a scale factor.

Mass haul diagram grid settings.

Create a NSW SCIMS table.

Scale blocks by a factor or set colour mapping, Auto Scaling, AutoRotation and dynaview clipping.

Scale closed plines by a factor.

Import a Trimble SCS900 record.txt or CSV file.

Export a roadway to Trimble SCS900.

Insert or edit a set curve.

Search settings

Segment editor.

Select objects by feature attribute value.

Select objects by group number.

Select points not in sets.

Install Sentinel System Driver 7.6.0.

Remove all Sentinel drivers.

Sentinel Advanced Medic.

Create a set

Add points and elevations to breaklines.

Create a pline profile of the selected set.

Create parallel profiles.

Create roadjobs from sets.

Re-engineer Geodimeter .JOB data from sets.

Create a .TRV traverse file.

Create a closed set and report the area between two sets.

Set the current layer by picking an object.

Report distances between two sets at an interval along a HAL.

Filter excess points from straights in sets.

Set the group to the next group.

Label sets with name.

Display only sets with no names.

Create 3D sets at multiple offsets.

Modify the contour smoothness of sets and define dead regions.

Set the beginning station | start chainage at a location.

Create sewer block controls for lots.

Create a DTM surface in-between two DTMs.

Set the group of objects from a list.

Shade DTM triangles by elevation ranges.

Shade two DTMs or one isopach surface by isopach ranges.

Colour points by elevation ranges.

Shade triangles by slope ranges.

Compute the limit of shadows.

Shape Editor

Shape class manager

Shape manager

Create sets from selected roadway shapes.

Relayer digitized cross sections into XSect view.

Show the direction of sets or plines.

Show the direction of set and plines and reverse if needed.

Show objects on dynaview layers.

Create side slopes from an alignment.

Create vehicular sight lines for a road design.

Import Paydirt SiteWork data.

Transfer data from SiteWork to Terramodel

Export Paydirt SiteWork data.

Transfer data from Terramodel to SiteWork

Add SiteWork button to Terramodel toolbar

Skip manager.

Interpolate batter (tie) points on a DTM given HAL, VAL and side slopes.

Create splined plines.

Create a boundary around a slope range.

Slope alignment manager.

Subgrade manager.

Create smoke duct mounting points.

Create simple one-template roads or channels.

Define simple road template attributes.

Toggle snapability of a specified layer.

Configure the cursor snap settings for the eight view modes.

Find and replace characters in names or point numbers.

Find and replace text in an external file.

Create soil nail sets.

Sort sets by name.

Check spelling of text.

Cut splay corners into lots.

Spline plines.

Split closed sets into smaller closed sets.

Report DTM elevation at a location.

Install MS Sans Serif Windows font.

Report angles, distances and coordinates from a station.

Compare staked (as-built) to design.

Report roadway staking.

Configure chainage or station notation.

Import STAR*NET .TER file.

Set the beginning station of a horizontal alignment pline.

Toggle on or off the visibility of the status bar display below the command line.

Create single line text.

Copy cross sections to road layer.

Create linework from a stream of locations.

Strip null characters from a file.

Text style settings.

Subgrade editor.

Create an azimuth based on star or sun shots.

Superelevation editor.

Superelevation diagram.

Report your GPS location.

Surface manager.

Report the cut and fill surface areas in a road job.

Export a Surpac .STR string file.

Import Surpac .STR text string file.

Export Carlson SurvCE CL, PRO and SCT files for machine control.

Export Moss GENIO data to Trimble Survey Controller.

Open or change state of a view.

Modify colour of points where slopes are steep.

Replace symbols with blocks.

Configure Terramodel system variables.

Configure a digitizer tablet.

Create a tailings beach.

Create a set at a tangent to one or two circles.

Drill hole and blast pattern layout.

Tile drainage.

TDS Survey Link DC.

Trimble Data Transfer Utility.

Template editor.

Create a text object.

Create points at insertion points of text or blocks.

Create a point with the elevation from a text object.

Align text objects in X or Y.

Create text along a selected set or pline.

Draw an arrow with text inside.

Hatch text background.

Change the case of selected text.

Modify the direction of text objects.

Adjust the aspect ratio of selected text.

Import text at chainage | station.

Change the font, rotation, orientation, height, justification, slant and aspect ratio of text objects.

Round selected bearings and distances for cadastral plans.

Change the rotation angle of selected text.

Change the current text style.

Swap the text between two text records .

Modify multi-line text to fit width.

Tile views centred by chainage.

Tile the open views horizontally.

Tile the open views vertically.

Template manager.

Add C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ folder to TSP.

Link Terramodel with a Microsoft Access database.

Open the installed TML list.

Import a Terramodel eXchange (.TMX) file.

Export layers to a Terramodel eXchange (.TMX) file.

Export objects to a Terramodel eXchange (.TMX) file.

Toggle display of DTM links.

Toggle display of quick contours.

Toggle display of triangle slopes.

Create or edit toolboxes.

Pipeline project variables.

Create HAL and VAL sets from HAL and VAL plines.

Create 3D pipes using HAL and VAL sets.

Report on 3D pipes.

Place airvalve blocks on pipes.

Create obstructions in profile view.

Display and edit pipe node design information.

Recentre plan and profile view based on chainage.

Create long section plots of pipeline.

Export to TPSetout formats.

Export to TPStakeout formats.

Create a set bounded by selected lines.

Enter points by 2D Traverse or Radiation.

Enter points by 3D traverse or radiation.

Enter a pline by traverse or radiation.

Traverse with ellipsoidal distances.

Trim a line or arc.

Calculate solutions of a triangle.

Swap links in adjacent triangles.

Export a Trimble gridded DTM (.DTX) file.

Export a roadway to Trimble .TTA or .TTX.

Export a DTM layer to a Trimble (.TTM) file.

Report a set or pline segment length with an applied scale factor.

Terramodel search path browser.

Modify text to show changed differences between segment points.

Export Trimble TTX cross section file.

Unwrap a Tunnel.

Visualizer.

Create a curve from two points and a line.

Import text from a file.

Export selected text to an ASCII file.

Match elevation of text to point.

Modify the size of selected text.

Swap the text between two text records with control of location, rotation and subject.

User Guide.

Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road.

Undo changes.

Reveal all hidden segments of selected sets.

Insert blocks graphically by 1, 2 or 3 locations.

Configure modes for entry and reporting of dimensions, precision and labelling.

Update Terramodel.

Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules.

Modify objects imported from MicroStation 7 to look like objects imported from GENIO.

Create a vertical alignment by entering curves into a table.

Shift intersection points in a vertical alignment.

Manage registered vertical alignments.

List, edit, export and import project variables.

Insert points of constantly varying offset from a selected alignment.

Close the active view.

Register one vertical alignment.

Create cross sections from cross section plots.

Turn on or off objects inside or outside the field of view.

Rotate the display of the active plan view.

Specify the plan view scale.

View settings.

Toggle visibility of a specified layer.

Maximise the active view window.

Minimise the active view window.

Open a new view window.

Pan or zoom by keypad with North = 1.

Recall a saved view.

Restore a view.

Import Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) .wrl data

Export Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) .wrl data

Save views.

Create a pline given a DTM, a slope and a starting location.

Import data from Wescom software.

Open WordPad editor.

Adjust the right margin of multi-line text objects.

Create a boundary around Xlines.

Create Xlines along alignments.

Create Xlines of points near HAL.

Create AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file from .XML.

Export cross sections from DTM.

Digitize cross sections.

Add, edit or delete cross-sections.

Cross section manager.

Turn on points with active chainage | station.

Report the 3D length of cross sections.

Create cross section plots in the sheet view from an alignment and layers.

Create cross section plots in Geocomp-style.

Create sets at top or bottom of road.

Label obstructions on cross section plots.

Export cross sections from points.

Report surface areas of a road job to a CSV.

Define walls for Visualizer.

Report volume of all roadway materials to a spreadsheet.

Zoom in by 2x.

Zoom out by 2x.

Zoom in by window.

Zoom the active view to an approximate scale.

Options

Settings

Options

Functions

Example

Common problems rendering 3D views

Help

Other names

TV

Dialog

ODA

Versions

To use ACADCONV

Options

Logos

Operation

How to adjust a lot

Notes

Differences with PREDAREA

Method

Layer

Notes

Prepare an N-values grid

Settings

Downloads

GGF

Commands that use N-values

Introduction

Creating a Configuration File

Notes

Dialog

Unknown features

Passing a Parameter from a Field Code

Groups

Error messages

To use AutoSave

Dialog

Dialog

Curve types

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Map file format

Dialog

Block notes

Named plotboxes

Options

The list of carousels

Pen definition

Vector plotters

Raster plotters

Vector plot files on raster plotters

TMODWIN.INI

Dialog

To create a kerb return,

Station and chainage

Options

Examples

Options

Examples

Special cases

Dialog

Notes

Alternative ways to clip

Operation

Installation

Bands of colour

Reduce the number of contours

Ribbon effect

Change Index contour

Operation

Installation

Labeling

Line construction

Layer assignment

OK or Cancel

Functions

Convert Options

Tips on using Convert

Dialog

Notes

Define a Coordinate System, Ellipsoid or Datum.

Commands that transform coordinates using the same database

Commands that use other transformation systems

Coordinate Scroll Options

Coordinate Scroll tips

Options

Tips

Dialog

Crow's foot settings

Use Coordinate System Manager to

Installation

CURRENT.CSD

Some examples of Coordinate System Manager versions

GeoSys

Dialog

Construction Staking Format File

.CSV

.MAP

Create layers

Process

Defaults

Settings

Dialog

Cursor modes

Command line

Function keys

Dialog

Dialog

Restrictions

Dialog

Notes

Distance-Distance Options

Dialog

Dialog

Design settings

Options

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

View resolution

USGS DLG-O Header and Data Records

To use DLGDOIN

DLG Rules

To use DLGDOOUT

Draft settings

Dialog

Options

Report columns

Dialog

Dialog

For example

Prefixes

Map file

Changing layer names when importing

Changing layer names when exporting

TrimbleName

Duplicate coordinates

Length limits

Character limits.

ACADCONV

Report

Dynaview creation

Dynaview editing

Dialog

Tips

Dialog

Curve Corrections

Sets

Plines

Text

Blocks

Dynaviews

Points

Tables

View settings

Terramodel Search Path

Fix Status Bar / System, etc.

Copy and backup

Import sections from an old INI file.

Remove sections from TMODWIN.INI.

Palette, colourmap, penmap and carousel

Location of TMODWIN.INI

SlopeTable

Dialog

Map properties

Dialog

Exploding blocks

Survey formats

Scripts

ESRI shapefiles (.SHP)

LandXML (.XML)

Trimble

.DWG and .DXF

LandXML

MicroStation .DGN

Dialog

Instrument/data collector

Turning scripts on and off

Creating Scripts

Remote Device Manager

Output file format

Script tabs

ASCII

AutoCAD

MicroStation V7

SDMS

Dialog

Procedure

The steps are:

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Notes

File selection

Options

.12DA and .12DAZ files

TINs

Alignments

Other notes

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Import a grid

Options and Settings

Notes

Duplicate points

Dialog

Select the alignment and strings and control the output

Roadway

Dialog

Possible uses

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Reports

Tolerances

Differences

Extents

Dialog

Report

Notes

Assumptions

Assumptions

Assumptions

Assumptions

Assumptions

Method

Slope table

Dead regions

Method

Slope table

Dead regions

Method

Method

Options

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Station or Chainage

Fields

Dialog

Chainage or station

Fields

Dialog

Chainage or station

Dialog

Dialog

Slope ranges

Dialog

Usage

Duplicate points

Report

Same height and same layer

Move

Repeat

Plines

Dialog

To insert a block graphically

Dialog

Scaling

Dialog

What GCBLKFIX does

Notes

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Notes

Define a Coordinate System, Ellipsoid or Datum.

Commands that transform coordinates using the same database

Commands that use other transformation systems

Dialog

Notes

Columns

Dialog

Blocks, colours and linetypes

Dialog

Dialog

DTM Edge

Pt Pt

Notes

Dialog

ESRI DEM file format

Exploding blocks

Dialog

Flow paths

To show discrete flow paths

To show the whole surface drainage network

To show catchment boundaries

Linetypes

Sets

Plines

Closed figures

Dialog

Create Grids/Regions

Settings

Use Shrink/Swell factors

Compute Volumes

Method

Dialog

Dialog

Report format

Version information

Location of Tmodwin.ini

Terramodel Search Path (TSP)

Terramodel Prototype file

Terramodel Project Units, Sheet Units, Workspace and Menu

Environmental Variable and Net Lock

Modules on Key

Link buttons

Dialog

Geocomp DOS

Import .Pts .Str .Lto .Hal .Ver .Ant .Dmn Files

Data Collector Interface

Downloading from the Data Collector or Instrument to DOS Data Collector Interface

Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using the DOS Data Collector Interface

Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using other uploading software such as Geodimeter Software Tools or SokkiaComms.

Transfer survey data to and from Trimble instruments and Terramodel.

Dialog

Examples

Operation

Export to Google Earth

Settings

Point icons

Fill inside boundaries

.KMZ

Export to Web Map Services

Notes

Use Google Earth images in Terramodel

Dialog

.LAZ files

LAS extents

.LAS points

Limits

Filter points to fewer than [ ] points

Filter Points to Grid Interval [ ]

Notes

Settings

Multiple boundaries

Method

Notes

DXF

LAYERMAP

Dialog

Dialog

Options

Usage

NearLine select control

Notes

Selecting 2D objects by elevation range

Options

Usage

OfLine select control

To use GCONECON

Note

Dialog

Other Geocomp data types that can be exported:

Supported plotter commands

Unsupported plotter commands

Notes

Notes for Geocomp DOS users

To use Terramodel as a Windows plotter for Geocomp DOS

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Source formats include:

Sample data

Dialog

Target formats include

Dialog

Options

Dialog

Tips

Examples

Dialog

Dialog

To use GCSTRATA

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Some examples

Dialog

Notes

Selection

Export settings

Alternative ways to create .XML

Options

Features

Examples of supported mapping systems

Some of the predefined spheroids

File Formats

Installation

Dialog

Dialog

Operation

Dialog

Horizontal Alignment Data Entry

Types

Chainage | Station Equations

Offset alignments

Dialog

Hatch regions

TMODEL.PAT

Load a hatch pattern

Edit hatch patterns

Scrambled hatches

Watershed surfaces

Options

Method

Defaults

Options

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Hydrology Calculation Methods

Options

2 Line

3 Point

ImageManager table

Notes

Memory Usage

List of Island templates

Dialog

Survey formats

Scripts

Script appears to lock up Terramodel

View file contents

ASCII points

Duplicate points

AutoDraft

Terramodel project files (.PRO)

Trimble

ESRI shapefiles

.XML files

.TTM files

.RDE files

.DWG and .DXF files

MicroStation .DGN files

USGS .DEM

Dialog

Turning scripts on and off

Creating Scripts

Instrument/data collector

Remote Device Manager

Source file format

Script tabs

ASCII points

AutoCAD .DWG and .DXF

ESRI Shape file

Landscape

LandXML - XML

MicroStation V7

Raw survey data

Roading 3D (dc)

Roadline (aln)

Roadline 3D (rln)

TDS (job)

TDS's Road layout (rd5 and tp5)

Terramodel (pro)

Trimble DTM - TTM

USGS digital elevation model

To import Cross Sections from a file.

To import Cross Sections from a Geocomp .CES file.

To create a Roadway from strings in the plan view.

To create a Roadway from Points in the plan view.

To import points without a roadway.

Standard channel report

Standard drain report

Enhanced drain report

Related commands

To Create an Island

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Settings

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Tips

Dialog

Settings

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Included labels

Point label settings

Dialog

Select the current layer

Create a new layer and make it current

Notes

Prompts

Run Excel

Command line

Toolbox

Other uses

Dialog

Report columns

Dialog

Settings

Grid spacing

Intensity

Operation

Formats

Load

Purge

Done

Notes

Link settings

Report styles

Layer lists

Layer list dialog

Background prominence

Dialog

Notes

Options

Operation

Profiles

PlotBoxes

Label profiles as Design

Help

Label

Active alignment

Multiple scales

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Tips

Example

Dialog

Mass Haul Diagram

Method

Mass Haul Diagram Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Prototype

Project units

Sheet units

Convert units

Scaling

Menu configuration file

Default menu configuration files

Geocomp Update menu configuration files

Editing configuration and initialisation files

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Mapping files

MOSS Workspace

MOSS GENIO Field Codes

Points

MOSS 2D Strings

MOSS 3D Strings

MOSS 6D Strings

Options

.MIN file format

MOSS Export Map File Fields

MOSS Field Codes

Survey Data

Points

Text

Sets with Straight Line Segments

Sets with Arcs

Plines without curves

Splines

Plines forming a HAL or VAL

Export Map File (*.MSX)

Notes and limitations

Multiple field codes

To prefix field codes

Define a multi-layer DTM

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Options

The NS-95 Menu

NS95 Command line parameters

To prepare NS95 with no Geocomp Update

Prepare an N-values grid

Settings

Downloads

Commands that use N-values

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

RGB triplets

Background colours

Editing colours

Remove a palette or colourmap

Default colours

Options

Dialog

To copy objects from a source project into the active project

PCOPY's behavior in specific instances

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Shading patterns

Dialog

Pipe design entry table

Pipe types and sizes

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Pipe Defaults

Store a Rainfall Database

.RNF file format

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

PipeSolve

Dialog

View flow rates

Dialog

Results

Velocity

Average velocity

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Plot Options

Windows printer

PDF printer

HP-GL and HPGL/2 vector plotters

Dialog

Settings

Notes

Dialog

Rectangular Weir

Circular Standpipe

Cippoletti Weir

Broad-crested Weir

Trapezoidal channel

Circular orifice

User Defined Outlet Device

Vee-Notch Weir

Trapezoidal Broad-crested Weir

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Differences with ADJAREA

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Plan Set Management Options

Configuration Settings

Sheet Assembly

Notes

Instrument

Ground

Stadia

Sheet type

Dialog

Dialog

Create or edit a point label block

For example

Dialog

Method

Formats

Sample data

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Method

Dialog

Dialog

Tips

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Method

Notes

Procedure

Dialog

Dialog

RDE Features

Lost RDE window

.RDE files

More details

Workflow within RDGUIDE

Also

Foundations

How parts of a road job relate to each other

Import

Dialog

Dialog

Method

Dialog

Dialog

Method

Dialog

Properties of Xlines

Estimating K and X Values

Dialog

For example

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

General guidelines

Working with reference files

Locking and unlocking reference files

Dialog

Notes

Sort

Notes

Dialog

Customize Report Definition Files

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Settings

Dialog

Dialog

To use

Output file name and location

Notes

Road

HAL

Special

Skip

Edit...

Delete...

Dialog

EAT code scaling

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Summary

SCS900 Data Exchange - First Time Setup

Set up the SCS900 Export Script

Site and Design maps

Work orders

Design surface and underlying surface

Dialog

Synchronization folder structure for SCS900 Data

Dialog

Segment Editor

Dialog

Segment Editor

Dialog

Create a Set

Other ways to set the current layer

Dialog

Related commands

Setting smoothness

Dialog

Options

Options

Options

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Notes

Shape editor display

Shape editor functions

Segments tab

Properties tab

Shape Class Types

Dialog

Median shapes

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Select Alignments

Settings

General tab

Region tab

Surface definition tab

Offset Line tab

Left and Right side slope projection tabs

Dialog

Tips

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Tips

Dialog

Tips

Snap settings

Dialog

Simple example

EAT codes

ASCII values

ASCII codes

Dialog

Tips

Dialog

Station and chainage

Dialog

Dialog

Orientation

Dialog

Open data file

Stellar data

Observations

Tips

The STAR.INP File Format

Dialog

Auto-compute the superelevation requirements

Superelevation runoff and tangent runout

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

AutoDraft method

Entity file method

Dialog

Notes

Examples

Operation

Dialog

Button Map Files

Screen Areas

Tablet Menus

Menu Cells

Method

EAT Code Insertion Aid

Embedded Attribute Text (EAT) Codes

EAT code footnotes

Dialog

Dialog

Format

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

Notes

Toolbox Help

Workspace menu

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

EDITINI

Dialog

Notes

Dialog

To insert a block graphically

Dialog

Scaling

Units settings

Notes

Dialog

Vertical Alignment Data Entry

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

Arguments

Default for point labels

The default view modes

View settings

Method

Dialog

Properties of Xlines

Dialog

Process

Defaults

Dialog

Dialog

Dialog

RDX

Options

Add block

Notes

Dialog

To define walls

Create a colour-coded orthographic image and add to Image manager

3D Visualiser appears to lock up

A 3D Visualizer window is minimized

A new window is opened with a white background, but no image is ever rendered

A new window is opened with a white background, but the image takes up to an hour to render

An image is rendered in a new window with a black background, but is not what you expected

Products on Key

Standardising

Field Codes

Configuration File

Advanced Features

Using Global Codes to Modify the Feature Code

Recommended view resolution values

Scripts and commands

Script options

3D Faces

Missing Browse button

Layer names

Dialog

Dialog

Tabs for common script pages

Dialog

AutoCAD Conversion mapping files

Colours

Linetypes

Fonts

Templates

For Trimble surveys:

For Leica surveys:

For data coded by name:

For data coded by point number:

For 12D Field surveys:

Create rectangular regions at a location

Create rectangular regions inside a Box

Create Regions using active alignment and Xlines

Reuse existing regions

Lat-Long

Define a boundary inside complex data

Define a boundary outside complex data

Quickly hatch many regions

Compute many areas

Create closed subdivision lots

Create all subdivision lots from lot numbers

Determine an area excluding voids

Hatch except where there is text

Hatch closed contours or isopachs

Replace sets or plines with closed clockwise sets

SCS Method

Universal Rational Method

DeKalb Rational Method

Dialog

Scripts and commands

Script options

Contours, flat pads and duplicate points

Long layer names

Character substitution in layer names

Missing Browse button

Errors when importing .DWG or .DXF

Object Mapping from MicroStation to Terramodel

Dialog

Dialog

USGS Digital Elevation Model

Dialog

Tabs for common script pages

Dialog

Formats

Duplicate points, elevations and long layer names

Aliases

Missing Browse buttons

AutoCAD Conversion mapping files

Colours

Linetypes

Fonts

Profile Information

Displayed information

Additional boxes and Information

Civilsoft 1

Civilsoft 2

Leitz SDRMap

Geopak, Lewis & Lewis, LisCAD, TDS and Wildsoft

Total Station Data, GPS (RTK) Data and Level Data

Multiple data formats

Computation Levels

Data Modification with Interactive Editor

Computational Feedback

Enable Network-Wide File Locking

Opening a Project

Activating a Reference Project

File Locking examples

First section - Defaults

Second section - output

Cogo Reports Variable Definitions

Align CAD properties

Point at beginning of line/curve segment, Point 1:

Point at end of line/curve segment, Point 2:

Point at center of curve, Radius point "R":

Point at setup point:

Computed point along alignment, Point "A":

Line segment attributes:

Curve segment attributes:

Spiral segment attributes:

To create a new work order

Work order tasks

Work order tabs

Horizontal

Vertical

DTM Precision Settings

Breakline approximation of the Subject alignment

Side slope specification method

Hide lateral breaklines

Sideslope Configuration File

Side slope configuration file settings

Surface types

Offset Lines

Offset Line Configuration

Ramp Configuration

Star Names and Numbers

Rules

Method

To create a new screen area

Create a new tablet menu

Delete Tablet Menus

Guides

User-defined

Effect of Variations in CN on Direct Runoff

DeKalb Rational Dimensionless Hydrographs

As of 28 April 2023, commands on this list are available from Geocomp Systems. Most are TMLs that are included in our Geocomp Update Q for Terramodel 10.61. Some are also available from other sources.

Geocomp Update Q installs documents including manuals and this page. Open these documents through DOCUMENTS command. Open the local TML List through TMLLIST command. The local list has links to some local documents which cannot be opened from the current TML List on the Internet.

Select commands in Terramodel by menu, command line, toolbar, toolbox, macro or function key.

Most commands require a Terramodel licence with relevant modules and a corresponding hardware security key.

The colours on this list show whether each command has any significant changes since Geocomp Update P was released and whether supplied with every Terramodel, with the HDMS module, new with Geocomp Updates, improved with Geocomp Updates, or separately. Click on a command name to go to more Details below.
To get new or revised commands, Geocomp Update P or the whole of Terramodel, please check for updates or contact Geocomp Systems.

To find anything in this list, use Ctrl F.

COMMAND NAME	SUMMARY	CATEGORY
2DCON	Modify elevations of 2D contours	data prep
3D	Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments	alignment \| set
3DFILTER	Filter superfluous points from DTM	dtm
3DMCOUT	Export to Topcon 3D-MC MCA file	export
3DPIPE	Report 3D lengths and angles for sets	pipe general
3DROAD	Create a 3D set offset from roadjob alignments	alignment \| set
3DPL	Modify elevations of individual contours	data prep
3DPT	Create 3D points	data prep
3DVIEW	3D Visualiser	dtm
3DVISUALISER	3D Visualiser	dtm
3DVISUALIZER	3D Visualizer	dtm
ABBREVSET	Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display	set \| config \| view
ABOUT	Report Terramodel version number and modules	report \| config
ACADCONV	Convert .DWG or .DXF files to R2000 .DWG or R10 .DXF files	convert
ACTIVE	Set active alignment	alignment
ACTIVECHAINAGE	Set the active chainage	alignment
ACTIVESTATION	Set the active station	alignment
ADD2NAME	Add a prefix or suffix to names of points, plines and sets	name
ADD2PLIN	Add a new vertex into a pline	pline
ADD2PTNO	Add a prefix or suffix to point numbers	point
ADD2SET	Add a new point into a set	point \| set
ADD2TXT	Add a prefix or suffix to text	text
ADDIMAGE	Add an image located by pline boxes	image
ADDISO	Add an isopach depths to DTM points	dtm
ADDMAPSY	Add coordinate mapping systems	transform
ADDTIDES	Add tide heights to depths	hdms
ADDWACS	Replaced by ADDMAPSY	transform
ADJAREA	Move a reference line to meet a target area	pline \| set
AIRVALVE	Label a pipe with airvalve blocks	pipe general
ALIAS	Create, edit and delete aliases	config
ALIGNIMP	Import an alignment from an ASCII file	alignment
ALIGNOFF	Import alignment offsets from an ASCII file	alignment
ALIGNTXT	Align text to HAL	align \| text
ALL	Display extents	view
ALT	Enable menus for entry by keyboard	menu
ANG	Report angle-right between points	report
ARC	Draw pline arcs from any three parameters	set
ARC2P	Create a pline arc using two points and a radius	set
ARC2PSET	Create a set arc using two points and a radius	set
ARCBL	Create breaklines along all arcs on a layer	dtm \| set
ARCBREAK	Replace set arcs with points and chords	set
ARCENTRE	Toggle visibility of set arc centre points	toggle
ARCS	Replaced by ARC	set
AREA	Report the area of a closed figure	report
AREA2SET	Replaced by TRACEBDY	set
ARRANGE	Arrange icons of minimised views	view
ASAPIMAG	Add mastersheet images to plotboxes	image
ASCIIFORMAT	Configure ASCII points import or export format	config
ASHIN	Import an Ashtech points file	import
ASM01	Renumber points in chainage (or station) order	point
ASSETLAY	Relayer objects to match Asset_ID	feature attribute
ASSIGNZ	Modify elevation of contours by crossing pline	data prep
AUSGEOID	Import an AUSGeoid .DAT or .TXT file	import \| transform
AUTODRAFT	Create line, block and text features from field codes	survey
AUTOSAVE	Enable automatic saving of project files	config
AUTOSET	Create a clockwise set from points	set
AVERPTS	Compute average coordinates	report
AVGEND	Compute volumes by average end-area	report
BARRIER	Report on installation of pre-cast road barriers	report \| road
BASIN	Create, enter and edit basin parameters for a point	hydrology
BBEAR	Create a point at the intersection of two bearings	point
BCPIPEIN	Import a pipe survey from Business Center	pipe survey
BDIST	Create a point at the intersection of a bearing and an arc	point
BDYRELAY	Replaced by GCNEARLN	set
BEARTEXT	Adds a datum angle to bearing text	text
BENCH	Replaced by GCBENCH	set
BESTFIT	Replaced by BESTFITA	pline
BEST3FIT	Draw a set of best fit in 3D	set
BESTFITA	Draw a curve or plane of best fit	pline
BFITCURV	Draw an arc of best fit	pline
BFITLINE	Draw a line of best fit	pline
BGELEV	Copy points into an elevation view	view
BHEXTEND	Extend borehole DTMs	road \| dtm
BHIMPORT	Create multiple DTM layers from boreholes.	import \| dtm
BIGXMLIN	Import points from .XML files with long lines	import
BIN2IMG	Create a coloured image from depths	hdms
BL	Create breaklines	set
BLDG	Create plines with corners at right angles	set
BLFILTER	Filter excess points from breaklines	dtm \| set
BLINECHK	Check for crossing breaklines	set
BLKPTS	Place blocks at points relative to an alignment	block
BLKREAD	Replace an internal block with an external block	block
BLOCK	Create, place, list or purge blocks	block
BLOCKDIR	Modify direction of blocks	block
BLOCKLST	Create an array of blocks for a legend	block
BLUETOP	Bluetop report	report
BMAP	Replaced by BLKPTS	block
BOREHOLE	Import boreholes	import
BOX	Create a pline box by two corners	pline
BOXDYNA	Create pline boxes from dynaview extents	pline \| plot
BOXIMAGE	Add images located by named pline boxes	image
BRACKETS	Add parentheses to text	text
BREAK	Break a pline or set into two parts	pline \| set
BREAKVAL	Break a pline within a vertical curve	data prep
BUILDDTM	Modify elevation of contours by crossing pline	data prep
BUILDING	Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides	pline
CAGDRLX	Report Compute-A-Grade ditch	report
CALLOUT	Label objects with callout text	text
CAROUSEL	Configure plotter pen carousels	plot \| config
CASCADE	Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible	view
CASE	Replaced by TEXTCASE	text
CAT	Create a catenary curve in the profile view	pline
CDSPROF	Create initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return	alignment
CENTREV	Re-centre views based on active alignment	view \| alignment
CENVIEW	Re-centre views based on road alignment	view \| road
CF2SUPER	Create superelevation slope alignment from existing crossfall	alignment
CHAINAGE	Set the start chainage of a HAL	alignment
CHANGELOG	Report changes to Geocomp Update	report
CHECKATT	Check attributes	feature attribute
CHEKROAD	Check and correct roadway alignment registration	alignment
CHKRDDTM	Check road DTM and add breaklines across roads	road \| dtm
CHNGATTR	Replace selected attributes based on a dictionary	feature attribute
CHNGCOLR	Change colour ByLayer to colour by colour number	colour
CHNGHEIG	Change elevation by point name	elevation
CHNGNAME	Replace selected characters in names based on a dictionary	name
CHNGTEXT	Replace selected text based on a dictionary	text
CHOSDIFF	Report chainage, offset and height difference from DTM	report
CHTXT	Convert stationing text to chainage text	text
CIRCLE	Create a circular pline	pline
CLEANSET	Replaced by CLEANUP	set
CLEANUP	Remove superfluous points and vertices	set \| pline
CLEARMESS	Clear text from the message scroll display	display
CLIP	Clip plines or sets to closed boundaries.	pline \| set
CLIPOUT	Clip objects outside multiple boundaries.	pline \| set
CLOSE	Close the current project	file
CLOSEFIG	Close selected lines	set
CLS	See CLEARMESS	display
CMD	Open Windows command prompt	config
COLOR	Modify the color of selected objects	colour
COLORCODE	Color points relative to a tunnel design	colour
COLORCON	Colour contours by contour interval	colour
COLORPT	Colour points between contour intervals	colour
COLOUR	Modify the colour of selected objects	colour
COLOURCODE	Colour points relative to a tunnel design	colour
COLOURCON	See COLORCON	colour
COLRLINE	Modify colours and linetypes by layer	colour \| linetype
COMMAND	Bring up a command line	command
CommandToggle	Toggle the visibility of the command line	command
COMPASS	Place a compass rose	block
COMPGRID	Compactor grid settings	compactor
CONFORM	Report road thickness conformance	report
CONLABZ	Modify elevation of contours by labels	data prep
CONNECT	Connect two sets across a gap to form a single set	set
CONTENTS	Help Table of Contents	help
CONTOUR	Extract contour plines from a DTM	dtm
ContourAtElev	Create plines at a specified contour elevation	dtm
CONTOURSET	Configure contour interval	dtm \| config
CONTOURVOL	Compute volumes from contour plines	dtm
CONVDMS	Convert DMS to decimal degrees or decimal to DMS	transform
CONVERT	Convert sets to plines or plines to sets	set \| pline
CONVSET	Set slope convention	set
COORDCON	Convert between USA or UTM geodetic coordinate systems	transform
COORDS	Display the coordinate scroll	display
COPY	Copy selected objects	set \| pline
COPYROAD	Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob	road
COPYRWAY	Copy a roadway to a different roadjob	road
COPYTEMP	Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name	road
CORDSCRL	Recover a lost coordinate scroll	display
COUNT	Count the number of objects of each type in each view	report
CRDTABLE	Replaced by GCTABLE	text
CREATELL	Import layer lists and layers	import \| layer
CROSSCHK	Check for crossing sets or plines	set
CROWFOOT	Toggle arrow heads on segment text leader lines	toggle
CSM	Coordinate System Manager	config
CSTAKE	Report construction staking	report
CSV2ADC	Create AutoDraft Configuration file from .CSV	config
CSV2TAB	Create table of text from .CSV file	text
CCSATTIN	Replaced by FYATBIN	feature attribute
CSVATTEX	Report attribute names to a .CSV file	feature attribute
CTAB	Replaced by GCTABLE	text
CULDESAC	Create and draw a Cul-de-Sac	set
CURRENT	Select the current layer by object or list	layer
CURSOR	Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement	display
CURVE	Insert or edit a pline curve	alignment
CURVESOL	Compute arc properties	pline \| set
CUTFILL	Balance cut or fill volumes	dtm
CUTFILLA	Replaced by CUTFILL	dtm
CVD5EXPT	Export to Civilcad 5 .AS5	export
CVD5IMPT	Import from Civilcad 5 .AS5	import
CVDEXPT	Export to Civilcad 4 .ASC	export
CVDIMPT	Import from Civilcad 4 .ASC	import
CWISE	Reverse the direction of closed anticlockwise sets	drafting tools
DATAMINE	Import a Datamine binary file	import
DCEDIT	Trimble DC File Editor	import \| export
DDIST	Create a point at the intersection of two arcs or distances	point
DEADSETS	Show and create dead regions	dtm \| set
DECURVE	See CURVE	pline
DEFANG	Display angle between two bearings	report
DELARCS	Replaced by ARCBREAK	set
DELAYLST	Delete layer lists	layer
DELCROSS	Delete objects between two locations	delete
DELETE	Delete records	delete
DELETESEGMENT	Delete a segment	delete
DELNULTR	Delete null (dead) triangle sets	delete
DELTRIAN	Replaced by REMTRIS	set
DEMIN	An alias for an IMPORT script to import USGS .DEM files	import
DEPTHDTM	Create a depth surface from plines representing depths	dtm
DEPTHSUR	Depth surfaces	dtm
DESC	Change numeric names to alphanumeric	text
DESCAD	Change numeric names to alphanumeric with separator	text
DESIGN	Project batters from a design DTM	dtm
DESIGNELEV	Modify elevation to design roadway elevation	road
DESIGNSET	Configure design settings	config
DESPIKE	Remove spikes from a DTM	dtm
DESPLINE	See SPLINE	pline
DFEDIT	Data Format Editor	config
DIAG	Trimble diagnostic report	report
DIM	Dimension sets and plines	text \| report
DISJOIN	Break sets and plines into segments	set \| pline
DISP12DA	Display 12D model attributes	12d attribute
DISPFEAT	Display feature attributes	feature attribute
DISPLAYSET	Configure object display	display
DISTANCE	Report the distance between two locations	report
DIVIDE	Divide a line into intervals	point \| set \| pline
DLGDOIN	Import USGS DLG-O file	import
DLGDOOUT	Export USGS DLG-O file	export
DLINE	Dimension between two locations	text
DOCUMENTS	List Terramodel documents	help
DPAD	Replaced by MOVEPAD	set
DRAFTSET	Drafting settings	config
DRAG	Toggle dragging on or off	config
DRAGHDIN	Import Drag Head log file	import
DRAINRPT	Drainage detail report	report
DRAPE	Create sets where selected plines cross DTM links	dtm
DRILL01	Label a drill hole	text
DRNGRADE	Label a set segment of a drain with grade	pipe general
DRNVOLMS	Report volumes and areas of ponds in a DTM	report \| dtm
DTED	Import a DTED .DT1 file	import
DTM2LDBX	Export a DTM as Leica 1200 DBX database	export
DTM2XML	Export a DTM as LandXML	export
DTMALL	Relink all DTM layers and refresh	dtm
DTMAREA	Replaced by GC82	dtm \| report
DTMBYLL	Replaced by GCCOPY	dtm
DTMCH	Select the current DTM layer	dtm
DTMCONE	Create a cone from a point to a DTM	set
DTMDRAIN	Create sets around drainage areas	hydrology
DTMEDGE	Create a set around a DTM edge	dtm
DTMGRID	Interpolate a grid of points over a DTM	dtm
DTMINFO	Report which layers are linked for DTMs	dtm
DTMMATCH	Match overlapping DTMs	dtm
DTMMATH	Create points by comparison with two DTMs	dtm
DTMPTS	Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM	dtm
DTMSET	Create sets of triangle sides on a DTM	dtm
DTMSHOT	Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing	dtm
DTMSTATS	Report the highest and lowest elevations of points in a layer	report
DTMUPDT	Relink the current DTM layer and refresh	dtm
DTMVISTA	Project sets onto a DTM	dtm
DUMPATT	Report the attribute records stored for a selected object	attribute
DUPLTUS	Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets	set
DUPLTRIS	Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets	set
DWGIN	An alias for an IMPORT script to import .DWG files	import
DWGOUT	An alias for an EXPORT script to export .DWG files	export
DXF3D	Import elevations from .DXF files	import
DXFCHANG	Change the name of layers in a .DXF file	export \| import
DXFIN	An alias for an IMPORT script to import .DXF files	import
DXFOUT	An alias for an EXPORT script to export .DXF files	export
DYNAVIEW	Create a dynaview	plot
EARTHWORK	Compute volume of cut and fill between two DTMs	report
EARTHWRK	Report Roadway volumes by end-area	report
EDIT	Edit object	object
EDITINI	Edit initialisation file TMODWIN.INI	config
EFFICIEN	Haul road efficiency calculator	masshaul
ELBLK	Replaced by PTBLKS	point
ELE2NAME	Change name of objects to match their elevations	name
ELEVALONGSET	Set the elevation of points along a set	set
ELEVATION	Replaced by GCELEV	elevation
ELEVOBJS	Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from DTM	DTM
ELEVREFPLANE	Modify elevation of points by reference plane	elevation
ELEVREFPT	Modify elevation of points to reference point	elevation
ELFS	Elevation and grade from chainage	profile
ELLIPSE	Create an ellipse	pline
ELTXT	Replaced by TEXT2PNT	point \| text
ELVPLINE	Interpolate elevations onto contour plines	plines \|dtm
EMXSALIGN	Import a Geopak alignment from EMXS	import
ERRELIP	Add error ellipse attributes	ellipse attribute
ESRIIN	Import objects from ESRI shape files	import
ESRIOUT	Export objects to ESRI shape files	export
EVALDTM	Report problems with breakline formation	dtm
EXEC	Execute an external program	config
EXIT	Exit Terramodel	save
EXPLODE	Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes	block
EXPLORE	Open Windows Explorer	exec
EXPORT	Export or upload data using scripts	export
EXPORTGC	Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format	export
EXPORTSMGR	Export and upload script manager	export
EXPORTXS	Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format	export
EXTEND	Extend a pline or set to boundaries or a distance	pline \| set
F1	Help	help
F2	Create, edit and delete layers	layer
F3	Refresh the display of the active window	view
F4	Move the display to a new location	view
F5	Zoom in by window	view
F6	Zoom out by 2X	view
F7	Toggle point number labels on\|off	point label \| display
F8	Toggle symbol labels on\|off	point label \| display
F9	Toggle elevation labels on\|off	point label \| display
F10	Enable menus for entry by keyboard	menu
F11	Toggle point name labels on\|off	point label \| display
F12	Zoom to extents	view
FACTZ	Replaced by SCALEELV	transform
FAVORITES	Favorite commands	config
FBLOCK	Import ASCII point files by square regions	import
FCXOUT	Export Trimble feature code library (.FCX) from AutoDraft (.ADC)	export
FIELDD	Replaced by RDE	survey
FILLET	Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two segments	pline \| set
FILTER	Filter vertices in plines	pline
FILT3DPT	Filter duplicate points by 3D tolerance	point
FIXCURVE	Move three-point-arc points onto tangents	set
FIXDTM	Fix breaklines connected to points in other layers	dtm
FIXDYNA	Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records	plot
FIXFONT	Fix missing default Windows font	config
FIXGCSPELL	Add dictionaries to GCSPELL	config
FIXLAYERS	Fix layers that do not compute end-area volumes	dtm
FIXRDE	Fix lost RDE window	config
FIXSCROLL	Recover a lost coordinate scroll	display
FIXTVLITE	Fix lost TVLITE window	config
FLD2RDE	Import a 12D Model .FLD file	import\|survey
FLIP	Part of LABELTABLE	table
FLIPDOWN	Copy points and sets from an elevation view to a plan view	view
FLIPUP	Copy points and sets from a plan view into an elevation view	view
FONTCHNG	List or change fonts used by selected text	text
FORESTRD	Apply horizontal design criteria to a road alignment	road
FORESTTB	Report offsets for a forest road	road
FRGOUT	Export Fastmap 700 Full Road Geometry file	export
FTCODEIN	Replaced by FYATBIN	feature attribute
FYATBEDIT	Edit feature attributes	feature attribute
FYATBEP	Export feature attributes to CSV	feature attribute
FYATBIN	Import feature attributes from a survey file	feature attribute
FYATBOUT	Export feature attributes to Mapinfo	feature attribute
GARMININ	Import Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File	import
GARMINOU	Export Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File	export
GC01	Truncate the name of selected objects	text
GC02	Modify point name to include chainage & offset	name \| alignment
GC03	Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL	report
GC03A	Report chainage and offset from master HAL	report
GC03DRN	Report chainage (horizontal), offset and design offset from HAL and VAL	report
GC03DUAL	Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs	report
GC03RAKE	Report chainage, offset and rake	report
GC03WALL	Report chainage and offset for a wall	report
GC04	Create mid-points on short plines	point
GC05	Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs	report
GC06	Round elevations in project file	point
GC07	Helmert transformation	transform
GC08	Part of RDXGC and XSHEETGC	plot
GC09	Place blocks and symbols by group	block
GC10	List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length for printing	report
GC10CSV	Replaced by GC10	report
GC100	Report thickness between two DTMs	report
GC12DIN	Import 12D Model .12DA or .12DAZ archive file	import
GC12DOUT	Export 12D Model .12DA archive file	export
GC14	Report chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL	report
GC14S	Report sorted chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL	report
GC14SET	Report chainage (along slope) and offset from set	report
GC14R	Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format	report \| tunnel
GC15	Delete selected lines with specified total length	pline \| set
GC16	Change colours and linetypes by group, name or layer	colour \| name \| group
GC16ADC	Modify line colours and linetypes to match AutoDraft	colour \| linetype
GC17	Calculate intersection with DTM given bearing and slope from set	point
GC18	Report chainage and elevation along a VAL	report
GC20	Compute and check cut\|fill volumes within boundaries	report
GC21	Change the default callout style	text
GC22	Check a DTM edge boundary	sets
GC23	Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM	set
GC24	Bowditch (compass rule) adjustment.	survey
GC25	Create a single isopach or cut\|fill line between two DTMs	dtm
GC25MULT	Create multiple isopachs between two DTMs	dtm
GC26	Test attribute records	attribute
GC26GIS	Create an attribute record in MS Access for an object	attribute
GC27	Place chainage labels parallel to xlines	text
GC28	Create 3D points along HAL & VAL at 2D distances	alignment
GC283D	Create 3D points along HAL & VAL at 3D distances	alignment
GC29	Compute distance & direction with 3D components	report
GC29UTM	Compute ellipsoidal distance & direction	report
GC30	Replaced by GC30A	report
GC30A	Report coordinates and elevation difference to DTM with alignment and labels	report
GC30PERP	Report coordinates and elevation difference perpendicular to DTM	report
GC31	Remove duplicate points on a layer with tolerances	point
GC32	Report visible layers in each LayerList	report
GC33	Create a DTM from the upper or lower of two DTMs	dtm
GC33MULT	Create a DTM from the upper or lower of multiple DTMs	dtm
GC34	Find and report a point by number	mark
GC35	Create points at centroids of a plines or sets	point
GC36	Move points onto a HAL or line	point
GC37	Report and label cross section from strings	report
GC37CSV	Create cross sections as .CSV at strings intersecting xlines	export
GC38	Affine transformation	transform
GC383D	Replaced by GC3DADJ	point
GC39	Move a HAL IP and update Xlines	road
GC3D	Create a 3D set by vertical or perpendicular offsets	set \| alignment
GC3DADJ	3D conformal transformation	transform
GC3DROT	Rotate in 3D by steps	transform
GC3DSETS	Find the closest or perpendicular 3D distance	point \| set \| report
GC3PTARC	Create an arc set through three points	set
GC40	Compare points in two layers by coordinate	report
GC40A	Compare points in two layers by coordinate using search ranges	report
GC40M	Compare points in two layers by coordinate using alignment	report
GC40PILE	Report pile differences	report
GC40RAKE	Report pile rakes	report
GC40TEXT	Label points in two layers with differences	text
GC41	Show obstructions with circles in profile view	road
GC42	Report elevation minus roadway elevation	report
GC42AB	Compare as-built points within tolerance with roadway design	report
GC42ABS	Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design	select
GC42DTM	Compare DTM with roadway design	report
GC42HAL	Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway	report
GC42KB	Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set	report
GC42VAL	Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway	report
GC43	Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob	report
GC43CSV	Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob to CSV	report
GC43ACSV	See GC43CSV and GC43SCSV	report
GC43MCSV	Report multiple surface areas of shapes in a roadjob to CSV	report
GC43S	Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material	report
GC43SCSV	Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material to a CSV file	report
GC44	Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage	report
GC44CSV	Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage to CSV	report
GC44S	Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage within one material	report
GC44SA	Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage within selected materials	report
GC45	Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances	point
GC46	Compute cut volumes between surfaces within boundaries	report
GC47	Create road resheet profiles	road
GC48	Extract profiles from roadway shapes	road
GC49	Create a point on a line given elevation	point
GC50	Grade a set from points with known elevations	set
GC51	Intersection design	road
GC52	Change group of selected objects	group
GC53	Modify, list or highlight non-contourable points	dtm
GC54	Transform ellipsoidal height points to geoidal heights points	transform
GC55	Modify elevations by grade between two sets	point
GC55HAL	Modify elevations by grade between two sets perpendicular to HAL	point
GC56	Swap in X, Y or Z or mirror in X or Y	transform
GC57	Create points from cross sections	road
GC58	Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from a layer or layers	set \| pline \| text
GC58S	Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from selected objects	set \| pline \| text
GC59	Quality Assurance report from Geodimeter as-built survey	report
GC60	Radial setout report	report
GC61	Create a point at a distance between two points	point
GC62	Replaced by ELFS	alignment
GC63	Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTM	road
GC64	Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets	road
GC64BIT	Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows	config
GC65	Create point at chainage, offset and elevation along alignment	alignment
GC65FILE	Import points by chainage, offset and elevation	alignment
GC65TILT	Import points by chainage, offset and elevation with tilt	alignment
GC66	Create breaklines at changes of grade, valleys or ridges	set
GC67	Move points onto perpendicular Xlines	alignment
GC67A	Move points onto skewed Xlines	alignment
GC68	Replaced by GCDIVIDE	point \| set
GC682SET	Add points into sets with connecting breaklines	set
GC69	Change zero elevations to no elevation	point
GC70	Combine elevation of point and DTM	dtm
GC71	Solid hatch along lines	hatch
GC72	Report satellite horizon curtain	report
GC73	Interpolate elevation from VAL	alignment
GC74	Set the start chainage of multiple sets or plines	alignment
GC75	Report distance and slope between sets or plines	report
GC76	Report on Geodimeter job file	report
GC77	Change elevation of text to match elevation of subject	text
GC78	Replaced by GCCHRLIN	profile
GC79	Renumber points to match their point names	point
GC80	Report and compare areas of lots	report \| set
GC81	Report horizontal alignment	report
GC82	Report DTM areas	dtm \| report
GC83	Select objects less than or greater than specified length	config
GC84	Join consecutive plines or sets	pline
GC85	Replaced by CLEANUP	set
GC86	Move objects relative to alignment or point	alignment \| point \| transform
GC87	Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM	alignment
GC88	Clip or extend a pline to a defined length	pline
GC89	Create a DTM at points offset from another DTM	dtm
GC90	Extend DTM to point	dtm
GC91	Extend DTM by distance	dtm
GC92	Report or move duplicate points	dtm
GC93	Mirror or rotate point label	point label
GC94	Report crossfall between two sets	report
GC95	Delete segments greater than a nominated length	set
GC96	Select points between two DTM layers	dtm
GC99	Create parallel strings at offsets from alignment	set
GC100	Report thickness between two DTMs	report
GCACTIVE	Select active alignment from registered alignments	alignment
GCADDBLK	Insert blocks graphically and interpolate elevations	block
GCADDLAY	Prefix name with first 4 characters from layer name	name
GCADJANT	Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna	survey
GCADJDES	Adjust points for new vertical or slope alignment	alignment
GCANG	Report and label angle-right between points	text
GCALONG	Orient text to along a set or pline	text
GCARC	Create arc pline or set by three parameters	set
GCARCARC	Replaced by DDIST	point
GCARCBL	Create off breaklines along all arcs on a layer	dtm \| set
GCAREAS	Report areas, lengths or volumes of plines by layer list	report \| pline
GCBADEAT	Delete or select text containing Bad Rec EAT codes	text
GCBENCH	Create a bench set	set
GCBLKFIX	Modify colours of block definitions	block
GCBLKPTS	Create points at the insertion points of blocks	block
GCBOUND	Match extents of boundaries	dtm
GCCHORD	Create chords from arcs, spirals and plines	set \| pline
GCCHRLIN	Import a profile from a file of chainage and elevation	profile
GCCL	Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file	tunnel
GCCLIP	Create new DTM surfaces clipped to boundaries	dtm
GCCOLCON	Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative contours	pline
GCCONCHK	Modify elevations of 2D points in contours	Point \| set
GCCONIN	Import contours from Geocomp .CON file	import
GCCONOUT	Export contours to Geocomp .CON file	export
GCCONSIM	Export contours to simulator .TXT file	export
GCCONTXT	Modify elevations of labelled contours	pline
GCCONVRT	Convert plines to sets or sets to plines	set \| pline
GCCOORD	Convert between coordinate systems in Australia and New Zealand	transform
GCCOPY	Copy objects onto a layer	point \| set \| pline \| block \| text
GCCSVIN	Import ASCII coordinate files	import
GCDAMVOL	Compute dam volumes with increments	dtm
GCDCOUT	Export alignments to Trimble DC files	alignment
GCDELSET	Delete sets and points in sets	set
GCDEMIN	Replaced by GCESRIIN	import
GCDESC	Replaced by F11	toggle
GCDESCRL	Replaced by F11	toggle
GCDIM	Label dimensions	text
GCDIMLOT	Label lots with dimension text	text
GCDIVIDE	Create points at minimum spacing along sets	point \| set
GCDRAPE	Create sets where selected plines cross DTM links	dtm \| set
GCDREDGE	Compute dredge volumes between boundaries	dtm
GCDTM	Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .dtp file	dtm
GCDTMALL	Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh	dtm
GCDTMBDY	Create boundaries from multiple DTMs	dtm
GCDTMDIF	Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor	dtm
GCDTMEDG	Remove triangles on a DTM edge	dtm \| set
GCDTMGDE	Create slope alignments from a DTM	alignment
GCDTMIN	Import a Geocomp .DTM file	import
GCDTMOUT	Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file	export
GCEARTH	Roadway volume report in columns	report
GCEDT12A	Edit 12DA model attributes	12d attribute
GCEDTABL	Replaced by FYATBEDIT	feature attribute
GCEDTATB	Replaced by FYATBEDIT	feature attribute
GCELEV	Modify the elevation of selected objects	elevation
GCESRIIN	Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files	import
GCEXTEND	Extend or trim multiple sets or plines	set \| pline
GCEXPLOD	Explode blocks and text	block, text
GCEZGIN	Import .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file	import
GCEZGOUT	Export .EZIGRADE or .AGD Survey file	export
GCFALL	Create paths flowing from locations on a DTM	dtm \| pline \| hydrology
GCFILLET	Insert or expand arcs along sets and plines	pline \| set \| arc
GCFILTER	Filter excess points from straights and arcs in sets	set
GCFIXXML	Fix .XML files with long lines	import
GCFOLLOW	Create a set that follows segments or links	set \| dtm
GCGENGRD	Create points on a grid pattern	points
GCGEOIN	Import Leica .GEO coordinate file	import
GCGPXIN	Import GPS data in .GPX format	import
GCGRDVOL	Compute cut and fill volumes for regions in a grid or between Xlines	report
GCGSIOUT	Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format	export
GCGT7IN	Import alignment in Topcon Civilcad GT7\|GTS format	import
GCGTSOUT	Export alignment in Topcon Civilcad GC7\|GTS format	export
GCHALADJ	Adjust registered hal to use offsets	alignment
GCHALDEL	Delete selected registered HALs	alignment
GCHALEDT	Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically	alignment
GCHALIN	Import Geocomp Horizontal Alignment	import
GCHALOFF	Create a pline from a registered HAL with offsets	alignment
GCHALOUT	Export Geocomp Horizontal Alignment	export
GCHALRPT	Report elevations of roadway surfaces	report
GCHAULMN	Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file	masshaul
GCHELP	Report key, version and path configuration	help
GCID	Locate objects	display \| report
GCIDCHN	Display chainage and offset at cursor	alignment \| display
GCIFCIN	Import surfaces from Industry Foundation Classes (.IFC) files	import
GCIMPORT	Import Geocomp data	import
GCIN2SET	Insert points into sets	set
GCINCPT	Create points with incrementing by point numbers	point
GCINCTXT	Create number or letter text incrementing by multiples	text
GCINSBLK	Replace circles with tree blocks	block
GCINSIDE	Report areas and subtract internal areas	report
GCIRBOOM	Design ramps for pivot irrigation	pivot irrigation
GCIRDESN	Merge pivot irrigation ramps into DTM	pivot irrigation
GCIRINFO	Check pivot irrigation boom	pivot irrigation
GCIRPROF	Create pivot irrigation profile	pivot irrigation
GCJOINMP	Join points with gaps	survey
GCJOINPT	Join points based on feature-coded name	survey
GCKMLIN	Import placemarks and paths from Google Earth (KML or KMZ)	import
GCKMLOUT	Export to Google Earth, NearMap or Web Map Service	export
GCLABGRD	Label and draw grids inside polygons	draft
GCLABIP	Label intersection points	text
GCLABLOT	Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text	text
GCLABPEG	Label pipeline with peg labels	pipe general
GCLABPNT	Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border	text
GCLASIN	Import lidar points from .LAS or .LAZ files	import
GCLASOUT	Import points to .LAS files	export
GCLAYCOL	Relayer and recolour objects using name	layer \| colour
GCLFAOUT	Export linear features for Trimble Alignment Planning	Export
GCLINPTS	List points with invalid coordinates	point
GCLLGRID	Draw latitude and longitude grid	pline \| hdms
GCLNGIN	Import Geocomp long section	import
GCLOTCNR	Label lot corners with two elevations or differences	text
GCLPOINTS	Replaced by GCLPTS	report
GCLPTS	List the coordinates of selected points	report
GCMAGNET	Assign point properties by text from Topcon Magnet Field	text \| point \| survey
GCMAPIN	Import a contour .MAP	import
GCMAPOUT	Create a layer map file	layer \| export
GCMARKER	Display temporary vertex markers on plines	pline
GCMATCH	Close gaps in contours	pline
GCMATIN	Import road materials	road
GCMATOUT	Export road materials	road
GCMERGE	Merge multiple regions or DTMs	dtm
GCMFI	Import multiple ASCII PTS or CSV files	import
GCMOSSIN	Replaced by MOSSIN and MOSSTRI	import
GCMOSSOU	Replaced by MOSSOUT	export
GCMULCON	Assign contour elevations to multiple plines	pline
GCMULTDC	Export multiple alignments to a Trimble DC file	alignment
GCMULTGD	Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .RLN files	alignment
GCMULVOL	Compute volumes between pairs of dtm surfaces	dtm
GCMULXML	Export multiple alignments to Leica 1200 LandXML files	alignment
GCNAME	Rename objects to match an object	name
GCNAMEPT	Name points sequentially along a set	name
GCNEARLN	Select points near multiple selected sets or plines	set \| pline \| point
GCNEDIN	Import Trimble Alignment Planning Grid (NED) files	import
GCNMEAIN	Import NMEA strings from GPS receivers	import
GCNOELEV	Select objects with no elevations (2D)	point \| pline \| text
GCOBJIN	Import data from Wavefront .OBJ files	import
GCOBJOUT	Export data to Wavefront .OBJ files	export
GCOFFELV	Create plines or sets offset from a set	sets
GCOFLINE	Select points of multiple selected sets	set
GCONECON	Modify the elevation of a contour pline	pline
GCOUT	Export data to Geocomp SDS (.PTS & .STR)	export
GCP39	Replaced by GCRLNOUT	export
GCPAD	Place building pads at nominated height within a lot	set
GCPAN	Pan by numeric keypad with 8 = north	plot
GCPANEL	Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points	roadway
GCPAVSET	Create a PaveSet paving machine setout file	export
GCPILE	Create pile points using HAL & VAL	alignment
GCPLDICE	Replaced by GC71	hatch
GCPLFIN	Import HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT, .000) plot file	import
GCPLTIN	Import Geocomp .PLT plot file	import
GCPRFEDT	Edit profile IPs graphically	profile
GCPROFIL	Create profiles from multiple HALs and DTMs	profile
GCPTAIN	Import TPSetout\|TPStakeout .PTA points	import
GCPTDIST	Check minimum distances between points on sets	report
GCPTRLDS	Replaced by F11	toggle
GCPTSIN	Import point data from an ASCII file	import
GCPTSOUT	Export points to various ASCII formats	export
GCPTSTXT	Change elevation or name of points by nearest text	point
GCPURGE	Purge all unused blocks	block
GCQA	Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM	report
GCQP	Interactive quick profile or cross section	profile \| section
GCQV	Move an IP and recompute roadway volume	report
GCREDRAW	Redraw all views and reset view scale for point labels	view
GCRELAY	Replaced by GCCOPY	layer
GCREPORT	Open P3Pad report editor	report
GCRENUM	Renumber points in set order	point
GCREVIEW	Move or copy objects from one view to another	view
GCRIVER	Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river	set
GCRLNOUT	Export Geodimeter Roadline alignments from strings	export
GCROTATE	Rotate objects by angle or deflection.	transform
GCRUNWAY	Report runway conformance	export
GCSCALE	Multiply X, Y or Z by scale factors	transform
GCSCANIN	Import lidar scan data and filter by many variables	import
GCSPOT	Report the DTM elevation at the cursor	report \| dtm
GCSDROUT	Export Sokkia SDR alignment files	export
GCSKIPMN	Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes	alignment
GCSPELL	Check spelling	text
GCSTLOUT	Export DTMs to surface models in .STL format	export \| dtm
GCSTRATA	Create points at strata from table of depths	dtm
GCSTYLE	Modify text by text style	text
GCSUBDTM	Create a subgrade DTM from depth boundaries	DTM
GCSUBGDE	Create plines to transition subgrade templates	alignment
GCSURFAR	Replaced by XSURAREA	report
GCSZAOUT	Export special zones for Trimble Alignment Planning	export
GCTABLE	Create a coordinate table	text
GCTADPOL	Label batter with block showing direction of slope	block
GCTMAIN	Import Trimble Alignment Planning .DTM	import
GCTMAOUT	Export Quantm DTM for Trimble Alignment Planning	export
GCTFWIN	Locate TIF images by world files (.TFW)	import \| image
GCTPLATE	Copy templates to stations \| chainages	road
GCTRACE	Define regions by tracing inside plines or sets	set \| pline \| hatch \| report
GCTSP	Replaced by TMCUSTOM	config
GCTSTYLE	Set the default text style at the command line	text
GCTTAOUT	Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx	export
GCTURN	Create the swept path of a vehicle	road
GCTXTFIT	Adjust text aspect to align on right	text
GCTXTOUT	Export or report text	text
GCUMC3D	Export to Leica Universal Machine Control 3D	export
GCUNJOIN	Break sets and plines into segments	set
GCUPDATE	See UPDATE	config
GCUPJ	See UPDATE	config
GCUPK	See UPDATE	config
GCUPL	See UPDATE	config
GCUPM	See UPDATE	config
GCUPN	See UPDATE	config
GCUPP	See UPDATE	config
GCUPQ	See UPDATE	config
GCVALDEL	Delete selected registered VALs	alignment
GCVALEDT	Replaced by GCPRFEDT	profile
GCVALOFF	Create a pline from a registered VAL with offsets	profile
GCVERIN	Import Geocomp vertical alignment	import \| profile
GCVEROUT	Export Geocomp vertical alignment	export \| profile
GCWRAP	Change tunnel wrap status of a layer	tunnel \| dtm
GCXLINES	Create or replace labelled xlines for a roadway	road
GCXMLIN	Import LandXML points and parcels	import
GCXMLOUT	Export roadway strings to LandXML	road
GCXTIE	Create a set at the intersection of slopes from two segments	set
GDACONV	Replaced by GCCOORD	transform
GDMDIR	List Geodimeter directory and delete files	survey
GEN2DN	Replaced by P29	survey
GEN2DO	Replaced by P29	survey
GEN2DP	Replaced by P29	survey
GEOCALC	Transform ASCII coordinate files	transform
GEOCPAL	Replaced by EDITINI	config \| hdms
GEOMINQ	Measure bearing, distance and vertical angle	report
GEOMRPTS	Report Bearings and Distances	report
GEONAV	Replaced by HDMS	hdms
GEOSYS	Establish GPS geodetic system	config
GFE	Geodimeter file editor	survey
GM1	Raise low points where slopes are steep	point
GNCSTEXP	Export GeoNav detail	hdms
GNCSTIMP	Import GeoNav detail	hdms
GNDWEED	Replaced by HDMSDW	hdms
GNHLAB	Replaced by HDMSLAB	hdms
GNIMPORT	Import GeoNav .GPT file	hdms
GNSETUP	Replaced by EDITINI	hdms
GOLFAREA	Report golf course areas	report
GPSSYS	Replaced by GEOSYS	config
GPXOUT	Export Topografix GPX points for GPS	export
GRADESMT	Export files to Leica GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders	export
GRDPTS	Replaced by GRIDEXPT	dtm \| export
GRIDELEV	Create a grid of points and interpolates elevations	dtm
GRIDEXPT	Export a grid of points interpolated from a DTM	export
GRIDMAKE	Create points or plines using grid settings	point
GRIDPLAN	Transform from grid to ground or ground to grid	transform
GRIDSET	Set the current grid settings	config
GRIDVOL	Replaced by GCGRDVOL	dtm \| report
GRP2NAME	Change the name of each object to match its group	group
GSIDTMOU	Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format	export
GSSWP	Geocomp Systems Support web page	report
GST	Geodimeter Software Tools	survey
GT3PT	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTACT	Replaced by IMPORT	survey
GTAF	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTAP	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTCOMM	Replaced by GMDIR	survey
GTCONV	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTDIR	Replaced by GDMDIR	survey
GTDXF	Replaced by EXPORT	survey
GTFACT	Replaced by RDE	survey
GTFD	Replaced by IMPORT	survey
GTFileEditor	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTFL	Replaced by EXPORT	survey
GTJR	Replaced by JOB2AGA	survey
GTL1C	Replaced by IMPORT	survey
GTL2	Replaced by IMPORT	survey
GTL1D	Replaced by IMPORT	survey
GTLS	Replaced by AUTODRAFT	survey
GTNR	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTPCF	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTPTA	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTPS	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTREC	Replaced by IMPORT	survey
GTRN	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTRPTS	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTRT	Replaced by PTS2TRV	survey
GTRXYZ	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTSEND	Replaced by EXPORT	survey
GTUDS	Replaced by GFE	survey
GTXFER	Replaced by EXPORT	export
HALDATA	Create horizontal alignment by table entry	alignment
HALMANAGER	Register horizontal alignments	alignment
HALVALRP	Report horizontal and vertical alignments	report
HALXYZ	Create a set by three offsets	set
HAREAB	Conpute the area of a basin	hydrology
HATCH	Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries	hatch
HATCHENC	Replaced by GCTRACE	hatch
HATCH_IT	Replaced by GCTRACE	hatch
HATCHPAT	Hatch regions with a selected hatch pattern	hatch
HATCHUSER	Hatch regions with a user-defined pattern	hatch
HBLIST	List basin hydrograph	hydrology
HCCN	Calculate coefficients and curve numbers for a basin	hydrology
HCOVER	Hydrology cover sheet	hydrology
HDEFS	Hydrology default settings	hydrology
HDMS	Hydrographic Data Management System	hdms
HDMSABT	About HDMS	hdms
HDMSBIN	HDMS data binning	hdms
HDMSCOL	HDMS colour by depth	hdms
HDMSCSL	Compare sounding lines	hdms
HDMSDCLBLK	Create hatching coloured by depth	hdms
HDMSDLAB	Label depths	hdms
HDMSDW	Label and clash depths	hdms
HDMSEVT	Label survey events	hdms
HDMSNWSE	Smooth a DTM surface	hdms
HDMSRLAB	Label hydrographic runlines	hdms
HDMSRTR	Round truncate or restore depths	hdms
HDMSTC	Adjust sounding time	hdms
HDMSTLAB	Label trackplots	hdms
HDRAW	Draw hydrographs	hydrology
HEATMAP	Show elevation differences with colours	block \| dtm \| report
HECIN	Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file	import
HECOUT	Replaced by HECOUTGC	export
HECOUTGC	Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file	export
HECX	Replaced by HECOUTGC	export
HELP	See CONTENTS	help
HELPGEOCALC	Help for GeoCalc	help
HELPGFE	Help for Geodimeter file editor	help
HELPIE	Help for Import-Export	help
HELPRDE	Help for Raw data editor	help
HELPTM	Help for Terramodel	help
HELPTOOLBOX	Help for Toolbox	help
HELPTV	Help for Visualizer	help
HELPTVL	Help for 3D Visualizer	help
HGNIMP	Import GeoNav .GPT file	hdms
HGEN	Compute Basin hydrographs	hydrology
HIDE	Hide or reveal a set segment	toggle
HILO	Replaced by DTMSTATS	report
HLIST	List hydrographs	hydrology
HNAVEDIT	HYDROpro NavEdit	hdms
HORIZALIGN	Register one horizontal alignment	road
HRLIST	List reach hydrograph	hydrology
HROUT	Route hydrographs through a pond	hydrology
HROUTR	Route hydrographs through a reach	hydrology
HYDROIMP	Import HYDROpro .HPT depths	hdms
ID	Identify object	report
IDANGLE	Report the angle between two bearings or or three locations	report
IDCHAINAGE	See IDSTATION	alignment
IDSTATION	Identify station \| chainage and offset	alignment
IGRP	Display only objects in the same group	group \| display
ILINE	Create points at intersections of selected lines	point
ILL	Make layer list visible	drafting tools
IMAGE	Image manager	image
IMAGEPTH	Change image file locations for Image manager	image
IMANAGER	Island manager	alignment
IMPORT	Download or import survey data using a script	import
IMPORTGC	Import Geocomp .CES cross sections	import
IMPORTSMGR	Download and import script manager	import
IMPORTXS	Import various cross section formats into a roadway	import
INCHOFRL	Replaced by GC65FILE	import
INCRTEXT	Create text incrementing by one	text
INSALT	Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files	import
INSERTZ	Insert elevations from text into sets	drafting tools
INSET	Report which sets use each point	drafting tools
INT3DSET	Create sets with elevations interpolated from known points	set
INTCON	Interpolate between contours	data prep
INTERP3D	Update elevations interpolated using INT3DSET	point
INTOSET	Insert points into a set	set
INVERSE	Replaced by GEOMINQ	report
INVRPTS	Replaced by GEOMRPTS	report
IRBAY	Design flood irrigation bays	flood irrigation
IRBENT	Enter irrigation bay grid point elevations	flood irrigation
IRBGRID	Generate a grid of irrigation bay points	flood irrigation
IRBTAB	Create an irrigation bay design results table	flood irrigation
IRCDTAB	Report drain or channel grades and widths	flood irrigation
IRCHFLO	Compute parameters for trapezoidal channel flow	flood irrigation
IRDTMS	Generate a single DTM from multiple irrigation bays	flood irrigation
IRHAUL	Compute truck haul distance for an irrigation bay design	flood irrigation
IRPUTAT	Set or edit irrigation bay text attributes	flood irrigation
IRSTRUC	Generate irrigation bay tables and reports	flood irrigation
IRSUMTX	Recalculate totals in irrigation bay results table	flood irrigation
ISCLOSED	Select closed or open sets or plines	set \| pline
ISLAND	Traffic island template editor	alignment
ITXT	Replaced by INCRTEXT	text
JOB2AGA	Convert a Geodimeter job file to Geodimeter raw data file	survey
JOBOUT	Reverse-engineer Geodimeter .job data from points	report
JOIN	Join plines or sets with common ends	set
JOINPL	Close gaps in contours and join	data prep
JOINTEXT	Join pairs of text objects together	text
KEAYSIN	Import data from Keays	import
KEAYSOUT	Export data to Keays TR1	export
KORKDTM	Export DTM layer to Kork format	export
LABBENDS	Suffix point names with deflection angles	set \| point
LABELANG	Label the angle-right at each point of a set	text
LABELARC	Label segment with radius as text along	text
LABELCH	Label chainage using text leader lines	text
LABELCONTOURS	Label contour plines with text	text
LABELGRID	Label a closed pline with coordinates	text
LABELHAL	Label horizontal alignment intersection points	alignment
LABELINE	Label alignments with names in plotboxes	alignment
LABELLOT	Change lot area labels to show alternative area	set \| text
LABELOFF	Label points with offset text	point \| text
LABELPI	Label Intersection Point Chainage	alignment
LABELPOINT	Label points with point labels and symbols	point label
LABELROADHAL	Label a registered horizontal alignment	alignment
LABELROADVAL	Label a registered vertical alignment	alignment
LABELSEG	Label sets with bearings and distances	text
LABELSETS	Label sets with lot numbers and areas	text
LABELSTA	Label station using text leader lines	text
LABELTABLE	Create table of dimensions of short set segments	table
LABELVAL	Label a vertical alignment	alignment
LABGRADE	Label the grade or distance between points	text
LABPT	Label points with EAT text	text
LABPTQ	Label points with number, elevation or name	text
LANDFILL	Create a surface of troughs	sets
LAY2NAME	Change the name of each object to match its layer	layer
LAYER	Select or create the current layer from a toolbar	layer
LAYERCSV	Replaced by LAYERNEW	layer
LAYERMAP	Rename layers and update colours and linetypes	layer \| colour \| linetype
LAYERNEW	Create a new layer	layer
LAYERNXT	Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order	layer
LAYERSET	Create and edit layers and their visibility and selectability	layer
LAYERVIS	Set the visibility of layers	layer
LAYINFO	List summary information by layer about selected points	layer \| report
LAYLIST	Organize layer multiple lists	data prep
LAYLSET	Make only layers in selected objects or layerlist visible or invisible	layer
LAYOUT	Create parallel road sets for subdivisions	sets
LAYOUT3D	Create 3D sets from plans	data prep
LAYUSTN	Relayer and colour objects for MicroStation 7 export	layer
LBLANG	Replaced by LABELANG	text
LC	Report coordinates	point
LCN	Modify layer, colour and name	data prep
LEVEL3W	Add or edit three-wire level (stadia) loop	survey
LEVELLST	Report level loop points	report
LEVELS	Add or edit single-wire level loop	survey
LFILL	Replaced by LANDFILL	sets
LIDARGRD	Import gridded ASCII lidar data	import
LIDARIN	Import lidar ASCII data	import
LIDAROUT	Export lidar ASCII data	export
LINEINT	Evenly space points where X and Y is wrong	hdms
LINETYPE	Modify the linetypes of selected sets and plines	plot
LINETYPESET	Load or purge linetype definitions	plot
LinetypeToggle	Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar	display
LINETYPS	Draw all loaded linetypes in the sheet view	plot
LINEZERO	Modify linetype to By Layer	linetype
LINKSET	Configure DTM links	dtm
LinkToggle	Toggle on and off DTM link display	dtm
LIST	List information about selected types of objects	report
LISTARCS	List plines and sets and their curves	pline \| set
LISTFONT	List and create a table of available fonts	text
LISTGRP	List groups used by selected objects	group
LISTLOTS	List geometry of lots	report
LISTPIPE	List as-constructed pipe data	pipe general
LISTREF	List reference files	file \| report
LISTTEXT	List text objects	report
LLAYER	Report the number of objects on each layer	layer
LLGRID	Replaced by GCLLGRID	pline, hdms
LLIST	Modify the layer list of multiple dynaviews	dynaview
LLISTSET	Layer list settings	dynaview
LLOTS	Create a table showing block, lot, area and % area of lots	plot
LLRPT	Layer and layer list report	layer
LLTABLE	Create a linked coordinate table including latitude and longitude	report
LLTYPE	Change the linetype of the current layer	layer
LOADATT	Load or reload the specified attribute definition file	attribute
LOBJCOLOR	Change the line colour of the current layer	layer
LOBJS	List objects and details	report
LOTJOIN	Create closed sets inside lines around text	set
LOTPTRLS	Replaced by GCLOTCNR	text
LPI	Replaced by LABELPI	alignment
LPLINES	List alignment details of a pline	report
LPOINTS	List the coordinates of selected points	report
LPTCOLOR	Change the points colour of the current layer	layer
LPTSRAD	List coordinates and radiations	report
LSEC1	Label long sections in Geocomp-style	plot
LSECUK	Label long sections in United Kingdom-style	plot
LSETS	List names and point numbers of sets	report
LSTA	Replaced by LABELSTA	text
LUNUSED	List the unused point numbers	report
LVC	Label one vertical curve	alignment
LYR	Replaced by QUIKLSET	layer
LYRPFIX	Add or delete layer name prefix	drafting tools
MacroPlay	Play a macro	command
MacroRecord	Record a keystroke macro	command
MACROSAVE	See MACRORECORD	command
MAG600IN	Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS UPT file	import
MAGELLIN	Import Magellan GPS UPT file	import
MAGELOUT	Export Magellan GPS Waypoint UPT file	export
MAGNIFY	Magnify view scale by a factor	view
MAPIIN	Import MapInfo MIF data	import
MAPINFOIN	Replaced by MAPIIN	import
MAPINFOOUT	Replaced by MAPIOUT	export
MAPIOUT	Export MapInfo MIF data	export
MAPPOINTS	Create sets and plines from point names	survey
MASSDIAG	Scale an exploded masshaul diagram	masshaul
MASSHAUL	Create a masshaul diagram	masshaul
MASSIMPORT	Masshaul import and export locations	masshaul
MATCH	Modify objects by matching properties of another object	config
MATCHOBJ	Modify objects by matching properties of another object	config
MATERIALS	Material manager	road
MATRIX	Create a matrix of copied objects	copy
MDLIN	Import MDL autoscanning laser system *.CDU data	import
MEASUNIT	Configure measurement units	config
MENUCFG	Configure the menus	config
MERGE	Merge DTMs	dtm
MessageScroll	Toggle the visibility of the message scroll	display
MG1	Label and report slopes at triangle centroids	point \| report
MHIMPORT	Add a volume report for masshaul analysis	masshaul
MICROSS	Install Microsoft Sans Serif Windows font	config
MINMAPIN	Import a MineMap file	import
MIRROR	Copy objects to a mirror image	pline, set
MIRRORDY	Mirror dynaviews	view
MKBLK	Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block	block
MKBLKINT	Convert selected external blocks to internal blocks	block
MKV	Display temporary vertex markers	mark
MOSSEXPT	Replaced by MOSSOUT	export
MOSSIN	Import Survey, Design and Triangles from Moss GENIO data	import
MOSSMIN	Create a .MIN file from Moss GENIO features	import
MOSSOUT	Export Moss GENIO data	export
MOSSTRI	Import Moss GENIO triangle data	import
MOSSX	Replaced by MOSSOUT	export
MOVE	Move objects to another location	move \| transform
MOVEPAD	Move a pad DTM and report volumes	dtm \| report
MSCAPEIN	Import Mincom Minescape grid data	import
MTL	Move text leader line	text
MULTCODE	Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes	survey
MULTICOPY	Create multiple copies of selected objects	copy
MultilayerDTM	Create a DTM from multiple layers	dtm
MULTIOFF	Create set, pline or segment at repeated offsets	pline \| set
MULTIPIN	Import MultiPlane RTK Survey or FieldLevel XML file	import
MVIEW	Create multiple dynaviews	view
MXVALIN	Import VAL from MX report	import
NAME	Modify the names of selected objects	name
NAME2LAY	Change layer to match object name	layer
NAMECASE	Change the case of names	name
NAMELOTS	Name lots by text	name
NAMEPTS	Rename points in sets to match set names	set \| point
NAMERP	Name radius points	drafting tools
NAMESETS	Rename unnamed sets or points to match names	set \| point
NAVEDIT	HYDROpro NavEdit	hdms
NEW	Start a new project	file
NEWTEMPS	Copy a roadway template to a station \| chainage	road
NEXTVIEW	Change the current view to the next open view	view
NFS	Replaced by GC02	name
NODE	Pipe node properties	pipe design
NPSCHART	Draw a table of details of set or pline	plot
NS95	Nikon NS-95 Database Utility	survey
NSWSCIMS	Import NSW SCIMS points	survey
NZGEOID	Import NZGeoid .SID file	import \| transform
OBJREG	Group object to Dynaview or Sheet for ASAP	asap
OBJSNAP	Enable running snap modes	config
OBSDIFF	Report vertical differences between obstructions	report
OFF	Turn off selected objects	view
OFFALL	Turn off all objects in the current view	view
OFFELEV	Create plines or sets offset from a set	set
OFFELEVM	Create plines or sets offset from multiple sets	set
OFFMULT	Create set offset from previous set	drafting tools
OFFPERP	Create set at vertical perpendicular offset from a set	set \| tunnel
OFFSEG	Create pline or set at a horizontal offset from a segment	set
OFFSETDIST	Create pline or set at a horizontal offset	set
OFFSETPOINT	Create pline or set at a horizontal offset and location	set
OFLINES	Select points or radius points on selected sets	data prep
OLIST	Replaced by COUNT	report
OLIST2	Count the number of objects of each type to P3Pad	report
ON	Turn on selected objects	view
ONALL	Turn on all objects in selected views	view
ONGRP	Turn on all objects in a group	plot
OPEN	Open an existing project	file
ORDERFORM	Email a report of the dongle	help
ORDERPRINT	Print a report of the dongle	help
OVALITY	Create circle from average radius	pline
OVERHANG	Make non-contourable points under overhangs	dtm
OVERWALL	Create cross sections from points along Xlines	plot
P29	Roadline 2D export to Geodimeter	export
P39	Geodimeter Roadline 3D file	export
P3PAD	See GCREPORT	report
PAD	Create a rectangular set at an elevation	set
PAD2DTM	Create DTM from lot lines and text	data prep
PADDOWN	Lower all points in a pad by an increment	set
PADSHIFT	Set the shift value used by PADDOWN and PADUP	set
PADUP	Raise all points in a pad by an increment	set
PALETTE	Select the palette and colourmap	config
PAN	Move the view to a new location	view
PARABOLA	Create a parabola	set
PARKING	Create parking bays	set
PCHAINAGE	See PSTATION	Point
PCOPY	Copy from a reference project	file
PENZDIN	An alias for an IMPORT script to import ASCII files	file
PENZDOUT	An alias for an EXPORT script to export ASCII files	file
PHASE	Phase editor	road
PHASEMAN	Phase manager	road
PHASENAME	Edit phase names	road
PHOTOCSV	Import photo coordinates	import
PINSET	Insert point at intersection of two lines	point
PIPE	Pipe properties	pipe design
PIPEAIN	Import pipe survey attributes	pipe survey
PIPEADD	Create pipes from pipe survey attributes	pipe survey
PIPEBREK	Break pipe segment with Asset_ID	pipe survey
PIPEBYCR	Edit pipe and node elevations	pipe design
PIPECALQ	Compute pipe flow rate	pipe design
PIPECHRT	Create a pipe chart	pipe design
PIPEDALL	Draw all pipes	pipe design
PIPEDEF	Edit default pipe and node settings	pipe design
PIPEDELS	Delete pipe segment with Asset_ID	pipe survey
PIPEDRAW	Draw a pipe branch	pipe design
PIPEDSGN	Design pipe branch	pipe design
PIPEDUMP	List pipe attributes	pipe design
PIPEINFO	Report pipe dimensions and cover	pipe general
PIPELBR	List pipe branches	pipe design
PIPEJOIN	Join pipes with Asset_ID	pipe survey
PIPELBR	List pipe branches	pipe design
PIPELL	Pipe and node label settings	pipe design
PIPEMAXV	List large velocity pipes	pipe design
PIPEMINV	List small velocity pipes	pipe design
PIPEOBST	Label pipes at obstructions	pipe general
PIPEQ	Enter the flow rate for a pipe	pipe design
PIPEREPT	Report pipe attributes on selected sets	pipe survey
PIPERSLT	Report results for pipe or node	pipe design
PIPESCLQ	Scale pipe flow rate	pipe design
PIPESOLV	Solve the pipe branch design	pipe design
PIPESUM	Pipe summary report	pipe design
PIPESWAP	Swap pipe Asset_ID attribute with String_No	pipe survey
PIPEV	Modify pipe velocities	pipe design
PIPEWSP	List pipe water surface profile	pipe design
PIPEWELD	Create points at pipe welds	pipe survey
PIPEXING	Draw pipes crossing the alignment	pipe design
PLAN2DBX	Export sets to Leica 1200 series DBX database	export
PLANPROF	Display the plan and profile views	display \| view
PLANSET	Plan settings for Automatic Sheet Assembly and Production	asap
PLANSHEET	Display the plan and sheet views	display \| view
PLATFORM	Balance cut and fill volumes of multiple layers	dtm
PLAY	Replaced by PTLAYCOL	layer \| colour
PLINE	Create a pline	pline
PLINFILT	Filter excess vertices from straights in plines	pline
PLNNONAM	Display only plines with no names	pline \| display
PLOT	Plot a plan to a printer	plot
PLOTBOX	Create a pline box using sheet units	plot \| pline
PLOTSET	Plot parameter settings	plot \| smooth
PLOTTERSET	Plotter configuration settings	plot
PLTO3D	Modify elevation of single contour pline	pline
PNEZDIN	An alias for an IMPORT script to import ASCII files	file
PNEZDOUT	An alias for an EXPORT script to export ASCII files	file
POINT	Create a point	point
POINTSET	Configure point numbering	point
POLY	Replaced by POLYGON	set
POLYGON	Create n-sided regular polygon	set
PONDDEF	Define pond outlet devices	hydrology
PONDLIST	List pond data	hydrology
PONDOUT	Define pond outlet devices	hydrology
PONDSUM	Pond summary report	hydrology
PONDVOL	Enter pond volume	hydrology
PORTSC1	List points showing heights as depths	hdms
POWERGDE	Export to Leica PowerGrade 3D	export
PPS	Display the Plan, Profile and Sheet views	display \| view
PPSX	Display the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views	display \| view
PPX	Display the Plan, Profile and Xsect views	display \| view
PPXS	Display the Plan, Profile Xsect and Super views	display \| view
PREDAREA	Divide a closed set into lots by area	set
PREVIOUS	Display the previous view	view
PRJCLNT	ASAP Project Data Management - Client	plot
PRJINFO	ASAP Project Data Management - General Information	plot
PRJLOC	ASAP Project Data Management - Location	plot
PRJLTEXT	ASAP Project Data Management - Link text to data	plot
PRJSTAFF	ASAP Project Data Management - Staff	plot
PRODUCTS	Report the serial number and modules	help
PROFILE	Create profile	alignment
PROJDATA	ASAP Project Data Management - Data	plot
PROJECTV	List and edit all project variables	config
PROJINFO	Enter and report user information about a project file	config
PROJVARS	Enter and report survey information about a project file	config
PSBOX	Edit PLANSET plot boxes	asap
PSINDEX	Plan Set index	asap
PSMAN	Plan Set Manager	asap
PSSET	Configure Plan Set settings	asap
PSSHEET	Plan Set sheet assembly	asap
PSTATION	Create survey points perpendicular to a HAL	point
PSTYPE	Plan Set sheet type	asap
PTBLKS	Create points at the insertion point of 3D blocks	point
PTCASE	Change the case of alpha point numbers	point
PTCHOFRL	Report chainage \| station, offset and elevation at xlines	report
PTDRAIN	Create a catchment boundary around a point	hydrology
PTINSIDE	Select points inside or outside closed objects.	point \| set \| pline
PTJOIN	Join points by sequential point number	Point \| set
PTLAB	Edit point label blocks	block
PTLAYCOL	Relayer and recolour points using name	layer \| colour
PTS2ADC	Create points for testing AutoDraft	point \| survey \| config
PTS2BDY	Create a boundary around points	point \| set \| pline
PTS2NAME	Rename points to match their point numbers	point
PTS2PROF	Copy points to profile view	alignment
PTS2TEXT	Export a coordinate list	export
PTS2TRV	Export a .TRV file from the selected points	export
PTSETATB	Replace feature attributes of sets with those of points	feature attribute
PTSIN	Import point data from various ASCII file formats	import
PTSITE	Modify elevation by elevation or vertical angle	point
PTSITE2	Change elevation by slope and distance	point
PTSOUT	Output point data to various ASCII formats	export
PXPS	Display the Plan, Xsect, Profile and Super views	display \| view
QISOLATE	Isolate or unisolate current layer	display
QPROFILE	Display profiles or cross sections between two locations	profile
QSET	Create a set by bearing and distance	set
QSGRIDIN	Import Qsurv grid file	import
QSGRIDOU	Export to Qsurv grid file format	export
QSURVOUT	Export to Qsurv alignments and cross sections	export
QUIKLSET	Quickly control the visibility of layers	layer
QUICKPHASE	Part of PHASE	road
QV	Quick volumes by changing roadway HAL IP	report
RAILCANT	Compute elevations by railway cant	alignment
RAILTAMS	Report railway tracks at monument points	alignment \| report
RAILWAY	Create railway alignments with cant	alignment
RAIN	List rain database	hydrology
RAINT	List rainfall report totals	hydrology
RANGE	Report elevation range within a boundary or along a set	report
RAWTOAREA	Replaced by GFE	survey
RAW2RDE	Import a Carlson .RW5 file	import \| survey
RCLTABLE	Create a table of arc properties	report
RDDESIGNCRIT	Select road design criteria	alignment
RDDESIGNSET	Road design settings	road \| config
RDE	Raw data editor	survey
RDGUIDE	Road job workflow guide	road
RDSALIGN	Same as RDSGPALIGN	import
RDSCACALN	Import a Caice alignment	import
RDSDTMSET	Road DTM settings	road
RDSECHO	Report roadjob data	report
RDSGPALIGN	Import a Geopak alignment from RDS	import
RDVALDESCRT	Select vertical alignment design criteria	alignment
RDVALEDIT	Edit a vertical alignment by design criteria	alignment
RDX	Create Cross Section plots from a roadjob	plot
RDXGC	Create cross section plots with labels in a table	plot
RDXLINES	Create xlines on a road alignment	road
REACH	Define reach parameters	hydrology
READATTB	Add ATTRIB values from a Trimble DC file and add to point names	survey
REARLOTL	Replace segments in a set with a single segment	set
RECENTER	Pick a new location for the centre of the view	view
RECOVERSCROLL	Recover a lost coordinate scroll	display
REDO	Restore the most recent changes made by Undo	edit
REDRAW	Refresh the display of the current view	view
REFER	Refer selected objects to a reference object	alignment
REFERENCE	Same as REFER	alignment
REFERADD	Add reference files	file
REFERPTH	Change the path of reference files	file
REFFILE	Reference file manager	file
REGALIGN	Register multiple alignments	alignment
REGROUP	Change groups to match layer names	layer \| group
RELAYER	Relayer selected objects	layer
RELAYERSETS	Replaced by GCCOPY	layer
RELAYFIG	Relayer selected figures if they are closed	layer
RELAYREF	Relayer objects to the layers of their reference objects	layer
RemoveLinks	Remove DTM links from a project	dtm
REMTRIS	Remove triangle segments joining a square grid of points.	set
RENUM	Renumber individual points	point
RENUMBER	Renumber selected points	point
RENUMLOT	Renumber lots by adding an increment	set
RENUMREC	Renumber records to display over other records	record \| display
REPORTNEW	Replaced by GCREPORT	report
REPORTLT	Report bearings and distances of set segments	report
REPORTS	User-defined reports	report
RESECT	Solve a 3-point resection problem	point
RESONIN	Import Reson ASCII depths	hdms
RETTABLE	Create a table of arc properties	report
RETURNS	Create a kerb return elevation table	report
REVERSE	Reverse the direction of selected objects	sets
REVIEW	Move objects from one view to another	view
REVRECNO	Reverse record numbers	pline
RG	Reference Guide	help
RGRAPH	Create rainfall database graph	hydrology
RMGC	Link points to photos and text	config
RNDCORN	Round vertices of pines	drafting tools
ROADDESC	Import road job descriptions from a file	road \| import
ROADDTM	Create a DTM from a Road cross section surface	road
ROADGRID	Road design editor display grid	road
ROADJOB	Road Job Manager	road
ROADLIST	List road jobs	road \| report
ROADMAT	Road Job Materials	road
ROADPROF	Create profiles from road job surfaces	profile
ROADREG	Create roadjobs from registered HALs	road
ROADRPT	Print a Road report	report
ROADRUN	Export alignment and sets to Leica RoadRunner or iCON	export
ROADSETS	String points created from road cross sections	road
ROADSIGPOINT	Define significant points in a roadjob	masshaul
ROADSPOT	Report roadway details at a location	report
ROADWAY	Roadway manager	road
ROTATE	Rotate objects about a location	transform
ROT3D	Rotate points in 3D using 3 pairs of points	transform
RPAN	Replaced by RECENTER	view
RTSCALE	Rotate, translate and scale objects	transform
RUN	Execute an external file	config
RUNLINE	Label hydrographic runlines	hdms
SAVE	Save the current project	save
SAVEAS	Save the current project with another name	save
SCALE	Multiply easting and northing by scale factors	transform
SCALEELV	Multiply elevations by a scale factor	transform
SCALEGRID	Mass haul diagram grid settings	masshaul
SCIMSTAB	Create a table of NSW SCIMS survey marks	table
SCLBLKS	Scale blocks by a factor	block
SCLPLOTB	Scale closed plines by a factor	dynaview
SCS900IN	Import Trimble SCS900 record.txt or .csv file	import
SCS900OUT	Export roadway to Trimble SCS900	export
SCURVE	Create or edit a set curve	set
SEARCH	Search settings	config
SECURITYPASS	Replaced by ABOUT Products	config
SEGEDIT	Segment editor	set
SELECTAT	Select by feature attribute value	attribute
SELECTGP	Select by group number	group
SELECTPT	Select points not in sets	point
SENTINEL	Install Sentinel System Driver	config
SENTINELCLEANUP	Remove all Sentinel System Drivers	config
SENTINELMEDIC	Check Sentinel System Drivers and keys	config
SET	Create a set	set
SET2BL	Add points and elevations to breaklines	data prep
SET2PROF	Create a profile from a set	set
SET2PRFL	Create profiles representing a pipe	pipe general
SET2ROAD	Create road jobs from sets	alignment
SET2TRAV	Re-engineer Geodimeter .job data from sets	set
SET2TRV	Export a .TRV traverse file from the selected set	set
SETAREA	Draw a set enclosing two sets	set
SETCH	Set the chainage \| station to any location on an alignment	alignment
SETCURL	Set the current layer by picking an object	layer
SETDISTS	Report distances between sets at an interval	report
SETFILT	Filter excess points from straights in 2D sets	set
SETGRP	Set the group to the next group	group
SETLABEL	Label sets with name	text
SETNONAM	Display only sets with no names	set \| display
SETOFF	Create 3D sets at multiple offsets	data prep
SETSMOOTH	Modify contour smoothness and define dead regions	dtm \| set
SETSTA	Set the chainage \| station to any location on an alignment	alignment
SEWBC	Compute sewer block controls	sewer
SFLOOR	Create a DTM surface in-between two DTMs	dtm
SGRP	Set the group for selected objects	group
SHADEDTM	Shade DTM triangles by elevation ranges	dtm
SHADEPTS	Colour points by elevation ranges	dtm \| point
SHADEISO	Shade two DTMs or an isopach surface by isopach ranges	dtm
SHADESLP	Shade triangles by slope ranges	dtm
SHADETRI	Replaced by SHADESLP	dtm
SHADOW	Compute the limit of shadows	survey
SHAPE	Shape Editor	road
SHAPECLASS	Shape class manager	road
SHAPEMAN	Shape library manager	road
SHAPESET	Create sets from roadway shapes	road
SHEET2XS	Relayer digitized cross sections into XSect view	data prep
SHOWDIR	Show direction of pline or set	report
SHOWDIRN	Show direction of pline or set and reverse	report
SHOWDYNA	Show objects on dynaview layers	dynaview
SIDESLOPE	Project side slopes from alignment	dtm
SIDEVIEW	Replaced by FLIPUP	view
SIGHTDST	Create vehicular sight lines	alignment
SITEWORKIN	Import Paydirt SiteWork data	import
SITEWORKOUT	Export Paydirt SiteWork data	export
SKIP	Skip manager	alignment
SLICE	Interpolate batter points from HAL, VAL and side slope	point \| alignment
SLL	Create splined plines	pline
SLOPE	Create a boundary around a slope range	dtm
SLOPEMANAGER	Register slope alignments	road
SMANAGER	Subgrade manager	road
SMOKEDUC	Create smoke duct mounting points	tunnel
SMPROAD	Create simple one-template roads or channels	road
SMPTMPL	Create simple road or channel template	road
SNAPLYR	Toggle the snapability of a layer	toggle
SNAPSET	Configure the cursor snap interval and direction	config
SNR	Find and replace	text \| name
SNRFILE	Find and replace text in an external file	file
SOILNAIL	Create soil nail sets	set
SORPT	Replaced by GC60	survey
SORTSET	Sort sets by name	drafting tools
SPELL	Spell checker	drafting tools
SPLAY	Cuts splay corners into lots	sets
SPLINE	Spline plines	pline
SPLITSET	Split lots into smaller lots	sets
SPOT	Report the DTM elevation at a location	dtm \| report
STAKE	Report angles, distances and coordinates for setout	report
SSERIFE	Install MS Sans Serif Windows font	config
STAKED	Compare staked (as-built) points to design	report
STAKING	Report roadway staking	report
STARNET	Import a STAR*NET .TER file	config
STAORCHN	Configure station or chainage notation	alignment \| config
STATION	Set the beginning station of a HAL	alignment
STATUSBAR	Status bar toggle	display
STEXT	Create single line text	text
STOREXS	Copy cross sections to road layer	data prep
STREAM	Create plines or sets from a stream of locations	pline \| set
STRIPNUL	Strip null characters from a file	import \| export
STYLESET	Text style settings	text
SUBGRADE	Subgrade editor	road
SUNSTAR	Create an azimuth based on star or sun shots	survey
SUPERELV	Superelevation editor	alignment
SUPERPLOT	Superelevation diagram	alignment
SUPERVIS	Display your GPS location	survey
SURFACE	Surface manager	road
SURFAREA	Report the cut\|fill surface area using average end area	report
SURPEXPT	Export a Surpac string file	export
SURPIMPT	Import a Surpac string file	import
SURVCEXP	Export roadway to Carlson SurvCE CL, PRO and SCT files	export
SURVCONT	Export Moss GENIO to Trimble Survey Controller	export
SVIEW	Open or change the state of a view	view
SW1	Modify colour of points where slopes are steep	dtm
SYM2BLK	Replace symbols with blocks	block \| symbol
SYSTEM	Configure Terramodel system variables	config
TABLET	Configure a digitizer tablet	config
TAILING	Create a tailings beach	set
TAKEOFF	Replaced by INT3DSET	sets
TANCIRCLE	Create a set tangent to one or two circles	set
TC*	Drill hole and blast pattern layout	drill and blast
TD*	Tile drainage	tile drainage
TDIR	Replaced by TEXTDIR	text
TDS	Tripod Data Systems Survey Link DC	survey
TDTU	Trimble Data Transfer Utility	survey \| import \| export
TEMPLATE	Template editor	road
TEXT	Create text objects	text
TEXT2PNT	Create points at multiple insertion points of text or blocks	point \| text
TEXT2PT	Create a point at the insertion point of text	point \| text
TEXTALIGN	Align text objects in X or Y	text
TEXTALONG	Create a text object along a selected line.	text
TEXTARRO	Draw an arrow with text inside	text
TEXTBACK	Hatch text background	text \| hatch
TEXTCASE	Change the case of selected text	text
TEXTDIR	Modify text direction	text
TEXTFIT	Adjust the aspect ratio of text	text
TEXTIMPT	Import text at chainage \| station	text \| import \| road
TEXTMETRICS	Change the font, rotation, orientation, height, justification, slant and aspect ratio of text	text
TEXTRND	Round selected bearings and distances for cadastral plans	text
TEXTROTATE	Change the rotation angle of text	text
TEXTSCALE	Replaced by TXTSCALE	text
TEXTSTYLE	Change current text style	text
TEXTSWAP	Replaced by TXTSWAP	text
TEXTWRAP	Modify multi-line text to fit width	text
THREEPC	Replaced by GC3PTARC	set
TILECENTRED	Tile views centred by chainage	view
TILEHORIZ	Tile views horizontally	view
TILEVERT	Tile views vertically	view
TLYR	Replaced by VISLYR	layer
TMANAGER	Template manager	road
TMCUSTOM	Add C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP to TSP	config
TMGIS	Link Terramodel with a Microsoft Access database	report, import
TMLINK	Replaced by EXPORT and IMPORT	survey
TMLLIST	Open the installed TML list	report
TMRUN	See RUN	alias
TMXIN	Import objects and layers from a Terramodel exchange file (.TMX)	import
TMXLAYER	Export layers only to a Terramodel exchange file (.TMX)	export
TMXOUT	Export objects to a Terramodel exchange file (.TMX)	export
TOGLINKS	Toggle DTM display of links	dtm \| display
TOGQUICK	Toggle display of quick contours	dtm \| display
TOGSLOPE	Toggle display of triangle slope	dtm \| display
TOOLBOX	Create or edit toolboxes	config
TOWER	Replaced by DTMCONE	set
TP01	Pipeline project variables	pipe optimisation
TP02	Create HAL and VAL sets from HAL and VAL plines	pipe optimisation
TP03	Create 3D pipes using HAL and VAL sets	pipe optimisation
TP10	Generate 3D reports on pipes	pipe optimisation
TP40	Place airvalve and scour blocks	pipe optimisation
TP41	Create obstructions in profile view	pipe optimisation
TP99	Display and edit pipe node design information	pipe optimisation
TP99	Recentre plan and profile view by chainage	pipe optimisation
TPLSEC	Create long section plot for pipeline	pipe optimisation
TPSETOUT	Export to TPSetout	export
TPSTKOUT	Export to TPStakeout	export
TRACE	Create a set bounded by selected lines	set
TRACEBDY	Create a set bounded by selected lines	set
TRACKPLOT	Label trackplots	hdms
TRAV2D	Enter points by 2D traverse or radiation	set
TRAVERSE	Enter points by 3D traverse or radiation	set
TRAVPLIN	Enter a pline by traverse or radiation	set
TRAVUTM	Enter points by ellisoidal traverse or radiation	set
TRIM	Trim a line or arc	pline \| set
TRISOL	Triangle solutions	report
TRISWAP	Swap links in adjacent triangles	dtm
TRMBGRID	Export a Trimble gridded DTM (.DTX) file.	dtm
TRMBROAD	Export a roadway to Trimble .tta or .ttx	export
TRMBTIN	Replaced by EXPORT Trimble DTM (TTM)	export
TRMBUTIL	Part of TRMBGRID	dtm
TRUEDIST	Report a segment length with an applied scale factor	report
TSP	Terramodel Search Path Browser	setup
TTMIN	Replaced by IMPORT Trimble DTM (TTM)	import
TTXOUT	Replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading DC	export
TUNNELDTM	Unwrap a tunnel	tunnel \| dtm
TV	Terramodel Visualizer	visualizer
TVL	3D Visualiser	dtm
TVLITE	3D Visualiser	dtm
TWOPL	Create a curve from two points and a line	set
TXTFIT	Replaced by TEXTFIT	text
TXTHTDIF	Modify text to show changed differences between segment points	text
TXTIN	Import text from a file	text
TXTOUT	Replaced by GCTXTOUT	text
TXTREFEL	Match elevation of text to point	text
TXTSCALE	Modify the size of selected text	text
TXTSW	Replaced by TXTSWAP	text
TXTSWAP	Swap the text of two records with control of location, rotation and subject	text
UG	User Guide	help
UNDER	Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road	profile
UNDO	Undo changes	edit
UNHIDE	Reveal all segments of selected sets	set
UNITBLK	Insert blocks graphically using 1, 2 or 3 locations	block
UNITSSET	Configure dimension mode, precision and labelling	config
USTN2MOS	Modify objects from MicroStation 7 to look like objects from GENIO	import
UPDATE	Download software updates	config
UPGRADE	Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules	config
UPTAKE	Replaced by INTERP3D	point
USER	See REPORTS	report
VALDATA	Enter a vertical alignment by a curve table	alignment
VALEDIT	Shift intersection points in a vertical alignment	road
VALMANAGER	Register vertical alignments	alignment
VARIABLE	List, edit, export and import all project variables	config
VARIOFF	Insert points of constantly varying offset from a selected alignment	road
VCLOSE	Close the active view	view
VERTALIGN	Register one vertical alignment	road
VICRDSEC	Create cross sections from cross section plots	road
VIEWPORT	Turn on or off objects outside the field of view	view
VIEWROTATE	Rotate the display of the plan view	view
VIEWSCAL	Specify the plan view scale	view
VCLOSE	Configure the view settings	view
VISLYR	Toggle the visibility of a layer	toggle
VISUALIZER	Visualizer	visualizer
VMAX	Maximize the active view	view
VMIN	Minimize the active view	view
VNEW	Open a new view	view
VOLUME	Replaced by EARTHWORK	report
VPAN	Pan by numeric keypad with 1 = North	plot
VRECALL	Recall a saved view	view
VRESTORE	Restore a view	view
VRMLIN	Import Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data	import
VRMLOUT	Export Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data	export
VSAVE	Save a view	view
WALK	Create a pline given a DTM, a slope and a starting location	road
WESCOMIN	Import data from Wescom	import
WORDPAD	Open the Wordpad Editor	exec
WORDWRAP	Adjust the right margin of text	drafting tools
XLINEBDY	Create a boundary around Xlines	road
XLINES	Create Xlines along plines	road
XLINPTS	Create Xlines of points near HAL	road
XSECTION	Export cross section from DTM	DTM
XSECTIONDIGI	Digitize cross sections	road
XSECTIONEDT	Edit cross sections	road
XSECTIONMAN	Manage cross sections	road
XSECTPTS	Turn on only points at active chainage	point \| alignment
XSECTRPT	Report 3D length of cross sections	report
XSHEET	Create cross section plots in sheet view	plot
XSHEETGC	Create cross section plots in Geocomp-style	plot
XSHILO	Create sets at top and bottom of road	data prep
XSLABEL	Label obstructions on cross section plots	plot
XSOUT	Export cross sections from points	export
XSURAREA	Report volume of road job surface areas to a spreadsheet	report
XTIE	Replaced by GCXTIE	set
XTOCL	Create walls for use in Visualizer	visualizer
XVOLUMES	Report volume of all road job materials to a spreadsheet	report
XYZTOAREA	Replaced by GFE	survey
ZI	Zoom in 2x	view
ZO	Zoom out 2x	view
ZOOM	Zoom in by window	view
ZOOMSCAL	Zoom active view to a scale	view

The table below describes the operation and scope of each command summarised in the summary table above.

These details refer to Terramodel 10.61 with British English language and Geocomp Update Q on 64-bit Windows, and subsequent minor updates, so the terminology and operation may vary from your release. Click on the command name to return to the summary table.

At the end of each description, a short table shows the following information where available:

Command, TML, alias or executable date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
The approximate date of the last released revision, in dd/mm/yy format.	A reference which may include a page number or a link to a file installed with Geocomp Update.	Where to find the command in menus in various menu files supplied with Terramodel or the Geocomp Update.	Where to obtain the command (More info…	The most similar command in GEOCOMP 10.2; often also an alias to the command.

Command, TML, alias or executable date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
The approximate date of the last released revision, in dd/mm/yy format.	A reference which may include a page number or a link to a file installed with Geocomp Update.	Where to find the command in menus in various menu files supplied with Terramodel or the Geocomp Update.	Where to obtain the command (More info...	The most similar command in GEOCOMP 10.2; often also an alias to the command.

NAME

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH COMMAND

2DCON

Launch 3DPL, ASSIGNZ, CONLABZ or INTCON command.

			Source
			Hamilton

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from selected alignments.

Plan view:

Select a horizontal alignment pline or set. The default is the active HAL.

Profile view:

Select a vertical alignment pline or set. The default is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if existing. If no record is selected, or the VAL is out of the HAL range, the the new points have no elevations.

Settings

Chainage

Begin:: Enter beginning chainage
End: Enter ending chainage
Incr:: Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines: Also create points at Xlines

Offset distance

Enter the horizontal offset

Delta elevation

Enter the elevation difference

Name

Enter the name of the new points and set or leave blank to name points with chainages

OK

Accept the new settings

Cancel

Retain the old settings

Create points and set

Cancel

Cancel without creating new points or set

Filter large point DTMs generated by laser scanners, hydrographic surveys and photogrametry where much of the data is not significant.

Filter points on spikes, on similar grade and where removal would make insignificant changes to the volume.

Select a DTM layer and a boundary

Max Triangle Grade %: Filter out spikes and troughs by removing points where all surrounding triangles exceed the grade and all are either sloping away (a peak) or sloping toward the point (a trough).
Max Common Side Grade Diff %: Filter large triangles of similar grade by removing points where surrounding triangles have a small difference in Common Side Grade.
Max Volume Difference m³: Filter small triangles by removing points where the resultant local difference in volume is small.
Max Effective Area: Filter points where the total area of surrounding triangles is small.
Max Number of iterations: Reform the DTM and repeat the filter for the number of iterations or, if 0.00, until less than 10% is removed by the last iteration.
Colour of Removed Points: Modify the colour of the filtered points for deletion by colour.
Move Filtered Points to layer zero: Move filtered points layer 0 or make them non-contourable.
Only Filter point if same colour: Protect points where colours vary
Keep Points on Breaklines: Protect points that lie on a breakline.
Keep Points on DTM Edge: Protect points on the DTM Edge.
Keep Points > 1 Standard Deviations.: Protect points with an elevation difference of more than 1 standard deviation from the new DTM.
Compute Volume Difference: Report the difference in volume between the start and final surfaces.
Generate Report.: Report the results to P3Pad.

Points inside dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH are not modified.

See also FILTER to filter plines, BLFILTER to filter along sets and GC31 to remove duplicate points and GC53 to change and identify non-contourable points.

TML date	Guide		Source
23/03/23	Help button		POA

3DMCOUT

Compute cross sections where xlines intersect selected 3D sets, then export hal, val and sections to a single MCA file and report to P3Pad.

MCA files are the input files for the now-obsolete Topcon 3D-MC machine control system. They are not usable by current Topcon 3D machine control systems which import .DWG and other files. Check with your Topcon dealer.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

3DPIPE

Report the record number and name of selected sets, then the following values for each point:

Back, Intersection and Forward Point Numbers
Xline chainages and coordinates (if selected)
True 3D Angle
3D and 2D Chainage of Intersection Point
Horizontal Deflection Angle and Direction
Vertical Deflection Angle
Bearing In and Out
3D Distance In and Out
Zenith Angle In and Out
Slope In and Out.

The report concludes with the total 3D distance.

This information is especially useful for designing and laying out long pipe networks.

Options:

Create Xlines labelled with chainages at an interval
Append the horizontal deflection angle and direction to each point name
Write the report to a CSV file.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from the main horizontal and vertical alignments on a roadjob.

Road:

Select a roadjob.

Settings

Chainage

Begin:: Enter beginning chainage
End: Enter ending chainage
Incr:: Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines: Also create points at Xlines

Offset distance

Enter the horizontal offset

Delta elevation

Enter the elevation difference

Name

Enter the name of the new points and set or leave blank to name points with chainages

OK

Accept the new settings

Cancel

Retain the old settings

Create points and set

Cancel

Cancel without creating new points or set

Project a DTM surface in a perspective, orthographic or plan view.

Display a single DTM surface with points, links, coloured bands, grids, shadows and elevation ranges.
Each surface is displayed in a new window; display multiple surfaces.
The elevation colour ranges can be configured, saved and imported.
Shadows can be controlled using configurable light sources.
Navigate using the mouse in flying or rotating modes.
View the data in perspective, orthographic or plan views.
Export the image in .bmp, .jpg, .psd, .gif, .tif or .tga format; or as a stereo pair.

Open a project with a DTM surface such as C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\Docs\twin lakes.pro.
Select 3D Visualizer option from the DTM menu or toolbar.
Select a DTM layer.
Select some points on the DTM layer by Window, or don't select any to select all points on the whole layer.
Click OK to display the selected points in a new 3D Visualiser view.
In the Navigation menu, enable Orthographic Mode.
In the Navigation menu, enable Plan View.
In the Draw menu, enable Colour-coded and disable Fence and Grid.
From the File menu, select Export Image...
Enter the full path and filename of the image file to be saved.
Enable Geo-reference to also create a registration file to locate the image.
Enable Snap with white background.
Select 256 colors.
Click Save.
Close the 3D Visualizer window or leave it open.
From the Terramodel File menu, select Image manager.
Click Add
Browse to select the image file.
The coordinates of the corners are computed from the registration file.
Click OK and Done to see the image behind your Terramodel project.

This project is a great example to practice on. Try different modes under the Navigation, Draw and Settings menus. Try the toolbar buttons for the same functions.

A 3D Visualizer window can be opened on a display that is unexpected, disconnected or turned off.

Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

FIXTVLITE is an alias command that by updates the Windows Registry to reset the default position of new 3D Visualizer windows to a default location on the primary Windows display.

Each 3D Visualiser window can be maximised, minimised and restored. To open any minimized window, click on the minimised window icon displayed in the bottom left corner of your primary display.

Try updating video drivers. For example, to update the Microsoft Basic Display Adaptor, open Windows Device manager, right-click on Microsoft Basic Display Adaptor and update the driver.

This happens when many sets have Hard or Sharp smoothness. To fix this in the current project, modify the smoothness of all sets in the DTM to Soft with SETSMOOTH. To avoid this for new projects, use DESIGNSET to confirm that the default smoothness is also Soft.

Check the 3D Visualizer settings. Use LINKSET to display the your links so you can confirm their extents.

3D Visualiser Help is available from the Help menu in 3D Visualizer, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPTVL command.

3D Visualiser is also known as 3D Visualizer, TVLITE, Terravista Lite, TVL and 3D Views.

3D Visualiser is included with the Field data module. Terramodel Visualizer (TV) is a separate application that also displays Terramodel project files in perspective and in movies with points, sets, multiple surfaces, textured regions, trees and draped orthophotos. Visualizer is separately installed. Try Visualizer with the supplied demonstration projects, which still work even if you don't have any TV modules on your key.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	ADD 9.7 51	DTM\|3D Visualiser DTM\|3D Visualizer Tunnels\|3D Visualiser Tunnels\|3D Visualizer Toolbar button	Field Data Module	MM 8

ABBREVSET

Abbreviations are used in display, reports, and labelling. They apply to both attribute text and text objects created while labeling. Once you have made changes to the abbreviations, attribute text will be updated when the display is redrawn, but text objects created by labeling must be re-labeled to be updated.

Curve: Abbreviations for circular curves. Each label can have a maximum of eight characters. Use any ASCII character in a prefix label by entering "\" and the number of the character. For example, enter \131 for the delta symbol in TMODELF.FNT.
Spiral: Abbreviations for spiral curve labels created by LABELHAL. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Vertical: Abbreviations for vertical curve labels created by LABELVAL. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Table: Line and curve table headings for LABELTABLE. Each label can have a maximum of 16 characters.
Point: Abbreviations for point names. Each prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters. These abbreviations are only used by commands that create points along an alignment at positions where IP or curve information are listed.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Abbreviations	Secured

ABOUT

Report the Terramodel software version, copyright and modules.

About

Report the Terramodel software version number, Toolpak version and copyright details.

Modules

Report all current software modules. Field Data Module, which includes the basic functions, is always listed. If a Terramodel security is attached and functional, any other modules on the key are listed.

Products...

If a functional Trimble security key that can enable Terramodel modules is detected, the Products... button is made visible. If there is no Products button, the Terramodel key cannot be found and Field data is the only module. For the key to be detected, it must be a valid key, attached before you start Terramodel, and the Sentinel System Driver must have been installed (SENTINEL).

If you have attached a Terramodel key but Products... button is not visible, see www.geocomp.com.au/support/dongles. If you suspect the key is faulty, or not programmed with your modules, contact Geocomp Systems.

Family

List modules for families of Trimble modules that can be secured by the same key. Families can include Terramodel, Terramodel DOS, Paydirt, Trimble Business Center and SpectraPrecision.

Serial Number

The serial number is also the licence number which is usually printed on the key. The - extension indicates the number of times the key has been updated with different modules.

Lock version

0: Enable Terramodel for Windows versions to 9.7.
1: Enable Terramodel for Windows versions 9.8.
2: Enable Terramodel for Windows versions from 10.

Days of trial

The number of days remaining on any trial period.

Currently-owned or time limited trial licences.

List all possible modules on the key for the selected family. Permanent modules are shown by blue crosses. Timed modules are shown by blue clocks. The remaining grey squares show possible additional modules. Not all modules listed are still available for sale.

Order form

To enable you to add modules or prove your current modules, your Terramodel dealer may ask you to generate a Purchase Code report for your attached key. This report is not an "order form" as such, but instead a report showing the serial number, current modules, any additional modules you request and the purchase code.

Your Name, Company Name & Address, E-Mail address, Fax Number and Phone Number: Enter indentifying information.
Additional modules: Request additional modules by Left click for permanent modules or Right click for timed modules.
Print: Report to the default Windows printer. To report to a PDF, first change the default printer.
E-mail: Report to a new email. Change the To: address to that of your Terramodel dealer, and the CC: address to your own. If a new email cannot be generated in a minute or so, an error message appears, in which case use the Print option to generate a PDF.

Upgrade

To add modules, enter the Upgrade code supplied by a Terramodel dealer.

Close

Close Products on Key

Close About Terramodel

ACADCONV is a simple interface in Terramodel to use ODA File Converter to convert all .DWG or .DXF files in a specified folder to R2000 .DWG or .R10 DXF files in another specified folder.

ODA File Converter and ODA Drawings Explorer are free to use applications from Open Design Alliance that import and export most variations of .DWG and .DXF files of any version from R9 to R2018. ODA file converter can convert files in bulk. ODA Drawings Explorer can display them.

R2000 is earliest .DWG version that supports spaces in file names. R10 is the earliest version that supports 3D coordinates. R10 is the last version that does not use vports. .DWG files take up less space. .DXF files can be viewed in text editors.

Download and install ODA File Converter or ODA Drawings Explorer.
Create a dedicated folder for .DWG and .DXF files to be converted.
Create a dedicated folder in which to place to the converted .DWG or .DXF files.
Place all the .DWG or .DXF files that you want to convert into the Input folder.
Start Terramodel.
Run ACADCONV.
In Settings,
- Browse to select the ODA File Converter .EXE, for example C:\Program Files\ODA\ODAFileConverter_title 19.8.0\ODAFileConverter.exe
- Enter the path for input files, for example, X:\TMData\Project1\In
- Enter the path for output files, for example, X:\TMData\Project1\Out
- Select R2000 .DWG or R10 .DXF for the output format
Click "Convert DWG and DXF Files".
Close ACADCONV.
IMPORT .DWG or .DXF files from the Output folder.
Tidy away the data files in the folders before your next conversion to avoid converting them again or getting confused.

TML date	Guide		Source
10/02/21	built-in		Geocomp Update or $200

ACTIVE

Active alignment: Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Set: Make the set or pline the active alignment
Clear: Clear the active alignment

Active alignments are used to select alignments quickly when prompted and control the display visibility of referenced objects.

Objects that refer to alignments derive their chainage properties from those alignments and can be replaced by alignment labelling commands.

See also GCACTIVE which selects the active alignment from alignments registered in HALMANAGER.

See also REFER which refers objects to an alignment.

PROFILE refers the profile it creates to the selected alignment. Objects in the profile are invisible if they refer to alignments other than the active alignment. If the selected alignment refers to another alignment, PROFILE will use the chainages of that other alignment.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	UG 125	Settings\|Active alignment	Field Data Module	415

ACTIVESTATION

Set, clear or list the current active alignment and station.

ACTIVECHAINAGE is an alias to ACTIVESTATION.

The active chainage, or active station, is the chainage of a specified xline on the active alignment. In the XSect view, set the active alignment and active chainage to view only one cross section at a time. Clear the active alignment to see all cross sections of that alignment drawn on top of each other.

In the XSect view, X value is horizontal offset, Y value is vertical offset and Z value is chainage. Each pline, text and block drawn in the Xsect view is given the Z value equal to active chainage at the time. The Z value can be modified using commands such as ELEVATION that modify elevation in the Plan view.

Cross sections are drawn as plines and text in the XSect view using RDX, RDXGC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC. Each pline and text object created by these commands has a Z value, from the chainage of its xline, and refers to the active alignment, or to another pline that refers to that alignment.

Plines, text and blocks in the Xsect view that refer to other chainages or alignments are hidden in the XSect view. Each cross section dynaview in the Sheet view only shows objects for one chainage and alignment.

Other visible objects are displayed including points, sets, and those objects with no chainage (Z value = *). Objects which are off, such as the plotboxes for the sheets, and objects on layers that are off, are also hidden in the normal way.

These rules enable you to control which cross sections is visible and to draw, edit, measure and so on.

Alignment: Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Chainage|Station: Select the chainage along the alignment to be the current active chainage
Next: Make the next xline with a greater chainage, along the current active alignment, the active chainage
Previous: Make the previous xline with a lesser chainage, along the current active alignment, the active chainage
Set: Set the selected set or pline to the active alignment and make the specified chainage the active chainage
Clear: Clear the active alignment and active chainage

When first installed with the US English language, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station or with British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. This TML List refers to Station, Chainage or Station | Chainage.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Active chainage Settings\|Active station	Field Data Module	410

ADD2NAME

Change the names of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

ADD2PLIN

Create a vertex at a location and insert into a pline.

The segment nearest to the new vertex is replaced by two straight segments.

If the new vertex is at a similar chainage to the previous vertex, the previous vertex is moved to the new location.

Select Cancel to finish editing the pline.

See also ADD2SET, DIVIDE, GCIN2SET and GC61.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

ADD2PTNO

Change the point numbers of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

If you are adding alpha characters, or any modified point number will exceed the "Max integer pn" in POINTSET, ensure that SYSTEM has sufficient "Max Alpha pts".

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update

ADD2SET

Create a point at a location and insert into a set.

The segment nearest to the new point is replaced by two straight segments.

The elevation of the new point is interpolated from the connecting points.

If the new point is at a similar chainage to the previous point, the previous point is moved to the new location.

Select Cancel to finish editing the set.

See also ADD2PLIN, DIVIDE, GCIN2SET and GC61.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

ADD2TXT

To add a pair of parentheses only, use BRACKETS.

Extended text objects with more than 255 characters are not supported.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Modify\|Text\|Prefix or suffix	Geocomp Update or $200

ADDIMAGE

Add an image into Image manager located by pline boxes.

To add the same logo into multiple sheets:

Use LAYER to create a new and current layer.
Use BOX to place a pline box over the first sheet where the logo is to go.
Use MATRIX to copy the box at the sheet spacing over every sheet.
In ADDIMAGE
1. Select the boxes by layer.
2. Browse to select the image file of the logo.
3. Click "Add Image" to add the image, located by the lower left and upper right extents of each selected box.

Determine the depth of the isopach at the location of each point on a DTM surface, and then add that depth to the elevation of those points.

If the DTM point is beyond the limits of the isopach layer's DTM edge, the point's elevation is unchanged.

Import Transverse Mercator coordinate systems from a file for use with commands such as COORDCON and GCCOORD that transform coordinates from one mapping system to another.

The files has extension .GMS and comma-separated values. This example shows the first two lines with the field headings and the definition of Broome Grid 2020:

#HORIZ_DATUM,Ellipsoid,PROJECTION_ID,PROJECTION_NAME,CM_ZONE_DD,FALSE_EASTING,FALSE_NORTHING,CENTRAL_SCALE_FACTOR
GDA2020,GRS1980,BRO2020,Broome Grid 2020,122.3333333333,50000.0000000000,2300000.0000000000,1.0000029800

Importing coordinate systems from a file that you prepare is easier than using the "Define CS" button in GCCOORD or COORDCON. Run or COORDCON at least once in a session before ADDMAPSY.

If your projection is other than Transverse Mercator, for example, Lambert Conformal Conic, please refer to Chapter 13 of the Terramodel User Guide, or contact Geocomp Systems for advice.

Commands that use coordinate systems in the Mentor database include COORDCON, GCCOORD, FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, GCLLGRID, LLTABLE and SHADOW.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

ADDTIDES

Apply or reapply tide corrections from a tide file to selected depth records within a time period.

The tide file must in the format dd/mm/yyyy,hh:mm:ss,t.ttt where t.ttt is the tide value in metres and correctly sorted by increasing date and time.

Depth records are points with negative elevations when deeper than tide datum or positive when drying heights (above water). The point name must have been formatted by HDMS.

Restore any depths rounded with HDMSRTR prior to running ADDTIDES. Relabel depths after running ADDTIDES.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	built-in help		HDMS

ADJAREA

Create a closed pline that encloses a specified area by moving a reference set while fixing other boundary sets or plines.

Bndy Objs:

Select plines or sets that define the stationary part of the boundary only.

Ref Bndy:

Select a reference boundary set that, together with selected the selected boundary objects, defines an enclosed figure as it is moved until the value of the target area is reached.

Center

Select a location near the centre of the proposed closed figure.

Settings

Adjusted Area:

Enter the target area in square project units

Type of Adjustments

Adjust by Azimuth: Shift the reference line along the specified azimuth
Pivot Point: Rotate the reference line about a specified Rotation point

OK or Cancel

Accept or reject changes to Settings and position the mouse to select a location near the centre.

OK

Create the closed pline with the specified area.

Decide on the desired lot area in square project units
Decide which boundary objects are fixed
Check that they do not already define an enclosed region
Create a reference boundary to be moved until the target area is reached
Check that the fixed objects and the reference line together enclose a region and will still do so as the reference line is moved.
Run ADJAREA
Select the fixed boundary objects
Select a reference boundary pline or set that crosses the fixed objects to define a closed region
In Settings
- Enter the desired adjusted area in square project units
- Specify azimuth direction in which to move, or a pivot point around which to rotate
Specify a location within the proposed lot
OK to create a closed pline with the adjusted area

Please refer to Adjarea.pdf for an illustrated example.

ADJAREA is also known as ADJUSTAREA.

Select boundary objects that define an open figure.
The Reference Boundary must be a set.
The reference boundary can have multiple segments and arcs. .
Vertices are created where the sets and plines intersect.
Curve types other than circular arcs are converted to chords.
Where there are two possible solutions, the solution enclosing the selected centre is used.
The created figure is a pline. Use GCCONVRT or CONVERT to convert to a set for use as a lot.

AdjArea	PredArea
Create single lot	Create multiple lots
Use set and pline boundaries	Use set boundaries
Create closed pline	Create closed set
Consider boundaries, area and direction or rotation	Consider frontage, minimum area, rear length, angle and setback

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	Adjarea.pdf	Cogo\|Lots\|Adjust area Cogo\|Adjust area	Field Data Module

AIRVALVE

Place blocks on a HAL and VAL to show the location of airvalves.

The blocks must be named AirValvePlan and AirValveProfile.

The blocks are placed at high points, such as airvalves, and low points, such as scour valves.

Create, edit and delete aliases for commands.

An alias is a command that substitutes for other text entered at the command line or in a menu, toolbar button or workspace button.

Aliases are for commands which need command line arguments, are unfamiliar, renamed, misspelled, replaced or are easier to remember in your own language, dialect, idiom or standard.

Use EXEC in an alias to execute an external command.

Add: Enter a new alias in the Alias field, the command name the alias is for in the Command field and any command arguments, up to 66 characters, in the Arguments field. The alias cannot include spaces. The command must be an an installed Terramodel command or TML and not another alias. To copy an alias, select an existing alias and enter a new alias name and modify the command or argumnents. Click Add to add the new alias.
Update: Select an alias from the list and enter any new values in Alias, Command or Arguments field. Click Update to replace the alias.
Delete: Select an alias from the list. Click Delete to remove the alias.
Print: Report all aliases to P3Pad.
OK: Accept all changes and update the ALIAS.INI file.
Cancel: Cancel without making any changes.

User action	Result	Example of
Type UNITSET	Execute UNITSSET	Common misspelling
Type FAVOURITE	Execute FAVORITES	Alternative spelling
Type FAVORITOS	Execute FAVORITES	Spanish language
Type REVEAL	Reveal hidden set segments with UNHIDE	Rename obscure command
Type VOLUME	Execute EARTHWORK	Keep Terramodel 9.8 command
Type THREEPC command	Execute GC3PTARC command	Substitute with alternative command
Click on in Views toolbox	Open Profile view using SVIEW	Command line argument and toolbox
Click on in VPAN toolbox	Pan right	Command line argument and toolbox
Type Z or W	ZOOM using a window	Like AutoCAD
Type MOOZ	MAGNIFY the view scale by 0.5 to zoom out	Like SDRMap
Type DXFOUT or DWGOUT	Execute an DXF or DWG EXPORT script	Like AutoCAD
Type 17	Measure 3D vector using GC29	Like Geocomp
Type CASCADE	Cascade views by "MACROPLAY Cascade"	Execute a macro
Type EXPLORE	Launch Windows File Explorer	Launch an external executable application using EXEC
Click on on Toolbar	Launch Windows File Explorer	Launch an external executable application using EXEC
Type UG	Open the User Guide	Open an external file using TMRUN in a fixed location
Type RUN C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\DOCS UG.PDF	Open the User Guide	Open an external file using TMRUN in a user-specified location

Aliases are defined in the first ALIAS.INI file in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP). If you use ALIAS command to add or edit aliases, please keep note of your changes as the default ALIAS.INI, which has over 2000 aliases, is replaced during each Geocomp Update. Many commands and menu items in Geocomp Updates rely on these aliases. The default is C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\ALIAS.INI.

Use TSP to check which ALIAS.INI is in use (although if ALIAS.INI is in any location under C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\, the file actually in use might be a copy in the Windows VirtualStore).

We do not recommend defining your own ALIAS.INI from scratch. If you do, many commands added or edited by Geocomp Systems will not run. The best way to add your own aliases is with ALIAS command. To edit with a text editor, copy C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\ALIAS.INI to C:\TMCUSTOM\ALIAS.INI, make your edits and rename C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\ALIAS.INI to ALIASGC.INI so that your ALIAS.INI is found in the TSP. Lines that start with a semi-colon ";" are hidden from the Alias Editor. Changes take effect when you restart Terramodel or, if you edit with ALIAS command, when you click OK. Don't try to manually edit any file under C:\Program files (x86)\.

Any remnant [Alias] section in TMODWIN.INI would take precedence over ALIAS.INI. Use EDITINI (Show Old INI File) to show whether there is an [Alias] section in any INI file. Use EDITINI (Fix Status Bar) to remove any [Alias] section from the current TMODWIN.INI.

ALIAS.INI in Geocomp Updates include all commands on the English, French, Spanish and German menus.

Import HAL, VAL or SLOPE alignments with horizontal curve radii or vertical curve lengths from a comma-delimited file.

Browse or enter the filename.

The Settings control the Name, Colour, and Linetype for the alignment created.

The check box "Adjust for HAL Equations", allows you to select the registered HAL from which to extract chainage equations.

The current view determines how the file is interpreted. Where there is no curve, omit the value in [ ].

Plan (Y before X in View Settings OFF): East,North,[,Radius]
Plan (with Y before X in View Settings ON): North,East[,Radius]
Profile: Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]
XSect: Offset, Elevation[,Radius]
Super: Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]

Import chainages and offsets for a horizontal or vertical alignment.

These are added to the Alignment Offsets in the HAL or VAL Manager.

Browse to select the comma-delimited file.
The format is assumed to be: Chainage, Offset.
Pick the Pline or Set that you want to use for the registered HAL.
Enter a name for the HAL to be registered. The default is the filename.

This will overwrite any already-registered HAL with the same name.

Rotate selected text to be perpendicular to alignment.

Zoom to the extents of all visible objects in the active view and refresh.

The extents of objects inside blocks are not considered. Use ALL to see the effect of changes to vertical exaggeration in VIEWSET.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	View\|All Toolbar button Function key F12	Field Data Module	131

ALT

Enable the menu for key entry for selection of a menu by pressing the underlined character then select an item from the menu, without using the Mouse.

ALT is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ALT which simulates the standard Windows functions of pressing ALT key or F10 function key.

Macro date		Menu	Source
15/11/12		Function key F10 File\|Macro\|Play\|alt	Standard User-definable

ANG

Reports the horizontal angle at an instrument point subtended to the right from the backsight point to the foresight point.

Also reports the distance from the instrument point to the foresight point.

Uses the current Angle Units setting.

If all three of the coordinate locations are point objects, the point numbers will be displayed.

See also IDANGLE, GCANG, GCLABIP and LABELANG.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update

ARC

Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Center, End" or "3 Point".

ARC defaults to the last Type used.

If you need Sets, use CONVERT or GCCONVRT command to change the Plines to Sets, or use GCARC.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.

If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.

In Terramodel Help, this command is called ARCS.

The arc is drawn anti-clockwise to the left of the locations.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the second point.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC, ARC2P, GCARC and GC3PTARC.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Arc\|Set by 2 points	Geocomp Update or $250	21

ARCBL

Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.

The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.

The new sets are named "SETARCBL", and given the current line colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.

See also GCARCBL to make the chords invisible and BLFILTER to filters out excess breakline points.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 1217	DTM\|Arc breaklines	Secured

ARCBREAK

Replace all arcs in selected sets with additional segments by number of points, chords or an arc-to-chord tolerance.

Points: Create the specified number of new points per arc and replace the arc segments with new arcs.
Chords: Create the specified number of new points per arc and replace the arc segments with chords.
Arc to chord: Create new points at the specified maximum distance from the arc and replace the arc segments with chords.

Set layer: Create the new points on the same layer as the set
Current layer: Create the new points on the current layer

The smoothness of sets is not changed so any dead regions still apply.

See also GCCHORD which can also create chords along plines and GCARCBL which creates chords in separate sets.

TML date		Menu	Source	Geocomp
08/02/22		Draw\|Arc\|Break into chords	Geocomp Update or $25	39

ARCENTRE

Turn off or on the visibility of all points at the centre of arc segments in sets.

If sets are visible, their arc centres are also visible unless ARCENTRE has been used to toggle off project variable GC_ARC_CENTRE.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Modify\|On/Off\|Arc centres	Geocomp Update or $250

AREA

Report the area and perimeter if closed and length if open.

Line: Report to message scroll the area of a single figure and the accumulated area after subsequent selections.
Multiple: Report to P3pad for each selected figure including the sum.
Digitiser: Report area inside selected locations, without creating having to create a new object.

The unit labelling is configured by UNITSSET.

The message “Unable to get record's area” usually means that the figure crosses itself somewhere. If you do not know where, get the area using GC10 or User-defined REPORTS such as Closure Report and Geometry Report. With GC10 and REPORTS the area inside the enclosed part is subtracted from the larger part, not added, and figures with spirals are not valid.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Reports\|Area/Perimeter Inquire\|Area/Perimeter	Field Data Module	63

ARRANGE

Arrange is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ARRANGEICONS which simulates the Arrange icons command in the Window menu.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Window\|Arrange icons File\|Macro\|Play\|arrangeicons	Standard User-definable

ASAPIMAG

Add to each plotbox the same images that are in the mastersheet.

After you have used PLANSET to create plotboxes, place each logo image once in the mastersheet using IMAGE Manager then use ASAPIMAG to copy the logos in IMAGE Manager so they appear on each sheet.

The plotboxes don't have to have been created by PLANSET, they just need to all be the same size and shape and all refer to the same plotbox (which PLANSET calls a "mastersheet" ).

Select a new file format for the "ASCII Points" import or export script.

Run the program "Terramodel Ascii Points.exe" to select and install a new default file format to be used by IMPORT or EXPORT to import or export ASCII points files.

The available formats include Easting, Northing and Elevation, (E, N and Z), with or without P (point number) or D (name), in different orders and delimited by commas or spaces.

"Terramodel Ascii Points.exe" replaces "C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\ASCII points.xi" or "ASCII points.xe". If the default format does not change when you next run the import or export script, delete the hidden copy of the file with the same name at "C:\Users\[your Windows user name]\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\" and try again.

Import an Ashtech formatted points file (.PTS).

TML date			Source
29/10/08			Field Data Module

ASM01

Renumber selected points to increase in the direction of a selected alignment.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

ASSETLAY

Asset_ID attributes are feature attributes commonly used with pipe survey commands.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

ASSIGNZ

Modify elevation of contour plines in the order of a crossing pline.

Import a file of elevation differences (N-values) to be used to transform AUSGeoid98, AUSGeoid09 or AUSGeoid2020 elevations to or from Australian Height Datum.

In the same way, AUSGEOID can also import AUSGeoid2020 uncertainty values.

The N-values are in a one-minute grid of Latitude and Longitude. For AUSGeoid98 and AUSGeoid09 data, the coordinate system is LL-GDA94. For AUSGeoid2020, LL-GDA2020.

Select a suitable boundary to limit the number of imported points. For example, importing Ausgeoid2020 with no boundary creates over 15,000,000 points. At the other extreme, selecting a boundary that is too small will import insufficient grid points to interpolate N-values over your whole site.

Obtain a suitable AUSGeoid .DAT or .TXT file containing N-Values.
In Terramodel,
1. Start a NEW project.
2. Import any clipping boundaries.
3. Select or create an empty current layer with a suitable name like N-VALUES 09 LL or N-VALUES 2020 54.
4. Run AUSGEOID to import N-values from the file.
5. Use TMXOUT to export the clipped N-Value grid to .TMX for later use.

Change: Select a geodetic coordinate system
For Bdy:: Select a limiting boundary in that coordinate system
Transform Lat. Long into East, North: Transform the grid into Eastings and Northings in that coordinate system if for adjusting elevations. Do not transform if for adjusting distances.
Import N values into Current Layer: Import points from the file that fall within the boundary
Cancel

Download AUSGeoid2020 .DAT files from Geoscience Australia. These .DAT files are huge.

Download AUSGeoid09 .TXT files from NSW, NT, QLD, SA, TAS, VIC or WA or from Geoscience Australia.

For more information and more .DAT and .TXT files, see Geoscience Australia.

Surveyors with certain Trimble instruments can apply elevation differences while importing "Trimble raw survey (.dc)" points using .GGF files (such as these AUSGeoid09 .GGF files for Australia or for just South East Australia). Matching .GGF files must be correctly installed on the instrument and in Coordinate System Manager (CSM). Contact your Trimble instrument supplier for details.

NZGEOID: Import New Zealand N-values
GC54: Correct elevations
GC29UTM: Measure distances
TRAVUTM: Traverse
GCSCANIN: Import lidar

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

AUTODRAFT

Create pline, sets, blocks and text to names of selected points according to field codes defined in an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file.

AutoDraft creates survey drawings from field-coded survey data using a user-defined configuration file.

The key to realizing the power of AutoDraft is standardising your company's field codes and surveying procedures. When those collecting the data and those using Terramodel to create maps from the data are talking the same language, AutoDraft turns survey data into mapped data effortlessly.

Identify every feature that you expect to survey in the field and assign each feature a unique field code.

Identify the way you want to define curved lines in the field.

Create a global field codes to apply to any feature and field code attributes for each feature.

Create a configuration file with the AutoDraft Editor.

For each point feature, define the text and blocks to create.

For each line feature, define the line attributes, associated offset lines, text and blocks to create.

When the configuration file is complete, supply the codes to your survey teams.

When a survey includes an unknown code, either correct the survey or update the .ADC immediately. Do not leave unknown codes in an ADC.

In the field, the surveyor assigns a field code to each surveyed point. Each field code identifies the point. For example, a field code identifies a tree, the top of a curb, a monument, etc. Field codes can be very simple (MON = monument; FE = fence, TC = top of curb, CL = centerline) or very complex, depending on the amount of information that is standardized. No matter how you use field codes, when the field code is imported, Terramodel treats the field code as a point descriptor, which becomes the point object name.

In the office, the AutoDraft Editor allows you to create a configuration file that holds global settings that apply to all features and the feature definitions for each field code. A feature is defined as either a point or a line. AutoDraft allows you to define the colour and layer of the point or line and any number of field codes. Each field code has several field code options that you can assign to it. These field code options include such things as designating a point as the beginning or the end of a line, as a point on a curve, or a point that is to be labeled with text or a symbol. The AutoDraft Editor offers the functionality to organize these features by feature category. Each feature can also have any number of text objects and blocks associated with it.

Each line feature can have any number of lines that can be offset both vertically and horizontally.

Advanced features include

Pass a parameter from field directly to the final map.
Define a feature with two or three points and dynamically stretch a block between them.
Define multiple features at a single point.
Define multiple line strings.

AutoDraft requires a configuration file. This configuration file is a binary file that stores global information, settings that apply to the overall processing of field codes and global field codes, and point and line features associated with field codes.

The simplest way to create a configuration file is to base it on a file that already exists.

Run AutoDraft.
Browse to select a configuration file to use as a base. Look for examples in C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\Docs and C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Samples\AutoDraft.
Click the Edit button. The AutoDraft Editor appears.
Select File|New to create a new configuration file with the same global settings.
Drag and drop Global field codes, Feature Definitions feature categories and individual features from your base file to your new file.
Close the base configuration file without saving it, just in case you made a change accidently.
Finally, use File|Save or File|Save As to save the new configuration.

To use any global code with any feature in a field code, enter the feature code, a space and the global code.

For example:

If a Feature code is	and a Global code is	then this Field code	can automatically draft this
MON	T-	MON T-	a monument with without text
CH	Z-	CH Z-	a church spite with no elevation
FE	POC	FE POC	the mid-point of an arc in a fence
PIT01	CLOSE	PIT01 CLOSE	the closing segment of a pit

To join all selected points with sets based on common field code and string number in the point name, leave the ADC field blank.

To automatically draft surveys where standard survey coding procedures have been followed, select a corresponding .ADC file.

Browse to select a predefined ADC file such as Geocomp Field Codes Revised.ADC, USStandard.ADC or UKStandard.ADC, or Edit to modify or create your own.

AutoDraft can accommodate many survey conventions. One common convention is start each point name with a field code (also known as a feature code) followed immediately by a string code. Prefix each comment, global code or parameter with a space.

Points

Select points to be automatically drafted.

Config file

Browse to select an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file. The default file and location is stored as a project variable. Leave blank to join points with the same names.

Edit

Open the AutoDraft Editor.

File

Open or create a new AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) File

New: Create a new AutoDraft configuration file with default global settings are copied from any currently active configuration file.
Open: Open an existing configuration file, whether ASCII or binary.
Close: Close the currently active configuration file, with a prompt to save any changes.
Import: import field codes from a BLKPTS .map file, a MAPPOINTS .map file, a PTLAYCOL file or a LABELPOINT Symbol.map file.
Export FCL: Export the field codes as a Trimble .FCL file format for Survey Controller 10.x field software. See also FCXOUT.
Save: Save the currently active configuration file in binary format.
Save As: Save the currently active configuration file in binary format with a new name. If the currently active file was opened as an ASCII file, the file is converted to a binary file.
Exit: Exit the AutoDraft Editor window, with prompt to save any unsaved changes.

Edit

Edit an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) File.

Undo

Undo changes to the .ADC

New Global Code

Select Global Settings then add a new global code or modify global settings.

Global Settings

Specify a multiple field code separator, the processing order, where to expect the string number and a layer for radius points.

Field code omission list

Enter a comma-separated list of field codes that AutoDraft is not to process. For example, PRP for a field code for radius points created at the center of an arc. Wild cards are accepted (? for a single character and * for multiple characters).

Multiple field code separator

Enter a character to separate multiple field codes for the same point. For example, a multiple field code separator of /, and a field code of FE/WL/KB, can describe a point where a fence (FE), a wall (WL) and a kerb (KB) meet. Common separator characters include + and |. The most suitable character for such double-coding depends on the keyboard of the instrument.

Feature instance ID placement

Specify which characters control line stringing.

Left: Place a string code of up to three alphanumeric characters before the feature code, such as 01KERB or RKERB.
Right: Place a string code of up to three alphanumeric characters after the feature code, such as KERBL, KERB02, 408L or 40802.
Integer: Use integers in the field code for the stringing and alphabetic characters for the feature code such as KERB01BK.

If a feature has a line, the feature is strung, unless the feature also matches a point with no line. For example, with placement to the right, if TOP is a line, and TOP00 is a point only, TOP, TOP1 and TOP01 will string but TOP00 will not.

Processing order

Record ID: Process points in order the points were collected in the field.
Point number: Process points by increasing point number.

Radius point placement

Specify the layer for centre points of arcs in sets. If the layer does not already exist, the layer is created with visibility off.

Spline deflection angle tolerance

Sets created by AutoDraft along a spline curve, approximate the curve by straight segments. Enter the maximum change in angle between the tangent of the curve at two successive points. Increase this value to increase the length of segments; decrease this value to decrease the length of segments (and increase the number of points around a sharp curve).

Apply

Apply changes entered into this dialog.

Cancel

Cancel changes

Global code

Specify codes which can apply to any feature, for example CLOSE to close a string or POC for the mid point of an arc. See also Field Code Definition below.

Unknown codes

Optionally, define specific characters to indicate lines and arcs.

New Feature Category

Select Feature Definitions then add a new feature category of edit feature definitions

Feature Category: Define Categories such as Vegetation or Electricity

New Feature

Within each category, add a new feature or edit features

Description

Enter a description of the new feature.

Root field code

Enter a root field code. All field codes with a common prefix that matches a root field code can be updated by editing any matching root field code. The root field code is required when exporting ADC files to survey instruments.

Type

Point: Label points using text and block objects.
Line: Create sets or plines through surveyed points using straights, arcs or Overhauser splines. Create sets or plines at an offset. Lines can be open or closed. With field codes, designate special points along the line such as the start, end or curve. Designate a three-point circle. Designate any point with multiple sets or plines.
Comment: Enter a comment to be included in reports such as the order of points to survey a 3-point block or parameters such as "Tree type, height (ft), diameter (ft), drip diameter (ft)".

Point Display

Specify the new point layer and colour.

New field code

For each feature, add a new field code or edit field codes. For example, TOP or 102 for Top of Bank, up to 9 characters long. String numbers can be up to 3 characters.

Curve generation attribute

None (Default): Do not assign any curve generation attribute to this field code or global code.
PC: Draw the previous segment as a straight line, and the next segment as an arc. To compute the next segment as an arc, Autodraft uses the previous segment as a tangent line and the current and next points to define the curve by the two-point and a line method of defining a circle.
POC: Draw an arc combining the previous segment and the next segment. Use the previous point, the current and the next point to compute an arc radius.
PT: Draw the previous segment as an arc, and the following segment as a straight line. To compute the previous segment as an arc, Autodraft uses the "ahead" segment as a tangent and the previous and current points to define the curve.
Spline: Draw a spline from the previous point, through current and the next point, using all three points to compute the spline that passes through the points calculated by the Overhauser method. For plines, this creates an Overhauser spline curve. For sets, AutoDraft divides the segments into smaller segments that approximate a Overhauser spline curve.
Begin curve: Begin a curve at this point. Use all the points between this point and the following BeginStraight point to compute a spline. The points in-between must be part of the same feature as the BeginCurve and BeginStraight points.
Begin straight: Begin a straight line at this point. Use all the points between this point and the previously BeginCurve point to compute a spline.
Curve ahead: Begin a curve at this point. Continue the curve through all consecutive points with this field code.
Circle: Use this point and the next two points to define a circle.

Refer to FDM UG for illustrations of each curve type.

Line control attribute

None (Default): Do not assign any line control attribute to this field code or global code.
Begin: Start a new line feature.
End: End the line feature. END code is not necessary if the next instance of the feature is started with a NEW code.

Blocks

On: Show all block items associated with this point.
Off: Do NOT show any block items associated with this point. To disable drawing of a 2-point or 3-points blocks, assign this attribute to first point of the three.

Text

On: Show all text items associated with this point.
Off: Do NOT show any text items associated with this point. If you use this attribute on any point of a two or three point block, the text is disabled.

Elevation

On: Record this point as a 3D point (with an elevation).
Off: Record this point as a point with undefined elevation. If is a raw data point with an elevation calculated in RDE, then this function changes the elevation. When you re-enter the RDE you will receive a warning. If you Ignore the point in the RDE, it will not be used in any coordinate computation updates. If this point describes a Target Height Change, the Target Height Change is still recognized by RDE.

Breakline Smoothness

Set the smoothness of contours that cross breakline sets. See SETSMOOTH.

Default: Use the default in DESIGNSET, which should always be Soft.
Soft: Soft contour smoothing
Sharp or Hard: Add a sharp or hard bend only for particular breakline codes.
Dead: Use for a breakline that enclosed dead region that is not to be contoured.

Point in DTM formation

Points with elevations are be included in the formation of DTMs when "Include point in DTM" is enabled in EDIT. See also GC53.

No change: Do not change whether the point is to be included or excluded
Include: Change the point to be included in DTMs
Exclude: Change the point to be excluded from DTMs

Close

Close a set or pline by connecting this point to the point that begins the set or pline.

Apply

Apply changes on this dialog to the AutoDraft Configuration file

Cancel

Close this dialog without making the changes

New line definition

For each Line definition, specify the name, layer, colour, linetype, type, smoothness, direction and offsets.

Name

Enter the name for the linetype or select Default to adopt the Feature Description.

Layer

Select a layer name, [POINT LAYER] or [CURRENT LAYER].

Linetype

Select the Line Type.

Line colour

By layer: Colour 0. As the layer colour changes, so does the colour of the line.
Select: Select a colour number.
Point colour: Use the colour of the point.

Point colour

By layer: Colour 0. As the layer colour changes, so does the colour of the point.
Select: Select a colour for the point.
Point colour: Retain the colour of the point.

Object type: Create as a set or a pline.

Breakline Smoothness

Set the smoothness of contours that cross breakline sets. See SETSMOOTH.

Default: Use the default in DESIGNSET, which should always be Soft.
Soft: Soft contour smoothing
Sharp or Hard: Add a sharp or hard bend only for particular breakline codes.
Dead: Use for a breakline that enclosed dead region that is not to be contoured.

Relayer points

Relayer the point to a layer specified layer in the Block definition or keep the point its original layer

Reverse direction

Reverse the direction of line, and therefore any linetype pattern

Apply

Apply changes entered into this dialog

Cancel

Close this dialog without accepting changes

New block association

For each feature, to add a block, specify the block name, the layer name (which can be [CURRENT LAYER] or [POINT LAYER], and whether to relayer the points.

Appearance

Specify the block colour, whether to explode the block and how to scale the block.

Colour

As defined: Use the colors of the block when it was created.
By layer: Set the color to 0. This has the affect of setting the color of the block to the default color of the layer. If the layer color changes, so does the color of the block.
Select: Select a specific color for blocks.
Point colour: Match the colour to the point

Block explode option

Explodes blocks into component parts, with the option of entering name for the parts.

Scaling

Enter scale factors in X and Y (the Z scale factor is ignored) or enter parameter numbers. For example, to add blocks for tree trunks and canopies, add Block01 scaled by parameter 1 and Block02 scaled with parameter 2. Then a point coded TREE 0.1 2.4 will have a block scaled by 0.1 and another blocks scaled by 2.4. A block is defined with a radius (or diameter) of 2.4 is inserted at 2.4 metres in radius (or diameter) if you select ground units and do not autoscale.

Placement

Specify how blocks are placed relative to the points

Rotation

Enter a rotation in the format DDD.mmss for blocks inserted by one point, or enter a parameter number for the rotation. To rotate anticlockwise, specify a negative value or nagative parameter number.

Auto rotation

When Autorotation is enabled, the block objects rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with other symbols to keep them oriented up the final plotted sheets. AutoRotation can be edited by EDIT.

Attach to point

Refer the block to the associated point. If the block is attached to the point, when the point moves or is deleted, the block is also. If not attached, the Block is separate. Use the PN field in EDIT to delete or change the Point Number.

Relative positioning

1 point: The block is inserted at the point with specified rotation.
2 point: The block is inserted at Point 1, and scaled in the Y direction to fit between the two points. Block rotation is ignored.
2 point window scale: The two points identify the top right and bottom left corners of a window and the block is inserted within the window. Block rotation is ignored.
2 point rotate only: The block is inserted at point 1 and rotated based upon the angle from point 1 to point 2. The rotation angle is ignored.
3 point: The block is inserted at the first point, rotated and scaled in the Y direction to the second point, and scaled in the X direction to the third point. Block rotation is ignored.

This diagram explains how to define 2-point and 3-point blocks.

Block elevation

Define the elevation of the insertion point of the block, when the block is not attached to the point.

Undefined: The block elevation is undefined (*) (Default).
First point: The block elevation is the elevation of the first block point.
Last point: The block elevation is the elevation of last block point in a 2 or 3 point block.
Average: The block elevation is the average elevation of the block points.

New text label

For each feature, optionally add text. Specify the text, EAT codes, layer, style, colour, leader line, border and offsets of any new text.

Text: Enter any strings of text or EAT code, or field code parameter.
EAT codes...: Enter or select an EAT code using the EAT Code Insertion Aid.
Field Code parameter reference: Enter a parameter to be transferred from the point to the text.
Apply: Apply changes entered into this dialog.
Cancel: Close this dialog without accepting changes.

Delete entry

Delete the selected entry.

Cut entry

Delete the selected entry and store in the clipboard.

Copy entry

Copy the selected entry to the clipboard.

Paste entry

Paste the current values from the clipboard.

Replace...

Replace values of selected items.

Deletion confirmation

Be prompted when deleting.

View

View only certain features.

Show all line features: When on, all features that are defined as line features appear in the feature list, including curves.
Show all 1 point features: When on, all features that are defined as one point block features appear in the feature list.
Show all 2 point features: When on, all features that are defined as two point block features appear in the feature list.
Show all 3 point features: When on, all features that are defined as three point block features appear in the feature list.
Refresh: Refresh the hierarchy of the configuration file.

Reports

Report some or all details of the .ADC to P3Pad.

Full: Report all the Global settings and Feature Definitions to P3Pad.
Global section: Report the Global settings to P3Pad.
Root codes: Report Features listing the Root code, the feature type (point or line), the feature description, and the comment string to P3Pad.
Field codes: Report the field codes in a P3Pad.
Categories: Report the Feature categories and associated features to P3Pad.
Single category: Report the currently selected category to P3Pad.
Single feature: Report the currently selected feature to P3Pad.

Help

Display AutoDraft editor Help. The text from these help pages has been copied into this TML List.

Use the ADC to modify the selected points and create plines, sets, blocks and text.

Close the command

If any point names don't match a field code, you are asked whether to add them to the ADC. If you do, identify the discrepancy, undo the AutoDrafting, correct the survey or the ADC, delete the unknown features from the ADC and then rerun AutoDraft on the survey until you are no longer prompted. If you do not, your survey will not be correctly drafted, but you will not add incorrect codes to your ADC.

Field parameters passed to AutoDraft can be used in a variety of creative ways:

To add a field comment to a drawing.
To dynamically set the dimensions of a concrete pad.
To dynamically note the width of a stone wall.
To record the tree height, trunk diameter and classification
to create kerb strings at horizontal and vertical offsets

All new objects are given the same new group number which is one more than the previous largest group number.

Watch out for any error messages in message scroll, especially when editing a new or imported .ADC.

AutoSave attempts to back up the current project file at a user-specified time interval so it may help you recover from unexpected power failures or computer crashes. It does not help you recover from closing without saving, overwriting backups, and so on. The project file is autosaved with a randomly generated name in a randomly generation subfolder of the folder you specify in the AutoSave Configuration dialog box.

File | System configuration | AutoSave (AUTOSAVE).
To turn AutoSave on or off, click the AutoSave On check box.
To set the time interval for each autosave, type the time (in minutes) between autosaves into the Check Every box.
To change the directory for autosave files:
1. Turn off AutoSave (see step 2), and click Browse. The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2. Find and click on the folder for the autosave files.
3. Click OK. The new folder name appears in the Directory for AutoSave Files area.
4. Turn on AutoSave if desired.
Click OK.

Recommendations:

Do not rely on AutoSave.
Waiting for Autosave regularly delays use of Terramodel which can be annoying and take a long time.
It's quicker and safer to turn off AutoSave and habitually save early and save often with SAVE and SAVEAS.
Look for files in the project folder with extensions .~pr or .pr~. These are recent backups created by SAVE and SAVEAS.
Check to see if you have enough disk space.
Check to see a directory used by Terramodel was deleted.
Make sure your network server is working properly if your computer is on a network.
If your AutoSave path is on a network, you may be opening someone else's file.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|System Configuration\|Autosave File\|Config system\|Autosave	Field Data Module

AUTOSET

Create a closed set on the current layer joining at least three selected points clockwise from the southwest around a location at the mean of the coordinates.

See also QSET, GCTRACE, LOTJOIN, PTS2BDY and DTMEDGE.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Set\|Autoset	Secured

AVERPTS

Compute average easting, northing and elevation of selected points.

See also RANGE, DTMSTATS, GC05 and GC31.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

AVGEND

Compute volumes by end-area given an alignment, Xlines and two dtm layers.

Use AVGEND to compute end-area volumes if you do not have the Site Design or Roadway modules. Compare totals with EARTHWORK reports.

Create XLINES along an alignment first. Smaller intervals give more accurate volumes.

Align: Enter the alignment (pline or set object) along which Terramodel will compute volumes. Select the same alignment you used to create the xlines.
Outside: Select the first DTM layer from which you will calculate volumes. This layer should completely encompass the second, or inside, layer and must contain 3D points.
Inside: Use this layer control to select the second DTM layer. Make sure that, within the limits of the xlines, the points on this layer lie within the extents of the outside layer and have elevations.
Calc: Specify the chainage limits of the volumes and whether to send the report to the screen or to an external file.

Report on installation of pre-cast barriers along a roadjob.

Select a roadjob, and as-built points at the base and top of barriers.

In Settings, specify the chainage range, asphalt thickness, barrier height and barrier width.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

BASIN

Create, enter or edit basin parameters for a point.

Basin point: Select a point to locate a basin.
Basin name: Enter a name of up to 80 characters.
Basin ID: Enter a basin ID of up to 127 characters.
Pre-dev, By-pass and Develop: The data entry table has columns for you to enter areas, slopes, lengths, times and cooeficients for pre-developed, by-pass and developed watersheds.
Area: Enter watershed areas in acres or hectares or compute using HAREAB.
Average basin slope %: Enter the average slope for each watershed, measured in feet per foot or meters per meter, from the highest point of the drainage area to the point of discharge (into the pond or from the watershed). To compute an approximate slope, divide the change in elevation, from the highest point to the point of discharge, by the hydraulic length.
Hydraulic length: Enter the distances that a drop of water travels through each watershed, from the highest elevation to the lowest, or to the point of discharge.
Tc (hours): Enter the time of concentration, the time in minutes for the Rational method, or in hours for the SCS method, takes a drop of water take to travel through each watershed, from the highest elevation to the lowest, or to the point of discharge, once the ground has reached saturation.
C/Cn: Enter the weighted runoff coefficients (Rational method), or curve numbers (SCS method), for each watershed. Use HCCN to compute these weighted coefficients.

BASIN requires Hydrology module.

Select a point or line to indicate the starting and second point and bearings. If you select a point, enter a bearing to indicate the direction from the point.

For each solution, BBEAR creates a new point at the intersection of the two bearings on the current layer.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Lines\|Bearing-bearing intersection	Secured	23

BCPIPEIN

Import a pipe survey with attributes which has been exported from Trimble Business Center as a CSV file.

String the pipes by Asset ID or String No.

Command date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

BDIST

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Lines\|Bearing-distance intersection	Secured	12

BEARTEXT

Add a specified datum angle to text containing bearings expressed as degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS)

Enter the datum angle as a DMS string in HP notation like this: 125.30451 for 125°30′45.1″.

If the bearing is EAT text, the bearing is exploded to normal text then the angle is added. Any other characters in the text, such as brackets, distances and new lines are left alone.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	8

BEST3FIT

Create two points and a set by best fitting a 3D line to selected points.

Points: Select 3D points.
Layers: Specify layers for the points and sets.
Create: Create two points on the points layer joined by a set on the set layer and open a report in P3Pad.
Delete: Delete the new points and set.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

BESTFITA

Create points and a set on a specified layer by fitting an equation to selected points.

For each curve type, enter Settings for the result layer and other parameters as required.

2D Line: Create a set between new two points with no elevations. See also BFITLINE.
Plane: Create a centre point and a rectangular set on a 3D plane. See also ELEVREFPLANE and IRBAY.
2D Circle: Create a 2D pline circle and centre point. See also CIRCLE and BFITCURV.
3D Circle: Create a set with a specified number of straight segments joining points on an ellipse which represents a circle in 3D space observed from above. See also ELLIPSE.
Parabola: Create a pline with a parabolic vertical curve. Edit the vertical curve with CURVE if the pline is in a view mode with vertical exaggeration such as Profile or Xsect. See also PLINE, GCPRFEDT and PARABOLA.
Catenary: Create a pline of segments on a catenary through three points. See also CAT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

BFITCURV

Create a pline arc fitted through three or more points using the Least Squares method.

Select points

Select the points through which a curve will be fitted.

Options

Select layers for the points and curves, set the location method and vary the weight of each point in the computations.

Layer

Store points on: Specify the layer on which the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
Store curve on: Specify the layer on which the set arc that connects the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.

Location method

Auto select: Compute an initial centre of arc and radius from the first three points.
User select: Enter a trial location for the centre of arc and the radius length.
Radius centre: Locate a trial position for the true center of arc.
Radius length: Enter a trial radius.
Number | Point | Weight: List the point numbers in order and weight them by the number of times the point is to be considered.
OK: Accept curve options.
Cancel: Cancel curve options.

Locate

Show the solution by creating a pline circle with the computed radius point and radius distance. Guessing a radius point and radius close to the true answer will speed the calculation.

Create

Solve the arc as a set, PC point, PT point and radius point.

Report

List the points used to calculate the arc, the weight of importance of each point, their distances from the arc and their coordinates on the arc perpendicular to their position.

Delete

Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.

Close command.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 558	Cogo\|Curves\|Best-fit curve	Secured

BFITLINE

Create a pline fitted through two or more points using the Least Squares computation method.

Select points

Select the points through which a line will be fitted.

Options

Layer: Assign layers for the new objects.
Number | Point | Weight: List the point numbers, order and weight. A weight of zero forces the line to go through the point. When two points are given a weight of zero, a line is passed through the two points. To ignore a point remove it from the selection. Higher weights pull the line towards the point.

OK

Accept line options.

Cancel

Cancel line options.

Create

Solve the line as a set and two points.

Report

List the points used to calculate the line, their weight, their distance to the line and their coordinates on the line perpendicular to their position.

Delete

Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.

Close the command.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 567	Cogo\|Lines\|Best-fit line	Secured

BGELEV

Copy selected points into an "Elevation" drawing in View 6.

The position of the point along the selected Baseline determines the horizontal position in View 6, while the Z coordinate of the Point determines the vertical position in View 6.

The points in View 6 are placed on the same layer that the points were originally placed on in the Plan View.

The points in View 6 are given an alphanumeric identifier (point number). If the baseline has a Name, then this name and the original identifier are combined to create the identifier for the point in View 6. If the baseline does not have a name, a (2) is combined with the original identifier to create the identifier for the point in View 6.

Max Alpha Points must be set in SYSTEM to a large enough number.

See also FLIPUP which is similar but has more features.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Field Data Module

BHEXTEND

For each selected point, create two points with the same chainage, elevation and layer name, at specified horizontal offsets from the main alignment of a selected road job, and a set between them.

For boreholes along a road, DHEXTEND creates points and sets for DTMs of each borehole surface.

Import points from a CSV file of bore hole data.

The CSV file format is similar to this example:

First line HEADER	POINT ID,DESCRIPTION,EASTING,NORTHING,ELEVATION (DEPTH),ELEVATION (DEPTH),ELEVATION (DEPTH),ELEVATION (DEPTH),ELEVATION (DEPTH),....
Example	Bore No,Report Name,MGA2020Z56,MGA2020Z56,01_GEOTECHLAYERNAME,02_GEOTECHLAYERNAME,03_GEOTECHLAYERNAME,....
Example	BH-218,Report Name A,496051.126,7018259.082,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.1,0.4,1.2,1.2,1.4,3,3,3,
Example	BH-1,Report Name A,495976.456,7018324.712,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.4,0.4,1.2,1.2,1.2,1.2,1.2,4.5,4.5,4.5,

Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline, when the XML file has long lines of points.

Try to import LandXML files with GCPTSIN, GCXMLIN or LandXML import script first. If they choke on XML files because the files are all on one line, try BIGXMLIN to read points one character at a time or GCFIXXML which adds new lines into any XML file between every pair of "><" characters.

BIGXMLIN, GCPTSIN and GCXMLIN read points only. GCFIXXML adds new lines into any XML file after some ">" characters. The LandXML import script can also read surfaces and alignments.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

BIN2IMG

Create a coordinated image file of colours representing the elevation from hydrographic data created using HDMS.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

Create a set that is also a breakline.

Create set between points that have elevations and are on the same layer as the first selected point. The set is created on the same layer as the points.

See also SET, GCDTMEDG and DELETESEGMENT.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Set\|Breakline	Field Data Module	15

BLDG

Specify an origin, enter a bearing and distance and then click OK to enter the first wall segment.

Then enter a positive distance to create a segment to the right, a negative distance for a segment to the left, New for a new building, Undo to undo the last segment or OK to complete the command.

Replace straight set segments with fewer segments using a filter "tube" on the selected layer within any boundaries.

The initial filter tube is of the specified width, length and height and is orientated to the first segment on the set. The width is perpendicular to the segment. The height is vertical. Enter * to all any height.

BLFILTER checks for additional points within the limits of the filter tube. Any points inside the tube are discarded. The first point BLFILTER finds outside of the tube is kept, and the last discarded point inside the tube is added back to the set. The tube is then reoriented to the last two points, and the process is repeated.

See also FILTER which filters plines only, SETFILT and GCFILTER which filter by 2D offset tolerance and 3DFILTER which filters insignificant points from a DTM. Commands that add points include ARCBL, GCCHORD, GCDIVIDE and GCCHORD.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|More...\|Filter breaklines	Geocomp Update or $200	127

BLINECHK

Create points in layer CROSSING wherever any sets in a selected DTM layer cross, and report the set record numbers and the new point numbers.

These new points have the name "bl-cross" and are labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

These points indicate where all sets cross, whether breaklines arc segments, or segments connected to points that are 2D, non-contourable or on different layers.

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

As each set is checked against all the other sets, the count will appear to speed up on large DTMs.

Use CROSSCHK to check selected sets or plines.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|Mark\|Crossing breaklines	Geocomp Update or $250	43

BLKPTS

Insert blocks or symbols at points by point name and a mapping file, relative to an alignment.

Points

Select points

Alignment

Select an alignment (if Rotate relative to alignment is enabled in Settings)

Settings

Attach blocks to points: Attach blocks to points so that the blocks move as the points move.
Rotate relative to alignment: Rotate blocks or symbols relative to the alignment. When enabled, enter the relative rotation.
Use colour of layer for blocks: Turn on the Map Colour property of the blocks to display with the color of the layer on which they are placed or turn off to display the colors of the original block objects.
Default rotation: Enter the rotation for blocks not rotated relative to an alignment, including those beyond the extents of the alignment.
Relative rotation: Enter an angle to add to rotation relative to alignment.
Block mapping file:: Browse to select a block/symbol mapping file.
Edit file: Edit a mapping file using the included editor. It is usually easier to edit using your favourite text editor.
Create file: Create a new mapping file in your project directory or C:\TMCustom.

The fields in the comma-separated mapping file are: Point name, Block name or symbol number, layer name, scale or size.

Use # to indicate a comment line or a comment on the end of a line

To specify a block, enter a block name. To specify symbol 82, enter &082, for example.

To create blocks on the current layer, enter layer 0.

For blocks, enter the block scale.

For symbols, enter the symbol size in sheet units. In Plan view, the symbol is scaled to project units, unless there is an extra field for "Absolute scale", that contains only the letter a.

Replace an internal block with a different external block with the same name.

Combine objects into a single object that can be manipulated as a block.

Blocks can consist of points, 3DFaces, plines, dynaviews, text and other blocks. Objects in blocks do not retain layer names.

A block can be inserted multiple times into projects, shared between projects, scaled, rotated and otherwise edited.

Create both internal blocks (which can only be used within a single project file) and external blocks (which can be used by any Terramodel project file). If you specify an External block, Terramodel will use the first block with that name on the Terramodel Search Path.

Points included in blocks lose point numbers. Sets are stored as plines when they are included in blocks.

Create

Create a block definition. Select objects and the origin of the block. Click Name to enter a block name of up to 15 characters and a description. Do not define the block as External. Click Create to create the Internal block. To create an External block, first create the Internal block then use the SAVE Option.

Settings

Establish the default settings for inserting single or multiple blocks.

Scale

Enter a scale factor for the X, Y, and Z dimensions of all inserted blocks. The factors are measured in relation to the sizes of the original objects. For example, to place a block with 2.5 metres in diameter, using a block that is 1 unit in diameter, use a scale factor of 2.5. This default is usually 1.0.

Rotation

Enter a rotation around the axes. These defaults are usually 0 degrees.

Internal | External

Specify whether new blocks are to be created as internal or external.

Auto scale

Apply the current drawing scale of the active view to the inserted block. Use this feature to keep the plotted size of the block the same regardless of the current drawing scale, such as a north arrow always plotted 4 inches high.

Auto Rotate

Rotate blocks in a dynaview automatically as the dynaview is rotated to keep them oriented upright on the final plotted sheets.

Clip

Clip the block to the limits of rectangular dynaviews, even if the insertion point falls outside the dynaview. Clipping complex blocks such as hatch patterns can reduce the display redraw speed.

Map colour

Create and display the block with the line colour of the current layer, instead of the colours of the objects within the block.

On: Create the block with the line colour of the current layer, and display all objects within the block in the colour of the block.
Off: Create the block with the line colour of the current layer, and display all objects within the block in their original colours. Objects with colour 0 (BYLAYER) are displayed in the colours of the block layer.

Edit

Edit (EDIT) the properties of an inserted block.

Layer

Select the layer for the inserted block.

Attribute

List any attribute definition file attached to the block.

Ref. Obj.

Enter the record number of any parent object to which the block refers.

Name

Modify the name of the block to match another valid block. For example, change the name of a block named CIRCLE to TREE1 so the circle block is replaced with a tree canopy block. The inserted block will change size if the new block was defined at a different size.

Colour

Modify the colour number of the inserted block. The block displays in this colour when Map colour is on.

Group

Modify the integer group number. Set 0 for no group.

Obj

Display the record number of the block.

Description

Display the description in the original block definition.

Origin

Modify the X and Y of the origin of the block.

Elev

Modify the elevation of the block, when not attached to a point.

Scale

Modify the X, Y and Z scale relative to the original block definition. A block defined with one unit diameter is scaled to the entered value in project units. CIRCLE block is one unit in radius.

Rotation

Modify the X, Y, or Z rotation around the origin.

Pn

Attach the block to a subject point number to locate the block . If the point is deleted, any attached block is also deleted. EAT text in the block can refer to the subject point.

Auto scale

Apply the current view scale so the block is always the same size on the plot. Auto scale is off by default. Use SCLBLKS to turn Auto scale on.

Map colour

On: Display all objects within the block with the colour of the block.
Off: Display all objects within the block with their object colours. Objects with colour 0 are drawn BYLAYER, with the colour of the layer of the block.

Auto rotation

Rotate block objects in a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. Use to orient blocks towards the top of final plotted sheets.

OK

Accept changes to the block.

Cancel

Cancel block editing

Insert

Insert a block into a project file.

Block name

Specify the name of the block to insert. Pick from blocks already inserted in the project, or enter the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.

Insert

Loc

Locate the insertion point of the inserted block.

Scale

Enter the X and Y scale factor relative to the original block definition. A block defined with one unit diameter is scaled to the entered value in project units. CIRCLE block is one unit in radius. Point label blocks vary in height as specified.

Map colour

Blocks are inserted with with the line colour of the current layer. This block colour is retained even if the block is later relayered.

On: Display all objects within the block in the colour of the block.
Off: Display the objects in the block with their original colours. Display objects with colour 0 (BYLAYER) in the colours of the block layer.

Insert

Insert the block.

Close

Close block insertion.

Close block command.

List

List the internal and external blocks contained in the project file. The list includes the block name, whether it is an internal or external block, the view in which the block was created, the number of plines or sets in the block definition, the number of text objects in the block definition, the number of inserted blocks in that block definition, and the description of the block.

Save

Save a block definition.

Name: Select a block definition.
File: Enter up to 8 characters for the name of an external .BLK file.
Save: Save the block as External and create the .BLK in the current project location. To make the block available in any project, use a file manager to move the .BLK to a location on the TSP such as C:\TMCUSTOM.

Modify

Select one block from a list of external blocks that have been inserted and modify it to an internal block. See also MKBLKINT.

Multiple

Place multiple identical blocks on selected points with a specified scale factor and rotation.

Purge

Delete selected unused block definitions from the project file. To purge more than 130 block definitions, or purge unused blocks nested in other unused blocks, repeat the Purge. Large numbers of unused blocks imported from .DWG can take hours to purge. To purge all unused blocks in seconds, use GCPURGE instead. You may want to delete missing blocks first with DELBLKS.

Depending on how the blocks were created, GCEXPLOD and EXPLODE explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
If the exploded block or text object has an elevation, the pline retains the elevation.
Points in blocks do not retain their point numbers.
Blocks can be nested inside blocks, so you may need to repeat.
Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Simply delete them.
Blocks imported from DWG or DXF files can include 3DFaces. These become points and sets when the block is exploded in Terramodel. To create a block with 3DFaces of a Terramodel DTM, export that DTM surface as 3DFaces to DWG, block that layer in some CAD program then import as DWG into Terramodel.
A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block.
Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks. See the symbol chart.

See also AUTODRAFT, BLKREAD, BLKPTS, GC09, GCBLKFIX, GCINSBLK, HATCH, MKBLK, TEXT2PNT and UNITBLK.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Block\|Block Draw\|Block	Field Data Module	189

BLOCKDIR

Modify the direction of selected blocks to a new bearing.

Block:: Select blocks
Bearing of Blocks: Enter a new bearing
Modify Block Bearings: Modify the direction of selected blocks to the new bearing
Close: Close command with selected blocks in the new direction

The initial new bearing is the new bearing from the previous BLOCKDIR session.

Insert labelled blocks in array from selected external blocks.

For an example, see the project file C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\Docs\BLOCKSALL.PRO.

Create a bluetop report for a roadjob.

Bluetops are pegs with a blue-painted top surface and blue whiskers placed in the ground to the elevation of the finish course.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

BOREHOLE

Import points from a file of bore hole data.

Specify

whether the Z values are elevations or depths
null elevations
whether to delete points in strata
any layer name prefix.

The file format is similar to this example:

First line Info and Layer Names	ID,E,N,FILL 1,ALV 1,NONCO 1,COHES 1,MUD 1,SNDSTN 1,SNDGRV 1,NONCO 2,COHES 2
Example data line	OXBN15, 32624.26, 151422, 15.78, 13.6, 11.9, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, -8.66,
Example data line	OXBN16, 32553.86, 151409, 14.033, 12, 12, 12, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 8.1, 6.5, -8.66, -8.66

Draw a rectangular pline on cardinal bearings at specified opposite corners.

See also GCBOX, which prompts for three corners, POLYGON, which prompts for number of sides, centre location and the distance from centre to vertices, PLOTBOX, which prompts for bearing and distances in sheet units, and PAD, which prompts for two points and an elevation.

If the box is to be used for a DYNAVIEW, locate the first corner at the bottom left so that the insertion point of any rectangular dynaview can always be found at the bottom left.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Pline\|Box	Secured

BOXDYNA

Create rectangular pline boxes at the extents of selected dynaviews on the selected layer and with the colour of that layer.

The plines are created with the name of the dynaview and refer to the dynaview record.

If a dynaview is rotated, or not rectangular, the extents are larger than the dynaview.

These boxes can be selected by PLOT when plotting in Multiple mode.

Creating these boxes in a distinctive colour can help locate dynaviews.

See also DYNAVIEW, FIXDYNA MVIEW, PLOTBOX and SHOWDYNA.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

BOXIMAGE

For each selected closed pline, add into Image manager the image file with the same name as the pline.

The images must be in the same folder as the selected file.

The name of each image file and pline box must end with one of these file extensions: .BMP, .DCX, .DIB, .GIF, .JPEG, .JPG, .PNG, .PCX, .PICT, .TGA, .TIF, .TIFF, .WMF or .WPG, and the image file must be in the corresponding image format.

To place images into plotboxes with matching names:

Create rectangular pline boxes with the names of image files, including the file extension.
In BOXIMAGE,
1. Select the pline boxes.
2. Browse to select any file in the folder with the images.
3. Click "Add Images" to add any image in the same folder as the selected file, located by the lower left and upper right extents of any selected pline boxes that have the same name as the image.
Use EXIT to exit.
Restart Terramodel.
Use Image Manager (IMAGE) to check that your images have been added.

Break a pline or set into two parts at location.

Select a pline or set, then a break location. The pline or set is broken into two parts at the location.

Repeat: Enable this checkbox if you want the command to stay open until Cancel is clicked.
Set or pline: Select the set or pline you wish to break.
Break: Enter a location along the line where you want to break it.

To break a pline or set by removing a segment, use DELETESEGMENT.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deletes set segments like DELETESEGMENT does now.

A pline cannot be broken by BREAK within a spiral or vertical curve. GCPRFEDT can break a vertical curve into two.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Break	Field Data Module	276

BREAKVAL

Break, trim or insert an IP within a vertical curve.

Add a prefix of ( and a suffix of ) to selected text.

To specify any prefix or suffix, use ADD2TXT.

TML date			Source
09/03/22			Geocomp Update or $200

BUILDDTM

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides based on positive (right) and negative (left) offsets. Close the building by direct closure to the beginning point or close on a perpendicular to the beginning line. The beginning line can be cut or extended to match the closing line.

Specify a HAL and chainages to report a ditch in Compute-A-Grade .DRL format.

The TML name is CAGDRL_X. If CAGDRLX does not run from the command line, create an alias from CAGDRLX to CAGDRL_X or enter CAGDRL_X.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

CALLOUT

Create, edit, store and use predefined callout styles to label common features.

Quickly label common point and line features, such as kerb inlets, without having to type the text each time.

Stored callout styles define text in the label and may also define leader lines and text borders.

The predefined callout styles save time, look consistent and reduce typing errors.

Callout styles are stored in external .COS library files so they are independant of the project. These libraries can be loaded into the initialisation file TMODWIN.INI from folders such as in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English and C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\. "Geocomp" Initialisation files load the GEOCOMP01.COS callout style library.

Callout

Create or edit a callout style, load and clear the styles contained within an external callout style library (.COS) file, and select the callout style to be used.

Name

Edit the name of the callout style currently highlighted below in the Callout Style list box. Use a short name that can be read within the list box.

Description

Associate more descriptive title of up to 80 characters a callout style.

Text style

Select, edit or create the text style.

File

Display and edit the path of the external .COS file in which the currently highlighted callout style is stored. Copy an existing callout style into another file by editing this pathname.

Browse

Browse to select a callout style library file (.COS).

Callout style

List the callout styles that have been loaded. Loading a callout style file makes the callouts defined within it available for use. Highlight a style to use, edit or display the data associated with that style.

Text

Enter or edit the textual content of the callout.

New

Create a new callout style. By default it is named "New Style", and is associated with the same callout style file as the style that is highlighted when you click on the New command button. The new callout style is not stored until you click on OK.

Delete

Deletes the currently highlighted callout style from the list, and from the indicated external callout style file.

Restrict...

Indicate that a callout style that employs station and offset labeling requires an associated subject HAL, and restrict the selection of that HAL to either plines or sets or both. You can also restrict the automated selection of the callout’s subject to a particular object type or types.

HAL types: Callout styles that are intended to display station and offset values must have a subject HAL which identifies the horizontal alignment. Use the "\HAL" EAT codes to label the station and offset of the text insertion point, the callout’s subject, or the end of the leader line. Allow Pline, Set or both.
Subject types: Predefined callout styles are generating text that labels properties of a particular subject. Limit subjects to sets, points, plines, blocks, to None to create a simple text string with no subject, or to Any object type.

EAT Code

Open the EAT Code Insertion Aid to insert EAT codes within the text string at the position of the text insertion marker, or replace the highlighted text.

Copy text from

Select text from an existing text object. Duplicate text objects, or base text on existing text.

Load

Load an external callout style library file to make the callout styles defined within it available.

Clear

Clear the Callout Style list box of the styles contained in any of the currently loaded callout style library files.

Leader / Border style...

Select the leader line and text border styles for the callout.

OK

Apply the changes

Cancel

Cancel without making the changes

HAL

If the callout style contains EAT codes for chainage and offset, refer the callout text a horizontal alignment.

Ldr:/Subj:

If the callout style contains EAT codes for a subject, refer to that subject. If the callout style includes a leader line, pick the leader line location.

Loc:

To place the callout text, select a location graphically, or enter the location of the insertion point and click Text.

Rot

Enter a bearing or an angle of rotation (measured from due north) at which the text is to be placed. Valid rotation angles range from 0° to 360° and can include negative angles. The default rotation is 90° which generates horizontal text.

Props

Specify the style, linetype and gap of any leader line, and the style and linetype of any border, and the record numbers of any subject or HAL.

Text

Place the defined callout at the entered location.

Close

Close the command without placing a callout.

See also GC21 which sets the active callout style and GCLABPNT which labels multiple points with EAT text.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Text\|Callout text...	Secured	92

CAROUSEL

Select and edit plotter pen carousel definitions.

Define the colour and width for "pens" to be used when plotting.


Close: Close the carousel command
New: Enter a name for a new carousel, enter the number of pens (up to 255) in the carousel and edit the definition for each pen.
Edit: Select a carousel to display or edit the pen definitions.
Delete: Delete a carousel

Carousel size: Display or edit the carousel size. Enter a larger size to add pens with default values. Enter a smaller size to remove pens with higher pen numbers.
Colour: Enter a colour in the form of a triplet of red, green and blue in RGB decimal integer values from 1 to 255. Pen 0 is not included because objects with pen 0 are not plotted.
Choose: Select a colour from a palette of basic colours, or from custom colours you define by triplets of RGB values, or of Hue, Saturation and Luminosity.
Width (mm): Enter the width of the pen in millimetres when plotted on a raster plotter or printer that has a Windows printer driver. Enter 0 for the default width, which for HP plotters is 0.3, too wide for small text.
Pen speed: Enter the pen speed for vector plotters that pick up physical pens from a carousel and move them across paper or film. Enter 0 for the default speed for that plotter.

Vector plotters plot images created by moving a physical pen, pencil or blade following paths. Such pens are typically selected from a carousel of up to eight pens, so when plotted to paper or film, the width and colour depends on what pen is in that carousel position. Vector plotter drivers included with Terramodel use HP-GL or HP-GL/2 graphics languages.

Most plotters and printers are raster printers that print dots in the selected colours onto a grid on paper or film, or into a file such as a .PDF. Images from Image manager require raster printers. Raster plotters normally require a Windows printer driver.

Terramodel linework is exported as segments. Curves are replaced by straight segments using the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI which is typically 0.001. Raster printers convert these lines into paths of dots of the specified width. Some raster drivers send pixels only to the printer. Others pass on these lines to be processed later which is why some .PDF files created from Terramodel contain linework that can be extracted via .DWG or .DXF.

Plots from Terramodel to HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plotter drivers include colours. These are ignored by physical pen plotters, but can be used by raster plotters and image software.

Use CAROUSEL to define the pen numbers, PLOTSET to map the object colour to a pen number and PLOTTERSET to assign the default carousel for each Plotter Configuration. All these are configured in TMODWIN.INI. To copy these settings from another computer use EDITINI to copy sections from an .INI file such as TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\tmodwin_geocomp_defaults.ini. The carousels are in the PenDef sections.

By default, PLOTTERSET always includes a configuration called HPGL2 and CAROUSEL includes a carousel called Pen Plotter. To configure the "Pen Plotter" carousel to match the HP default colours for pens 1 to 7, which are black, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta and yellow, use EDITINI to import [PenDef Pen Plotter] from C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\tmodwin_geocomp_defaults.ini. In this carousel, Pen 8 is white because pen 0, which is white in HP-GL/2, is never plotted in Terramodel.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	Palettes, Colourmaps, Penmaps and Carousels in Terramodel	File\|Plot setup\|Carousel setup	Secured	PU3

CASCADE

Cascade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY CASCADE which simulates the Cascade command in the Window menu.

Macro date		Menu	Source
Macro		Window\|Cascade File\|Macro\|Play\|cascade	Standard User-definable

CAT

Create a segmented pline, between two attachment locations in the profile view, following the path of a cable suspended between two points.

Enter the weight, tension and horizontal increment.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

CDSPROF

Create a profile to transition between two other profiles. This profile can be used by SMPROAD to create a simple cul-de-sac design that ties into the adjoining curb or edge-of-pavement profiles.

Culdecsac

Select the cul-de-sac horizontal alignment for the vertical profile.

Begin info

CL Hal: Select the the horizontal alignment to interpolate the beginning profile elevation.
Elevation data: Enter the difference in elevation for the cul-de-sac profile to vary above the horizontal alignment profile. Enter a negative value to vary below.
Profile: Select the profile for the selected horizontal alignment.
OK: Accept changes to information for the beginning.
Cancel: Cancel changes

End info

CL Hal: Select the the horizontal alignment to interpolate the ending profile elevation.
Elevation data: Enter the difference in elevation for the cul-de-sac profile to vary above the horizontal alignment profile. Enter a negative value to vary below.
Profile: Select the profile for the selected horizontal alignment.
OK: Accept changes to information for the beginning.
Cancel: Cancel changes

Create

Create the culdesac profile in the profile view.

Cancel

Cancel the command.

Select the kerb return horizontal alignment at Cul-de-sac.
Click Begin info and select the centreline hal of one road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the start of the kerb and the design profile of that road.
Click End info and select the centreline hal of the other road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the end of the kerb and the design profile of the other road.
Click Create to create a profile pline with chainages from the culdesac alignment and four segments containing vertical curves end matching the grades and elevations of the design alignment profiles.

The kerb return has four segments with vertical curves.

Recentre Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views by chainage of active alignment at a selected location.

Select a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the chainage of the location. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.

If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used.

The match button recentres the plan view to the match the profile view.

There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25% and to fit data in all four views.

Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe where no roadjob has been defined.

See also ACTIVE, CENVIEW, TPCENVIE and PPSX.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $500

CENVIEW

Recentre Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views by chainage of a roadjob at a selected location.

For any selected roadjob, select a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the chainage of the location. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.

If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used.

The match button uses the centre of the active plan, profile or super view to recentre the other views. If the profile view is active, the plan and super views are scaled to fit the chainage range.

There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25%, to fit data in all four views, and to move to the next or previous chainage and make it active.

Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe.

See also ROADJOB, CENTREV, TPCENVIE and PPSX.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Window\|Tile centred by chainage Window\|Tile centred by station	Geocomp Update or $500

CF2SUPER

For every point in a centreline set, compute the crossfall perpendicular to the HAL from the centreline to left and right edge-of-road sets. These crossfalls are created as slope alignments in the Super view on the current layer for you to match existing superelevation.

Xlines are ignored as these are not interpolated linearly.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

CHAINAGE

Set the start chainage (also known as beginning station) of a horizontal alignment pline.

Chainages increase away from the first point or vertex.

Chainage equations can be assigned to registered horizontal alignments by HAL Manager (HALMANAGER).

CHAINAGE is an alias to STATION command.

If the US English language version is installed, dialogs for commands written by Trimble refer to Station. If British English, these dialogs refer to Chainage.

Some commands use the convention configured by STAORCHN.

To select menus which refer to station, use MENUCFG to select a _US.M menu file. To refer to Chainage, select a different .M file.

This TML List usually refers to Station | Chainage.

Open the .LOG file of significant changes to your installed Terramodel files.

The log file is updated with each major and minor update after Geocomp Update N.

For the latest major update, see UPDATE.

For the latest minor update, contact Geocomp Systems.

Commands changed in recent updates are shown in red on the current TML List.

Date	Guide	Menu	Source
Updated with each minor update	Geocomp Update change.log	Help\|Documents\|log of software changes	Geocomp Update

CHECKATT

Check selected objects for duplicate and missing attributes.

See also GCSUBGDE, GCDTMGDE and CHKRDDTM.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

CHKRDDTM

Check a DTM of a road, add a DTM edge or add breaklines in the direction of the Xlines.

Replace attribute names or attribute values of selected objects according to a dictionary file.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

CHNGCOLR

For every selected object that has colour number = 0 (= BYLAYER), change the colour number to the colour of the layer.

Objects of Colour 0 cannot be selected by colour in any command, so select by any other method. Once CHNGCOLR has changed the colour number, you will be able to select them by colour.

The displayed colour will not appear to change until and unless you change the layer of the object or the colour in the layer settings.

Select all objects by view to change from colour-by-layer convention to colour-by-object convention.

To change from colour-by-object to colour-by-layer, COLOUR by view to colour 0.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

CHNGHEIG

Change the elevation of all selected points to match the numeric value of the name.

All digits and the last decimal point in the name are considered; all other characters are ignored, for example:

point name	new elevation
123.456	123.456
R.L.=123.456	123.456
123.456 FSL	123.456
123.456 I.L.	123456.00
90301	90301.00
TOP01	1.00
RCP dia. 225 class Y1	0.2251
STN_B	*
	*

You may need to tidy up the names with GC01, SNR or CHNGNAME first.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

CHNGNAME

Replace characters in names of selected records according to a selected dictionary file.

Change the name of selected objects by replacing any string of characters in the name that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field. Where there is no match, the name is not modified.

Do not use to change names of blocks or text.

Recs:: Select any objects to be renamed.
Stop after 1st Match: Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order. Stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the name.
Start Char Loc: and End:: Limit changes to within a range of character positions
Dic:: Enter the name and location of a dictionary file created in a text editor. Use ' and , for delimiters. End the file with an empty new line.
Browse: Browse to select a dictionary file
Edit: Edit the dictionary file in the text editor which is the default app for that file type. For example, use Windows Settings to chose Notepad as the default app for .dic files.
OK: Modify the names according to the dictionary
Cancel: Close the command without modifying names

C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\CHNGNAME.DIC is an example of a dictionary file for substituting CGRDVOL grid labels.

'Row   1 Col   1','A1'
'Row   1 Col   2','B1'
'Row   1 Col   3','C1'
'Row   1 Col   4','D1'
'Row   1 Col   5','E1'
'Row   2 Col   6','A2'
'Row   2 Col   7','B2'
'Row   2 Col   8','C2'
'Row   2 Col   9','D2'
'Row   2 Col  10','E2'

Replace characters in selected text records according to a dictionary file.

Change selected text objects by replacing any string of characters in the text that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field.

Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order.

Text:: Select text
Match text width: If the new text is a different length, adjust the text width attributes to maintain the previous length.
Stop after First Match: Stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the text.
Dic:: Enter the name and location of a dictionary file created in a text editor. Use ' and , for delimiters. End the file with an empty new line.
Browse: Browse to select a dictionary file
Edit: Edit the dictionary file in the text editor which is the default app for that file type. For example, use Windows Settings to chose Notepad as the default app for .dic files.
OK: Modify the text according to the dictionary
Cancel: Close the command without modifying text

Create your dictionary in a text editor or edit a copy of C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\CHNGTEXT.DIC.

These are examples of using a dictionary to change the presentation language:

#Dictionary file format
# Lines with first char as # are ignored
#  use ' character as limiter
#'Current Text','New Text'
#
#'English','Espanol'
'Feasibility Study','Estudio de factibilidad'
'Road design','D seño decarretera'
'North','Norte'
'Cross-Section','Corte'
#
#'English','Francais'
'CHAINAGE','PK'
'CH','PK'
'SCALES','ECHELLE'
'SCALE','ECHELLE'
'Scale','Echelle'
'LONGITUDINAL SECTION','Profil en Long'
'CROSS SECTIONS','Profil en Travers'
'OFFSET','Distance du centre'

In the example above, 'CHAINAGE' is listed above 'CH'. If instead 'CH' is listed before 'CHAINAGE', and "Stop after 1st match" is not been selected, you get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'.

EAT codes are treated like any other text. For example, '\SUB{Z,3}','\SUB{Z,4}' modifies the number of displayed decimal places in elevations from three to four. If the EAT includes a Name, use CHNGNAME to change the name instead.

Some characters must be specified by the three-digit decimal ASCII value. What you see depends on the font. Not all fonts contain all characters.

Font	ASCII value	Looks like	Function
TMODELF	\010		new line
TMODELF	\176	°	degree sign
TMODELF	\129	ø	diameter sign
SYMBOL	\199	ø	diameter sign
TMODELF	\044	,	comma
TMODELF	\039	'	apostrophe

For charts of these fonts, refer to Figures 5-13 and 5-14 in Terramodel 10 User's Guide.

Select a HAL, a Design DTM and some points and then report the Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Point Elevation, Design DTM Elevation, Elevation Difference and Name.

If you also select an Existing DTM, the report shows Ch, Offset, Design elevation, Point elevation, elevation differences from point to design, diff from existing to design, and Name.

The report can include Easting and Northing, a stripping depth and comma-separation for saving as a .CSV

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

CHTXT

Convert text objects representing distance along an alignment from USA stationing format, for example nn+nnn.nn, to UK and Australian chainage format, for example CH nnnnn.nn.

Create a closed pline of four equal arcs centred on a specified location, with a specified radius.

Remove duplicate sequential, 2D and arc points from selected sets and vertices from zero-length plines. Any such accidentally created points and vertices can cause commands to behave in unexpected ways.

More precisely:

Delete sets with all points the same,
Delete the last point in a set if it is an arc centre,
Delete points from sets that have the same point number as the previous point in the set,
Remove centre-points from two-point sets,
Relayer to layer 0 any 2D point in a set at the same X,Y location as a 3D point in the same set,
Remove from zero-length plines all splines and any more than two vertices, leaving just a single straight segment. and
Report all the changes, if requested.

Clip plines or sets where they cross selected closed boundaries and delete points, sets, plines and text.

Mode

Inside: Delete selected plines, sets, points and text entirely inside any of the boundaries, break selected sets and plines at the boundaries and delete the broken sets and plines inside the boundaries.
Outside: Delete selected plines, sets, points and text entirely outside the boundaries, break selected sets and plines at the boundaries and delete the broken sets and plines outside the boundaries.
Break: Break selected sets and plines at the boundaries.

Bound

Select boundaries by closed sets, closed plines or text objects.

Objs

Select points, sets, plines or text objects to be clipped or deleted.

OK

Clip and delete objects.

Cancel

Cancel

The clipping boundary of text objects is at the extents of their rectangular text boxes at the text clip margin defined in DRAFTSET (even when the text has a border that is not rectangular).

When selecting text by Window or Crossing, the location of the insertion point determines whether the text is selected.

Points are deleted if you select them. Selecting a set does not also select the points.

Blocks and tables are not selected. Text, blocks and tables are not broken.

To clip multiple objects outside one closed boundary, use CLIP Outside.
To clip multiple objects inside one closed boundary, use CLIP Inside.
To break multiple objects at one closed boundary, use CLIP Break.
To break one set or pline at a location, use BREAK.
To remove segments from sets or plines, use DELETESEGMENT.
To clip multiple objects outside all selected boundaries, use CLIPOUT.
To trim or extend multiple plines to an open boundary, use GCEXTEND.
To trim one pline or set to a distance or to one or more boundaries, use TRIM.
To trim or extend selected plines to a maximum length, use GC88.
To clip DTMs, use GCCLIP.
To clip and merge DTMs, use DTMMATCH, GC33, GC33MULT, GCCLIP or GCMERGE.
To automatically clip contours, profiles and cross sections from dead regions, see SETSMOOTH.
To clip Xlines, use GCXLINES.
To clip hatching or other blocks, use EXPLODE or GCEXPLOD then CLIP Outside.
To clip a block to a dynaview, see BLOCK and SCLBLKS.
To clip an image, use IMAGE Clip or Dynaimage.
To clip subsurface lines in cross sections, see RDDESIGNSET.
To clip a road template at a surface, see SHAPE Tie to ground.
To clip contours under labels during creation, use CONTOURSET .
To clip objects to text, use CLIP Inside.
To create solid hatching behind text, use TEXTBACK. If the hatching is the same colour as the background, this looks the same as clipping objects to text.
To display objects obscured by other objects, use RENUMREC.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Clip	Field Data Module	254

CLIPOUT

Clip all objects outside all selected boundaries.

Break selected objects at selected boundaries then delete all parts of the selected objects outside any of the boundaries.

For other variations on clipping, see CLIP.

The TML name is CLIP_OUT. If CLIPOUT does not run from the command line, create an alias from CLIPOUT to CLIP_OUT or enter CLIP_OUT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

Close the current project file (.PRO) and the corresponding project lock (.PLK) file that was opened with the project.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|Close project	Field Data Module	255

CLOSEFIG

For selected sets and plines, create a segment from the end to the start.

Optionally, use name masks from a file.

To limit your selection by name, create and select a Name Mask file (.NML). Names specified in the file may contain wildcard characters of ? and *. For example, tree_* would select tree_pine and tree_oak.

Modify the color number of selected objects to a single specified color number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with color 0 are reported as having color BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line color of their layer.

Blocks with Map Color flag turned ON are displayed in the color of the block. Blocks with Map Color flag turned OFF are displayed in the color of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOR command is normally installed with US English but not with British English. Geocomp Updates install both COLOR and COLOUR.

If COLOR command is not available, either

Enter COLOUR at the command line,
ALIAS from COLOUR to COLOR, or
Install COLOR.TML or a Geocomp Update available from Geocomp Systems.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
10/10/18	HELPTM	Modify\|Color	Secured	40

COLORCODE

Modify the colour of points by 3D distance from the current roadway.

Create and make current a roadway template defining a tunnel
Use TUNNELDTM to unwrap a layer of points to be compared with the tunnel design
Run COLORCODE to select points and modify colours

Tunnel Layer

Select an unwrapped layer of points to compare with the design

Select points:

Select points on the selected layer

Settings

Limits and ranges

Assign colour numbers within ranges of 3D distances.

Create|Modify point

Create new points on a new layer or modify the colour of existing points

Layer

Specify a new layer for new points

Assign offset to elevation

Assign 3D distances to the elevations of new points

Interpolation spacing

Interpolate 3D distances from cross sections extracted at the specified spacing

Colour

Modify the colours

Close

Close the command

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLORCODE is normally installed with US English but not with British English.

If COLORCODE is not available, try

Enter COLOURCODE at the command line
Delete ALIAS from COLORCODE to COLOURCODE
Create ALIAS from COLORCODE to COLOURCODE

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	Tunnel Training Guide	Tunnels\|Modify color codes	Secured	342

COLORCON

Increment the colour number of selected pline contours based on elevation.

Change the colour of plines, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

Use COLORCON with other commands. Here are some examples:

To colour isopachs of pavement depth at 0.1m intervals in 1.0m bands

CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.1 and Index interval to 1
CONTOUR the isopach surface
CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0
COLORCON with, say 20, colours—a number large enough so the colours don't start repeating
Modify COLOUR by colour if required.

To remove every second contour pline supplied at an interval of 0.25

CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25
COLORCON with number of colours = 2
DELETE the contour plines with elevations ending in .25 or .75 by colour

To modify the colour to match the last digit of the elevation

CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1
CONTOUR the surface
COLORCON with number of colours = 10

Contours with an elevation ending in 1 will be coloured 1, those ending in 2 will be coloured 2, and so on. Contours with an elevation ending in zero (0) will have colour 15 as the colour, since zero is reserved to designate colour by layer.

To change the index contour of supplied contour plines from 0.25 to 1.0

CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25
COLORCON with number of colours = 4
RELAYER the 1.0 interval contour plines by colour
COLOUR the contours by layer

If your contour interval is less than 1.0m, use the COLORCON installed with the Geocomp Update.

COLOURCON is an alias for COLORCON.

Modify the colour number of selected points by increment withing elevation ranges.

Modify the colour of points by elevation ranges determnined by the normal interval in CONTOURSET. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

Colouring points by elevation helps you visualize the direction of the ground slope and identify points considered spikes or depressions.

Colour 15 is used in place of colour 0. If you specify the number of colours as 5, the colour numbers used will be 15, 1, 2, 3, and 4.

For example, to colour points within bands of 1.0m elevation,

CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0
COLORCON with number of colours large enough so the colours don't start repeating
Modify COLOUR by colour if required.

Change the colour number of selected objects to a single specified colour number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with colour 0 are reported as having colour BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line colour of their layer.

Blocks with Map Colour flag turned ON are displayed in the colour of the block. Blocks with Map Colour flag turned OFF are displayed in the colour of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOUR command is normally installed with British English but not with US English. Geocomp Updates install both COLOR and COLOUR.

If COLOUR command is not available, either

Enter COLOR at the command line,
ALIAS from COLOR to COLOUR, or
Install COLOUR.TML or Geocomp Update available from Geocomp Systems.

Command date		Menu	Source	GC
10/10/18		Modify\|Colour	Secured	40

COLOURCODE

Modify the colour of points by 3D distance from the current roadway.

Create and make current a roadway template defining a tunnel
Use TUNNELDTM to unwrap a layer of points to be compared with the tunnel design
Run COLOURCODE to select points and modify colours

Tunnel Layer

Select an unwrapped layer of points to compare with the design

Select points:

Select points on the selected layer

Settings

Limits and ranges

Assign colour numbers within ranges of 3D distances.

Create|Modify point

Create new points on a new layer or modify the colour of existing points

Layer

Specify a new layer for new points

Assign offset to elevation

Assign 3D distances to the elevations of new points

Interpolation spacing

Interpolate 3D distances from cross sections extracted at the specified spacing

Colour

Modify the colours

Close

Close the command

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOURCODE is normally installed with British English but not with US English.

If COLOURCODE is not available, try

Enter COLORCODE at the command line
Delete ALIAS from COLOURCODE to COLORCODE
Create ALIAS from COLOURCODE to COLORCODE

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	Tunnel Training Guide	Tunnels\|Modify colour codes	Secured	342

COLRLINE

Modify the colours and linetypes of selected objects according the layer of the object and a mapping file. The file format is

layer,colour,linetype

See C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\GEOCOMP.LCL for an example.

COLORLINE and COLOURLINE are aliases for COLRLINE.

Open a new command line.

Open a new command line so that a command can be entered from the keyboard while another command is still active.

To start a new command line, select Command from the File menu or press Ctrl+Shift+C.

If you open a new command line while you are still in a command, when this command is complete, control is returned to the previous command.

If the command line has disappeared, see CommandToggle.

Toggle an invisible command line on, select Command line from the Window menu.

The command line toggle only controls visibility, unlike COMMAND in the File menu which opens a new command line on top of the current command.

CommandToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY COMMANDTOGGLE which simulates the Command line command in the Window menu.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Window\|Command line File\|Macro\|Play\|commandtoggle	Standard User-definable

COMPASS

Place a compass rose block with true north and optional magnetic deviation and date of survey.

Requires comp-tn.blk and comp-mn.blk which are supplied with the TML.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	616

COMPGRID

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

CONFORM

Report whether a road design and subgrade have been constructed with a pavement thickness within tolerance.

Compare selected as-built survey points with a roadway design surface.

The design surface could be a roadway or a finish surface defined in surface manager.

In the Settings, specify a bottom DTM for thickness calculations, a chainage grouping distance, a depth from design, upper and lower elevation tolerances and maximum and minimum thicknesses.

The report shows, for each as-built point within the roadway, the chainage, horizontal offset, point elevation, roadway elevation, point conformance and pavement thickness.

The point conformance compares the elevation of each surveyed point with the elevation of the design surface, less any specified depth from design. If the elevation difference is out of tolerance, the report also shows the tolerance and the amount outside tolerance.

The pavement thickness check compares the elevation of each surveyed point with the bottom DTM. If the thickness is out of tolerance, the report shows the maximum or minimum thickness and the amount outside tolerance.

The report also includes a summary with tolerance percentages, maxima, minima and standard deviation.

For example, suppose you are constructing a road with 130mm (+/- 5mm) asphalt over 300mm (+/-10mm) crushed rock. Construct the subgrade at what's supposed to be 430mm below design. Survey the subgrade to get the "Bottom DTM". Place the rock. Survey again to get "AsBuilt Pts". In CONFORM command, select the design road and AsBuilt Pts. In Settings, enter a depth from design of 0.13, maximum thickness of 0.310 and minimum thickness of 0.290. Reconstruct the rock surface where outside conformance. Resurvey. Rerun CONFORM with the new AsBuilt Pts and other values the same to prove conformance and to create a new Bottom DTM. Place the asphalt. Survey the asphalt. Rerun CONFORM with same design road, new AsBuilt Pts, depth from design 0.00, max thickness 0.135 and min thickness 0.125.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $500

CONLABZ

Modify elevation of contour plines from contour labels.

Connect two plines to form a single pline or two sets to form a single set connected by a new segment across the gap between the ends nearest to the selected locations.

Pick anywhere on the object nearest the end that you wish to be connected to the other line.

The resulting object retains the properties of the first object including colour and record number. Any objects that refer to either object line thereafter refer to the modified object.

Tick "Repeat" to select the other end of the second line as the nearest end of the first line. Click Cancel to close the command.

If either pline is splined, the new pline will be splined.

See also JOIN which requires the ends to have common locations.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	RG 149	Edit\|Connect	Field Data Module	15

CONTENTS

Open the Table of Contents for help by selecting Contents from the Help menu.

From the Terramodel Help menu, select Contents to open the Table of Contents, Index and Search tabs for Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help and Raw Data Editor Help.

Sometimes, only the Indexes open.

If a Microsoft web page with a title like "Error opening Help in Windows-based programs" opens instead, WinHlp32 is not enabled. WinHlp32 is standard for Windows XP, is optional for Windows Vista, 7, 8 and 8.1 and is not available for Windows 10. That web page provides instructions and links to install WinHlp32 on Windows versions Vista, 7, 8 and 8.1.

This TMLLIST incorporates the help for all commands in Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help and Raw Data Editor Help.

If a current Geocomp Update has been installed and a Geocomp menu file has been selected (MENUCFG) from C:\TMCustom\Geocomp, the Index submenu of the Help menu includes the Indexes to Import-Export Help and Raw Data Editor Help.

Entering CONTENTS at the command line can open the Terramodel Help Index or this TML List here at CONTENTS.

If WinHlp32 is enabled, pressing F1 while using a standard Terramodel command often opens Help at a relevant page.

Help files, or just the Indexes, can be opened from the command line for Terramodel (HELPTM), Import and Export (HELPIE), Raw Data Editor (HELPRDE), Toolboxes and Workspaces (HELPTOOLBOX), 3D Visualiser (HELPTVL), Visualizer Complete HELPTV and Geodimeter File Editor (HELPGFE).

Help for GFE, RDE, TOOLBOX, TV and 3D Visualiser is also included in their own menus, if WinHelp32 has been installed.

Create plines interpolated from a DTM at elevation intervals.

The extent of the DTM is controlled by LINKSET Settings.

The intervals, labelling, linetypes and layers are controlled by CONTOURSET.

The contours are created in the view that has the most contourable points on the specified layer. This DTM view is not necessarily the Plan view or the current view.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Contour	Secured	289

ContourAtElev

Create contour plines everywhere a specified elevation intersects a specified DTM layer.

The labelling and minimum length are controlled by CONTOURSET.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Generate contours at elev	Secured	DTM 4

CONTOURSET

Set the contour interval and labelling values for use by contouring commands.

For example, to create contours at 0.25 m elevation intervals and labelled index contours at 1.0 m intervals, turn on Label contours, specify a Normal interval of 0.25, an Index interval of 4 and a Label nth contour value of 4, then use CONTOUR to generate contour plines.

To label index contours, enter the same value for index interval and label nth contour. To label contours at all intervals, enter 1 for both.

Label nth contour: Enter the number of normal contour intervals per labelled contour interval
Dist. between labels: The distance along the contours at which the labels will be placed
Label text style: The text style used to label the contours
Border style: The text border style for the contour labels
Mirror elevation: Label contours with negative elevations with positive values, and vice versa
Clip lines under labels: Clip index contour lines within their elevation labels with text clip margins set by DRAFTSET
Force placement of labels: Place labels based strictly on the distance between labels, or move the label at bends if needed. Clipping text at bends can change the shape of contours.
Label contours: Label those contours with elevations that are evenly divisible by the normal interval multiplied by the label nth contour interval factor
Label ends of open contours: Label the ends of open contour plines

Normal interval

Enter the normal contour interval

Index interval

Enter the number of normal contour intervals per index contour interval

Minimum length

Enter the minimum length of contour plines

Splining

None: Do not smooth contour plines
B Spline: Smooth contour plines using B-spline curves which pass inside the control points (vertices)
Overhauser: Smooth contour plines with Overhauser curves that pass through the control points (vertices) and remain tangential to line segments

Exponential

Create contours at exponential intervals for surfaces such as bacterial concentration and corrosivity

Show depression contours

Create the lowest contour line in a depression using a specified linetype such as DEPRESSION

Normal: Specify the layer for normal contours. Use * as a wildcard for the DTM layer name. For example, enter *_CON to create normal contours extracted from the DTM_EXIST layer on layer DTM_EXIST_CON.
Index: Specify the layer for index contours. Use * as a wildcard for the DTM layer name. For example, enter *_ICON to create index contours extracted from the DTM_EXIST layer on layer DTM_EXIST_ICON.
Overwrite layers: Delete all objects on the contour and index contour layers before creating new contour plines

OK: Enable other commands to create contour plines at elevations divisible by the normal interval on the normal contour layer, and index contour plines and labels on the index contour layer
Cancel: Close the commands without changing an contour settings

Computes volumes for individual mounds or depressions based on contour plines.

The volumes are obtained by using the average-end-area method, where the area of a closed contour is determined, then averaged with an adjacent contour, and multiplied by the contour interval to obtain an incremental volume. Incremental volumes are then added together to obtain a total volume.

This method is less accurate than that of the EARTHWORK command, but can provide an alternative approximation of mound and depression volumes.

Use the ContourVol command in two different modes:

Line

Select a series of closed contour plines representing a mound or depression. Click the Volume button to display the accumulated volume in the message scroll area. If you wish to display a more detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer, click the Report button.

Digitizer

Digitize closed contours representing a mound or depression.

Input the elevation of the first contour using the Elev elevation control.
Digitize a series of points for the first contour using the Loc point control. You must provide a minimum of three points for each contour.
If you select points by typing coordinates in the Loc point control, click the Pt. button to enter the point and proceed to the next point.
When you are done digitising points, click the End button to close the contour.
Repeat for successive contours until you have defined the mound or depression.
Click the Report button to display a detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer.

The selected contours must be closed, assigned an elevation, and form a continuously rising mound or a continuously falling depression. If the contours are open due to labels, use GCMATCH to create plines across the gaps, then JOIN the contours.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Volumes from contours	Secured	DTM V

CONVDMS

Convert X and Y coordinates of selected points from ddd.mmss format to decimal degrees or decimal degrees to ddd.mmss format.

For example, a point at 123°27′24.4″ East, 89°39′15.6″ North, imported into Terramodel at 123.27244,89.39156, can be transformed by CONVDMS into decimal degrees at 123.45678, 89.65433.

DMS data can be stored in real-number fields using ddd.mmss format long as the applications that process those fields understand how to parse them. These can be imported from .CSV files into Terramodel as X and Y coordinates without error messages, but such coordinates will be incorrect for use in Terramodel until they are transformed to decimal degrees. Often, such coordinates are then transformed to metres or feet.

If your ASCII data includes other characters such as °, or spaces, remove them before importing into Terramodel.

Pts:: Select points to be transformed
From DDD.MMSS to DEC Degrees: Specify transformation from DMS to Decimal degrees
From DEC Degrees to DDD.MMSS: Specify transformation from Decimal degrees to DMS
Report: Report the new coordinates to P3Pad
Swap X and Y: Swap Lat|Long to Long|Lat during the transformation if required
OK: Complete the transformation
Cancel: Close the command without transforming any points

To convert from decimal degrees to feet or metres, use GCCOORD or COORDCON to select a From coordinate system with a name that starts with LL.

GCCOORD expresses and expects Latitudes south of the equator to be expressed as negative Y values. To convert Northings to Southings or vice versa, use GC56 with Y*-1.

The TML name is CONV_DMS. If CONVDMS does not run from the command line, create an alias from CONVDMS to CONV_DMS or enter CONV_DMS.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

CONVERT

Convert sets to plines or plines to sets. Any lines that are already of the desired type are not converted.

Colour, linetypes and layer names are retained. Names, start chainage and other attributes are not retained.

Lines: Select the lines to be converted
To (Set or Pline): Select the desired type of lines
Del old: Delete the original lines
Dup pts ok: If ON, create all new points for sets; if OFF, connect sets to any existing points at the vertices
Lay: Create the new plines or sets on the current layer. If OFF, create on the same layer as the original object.

GCCONVRT: GCCONVRT is an alternative which retains all the attributes such as Name and is much faster.
Dup pts ok: CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, especially if "Dup pts ok" is OFF.
Duplicate point removal: Use DTM formation or GC31 instead of CONVERT to remove duplicate points.
Elevation: When converting a set to a pline, the elevation of the new pline is derived from the first point in the set.
Plines and sets: You will keep or lose information specific to the object type. Plines converted to sets lose any spirals and splines. Sets converted to plines lose links to points and therefore their elevations, and also lose any lot number labels.
Visibility: Any hidden sets segments are omitted resulting in multiple plines. To control the visibility of set segments see DISPLAYSET Ignore hide, HIDE and REVEAL.
Arcs: When converting a pline to a set, a new point object is created for the radius point and at each PC and PT. If multiple arcs use the same arc points, duplicate points will be created at each arc point.
Chords: To create new sets or plines made up of straight segments, use GCCHORD.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Convert	Field Data Module	292

CONVSET

Define the slope convention (ratio preference) according your local practice.

Choose either Horizontal run: vertical rise (e.g. 4:1) or Vertical rise: horizontal run (e.g. 1:4).

These conventions can be overridden by Terramodel settings or report formats. Even within the one project, the convention may vary, so check in each case.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Convention settings	Field Data Module

COORDCON

Convert points, plines, blocks and text between predefined geodetic coordinate systems using predefined ellipsoids and datums by the seven-parameter or NTv2 distortion grid method.

Select From and To Coordinate Systems

Select Search to select the From and To coordinate systems.

World regions: Select a region of the world then select a system from that region from the drop-down list.
Define ellipsoid | Define datum | Define CS: If desired coordinate systems are not in any of the regional lists, new ellipsoids, datums and coordinate systems can be defined. Geocomp Systems adds new definitions requested by Customer Care Members. Add coordinate systems from a file by ADDMAPSY.
List selected: List details of the selected coordinate system.
List all: List details of every available ellipsoid, datum and coordinate system.

Any point

List the coordinates of a location in both From and To coordinate systems.

List the coordinates of a location in both From and To coordinate systems. For latitudes and longitudes, enter in DDD.MMSS.ssssss format.

Multiple objects

Select Objs:: Select objects to be transformed.
List: List the coordinates of selected points in both From and To coordinate systems.
Convert: Transform the coordinates of select objects from the From coordinate system to the To coordinate system.

The look-up tables in COORDCON emphasise USA and UTM coordinate systems. GCCOORD is a similar command that transforms the same coordinate systems but which emphasises Australian and New Zealand systems. Both call the same Mentor database files COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID files in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Mentor.dir. Both commands require COGO module. "List selected" in GCCOORD shows more details.

Coordinate systems with names that start with LL use latitudes and longitudes. The others use eastings and northings.

The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.

Use MEASUNIT to check the project units first. If converting to or from using feet, check whether to use Survey feet or International Survey feet.

Conversion between coordinate systems based on NAD-27 and NAD-83, are only accurate to within about 15 centimeters (RMS) in the contiguous 48 states since it uses the NADCON overlay.

Always make a backup copy of your project file prior to converting coordinates for the points in your file.

Select objects by View or by Layer to avoid missing objects that are invisible or outside a window.

Many Coordinate Systems that are not already included, can be easily added by ADDMAPSY, or by installing a Geocomp Update, or by Geocomp Systems. Please read Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon before creating your own.

To define a coordinate system:

Backup all the files and folders under C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Mentor.dir.
Run COORDCON
Click Coordinate Systems
Click Search
To list or define ellipsoids, click Define Ellipsoid
To list or define datums, click Define Datum
Click Define CS
Select the datum
Enter a short name for the new Coordinate System into the Coordinate System Name box
Enter an appropriate description
Select the Projection
Enter required information into the active boxes
Click New CS to add the coordinate system to the dictionary.
Click on OK.
Click Set current to select the coordinate system
Close COORDCON
Manually edit the COORDCON.LUT found in the Terramodel Search Path to add the name of your Coordinate System.
Run COORDCON to confirm that you can select the coordinate system, and that your test data with known coordinates transforms correctly.
If you make a mistake at any stage, reinstate the backed up files and start again.

GCLLGRID: Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels
FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, LLTABLE and SHADOW: Some other related commands

GC07 and GRIDPLAN: Transform when either coordinate system is not geodetic.
CONVDMS: Transform from latitudes and longitudes in decimal degrees to Degrees Minutes and Seconds expressed as DDD.MMsssss (or vice versa).
MEASUNIT: Convert between foot and metre coordinate systems.
CSM and GEOSYS: Manage Trimble coordinate systems.
GEOCALC: GeoCalc 4.20.

TML, LUT or DLL date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	UG 401 Nav notes	Cogo\|Utilities\|Coordinate conversion HDMS\|Coordinate\|Coordinate transformation	Geocomp Update or $200	GeoCalc

COORDS

Display cursor coordinate data on a separate scroll dialog.

The data displayed varies depending on the current command, the current control type (locate, bearing, distance, offset, station, point, etc.) and the active view mode (plan, profile, sheet, cross section, etc.).

Coordinates: When the cursor is in the Plan view, display the Northing and Easting; in Profile view, the station | chainage and elevation; in Cross section view, the offset and elevation; and in Sheet view, X and Y. When a rubber band is used, display the X and Y differences from an anchor location to the cursor.
GPS Coordinates: Reserved for future use.
3-D Digitiser: Used when the digitizer responds with X, Y and Z values.
Bearing | Distance: Show the bearing and distance from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor when in the plan view mode.
Grade | Distance: Show the grade and distance from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor when in the Profile or Cross section view mode.
Station | Chainage | Offset: For a command like IDSTATION | IDCHAINAGE that has a a rubber band cursor from an active alignment, in the Plan view mode display the station | chainage and offset and show vertical lines at station | chainage in Profile view and Offset in the Cross section view.
Station | Chainage | DElevation: When rubber banding in the Profile view mode, display the station | chainage and the difference in elevation from the selected alignment to the cursor.
Layer | Elevation: Show the current DTM layer and the elevation on that DTM at the cursor location. Set the current DTM layer first using DTMCH or some other command that requires a DTM.
Slope | Aspect: Show the slope of the triangle on the current DTM layer at the cursor location and the direction of the surface slope. Layer | Elevation must be turned on to define the current DTM layer.
Visible: Control the visibility of the coordinate scroll.
Save: Save the current settings to the TMODWIN.INI file and exit the command.
Done: Keep the current settings for the current session without updating the TMODWIN.INI file, and exit the command.

Use the title bar to drag the scroll to a new location.
Minimize the scroll to a "Coordinates" icon at bottom left of the primary display, by clicking its minimize button at the top right corner of the dialog.
Maximize a minimized coordinate scroll icon by a double-click.
The coordinate scroll always opens on the primary display, even when moved to another display.
The Labels for each view are configured in the [ViewLabel] section of TMODWIN.INI by VIEWSET. The other Settings are stored in the [CoordScroll] section by COORDS.
The number of decimal places for Coordinate Scroll, and the precision of graphically entered points using a digitizer, is configured in [CoordScroll] by CoordNdec=. All these settings can be imported from a TMODWIN.INI with EDITINI.
The "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." button in EDITINI (amongst other things) makes the coordinate scroll visible with coordinates, bearings, distances, stations | chainages and offsets, moves the scroll to a location on the primary display and updates CoordNdec= to match the number of decimal places configured in Units Settings (UNITSSET) Precision. It does not change the View Labels.
If you lose the coordinate scroll, check that the scroll is "Visible". The scroll always opens on the primary display, and can then be moved to another display. If you still can't find the coordinate scroll, use FIXSCROLL | RECOVERSCROLL | CORDSCRL to reset the display location only, the "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." button in EDITINI to reset defaults, or use EDITINI to import a known good [CoordScroll] section from a TMODWIN.INI.

Duplicate selected objects on a new layer or at a new location.

3d: Enable entry of X, Y and Z into From and To coordinates, select 3d. Otherwise, enter X and Y only.
Lay: Copy the objects to the current layer, otherwise to their original layers.
From: If not blank, the location from which the distance and direction is computed.
From: If not blank, the location to which the distance and direction is computed

The coordinate order is controlled by VIEWSET.
The objects are moved by the distance and direction from the From location to the To location.
To enter a known coordinate shift, enter 0,0 (or 0,0,0 if 3D), in "From" and dX,dY( or dX,dY,dZ) in "To".
To assign starting point numbers for new points, use the "Start Pn" setting of POINTSET.
Not all properties are retained. For example, colours, names and contourability can be modified or omitted.
To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, while retaining many of the properties, use GCCOPY.
To make multiple copies, use MULTICOPY.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Copy	Field Data Module	178

COPYROAD

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob retaining all roadways, registered alignments and phases.

This allows you to quickly recompute a new design without having to re-enter all the values or lose the old design.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates, skips, superelevations, design settings or mass haul information.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	415

COPYRWAY

Copy all roadways from one road job to a different roadjob.

This allows you to merge two road jobs. To copy some roadways, copy the whole roadjob then delete the roadways you don't want.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates or superelevations.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Roads\|More...\|Copy roadjob	Geocomp Update or $200	415

COPYTEMP

Update all design or subgrade templates in a roadway which have the same template name by copying the design of a nominated template.

This saves having to repeat the same edits to multiple templates with the same template name or repeatedly use the Copy button in TMANAGER.

If you lose the coordinate scroll, check that the scroll is "Visible" in COORDS.

The scroll always opens on the primary display, and can then be moved to another display.

If you still can't find the coordinate scroll, enter FIXSCROLL or RECOVERSCROLL, aliases for CORDSCRL, at the command line to reset the display location to 600 pixels down and 600 pixels across from the top left corner of the primary display.

The location can also be reset using EDITINI by the "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." button or importing a known good [CoordScroll] section from a TMODWIN.INI.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	SDS

COUNT

Report the number of points, plines, text, sets, tables, attributes, dynaviews or blocks that exist in the Plan, Profile, Sheet, XSect, Super, View6, View7 or View8 views.

Only used object types and populated views are reported.

Import layer lists, layers, layer colours and layer linetypes from a file

The format of the input file is layer_list,layer_name,line_colour,point_colour,linetype.

Start all comment lines with the character "#". The first line should be a comment line. Include the word "Update" anywhere after the # on the first line to update all layers in the input file, otherwise colours and linetypes apply to new layers only.

If the file contains any new layers, you are prompted whether to import new layers or import only the layer lists and retain the pre-existing layers.

Only the layer list and layer name fields are required. Background prominence is not imported.

Use LLISTSET to check that the layer lists have been created correctly.

Use LLRPT to export a file suitable for use with CREATELL.

See also CSV2ADC to import a list of layers while creating an AutoDraft Configuration file.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

CROSSCHK

Create points in layer CROSSING wherever any selected sets or plines cross.

These new points have the name "Cross" followed by the layer names, and are labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

These points indicate where selected sets or plines cross any other selected set or pline.

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

As each set or pline is checked against all the other sets and plines, the count will appear to speed up on large selections.

Use BLINECHK to check and report for crossing sets on a DTM layer.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|Mark\|Crossing lines	Geocomp Update or $250	43

CROWFOOT

Select a segment label text object and toggle its configuration to either display or not display the crow's feet leader lines that point to the label from the end of the line segment.

If the label is a user-mode label, toggling crowfeet off will restore the normal leader line established by this command's settings.

To make clear which line segment is being labeled , use curved arrows projecting from the end points toward the label, which are referred to by some as crow’s feet. The crow’s feet are a form of leader line and part of the segment label text object. They dynamically mark the location of the specific points that the segment label refers to, moving in response to a relocation of either point as the label updates to indicate the revised geometry.

Settings: Select a leader line line type that includes small arrows, such as CROW'S FOOT, and a gap, for crow's feet, and a 'normal' leader line style, linetype and gap for the User mode of LABELSEG.
Toggle: Toggle the crow’s feet off and on, unless the selected segment label text object was created using LABELSEG User mode, where the label is not placed alongside the segment but rather pulled back away from it, in which case when the crow’s feet are toggled on there are two leader lines — one pointing to each end point, and when toggled off, a single leader line is drawn to the center of the line segment using the "normal" leader line style and linetype.

The crow's foot gap is the distance in project units between the point and the crow’s foot leader line. You could, for example, use a linetype that includes a hollow circle representing the property corner, and configure the crow’s foot gap so to crow's foot touches the circle.

The Normal ‘User’ Segment Label Leader Line is the leader line used to point to a line segment when the segment label was created using the User mode of LABELSEG, and when crow’s feet are toggled off. User mode is typically used on short line segments, along which there is not enough room for the label to be placed, even without crow’s feet, so when you toggle the crow’s feet off, these two leader lines are replaced by a single leader line, pointing to the midpoint of the line segment.

The 'normal' leader line gap is 0.00. Adjust for pen width if required.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	RG 1223	Draft\|Crowfoot toggle	Field Data Module

CSM

Manage coordinate systems used by Trimble devices only.

If you import a Trimble survey .DC file using the IMPORT script, the coordinate system defined in that file is imported into the .PRO file and used by specific Trimble-related commands. For this to work, the coordinate system must be present in the current system database file CURRENT.CSD. Coordinate System Manager manages CURRENT.CSD.

Browse your parameters
Define a local grid
Establish a new site if you are working in an area that is not adequately covered by the definitions provided
Create or edit a site, zone, datum, ellipsoid, or geoid
Duplicate records
Select the projection used by a zone
Select the ellipsoid of any datum
Specify vertical and horizontal adjustments to a zone and save them as a named site
Select a geoid model
Assign the files to be used by a geoid model or datum transformation
Download the latest coordinate system definitions (.ggf) from Trimble
Save As a new CSD to replace CURRENT.CSD.

To open Coordinate System Manager, launch the .exe (see below), type CSM in Terramodel with Geocomp Update P, use another Trimble application such as Business Center.

Terramodel 10.61 installs Coordinate System Manager 2.80 with its coordinate system definitions. To update to CSM 3.3.1.0 download, extract and then copy the files to C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Coordinate System Manager\. If the folder does not exits, create it first. Once CSM 3.3.1.0 or later is installed, run CSM and download the latest updates to the software and definitions.

Trimble Business Center (TBC), Pathfinder and Geomatics Office (TGO) also install versions of CSM.

Coordinate System Manager manages the CURRENT.CSD database. The Terramodel installation backs up CURRENT.CSD and replaces it with a old default. Manually replace CURRENT.CSD with another of the same file name and location, if you want. That file could be a copy of one of the back-ups or one created by Save As in Coordinate System Manager. See Tools | Options menu in CSM for the location of CURRENT.CSD and .GGF files (which is usually C:\ProgramData\Trimble\GeoData).

Version	Executable	For Windows	Logo colour	Folder colour
2.80	C:\Program files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodb\Geodb95.exe	95 to 98	Blue	Red
2.90	C:\Program files\Common Files\Trimble\Geodb\Geodbnt.exe	32-bit	Blue	Red
3.3.1.0	C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Coordinate System Manager\CoordinateSystemManager.exe	64-bit	Green	Yellow

To view and change the Trimble coordinate system in a project file, see GEOSYS.

Report construction staking from roadway crosssection surfaces.

In generating a staking report, define a cross-section stakeline. A roadway cross-section often contains many lines representing the existing ground, pavement and subgrade surfaces, curbs, etc. The stakeline is the surface to be staked which may include a single surface or include the finished surface in some places and the bottom of the lowest subgrade in others. The cross-section stakeline can include points computed at horizontal and vertical offsets from certain cross-sections.

DTM Settings

Open ROADDTM Settings (ROADDTM) to specify the cross-section surfaces for the stakeline, add offset points to the stakeline, and enter the chainage | station limits.

Stake settings

Control the point in the cross-section stakeline from which the reported staking data is to be based, limit the report to a particular portion of the stakeline, and specify the direction.

Reference | Point code: Specify any reference node on the cross-section stakeline by point code which can include * and ? wildcards, or report relative to the centre of the cross section.
Reference | Offset: Specify a node in a cross section that matches with the point code by entering a nearby offset, or report relative to the centre of the cross section.
Start | End: Limit the report to between a Start and End chainage | station range, specified by point code or offset.
Staking direction: Report list nodes from left to right or from right to left.

Report Format

Select a construction staking format file .RSF. or edit such a file with a text editor.

Screen

Report to P3Pad.

File

Report to a text file

Create

Create the construction staking reports

Close

Close CSTAKE command

The .RSF file contains both literal text that is simply repeated in the report, and tags that perform specific actions. The file is divived into two sections: Header and Data. There are three type of tags — Section Heading tags, Action tags and Data tags.

SECTION HEADING TAGS

Header: The header section is preceded by the tag {HEADER}. The lines of text that follow it and which precede the data section are placed as literal text into the report.
Data: The data section is preceded by the tag {DATA}. The following action tags and data tags are processed.

ACTION TAGS

The action tags some particular action in creating the report. The following action tags are supported. In the following, when reference is made to moving to a particular point, that means that the described point in the cross-section stakeline is to be the next point in the report.

{CENTER}: Move to the center of the cross-section stakeline
{LEFT}: Move to the leftmost point in the cross-section stakeline
{RIGHT}: Move to the rightmost point in the cross-section stakeline
{NEXT}: Move to the next point in the cross-section stakeline
{PREV}: Move to the previous point in the cross-section stakeline
{SEARCHL=XX}: Search to the left for a point with a point code "xx"
{SEARCHR=XX}: Search to the right for a point with a point code "xx"

DATA TAGS

Data tags are replaced by the actual cross-section stakeline data that they represent.

{CUTFILL}: Cut or fill at current node relative to existing ground ("Cut -3.45" or "Fill 0.37")
{DELTACF}: Cut or fill at current node relative to reference node or previous node ("Cut -3.45" or "Fill 0.37")
{DELTAZ}: Cut or fill at current node relative to reference node or previous node ("-3.45" or "0.37")
{DISTANCE}: Distance between reference node or current node, and the next node (always a positive number)
{EAST}: Easting of current node
{ELEVATION}: Elevation of current node
{NORTH}: Northing of current node
{OFFSET}: Offset of current node
{PTCODE}: Name of current node
{ROADDESC}: Description of current roadjob
{ROADNAME}: Name of current roadway
{SIDE}: Side of cross-section (Left or Right)
{SLOPE}: Slope from current node to next node
{STATION}: Station at cross-section
{SURFACE}: Name of selected surface or design surface
{TAB}: Tab character
{SEGNAME}: Name of the node at the end of a segment
{SEGDIST}: Segment distance
{SEGCUTFILL}: Segment cut or fill
{SEGZ}: Segment elevation difference

For an example report format file and output file, see pages 997 to 999 in the Terramodel Reference Guide.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	RG 992	Road\|Reports\|Staking\|Construction	Field Data Module	41

CSV2ADC

Convert a table of feature codes into an ASCII AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file and create new layers for use with AUTODRAFT.

Use a spreadsheet to populate fields following these examples and save as a .CSV:

Feature Code	Layer Name	Colour	Point or Line	Description	Block name	Line Type	Text	Category
102	TOP	0	L	Top of bank		SOLID		Topo
TR	Trees	3	P	Tree foliage	TREE8		Wattle	Veg

Select a .MAP file created for use in MAPPOINTS command in this format:

Feature code,lineype,layer name,line colour number

Select "Create layers" to also create new layers in the current project with the layer name, point or line colour and linetype.

To convert your feature code list from .CSV to .ADC and use in AutoDraft:

Make up a table of feature codes in a spreadsheet
Save that table as .CSV
Use CSV2ADC to convert the .CSV to an .ADC in ASCII format
Edit the .ADC in a text editor, if you want
Open the .ADC in the AutoDraft Editor
Edit or add any extra information using the AutoDraft Editor
Save the binary .ADC file
Use the binary .ADC with AUTODRAFT.

The fields and values written to the .ADC file are derived from feature codes in the .CSV or .MAP. Default global codes are added.

The AutoDraft Editor saves .ADC files in a binary .ADC format that can only be opened by AutoDraft.

Create a table of text and plines from a comma-separated values (*.CSV) file or tab-separated (*.TXT) file.

Browse to select the input file and then select OK to create the table.

Loc: Enter the location of the top-left corner of the table.
Use first line in file as table heading: Create a heading on the first row of the table from the first line of the imput file.
Table heading: Enter a heading for the first row of the table. Leave blank to omit the heading row.
Heading Style: Select a text style for any heading.
Layer: Enter the layer for plines and text. The plines are created in the line colour.
Text style: Enter the text style for the data. Use a fixed-width font for numerical data.
Text Colour: Enter the colour for the text only.
Skip the first [ ] lines: Specify the number of lines at the beginning of the input file to be ignored.
Tab or Comma: Specify whether the input file is tab or comma-delimited.
Hatch background: Create hatching behind the table with specified pattern, colour and scale.

The height and width of the rows and columns are calculated from the text styles and view scale. The width of the columns vary to fit the longest text object in each column.

Lines of text with no delimiters are skipped. If your text includes commas, use a tab-delimited file. Both file formats can be saved from spreadsheet programs.

Report attribute names of selected points to a .CSV file.

Create a cul-de-sac alignment at the end of a pline or set on the same layer.

Select alignment

Select the horizontal alignment.

Culdesac type

Select one of four cul-de-sac types:

Typical: With three circular arcs
Teardrop: With a central traffic island
Hammerhead: With a square end
Knuckle: With widening on the outside of a bend

Properties

Define the properties for the selected type of cul-de-sac.

Typical: Enter radius of bulb, offset to left or right of bulb, radii and tangent lengths at entrance and street width, and radii for the island.

Teardrop: Enter radius of bulb, offset to left or right of bulb, right and left radius of entrance and street width.

Hammerhead: Enter length of hammerhead, right and left radius of entrance and street width.

Knuckle: Enter radius of knuckle, offset to inside or outside, tangent lengths and radii at entrance and street width.

Offsets defined in LAYOUT can be selected in Properties.

Create

Create points and sets on the current layer using the selected alignment, cul-de-sac type and defined properties.

Close

Close the command

Select the current layer by selecting an object or from a list of existing layers.

Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement while drawing linework.

None: No restriction on cursor direction
Ortho: Draw the cursor along an orthogonal line from the last point drawn, based on the azimuth in the Snap Settings
Perpendicular: Draw the cursor along a line perpendicular to the last line segment drawn
Snap settings: Change snap settings to control the increment

To change the cursor mode at the command line or in a toolbox,

For cursor mode	Enter at command line
None	Cursor 0
Ortho on	Cursor 1
Ortho On\|Off	Cursor -1
Perpendicular on	Cursor 2
Perpendicular On\|Off	Cursor -2

In the standard Trimble installation of Terramodel, function keys include:

Key	Function
F7	GRIDSET On\|Off
F8	CURSOR Ortho On\|Off
F9	SNAPSET On\|Off
F11	CURSOR Perpendicular On\|Off

Function keys imported from a GEOCOMP...TMODWIN.INI, include on|off toggles for the display of point numbers (F7), point markers (F8), point elevations (F9) and point names (F11). See EDITINI to import [FunctionKeys].

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Cursor	Field Data Module

CURVE

Insert an arc, spiral, vertical, combining or Overhauser curve into a pline.

Select the type of curve to be inserted and the IP (also known as control point, vertex or Intersection Point) by clicking on or typing in the pline:cp.

After you select the curve type and vertex, click OK to select the curve properties.

Mode

Select Arc, Spiral, Vertical, Combining or Overhauser mode.

Pine:cp

Select a vertex or curve in a pline.

Curve

Arc mode

Create a circular curve.

Arc len: Enter the arc length.
Chord: Enter the chord length.
Dc: Enter the degree of curvature as an angle.
External: Enter the shortest distance from the IP to the arc.
Mid-ord: Enter the longest distance from the arc to the chord.
Radius: Enter the radius of the arc.
Tangent: Enter the tangent distance between the end of the curve and the intersection point.

Spiral mode

Create a circular curve and two clothoid transition spirals.

Dc: Enter the degree of curvature as an angle
Radius: Enter the radius of the arc

and enter the length of

Back: the back (entry) spiral.
Ahead: the ahead (exit) spiral.

Vertical mode

Create a parabolic curve in a profile view.

Length: Enter the horizontal length of the VC.
Kfactor: Enter the K-factor.
Crest: Enter the crest elevation.
Sight (stopping): Enter the stopping sight distance. The eye and object heights are taken from Design Settings (DESIGNSET).
Sight (passing): Enter the passing sight distance. The eye and object heights are taken from Design Settings (DESIGNSET).
Point: Enter a location that the curve passes through.

Decurve

Remove the curve.

Combining

Insert or edit a curve combining two circular arcs and three clothoid transition spirals.

Spiral In

The length of the entry spiral.

First radius

The radius of the the first arc.

Combining spiral

The length of the spiral between the two arcs.

Second radius

The radius of the second arc.

Spiral Out

The length of the exit spiral.

% delta 1st arc

The portion of the total delta angle at the IP as divided between the two arcs (expressed as a positive value), or
The length of the first arc (expressed as a negative value).

Overhauser

Insert a spline curve that passes through the vertex.

Close

Close the command.

See also these commands which allow you to enter curves with alignments: PLINE, SEGEDIT and HALDATA commands.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	84
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Arc\|Pline curve Draw\|Pline\|Curve Draw\|Arc\|Curve Edit\|More...\|Curve in pline	Field Data Module	84

CURVESOL

Calculate and report the properties of an arc given two arc properties. No objects are created.

Choose from two known arc properties: Enter two values of Radius, Chord length, Arc length, Delta angle, Mid-Ordinate length, External angle, Tangent length or Degree of Curvature.
Segment area: List the segment area of the computed arc.
Sector area: List the sector area of the computed arc.
Curve definition chord length: Solve the degree of curvature based on the arc definition or chord definition of a curve. For the chord definition, also enter the chord length.
Calculate: Once two arc properties have been entered, calculate the remaining values.
Cancel: Cancel the command.
Report: Report each of the arc properties to a P3Pad report.

Curve parameters are reported to the precision established in UNITSSET.

Arc property combination	Restriction
Arc length, chord	Arc length must be greater than the chord distance
Arc length, tangent	Arc length must be less than 2 times the tangent length
Chord, middle ordinate	Chord distance must be greater than 2 times the middle ordinate
Chord, radius	Chord distance must be less than 2 times the radius
Chord, tangent	Chord distance must be less than 2 times the tangent
Delta, arc length	Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, radius	Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, chord (or external, middle ordinate, or tangent)	Delta must be less than 180 degrees
External, middle ordinate	The external distance must be greater than the middle ordinate
Middle ordinate, radius	The middle ordinate must be less than the radius.

Move or rotate a design DTM while automatically adjusting elevations until the desired cut, fill or net volume to an existing DTM is reached.

Shift or rotate the design surface for a better fit. Click OK to accept the new design location.

Orig

Select the original DTM layer.

Des

Select the design DTM layer.

Settings

Volume balance options: Adjust the balances on Nett, Cut or Fill volume until the entered volume is reached within the entered volume tolerance. To fix elevations, enter * for the volume.
Shrink Swell factors: Enter shrink and swell factors for volumes if not equal to 1.0.
Default Design Batter Slopes: Specify whether to also compute sets where batters from design DTMs intersect the existing surface at entered cut or fill slopes.
Report: Report to P3Pad

Shift

Shift the design DTM horizontally by selecting From and To Locations.

Rotate

Rotate the design DTM about a location.

OK

Adjust the elevations of the design DTM.

Cancel

Cancel the command without making more adjustments.

Any changes to shrink or swell factors are also made to EARTHWORK Settings.
Batter (tie-in) cut and fill slopes are entered by DESIGNSET and edited for individual sets by EDIT Slopes.
The pad can be moved or rotated with fixed elevations by entering * for any balance volume. This is similar to MOVEPAD.
If the design layer cannot form a DTM, but has least one pline, you are prompted whether to convert plines on that layer to sets.
Constrain movement of some points on the design DTM by names CUT ONLY, FILL ONLY, FIX, FIX X, FIX Y, FIX Z, FIX XZ, FIX YZ, FIX XY or FIX XYZ.
Some constraint examples:
- FIX a long pad or water storage at one end and move the other end
- FILL ONLY above an existing pipe
Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.
Set distance and volume units by labelling and conversion factors in UNITSSET.
The design DTM must be enclosed by a DTM edge of one or more breakline sets.
Any batters must intersect the existing surface.

CUTFILL replaces MOVEPAD.

Export points, sets and text to Civilcad .AS5 file format.

To export plines, GCCONVRT to sets first.

Civilcad .AS5 files can be imported by Civilcad versions 5 and later.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

CVD5IMPT

Import data in Civilcad ASCII .AS5 file format.

The point numbers are retained, with the option of adding a constant.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

.AS5 files can contain zero-length arcs which can result in extra circles when exported to DXF or DWG. Use CLEANUP to remove the zero-length arcs.

Civilcad .AS5 files can be exported from Civilcad version 5 and later.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

CVDEXPT

Export points, sets and text to Civilcad .ASC file format.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (.ASC) files can be imported into Civilcad versions 4 and 5. For later versions of CivilCAD, export .AS5 with CVD5IMPT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	FC C

CVDIMPT

Import data in Civilcad .ASC file format.

Include points, strings and text.

Layer names are retained and codes are imported as names.

Non-contourable points in the ASC file are not included in Terramodel DTMs. EDIT and GC53 toggle this attribute.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (.ASC) files can be exported from Civilcad versions 4 and 5. For later versions of Civilcad, export as .AS5 and import with CVD5IMPT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	FC C

CWISE

Import a mine model in Datamine binary data file format.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

DCEDIT

View or edit Trimble .DC files and Sokkia .SDR files.

DCEDIT is an alternative to running the DC File Editor directly from Windows Start... Programs... Trimble Office... Utilities... DC File Editor.

If you have a 32-bit version of Windows, type DCEDIT32 in the command line instead.

Alias date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Cogo\|Utilities\|Trimble DC file editor Windows Start\|Trimble Office\|DC File Editor	Secured

DDIST

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

DDIST uses two command bars that define the information required for the two distances (arcs) to be intersected. Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

1st pt/arc: Select either a point or an arc.
Dist: If you select a point, enter a distance from the point in the distance control to the right. If you select an arc, enter a distance from the arc centre. The default distance is the radius.
OK: Click OK to display a ghosted circle to indicate the location of the first arc. Now enter a 2nd point or arc and a distance then pick a location with the mouse to indicate one of the two arc intersection solutions.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Lines\|Distance-distance intersection	Secured	11

DEADSETS

Show dead regions within a DTM or create dead regions.

Dead regions are defined by closed breakline sets with Dead smoothness.

DTM:: Select a DTM layer.
Loc Dead Tri:: Select a location inside a DTM triangle and create a closed breakline with Dead smoothness that defines a dead region around that triangle.
Min Tri Area: Enter a minimum triangle area.
Create: Enable creation of dead regions for each triangle that exceeds a Min Tri Area.
Show Dead Regions Layer
Turn Off: Delete any hatching created by this command.; Show every dead region on the selected layer by hatching. If Create is enabled, first create dead regions by minimum triangle area. Delete any hatching previously created by this command.
Cancel: Close the command. Dead region boundary sets and hatching are retained.

The default layer is the current DTM layer.

The angle is displayed in the message area for cutting and pasting into an angle control.

TML date			Source	GC
29/10/08			Field Data Module	91

DELBLKS

Delete all blocks with missing block definitions and all text linked to missing external text files.

"Unable to find block" messages may be due to trying to display:

An external block that links to a missing .BLK file
An internal block that is not listed in BLOCK command
A block with an invalid or too-long name
A missing, unlisted or invalid block that is nested inside another block, or
A text object that includes $File: to specify the path and name of an external file that is missing.

Common causes include importing a .DWG or .DXF with problem blocks, AUTODRAFT with missing or misspelt block names and moving or deleting a .PRO, .BLK or text file.

DELBLKS

to delete all

internal blocks that are not listed in the List mode of BLOCK command
external blocks that have no corresponding .BLK file in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Blocks or any Terramodel Search Path folder such as C:\TMCustom\Geocomp.
text objects with $File: linking to a path and file that no longer exists, and

and, optionally, replace these deleted blocks and text with new points that

have the locations of the insertion points
have names that include the names of the deleted objects, and
are excluded from all DTMs

BLKREAD

to reread the definition of an external .BLK after the .BLK has been updated

EXPLODE

to explode any blocks that contain nested missing blocks (then run DELBLKS again)

DELETE or EDIT

to delete or edit any objects

GCBADEAT

to delete or select EAT text with a subject or parent that no longer exists

BLOCK Purge

to purge selected unused blocks from the list of blocks

GCPURGE

to purge all unused blocks from the list of blocks

BLOCK

To list block definitions in a project

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	Built-in	Draw\|Block\|Delete missing external	Geocomp Update or $200

DELAYLST

Delete one or more layer lists.

Delete selected objects that cross the line anywhere between two locations.

You may want to run DUPLTRIS, GC58 or DISJOIN first.

See also DELETESEGMENT, GCFOLLOW, GCDTMEDG and TRISWAP.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

DELETE

Prevent objects from being selected for deletion by Type with Search Settings and by Layer with LAYERSET.

Once you Delete the objects, it may be necessary to REDRAW your screen to view the changes.

If you Delete all of the points defining a set, the set is also deleted. If you have checked "Protect Pn in Use From Deletion" in Point Settings your points will remain intact if you have selected the points for deletion but not the attached set.

Click on each segment in turn that you want to delete then click Close to close the command without deleting any other segments.

See also DELETE to delete the whole record, BREAK to break the segment at a location, HIDE to hide or reveal a set segment and SEGEDIT to edit using a table of segments.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deleted set segments like DELETESEGMENT does now.

Possible aliases include BREAKSEG, DELETESEG, DELSEG and DS.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Delete line segment	Field Data Module	31

DELNULTR

Delete selected sets that are triangles and have a smoothness of Dead.

Dead triangles are excluded from DTMs. They can be created by DEADSETS and by GC12DIN importing Full_Tins.

Select "Delete points that are no longer in sets?" to remove the first four points imported from a Full_Tin.

See also DUPLTRIS, REMTRIS, SETSMOOTH and GC53.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $200

DEPTHDTM

Copy selected closed plines to a new layer, create new plines outside them at a specified offset and with elevation 0.000, then convert the new and copied plines to sets that represent breaklines in a depth surface.

Pline (Layer list):: Select plines by layer list
Depth DTM:: Select a new layer for the Depth DTM
Offset Dist:: Enter a horizontal offset
Reverse Elevations: Multiply elevations of new points by -1.0
OK: Delete existing objects on the Depth DTM layer and then copy and create the new breaklines
Cancel: Close the command without deleting or creating any objects

The Depth DTM layer can be used as a depth surface in Surface manager and can be subtracted from a DTM to form another DTM below it.

Create depth surfaces in a roadway from borehole layers that have names with a specified prefix.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

DESC

Change numeric names to alphanumeric names using a user-defined descriptor mapping file (.PCO).

Points

Select points

Map File

Browse to select a .PCO file in the format

Integer,Short_Name,Full_Description

OK

For each point with a name that matches an integer in the .PCO file, replace the name with the Short_Name.

Cancel

Cancel the command.

Change numeric point names to alphanumeric point names using a multi-code separator and global code identifier using a user-defined descriptor mapping file (.pco).

See also IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	76

DESIGN

Create breaklines in the Design layer by projecting at fixed batter slopes from a DTM edge to an Original DTM layer.

The DTM edge must consist of one or more contiguous breakline sets that encompasses all other DTM points on the same Design layer. When you create a new set, for example by BL or DTMEDGE, the cut and fill batter slopes are assigned by the current values for Tie-in slopes in DESIGNSET command. Check or edit the design slopes of a set at any time by EDIT Slopes.

The grade is computed in 3D from the set. This is different to simply grading to an offset and elevation. If the set has a steep longitudinal grade, the difference will be noticeable.

DESIGN breaks arcs on the DTM edge into straight line segments using the Segments Per Arc setting of DISPLAYSET. New points created along the curves and at the intersection with the original surface, and new sets connect the new points.

Any ground intersection points, points along arcs, and sets created by DESIGN are assigned the name of the design layer. DELETE these objects by name or rerunning DESIGN. Name selection is case-sensitive.

See also GC17, GC23, SLICE, CUTFILL, MOVEPAD and SIDESLOPE

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Design	Secured

DESIGNELEV

Modify the elevation of existing points so that they lie on the design surface of a designated road job.

Terramodel projects a perpendicular intersection from a location to the HAL to determine the chainage along the HAL and the offset from the HAL. The elevation of the point is interpolated by cutting a slice through the design surface at the station and offset.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|On design\|Design elev	Secured

DESIGNSET

Configure the default batter slopes, set smoothness and vertical sight distance parameters. These settings are stored with the project file.

Tie-in slopes: Enter the default cut and fill slopes for sets. The tie-in slopes are used by commands such as DESIGN to project an design DTM onto an existing DTM. Changes to these default slopes apply to all sets, except for sets where slopes have been edited by EDIT Slopes.

Default set smoothness: Enter the default set smoothness for all new sets. Always make the default Soft. See SETSMOOTH to change the smoothness of existing sets and for an explanation of each smoothness property. Use EDIT Smooth to check or edit the smoothness of a specific set. Smoothness affects contour, cross section and profile plines created from DTMs. If many breaklines are Hard or Sharp, 3D Visualiser can be very slow. If many closed breaklines are Dead, you will have many holes in contour plines. If a DTMEDGE is Dead, you will have no contour plines at all.

Vertical Curve Design Controls

Set the eye, object, and headlight distances used by VAL Editor (RDVALEDIT) to calculate vertical curves based on AASHTO standards for sight distances.

Eye Height: The distance from the road to the standard eye height of a driver.
Object Height, Stopping:: The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe stopping distance.
Object Height, Passing:: The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe passing distance.
Headlight Height:: The distance from the road to the centre of the standard headlight beam.
Divergence Angle:: The angle of the standard headlight beam divergence.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Design settings	Secured

DESPIKE

Remove all points in a DTM layer where all the surrounding triangles exceed a maximum grade.

Select a DTM layer
Specify a maximum grade in %
Limit the affected points to a boundary
Limit the maximum number of iterations
Keep breaklines
Remove points included in any triangle that exceeds the maximum grade
Remove peaks only
Maximum height difference
Maximum distance

Open the Data Format Editor.

Edit templates of survey data formats in the logger (.LGR) files used by Import Script manager (IMPORTSMGR) and Export Script Manager (EXPORTSMGR) to format or interpret survey data used by IMPORT and EXPORT scripts.

If your Windows is 32-bit, enter DFEDIT32 instead.

For advice on .LGR files, contact Geocomp Systems.

Alias date			Source	GC
08/02/22			User-definable	Coordf

DIAG

Scan the computer and report details such as system architecture, Windows registry, applications and files relevant to Trimble applications including Terramodel.

If you have 32-bit Windows, enter DIAG32 command.

File

Refresh: Update the report.
Save As: Save the report as a text file.
Print: Print the report to the Windows default printer. To print to .PDF, first change the default printer, or Save As a text file then print from a text editor.
Send: Attach the report to a new email in the default email client. The default address is to Trimble Support. Change the To address to send to anyone alse. If the email is not created, use Save As instead, and then attach the text file to a new email. Include your name and your request in your email.
Exit: Exit Trimble Diagnostic Report.

Options

Standard: Report Report System information, System DLLs, Shared components, Trimble products and Caterpillar products.
Detailed: Report System information, System DLLs, Shared components, Trimble Common Files, Trimble Files, Registry Dump, Trimble products, Caterpillar products and details of all the associated files and folders.

Help

About Trimble Diagnostic report.

Trimble Diagnostic Report is also installed with Trimble Data Transfer Utility (TDTU).

Version		Menu	Source
1.4.21.0		Cogo\|Utilities\|Trimble diagnostic report Windows Start \|Trimble Data Transfer \|Diagnostics Report	Trimble

DIM

Create labels showing dimensions between pairs of locations or along segments.

Click Props to configure the labelling method, units, decimal places, and layer.

Any vertical exaggeration in the current view is applied to the label. If the vertical exaggeration is later changed, the label will then be distorted.

Pt-Pt | Segment

Dimension between pairs of locations or along segments.

Pts:

Enter two locations.

Seg:

Select one segment.

Loc:

Locate the new label.

Props

General properties

Distance type: Dimension the whole distance (Linear), the Horizontal (X-axis) distance or Vertical (Y-axis) distance. In the Plan view, Horizontal is the difference in the Eastings, and Vertical is the difference in Northings.
Layer: Select the layer on which to place dimension lines and text. Select layer 0 for current layer.
Dimension blocks: Create the label as a block instead of text and plines. Dimension blocks are named dim n, where n is a sequential number. If you delete a dimension block object, the block definition is discarded when the project is saved.
Force Dimensions outside: Create dimensions with arrows that point inward, or in the same direction, when the dimension is located outside the extension lines.
Format: Select Engineering format which uses decimal project units (feet or metres) set by Measurement Units (MEASUNIT) or Architectural format which uses feet, inches and fractional inches.
Units suffix: Append a suffix to the labels to show the distance unit.
Sub-units suffix: Append another suffix show the sub-units in the Architectural format.
Number of decimals: Enter the precision for distance labels using the Engineering format.
Units Scale: Enter the factor for the calculated distance. For example, to convert feet to inches, enter 12.0.
Fractional increment: Select the precision of the Architectural format.

Text Properties

Text style: Select the text style for font, height, aspect and slant. The justification is Center-Middle, and the orientation is Legible.
Text Colour: Specify the colour.
Distance from text to line: Enter a factor of the text height for the distance of the text away from the dimension line or the lines from the beginning and the end of the text.
Draw text above dim line: Place dimension text above the dimension lines or even with and between the dimension lines.

Line Properties

Draw dimension line: Enable dimension lines.
Linetype: Select the line type (usually a LEADER LINE).
Colour: Specify the colour for the dimension lines.
Draw dimension line 1: For Segments, create the first extension line.
Line type: Select the line type of the first extension line.
Draw extension line 2: Create the second extension line.
Line type: Select the line type for the second extension line.
Colour: Specify the colour for both extension lines.
Length of outside lines: Define the length of the outside dimension lines in sheet units when you Force Dimensions Outside and locate the dimension text outside the extension lines.
Extension line gap: Define the offset (in sheet units) to the beginning of the extension lines. If a dimension is located within this offset, the lines are extended further.

OK

Accept changes to dimensioning properties.

Cancel

Cancel changes in dimensioning properties.

Dim

Create label at a manually entered location. Not required for mouse-selected locations.

Close

Close the command and retain the new labels

Create a set or pline for each segment in selected sets and plines, with the option to delete the old objects.

GCUNJOIN does not break plines containing spirals or vertical curves.

DISJOIN is an alias for GCUNJOIN.

Report, label or rename selected records that have attributes imported from a 12D Model archive.

Use GC12DIN to import data from a 12D model archive and GCEDT12A to edit the attributes.

Attributes:: Select objects with attributes.
Create Text in Layer: Specify layer for any new EAT text labels.
Text Style: Specify text style for any new EAT text labels.
Create Text: Create text labels for selected objects showing the selected 12D model attribute, and value, if any.
Report Only: Report to P3Pad for selected objects, the selected 12D model attributes and values, if any.

Report, label or rename selected records that have feature attributes.

Objs:: Select objects
Create Text in Layer: Specify layer for any new EAT text labels
Text Style: Specify text style for any new EAT text labels
Select attributes: Select Display for a feature attribute to label, rename or report objects with that feature attribute. Select All to select All.
Create Text: Create text labels for selected objects showing the selected feature attribute, and value, if any
Copy Atts to Name: Append to existing names of selected objects the selected feature attributes, and values, if any
Report: Report to P3Pad for selected objects, the selected feature attributes and values, if any

DISPFEAT uses FEATURES.ADF.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

DISPLAYSET

Partially display some objects for quicker redraw times, configure point display size and display curves as straight segments.

View Resolution Segments per Arc: Enter the number of segments per circular curve.
View Resolution Segments per Spline: Enter the number of segments per splined pline. Enter 0 to displays the line as unsplined.
View Resolution Segments per Vcurve: The number of segments per vertical curve.
View Resolution Segments per Spiral: Enter the number of segments per transition spiral.
Quick dynaviews: Toggle on to hide objects displayed through dynaviews and to show dynaview frames only. See also SHOWDYNA.
Quick text: Toggle on to display and plot text as boxes drawn to the limits of the text objects. Toggle off to display and plot normally.
Quick EAT codes: Toggle on to display and plot all EAT codes as the actual codes and not the interpreted value.
Quick linetype: Toggle on to display and plot all linetypes as solid lines.
Ignore hide: Toggle on to reveal set segments hidden by HIDE are displayed and to enable CONVERT to convert hidden set segments to plines.
Hold DV scale: Toggles the way attribute text and the linetype scales are displayed and plotted within dynaviews. When toggled on, attribute text and linetypes are scaled within the individual dynaviews in which they are displayed, based on the scale assigned to the dynaview, as opposed to being based on the plot scale of the view in which the attribute text or line is drawn. This allows you to create multiple dynaviews showing the same object or even of the same view mode at varying scales. When toggled on, the attribute text and linetypes appear in accordance with their definition, regardless of subsequent alterations of the plot scale of the view in which these objects are drawn. When toggled off, attribute text and linetypes as displayed within a dynaview, are scaled based on the current plot scale of the target view, and their appearance will change as that plot scale is altered. Normal text objects are not affected by this setting.
Drag Text Quick: Toggle on to distort the text so the text can be dragged quickly. Toggle off to display legible text as you drag, which is slower.
Point size: Enter the size in pixels for a cross symbol for each point.
Text box size: Enter a minimum number of pixels for text. Text objects and attribute text that are smaller will be displayed as a text box. Enter 0 to always draw the text characters (except when Quick Text is toggled on).

Curves are displayed as a series of short straight segments, but maintain their mathematical properties for curve computations. With more segments, the curve appears smoother, takes longer to display, uses more memory and results in bigger plot files.

For example, if the view resolution for arcs is 20 and for spirals is 10, the total number of displayed segments for Arc curves is 20, for Spiral curves is 10+20+10=40 and for Combining curves is 10+20+10+20+10=70.

Do not exceed 100 segments for all components together otherwise some curves will not display or compute correctly.

Splines

Spline: 100

Vertical curves

Vcurve: 100

Arcs

If you never use spirals: Arc: 100
If you use transition spirals but no combining spirals: Arc: 60 and Spiral: 20
If you ever use combining spirals: Arc: 33 and Spiral: 11

Commands that use the view resolution to replace curves with chords include DRAPE and GCDRAPE, DESIGN and CUTFILL, PROFILE and GCPROFILE and some exporters.

PLOTSET, GCCHORD, ARCBREAK and DIVIDE use other settings when replacing curves with chords.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Display settings	Field Data Module

DISTANCE

Report the 2D distance between two locations defined by coordinates in From and To point controls.

The distance is displayed in the message scroll in both project units, and in sheet units at the view scale.

You have the option to also display the accumulative length which can be reset.

The locations can be limited by object snaps.

See also GC29 for 3D distances between points and along segments and these other commands that report distances: GC29UTM, REPORTS , GEOMINQ, GC3DSETS, GC75, GC81, LABELSEG, GCDIMLOT, GEOMRPTS, LABGRADE and TXTHTDIF.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Reports\|Distance Inquire\|Distance	Field Data Module	17

DIVIDE

Create points along a set or pline at intervals.

You specify the number of segments, whether to divide one segment or an entire line, whether the points are moved to round number chainages, and whether to insert the points into sets.

See also GCDIVIDE, 3D, ADD2SET, GC28, GC283D, PREDAREA, GC04, INTOSET and GCIN2SET and GC682SET.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Point\|Divide Line	Field Data Module	13

DLGDOIN

Import lines with elevations from a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format (.DO) file.

USGS DLG-O format lines have an associated elevation (contour lines).

In the USGS DLG-O format, topological linkages are explicitly encoded for node and area elements as well as line elements. The files are comprised of 8-bit ASCII characters organized into fixed-length logical records of 80 characters. Bytes 1– 72 of each record may contain DLG data, and bytes 73– 80 may contain a record sequence number.

Header Records

File identification and description records
Accuracy records
Control-point identification records
Data-category identification records

Data (or footer) Records

Node and area identification records
Node-to-line linkage records
Area-to-line linkage records
Line identification records with line-to-node and line-to-area linkages
Coordinate string records
Attribute code records
Text records

Create a new layer for the DLG data and make it the current layer.
DELETE or RELAYER any objects on layer 0.
Run DLGDOIN.
Browse to select a .DO elevation file.
Read the file.
Plines and points are created on the current layer and assigned an elevation. Convert these plines to sets to create a DTM.

The DLG header information is saved as project variables.
Only the header information for the last imported .DO file is retained.
The identical header is written out with the DLGDOOUT.
The current header information can be viewed with the PROJECTV command. Do not use PROJECTV to edit the header.
The following line attribute codes are retained: 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 210, 299.
A maximum of six attribute codes is retained. For lines with these codes, a pline is created.
Lines that carry contours (201) are created on layer 0 (zero) and are named with its attribute codes and given the elevation of the last elevation parameter attribute. When the line is exported, its name is used to retain its attributes.
For all lines that do not have an elevation, a pline is created on layer 0 (zero). For all other lines, plines are created with the proper elevation and stored on the current layer.
The following single point attribute codes are retained: 300, 301, 302, 303. For lines with these codes, a point is created.
Points with an elevation are placed on the current layer. Points with no elevation are created on layer 0 (zero).
Lines that have an attribute of 611 (depression) are given the DEPRESSION linetype.
All of the elevation attributes, except for decimal fractions, are properly considered to assign elevations.

See also DLGDOIN and USGS .DEM IMPORT script.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	HELPTM	File\|Misc. Import/Export\|USGS-O DLG Import	Field Data Module

DLGDOOUT

Export sets and plines with elevations to a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format .

See DLGDOIN for the file format.

The DLG header variables imported by DLGDOIN and stored as project variables are used for the file header. Objects imported from a DLG file retain their attributes.

Points are exported with attribute code 300.

Nodes and areas are not retained.

Plines with the linetype "DEPRESSION" are exported with the 611 attribute. Use CONTOURSET to specify the linetype for depression contours.

Objs: Select objects to be exported
File: Select the output file name name and location
Write: Export the .DO file
Cancel: Cancel the command

Draw pline segments between two locations with the specified linetype and labels in the specified text style showing the length in metres to the specified number of decimal places.

List user guides, tutorials, manuals, charts, table, classes, notes, lists and help files.

This Documents list is installed with Geocomp Updates and includes links to these documents and associated sample data.

Many of these documents and data files are also on Terramodel installation CDs.

Links to most documents from this TML List only work from the local TML List installed with Geocomp Updates, and not from the TML List on the web.

Configure the text spacing, text offset distance, and other general drafting settings for the project.

Flip over angle

Configure the angle above which text objects with Legible orientation are automatically flipped so they can be read from left to right, from the right-hand side and the bottom of the sheet. This angle is applied to each dynaview so that the same labels can be oriented properly through multiple dynaviews. The flip over angle can be from 0° to 45°. A typical value is 10°. If the value is 0°, the label will never flip. If the value is 45°, the text will be upside down if read from the bottom of the sheet, but will appear correct when read from the right-hand side of the sheet.

Text clip margin

Configure the size of the clipping boundaries and of borders with styles other than Detail and Underline. Typical values range from 0.3 to 0.5 times the height of the text object. Commands that clip on these boundaries include CONTOUR, CLIP, HATCH and TEXTBACK.

Offset distance from line/arc

Configure the distance in sheet units between plines and sets and their labels, and between text and Underline borders. Typically, enter a value at least twice the diameter of your largest pen.

Space (%) between lines of text

Establish the spacing between lines of attribute text or lines of text objects. A typical value is 50% of the text height.

Fixed Detail Border Size

Configure the fixed height in sheet units for all text borders with a Detail border style.

Underline title Text Enlargement (%)

Multiply the height of the first line of multi-line text with Underline text border style by this percentage (e.g. 20%). If "Use height for pen mapping" is turned on in PLOTSET, the first line of text can use a different plotter pen.

Text Line Colours

Configure the colours for:

Leader Lines: Text leader lines
Underlines: Borders with an Underline border style
Margin Lines: Borders with a Margin border style
Enclosing Borders: Borders with an enclosing border style

Text line colours are used for new and changed text lines. Existing text lines are unchanged. If the colour of the text line line is 0, the text line line has the same colour as the text. If the colour of both the text and the text line is 0, both change colour with the layer.

When dragging is on, objects are displayed during move and rotation commands. When off, only the initial and final positions are shown.

DRAG is an ALIAS for SYSTEM -1.

The current DragMode is stored in the [System] section of TMODWIN.INI and so can be imported using EDITINI .

Alias date		Menu	Source
29/10/08		File\|System Configuration\|System...\|Dragging on	Field Data Module

DRAGHDIN

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

DRAINRPT

Select drain sets and specify a lid layer.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	DGE 10

DRAPE

Create points on the current layer where selected plines cross links in the selected DTM and connect the points with sets along the plines.

If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.

Around each curve, the number of chords created corresponds to the view resolution segments per arc, vertical curve, spline or spiral specified in DISPLAYSET.

See also GCDRAPE which also transfers chainages, references and names to the sets.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|Drape plines	Field Data Module	298+400+252

DRILL01

Label a drill hole with some properties of the collar point and drill hole.

The text label includes the name and coordinates of the collar point and the bearing and dip of the drill hole segment at the specified text location. The Settings button controls the text style.

The collar point does not have to be an end point of the drill hole segment.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

DRNGRADE

Label a selected set segment with text indicating the grade of the segment.

Select a set segment and a text location and, in Settings, specify whether to display an arrow or a table, any added text, the text style and a leader linetype.

Specify Display Arrow to create a pline with an arrow in the direction of slope, labelled with any added text and the grade expressed as a ratio and a percentage.

Specify Display Table to create multi-line text, with a rectangular border and leaderline, showing any added text, the elevation of the upstream point, the set name and the grade expressed as a ratio, the segment length and the elevation of the downstream point. The optional added text can be used for a table heading and the set name could indicate the pipe description or diameter.

See also LABGRADE for a more general grade labelling command.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

DRNVOLMS

Hatch pond extents and report water volumes around low points in a DTM.

DTM:: Select a DTM
Bdys:: Select any limiting boundaries
Water Layer:: Layer for new pond extents
Min Water Depth:: Enter a minimum pond depth
Step:: Enter a step size
Hatch: Create hatch blocks on water layer inside extents
Compute Volumes:: Compute water volumes
OK: For each pond deeper than the minimum, generate contours at step intervals, clip them to selected boundaries, then, for each low point, find the closed contour with the largest area, create pond extent plines and hatch blocks, and report the water elevation, area, depth and volume.
Cancel: Cancel command

Import Digital Terrain Elevation Data in DTED .DT1 format.

DTED is a gridded Digital Elevation Model standard from US National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency for the whole world with elevations above Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96).

TML date			Source
29/10/08			Field Data Module

DTM2LDBX

Export a DTM layer within a boundary to an XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database using RoadRunnerAddOn.

The database files can be used with Road Runner or DigSmart3D on Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D and iCON.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

To suit some Leica applications, DTM2LDBX limits DTMs to 99,999 points. To create larger XML files, use DTM2XML.

If you select 'Create Leica DB files', but no .X?? files are created in the same folder as the .XML, download and install Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86).

See also ROADRUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and PLAN2DBX.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

DTM2XML

Export a DTM layer to a layer of triangles in a LandXML .XML file.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

See also DTM2LDBX , VRMLOUT and EXPORT LandXML script.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

DTMALL

Relink all DTM layers, redraw the display and store the current contour intervals.

DTMALL reads the contour interval, and computes the index interval, from Contour Settings, then updates project variables DTMALL:CONT_INT and DTMALL:CONT_INDEX_I. Use these variables with EAT text to show the intervals on a plan. For example, to display the contour and interval intervals to two decimal places, create EAT text that includes \PROJ{V,D,DTMALL:CONT_INT,2} and \PROJ{V,D,DTMALL:CONT_INDEX_I,2}, use CONTOURSET to set the contour interval, DTMALL to reset the project variables and REDRAW to display the changes.

See also GCDTMALL which also creates arc breaklines, TOGLINKS which turns on and off link visibility without relinking and DTMUPDT which updates only the current DTM layer.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		DTM\|More...\|Update all DTM layers Toolbar button Function key F12	Geocomp Update or $250

DTMCH

The current DTM layer is displayed in the Coordinate scroll box with the elevation, aspect and slope at the cursor.

To relink the current DTM layer only, use DTMUPDT.

The current DTM layer is not necessarily the current layer.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|More...\|Change current DTM layer	Geocomp Update or $250	1

DTMCONE

Radiate from a specified x, y location and a specified height difference from the DTM, to the specified DTM layer, in 5° increments.

Join the locations with a pline or join points at those locations with a set and radial sets to the centre point.

Enter a positive height if the centre is above the DTM; a negative height if the centre is below the DTM.

Enter a positive slope to project up; a negative slope to project down. The slope may be entered in any vertical angle mode: Z (degrees from zenith), H (degrees from horizontal), N (degrees from nadir), P or % (percent slope from horizontal), R (ratio of horizontal to vertical) or D (vertical distance).

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 1251	DTM\|Conical projection to DTM	S

DTMDRAIN

Create set lines along the boundaries of drainage catchments of a DTM.

DTM: Select the DTM.
DRAIN: Select the layer for the new sets. The default layer is set by HDEFS.
MIN HEIGHT: Enter a depth above which shallow ponds fill and overflow and boundary sets are created. The default height is the Minimum drainage height setting in HDEFS.

The minimum height is used to eliminate small depressions and must be reviewed for the overall effect.

DTMDRAIN makes assumptions such as water draining to one side of each triangle and consistent ground cover.

See also GCFALL which can use multiple locations per triangle to create catchment boundaries and flow paths.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	UG 401	Hydro\|Compute drainage	Secured

DTMEDGE

Create a set in the current colour joining every point along the outside links of a selected DTM.

The DTM edge set locks the extent of the DTM, even against changes in link settings. The extent is limited by the outside points and breaklines and current link settings.

Before running DTMEDGE, select a distinctive layer colour and use LAYERSET or QISOLATE to isolate, LINKSET and DTMALL to display the extent of links and EVALDTM to look for breakline problems.

Multiple contiguous breakline set segments around a DTM function as a DTM edge. This means that DESIGN and CUTFILL can use different batter slopes and that the outside of a DTM formed from imported triangles always forms a DTM edge.

Edit a DTM edge set using GCDTMEDG, DELETE&#8203SEGMENT, BL and so on.

If there are any 3D points on the layer outside the DTM edge set, the DTM edge is invalid. GC22 checks for and fixes this.

GCDTMBDY creates pline boundaries at multiple DTM edges.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|DTM edge	Field Data Module

DTMGRID

Specify origin, bearing, intervals and boundary.

See also GCGENGRD, GRIDELEV, GRIDEXPT, GRIDMAKE, and TRMBGRID.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Generate DTM grid	Secured	221

DTMINFO

List by layer, for the selected points, the layer name, the view in which any DTM is formed, the total number of points, the number of 3D Points, the number of 3D points not in DTM, the number of points in the DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.

To select all points in all views, click OK without selecting any points.

For a DTM to form on a layer, there must be at least three contourable points, with elevations, in the same view, that can form a triangulated network. Layer 0 can never be a DTM layer.

For layers with contourable points with elevations in more than one view, the DTM is formed in the view with the most such points. This is not necessarily the current or Plan view. You are warned if any selected points are not on this DTM view. View names are abbreviated, such as Pl for Plan view or V6 for View6.

All selected layers are relinked if possible, and duplicate points are moved to layer 0, before the report is generated. To report duplicate points before any DTM formation, run GC92 first.

The totals of each column of numbers and the limits of extents are shown at Totals.

Layer name: List all layer names used by any selected objects, in alphanumerical order.
DTM View: For each listed layer, show the name of the one view on which a DTM is formed. **No Links** shows that no DTM is formed in any view. **Multi** is the master layer of a multi-layer DTM. **Part Multi** is another layer in a Multi-layer DTM.
Total Points: Count the number of points on that layer.
3D Points: Count the number of points on that layer with elevations.
3D Points not in DTM: Count the number of points on that layer with elevations that are not in a DTM.
Points in DTM: Count the number of points on that layer with elevations that are in a DTM. Layer 0 always reports 0 points.
Easting | Northing | Elevation Minimum: List the lowest values of any eastings, northings and elevations of points on that layer.
Easting | Northing | Elevation Maximum: List the greatest values of any eastings, northings and elevations of points on that layer.

Match two DTMs created by photogrammetry.

The surfaces are adjusted so that any contours created from the new DTM match perfectly at a match line.

Dtm | Dtm

Select two DTM layers to be matched.

Line

Select a pline along which the DTMs are to be matched.

Def

Specify the elevation adjustment method.

Normal merge

On: Adjust the location of each point by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the elevation difference between the point and the other DTM layer. The normal merge moves each point towards the other DTM. Where the DTM layers cross in the overlap, some points on each DTM may move up and others down. This is the usual method.
Off: Adjust each point by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the difference in elevation of the DTM layers on the match line perpendicular to the point being adjusted. This method moves each point based on the condition at the match line. If the DTM layers intersect in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move away from the other DTM.

Max adj width

Specify the maximum distance from the match line for points to be adjusted.

Tips on using DTMMATCH

The objects on the matched layers can be relayered to the same DTM layer for relinking.
DTMMATCH makes significant modifications to the project data including deleting points. Take a copy of the project by using SAVEAS before you start.
If DTMMATCH is to be used several times in one project file, save your work at each step.
The two DTM layers must overlap.
Create a single-segment pline or set to be the matchline.
Only points within the extent of the match line are be erased.
Match lines should not be significantly longer than the limits of a DTM.
Sets that cross the match line are clipped to a new point.
The DTMs re-link as required.
Elevations of points that fall within the length of the line and the adjustment width are adjusted. A set is created on each DTM along the match line through the new points.
All points outside the match line for each DTM are deleted.
The maximum elevation difference found along the match line, and the number of points adjusted, are reported.

Create new points on a third layer with elevations determined by a user-defined mathematical formula which may include the elevations of the first and second specified DTMs.

In the Settings, specify the formula, the layers and whether to report the results.

Layer 1

Select a DTM layer

Layer 2

Select a second DTM layer

Layer 3

Select a layer for the new points

Settings

Use layer 1 points: Use layer 1 points
Use layer 2 points: Use layer 2 points
Generate Report: Report each computed value to P3Pad
Formula: Enter a mathematical formula for the elevation of the new points on layer 3

To get an "average" elevation, enter the formula ((Z2-Z1)/2)+Z1 or (Z2+Z1)/2.

Assign elevations to 2D points from a DTM surface.

Points outside the limits of the DTM are not assigned elevations.

Only 2D points are be modified. To modify 3D points, first use ELEVATION or GCELEV to make the points 2D by giving them an absolute elevation of *.

See also ELEVOBJS which replaces elevations of point, text and blocks interpolated from a DTM.

See also GC70 which replaces elevations of both 2D and 3D points, and can also combine the point elevations with the DTM elevations.

See also GCPTSTXT which interpolates elevations from nearby text instead of a DTM.

See also DRAPE, DTMGRID, GRIDELEV, GC50, INT3DSET, GCNOELEV and ELVPLINE.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|DTM Pts	Secured	236

DTMSET

Create a set for each link or triangle on a DTM layer.

Specify the new DTM layer, whether to create sets with three segments (triangles) or one segment (links) and whether to copy points to the new layer (or just the sets).

If these sets are used as breaklines in another DTM application, the resulting DTM will be similar.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

If you are exporting .DXF or .DWG to an application that prefers 3DFaces, you do not need DTMSET. Instead, select "Export DTM surface as 3d faces" when you export.

See also GCDTMOUT, GSIDTMOU, QSGRIDOU, KORKDTM and TRMBTIN.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|More...\|Create sets from links	Geocomp Update or $250	156+SDS-DXF

DTMSHOT

Create a point at the intersection of a theoretical 3D line and a DTM.

Specify a DTM layer, a start point, a bearing and a vertical angle.

The start point cannot be at the same elevation as the DTM.

The bearing and vertical angle units are controlled by UNITSSET.

Report the points with highest and lowest elevations in a layer and list the point numbers, the elevation difference and the average elevation.

The highest and lowest points are marked with temporary circles; the bigger circle marks the higher point. The circles disappear on refresh.

All 3D points on the layer are considered including invisible and non-contourable points. See also RANGE, AVERPTS and EVALDTM.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|DTM statistics	Secured	169

DTMUPDT

Use DTMCH to change the current DTM layer first.

GCARCBL creates breaklines around arcs, DTMALL relinks all layers and GCDTMALL does both.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|More...\|Update current DTM layer	Geocomp Update or $250	289

DTMVISTA

Create sets projected onto a DTM from a viewpoint.

Sets: Select sets joining 3D points
View Pt: Select a point from which to project
DTM layer: Select a DTM onto which the sets are to be projected
Step distance around set: Enter a step distance in project units
OK: Create points on the current layer for each step along the sets where they would appear on the DTM from the view point
Cancel
: Cancel without creating sets

For example, to lay out a sign on a hillside to be legible from a lookout:

Adopt a view point at the lookout with elevation at eye level
Define four points on a 3D plane near the lookout which frame the vista to the hillside
Draft up a sign to the same proportions at the four points
REVIEW to Plan, EXPLODE text, CONVERT plines to sets, ARCBREAK curves to straights, modify ELEVATION and so on to define the sign as straight set segments joining 3D points
Transform the sign points and sets onto the plane near the lookout using GC3DADJ
Use DTMVIEW to step along the sets, projecting from the viewpoint to the DTM to create points and sets on the current layer

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

DUMPATT

TML date			Source
29/10/08			Field Data Module

DUPLTRIS

Remove segments from triangular sets on a layer that join the same points as segments on other sets on that layer and replace with single segments in the current layer colour.

This can significantly reduce the number of segments in an imported DTM that has a closed set for each triangle.

Select “Shortest Length Side Only” to minimise total breakline length, separate breakline strings like kerbs or remove flat triangles from digitised contours. Keep the “Middle Length Side only” if that suits the model better.

Select “Create all triangle sides”, to create a DTM surface very similar to the original but without duplicate triangle sides.

If you don’t need to keep any breaklines or boundaries, you may be able to simply DELETE all the sets on the layer and let Terramodel reform the DTM from the remaining points.

Any point in a set with the same number as the previous point is removed. Duplicate points are removed next time you reform the DTM.

See also REMTRIS, REMOVELINKS, LINKSET, 3DFILTER, GC31, GC58, GC66, GC92, DTMEDGE and CLEANUP.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

DUPLTUS

Use DUPLTRIS instead if you have the Geocomp Update.

The TML name is DUPLT_US. If DUPLTUS does not run from the command line, create an alias from DUPLTUS to DUPLT_US or enter DUPLT_US.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

DXF3D

Import elevations from 3D coordinates in a .DXF file corresponding to points in Terramodel.

Replace the elevation of each point in the Plan view with the elevation corresponding to the first matching X,Y coordinate pair in a selected DXF file.

For example, to import elevations from PolyFaceMesh objects in a DXF, use

Import the .DXF file with a import script (IMPORT) such as AutoCAD (dwg or dxf) _i or DXFIN.
GCCONVRT to convert the remaining plines to points and sets
DXF3D to read the elevations from the DXF onto the points
DTMALL or DTMUPDT to form the DTM and remove duplicate points to layer 0
DUPLTRIS to remove duplicate segments
DELETE all objects from layer 0

See also ACADCONV, DXFCHANG, DTMPTS, GC31 and GC58.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

DXFCHANG

Change the layer names in a specified input .DXF file to new layer names in an output .DXF file.

DXFCHANG can be used to substitute layer names with a different naming convention and to accommodate differences in valid characters and maximum layer name lengths.

Prefixing layers can help to identify objects imported from a particular .DXF.

Enter any characters to prefix the new layer names. Adding prefixes only does not require a mapping file.

If no file name is entered for DXF Out, the Out file has the same name as the DXF In file but with the prefix as a suffix.

Layer names can also be substituted in the .DXF using a mapping file.

The format of the .MAP file is:

input layer name,output layer name

GCMAPOUT can create create an initial .MAP file from selected objects, with default substitutions, for later amendment or addition of layer names in any text editor.

Layer names in the DXF that are missing from the .MAP file can be added to the end of the .MAP file. Use an empty .MAP file to read all layer names from the .DXF.

Any lines in the .MAP file that start with # are treated as comments and ignored.

Layer map files in .LNM format created by GC12DIN can also be used.

If the data file is in .DWG format, export from CAD application to .DXF
Open or create a new project in Terramodel
DXFCHANG
Browse to select DXF In (the input file name and DXF Out (the output file name)
Browse to select a Mapping File
Enter any prefix
Select "DXF Out to Import into Terramodel"
OK
DXFIN to import .DXF into Terramodel

DXFOUT
Export from Terramodel to DXF using the "2000" file format
DXFCHANG
Browse to select DXF In (the old file name), DXF Out (the new file name)
Browse to select a Mapping File
Enter any prefix
Select "DXF Out to Import into CAD"
OK
Import .DXF into CAD application

Names of points and sets are not exported to DWG and DXF because names are not normally included in their specification. However, some software and instuments from Trimble, other than Terramodel, can transfer object names between themselves using an APPID specified by Trimble called TRIMBLENAME. Select "Add TrimbleName for Line Work Names" to add the names of every set and pline to the DXF file as a TrimbleName APPID.

Conversions to .DXF by Terramodel, ODA, and other programs can write recomputed or duplicated coordinates, especially around arcs. Select "Remove Duplicate coordinates in LWPOLYLINES" to also check every pair of X and Y coordinates (defined by codes 10 and 20) in Light-Weight Polyline entities and remove any that follow another pair less than 1mm away.

Terramodel layer names have a limit of 17 characters.

DXFIN can use a project variable to determine which 17 characters to read.

The maximum length of lines in the .MAP file is 255 characters, so a Terramodel layer-name of up to 17-characters can be mapped to DXF layer-name of up to 237 characters.

The new layer names can have any characters acceptable to the destination CAD software. For AutoCAD .DWG and .DXF, spaces are only allowed in layer names for files in 2000 format or later. The following characters are not allowed in any AutoCAD layer names:

 / \ “ : ; ? * | = ‘

Terramodel layer names can have all of these characters. When exporting from Terramodel to .DWG or .DXF using a script, any character that is not an Upper Case letter, a digit, a -, an _, or a $, is substituted with _, as is any space exported to version 10, 11, 13 or 14.

Characters can also be substituted in a similar way when importing .DWG or .DXF files into Terramodel.

DXFCHANG automatically substitutes some characters to maintain compatability. In some cases, to get the exact characters you need, as well as preparing the .MAP file carefully, you might also need to substitute characters in layers within Terramodel or the CAD application.

If a CAD application reports an error reading the .DXF, try saving as R10 .DXF format using ACADCONV or ODA Drawings Explorer.

The report to P3Pad includes the file names, the layers to be replaced defined in the mapping file, and the changed layers in the .DXF.

Use a dynaview to display a portion of a view in another location.

For instance, create a plotbox around a part of the plan view, create a second plotbox at a difference scale around the same part in profile view, and place dynaviews for both next to each other in the sheet view.

Refresh the view of the dynaview to show the objects inside the plotbox at that time.

Box: Select a plotbox, a closed set or pline that defines extent of the dynaview, such as one created by PLOTBOX, GCBOX or CIRCLE.
Loc: Enter the location of the origin of the new dynaview. This location can be in any view including the same view. Locate the dynaview where the first vertex of the plotbox is to appear.
Scale: Set the scale at which the new dynaview is drawn. The default scale is the plot scale for the view of the selected Box. Use VIEWSET to preview or modify plot scale for any view.
Rot: Set the angle of rotation for the dynaview. The angle of rotation is measured clockwise relative to the closed polygon. The default rotation aligns the last side with the east-west axis.

Use EDIT to edit dynaviews. To select the dynaview by mouse, click on the origin, which for rectangular plotboxes, is the south-west corner by convention.

Editable dynaview properties are layer, attribute if defined, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.

Turn Auto off ON, to turn off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.

The boundary is the closed plotbox pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.

A layer list can be used to display only a nominated layers. See LLISTSET.

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs, for any material (not just earthworks).

Create a temporary surface of points that represent the differences in elevation between the selected DTM surfaces and compute the cut and fill volumes above and below the zero datum in that surface. This surface is called an isopach surface because any contours extracted from this surface are isopachs that follow paths of constant elevation difference.

The isopach surface is deleted on completion unless you "save computed isopach".

Surface comparison

Surface to Surface: Compute and report cut and fill volumes between two DTM surfaces.
Surface to datum: Compute and report cut and fill volumes between a DTM surface and a datum elevation.
Stockpile: Compute and report the volume of a measured stockpile to a surface derived from the toe of the stockpile.
Depression: Compute and report the volume of a measured depression or excavation to a surface derived from the top of the depression.
Isopach: Compute and report cut and fill volumes from a previously saved isopach surface that represents the difference between two other DTM surfaces.

Settings

Accumulate volumes

Add volumes to previously calculated excavation and fill volumes. Enter volumes or use the default totals from the last volume calculation.

Shrink/swell factors

Enter factors that represent the difference between the original in-place volume before it is cut, and its final in-place volume after being placed and compacted into fill. Swell numbers are positive numbers greater than 1 and less than 2. For example, 1.2 equals a 20% swell. Shrink numbers are positive numbers less than 1. For example, .8 equals a 20% shrink. Generally, only the fill factor should be varied, leaving the excavation factor at 1.0.

Computation method

Volume totals only: Report only the total volumes.
Volumes by depth increment: Report volumes between depths at a specified increment.
Volumes by elevation range: Report volumes over the entire elevation range between intervals of elevations measured from an index elevation. For example, if the interval is 2 metres, the index elevation is 100.5 metres, and the elevation range is 98.5 to 106.5, the volumes are calculated for 98.5-100.5, 100.5-102.5, 102.5-104.5, 104.5-106.5, etc.

Isopach data creation

Save computed isopach: Retain the temporary isopach surface objects on the specified layer. The layer name should indicate which two DTMs were used.
Isopach colors: Select the colours for excavated points, for filled points and for breaklines created on the isopach layer.

OK

Accept changes to Earthwork settings.

Cancel

Cancel changes to settings.

First

Select the layer for the first DTM surface.

Second

Select the layer for the second DTM surface.

Boundaries

Select any limiting boundaries.

OK

Compute volumes.

Close

Close the command.

DTM, DEM and TIN.: A Digital Terrain Model is also referred to as a Triangulated Irregular Network or TIN. A DTM of points on a regular grid is often referred to as a Digital Elevation Model or DEM.
Isopach: The isopach surface is the surface representing the difference between two other surfaces. Isopachs are contours extracted from the isopach surface. Surface-to-surface volumes are limited to the extents of the isopach surface, which is formed from the difference points within the overlapping extents of the two surfaces and the boundary.

Quick isopach generation: If Quick isopach generation in LINKSET is ON, intersection points between the triangles are not included in the isopach surface, whch is quicker, but less accurate.
Depression: The volume of water displayed is the excavation volume. See also GCDAMVOL.
Initial Surface to Design Surface Volumes: If your design surface has batters to an existing surface, project the batters using DESIGN or SIDESLOPE before calculating volumes to insure that the design sideslopes are projected. Otherwise, vertical sideslopes may be projected up or down.
Surface to Surface: Surface-to-surface volumes are calculated by computing the isopach between two DTMs or between a datum and a DTM. First, each point is projected onto the other surface, the corresponding elevation interpolated, and the elevation difference is stored with the generated isopach point. The breaklines (of both surfaces are used to generate isopach breaklines. Additional points are inserted into the isopach breaklines where they cross DTM triangles (unless quick isopach generation is on).
Prismoidal volumes: The triangulated isopach surface is used to determine the volume by breaking the data for each triangle into the appropriate number of truncated vertical prisms. If the three points of a triangle all have positive or all have negative elevations (all fill or all cut) then a single triangular prism is present. If the isopach triangle has both positive and negative elevations (cut and fill) then the triangle is broken into a triangular prism and a quadrilateral prism. The volume of each prism is equal to the average elevation difference times the planimetric area. The total fill volume for the isopach is the sum of all positive prismoidal volumes. The total cut volume is the sum of all negative prismoidal volumes.
End-area and grids: The prismoidal method is more accurate than cross section or grid methods using average end area. The differences obtained between methods depend on the size of the grid or interval of cross sections and irregularity of the surfaces. Smooth surfaces may show differences of less than 1%. Some test cases have shown differences of as much as 10% when the cross section interval is 50 foot and the terrain is rough. As the size of the grid or cross section interval decreases, these volumes better agree with volumes computed from the isopach surface triangles. Use GCGRDVOL to report prismoidal volumes inside a grid or many boundaries.
Accurate volumes require accurate DTMs: The accuracy of the calculations is no better than the accuracy of the data and the calculated DTM. If breaklines are not properly used to form the proper TIN, good point data can produce bad volumes. If an insufficient number of points are used to describe a surface, then irregularities from the recorded data to the actual ground will produce volumes differing from field conditions.
Additional points: Set the maximum number of objects in System Configuration (SYSTEM) high enough to allow for at least as many additional points again as are in the two surfaces. The absolute maxium is 20,000,000. Duplicate points created by DTM formation are moved to layer 0. Deleting these will increase the number of new points you can create.
Check your models: Before forming any DTM from data imported from any source, use GC92 to check for duplicate points with elevation differences, and check for plines that should first be converted to sets. Only then, check the DTMs by EVALTDM, CONTOUR and 3D VISUALISER before computing any volumes.
The isopach DTM is created by forming a DTM from the created points on the isopach layer. If this surface has islands, linear extremities, incorrect data, or anything else that would cause a DTM to not form as expected, the volumes and areas will be "incorrect". If the reported volumes do not make sense, or the reported total area exceeds the area of the boundary, save the computed isopach surface and compare with the boundary. Check some sample elevations to confirm that "cut/excavation" and "fill" are the right way around.
DTM Edge: Use LINKSET to set the correct link settings for a DTM, then use DTMEDGE to fix the boundary to with a bounding set and GCDTMEDG to adjust it before adjusting link settings for any other surface.
Unable to compute volume isopach: This error message is often triggered by very acute angles on long thin triangles. Use a command like GCDIVIDE, GCCHORD or GC682SET to add more points and thus more triangles.
Alias: EARTHWORK command was previously known as VOLUME. VOLUME and VOL are aliases for EARTHWORK.

Report accumulated roadjob volumes by end-area in columns to P3Pad or a text file.

Road job
: Select a Roadjob
Chainage range: Specify start and end chainages.
Report interval: Enter a report interval. For all chainages, enter *.
Report: Select Screen to report to P3Pad. Select File to specify a text file.
Phase: Select one or all phases
Volumes: Report volumes for each surface material, by subgrade or within each closed shape.
Shrink|swell factors: Apply shrink and swell factors to volumes for each surface material, by subgrade or within each closed shape.
Full report: Report, for each material used at each cross-section in the chainage range, the total volumes, the volumes by material, Chainage totals and Totals Only.
Chainage|Station totals: Reports, the cut|fill and total volumes at each cross-section in the report range and Totals Only.
Totals only: Report only the total cut and fill volumes across the report range.

When computing the volume of each material, the average of its cross-sectional area to adjacent cross-sections is multiplied by the distance between the cross-sections to get its volume. When one or more of the cross-sections occurs on a curved segment of the alignment a correction can be applied to account for the condition that the centroid of these cross-sectional areas may be to either the inside or outside of the HAL. The effective distance between the cross-sections is increased if the centroid is on the outside of the curve, and decreased if on the inside. Curve corrections increase the accuracy of the earthwork computations. Curve correction can be described as a normal average-end-area calculation plus or minus a correction for curvature.

Vol=½(Area1+Area2)Lm ± Crv

Where Crv describes an adjustment in the length between sections due to the curve and an adjustment due to the locations of the centroids of the two end areas. A thorough discussion of this method can be found in Route Location and Design by Thomas F. Hickerson under the heading "Correction for Road Curvature".

See also EARTHWORK for prismoidal volumes, GCGRDVOL for prismoidal volumes between xlines and XVOLUMES for end-area volumes to .CSV.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	RG 1005	Roads\|Reports\|Earthwork... Channel\|Reports\|Dredge volumes...	Secured	471

EDIT

Edit properties of any object according to one of seven object types.

A set is a string of straight or arc segments joining point objects.

Replace a point with another point.
Insert a point into a set before a selected point.
Append a point to the end of a set.
Delete a selected point from the set. If the set contains only two points, the entire set is deleted.
Reverse the order of the points. See also REVERSE.
Change the set Smoothness. See SETSMOOTH.
Reorder the points of the set so that the selected point becomes the first point in the set, the next point becomes the second and so on.
Swap the first specified point with the second specified point
Toggle the subtended angle of an arc between > and < 180°.
Change cut and fill Slope values.
Open or close the set. A closed set connects the first point and last point with a set segment.
Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent) and start chainage.

A pline is a string of straight or curved segments with a single elevation.

Move an IP (PI, intersection point, control point, cp or vertex) from one location to another.
Insert a vertex before the selected vertex.
Append one or more vertices to the end of the pline.
Delete the selected vertex.
Reverse the order of the vertices of a selected pline.
Spline or desplines the pline.
Reorder the vertices of a pline.
Swap the first specified vertex with the second specified vertex.
Close or open the pline.
Undo the last change to pline.
Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent), start chainage, elevation.

Text is displayed using characters from a font.

If segment point numbers are displayed, the text was originally created by a command that included dimensions or differences between those points. See LABELSEG, LABGRADE and TXTHTDIF.
Copy text from another text object.
Enter up to 255 characters of text.
Origin is the text insertion location.
Elevation.
The bearing orients the text.
Open the Eat Code Insertion Aid Dialog Box.
Leader line colours are set globally by DRAFTSET.
- Select the leader line style, indicating the use of a leader line, or [none]. If the subject text is a segment label, select the Crows Feet style (dimension arrows), or not. Toggle crow's feet with CROWFOOT.
- Select leader line linetype. The leader line is drawn from the subject being labeled to the text.
- Designate the location to which the leader line points. The leader line will normally point to the subject of a callout, but it can actually point anywhere you wish.
- Assign a gap in project units between the leader line point and the beginning of the leader line. If the gap is expressed as negative, the gap scales with the view scale.
Select the border style and linetype. See also DRAFTSET.
The attributes of a subject of the text object can be used in EAT codes.
A HAL is an alignment from which the callout's subject text can include EAT codes that display a chainage and an offset.
EAT... Include EAT Extended attribute text
Metrics... See TEXTMETRICS.
CAD... Change layer, colour, group or reference object (parent)

Blocks are made up from points, plines, text and other blocks. Sets in blocks are converted to points and plines.

Change properties: layer, colour, group, reference object, name, origin, elevation, auto scale, map colour, auto rotation, and subject point number
The block can be scaled in X, Y and Z, and rotated about those axes.
If the block is tied to a point number, the point and block will move together.
If AutoScale is ON, the block changes size with the view scale
If Map Colour is ON for this block, the block is displayed in the block colour. If OFF, in the colours of the objects in the block. When a block is first created, the block colour is the same as the line colour of the layer.
If Auto rotation is ON, the block is rotated so that it is displayed through a dynaview so it can be read from the left or bottom of a sheet.
If you change the block name, the appearance will change to match the appearance of any existing block with the new name.
Use commands like BLOCK, UNITBLK, MKBLKINT, SCLBLKS and AUTODRAFT to control block placement.

Dynaviews are views of objects within a plotbox.

Change properties: layer, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.
If Auto off is ON, this turns off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.
The boundary is the closed pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.
Specify a layer list to limit a dynaview to display only those layers. See LLISTSET.
The dynaview is located at the first vertex in the boundary pline

Points are objects at single locations defined by X, Y and Z values with names according to the view mode.

Change properties: point number, layer, colour, group, name, contourability, location, elevation and label.
See LABELPOINT for point labelling.

Tables showing properties of set segments, with attribute labels that link the segments to the table, are created and edited by Label Table (LABELTABLE).

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Edit object	Field Data Module	32

EDITINI

Edit the Terramodel initialisation file TMODWIN.INI.

Installing Terramodel or the Geocomp Update creates or modifies TMODWIN.INI which contains settings for the Terramodel user-interface that control colours, menus, toolbar buttons, function keys, and so on. Use EDITINI to import any initialisation settings, including settings that cannot be controlled using Terramodel commands.

If there is no current TMODWIN.INI, EDITINI creates a new blank one into which you "Import Sections from old INI file".

The displayed background, cursor and highlight colours depend on the current palette and colourmap (PALETTE).

Background colour: Select a colour number for the background of graphics window.
Cursor colour: Select a colour number for the graphics cursor.
HiLight colour: Select a colour number for the colour used to show selected objects.
Frame height and width: Specify the size of the Terramodel window frame on start up.
Command columns: Specify the maximum number of characters for the Command Line.
Point label height: Enter an arbitrary value to adjust the default height of point labels created or refreshed by F7, F8, F9, F11 or GCREDRAW. If the labels are too small, enter a larger value. If too big, a smaller. For the default size, enter *.
Fix view scale when labeling points: Turn on when drafting so that the view scale is constant, and the labels created by F7, F8, F9 and F11 change size as you zoom in and out. Turn off so that the view scale adjusts so those labels stay the same size as you zoom in and out.
View settings: Update the view settings and prompt to restart Terramodel.

Terramodel looks for prototypes, blocks, TMLS and many other file types firstly in the current project folder, then the folders in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP) in order, then specific Terramodel software folders that do not need to be added here. Sub-folders are ignored unless you include them.

Edit or add user-definable locations into the Terramodel Search Path. Use Crtl Enter to insert new lines for each folder.

Click "Update Terramodel Search Path" to remove any paths that do not exist and replace the TSP with the new values.

Click "Add TMCustom to TSP" to add C:\TMCUSTOM and C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP folders, which are required for Geocomp Update M or later.

The TSP is defined in the [System] section of TMODWIN.INI. If you "Import sections from Old INI file", and import a [System] section that includes TSP, those paths will be replaced. If user-definable files are in a folder that is no longer included, those files will no longer be available. If you do not want to update your TSP, but you do want to update something else in [System], such as your menu file, omit TSP= from the .INI to be selected and "Import Selected".

Click "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." to reset values of some properties:

Edit set: Clear default mode
Coordinate scroll: Visible
Coordinate scroll: Location 300 pixels from left and 300 from top of primary display
Coordinate scroll: Coordinates visible
Coordinate scroll: Bearings and distances visible
Coordinate scroll: Station|chainages and offsets visible
Coordinate scroll: Match E|N decimal places with precision of coordinates in UNITSSET
Status bar: Visible
Command line: Visible
Command line: 200 characters long
Message scroll: Visible
Message scroll: 2 rows
Toolbar: Visible
Toolbar: Current layer visible
Toolbar: Current linetype visible
Toolbar: Current object colour visible
Toolbar: Current point colour visible
Plotterset: Suspend lock driver off
File menu: 8 recent files
System: Undo 19999 objects
System: Dragging mode on
System: 0.001 units tolerance for unequal arc radii
System: Maximum of 20,000,000 objects (in P3Server)
Alias: Remove any remnant aliases. See ALIAS.

Copy the current TMODWIN.INI to a selected location or backup to TMODWIN.BUP in its current location.

Import or replace sections from an .INI file such as those that define colourmaps, palettes, penmaps, carousels, function keys and the toolbar. Click "Show Old INI File" to browse to select the .INI file, select the relevant sections by Click, Control Click or Shift Click, and then Import. New sections are added. Sections with names that match sections in the current TMODWIN are updated or replaced and reported to message scroll. Certain sections indicated by *** are not imported, such as lists of palettes or carousels.

Show old INI File

Browse to select an old TMWODWIN.INI file, or another INI file containing relevant sections in the same format. Typical "old .ini files" include:

A TMODWIN.INI that you copied as a backup
A TMODWIN.INI that you copied from your old computer
A TMODWIN.INI that you abridged with just your changed sections or parts of sections
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\TRIMBLE_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI with sections from a default installation with no Geocomp Update
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\GEOCOMP_AUST_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI with sections from Geocomp Update with Australian defaults
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\GEOCOMP_USA_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI with sections from Geocomp Update with American defaults
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\HDMS_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Hydrographic mapping
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\FIELD_DATA_TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Field data module (no key)
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\VIEWER_TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Viewer only (no key and restricted menu)
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\DELETE_COLORMAPS_TMODWIN.INI with empty colormaps
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\DELETE_PALETTES_TMODWIN.INI with empty palettes
C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\P3PAD_REPORT_TMODWIN.INI with the default P3Pad report font

Import Selected

Import configurations from the selected sections. New configurations are created. Configurations with the same names are updated. Other configurations are unchanged.

Replace Selected

Replace the whole of selected sections. All existing configurations in those sections are deleted. Only imported configurations are retained.

Import Selected Sections | Replace Selected Sections

Import or replace selected sections into the current TMODWIN.INI file.

To delete a section from TMODWIN.INI, import an empty section with the same name and "Replace Selected".

To make current an imported palette, colourmap, penmap or carousel, use PALETTE, PLOTSET or PLOTTERSET afterwards.

To remove a palette or colourmap, select the corresponding empty palette or colourmap section from C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\DELETE_COLORMAPS_TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\DELETE_PALETTES_TMODWIN.INI. Penmaps are best removed with PLOTSET. Carousels are best removed with CAROUSEL.

You may have multiple TMODWIN.INI files. EDITINI uses the current file; you don't need to know exactly where that is.

EDITINI reports the location of the current TMODWIN.INI on the title of the dialog. Depending on your versions of Terramodel and Geocomp Update and how they have been installed, this TMODWIN.INI may be in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English (US)(or some other Locale) or in some other location set by an environmental variable.

Windows can automatically and secretly redirect Terramodel to use hidden copies of .INI files in the VirtualStore. For example, if your current TMODWIN.INI is C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English (US)\TMODWIN.INI, and you have a Windows version later than XP, and Terramodel is not running "as administrator", then Terramodel will actually use the hidden copy C:\Users\[your Windows user name]\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English (US)\TMODWIN.INI. For most users, this all happens in the background and is not a problem. When it does affect you, perhaps because you are a system administrator, or your Terramodel mysteriously switches configuration, consider this: Terramodel will run as administrator if it is started from

a Terramodel Desktop shortcut and "Run as administrator" is enabled in the Advanced properties of the shortcut,
a shortcut on the start menu or task bar that has been copied from such a Desktop shortcut, or
opening a .PRO file in Windows file manager and "Run this program as administrator" is enabled in the Compatability tab of the Properties of C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Terramodel.exe.

Windows normally blocks editing of files in C:\Program files (x86)\. To enable manual editing or deleting files in the VirtualStore, reveal hidden files and folders.

DTMAREA, GC44, GC44CSV and GC82 refer to a table of decreasing percentage slope ranges defined in TMODWIN.INI. For example,

[SlopeTable]
TableSize=3
0=200.0
1=100.0
2=50.0

To edit the slope table, copy TMODWIN.INI to a location where you have permission to edit, use a text editor to change the ranges, then import the [SlopeTable] section from that file. To restore the default slope table, import from C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\TMODWIN_TRIMBLE_DEFAULTS.INI.

After defining the slope ranges, specify the corresponding TableSize up to a maximum of 100.

SHADESLP uses a separate Shade Slope Ranges (.SSR) file.

Report haul road efficiency of a road job.

Enter settings for reporting chainage | station interval, Rimpull graph, rolling resistance, gravity and truck weights.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

ELE2NAME

Change the name of selected points and plines in the Profile and Xsect views to match their Y values and in the Plan and other views to match their Z values.

Overwrite, prefix or suffix the names.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

ELEVALONGSET

Modify the elevation of selected points within a particular set based on their position along the set with respect to a 3D reference point in that set, and a vertical angle.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, Terramodel multiplies the implied slope by the horizontal distance between the points along the set's alignment, and adds the resulting change in elevation to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If *: The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <: The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >: The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

This command is similar to ELEVREFPT, except that the distance between the selected point and the reference point is determined along the horizontal alignment of a set within which they are both members.

Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.

Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.

Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.

One way to balance earthwork is to repeatedly change the relative elevation of the design DTM by layer then repeat to project new sideslopes.

Replaced by GCELEV which does the same thing but with better-labelled radio buttons.

See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Elevation\|Elevation	Field Data Module	9

ELEVOBJS

Replace the elevation of selected points, text and blocks by interpolating from the DTM.

See also DTMPTS which only adds elevations on 2D points and GCPTSTXT which takes the elevation from the value of the nearest text object.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|Elevation\|From DTM	Geocomp Update or $250	237

ELEVREFPLANE

Modify the elevation of selected points by projecting them vertically to an imaginary plane surface.

The plane surface is defined with respect to a 3D reference point by specifying a bearing, and a vertical angle.

The vertical angle is applied in the direction of the indicated bearing, establishing the tilt of the plane surface, which passes through the reference point.

If *: The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <: The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >: The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

Modify the elevation of selected points based on their horizontal distance from a 3D reference point and a vertical angle relationship.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, the implied slope will be multiplied by the distance between the points, and the resulting change in elevation will be added to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If the specified vertical angle is entered as a vertical distance, it will simply be added to the elevation of the reference point to get the elevation of the selected points.

If *: The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <: The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >: The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\Elevation\Reference point	Secured

ELFS

The chainage can be keyed-in or selected graphically in the profile view.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Reports\|More...\|Elevation at chainage Reports\|More...\|Elevation at station	Trimble or Geocomp Update

ELLIPSE

Create a pline that aproximates an ellipse.

Major axis record: Select a set or pline that extends along the major axis
Minor axis length: Enter the length of the minor axis
No. segs: Enter the number of segments around the new pline

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Draw\|Pline\|Ellipse	Geocomp Update or $250

ELVPLINE

Modify the elevations of selected plines to match the averages of the elevations interpolated from the specified DTM at the vertices of each pline.

The elevations are rounded to the nearest interval in the current CONTOURSET command settings. Use ELVPLINE to convert 2D plines to contours when you have the DTM.

Import an alignment from a Geopak geometry report format exported from EMXS software.

Define attributes on selected points derived from any error ellipse blocks attached to the points.

These points can then be labelled with attributes using EAT TEXT.

RDE can create elliptical blocks indicating the possible error by least squares. These blocks are circles which are scaled by the errors in x and y, then scaled again by 1000 so they are readily visible, then rotated.

The TML name is ERR_ELIP. If ERRELIP does not run from the command line, create an alias from ERRELIP to ERR_ELIP or enter ERR_ELIP. ERRELIP requires the attribute definition file ERR_ELIP.ADF.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

EVALDTM

Report potential problems with DTM breakline formation.

For each set in a DTM layer, report:

Unused segments
2D Points
Non-contourable points
Points on different layers
Dead regions

Every straight set segment which connects two 3D contourable points on the same layer is a breakline unless it is crossed by another breakline with a higher record number.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
23/03/23		DTM\|Evaluate DTM surface	Geocomp Update or $200	140

ESRIIN

Import ESRI Shapefile data using the ESRI (shp) import script.

The ESRI Shapefile format is defined by ESRI (Environmental Systems Research Institute) and is exported from many GIS applications.

ESRI Shapefiles consist of at least three files. The import script requires the .SHP, .SHX and .DBF files, which contain the geometry, the index and the attributes, to have the same name and location. If a .PRJ file is also supplied, view this in a text editor to determine the projection (coordinate system) of the other data.

ESRI shapes of different types are supplied separately. For example, a well (point), a river (pline) and a lake (set) would be stored in three separate shapefile datasets.

Do not confuse ESRI shapefiles wth unrelated .SHX and .SHP font files used by AutoCAD.

Shape file: Browse to select the .SHP file.
Default layer: Select the default layer for the created objects.
Import points as: Import points as points, sets or plines. Try each.
Map properties: Any database fields found in the Shapefile are listed under File Property. For each field that you want to import, highlight the "File property" then a select the corresponding "Terramodel property" from the drop-down list. For example, if one of the file properties is "Contour_ht", to import that, select the Terramodel property "Elevation".
Next: Go to the next page, check the import summary, select Import, check the import report, and Finish.

File properties are not imported unless you select them. Select a property to suit the data; map "PT_ID" to "Point number" or "Name"; don't try to map a name to a colour. Only one file property can be mapped to a particular Terramodel property; for example to import elevations from both "spot_ht" and "contour", import into seperate Terramodel projects and then transfer by TMX.

Any selected "ELEVATION" property is always imported as a Terramodel "Elevation".

Export objects to ESRI Shapefile data for GIS using the ESRI (shp) export script.

The exported ESRI Shapefile data consists of .SHP, .SHX and .DBF files with the same name and location. Create shapefile data in a new folder to keep them separate and together. The files supplied together can be referred to as a "shapefile". The simplest way to supply the data together is usually to zip them.

.PRJ files describe the projection. If a .PRJ file is requested, obtain a .PRJ file from your client, read it in a text editor to determine their coordinate system, transform your Terramodel data to that coordinate system, export the shapefile data using the script, copy their .PRJ file to match the name and location of the other files you created, and supply them together.

The file extensions .SHX and .SHP are also used to describe unrelated CAD font files which cannot be imported using this script.

Shape file

Browse to select the name and location of the .SHP and other files.

Export objects

Export points as points, sets or plines.

Export objects as

Export objects as 2D or 3D.

Common attributes to be exported

Select any required Name, Layer, Colour or Attribute properties. Do NOT select Attributes unless suitable attributes have already been created in the project.

Next

Go to the next page to select properties to be exported, pick objects, Next to check the export summary, and Finish.

Point properties: Point properties that can be exported are Point number and Elevation.
Set properties: Set properties that can be exported are Area, Perimeter, Azimuth, Distance, From Point, To Point and Lot name.
Pline properties: Pline that can be exported are Area, Perimeter, Elevation and Beginning Chainage | Station.
Attribute properties: If Terramodel attributes have been defined in the project, those attributes can be matched to shapefile fields. If no Attributes have been defined, the export will fail. For this reason, do not normally select Attributes.

ESRI shapes in a shapefile are required to be of the same shape type. For example, a well (point), a river (pline) and a lake (set) would be stored in three separate datasets.

If the export fails, try again with different settings.

Execute an external .EXE or .DLL application using arguments for the path and variables.

For example, DCEDIT is an ALIAS for EXEC "C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\DCEditor\DCEditor.exe".

The maximum number of characters in the arguement is 66.

Save recent changes to objects, close the current project and exit Terramodel.

If you have made changes to objects since the last save, you will be prompted to save changes. If you have changed project variables only, save changes before exiting.

When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by deleting objects.

Explode selected blocks, text, tables, dynaviews and complex linetypes into components.

To explode these	into these	use
one set or pline	two sets or plines	BREAK
sets	set segments	DISJOIN
sets with arcs	sets with chords	ARCBREAK or GCCHORD
plines with no spirals or vertical curves	pline segments	DISJOIN
plines with spirals	plines with arcs and chords	OFFSETDIST
plines with spirals, vertical curves or splines	plines with 2D chords	GCCHORD or FILTER
alignment plines with arcs, spirals, vertical curves or splines	sets with 3D chords	GCCHORD
sets or plines with dashed linetypes	plines with chords	GCEXPLOD
sets or plines with complex linetypes	text in symbol font and plines with chords	GCEXPLOD
normal text	plines	GCEXPLOD
text in symbol font	plines	GCEXPLOD
extended attribute text (EAT) with border and leader line	normal text, border plines and leader line plines	GCEXPLOD
leader line plines	plines and arrowhead symbol text	GCEXPLOD
blocks	plines, text, blocks and points	GCEXPLOD or EXPLODE
hatching	plines	GCEXPLOD
label tables	plines and text	EXPLODE
dimensions	rounded text	TEXTRND
lot labels	normal text	LABELSETS Text
lot segment labels	EAT text	LABELSETS Text
point labels	text	LABELPOINT Explode
symbols on points	points and text with symbol font	LABELPOINT Explode
symbols on points	points and blocks	SYM2BLK
mass haul diagrams	plines and text	MASSHAUL and MASSDIAG
dynaviews	objects	EXPLODE or GCEXPLOD

Depending on how the blocks were created, EXPLODE and GCEXPLOD explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to repeat to explode more blocks.
Optionally, delete the old objects.
Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Use DELETE or BLKREAD.
Blocks can be selected or restricted by Type. For example, to select blocks but not text, use SEARCH settings or Right mouse button Type.
Explode hatching before you include any in a new block.
A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block. Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
Use CLIP to break plines or sets at a boundary.
Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
Use GCPURGE to purge all unused blocks.
Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks.
Use GCBLKFIX to explode blocks, modify the colours of the objects and recreate the blocks.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Explode	Field Data Module

EXPLORE

Open Windows File Explorer file manager.

Windows File Explorer is also known as Explore, Explorer, My Computer, Computer and This PC.

Alias date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Toolbar button	user-definable

EXPORT

Using a system of configurable scripts, export data from Terramodel, directly to some survey instruments, or to a data file.

Scripts export or upload to a wide range of survey instruments and software including:

ASCII points
DiNi
.DWG and .DXF
Elta
ESRI shapefiles
Geocomp
Geodimeter
LandXML
MicroStation V7 .DGN
Nikon
Paydirt SiteWork
SDMS
Softdesk
Sokkia .SDR
SMI
SpectraPrecision .ALN, .RLN
Star*Net
Terramodel.PRO
Trimble Constructor
Trimble DiNi
Trimble SCS900
Trimble SiteWork
Trimble Survey Controller
Trimble Survey Data Card
Trimble DTM .TTM
Trimble Roading 3D .DC
Trimble Setout .DC
Tripod Data Systems (TDS)

Some scripts come standard with Terramodel. Some are supplied with the Geocomp Update.

Some scripts export, some upload and some export and then upload. Some scripts download or import (see IMPORT).

The first item on the Export Script menu is always Export Script Manager (EXPORTSMGR). Scripts enabled by the manager are listed for selection from the File | Export/Upload menu.

Scripts always open when run from the command line, even when they are hidden from the list. Therefore, scripts defined in the Alias Manager (ALIAS) can always be opened by entering the alias. For example, PENZDOUT command always opens the "P,E,N,Z,D _e" ASCII points export script, if that script and alias exist.

See ESRIOUT.

The LandXML export script exports DTMs as surfaces and simple alignments from road jobs.

To export DTMs to LandXML, see also DTM2XML, DTM2LDBX and POWERGDE.

To export roads and alignments to LandXML, see also GCXMLOUT, GCMULXML, ROADRUN and GCUMC3D.

To import LandXML, see IMPORT LandXML.

Many export and upload functions are described here: Transfer data to and from Trimble.

3300 | 3600 | 5600 | Constructor | TS315: Survey points export scripts.
DiNi Digital Level: Digital level export script.
Roadline and Roadline 3D: See GCRLNOUT, P29, P39 and GCMULTGD.
SCS900: Site Control System 900. See From Terramodel to SCS900 via script, Export sets, plines and text for background map as .DXF, Upload sets as .DC and Export and upload a roadway.
SiteVision Office: See .DWG and .DXF
Survey Controller: Upload via Survey Controller. See Upload points and Export and upload strings.
Survey Data Card: See Prepare Survey Data Card.
DTM (TTM): Export a Digital Terrain Model as .TTM.
FCX | FCL | FAL: Export feature code libraries from .ADC. See Feature code libraries.
Roading 3D (dc): Road alignments. See Trimble Roading 3D (DC) - Notes, Export design using templates as .DC, GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.
Setout (DC): See Export points as .DC.
GCDCOUT: Export cross sections at intersecting sets to .DC.
GCMULTDC: Export multiple alignments to .DC.
GCPTSOUT: Output points to ASCII files including Geodimeter Area, Trimble $PTNL,PJK .TXT and Trimble Recon LM80.
SURVCONT: Export Moss GENIO to Trimble Survey Controller.
TRMBGRID: Export Trimble gridded DTM .DTX.
TRMBROAD: Export a roadway to Trimble .TTA or .TTX. For most instruments, TRMBROAD has been replaced by Trimble Roading 3D (DC) script, GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.
GCLFAOUT, GCSZAOUT and GCTMAOUT: Export for Trimble Alignment Planning (Quantm).

Specify a .DWG or .DXF file and location, select a conversion mapping file to control colours, fonts, linetypes and widths, and a version.
To export a DTM surface as 3D face entities, select the layer here.
Do not export points as blocks with attributes unless you want every point to be labeled with a point number, elevation and name.
Do not explode custom linetypes if you want to maintain dimensions of linework.
Always make file 3D, unless you have a requirement for 2D.
Select the view from which to export before you pick objects.
Select objects to be exported from that view.

The default script is AutoCAD (dwg or dxf). Geocomp AutoCAD (dwg) and BricsCAD scripts export using the Geocomp_64 colour scheme. SiteVision Office script uses a SiteVision office colour scheme. DWGOUT command calls Geocomp AutoCAD (dwg). DXFOUT command calls Geocomp AutoCAD (dxf).

The Autocad Conversion File (.ACF) substitutes colours, fonts and linetypes. See EXPORTSMGR for details.

If you export a surface as 3D faces, do not also pick any objects on the same layer (otherwise they will clash in CAD). To export the surface with objects, first make that surface layer invisible, using a layer list or otherwise, and then select objects by Crossing. To export that surface only, pick objects by layer then do not select any layers.

See also GCCOPY to create a DTM surface from other layers and DTMSET to create a network of sets from a DTM.

If the Browse buttons to select the .DWG, .DXF and .ACF files are missing, see SSERIFE to install the required Windows font.

Terramodel layer names are limited to 17 characters.

Spaces are only allowed in layer names for .DWG and .DXF files in AutoCAD 2000 format or later. The following characters are not allowed in any AutoCAD layer names:

 / \ “ : ; ? * | = ‘

To replace layer names in an exported .DXF, with layer names longer than 17 characters, or with other characters, see DXFCHANG.

The LandXML export script can export DTM layers, limited by window or boundary, or alignments from selected road jobs.

DTM2XML can also export a DTM layer, GCMULXML can export 3D sets as hals and vals, and GCXMLOUT can export a roadjob and 3D sets at cross sections.

Terramodel

While there is an export script for Terramodel.PRO files, we recommend transferring data using TMXOUT, PCOPY or the Terramodel.PRO import script instead.

The MicroStation script exports in V7 .DGN format, but not V8 .DGN format which supports alphanumeric layer names. Export to MicroStation via .DWG instead.

MicroStation target file: Browse to select a name and location for the V7 .DGN file, then click Next.
Conversion mapping file: Select a MicroStation conversion mapping file (.MCF) and click Next.
Seed file: Select a seed file, pick objects and then click Next.
Export set points: Export set points, or not.
Export from view: Select the view from which to select objects.
Number of objects selected: Show the number of objects selected by Pick objects.

Export summary

Check the export summary then Export and Finish.

Export or report cross sections from a road job surface.

Report cross sections from a road job surface showing at each xline the station | chainage, easting, northing and bearing, and the offset, elevation, crossfall and name of each change of grade.

Report to P3Pad or create a Geocomp .CES file.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	402,482

EXPORTSMGR

Hide, create, edit, delete or run export scripts.

Export script menu

Select export scripts from those listed in EXPORT or on the File | Export/Upload menu.

New...

Enter the script name to appear in the File | Export/Upload menu. By convention, suffix the name of upload scripts with _u, export scripts with _e, and export and upload scripts with _e+u.
Specify whether the action of the script is to
- Export to disk.
- Export to disk and upload to an instrument/data collector, or
- Upload from disk
Step though Next buttons to specify the details of the script.

Edit...

Edit the details of one selected script.

Delete

Delete one selected script by deleting the .xe or .xe_ file from the script file location.

Run

Run the selected script.

Close

Close the script manager.

If you selected the action to upload or export and upload, select the device to upload to.

Generic instrument: Define a device that communicates via a serial port and is not already available for selection from the list.
Direct communication: Select from a list of devices that communicate via a serial port.
Time out (ms): Enter a time out period in milliseconds.
Data format: Select a data format where applicable.
Add/Edit Devices: Add to the list or edit devices defined by Trimble Remote Device Manager.

Export scripts are stored as files of the same name as the menu item. If the script file name is ticked in Export Script Manager, the file extension is made .xe so the script is listed on the File | Export/Upload menu and in EXPORT. If not ticked, the extension is .xe_ and the script is not listed (unless a matching .xe is also present). Import scripts have the extensions .xi or .xi_.

Turn on scripts for instruments and formats relevant you and turn off scripts that are not. A large number of listed scripts makes finding the one you want difficult. A very large number of listed scripts can fill the display and cause scripts to call the wrong dialogs.

If turning on on a tick in the manager does not add a script to the menu, use Windows File Explorer (EXPLORE) to show "File name extensions" and "Hidden items", and then manually change the file extension of that export script from .xe_ to .xe. The location of the script file is either C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\ or C:\Users\UserName\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\. Substitute UserName with your User name. The script is displayed if a file with the extension .xe exists in either location.

If turning off a tick in the manager does not remove a script from the menu, use Windows File Explorer (EXPLORE) to show "File name extensions" and "Hidden items", and then manually change the file extension of that export script from .xe to .xe_. The location of that export script is either C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\ or C:\Users\UserName\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\. Substitute UserName with your User name. Rename .xe to .xe_, or delete, in both locations.

Unwanted scripts can be deleted by the Delete button and by deleting in Windows File Manager.

If your computer prevents you from creating, editing or copying scripts, try to work in the VirtualStore folder. Script files can also be copied from some other computer where you can edit them. Make sure that your file name, extension and location are correct and unique.

Changes to installed scripts can be overwritten by later updates, so give your own scripts unique names and back them up.

When creating an export script, preset export parameters to create a default set of responses. Some elements of your export process should not change from export to export. Other elements should only be entered as you run the script. During script creation, you are presented with every available export parameter.

There are three input possibilities for each control:

Leave blank for the user to input information at runtime. "Show this page at runtime".
Enter a default value for the user to verify. "Show this page at runtime".
Enter a default value for a field the user cannot view or change. Do not "Show this page at runtime".

Some controls are required at runtime. For instance, every export requires you to name an export file.

Not all fields are required during script creation. Fill those which are likely to be standard.

When creating or editing a script that uploads, devices can be selected from the Trimble Remote Device Manager to upload to instruments and data collectors.

Predefined devices include 3600 Elta, 5600 Elta, Elta GPS, 3600 GDM, 5600 GDM, 5600 TDS, 3600 TDS, TDS Survey Pro CE, 3300, Survey Controller on COM1 and Survey Data Card.

Remote Device Manager device classes can also be added and updated by other Trimble applications. Some of the devices mentioned here require the installation of Trimble Data Transfer Utility 1.57 (TDTU).

To add or edit a device, select Add/Edit Devices...

New...

Select a device class from the list and configure a name and a data location such as a COM port, a drive letter and path or ActiveSync.

Delete

Delete the device from the list.

Properties

Display properties of a device. Changing some properties can require creation of a new device.

Close

Close the device manager dialog.

Help

Open Help for Trimble Remote Device Manager.

If a web page with a title like "Error opening Help in Windows-based programs" opens instead, WinHlp32 is not enabled. That web page provides instructions and links to install WinHlp32 on Windows versions before Windows 10. WinHlp32 is standard for Windows XP, is optional for Windows Vista, 7, 8 and 8.1 and is not available for Windows 10.

These help pages are also available in .PDF format.

If you selected the action to export or export and upload, select one of these file formats: ASCII points, AutoCAD, DC Points (dc), ESRI Shape file, Feature codes (fcx), Geodimeter Area, LandXML - XML, M5 Points (Zeiss M5 format), MicroStation, Roading 3D (dc), Roadline (aln), Roadline 3D (rln), SCS900, SDMS, Softdesk Fieldbook (fbk), STAR*NET, TDS (dtm), TDS (job), TDS's Road layout (rd5 and tp5), Terramodel (pro) or Trimble DTM - TTM. For more details of these formats, see below.

For scripts with more than one pages of settings, running the script displays a sequence of pages with a Next button to open the next page. When editing the script, these pages are arranged in tabs.

Only script tabs relevant to the file format are shown.

If "Show this page at run time" is not selected, the page is not displayed when the script runs, so the user cannot change the settings from those entered in the script manager. Some deselected pages are displayed anyway.

Instrument/Data collector

Select a device from the Trimble Remote Device Manager or a Generic Instrument.

Communication settings

Specify com port settings for uploading via serial cable.

Export to file | Target file | Destination folder

Specify the output location or file name.

Leave blank, to save as files with default file extensions, starting in the project folder.
Enter a path, to save as files with default file extensions, starting in the entered folder.
Enter a path and file to save exactly that file.
Enter a suitable file extension, such as *.dwg or *.csv, to save with that file extension, starting in the project folder.

Raw source

Specify a data format template (.LGR or "logger") file, that describes the format of the output file. Refer to description of formats below. LGR files can be defined by the Data Format Editor (DFEDIT). For general advice on .LGR files, contact Geocomp Systems.

Upload source

Specify the format of specific data sources.

Point settings

Specify the value of undefined elevations, default units and whether to shift point numbers or coordinates.

Points target file

Specify the output file name and location, or leave blank, and enter the output format (see below).

Zeiss M5 line format

Enter format details for M5 data

M5 file | TDS job file

File selection dialog

Source files

Display source files

See below for settings of specific formats.

Language translation

Specify character sets.

File upload overwrite protection

What to do when the file already exists.

Export summary

Display a summary of export settings before exporting the data.

For ASCII formats, enter codes delimited by spaces or commas to indicate the data content and order of the output files.

Enter P for Points field, E for Easting, N for Northing, Z for Elevation, D for Description|Name, X for Station|Chainage from the active alignment, O for Offset from the active alignment, S for Space or " before and after literal characters. Optionally prefix a specific number of characters or decimal places to any field.

For example, the data order in the Geocomp 1-5 FLD export script is:

" 2 "5D"               "12.3E13.3N9.3Z

AutoCAD target file: .DWG and .DXF files are entity exchange files for CAD applications. Leave blank, for the script to browse to create .DWG with the option of creating .DXF. Include *.DXF or *.DWG to limit to that file extension. Include a path, to browse from that path. Enter a full path and name to export a specific file.
Conversion mapping file: Select a conversion mapping file (.ACF) to control the substitution of colours, fonts and linetypes of exported entities.
Create binary DXF: Binary .DXF files contain the same data as normal ASCII .DXF files, only they are compressed to a smaller file size. Not all applications that read ASCII .DXF files will also read binary .DXF files.
Save as version: Save as 2000 where possible because that format allows for spaces in layer names. Save as 10, 11, 13 or 14 only if required by the target application. Any version of CAD software that imports .DWG after can read 2000 format.
DTM surface options: Show this page to enable the export of a DTM surface as 3D faces when required.; Point options; If Export points with blocks is selected, each point will be exported with blocks displaying point numbers, elevations and names.
Select objects: Select "Make file 3D", unless you specifically want to export 2D data. Do not "Explode custom linetypes" to replace complex linetypes with straight segments unless the target application does not support symbols.

AutoCAD Configuration files (.ACF) are used by scripts to substitute ("map") colours, fonts, linetypes and line widths when converting to and from .DWG and .DXF.

Scripts use the .ACF file specified on the target file page in the specified location, such as C:\TMCustom\, C:\TMCustom\Geocomp or C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English. If no location is specified, the .ACF file is sought in the TSP.

To see the contents of the .ACF used by the script, click on Edit... To edit an .ACF, use a text editor. The format is described by comment lines.

Colour numbers in the exported .DXG or .DXF correspond to colour numbers in Terramodel, except that colour numbers can be substituted by the .ACF.

Geocomp AutoCAD scripts use "Geocomp_64 to AutoCAD_255.ACF". With this .ACF, if the Terramodel palette is Geocomp_64 and the AutoCAD palette has the default 255 colours, and the colourmap is one to one, entities are imported and exported with new colour numbers so that they display with similar colours.

Linetypes are defined in .LIN files for both Terramodel and .DWG / .DXF. The two formats are different so the .LIN files are not interchangeable and the linetypes can differ in appearence and behaviour between programs.

Names of linetypes in the exported .DWG or .DXF correspond to linetype names in Terramodel except that spaces are replaced by _, and names can be substituted by the .ACF.

Linetypes with names not recognised by the CAD program are substituted.

AutoCAD .LIN files in C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Fonts\acad_files\ contain definitions similar to Terramodel linetypes. Many of these linetypes include symbols defined in symbol.shx.

Some linetypes with symbols, such as LEADER LINE, have no exact equi valent, so to keep the same appearance EXPLODE these into plines and text before exporting. Supply symbol.shx or further explode text into plines.

Names of fonts in the exported .DWG or .DXF correspond to names of fonts in Terramodel. Substitute font names by .ACF because most CAD programs use fonts with different names.

Font names not recognised are substituted by the CAD program.

AutoCAD .SHP and .SHX files in C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Fonts\acad_files contain font and symbol definitions similar to .FNT files in Terramodel format found in C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Fonts\. These ASCII .SHP files can be compiled into binary .SHX files using C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Fonts\fontc.exe.

Symbols in Terramodel are displayed using the symbol font. See the symbol chart. When exporting these to .DWG or .DXF, also supply symbol.shx to be loaded in the CAD program, or use blocks instead, or convert symbols to blocks using SYM2BLK.

.DWG and .DXF files exported from Terramodel are based on template files. SPSDEFAULT.DWG is used for projects in feet and inches. SPSDEFAULT_ISO.DWG is used for projects in metric units.

The files are sought in the TSP, or failing that in C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English (or similar).

These files contain settings and entities such as title blocks, layers, linetypes, blocks and fonts. They must be edited in AutoCAD or equivalent CAD software and saved in 2004 .DWG format.

MicroStation target file

File: Leave blank.

Conversion mapping

Select a MicroStation conversion mapping file (.MCF).

Use the Layer, Colour, Font and Linetype map buttons to inspect the .MCF, not to edit. Do not use the Create button. Instead, create and edit .MCF files using a text editor. Use an existing file as an example.

Layer map...: Map MicroStation V7 level numbers from 0 to 63 to Terramodel layer names.
Colour map...
: Map MicroStation V7 colours to Terramodel colours.
Font map...: Map MicroStation V7 font numbers to Terramodel font names.
Linetype map...: Map MicroStation line styles to Terramodel line types.

Seed file

Select a seed file.

Seed file

Selected objects are added to a copy of a seed file, which is a prototype .DGN created with MicroStation V7.

The only way to be sure that your seed file is compatable is to ask your client to send you a copy of theirs. The seed file must be 2D if the data are 2D, or 3D if the data are 3D. The limits of the seed file must be outside the extents of the selected data.

Standard seed files that can be selected from C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ are described in MicroStation Seed Files.PDF. GCARB3.DGN, a 3D seed file with an origin at 0,0,0, and GCAMG3.DGN, a 3D seed file with an origin to suit AMG and MGA coordinate systems, can be selected from C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\.

Seed files can include standard objects like cells.

Export set points

Export set points, or not.

Export from view

Select the view from which to select objects.

Number of objects selected

Select objects when running the script.

Survey Data Management System (SDMS) is a land surveying data standard developed and maintained by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

Export raw data from a Terramodel project to an SDMS project (*.prj) file, or a calculated data (*.cal) file, or export points to an SDMS control (*.ctl) file.

Terramodel uses C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\sdms.map to map specific raw data fields to SDMS data tags. Do not edit this mapping file. Use the following dialog boxes exporting to an SDMS project: SDMS target file Source data

Export or list a selected surface from a roadway as cross sections in Terramodel .XSC file format with a chainage range.

Specify Segment 1, unless you are using chainage equations.

The report includes the offset and elevation of each point at each chainage.

To bdy: Extend to a boundary or to a specified distance
Distance: Extend by a specified distance.
Boundaries: Extend to the first the boundary, or lines projected from the ends of the boundary. The boundaries do not need to be closed.
Line: Specify a pline or set to be extended
Add Pt: Create a new segment between the end and the new location.
Move Pt: Move the end of the set or pline segment.
Spirals and vertical curves cannot be extended. See also GCEXTEND Extend multiple plines to a single boundary GC88 Extend or clip to a specified total distance. Command date Guide Menu Source GC 12/03/09 HELPTM Edit|Extend Field Data Module 276

Label points with point numbers. Use F7 again to turn point numbers off.

Add or change point labels that show the point number, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the point number is currently displayed, F7 turns the point number off.

If point markers have already been turned on by F8, elevations by F9 or names by F11, a point label block is selected which continues to show them.

F7, F8, F9 and F11 uses point label styles 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16. Point labels with other styles must be edited with other commands such as LABELPOINT and EDIT. These styles are known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [FunctionKeys] section from C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\GEOCOMP_AUST_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI. Some keyboards also require you to Press Fn.

Label points with circle symbol labels. Run F8 again to turn symbol labels off.

Add or change point labels that show a symbol (by default symbol 40, a circle), at a legible view scale, for all visible points that are not already labelled by a different symbol. If the symbol label is currently displayed, F8 turns the symbol label off.

F7, F8, F9 and F11 uses point label styles 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

Edit point labels with styles other than 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16 with other commands such as LABELPOINT and EDIT. These styles are known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

When F8 turns on symbol labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

The point label can include a symbol other than 40. For example, enter F8 35 at the command line, to modify the labels of visible points with no symbols to include symbol 35 (×). Then use F8 or F8 35 again to toggle off all examples of symbol 35, including symbols on points previously labelled with symbol 35. Other symbols are unchanged. See the symbol chart.

The symbol label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks are unchanged.

To label points with a user-defined symbol number and symbol height, see F8C.

Label points with preset symbols. Run F8C again to turn preset symbols off.

Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged.

To preset the symbol, use PROJECTV to create or set the Integer project variable "F8C:Symbol_Number" to the desired symbol. The default symbol is 34 (+). See the symbol chart.

The symbol size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

To preset the symbol size, use PROJECTV to create or set the Double project variable "F8C:Symbol_Height" to the desired height in sheet units. The default height is 0.10.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

To label with circle symbols at heights that adjust view scale for legibility, use F8. To configure the F8 function key to use F8C, ALIAS from F8C to F8 or use EDITINI to edit F8 in the function key section of TMODWIN.INI. To display temporary point markers, use F8T.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

F8T

Display temporary point markers on all points in visible layers.

The point marker size is dependent on the current view scale. The colour is the cursor colour.

Point markers are temporary and disappear after refresh. They are not objects or labels or vertex markers. Blocks, symbols and point labels are unchanged.

To display circle symbols at heights that adjust view scale for legibility, use F8. To configure the F8 function key to use F8T, ALIAS from F8C to F8 or use EDITINI to edit F8 in the function key section of TMODWIN.INI. To display point markers with a user-defined symbol, use F8C.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|Mark\|Points	Geocomp Update or $250	F8,137

Label points with elevations. F9 command again to turn elevation labels off.

Add or change point labels that show the elevation, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the point number is currently displayed, F9 turns the point number off.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F9 turns on elevation labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

Label points with names. F11 command again to turn point name labels off.

Add or change point labels that show the name, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the name is currently displayed, F11 turns the name off.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F11 turns on point name labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

Configure up to eight favourite commands.

Commands from this history are available by right-clicking in the graphics area when applicable.

To configure, run FAVORITES then either

Enter a command name then Add that command to the list
Select a command from a menu, then Add that command to the list. The command must be on a menu in an original Terramodel installation.
Remove a command from the list
Move a command Up or Down the list
Enable command completion, or not.

Terramodel also remembers the names of up to 30 recently used commands. These commands, and the favourites, are available for selection at the command line using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.

When you need to select a command, as an alternative to manually entering the name, or selecting from a menu, toolbar or toolbox, right-click on the Terramodel graphics window to open a command menu. The top pane lists for selection up to eight commands configured in FAVORITES, and the bottom pane lists the ten most recently used commands.

If "Enable command completion" is on, as you type characters at the command line, if they match one of these commands, the remaining characters are automatically completed and highlighted. Continue to type, or press Enter to accept the predicted text.

Be careful with predictive text and commands with similar names. For example, if PLOTTERSET has been entered more recently than PLOT, as you type PLOT, PLOTTERSET is predicted and selectable by Enter. To enter PLOT instead, use the Delete key to delete the highlighted terset characters.

Turn off "Enable command completion" before creating or playing keystroke macros.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|System configuration\|Favorites	Field Data Module	201

FBLOCK

Import ASCII points into separate Terramodel project files for each square data region of the nominated size in project units. The input data format is assumed to be E N Z or E,N,Z. Blank lines and lines starting with '#' are ignored.

For example, if the region size is 1000m, all points with X between 0 and 1000 and also Y between 0 and 1000, are added to one Terramodel project, whereas those points with X between 0 and 1000 but Y between 1000 and 2000, would be added to a different Terramodel project file, and so on.

Project Variable MAX_NUMBER_OF_FILES restricts the number of files open. The default is 100.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Secured

FCXOUT

Export Trimble feature code library (.FCX) from AutoDraft (.ADC) for uploading into a Trimble survey instrument.

Browse to select an AutoDraft Configuration file and a new location for an .FCX file.

Optionally, export global codes.

FCXOUT is an alias for Trimble FCX _e export script.

Alias date		Menu	Source	GC
23/11/21		File \| Export/Upload \| Trimble FCX _e	Geocomp Update

FILLET

Select the first segment using the Seg1 locate control.
Select the second segment that intersects the first using the Seg1 locate control.
Input the radius for the arc using the Radius distance control.
Specify whether to trim the two selected line segments using the Trim check box. When the box is checked, the lines are trimmed to the point at which the fillet arc is added. If a radius of 0 is used, the lines will be trimmed to the point at which the lines intersect.
Click OK to create the fillet.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Arc\|Fillet	Field Data Module	73

FILTER

Create plines made up of straight segments from selected plines within a filter "box".

The number of vertices is reduced along straights, such as contours, and can be increased for splines, arcs and spirals.

The initial filter box is of the specified length and width and is orientated to the first segment. The width is perpendicular to the segment.

FILTER checks for additional vertices contained within the limits of the filter box. Any vertices inside the box are discarded. The first vertex found outside the box is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the box is added back to the pline. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated.

Select the current colour and layer to see the difference between the new plines and the old.

See also BLFILTER, GCCHORD, GCFILTER and SETFILT.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Pline\|Filter	Secured	DTM F

FILT3DPT

Relayer any duplicate points within a specified 3D tolerance to layer 0 with the option to report.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

FIXCURVE

Fix non-tangential arcs by moving the end and centre points of three-point-arcs onto the line of adjacent straight segments.

In selected sets, for each pair of adjoining arc segments with equal radii, where the first and last surveyed points are approximately tangent points (TPs) and the adjoining set segments are straight, move each "TP" along the adjoining straight until both are exactly tangential and move the centre point so the radii remain equal.

Optionally, interpolate new elevations along the tangents.

Three-point arcs are represented by pairs of adjoining arc segments with equal radii. To create a three-point arc, select three points using GC3PTARC, use a POC (point-on-curve) global code in AUTODRAFT or import Geocomp three-point-arc strings using GCIMPORT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

FIXDTM

For set segments on a DTM layer that join contourable points on other layers, "fix" them so they function as breaklines.

For each set on the DTM layer, wherever the set is connected to a 3D point on layer 0, and there is 2D point on the DTM layer at the same X and Y location, replace the 2D point in the set with the 3D point.

For any such points found, P3Pad reports the point numbers and "Swapping point number in set".

If the set is connected to a point on any other layer, and there is no point at the same location on the DTM layer, copy the point into the DTM layer and then insert the point into the set.

During DTM formation by any command, duplicate points on a DTM layer relayer to layer 0. Any connected to a set are usually replaced by one on the DTM layer and message scroll reports "Set Node Changed". If this doesn't happen, use FIXDTM or GC31.

Create new closed plotbox plines to replace selected plotboxes.

For each selected pline, that has a dynaview,

Close the pline, if it is open
Create a new plotbox pline at the same locations
Change the parent of the dynaview to the new plotbox

Delete the old plotboxes or retain them as plines with no dynaviews

Delete any text or plines that referred to the old plotboxes or retain them as records with no parents.

Use FIXDYNA when you have many dynaviews, and visibility of objects in some dynaviews is incorrect because you have lost track of object referencing.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

FIXLAYERS

Repair layers that cannot be used to compute end-area volumes.

Deleting multiple empty layers using LAYERSET in Terramodel 10.20 only, can corrupt a layer attribute in the project such that commands such as AVGEND, EARTHWRK and TEMPLATE report 0.00 volumes and, in road cross sections, materials are not shaded in colour.

Fix these layers in the current project by running FIXLAYERS at the Terramodel command line.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Field Data Module

FIXGCSPELL

The Spell Checker (GCSPELL), at first has no configured dictionaries. FIXGCSPELL is an alias that opens the Windows Registry file GCSpell.reg. Allow the Registry Editor to to add the initial dictionary files and paths from GCSpell.reg. Then try GCSPELL.

Alias date			Source
08/02/22			GCSPELL

FIXRDE

The Raw data editor (RDE) window can be maximised, minimised and restored. If the window position is not visible, perhaps because a display has since been disconnected or turned off, the RDE window is not visible and RDE locks up, as do IMPORT scripts that open RDE.

Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

The default postion of the the window is stored in the Windows Registry. FIXRDE is an alias that opens the Windows Registry file RDE_window_and_colours.reg to position the window on the primary Windows display. Allow the Registry Editor to to reset the default window location, then restart Terramodel and try RDE again.

FIXRDE also configures the Raw Data Appearance in RDE Editor Settings to include "Data field emphasis" and "Smaller data tags".

Alias date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

FIXTVLITE

3D Visualiser (3DVISUALISER or TVLITE) windows can be maximised, minimised and restored. If the window position is not visible, perhaps because a display has since been disconnected or turned off, the window is not visible and 3D Visualizer appears to fail.

Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

The default postion of the the window is stored in the Windows Registry. FIXTVLITE is an alias that opens the Windows Registry file TVLite_window.reg to position the window on the primary Windows display. Allow the Registry Editor to to reset the default window location, then restart Terramodel and try 3D Visualiser again.

Alias date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

FLD2RDE

Import 12D Model .FLD survey file for Raw Data Editor.

Use Import Script Manager (IMPORTSMGR) to turn on the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script supplied with Geocomp Updates.
Copy an .RDE file that contains only comments, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\Docs\EMPTY.RDE, to your survey files location with a new name and extension .RDE.
Use the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script (IMPORT) to import the .RDE file with the new name.
Raw Data Editor (RDE) creates a new survey job with the description "[new file name.RDE] imported at [time and date]".
Exit RDE.
Run FLD2RDE command.
Browse to select a .FLD file created by a data collector with 12D Field software.
Select OK to import the survey, convert the survey to .RDE format, display the survey in P3Pad and display the Procedure button "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen".
Click "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen" to open RDE.
Use Alt-Tab keys together to bring P3Pad editor to the current window.
In P3Pad, use Control-A to Select All text.
Alt-tab to RDE window.
In RDE, use Control-C keys to paste text.
Exit RDE to process the survey and create points.

Copy selected objects from an "Elevation" view such as Profile, XSect or View6 into a selected "Plan" view.

The objects are created at distances, elevations and offsets, along a reference line selected from the Plan view, equal to their X, Y and Z coordinates in the Elevation view.

The objects refer to the original object for labelling a point with the original point number or elevation using EAT codes.

Copy selected objects from a plan view into an "Elevation" drawing in a selected view.

The chainage of the point along the selected baseline determines the x-coordinate, while the elevation of the point determines the y-coordinate position.

The objects maintain the layer, colour and linetype of the original points.

The name of the new object is the original name plus the baseline name and original point number, X, Y and Z.

The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.

Report which fonts (typefaces) are used by selected text objects or change the font property of selected text objects to a specified font.

Use this to fix text with incorrect fonts.

The From list shows only fonts used by any of the selected text.

The To list lists alphabetically all fonts which have been loaded into Terramodel or listed in p3server.ini.

If Terramodel cannot find a corresponding FNT file for a specified font, the font property of the text is still changed, but the text is displayed with the default font instead, usually TMODELF.

To add a new font to the To List, place the FNT file into C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Fonts, specify that font in TEXTMETRICS or STYLESET, then add the font name to the ini file when prompted.

Select a registered HAL, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, superelevation and widening. In conjunction with VAL Editor, design a long road in minutes!

Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them.

The settings include design speed, default cross slope, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratio.

Great for forest, haul and mountain roads where the same design criteria apply for most of the length.

Use WALK to get the initial alignment if based on constant grade, otherwise pick some IPs. Use RDVALEDIT to design the vertical alignment. Then modify your horizontal and vertical design to accommodate variations such as intersections.

FORESTRD and a prototype file are customised according to your requirements which could match those of any road authority. The default is setup for NSW RTA and Forestry Tasmania.

See also HAULROAD which also generates vertical and slope alignments, can allow you to edit your alignments and computes volumes.

Use with FORESTRD.

TML date			Source
Custom			POA

FRGOUT

Specify the centreline HAL of a road and records to set out and export this to an .FRG file. This file can then be used to store the full road geometry on Nikon DTM-800 series and Zeiss total stations running Fast Map 700 Road Engineer software. This can then be used for checking and setting out complex surfaces and alignments.

FM700 has built-in Quality Assurance. The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. If the VAL is picked, the elevations are the difference between the height of the object and the VAL, otherwise the elevations are from the points.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

FYATBEDIT

Copy feature attributes of a parent object onto selected objects.

If the parent object does not have feature attributes, enter feature attribute names and values using a dialog.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN, FYATBOUT, CHECKATT and PTSETATB.

The TML name is FY_ATBED. If FYATBEDIT does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBEDIT to FY_ATBED or enter FY_ATBED. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400

FYATBEP

Export feature attributes of selected objects to a comma-separate values (.CSV) file.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBIN and FYATBOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBEP. If FYATBEP does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBEP to FY_ATBEP or enter FY_ATBEP. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400

FYATBIN

Import all feature Attribute codes from a selected Trimble .DC, Leica .TLF or .CSV points file.

These feature attributes can be collected in the field for Geographic Information Systems (GIS) purposes.

Upload a feature code table that uses Feature Attributes to a suitable Trimble
Conduct a feature survey using those field attributes
Extract the Trimble survey data as a .DC.
IMPORT the Trimble DC survey file using the import script "Trimble raw survey data (dc)".
Immediately after importing the survey, before point numbers can be changed, run FYATBIN from the command line
Browse
Choose Trimble Raw Data Collector Files
Select the same DC file as before
Import attributes onto the corresponding points.

The "Trimble raw survey data (dc)" import script reads the point name on "D9 Code" records and then "87 Feature Name" records. If both records exist for the same point, the "87" record is used. If the "D9" records are preferred because they are similar but are appended with additional data such as string numbers, use FYATBIN to replace the "87" point names with the "D9" point names.

Upload a suitable format file that uses attributes to a suitable Leica survey instrument
Conduct a feature survey using those field attributes
Extract the Leica Survey data as a .TLF with attributes.
IMPORT the Leica TLF survey file using the import script "Geocomp Leica TLF _i".
Immediately after importing the survey, before point numbers can be changed, run FYATBIN from the command line
Browse
Select Leica Data Collector Files
Select the same TLF file as before
Import attributes onto the corresponding points.

Create, edit or import Terramodel objects with names (such as those imported from a .CSV file)
Create a different .CSV file to define the attribute names
1. Start the first row with the NAME field, then add fields for the names of the attributes to be created
2. On each other row, for each object name that is to have those attributes, enter the object name, then attribute values for each field
3. To avoid creating attributes for any particular field, prefix that field name with ! on the first line.
Before changing any objects names, run FYATBIN from the command line
Browse
Select CSV Data Files
Select the attribute .CSV file
Import attributes onto the corresponding objects.

As attribute names vary, create a separate attribute .CSV file for each. For example, attribute names for pipes will be different to attribute names for pavements.

For example, if a pit lid has the name

PGPP TMR 0.97X0.68 CONCRETE

and the first line of the attribute definition .CSV file has

!Name,Asset_ID,Owner,Lid_Size(m),Material

and another line in the CSV file has

PGPP TMR 0.97X0.68 CONCRETE,,TMR,0.97X0.68,CONCRETE

then, for all selected objects with that name, these attributes and values are created:

Asset_ID: (left blank)
Owner: TMR
Lid_Size(m): 0.97X0.68
Material: CONCRETE

Create, edit or import Terramodel objects with unique point numbers (such as those imported from a .CSV file)
Create a different .CSV file to define the attribute names
1. Start the first row with the POINT field, then add fields for the names of the attributes to be created
2. On each other row, for each point that is to have those attributes, enter the point number, then attribute values for each field
3. To avoid creating attributes for any particular field, prefix that field name with ! on the first line.
Before changing any point numbers, run FYATBIN from the command line
Browse
Select CSV Data Files
Select the .CSV file
Import attributes onto the corresponding objects.

Similar to the above, but for 12D Field .FLD files.

Export feature attributes of objects on a selected layer list to Mapinfo MIF/MID files that match D-SPEC as-built drainage specification.

The attribute names are written to the .MIF file and the corresponding values are written to the .MID file. Elevations can be included.

If the Coordinate System selected by GCCOORD is MGA, AMG or ISG, the definition is includes in the header, otherwise the default "non earth" is specified. To add another coordinate system, please contact Geocomp Systems.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN and MAPIOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBOU. If FYATBOUT does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBOUT to FY_ATBOU or enter FY_ATBOU. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400

GARMININ

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GARMINOU

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC01

Nominate the start and end character positions. The range is inclusive.

To remove characters within the range, select Delete.

To retain only those characters within the range, do not select Delete.

The values are stored as project variables.

Note that for text objects, the name is the same as the text value.

The GC01 prompt uses a different font to other commands. If you have any problem with the font, see MICROSS.

Modify the name of selected points to include chainage|station and offset from HAL.

CL HAL:

Select a centreline alignment pline or set

Pts

Select points

Include Sta.|Ch.

Include Sta.|Ch. and the value of station|chainage measured along the alignment

Include Offset

Include offset from selected HAL

Use EAT for Offsets

Configure offset to Offset EAT code format

Hal Pt Labels

If the point has the same chainage|station as a significant HAL point, append the label such as IP, SC, CS or TP

Settings

Prefix Chainage|Station: Enter any prefix to chainage|station
Suffix Chainage|Station: Enter any suffix to the chainage|station
Prefix Offset: Enter any prefix to the offset
Suffix Offset: Enter any suffix to the offset
Append to point's name: Append to or replace existing point name
Prefix to point's name: Prefix to or replace existing point name
Create text: Also create text with the same characters as the point name
Text layer: Select layer for new text
Text style: Select style for any text
Text colour: Select a style for any text

GC02 refers to the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP) as configured by STAORCHN. These labels are defined in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI and are independent of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value.

If "Use EAT for offsets" is selected, the format of the offset can include any characters and indicate direction such as L or - for left, R for right and CL or 0.000 for zero offset, as configured by Units Settings (UNITSSET) Labeling.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev and Name of selected points, relative to a horizontal and vertical alignment.

Optionally,

List Easting and Northing
List vertical differences to a specified Design DTM
Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record

In Settings, specify

Text for headings (up to five)
Text for a footer
Whether to create a .CSV file in format Pt No, Ch, O|S, Elev, Val Diff,Name
Whether to include Easting and Northing
Whether to report coordinates before or after Name column
Whether change the Point Names to show the Point number, horizontal offset, and elevation difference.

The report includes any pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally. See GC14 to use sloping chainages.

See also GC03A to use a master HAL or GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|More...\|Chainage and offset Reports\|More...\|Station and offset	Geocomp Update or $250	122

GC03A

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.

Specify points, a master HAL and a design Line.

In the Headings dialog, "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|More...\|Chainage and offset	Geocomp Update or $250	122

GC03DRN

Report selected points showing Pt Number, Chainage, As-built Offset, Design Offset, As-built Height, Design Height, Height difference from VAL, Design Grade As-Built Grade, Easting, Northing and Name|Description.

Select points, a HAL, and enter the design horizontal and vertical offsets and tolerances for Horizontal, Vertical and Grade.

Optionally, select a VAL, to List Coordinates and enter Headings. To also create a .CSV, select the option under headings. Coordinates are only listed to .CSV.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference and Name from main Horizontal and Vertical alignments and Secondary Horizontal and Vertical alignments.

Optionally, list coordinates, extend past the end of the HAL record, and report vertical differences to a design DTM.

In the Secondary HAL/VAL and Settings dialog, enter up to five heading lines and footer for your reports, pick a secondary HAL and VAL and, optionally, create .CSV file for use in spreadsheets.

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

See also GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	122

GC03RAKE

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elevation, Elevation difference, Rake in 1m and Name of selected points, relative to a horizontal and vertical alignment.

Optionally,

List Easting and Northing
Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record

In Settings, specify

Text for headings (up to five)
Text for a footer

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03 for a simple report, GC03A to use a master HAL, GC03DRN for an as-built drain report and GC03WALL for a wall report.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC03WALL

Report chainage, offset, as built elevation, height above design toe, direction of lean and rake from HAL and VAL.

Optionally,

Backfill to left or right
List Easting and Northing
Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record
Specify tolerances
Specify
- Text for headings (up to five)
- Text for a footer

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03 for a simple report, GC03A to use a master HAL, GC03DRN for an as-built drain report and GC03RAKE for a rake report.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC04

Where a single-segment pline is less than a minimum length, create a mid-point.

If the mid-point of the next pline is in the same location, omit the duplicate point.

A common use is to create a single point on each pair of crossing plines imported from CAD.

See also ILINE to intersect lines and GC31 to remove duplicate points, GC83 to select short plines or sets and DIVIDE to divide a pline or set.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	314

GC05

Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs and inside a boundary.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC06

Round elevations of selected points to a specified number of decimal places.

Only use GC06 where rounding displayed values with EAT codes or precision settings is not suitable.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC07

Compute shift, rotation and scale values that best fit selected pairs of points then transform the selected objects in 2D.

Objects

Select the objects to be transformed, carefully.

Use Form

Control point: Select up to nine points in the new coordinate system by point number or mouse.
Data point: Select up to nine corresponding points in the old coordinate system.
Weight: Specify the number of times to use each control and data point pair.
Generate report: Report to P3Pad.
Fix scale factor to: Fix the scale factor (e.g. to 1.00) rather than use the computed factor.
Apply Elev shift to Transformed objects: Shift the elevations rather than leave the elevations unchanged.
Calculate.: From the control and data points, weights and scale factor, calculate the Residuals, Rotation, Scale, East shift and North Shift for a 2D Helmert transformation, and the average elevation difference for an elevation shift, and display the calculated values on the right-hand side.
Clear Form: Clear the input information for reentry.
Transform Objects: Immediately transform the selected objects in 2D from the old coordinate system to the new, and shift the elevations if specified.
Store Transformation Values: Store calculated values as project variables for later transformation of other data in the same project file with the same rotation, scale and shifts.
Store Transformation to hmt: Store calculated values to an external .HMT file for later transformation of data in other project files with the same rotation, scale and shifts.

Use Stored Values

If you have previously stored transformation values as project variables using the form, immediately transform the coordinates of the selected objects.

Use HMT file

Select a .HMT file containing transformation values previously stored using the form, and immedately transform the selected objects.

Wld

Read a .WLD file containing coordinate pairs previously created by Arcmap and then compute and report the transformation values.

Hel

Read a .HEL file containing coordinate pairs previously created by 12D Model and then compute and report the transformation values.

Read Control/Data points from a file

Read a .CSV file containing point pairs and weights and compute transformation values.

Transform Points

Transform points using the transformation values read from .WLD, .HEL or .CSV files.

Use Helmert transformation to transfer between two plane coordinate systems or a geodetic and a plane coordinate system.

If the computed residuals shown in the form are not acceptable, omit point pairs or correct the coordinates before you transform points.

Do not include your control points in your selected objects.

The .HMT file contains three pairs of parameters on one line. The first two combine to store rotation and scale, the second locates the data centroid and the third, locates the control centroid. If a HMT file contains two lines, the first line is a heading displayed in the message scroll and the second line contains the parameters.

.WLD and .HEL files contain pairs of coordinates. New points are created at these locations.

The .CSV format is either Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number or Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number, Weight. Use .CSV when you have more than nine point pairs or point pairs are supplied in a spreadsheet.

A mapping file (default = Geocomp.map) determines the block or symbol, the size and scaling behaviour. If the group =0, no symbol is placed.

Most import TMLs written by Geocomp Systems set a group for each object. If you import or create objects in other ways you will need to assign groups to use this function.

GCIMPORT enables this method during the import by selecting "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols". To place the blocks or symbols at a later stage, use GC09 after setting groups where required.

To replace circles with blocks by group (for example tree canopies), use GCIMPORT or GCINSBLK.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	90

GC10

For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length and the totals to P3Pad.

As objects are selected, the total distance is updated in message scroll.

Select "Compute closed areas", to report the closed areas and the lengths of unclosed areas.

The slope distance is computed in 3D for set segments connecting 3D points and also 2D distances for plines and set segments joining 2D points.

Use for estimating lengths and areas of kerbs, pipes, paving and so on.

Report to .CSV for use in spreadsheets.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Report\|More...\|Lengths + areas	Geocomp Update or $200	275

GC100

Report the Point number, Easting, Northing, Thickness and Point Name of selected points.

The thickness is the interpolated elevation from the Upper DTM less the Lower DTM.

Where the thickness is expressed as a negative value, the Upper DTM is below the Lower DTM.

When there is a road job, the chainage | station and the offset from the main alignment are also reported.

Where a point is outside either DTM, the thickness is shown as *.

Points outside the selected Roadjob are marked "Outside Roadjob".

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	224

GC12DIN

Import 2D, 3D, arc, text and alignment strings from a .12DA or .12DAZ archive file from 12D Model.

The 12D Model archive format is either an ASCII file with extension .12DA or a zipped .12DA with extension 12DAZ.

12D Archive file

Browse to select a .12DA to import or to first select a .12DAZ file then select the extracted .12DA file to import.

Colour mapping file

Specify a colour mapping files with extension .CNN, in this format:

12DA colour name, Terramodel colour number

Examples are installed in the C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp folder.

Layer name mapping file

Specify a layer name mapping file with extension .LNM, in this format:

12DA model name, Terramodel layer number

Terramodel uses the first matching case in the file. If you select an .LNM file, any new model names in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. To create a new .LMN with values suggested by the .12DA file, don't specify one.

Line style mapping file

Specify line style mapping .LSM file in this format:

12DA line style, Terramodel linetype

Any new line styles in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. If you don't specify a .LSM, you are prompted to create a new one with values suggested by the .12DA file.

All the following options are normally OFF by default.

Import hidden super alignment segments: Import super alignments with hidden segments as single sets with hidden segments or as multiple sets with the hidden segments removed.
Convert Contour Super strings to Points and Sets: 2D super strings (such as boundaries and contours) are otherwise imported as plines.
Create sets around TIN edges: Create set boundaries along the edge of each imported TIN for use with EARTHWORK, RELAYER, GCCOPY, GCMERGE, GCGTRACE and so on. This can take a long time.
Ignore triangles with sides less than 1.5m long: Reduce the size of DTM surfaces by ignoring small triangles.
Prefix point name with super string name: Prefix points the from super strings with the name of the super string.
Import Trimesh_3D Edges: Import Trimesh Primitive_3D edges with Group 5475. See Trimesh note below.
Do not remove duplicate points from TIN models: Neither remove duplicate points nor adjust near-vertical walls to suit Terramodel DTM formation tolerance.
Import Vertex ID as Point number: Assign each new point number by Vertex ID ("point_data"). Otherwise, assign the next available integer point number.
Ignore all TINs: Do not any import TINs, Full_TINs or Super_Tins.
Ignore Models with "SECTIONS" in the name: Do not import models with "SECTIONS" anywhere in the model name. Such models can include points at each cross section.
Ignore all primitive_3d: Do not import trimeshes.
Prefix for saved registered alignments: Enter a prefix.

.12DA files can be very large. Consider increasing the maximum number of objects in System Configuration (SYSTEM) or requesting more, smaller, data files.
.12DAZ files simply contain zipped .12DA files. Extract the files with any unzipping utility, or use GC12DIN to extract them.
After extracting all files from the .12DAZ file, GC12DIN presents any .12DA file that has the same name as the .12DAZ to be imported. If no .12DA has the same name, you are prompted to select another .12DA file. This may be due to 12D model export settings or renaming the .12DAZ file.
If you are supplied an archive containing multiple .12DA files, such as .mrarchive, rename the extension to .mrarchive.12DAZ so that GC12DIN can extract the files.
Creating subfolders for .12DAZ files can help keep track of extracted files.
If you are supplied .12DXMLZ files, please ask for .12DA or .12DAZ files instead.

A TIN (triangulated irregular network) is what 12D Model calls a DTM.
Each model is imported onto one Terramodel layer, even if it comprises more than one TIN.
Full_TINs consist of TIN triangles surrounded by null triangles. Both are imported. Null triangles are imported as dead regions in a different colour that are not included in DTMs. To delete null triangles, use DELNULTR.
Every triangle in a TIN has three unique points, which results in many points at common vertices. By default, GC12DIN removes all bar one point with common coordinates at each vertex, and points that are not duplicate but are within 1mm are moved apart so that near-vertical walls form DTMs correctly.
A Super Tin is a list of tins in a .12DA that 12D Model can process in sequence. While the list is not imported into Terramodel, the TINs are. To merge DTMs in sequence, use GCMERGE.

Horizontal, vertical and slope alignments from super alignment strings are imported as plines and registered.
If the computed location of the end of an alignment differs from the location given in the file, the misclose is reported.
Alignments containing vertical curves are created in the Profile view.
Alignments containing arcs and no spirals are imported as straights and arcs. Arc not tangential to the adjacent straight are imported with a warning.
Alignments containing spirals are assumed to start and end tangential to straights.
Arc centres are hidden. They can be made visible afterwards by ARCENTRE.

Layer names that are longer than 17 characters are automatically shortened to fit by substituting using common words with abbreviations, removing spaces and beginning characters (other than TIN).
To assign the new layer names yourself, use the layer mapping file.
Attributes are imported provided GC12.ADF is in the TSP and the attributes were exported to the .12DA file using GC12DOUT.
Trimeshes are networks of Primitive_3D triangles that define surfaces, like pipes, that are not TINs. Display imported trimeshes in 3D using TV with Set features turned on in Environment Visibility Settings. If you also import the trimesh edges as single set segments, separate them by group 5475 using SELECTGP, IGRP or ONGRP.
If the command creates a temporary .ASC file, update the command to the latest revision that directly and quickly reads 4-bit .12DA files created by 64-bit 12D Model.

Export selected objects or DTM layers to a .12DA file for use with 12D Model software.

Export objects, or DTMs, or both to the same .12DA file.

Objs:: Select any plines, sets or text
DTMs(Layer List):: To export one or more DTM layers as standard TIN (triangulated irregular network) models of visible triangles, select a layer list defined by LLISTSET. Triangles inside any dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH are not exported.
Browse: Select the output file name and path
Settings
Export: Export 12DModel Archive file (.12DA)

Use GC12DIN to import .12DA and .12DAZ files.

Use GC12DIN and a text editor to prepare the mapping files.

Names of layers, styles and colours in .12DA can have characters A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9 and space. Names of points, sets and plines exported to strings can be blank or have A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, comma, ., +, -, (, ) and = characters. Other characters such as _ and / are invalid. Any invalid characters that remain after mapping are replaced with spaces.

Text objects are exported with "vertex_text_data" values from the text names, "model" and "name" values from the layer names and "text_colour" names corresponding to the geocomp_64 palette.

If a point is attached to a set, GC12DOUT exports the first 16 characters of the point number as ‘point_data’. If you specify “Export Points as 12D Super String Points” in Settings, or the point is not attached to a set, the point is exported as a super string with a name.

If "Export Terramodel Attributes" is selected, any "12DA" Attributes for selected objects are exported to the .12DA, otherwise "Feature" attributes are exported, if any. These require 12DA.ADF or FEATURES.ADF in the TSP. Use <a href=GCEDT12A to edit 12 Model attributes and DISP12DA to display them.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Misc. export\|12DA	Geocomp Update or $250

GC14

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, horizontal offset, RL, RL Diff, 3D Chainage, Actual offset, Distance travelled and Name.

The Chainage, horizontal offset, RL (=elevation) and RL Diff (=elevation difference to VAL) are from the point to the closest location on the horizontal alignment measured in 2D. The 3D Chainage and Actual offset are from the same point to the closest location measured in 3D, which will usually be different to the 2D location.

Select alignment by record or roadjob.

Report chainage and offset to a .DAT file used for processing tunnel as-built reports in TMS ProFit software by Amberg Technologies.

The Chainage, horizontal offset, RL (=elevation) and RL Diff (=elevation difference to VAL) are from the point to the closest location on the horizontal alignment measured in 2D. The 3D Chainage and 3D Offset (=Horizontal component of the 3D actual offset), 3D RL Diff (=vertical component of the 3D Actual offset) are from the same point to the closest location measured in 3D, which will usually be different to the 2D location.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from set3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/name.

Prompt for records, minimum and maximum total length.

Points will also be deleted with sets.

GC15 is useful for cleaning up lines of unwanted hatching or symbols from imported data.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC16

Modify the line colour and linetype of selected objects by the group, name or layer in a .CLT mapping file.

Lines in the .CLT must be in one of the following three formats:

Group,Colour,Linetype
Name,Colour,Linetype
Layer,Colour,Linetype

See C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\GEOCOMP 2.CLT for an example.

Wild cards: * and ? can be used in the group, name or layer.

Modify the colours of selected objects by layer to match the colours they would have if set by AutoDraft.

GC16ADC requires the Full Report report file from AutoDraft (AUTODRAFT).

Block names are also changed to match.

Create a set or pline joining the points created by projecting from points on a set at a specified bearing and slope.

See also SHADOW, GC23, SLICE, SIDESLOPE and DTMCONE.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC18

Report chainage and elevation along a VAL at an interval.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	412

GC20

Compute the cut and fill volumes within selected set or pline boundaries and report.

The report shows the volumes, and the horizontal and surface areas, of the cut and fill.

Enter a stripping depth in metres to lower the existing surface by that much.

Select Exclude dead regions to subtract the areas and volumes within dead region boundaries from the totals. Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Select Additional Surface Info to report the coordinate ranges of the DTMs.

GC20 can be slower than EARTHWORK which reports neither volumes within dead regions nor areas of cut and fill.

Change or establish the current callout style recorded in tmodwin.ini.

For example, GC21 Date to set the current callout style to Date.

Use with an alias or toolbar.

See CALLOUT.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	90

GC22

Report whether a set is suitable for use as a DTM Edge or DTM design boundary.

Select "Report only" to check whether

the selected set
- is open (and, if so, locate the first and last points),
- has any points with no elevations,
- has any points that are not contourable,
- has any points that are not on the same layer,
- has any segments that are not used by the DTM, or
the layer of the set
- has any DTM points outside the set.

Turn off "Report only", to also

Remove points from the set that are not in the DTM, and
Relayer DTM points outside the set to a specified layer such as INVALID.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|More...\|Check DTM edge	Geocomp Update or $200	197

GC23

Create a set by projecting at a % slope on the left or right hand side of a set.

Optionally, create perpendicular sets between the sets.

Adjust points in a set to distribute the closure error based on the proportion of the length of the segment to the length of the set.

Any elevations are also adjusted. The adjusted set is created on layer "ADJUSTED".

Optionally, specify a closing point.

The Compass Rule works well for simple traverses with few redundant measurements. For more complex adjustments, consider using RDE to adjust a traverse or network by the method of least squares.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	62

GC25

Create a temporary isopach surface of the elevation difference between two DTMs then interpolate isopachs where the differences are equal to the nominated value.

Use the isopach elevation of 0.00 to create cut|fill lines. Cut|fill lines indicate where the DTMs intersect and thus the boundary between cut and fill areas.

Select whether to create a 2D pline or 3D set.

The name of the new pline or set is "Cut/Fill Line".

Create pline isopachs between two DTMs at a specified interval and range and inside specified boundaries.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC26

Create up to four new attribute records for an object: two alphanumeric names, one integer and one double precision real number and save them to the attribute definition file geocomp.adf.

Delete all attributes, or just new ones.

GC26 is mainly used to demonstrate attributes in Terramodel.

Contact Geocomp Systems if you need commands with user-definable attributes.

Create attribute records in a MS Access database.

GC26GIS requires the attribute file TMGIS.ADF. Contact Geocomp Systems if you need to link Terramodel to a database.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

GC27

Label all xlines with text on the current layer with chainage values parallel to the xlines.

All lines that refer to the alignment and are within the chainage range are labelled even when turned off or on invisible layers.

Xlines on exact metre chainages are shown with no decimal point and no trailing zeros. Other chainages are labelled to the number of decimal places in UNITSSET Precision.

To label with a block instead of text, first create your own block that contains EAT text and has the name GC27.

HAL: Select an alignment with xlines.
Start Ch | End: Enter start and end chainages | stations, or leave blank to label all xlines on the alignment.
Left | Cln | Right: Create the labels on the left, the centreline or the right.
Style: Specify the text style for labels.
Delete old: Delete old chainage labels.
Include 'Ch': Prefix the label with with "Ch ".
Use GC27 blk: Label with GC27 block instead of text. Only selectable if block GC27 can be found.
Label: Delete previous xline labels and create new labels.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

Create points in the plan view within a specified chainage range, at the nominated interval, HAL points, VAL points or Xlines.

Elevations are interpolated from the vertical alignment. If no VAL is selected, elevations are interpolated from the 3D horizontal alignment set. Point names are derived from a prefix followed by the chainage|station value. Points are created at the start and end chainages.

HAL: Specify a horizontal alignment.
VAL: Specify a vertical alignment or leave blank.
Start and End: Specify start and end chainages.
Int: Create points at 2D chainages evenly divisible by the nominated interval. Enter a space or * for no points at intervals.
Hal Pts: Create points at vertices and at beginnings and ends of arcs and spirals.
VAL Pts: Create points at vertices, sags and crests and at beginnings and ends of vertical curves.
Xlines: Create points at Xlines.
Create Set: Join the points with a set.
Prefix: Specify any prefix to the point names.

Create points in the plan view within a specified chainage range and interval.

HAL: Specify a horizontal alignment
VAL: Specify a vertical alignment
Start and End: Specify a 2D chainage range.
3D Distance: Create points separated by the 3D distance within the chainage range.
Prefix: Name the points with the cumulative 3D distance and any prefix.

See GC28 to create points at 2D distances and GCIN2SET to insert the points into the set.

The TML name is GC28_3D. If GC283D does not run from the command line, create an alias from GC283D to GC28_3D or enter GC28_3D.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Point\|Along HAL	Geocomp Update or $250	77

GC29

Report distance, direction and X and Y differences between two locations. If both locations have elevations also report the vertical angle, slope distance, height difference and grade. If points at those locations are connected by an arc segment, also report the arc length and radius.

Radial: After each measurement, the next measurement is from the first location
Traverse: After each measurement, the next measurement is from the second location
Points: Select locations by mouse or point numbers
Segment: Select locations by set segment
First Pt:: The first location
Second Pt:: The second location
Cancel: Close the command

The elevation at a location is the elevation of a point at that location, or else an elevation interpolated from the current DTM layer.

In the plan view, report the bearing and distance between two locations. In section views, report the horizontal distance, slope distance and grade.

Enter "GC29 segment" at the command line, to start in segment mode.

TAB and Shift+TAB keys can be used to quickly change the focus. For example, when in Traverse mode, Shift+TAB can return the focus to the first location, which is similar to Radial mode without selecting the Radial option.

Report the ellipsoidal distance, ground distance, slope distance, elevation difference, line scale factor, grid bearings (forward and back), grid convergances and arc-to-chord between two locations.

Points | Segment

Select two points or a segment of a set or pline.

Central Meridian

Enter the longitude of the central meridian.

Avg N-value

Enter the average N-value

Settings

Labelling: Label the plane or spheroidal bearings and distances with specified layer, text style and colours.
N-Values: Interpolate N-values from a DTM layer with coordinates in Longitude and Latitude.
Create an Inverse report: Create an Inverse report.

Use AUSGEOID or NZGEOID to import a latitude and longitude grid of N-values, or import a .TMX of such a grid.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	UTM 10

GC30A

Report for each selected point, the Point number, Easting, Northing, Point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation Difference and Name.

The report includes the average vertical elevation difference and RMS.

Chainage and Offset to HAL
Band width to group points at similar chainages
Subtract stripping
Sign convention for differences
Bandwidth for sorting by chainage
High and Low tolerance
Modify point names
Report to .CSV
Create difference text
Difference text layer, style, bearing and units
Point and text colours for cut, fill and tolerance

If project units are feet, all reports, tolerances and difference text labels are in decimal feet. If project units are metres, elevations and differences are reported in metres, tolerances are entered and reported in millimetres, and difference text is labelled in m or mm.

The number of decimal places of metres and feet in elevations and elevation differences is controlled by the Precison for Elevations in UNITSSET.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|More...\|Vertical differences	Geocomp Update or $250	236

GC30PERP

Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation difference perpendicular to DTM and name.

The average elevation difference perpendicular to the DTM, and RMS, is included.

Choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.

If the point is below the DTM, the difference is negative.

To create text and colour points, select "Use GC30A Settings". See GC30A.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

GC42AB is usually preferred to report elevation differences and slopes of road batters.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $250

GC31

Remove duplicate points on a layer within specified tolerances in Easting, Northing and Elevation.

At each location within tolerance, one point is retained and any duplicate points are moved to layer 0.
Optionally, generate a report.
Choose "Mean Pts", "Highest" or "Lowest".
If the Elevation tolerance is *, all points within the Easting and Northing tolerance are considered and duplicate points with no elevation are relayered to layer 0.
Alphanumeric point numbers are retained in preference to integer point numbers.
The name of the remaining point is appended with the names of any removed points, unless the names are duplicate or the resulting name exceeds 80 characters.

When a cluster of 3D contourable points on a DTM layer are within a distance of approximately 1mm in both X and Y, DTM formation automatically removes to layer 0 all bar one of those points. This is much faster than GC31.
DTM formation occurs whenever a DTM is required by a commands such as CONTOUR and 3DVISUALISER.
Reserve Layer 0 for "junk" objects such as duplicate points that can be safely deleted.
CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, if "Dup pts ok" is OFF. It takes much less time to CONVERT with this ON, or use GCCONVRT, then use DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points afterwards.
Duplicate points can be removed while importing DWG files by first creating a Terramodel layer called DXF_PT_CHK. This slows the import. Removing duplicate points later by DTM formation is much quicker overall.
If you use GC58 to remove duplicate sets, plines and text, consider carefully whether to remove duplicate points before or afterwards.
GC92 reports points within 1 mm with height differences, with an option to move them slightly apart. Use this to check imported data before forming any DTM.

List the visibility status of each layer in each layerlist.

For each layer, report the line colour, point colour, linetype, number of objects, and whether objects on that layer are visible in each layerlist.

LLAYER is a similar report without the layer lists.

If there are too many layer lists to fit on the report, use LLRPT which reports in layer list order.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	86

GC33

Create a DTM on the selected Higher or Lower DTM layer from the higher or lower of all the regions of the two selected DTM layers.

The new DTM covers the extent of both DTMs; regions within only one DTM are included.

The new DTM can be limited to a boundary.

Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". A typical value of Clip Dist is 0.01 metres.

Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut|fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.

GC33 is great for use with complex cut and fill volume estimation.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|More...\|Upper or lower of 2DTMs	Geocomp Update or $200	240

GC33MULT

Select a starting DTM, typically the largest, and a layer list of the other DTM layers.

Nominate the name of the final higher or lower DTM layer.

A new surface is created from the starting DTM and the first DTM in the layer list. That surface is then compared with the next DTM in the layer list, and so on in alphabetical order, which can be also date order in a suitable layer naming convention.

The new DTM covers the extent of all selected DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". A Clip Dist of 0.01 is suggested.

GC33MULT is great for use with complex cut|fill volume estimation.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC34

Type in or pick a point then either highlight with concentric circles, recentre the display or recentre the display and zoom by 10x.

The message scroll also reports the point number, easting, northing, elevation, name, layer, view, group, colour, contourability and set, and if the point is part if an arc, connected points, radii and any unequal legs.

The view scale is updated so point labels remain the same size.

See also RECENTER which recentres the display where you pick.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|Mark\|Find point	Geocomp Update or $250	299

GC35

Create points at centroids of any closed plines or sets.

If the objects are circular, the new points are created at the centres of arc.

If the objects are plines, the new points have the same elevations as the plines.

If the objects are sets, the new points have elevations equal to the means of the elevations of the points in the sets.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Point\|At centroids	Geocomp Update or $250	181

GC36

Move selected points perpendicular to (or square off) the HAL or line so their offset is zero.

Points beyond the two points or the HAL are not moved.

2 Points: Select two points to define a line onto which selected points are to be moved.
Hal: Select a pline or set onto which selected points are to be moved.
Points to move: Select points to be moved
Insert: If the HAL is a set, insert the moved points into the set
OK
: Move the selected points
Cancel: Cancel the command without moving any points

Report and label cross sections at chainages and offsets where Xlines intersect selected sets and plines, without using a DTM.

CL HAL:: Nominate an alignment for the centreline.
Objs:: Select sets or plines for the intersecting strings. Only strings with elevations are used.
Create points: Create points on the current layer at the intersecting strings. The point name is derived from the string.
Create CES: Export the cross section as a Geocomp Cross section (.CES) file. This .CES file can be imported into Terramodel (see below), Geocomp Road Design or Geocomp Spatial Data System.
Sort offsets: Select "Sort offsets" to sort strings on offset from left to right, when you want to form a DTM such as a roadway surface. Do not sort on offsets, when you want sort on record number to allow for overlaps such as in a tunnel.
Report: Select Report to Report to P3Pad the Chainage, Offset, Elevation, (optionally) Grade and set and plines.
Show Grade: Select "Show grades" to report the grades between strings.
Label grade: Select "Label grades" to create text labels in the XSect view.

If you show or label grades, choose whether to label as percentage or as Run:Rise ratio.

To create a roadway from strings:

Import or create sets along string lines
<Import or create centreline
Create Xlines
Use GC37 to create a .CES file
Register a roadway alignment, create a roadjob, surfaces, and so on
IMPORTXS the model into a roadway, specifying Geocomp Existing as the format

See also GC37CSV, PTCHOFRL, GC94, GC75 and XSLABEL.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Roads\|Reports...\|Intersecting strings	Geocomp Update or $250	80

GC37CSV

Create cross sections by intersecting selected sets and plines with xlines of a nominated alignment without reference to any DTM.

The sections are written to a comma-separated .CSV file.

The file format is Chainage, Offset, Elevation, Grade, String Description, [all fields except the chainage are repeated on the same line for every intersecting string].

Using up to 10 Control Point|Data Point pairs, compute a best fit of shift, rotation, north scale and east scale and then transform the selected data, and report the residuals.

Text and blocks are shifted, rotated and scaled, but not skewed with the rest of the data. To skew text or blocks too, explode first.

See also GC07 for Helmert transformation, which computes a single scale factor, and GC3DADJ, which transforms in X, Y and Z.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|Transform\|Affine	Geocomp Update or $200	161

GC39

Delete the Xlines on the main registered HAL of a roadway and place new Xlines at alignment points and at the nominated interval.

Pick the main registered hal to move the nearest intersection point to a new location.

The new Xlines will all have the left and right extents of the first of the original Xlines.

Use GCXLINES to create new xlines including hal points or to change offsets.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Roads\|More...\|Move IPs and update Xlines	Geocomp Update or $200	84

GC3D

Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments, with the elevation offset vertical or perpendicular to the VAL.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from selected alignments.

Hal Record:

Select a horizontal alignment pline or set. The default is the active HAL.

Val Record:

Settings

Chainage

Begin:: Enter beginning chainage
End: Enter ending chainage
Incr:: Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines: Also create points at Xlines

Offset distance

Enter the horizontal offset

Delta elevation

Enter the elevation difference

Vertical: The chainage of the new point is the same
Prep to Val: The chainage of the new point is adjusted to be perpendicular to the VAL

Name

Enter the name of the new set

OK

Accept the new settings

Cancel

Retain the old settings

Create points and set

Cancel

Cancel without creating new points or set

Transform selected points, text and blocks in 3D, maintaining the shape but applying 3D scaling, rotation and shift.

Use up to nine pairs of control and data points.

To keep the points at the current 3D distances, fix the scale factor to 1.0.

Check the report for Sigma Zero value and other potential problems before completing the transformation.

2D points can be transformed using a default elevation. Plines are not transformed.

Adjust heights along long straight traverses.
Confirm that a beam will fit between abutments with fixed scale factor of 1.0.

Pts, Text and Blocks

Select objects to be transformed.

Settings

Control Pt:: Enter by point number or select from three to nine Control Points.
Data Pt:: Enter by point number or select the same number of corresponding Data Points.
Generate report: Report transformations to P3Pad
Transform 2d co-ords using default Elev:: Enter an elevation, otherwise consider elevations on control and data points.
Fix Scale Factor to:: Enter a scale factor, otherwise use the computed scale factor.
Calculate: From the control and data points, weights and scale factor, calculate the Residuals, Rotation, Scale, Shifts for a 3D conformal adjustment transformation and Sigma Zero, and display the calculated values, and save the values as project variables.
Transform 3D objects: Immediately transform the selected objects in 3D from the old coordinate system to the new.
Cancel: Close the input dialog without further transformation.
Store Transformation to File: Store calculated values to a .3DADJ file for later transformation of data in other project files with the same rotations, scales and shifts.

Use Stored Values

If you have calculated and stored values as project variables, immediately transform the coordinates of the selected objects.

Read Values From File

Read values from a .3DADJ file and update project variables.

Cancel

Close the dialog without further transformation.

Select points, text or blocks and then rotate them in X, Y or Z around their centroid in small steps or by 90 degrees.

Once you select the objects, rotate them, use other commands such as ZOOM, PAN, DELETE or SET, or restore their original locations.

GC3DROT can also be used to present data in isometric views.

To retain objects in both the original and rotated coordinates, copy objects into View 6 with GCREVIEW.

New objects created after the attributes have been assigned cannot be "restored" with the other objects unless they are sets, blocks or labels that are attached to the selected objects.

Select Pts, Text and Blocks to Rotate

Select objects to be rotated. If this prompt does not appear, you have previously selected some objects.

Next

Assign attributes to the selected objects that include their original locations and whether they are on or off, turn all other objects off and then Zoom All.

Rotate Dynamically

Rotate the objects towards the entered location by one small step. Use mouse clicks to rotate graphically through multiple successive locations.

Rotate about X, Y or Z axes

Rotate About X or Y: Click buttons to rotate about X or Y axes by small steps or by 90 degrees.
Rotate About Z: Click buttons to rotate clockwise or anticlockwise about Z axis by small steps or by 90 degrees.
Rotate About Point: Enter X, Y and Z coordinates of the origin about which to rotate. The default origin is the centroid of the selected objects.
Close: Close the buttons

Rotate by steps of [ ] degrees

Enter the increment for small steps

Restore Co-Ords

Restore each selected object to its original location, on or off status and attributes, and then Zoom All.

Close

Close and keep the new coordinates.

Report closest or perpendicular 3D distance between a set and a point or another set, and create the corresponding points and set.

3D Set:: Select a set of straight segments joining 3D points
3D Set or Point: Select another set of straight segments joining 3D points or a single 3D point
Closest: Report the closest 3D distance between a set and a point or between two sets
Perpendicular: Report the shortest perpendicular 3D distance between a set and a point or between two sets, extended in the directions of the end segments.
Create Line in Layer: Create two points and a connecting set on a specified layer
OK: Report the distance to message scroll and create the points and set if specified.

The closest distance considers only the selected point and sets. The perpendicular distance also considers the extension of end segments beyond the end points. If both the new points are within the extents of the sets, the closest distance is also the perpendicular distance.

GC3DSETS is useful for determining whether points or sets meet minimum 3D distance requirements. See GCOFFELV or similar to define any parallel strings for pipes, trenches or shafts first. See GC75 to report instantaneous horizontal distances perpendicular to an alignment.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Reports\|More...\|Closest 3D distance	Geocomp Update or $200

GC3PTARC

Create a set consisting of two arcs connecting three points in order.

Replaces THREEPC which does not connect to the middle point. The difference is especially noticeable when all three points have elevations, the mid-point is lowest and you interpolate elevations along kerb sets using a command such as ARCBREAK or GC50.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison and point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z).

The standard report is in the format:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth

Compare points in two nominated layers using search ranges and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and point tolerances in plan and elevation.

The Basic report format is:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth DElev

Select "Create CSV file", to export the report as a .CSV file.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the elevations and differences and the easting and northing or the chainage and offset.

Settings include horizontal alignment, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and whether to report as comma separated values.

The Basic report format is:

Elev1, Elev2, DElev, Name1

The "Show Eastings/Northings" report format is:

Point number1, Easting1, Northing1, Elev1, DElev, Name1

The HAL report format is

Chainage, Offset, Elev1, Elev2, DElev, Name1

Report differences between pairs of points representing the design and as-built locations of piles.

Typically these points will both be on the top of the pile.

Design layer: Select a layer of design points for each pile.
AsBuilt Pts: Select as-built points for each pile.
Show Chn and Offset using Current RoadJob: Report chainage and offset from the main alignment for each point in both layers; otherwise report Easting and Northing.
Report vector: Include horizontal bearing and distance between each pair of points.
Headings: Enter text for report headings and footer.
Settings: Enter point comparison search ranges and tolerances, and whether to report to .CSV.
OK: For each point on the design layer, look for one as-built point within the search ranges and report the differences in coordinates or chainages and offsets between the design and as-built points.

TML date			Source
10/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC40RAKE

Report rakes between pairs of points on piles.

Within the search ranges of each design point, report the rake between a pair of as-built points near the bottom and top of the pile.

<if

The report shows, for each design point, the point number, easting, northing, elevation and point name, and for a corresponding pair of as-built points, the lower point number, the higher point number, the bearing from the lower to the higher and the rake expressed as a horizontal distance per metre of elevation difference.

Design:: Select a layer of design pile points
AsBuilt: Select a layer of as-built pile points
Headings: Enter text for report headings and footer
Settings: Enter point comparison search ranges and tolerances
OK: For each point on the design layer, report the rake between two nearby points on the as-built layer.
Cancel: Cancel the command

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC40TEXT

Label points in two layers with differences in easting, northing and elevation or offsets and elevation.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences.

The differences are of Eastings, Northings and Elevations, unless you select a HAL, in which case the differences are of Offsets and Elevations,

Settings include

Standard or Expanded report
Minimum distance for comparison
Point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z)
Number of decimal places for reports
Text style
Display text or vectors
Option to report 2D distance only
Option to show alignment direction

Each point is labelled with the Name, "East" Diff, "North" Diff and "Elev" Diff in a single multi-line text object. The "East", "North" and "Elev" titles are derived from View settings.

Points which are reported as "No match" become the current selection set so they can be readily selected by another command with right-mouse-button Previous.

Label a horizontal alignment where selected objects cross, or selected points are nearby, with concentric circles or vertical lines in the profile view and points in the plan view.

HAL:: Specify a horizontal alignment
Obstructions: Select points, sets or plines in the plan view that represent obstructions such as pipes or limits such as boundaries
Max Pts OS: Consider only points within this offset from the HAL
Obs Ht: Enter a height for the obstruction labels, such as the outside diameter of pipes
Obvert: Select Obvert to place the top of the circle at the elevation of the point or set
Invert: Select Invert to place the bottom of the circle at the elevation of the point or set
Add text: Also label the obtruction with elevation text
Add Plan Pts: Also create points at the obstructions in the Plan view on CLASH POINTS layer

Circles are displayed and plotted as ellipses if the vertical exaggeration is greater than 1.0.

Selected "obstructions" that have no elevations, such as lot boundaries and xlines, are indicated by tall vertical plines at 0.00 elevations or elevations derived from the HAL.

Report elevations of selected points minus the design elevation a roadway.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway designed by templates or a finish surface DTM.

Where the elevation difference cannot be determined, or the points are outside the default xline offsets, the points are marked with *.

The basic report shows the chainage, offset, elevation difference and point name.

The extended report shows the point number, chainage, offset, elevation, design elevation, elevation difference and point name.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Roads\|Reports\|Compare points	Geocomp Update or $200	429

GC42AB

Compare points from an as-built roadway survey with the roadway design.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway designed by templates or a finish surface DTM.

Nominate a roadway, horizontal offset, depth and whether to compare with the design pavement or batter.

The horizontal offset and depth are adjusted by values you enter.

Settings control tolerances, text, colours and reports.

The report headings show the roadway name and description and the desired depth of material (default = 0). The P3Pad reports also show desired tolerances above and below that depth.

The Pavement report shows point number, chainage, horizontal offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference (mm), High or Low, * if out of tolerance and point name. The pavement difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation measured vertically.

The Batter report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name, and prompts whether to include the horizontal offset to the batter. The batter difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured perpendicular to the design at depth.

List Coordinates to include easting and northing coordinates in the Pavement and Batter reports, where there is room in the P3Pad report. The .CSV always includes coordinates.

List Slopes report includes Des Slp (the instantaneous slope of the design surface), ASB Slp (the slope from the previous As-Built point at that chainage) and Diff Slp (the difference between the two slopes), at the location of each selected point.

CSV report reports to a .CSV file: Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, Design Ht, Survey Ht, Diff (mm) and Pt Name.

The end of each report shows the number of points, mean of differences, mean of positive differences, mean of negative differences and standard deviation.

In Settings, specify Band Width, High Tolerance, Low Tolerance and Slope Tolerance.

If the Band width is positive, the results are sorted by offset within chainage bands. If zero or negative, they are sorted by chainage only. If *, they are not sorted.

By default, the difference is checked for tolerance before rounding to the nearest mm for the report. Points between 0.5mm out of tolerance and 0.5mm in tolerance have the same reported difference as the tolerance.

To check for tolerance only after rounding to the mm, so that points up to 0.5mm out of tolerance are shown as in tolerance and match the rounded differences, use PROJECTV to define project variable GC42AB:ROUNDTOL.

Optionally, change the point name to include the difference.

Optionally, Create Difference Text, with specified layer, style and bearing and units (m or mm).

Specify new colours for points in fill, in cut and within tolerance.

Where the point is outside the extents of the roadway, the elevations and differences are marked with *.

For a point to be within the roadway, it must be within all of these extents:

The whole main horizontal alignment
Any road design template specified in TEMPLATE Manager,
Any Finish Surface specified in SURFACE Manager,
Any existing surface specified in SURFACE Manager, and
The default left and right xline extents specified in XLINE.

To check whether a point is within the roadway, use ROADSPOT.

If the default extents set by XLINE are less than 100m, GC42AB prompts to increase the extent to 1000m.

Only points that you select are considered! Xlines are not considered!

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Roads\|Reports\|Compare as-built	Geocomp Update or $200	435

GC42ABS

Selects points within tolerance of roadway for use in another command.

Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

Once you have selected the points, run the next command that Use Previous to reselect the points in another command.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC42DTM

Compares DTM points, triangle centroids and link midpoints to a roadway.

Nominate roadway, DTM layer, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

Where the elevation difference cannot be determined, or the points are outside the default xline offsets, the points are marked with *.

See also DESIGNELEV, GC42, GC42AB and XLINES.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Roads\|Reports\|Compare DTM	Geocomp Update or $200

GC42HAL

Compare as-built points with the horizontal alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC42KB

Compare surveyed points with a design set, such as a kerb, to report whether offsets are within tolerance.

CL HAL

Select a HAL for centreline chainages and offsets. To compute chainages and offsets from the design set, select the same set for CL and design.

Design set

Select a design set, such as a lip or back of kerb.

Offset

Add a horizontal offset to design set.

Depth

Enter a depth offset to design set.

Inside

Consider points to the left of the design set to be Inside. Consider points to the right Outside.

Outside

Consider points to the left of the design set to be Outside. Consider points to the right Inside.

As Built Points

Select surveyed points to compare with the design set.

Settings

Inside Tol | Outside Tol: Select maximum horizontal tolerance Inside or Outside of design set (in mm).
RL High Tol | RL Low Tol: Select maximum vertical tolerance Low or High from design set (in mm).
Limit points by chainage range: Report only points within a specified chainage range.

OK

Report to P3Pad.

Report properties and computed values for each selected As-Built point.

Point Number: Point number.
Chainage: Distance in m along CL HAL.
C/L Offset
: Horizontal offset in m from CL.
As Built Offset: Horizontal offset in m to CL minus offset in m from design set to CL.
Diff Offset: Horizontal offset in mm from design set (adjusted by entered Offset in m).
* In: Diff Offset is out of tolerance Inside of design set.
* Out: Diff Offset is out of tolerance Outside design set.
Diff Height: Difference in elevation in mm from design set (adjusted by entered Depth in m).
# Low: Diff Height is out of tolerance below design set.
# High: Diff Height is out of tolerance above design set.
Easting: Easting.
Northing: Northing.
Height: Elevation.
Design Height: Elevation of design set where point is perpendicular.
Name: Point name.

Negative offsets are to the left. Chainages and CL offsets are computed along the CL. As Built offsets and design height where the point is perpendicular to the set.

Offsets are reported in project units to the number of decimal places in UNITSSET Precision for Distances. Offset differences are reported in mm to one decimal place.

Use SHOWDIRN to show the direction and reverse if needed.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC42VAL

Compare as-built points with the vertical alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC43

Estimate approximate areas quickly.

This report is presented in chainage ranges. The length of shape is reported for each chainage.

Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $275

GC44

Sum the areas of triangles with centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offsets, slope and cut or fill limits.

By using centroids, and not precisely clipping triangles, this command is ideal for fast estimation of pavement areas and batter areas on large jobs.

Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
Select only triangles with centroids within specified
- slope direction
- cut or fill condition
- chainages
- boundaries
- offsets
and exclude those within
- dead regions
- plines in a layer list
Create points in the current layer at matching centroids.
Enter a report heading.
Report horizontal or surface areas.
Report within Slope ranges.

Slope ranges are derived from [SlopeTable] Section of TMODWIN.INI. For example:

[SlopeTable]
TableSize=3
0=200.0
1=100.0
2=50.0

See EDITINI to import a slope table.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages to a comma-separated (.CSV) file.

Sum the areas of triangles with centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offsets, slope and cut or fill limits.

By using centroids, and not precisely clipping triangles, this command is ideal for fast estimation of areas on large jobs.

Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
Select only triangles with centroids within specified
- slope direction
- Slope ranges
- cut or fill condition
- chainages
- boundaries
- offsets
and exclude those within
- dead regions
- plines in a layer list
Create points in the current layer at matching centroids.
Enter a report heading.
Report horizontal or surface areas.
Report within Slope ranges.

Slope ranges are derived from [SlopeTable] Section of TMODWIN.INI. For example:

[SlopeTable]
TableSize=3
0=200.0
1=100.0
2=50.0

See EDITINI to import a slope table.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $275	117

GC44S

Sum the areas of triangles with centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offset and surface material limits.

Using centroids to select whole triangles means fast estimation of areas on large jobs at the expense of overestimation or underestimation. Any triangle that overlaps the specified limits is wholly included if the centroid is inside and wholly excluded if the centroid is outside.

Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
Select only triangles with centroids within specified
- surface material
- chainages
- boundaries
- offsets
and exclude those within
- dead regions
- plines in a layer list
Create points in the current layer at matching centroids
Enter a report heading.
Report surface or horizontal areas

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $275

GC44SA

Sum the areas of triangles with centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offset and surface material limits.

Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
Select only triangles with centroids within specified
- surface materials
- chainages
- boundaries
- offsets
and exclude those within
- dead regions
- plines in a layer list
Create points in the current layer at matching centroids
Enter a report heading.
Report surface or horizontal areas

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date			Source
02/12/22			Geocomp Update or $275

GC45

Create points along a pline or set a nominated interval.

In the profile view, the distances are measured along on the pline.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Point\|Along HAL	Geocomp Update or $250	28

GC46

Compute excavation volumes in pits, mines and quarries, where there are large numbers of layers of material. Triangles are used which are more accurate than grids.

Set up the surfaces using Surface Manager (SURFACE). The Finish Surface, which represents the design limit of excavation, needs to cover the extent of the other surfaces. Select multiple boundaries in plan (="blocks"), an elevation range, and a report style. If a .CSV report style is selected, the resulting comma-separated variable (.CSV) file can be imported into a spreadsheet application for further computation.

If a depth surface is nominated an elevation surface is created then deleted.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	247

GC47

Create profiles to guide you when drafting road resheet design profiles.

Compare selected points against the centreline and templates in a roadjob to create a proposed profile which maintains the nominated minimum cover, and two other profiles which allow for variations in crossfall.

For example:

Create a roadjob with templates, a horizontal alignment and a vertical alignment.
Run GC47
Select the roadjob
Select points on the existing road surface under the proposed road pavement
Enter a desired minimum depth of cover (e.g. 0.2)
Enter Min% and Max% for the crossfalls
Click OK.
At the chainage of each selected point, GC47 creates a vertex in a profile pline with design elevation = point elevation + (crossfall x offset) + minimum cover
The values are also reported to P3Pad
Re-run GC47 with non-zero tolerance values for Min% and Max% to create two additional profiles
Use these three profiles as guides when you create your final design profile

If your design profile remains below all three profiles then the minimum cover will be satisfied at the selected existing surface points.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	118

GC48

Select a roadway, chainage range and interval, and selected shapes.

The created profiles are ideal for checking grades on kerblines, edge of pavement, and so on.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	253,450

GC49

Create a point on the line between two points, at a location such that the new point has the specified elevation.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Point\|On line at elevation	Geocomp Update or $250	260

GC50

Interpolate or extrapolate elevations onto 2D points from elevations of 3D points in the same set.

See also INT3DSET, INTERP3D, GCCONCHK, GCRIVER and GCNOELEV.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|Elevation\|From points in sets	Geocomp Update or $250	185

GC51

Design vertical alignments in intersections. A limit of nine alignments allows for four kerb returns, four splitter islands and a roundabout.

This simplifies a process which would otherwise require repeated use of commands for profile editing, creating 3D points (3D), DTM creation, and so on.

Before running this function, design the intersection in 2D and tile plan and profile views so the updated intersection contours can be seen as the vertical profiles are edited.

To use this function:

Select Settings to nominate up to nine HAL/VAL pairs.
Select Recompute to create 3D points along the alignments (on the nominated layer using the 3D settings), regenerate a DTM of the intersection and show updated quick contours.
Selecting the radio button for a pair, makes that alignment active, highlights the alignment and its direction in the plan view, and fits the profile view showing only referenced profiles.
To edit profiles, make the desired alignment active with the radio button, exit the Settings dialog, pick the design profile then locate the point in the profile to edit.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Cogo\|Streets\|Intersection design	Geocomp Update or $200	492+77+254

GC52

Change the group number of selected objects.

See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and SETGRP which sets to the next group.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|Group	Geocomp Update or $250	40

GC53

Modify, list or highlight and select the contourablity of selected points.

To be included in a DTM, a point must have 3D coordinates, be on the DTM layer and be contourable. GC53 lists, displays or modifies the contourability.

Points:: Select those points to be considered
Contourable | Non-Contourable: List, select or make Contourable or Non-Contourable
Re-Form DTMs: Reform all DTMs afterwards
List: Of the selected points, list those points that are Contourable or those that are Non-Contourable
Highlight and Select: Of the selected points, highlight with temporary circles those that are Contourable, or those that are Non-Contourable, and make those selectable by Previous in subsequent commands
Include Points into DTM: Make all selected points Contourable
Exclude Points from DTM: Make all selected points Non-Contourable
Cancel: Cancel the command

Transform to elevations relative to an ellipsoid to elevations relative to a geoid using differences interpolated from a layer of N-values.

For example, to transform elevations of MGA points from ellipsoidal heights to elevations relative to Australian Height Datum (AHD) using differences from AUSGeoid09:

Use AUSGEOID create a .TMX of AUSGeoid09 N-values on a grid of coordinates transformed to an MGA94 zone.
Use TMXIN to import the N-values.
Use GC54 to select a layer of "Ellipse height points" and subtract N-values interpolated from the "N-Geoid heights" layer to derive elevations on AHD.

If transforming elevations from AHD to AUSGeoid, GCCOPY the N-values to a new layer with a suitable name and then SCALEELV to multiply the Z values by -1.

For more information and more files of N-values, see Geoscience Australia.

The same method can be used for Geoid-Spheroid differences.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC55

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades along perpendicular bisectors.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between the 3D sets, along the perpendicular bisector.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

If one of the sets is a DTM edge, and the other draped onto the DTM parallel to and inside the edge, GC55 can be used to extend a DTM outwards at approximately the same grade.

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades perpendicular to HAL.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between 3D sets, perpendicular to the selected HAL.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

Swap either X with Y, X with Z or Y with Z.

Alternatively, mirror around X or Y axes.

Adjust for coordinates the wrong way around, contour walls using terrestrial photogrammetry, move or rotate structures in 3D, etc.

Handles points, plines, blocks and text.

Functions that might be useful in conjunction include SCALE, GCSCALE, MIRROR, MIRRORDY, GC07 and GC38.

See also ROT3D, GC3DROT, BGELEV and FLIPUP.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Modify\|Transform\|Swap X Y Z	Geocomp Update or $250

GC57

Create 3D points on the current layer in Plan view corresponding to selected objects in the XSect view, relative to the active alignment.

The selected objects may include points.

Include all surfaces, or the lowest.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	157

GC58

Compare objects in a layer or layer list and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use GC58 to remove redundant objects, for example objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to check for duplicate points first with GC92 or remove them with GC31 or DTM formation.

Duplicate sets join identical point numbers in the same or reversed order.

Duplicate plines have the same (or reversed) vertex coordinates, elevation, colour and spline type.

Duplicate text has the same insertion point coordinates (within a tolerance), characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

Compares objects in the current view only. To compare objects in all views, close all views first.

See also DUPLTRIS to remove duplicate triangle sides and GC58S to remove duplicates from selected objects.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Edit\|More...\|Duplicate sets and plines	Geocomp Update or $250	154

GC58S

Compare selected objects (on any layers) and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use GC58S to remove redundant objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to remove duplicate points first. See GC31 and GC92.

Duplicate sets must join identical point numbers and have identical layer names but can be reversed.

Duplicate plines must have all identical layer names, vertices, elevation, colour, spline type, etc. but can be reversed.

Duplicate text must have the same layer name, insertion point coordinates, characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

See also GC58 which selects by layer or layer list.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	154

GC59

Read a Geodimeter job file from an as-built survey, compare with a HAL and report. The job file must include the setout points and the corresponding picked-up points.

The report includes Design Chainage, Design Offset, Design Elevation, Setout Chainage, Setout Offset, Setout Elevation, Chainage Difference, Offset Difference and Elevation Difference.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC60

Report bearings and distances from instrument stations to setout points.

Use this report in the field to set out points by theodolite or level, where you do not have the ability to upload the station and setout points into a total station.

Inst Stn layer: Select a layer of instrument station points.
Setout Pts: Select points to be set out.
Max radial distance: Specify a limiting radial distance.
Horz Dist: Report horizontal distances.
Slope Dist: Report slope distances.
Round bearings: Round bearings.
OK: From each instrument station, to each selected point, report the instrument point, setout point, bearing, horizontal distance, elevation difference and name.
Cancel: Cancel creating the report.

Nominate two points or a set segment, and a horizontal or slope distance along the line from the first point to the second point.

Once the first point is created, the default distance is the last distance entered. The message scroll keeps track of the total distance entered.

Choose whether to measure the distance from previous point or the first point.

To extrapolate, enter a negative distance or a total distance greater than the distance between the points.

If the points have elevations, the new elevation is interpolated.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Point\|On line at distance	Geocomp Update or $250	28

GC63

Intersect a batter defined by two sets with a DTM at each Xline.

HAL: Select the horizontal alignment
DTM: Select the DTM.
Batter 1 | Batter 2: Select two batter set segments that join 3D points.
Ver Off: Enter any vertical offset or perpendicular offset (+ve for up, -ve for down).
Name: Enter any name for the created points and set.
Vertical | Perpendicular to batter: Specify whether any vertical offset is vertical or perpendicular to the batter.
OK: For each Xline, extend the grade between the two sets to intersect the DTM, create points, and join the points with a set.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC64

Create points on the slope between two sets where it meets the slope between another two sets.

The created points are placed at each xline of the selected HAL. The xline must extend past the intersection. The points are then joined to create a set at the intersection of the two slopes.

One pair of sets is the "design" and the other is the "batter".

For example, the "design" sets may be on the bottom of subgrade and the "batter" sets may be on a batter. Use this to find the low point of a median strip with the "design" being the right batter of a left carriageway and the "batter" being the left batter of a right carriageway.

Vertical or perpendicular offsets (negative for down) can be applied to both slopes.

Correct the TSP, macro, menu and callout folders in a TMODWIN.INI file copied from another computer to suit the current version of Windows 64-bit or 32-bit Windows and add C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP).

Terramodel is installed into C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\ on 32-bit computers and C:\Program files\Trimble\Terramodel\ on 64-bit computers. The TMODWIN.INI file contains user-interface settings. If you copy sections from a TMODWIN.INI from a computer with 32-bit Windows into one with 64-bit Windows, or vice versa, the path for the macro, menu and loaded callout styles will be incorrect. This can result in user-interface problems like grey buttons on the toolbar, changed menus and "GC*" commands not being found.

Use EDITINI to import sections from TMODWIN.INI files into the current TMODWIN.INI.

HAL:: Select the horizontal alignment
VAL:: To enter differences in elevation, select the vertical alignment. To enter absolute elevations, leave blank.
Ch: (or Sta: or KP:): Enter the distance along the HAL (chainage or station)
Off:: Enter the horizontal offset. Enter 0.00 to create the point on the HAL.
Elev:: Enter the elevation. For no elevation, leave blank.
Diff Elev:: Enter the difference in elevation to the selected VAL.
Grp:: Enter a group, or leave blank for group 0.; Enter the point name, or leave blank.

The dialog uses the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP) as configured by STAORCHN. These are configured in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI for the computer and are independant of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value.

Create points relative to a selected HAL from values in a CSV with each line containing chainage, offset, elevation, name or point number.

The distance along the alignment is imported from the first field. This can be a distance along the HAL (2D) or along the VAL (3D).

The horizontal offset is imported from the second field. If the second field is empty, the offset is 0.000.

The elevation, elevation difference or perpendicular distance from the VAL is imported from the third field. If the third field is empty, the new point has no elevation.

The point name is imported from the fourth field. If the fourth field is empty, the point name is blank.

The point number is imported from the fifth field. If the fifth field is empty or the point number is duplicated, the number of the new point is the next integer point number.

HAL:: Select a horizontal alignment.
2D: Import the chainage along the HAL.
3D: Import the 3D distance along any selected VAL.
Extend HAL: Extrapolate beyond the extents of the HAL.
VAL:: To import differences in elevation, select the vertical alignment. To import absolute elevations, leave blank.
Vertical: Import differences in elevation and add the elevation of the VAL.
Perp to Val: Import a distance and create the new point at that perpendicular distance from the VAL.
Create set: Join the imported points with a set.
Import Sta (or Chn) [Offset, Elev] from file.: Import station | chainage, and any offset and elevation, from the file.
Close: Close the command.

The dialog uses the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP). These labels are configured by STAORCHN and stored in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI and are thus dependant on the computer and independant of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value in some commands. Station values can include + characters.

Create points relative to a selected HAL from values in a CSV with each line containing chainage, offset, elevation, name or point number.

Refer to the fields for GC65FILE .

HAL:: Select a horizontal alignment.
2D: Import the chainage along the HAL.
Tilt: Import the 3D distance along any selected VAL and compute true 3D offsets perpendicular to the VAL.
Extend HAL: Extrapolate beyond the extents of the HAL.
VAL:: To import differences in elevation, select the vertical alignment. To import absolute elevations, leave blank.
Create set: Join the imported points with a set.
Import Sta (or Chn) [Offset, Elev] from file.: Import station | chainage, and any offset and elevation, from the file.
Close: Close the command.

Create breaklines along DTM triangle sides at Changes of Grade (where both triangles slope the same way and the difference in grade is greater than a specified value), Valleys (where both triangles slope up) or Ridges (where both triangles slope down).

Gc66 is useful for interpreting and refining DTMs made up from point data.

The breaklines are created in the nominated colour on the DTM layer.

You have the option of ignoring existing breaklines or creating new breaklines only where there isn't already a breakline.

For each Xline in turn, find the chainage where the xline crosses the HAL, then find all points within both the specified "Chainage tolerance" distance value and the extent of the Xline, then move each point to the chainage of the Xline while maintaining the offset from the hal.

If the Xlines are perpendicular to the hal, and the chainage tolerance is less than half the spacing between the Xlines, this has the same effect as moving points onto the nearest Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, the 3D points within the Ch Tol. are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. Cross sections are not sorted on offset.

GC67 is useful when working with surveyed cross section point data.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	66

GC67A

For each Xline in turn, find all points within the specified "Sect Tol." distance perpendicular to the xline then move each point to the nearest location on the Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, 3D points within the Sect Tol. of the chainage where the Xline crosses the alignment are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. The cross sections are not sorted on offset and do not follow skewed cross sections.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC682SET

Add points into one or two sets, to achieve a minimum number of segments and connect with breaklines.

For each selected set, insert new points where the segment length is greater than the set length divided by the minimum number of segments.

If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations are interpolated onto the new points.

"Connect Pts" to create breaklines linking pairs of new points in the new sets.

Enter any name for the new points.

Use GC682SET to create extra breaklines for a smooth transition surface between sets or to divide a set into a fixed number of segments.

2D points are often stored in .DWG and .DXF files as 3D points with elevations equal to zero. Because these elevations are retained when imported into Terramodel, they interfere with DTM formation.

Be careful, as there are cases where zero elevations are correct, especially on arbitrary datums or near coastlines.

See also GCNOELEV to select all 2D points, GC53 to retain elevations but exclude them from DTMs and ELEVATION or GCELEV to modify elevations.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|Elevation\|0.00 to *	Geocomp Update or $250	333

GC70

Compares the elevation of each point with the elevation interpolated from the DTM layer and changes the elevation. The options are: DTM, DTM - Z, DTM + Z, Z - DTM, -Z - DTM, DTM * Z and DTM / Z.

For example, use this to convert drill hole depths to absolute elevations.

Select "* Outside DTM" to remove the elevations of points outside the extent of the DTM or not, to leave the elevations of those points unchanged.

See also DTMPTS which modifies the elevations of 2D points only.

Create parallel plines on either side of each selected pline or set, close the ends then solid hatch each closed pline.

Parallel lines are offset by half the nominated width in plan units. The pline and hatch are created in the specified layer. To create dashed solid lines, specify a gap and length.

One application is to show line marking.

The hatch is SOLID pattern with spacing = 1. Chose a suitable hatch scale so that you appear to have solid thick lines, independent of view scale and smooth around bends without using a complex linetype.

The line will be plotted wider on paper by the width of the pen assigned to its colour, so use a thin pen.

If the plines to be selected include splines, despline or FILTER a copy first.

GC71 can also be used to create boundaries of corridors that follow alignments for use with volumes and dynaimages.

Compute the vertical angle from selected points to visible sky at a nominated bearing interval.

Loc:

Select a location.

DTM

Select the DTM layer for the existing surface including obstructions such as buildings and terrain.

Ant Ht

Enter the antenna height.

OK

Report the Easting, Northing, and elevation interpolated from the DTM, the Antenna height and, at 5 degree intervals, the lowest angle from the horizon unobstructed by the DTM at that bearing.

Enter these values into GPS satellite visibility software.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC73

Interpolate elevations from a vertical alignment onto points.

Points: Select points.
HAL: Select the horizontal alignment.
VAL: Select the vertical alignment.
Offset from VAL: Enter an offset from the vertical alignment. The initial default offset is 0.000.
Vertical | Perp to VAL: Specify whether the direction of the offset is vertical or perpendicular to the VAL.
OK: For each selected point, find the chainage | station along a HAL, interpolate the elevation from a VAL at that chainage | station, apply any offset, and then modify the elevation.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
23/03/23		Modify\|Elevation\|From VAL	Geocomp Update or $250	77

GC74

Select the same start stations | chainages for multiple HALs.

Display the chainage, horizontal difference, vertical difference and grade between the sets or plines, perpendicular to the selected HAL, in the message scroll area.

The HAL may be one of the sets or plines.

Report on a survey in Geodimeter .JOB file format.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC77

Modify elevations of selected text objects to the elevations of their subject points.

Text objects are created with no elevation by default. If the text is created by labelling 3D points with text (LABPT), and then exported to .DWG or .DXF (EXPORT), objects with no elevation will be assigned elevations of 0.00. In a rotated or perspective view, the text and points will appear to be separated because the elevations of the points are (usually) not 0.00.

Use GC77 to modify the elevations of the text. Then, when you export those points and text to CAD, the points and text will always appear next to points.

See also SYM2BLK which replaces symbols (that display with symbol font) with similar blocks that have the elevations of the points.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|Elevation\|From subject	Geocomp Update or $250	92

GC79

Remove blanks or force alphabetic characters to upper case.

Points are not renumbered if the point number is already in use.

If the names are alphanumeric, use System Configuration (SYSTEM) to set Max Alpha Points high enough.

Report the area of each selected set, and compare the area of the largest set against the sum of all the others.

In a subdivision, the area of the external boundary should equal the sum of the areas of all the other lots, including roads and reserves. If the difference is the size of a lot, look for omitted or duplicated lots of that size. If the difference is smaller, look for incorrectly drawn lots.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	75

GC81

Report coordinates and curves along an alignment.

Report curve details and coordinates along a selected alignment at a nominated interval.

The curve summary lists the hal record, radius, tangent length, arc length, deflection angle and coordinates of the intersection point, start, centre and end.

At the nominated interval, report the chainage, bearing, easting and northing.

The coordinates of the start and end chainage are also listed.

See also HAL and Alignment reports (REPORTS).

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC82

Report the planimetric and surface of a DTM within boundaries or slope ranges.

The planimetric, or horizontal, areas are the areas as measured from a plan. The surface area is larger because it takes into account the slopes. The areas could be from any DTM including lot areas, pavement areas or batter areas.

DTM:: Select a DTM from the list.
Bdys:: Select no boundary for the whole DTM or select boundaries to limit areas.
Exclude dead regions: Subtract areas of any dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH.
Report of Slope Ranges: Include areas and percentages of defined slope ranges in the report.

The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH.

The slope ranges are defined by decreasing percentage slope in the [SlopeTable] section of TMODWIN.INI. Use EDITINI to import a new SlopeTable.

Select objects with length less than or greater than a nominated Max Length, from selected sets, plines and text.

Objects equal to the length are also selected.

The selected objects can then be selected by the next command using Right-mouse-button Previous.

For example, to delete all short plines less than or equal to 10.0m, first use GC83 to select objects less than or equal to 10.0m long from within a selection of objects of Type Pline. Then DELETE the selected objects using Right-mouse-button and Previous.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GC84

Join multiple consecutive plines or sets where the locations of the ends match.

Move points, blocks or text towards or away from an alignment or point by a nominated amount.

If the entered offset is positive, selected objects will be moved away from the alignment or point. If negative, towards. Points closer to the alignment than the negative offset will be moved across the alignment. Points exactly on the alignment, will be moved slightly to the right of the alignment.

Points, Text or Blocks: Select points, text or blocks to be moved.
HAL or Point: Select a set or pline for a horizontal alignment or a reference point.
Offset Distance: Enter a horizontal offset distance.

Use GC86 to move part of a vertical wall by at least 2mm so the DTM forms correctly. See also GC92.

Use GC86 to offset HAL-point labels created by LABELHAL.

Use GC86 to offset a set without copying, by selecting the points by Ofline and the HAL by the set.

Use GC86 to adjust a distance by a prism constant which can't be adjusted in the instrument or in RDE.

To move points exactly onto the alignment, use GC36 instead.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC87

Select and existing surface DTM layer, a depth layer and the DTM layer for the new elevations.

Create points on a new DTM at a specified 3D distance perpendicular to points on a selected DTM.

The directions and distance are perpendicular to the mean of the slopes of the triangles on each point.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC90

Create a new point on a DTM layer with elevation extrapolated along the slope of the closest DTM triangle.

Create points on one or more DTM layers at a nominated distance along the perpendicular bisectors from each point on the edge of the DTM.

The shortest horizontal distance from the new point to the existing DTM will be no more than the nominated distance.

The elevation on the new point is the average of the elevations extrapolated along the slopes of the two triangles adjacent to the DTM edge point.

The new points are assigned the name "Extend Bdy".

Select "Create Bdy" to create a new DTM edge.

If the new point would fall inside the old DTM, it is not created.

For all selected points, report which points are within 0.001 ground units in horizontal distance and have elevations, with the option to move those points apart.

Use GC92 on models immediately after importing from DWG, DXF, GENIO or 12DA files, and before forming any DTM.

As Terramodel forms any DTM, wherever there is more than one point with a horizontal proximity of approximately 0.001 ground units (1.0 mm or 0.012 inches), one of those points is left on the DTM layer and the duplicate points are relayered to layer 0.

If the layer contains vertical walls or string lines that should really be on separate layers, such as top and bottom of kerb, or "triangles" created in an application with a proximity tolerance tighter than 0.001, you may not get the desired or expected surface when you form a DTM. For this reason, anytime you import data that you intend to contour, from files such as DWG, GENIO or 12DA, you should run GC92 to report the duplicate points with height differences before running any command that forms a DTM (such as CONTOUR, QPROFILE or 3DVISUALISER). If you notice problems in your contours before running GC92, delete the data, reimport and run GC92 immediately.

The report shows the point numbers, names and layers for selected points which are both at the same horizontal location and have elevations.

To see only elevation differences which might affect DTM formation, don't report points with the same height but do only check points in same layer.

Points which are on other layers, have no elevation difference or are not contourable will not affect the DTM. Where the report shows points which will affect the DTM significantly, if possible, use other commands to separate the points by properties such as colour, elevation, "of line" or name, or move, delete, relayer or change elevations before forming a DTM.

Reported duplicate points can be selected by right-mouse-button Previous in subsequent commands.

Use GC92 to move duplicate points apart. Where the horizontal distance to a second point is less than 0.0011, the second point is moved in that direction to 0.0011. This has the effect of moving points apart. This is especially helpful in a DTM with near vertical walls imported from an application with tighter tolerances.

If you Move and select Repeat, the whole selection set is checked again and remaining duplicates are moved in a different direction this time.

Optionally, restrict the movement to only along sets such as kerbs.

Polylines, and similar .DWG and .DXF data that have varying elevations, import as points and sets; polylines with single elevations import as plines. This means that cadastral boundaries and extracted contours become plines, as intended. So do design contours, tops of levees, flat pads and flat spots which you might want to include in as breaklines in triangulated networks. GC92 reports any plines on the same layer as 3D points, to warn you to GCCONVRT them to sets. If polylines on a constant non-zero grade import as plines, install Geocomp Update 10.61K or later.

For all selected points, mirror or rotate point labels.

The text bearing can be set to any increment of 22.5°.

The bearing is reset to horizontal if the label style is replaced. For example, create point number labels with F7. Rotate with GC93. F7 to retain rotated bearings when toggled on or off. Add elevations with F9 by replacing the label style. This also resets the bearing.

The text on the mirrored point remains legible from the bottom right of display.

Report crossfall at xlines between two selected 3D sets.

The standard report includes the chainage, offset and elevation of both sets and the slope between them. Select "Report Slope Only" for just chainage and slope.

Select "Show Ht Diff" to add the Ht Diff and the Eastings and Northings of the points on the first set.

Select "Create point" to create points on the current layer at each intersection of the xlines and the sets.

For selected sets, remove each segment that exceeds a specified maximum segment length.

Break and change the colour of the long segments, or simply delete them.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GC96

Select points above one DTM and below another, within the extent of both DTMs.

Select only one DTM layer, to select points above or below that layer.

For each point in the new selection set, modify the colour, modify the group to the next group number and report the point number, easting, northing, elevation and interpolated elevations.

The points can then be selected in any other command using right-mouse-button Previous.

Create sets parallel to the main alignment of a selected roadjob joining points at offsets along each xline within a chainage range. Any horizontal or vertical alignment offsets defined in the alignment managers are applied first.

In Settings, specify up to nine offset strings on each side. For each string, specify the horizontal and vertical offset, name and colour.

If the road job has a VAL, you have the option to add heights from the VAL.

On each side, rotate the strings about the HAL and VAL by specifying a slope alignment.

The templates can be saved as project variables, or to a template .TEM file.

See also GCHALOFF, SIDESLOPE, 3D, GC28, LAYOUT and MULTIOFF.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Cogo\|Streets\|Parallel sets	Geocomp Update or $200	71

GCACTIVE

List registered alignments with the registered HAL number, registered alignment name, record number, number of any alignment offsets and record name.

Highlight an alignment. The initially highlighted alignment is the active alignment in the current roadjob.

Restrict to only Hals in Road jobs: Only list HALs in roadjobs with registered HAL number, registered alignment name, record number, number of any alignment offsets, road job name and record name. The current road job is marked with a *.
Pick HAL: Select a HAL by mouse, and highlight if registered.
Set current road job: Set the highlighted HAL to the active alignment and its roadjob to the current road job.
Set active alignment: Set the highlighted HAL to be the active alignment.
Re_Reference Xlines: Modify the reference of all Xlines to the highlighted HAL.
Set roadjob visible layers.: Make visible only layers with names matching the roadjob name.
ReForm Design DTM + ArcBl: Add chords using ARCBL along sets in the Finish Surface DTM in Surface Manager (SURFACE) and refresh the DTM.
Clear active alignment: Clear the active alignment.
Exit: Close the command.

GCADDBLK

Display a selected block at the cursor scaled by 1, 2 or three points and insert at a location with the option to interpolate an elevation from a DTM.

UNITBLK command
Settings
Enter or select the name of a block in the project or browse to select an external .BLK file
Choose how to locate and scale the block by 1, 2 or 3 locations
OK
Select 1, 2 or 3 locations using the mouse
Select more locations to insert same block again
Close when finished

Pt.1:: Locate the insertion point and change the cursor to display the selected block in the cursor colour.
Pt. 2:: Specify an optional second location.
Pt. 3:: Specify an optional third location.
Settings: Specify the block, scaling, rotation and colour.
Close: Close the command without inserting any more blocks.

The scale factors determine the dimensions of the inserted block along its axes.

Unequal scale factors distort the block, for example stretching a pit or gate.

If the block is a unit block, that is the block has been created with the distance along an axis = 1.0, the dimension of the inserted block along that axis is equal to the scale factor. For example, if you create a block from some objects making up a "tree canopy" one unit in diameter, and scale X and Y by 3.50 when you insert into the plan view, the inserted tree block will be 3.50m in diameter. If your block is defined with a radius of one unit, such as "circle radius" block, the inserted block will have a radius of one unit multiplied by the specified scale.

Change the name of selected objects to the first four characters of the layer name followed by the original object name.

Adjust points that have been computed at a fixed height vertically below a target or receiver on a pole, when the pole was actually perpendicular to the surface.

Use GCADJANT to correct points collected by a GPS mounted on a vehicle when the height of the antenna above the surface was not allowed for during GPS installation.

For each point, the true antenna location is determined at the antenna height above the point. By projecting the antenna length from the true antenna location in a direction normal to the average slope of triangles touching the point, a new point is created uphill from the first point, optionally on a new layer.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or POA

GCADJDES

Adjust the elevations of selected survey or design points, by the difference in vertical or slope alignments.

GCCOPY the points to be modified (so you keep the originals) and relayer any points on a different layer to selected sets.
Register the main horizontal alignment with HALMANAGER.
Register the old vertical alignment with VALMANAGER.
Create a ROADJOB with those registered alignments.

Register a new vertical alignment with VALMANAGER by a pline in the Profile view. The new vertical alignment could use a new pline or the old pline with new vertical offsets.
In GCADJDES, select the road, the new VAL and the points to be adjusted.
Click "Modify Pt Hts" to adjust the elevation of the points by adding the difference in elevation between the new VAL and the old VAL.

Register a new "difference" slope alignment with SLOPEMANAGER by a pline in the Super view, or by slope offsets to another slope alignment.
In GCADJDES, select the road, the new slope alignment and the points to be adjusted.
Click "Modify Pt Hts" to adjust the elevation of the points by adding the slope of the slope alignment to the computed slope from the roadjob HAL/VAL.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCALONG

Modify the orientation of a text object to an alignment.

Turn off Auto Flip to orient the text to Along (in the direction of) the set or pline. Turn on Auto Flip to orient to "Along Flipped" (rotated 180 degrees).

To move the text, select two locations. Otherwise leave the locations blank.

The orientation is modified from Rigid, Fixed, Legible, Along or Along Flipped. The text is referred to the selected set or pline.

Any background to the text that was created by TEXTBACK is recreated.

Text with Along Flipped orientation has a text border that is offset. This is only apparent when the text border is on. TEXTBACK removes this offset by modifying Along and Along Flipped orientation to Rigid and rotating the text.

Report the angle-right given locations for backsight, instrument and foresight.

Optionally, label the angle with default text style.

Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Centre, End" or "3 Point".

ARC defaults to the last Type used.

Similar to ARC, which only creates a pline.

The direction of the arc is from the first point to the last point.

If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.

The chords can be turned off.

The selected tolerance and whether on or off become the defaults for this project.

The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.

Any objects named SETARCBL are deleted, then the new points and sets are named SETARCBL, and given the current colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.

The cut and fill slope values of the chords match the values of the arcs. If slope values have not been edited, the current default slopes from DESIGNSET are used as normal.

See also ARCBREAK which replaces the old arcs, ARCBL which does not allow for chords to be turned off, GCDTMALL which is equivalent to GCARCBL followed by DTMALL, and BLFILTER which filters out excess breakline points.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCAREAS

Report areas, lengths and volumes for closed plines by layer list.

Regions:: Select a layer for region boundaries.
Closed Plines (Layer List): Select a layer list.
Lengths: Report names and lengths of plines.
Areas: Report names and areas of plines.
Volumes: Report names and volumes of plines. The volume is the pline area multiplied by the elevation of the pline which represents a thickness.
Min Value:: Enter a minimum value to be included in reports.
OK: Report to P3Pad, for each region boundary, within zones defined by layers in the layer list, the names, and lengths, areas or volumes, of each closed pline that exceeds the minimum value, and also prompt for and report to a .CSV file listing the totals for each region and zone.
Cancel: Close the command without reporting.

Select text records that contain Extended Attribute Text with Bad Record codes and optionally delete them.

Bad records are displayed when an EAT code in a text object refers to an object that no longer exists.

Selected records can be used in other commands as the Previous selection.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCBENCH

Create a bench string beside an existing set.

Select a set, a chainage range and slopes to project up or down. Click Next to specify whether to terminate at a DTM, a datum or a horizontal and vertical offset. Click Next again to specify left or right, layer, Interval or corner tidying.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCBLKFIX

Recreate selected blocks with specified colour and exploded hatching.

When you manually create, import or export blocks, objects in blocks retain the original colours and layers. GCBLKFIX allows you to modify all the colours inside selected blocks to any single colour (such as ByLayer), and all their layers to 0, without having redefine or redraft the blocks. This gives you control over the block object colours for drafting in Terramodel or other CAD software.

Select block objects and a new colour
For each selected block, get the block name
For each block name in turn,
1. Insert the block at 0,0 and scale 1:1 on layer 0 of Sheet view
2. Explode the block
3. Explode sub-blocks including hatching
4. Relayer all new objects to layer 0
5. Modify new objects to the specified colour
6. Join any plines
7. Recreate as an internal block with the same block name
8. Save the block as a .BLK file in the current project folder
9. Delete new objects
Redraw

Updates definitions for all selected block objects.
Updates all blocks in the project that have the same name as any selected blocks.
You don't have to select every block with that name.
Modifies the colours of objects in the selected blocks.
Does not modify the colour number of the inserted object.
Does not modify the map colour status.
Blocks with map colour ON will still display in the block colour.
To specify colour BYLAYER, choose new colour 0.
Explodes sub-blocks such as hatching (which solves problems with conflicting hatch names).
Modifies multi-coloured blocks to a single colour.
Does not explode text or change fonts.
Blocks exported to .DWG display the colours of the objects in the block as mapped by the .ACF.
Some CAD operators will appreciate objects on layer 0 in the block definition.
Move or rename .BLK files afterwards.
To retain links to external blocks, after updating the block definitions, quit without saving after GCBLKFIX and open the project file again.
To use the external block with projects in other folders, move the .BLK to a location on the Terramodel Search Path.
Use BLOCK to List or insert blocks or to Save to external.
Use MKBLKINT to make selected blocks internal.
Use BLKREAD to replace internal blocks with external blocks.
Use SCLBLKS to modify the map colour status of blocks.
Use EXPLODE or GCEXPLOD to explode blocks.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCBLKPTS

Create points at the insertion points of selected 3D blocks, on a specified layer. You have options to include 2D blocks, and to delete the blocks.

For each of two DTM edges, copy the points from the other set which are outside the selected set on to the layer of the selected set, then create a new DTM edge.

The two new sets cover the maximum horizontal extent of both boundaries, but with different layers and elevations.

The areas and volumes between the new surfaces are shown in the message scroll area.

Use this to compute volumes between two surfaces by assuming batters of even grade between the extents one of the DTMs.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCBOX

Draw a rectangular pline at three specified corners. The first corner is at the first location, the second corner is on the bearing from the first location to the second and the third corner is at the third location. Optionally, enter an elevation.

GCBOX is an alternative to BOX, which creates a pline and PAD which creates a set. Both commands prompt for two points and create sides on cardinal bearings.

See also PLOTBOX, which prompts for bearing and distances in sheet units and POLYGON which prompts for number of sides.

If you create a DYNAVIEW from the box, always locate the first corner in the south west so the insertion point is at the bottom left of the dynaview.

TML date			Source
08/02/22				Geocomp Update or $200

GCCHORD

Create plines or sets with straight segments along selected plines or sets.

The points and vertices are located by a specifying a maximum chainage interval and a maximum 3D offset from curve to chord.

The chord offset is measured in 3D to the horizontal and vertical alignments which are defined by the set or by a pline in the Profile view that refers to the selected pline in the Plan view. The plines can include straights, arcs, spirals, combining curves, parabolic vertical curves, circular vertical curves, B-splines and overhauser splines.

Delete the selected objects or not.

Create objects on the current layer or the layers of the selected objects.

To filter excess chords use FILTER or BLFILTER.

See also ARCBREAK, GCDIVIDE and GC682SET.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCCHRLIN

Import a profile from a comma-delimited file in this format:

chainage,elevation

Create CL file for PPS Tunneling system from HAL, VAL, Xlines, and chainage range.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

GCCLIP

Use closed pline boundaries to create new surfaces from an existing surface, either inside or outside each polygon. The pline is also draped on the existing surface, the points and sets created are added to each new surface.

This command prepares surfaces for 3d and 4d modelling applications.

Create pline clipping boundaries around design features or regions
Uniquely name each boundary pline.
Run GCCLIP
Nominate the DTM Surface to be clipped
Select the pline boundaries
Select "Keep Inside" or "Keep Outside"
New DTM surfaces are copied from the existing DTM, inside or outside the boundaries.
The new layers have the boundary name suffixed with _IN and _OU.

See also CLIP to clip objects at boundaries, GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two surfaces, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCCOLCON

Modify the colours of selected objects according to three elevation ranges: negative, zero and positive.

GCCOLCON easily modifies the colour of labeled isopachs to show cut and fill.

2D objects are not modified.

Modify elevations of 2D points of selected sets to equal elevations of 3D points on the same sets that have matching elevations.

Use to repair sets that represent contours where some of the points are 2D.

Import a contour .CON file created by DOS Geocomp.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	166

GCCONOUT

Export contour plines to files in DOS Geocomp contour format (.CON).

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	105

GCCONSIM

Export contours in a .TXT format to suit a ship-piloting simulator.

Plines:: Select contour plines.
Change CS:: Select a coordinate system.
Export file:: Select a location and .TXT file name.
Export: Export the TXT file.

The coordinates are transformed from the specified coordinate system into latitudes and longitudes in degrees and decimal minutes.
For bathymetric contours (below water level), use negative elevations. Plines with no elevations are skipped.
Contours must have straight segments. Plines containing splines, arcs and other curves are skipped. Use SPLINE, CURVE or GCCHORD to create straight segments.
Each exported contour is suffixed with a unique incrementing ID number. Use NAME beforehand to name contours with any prefixes.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCCONTXT

Change the elevation of the plines on the selected layer to match nearby text.

The text is considered nearby if the insertion point is within the specified tolerance of the ends of a pline, or within a tolerance equal to the height of the text from the nearest location on the pline.

If the tolerance is too small, some contours will be missed. If you have only labels on index contours, and the tolerance is too large, some unlabelled contours will be assigned elevations.

By default, plines with elevations already are not changed. To force a change, tick "Do all".

Text containing non-numeric characters is ignored.

To change the pline elevations from nearby points, first use LABPT to label the points with EAT text containing elevations.

Once the plines have elevations, GCCONVRT them to sets to form an approximate DTM surface from a labelled 2D contour plan.

If there are insufficient labels, the other contour elevations can be set manually using GCMULCON, GCONECON or PLTO3D. If there is a DTM, you could interpolate the contour elevations using ELVPLINE or regenerate the contours.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	258

GCCONVRT

If all points in a set have the same elevation, the pline is assigned that elevation, otherwise the pline is assigned no elevation (= *).

Zero length plines are converted to points.

GCCONVRT does not remove duplicate points. If you need to remove duplicate points during the conversion use CONVERT.

Optionally, delete the original sets, and the points in those sets.

GCCONVERT converts hidden and visible set segments.

The new objects may have the original or current layer name, and a prefix.

Unlike CONVERT, GCCONVRT retains all attributes and is much faster with large data sets.

See also GCCHORD to create straight segments along sets or plines.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Edit\|Convert	Geocomp Update or $250	292

GCCOORD

Convert points, plines, blocks and text between predefined geodetic coordinate systems using predefined ellipsoids and datums by the seven-parameter or NTv2 distortion grid method.

Select From and To Coordinate Systems

Select Search to select the From and To coordinate systems.

World regions: Select a region of the world then select a system from that region from the drop-down list.
Define ellipsoid | Define datum | Define CS: If desired coordinate systems are not in any of the regional lists, new ellipsoids, datums and coordinate systems can be defined. Geocomp Systems adds new definitions for Customer Care Members. Add coordinate systems from a file by ADDMAPSY.
List selected: List details of the selected coordinate system.
List all: List details of every available ellipsoid, datum and coordinate system.

Any point

List the coordinates of a location in both From and To coordinate systems. For latitudes and longitudes, enter in DDD.MMSS.ssssss format.

Multiple objects

Select Objs:: Select objects to be transformed.
List: List the coordinates of selected points in both From and To coordinate systems.
Convert: Transform the coordinates of select objects from the From coordinate system to the To coordinate system.

The look-up tables in GCCOORD emphasise Australian and New Zealand coordinate systems. COORDCON is a similar command that transforms the same coordinate systems but which emphasises USA and UTM systems. Both call the same Mentor database files COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Mentor.dir. Both commands require COGO module. "List selected" in GCCOORD shows more details.

Coordinate systems with names that start with LL use latitudes and longitudes. The others use eastings and northings.

The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.

To define a coordinate system:

Backup all the files and folders under C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Mentor.dir.
Run GCCOORD
Click Coordinate Systems
Click Search
To list or define ellipsoids, click Define Ellipsoid
To list or define datums, click Define Datum
Click Define CS
Select the datum
Enter a short name for the new Coordinate System into the Coordinate System Name box
Enter an appropriate description
Select the Projection
Enter required information into the active boxes
Click New CS to add the coordinate system to the dictionary.
Click on OK.
Click Set current to select the coordinate system
Close GCCOORD
Manually edit the GCCOORD.LUT found in the Terramodel Search Path to add the name of your Coordinate System.
Run GCCOORD to confirm that you can select the coordinate system, and that your test data with known coordinates transforms correctly.
If you make a mistake at any stage, reinstate the backed up files and start again.

GCLLGRID: Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels
FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, LLTABLE and SHADOW: Some other related commands

GC07 and GRIDPLAN: Transform when either coordinate system is not geodetic.
CONVDMS: Transform from latitudes and longitudes in decimal degrees to Degrees Minutes and Seconds expressed as DDD.MMsssss (or vice versa).
MEASUNIT: Convert between foot and metre coordinate systems.
CSM and GEOSYS: Manage Trimble coordinate systems.
GEOCALC: GeoCalc 4.20.

TML, LUT or DLL date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	UG 401 Nav notes	Cogo\|Utilities\|Coordinate conversion HDMS\|Coordinate transformation\|Coordinates	Geocomp Update or $200	GeoCalc

GCCORBEL

Copy selected objects onto a single layer retaining location, colour and so on.

GCCOPY is ideal for creating a single layer DTM from objects on multiple layers.

GCCOPY copies many object properties such as colour, elevation, colour, linetype, reference, group, visibility and hidden segments, but not attributes.

Objects: Select Objects to be copied
Layer List: Select objects to be copied by layers in a layer list
Into layer: Select layer for copied objects
Retain Colour by Layer: For any selected objects that have colour = 0 (which means colour ByLayer), either retain colour number = 0 (so the objects display in the colour of the new layer), or change the colour number to the colour of the layer from which the object is copied (so the new object is displayed with the same colour as the old object)
Append Layername: Append the names of the original layers to the names of the new objects
Del Old: Delete or retain the original objects
Update Ref: When both parent and subject objects are copied at the same time, refer to the copied objects, or the original objects
Elev Diff: Add a difference to the elevations of copied objects
Copy: Copy the objects
Cancel: Cancel without copying

Points in selected sets are copied to the new layer, even if the points are not selected. This avoids invalid breaklines due to sets connected to points on other layers.

Points subject to selected text and blocks are also copied. This enables you to move copied points and update the dimensions.

The new point numbers start above the highest existing point number.

Import .CSV data in common ASCII formats exported from tables, GPS and other coordinated data sources.

Browse to select one or more .CSV, PTS or .TXT files.

The column delimiters can be commas, tabs or spaces.

Whether the first column is assumed to contain point numbers varies according to the number of columns, whether "Use imported point numbers" is selected, and whether the first column contains alphabetic characters.

Number of fields per line	Fields assumed to be	Comment
one	not valid
two	easting, northing (or northing, easting)
three	easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation
four	point number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation
five	point number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name
more than five	point number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name, layer	Answer Yes, when prompted
more than five	point number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name which can include delimiters	Answer No when prompted, and specify Current layer
more than five	point number, easting, northing (or northing, easting), elevation, name including layer, layer	Answer No when prompted, and specify Separate layers

Entity file: String points as you import using a Geocomp Entity file.
CLT file: Change colours and linetypes as you import using a .CLT file.
MAP file: Insert blocks or symbols using a MAP file.
Easting, Northing or Northing, Easting: Specify the coordinate order.
Current layer or Separate layers: Create the points on the Current Layer or on Separate Layers.
Use Filenames as Layer Names: Create points on layers with names from the file names.
Use additional fields for Point's Layer: This prompt appears if there are more than four delimiters on any line, as shown on the table above.
Use Long Entity Names: Substitute the name with a Long Name or Short Name read from an ENT file.
Match using Short names: If you specify an ENT file, match using Short Names.
Use Imported Point Numbers: Use point numbers from the file or assign new point numbers.
Add imported Point Number to name: Add imported Point Numbers to names.
Used Closed Plines to Export Pts: Export imported points to space-delimited .TXT files, instead of creating points in the project, where the locations are inside closed plines on a selected layer. The .TXT files have the names of the plines, or _NO_PLINE_NAME.TXT for plines that have no names.
Separator: Specify commas, tab or space for the delimiter.
Import CSV files: Prompt to select one or more ASCII files to be imported. The default file extensions are .CSV,.PTS and .TXT
Cancel: Cancel the command.

Do not select .ENT, .CLT or .MAP files, unless you have coded descriptions to suit Geocomp DOS. In general, the better way to string, relayer, colour and add blocks is to import the points first then use AUTODRAFT. To modify blocks, symbols, colours or linetypes after import by GCCSVIN, see GC16, GC09, GCINSBLK, BLOCK Multiple and LAYERMAP.

See also IMPORT ASCII Points to configure the import format and filter by closed pline, GCMFI to import multiple files, FBLOCK to split into regions and GCPTSIN to import points in various file formats.

TML date			Source
09/03/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCDAMVOL

Compute incremental volumes of water above a DTM or earthworks below a DTM.

Specify a DTM and the volume unit, and, typically, a high water level, a low water level and a vertical increment and a boundary.

Select Water Vols for the volume of water in a depression in a DTM, or Earth Vols for the volume of material in surrounding walls.

The P3Pad report shows, for each boundary, the incremental and cumulative volumes as limited by the DTM surface and the high and low water levels. **** indicates that the area is not changing.

DTM: Digital terrain model layer.
HWL: Enter a High Water Level or * for the highest elevation.
LWL: Enter a Low Water Level or * for the lowest elevation.
Increment: Enter a vertical increment or * for no increments.
Offset: Enter a vertical offset, which may be 0.000, to be added to each increment.
Water Vols: Compute volumes above the DTM.
Earth Vols: Compute volumes below the DTM.
Bdys: Select any limiting boundaries.
CSV File: Also report to a comma-separated-values (.CSV) file for importing into another application.
Cubic Unit: Express the volume in units defined in UNITSSET by the "Volume" label and "Cubic units/volume unit" conversion factor. If the project units are metres, the volume label is typically m³ and the conversion factor is 1. If the project units are feet, the volume label is typically Cu. Yd. and the conversion factor is 27.
Litres: Express the volume in litres. 1 litre = 0.001 cubic metres. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are metres.
Megalitres: Express the volume in megalitres. 1 megalitre = 1000 cubic metres. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are metres.
US Gal: Express the volume in gallons. 1 US fluid gallon = 231 cubic inches = 0.13368056 cubic feet = 0.00495113 cubic yards. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are feet.
AF: Express the volume in acre-feet. 1 acre-foot = 43560 cubic feet = 1613.3333… cubic yards. The UNITSSET factor is not applied. Only selectable if the project units are feet.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Reports\|More...\|Dam volumes	Geocomp Update or $250

GCDCOUT

Create a roading .DC file from HAL/VAL or roadway from cross sections where Xlines intersect selected 3D sets.

This is useful with Trimble machine control, especially where your data are supplied as strings or if needs cleaning up in Terramodel.

See also GCMULTDC and IMPORT Roading DC files.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Misc. Export\|Trimble DC from strings	Geocomp Update or $250

GCDELSET

Delete selected sets, with the option select any points attached to those sets.

See also DELETE which deletes selected objects only.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	60+31

GCDIM

Create labels showing dimensions between pairs of locations or along segments.

Click Props or tick boxes to configure the labelling method, units, decimal places, and layer.

Any vertical exaggeration in the current view is applied to the label. If the vertical exaggeration is later changed, the label will then be distorted.

Pt-Pt | Segment

Dimension between pairs of locations or along segments.

Pts:

Enter two locations.

Seg:

Select one segment.

Loc:

Locate the new label.

Props

General properties

Distance type: Dimension the whole distance (Linear), the Horizontal (X-axis) distance or Vertical (Y-axis) distance. In the Plan view, Horizontal is the difference in the Eastings, and Vertical is the difference in Northings.
Layer: Select the layer on which to place dimension lines and text. Select layer 0 for current layer.
Dimension blocks: Create the label as a block instead of text and plines. Dimension blocks are named dim n, where n is a sequential number. If you delete a dimension block object, the block definition is discarded when the project is saved.
Force Dimensions outside: Create dimensions with arrows that point inward, or in the same direction, when the dimension is located outside the extension lines.
Format: Select Engineering format which uses decimal project units (feet or metres) set by Measurement Units (MEASUNIT) or Architectural format which uses feet, inches and fractional inches.
Units suffix: Append a suffix to the labels to show the distance unit.
Sub-units suffix: Append another suffix show the sub-units in the Architectural format.
Number of decimals: Enter the precision for distance labels using the Engineering format.
Units Scale: Enter the factor for the calculated distance. For example, to convert feet to inches, enter 12.0.
Fractional increment: Select the precision of the Architectural format.

Text Properties

Text style: Select the text style for font, height, aspect and slant. The justification is Center-Middle, and the orientation is Legible.
Text Colour: Specify the colour.
Distance from text to line: Enter a factor of the text height for the distance of the text away from the dimension line or the lines from the beginning and the end of the text.
Draw text above dim line: Place dimension text above the dimension lines or even with and between the dimension lines.

Line Properties

Draw dimension line: Enable dimension lines.
Linetype: Select the line type (usually a LEADER LINE).
Colour: Specify the colour for the dimension lines.
Draw dimension line 1: For Segments, create the first extension line.
Line type: Select the line type of the first extension line.
Draw extension line 2: Create the second extension line.
Line type: Select the line type for the second extension line.
Colour: Specify the colour for both extension lines.
Length of outside lines: Define the length of the outside dimension lines in sheet units when you Force Dimensions Outside and locate the dimension text outside the extension lines.
Extension line gap: Define the offset (in sheet units) to the beginning of the extension lines. If a dimension is located within this offset, the lines are extended further.

OK

Accept changes to dimensioning properties.

Cancel

Cancel changes in dimensioning properties.

Dim

Create label at a manually entered location. Not required for mouse-selected locations.

Draw Ext 1 | Draw Ext 2 | Force Outside | Draw Text above

Enable properties without opening Prop dialog.

AutoScale

Enable AutoScale of text labels.

Label multiple closed sets with bearings and distances on the current layer.

The labels are EAT text attached to the points, so the dimensions update as you move the points.

The text is created on the current layer, at the current plan view scale, with the nominated colour and text style.

Create multiple dimension text layers at different scales for use with different dynaview layerlists.

The lot with the largest area can be dimensioned as a surround lot.

The length suffix is selected from the list defined in UNITSSET Labelling.

See also GCLABLOT, LABELSEG and TEXTRND.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|text\|Lot dimensions	Geocomp Update or $200	75

GCDIVIDE

In selected sets, for each segment longer than the specified maximum horizontal distance, insert new points and create new segments. The new segments may be the exact distance in length or shortened so each new segment is equal length.

New arc segments are created using arc lengths.

If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations are interpolated onto the new points.

When points are too far apart, long thin triangles can cause problems with volume computation and design commands such as EARTHWORK, SIDESLOPE and DESIGN.

Use GC682SET to create breaklines linking two sets and GCPTDIST to check whether any segment has less than a minimum length. See also DIVIDE, GCCHORD, ARCBREAK, GC28 and GC3D.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCDREDGE

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCDRAPE

Create points on the current layer where selected plines cross links in the selected DTM and connect the points with sets along the plines.

Each new set is assigned the same start chainage|station, reference object and name as the original pline.

The original plines can be deleted.

Around each curve, the number of chords created corresponds to the view resolution segments per arc, vertical curve, spline or spiral specified in DISPLAYSET.

If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.

See also DRAPE which is a standard Terramodel command that assigns beginning station | start chainage 0.000, Ref Obj 0 and no name, and does not give the option to delete plines.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		DTM\|Drape plines	Geocomp Update or $200	298+400+252

GCDTM

Relayer or copy all objects in the plan view, that have group numbers listed in a selected .DTP file, into a specified DTM layer

Set groups first by a command such as GCIMPORT.

Digital Terrain Parameter (.DTP) files are created by Geocomp (DOS software) during DTM formation.

Optionally, copy the boundary as a breakline.

For every layer that has at least three 3D contourable points, create arc breaklines, relink the DTM then refresh the display.

The arc breakline points and sets are created in the DTM layer using the current point and line colours.

The arc-to-chord tolerance and visibility of the chords are as previously set by GCARCBL.

See also DTMALL and DTMUPDT which do not change arc breaklines. DTMUPDT just updates one layer.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	289

GCDTMBDY

Create closed plines or sets at the extents of the links on DTM layers.

Specify DTM layers by selecting objects or a layer list.

Specify whether to create lines or sets.

Specify whether to create the boundaries on the DTM layers or the current layer.

These boundaries may be useful for volume computations.

Select sets in the DTM layer to create DTM Edges.

Report the interpolated elevation and elevation differences between up to three selected DTM layers at the cursor location to the status line (below the command line).

Edit a DTM edge set by removing edge triangles specified by locations outside and inside the edge.

Select a set that encloses all the points and triangles on a DTM layer, such as a set created by DTMEDGE.

Once you select the set, the command turns on links, turns off quick contours and regenerates the DTM.

Select triangles crossing a line between two locations, inside and outside the DTM edge.

For each triangle in turn, working from the outside to the inside, GCDTMEDG deletes the outside segment, creates segments on the other two sides, and then joins them into the edge set.

This command replaces the equivalent manual process using DELETESEGMENT, BL and then JOIN.
Before you run DTMEDGE, check the current extent of the triangles with LINKSET.
DTM edges override the maximum edge distance and angle in LINKSET.
DTM edges defined by multiple sets are not selectable by this command.
Breaklines are not removed.
Points are not removed.
Triangles are not removed if that would split the triangulated network.
To see pline contours, create them first by CONTOUR.
Toggle quick contours, links or slope arrows during editing with a toolbox including TOGQUICK, TOGLINKS, TOGSLOPE or LINKSET.
The colours of links, quick contours and slope arrows are defined by LINKSET.

TML date			Source
08/02/22				Geocomp Update or $250

GCDTMGDE

Create registered slope alignment plines in the Super view from a design DTM and registered left and right horizontal alignments.

These slope alignments can be especially useful to place SUBGRADE templates. Horizontal offsets can be defined in the HALMANAGER.

The selected alignments must be more than 10mm inside the edge of the DTM.

See also SUPERPLOT, VALMANAGER and CHEKROAD.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCDTMIN

Create closed sets from triangles in a Geocomp .DTM file.

Each set is created with a group of 1037 on the nominated layer.

The DTM boundary is created as a pline.

A Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) is a self-contained model of coordinates, triangles and breaklines, from which Geocomp (DOS) can extract contours and sections and compute volumes.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	FC D

GCDTMOUT

Create a Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) from a DTM layer.

To export the whole DTM, do not select a boundary.

To clip the .DTM at an arbitrary pline boundary, you will need SiteDesign module.

The maximum number of DTM points in Geocomp 9 is 32,767 points and in Geocomp 10 is 99,999 points.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	43 or SDS-DXF

GCEARTH

Similar to EARTHWRK and XVOLUMES except the report is laid out in columns separated by commas.

Copy 12D Model attributes of a parent object onto selected objects.

If the parent object does not have 12D Model attributes, enter feature attribute names and values using a dialog.

12 Model attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

12D model attributes can be imported from .12DA files using GC12DIN.

See also DISP12DA, FYATBED and CHECKATT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $125

GCELEV

Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.

Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.

Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.

To select objects by elevation range, use Right-mouse Elev.

GCELEV is similar to ELEVATION but with a clearer dialog.

See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|Elevation\|Elevation	Geocomp Update or $125	9

GCESRIIN

Import Digital Elevation Model grid files in ESRI ArcInfo format.

ESRI DEM files are gridded elevation models from GIS sources such as lidar and Shuttle Radar Topographic Mission CGIAR-CSI.

To import from huge ESRI DEM files, import only those grid points inside a boundary pline or within a maximum offset from a pline.

Boundary/Hal: To import all points with elevations, select no boundary. To import only points inside a boundary, select a closed boundary. To import only within a corridor, select an open set or pline.
Max Offset from Hal: Enter the maximum horizontal offset to define a corridor from any selected open record.
Select Files: Browse to select one or more .ASC files in ESRI grid format the select OK to import.
Cancel: Cancel importing .ASC files.

The ESRI DEM format defines the grid extent with a heading followed by the elevation values like this:

ncols         1100
nrows         1100
xllcorner     520950.0
yllcorner     5257950.0
cellsize      1.0
NODATA_value  -9999
30.02 29.99 29.95 29.9, and so on.

The data can be all on one line, or on many lines. The number of elevation values equals nrows x ncols. The maximum number of points created in Terramodel equals nrows x ncols, but no points are created where the elevation value matches the NODATA value, nor where the location is outside the boundary or corridor.

GCESRIIN can import files delimited by spaces, tabs or commas.

To explode these	into these	use
one set or pline	two sets or plines	BREAK
sets	set segments	DISJOIN
sets with arcs	sets with chords	ARCBREAK or GCCHORD
plines with no spirals or vertical curves	pline segments	DISJOIN
plines with spirals	plines with arcs and chords	OFFSETDIST
plines with spirals, vertical curves or splines	plines with 2D chords	GCCHORD or FILTER
alignment plines with arcs, spirals, vertical curves or splines	sets with 3D chords	GCCHORD
sets or plines with dashed linetypes	plines with chords	GCEXPLOD
sets or plines with complex linetypes	text in symbol font and plines with chords	GCEXPLOD
normal text	plines	GCEXPLOD
text in symbol font	plines	GCEXPLOD
extended attribute text (EAT) with border and leader line	normal text, border plines and leader line plines	GCEXPLOD
leader line plines	plines and arrowhead symbol text	GCEXPLOD
blocks	plines, text, blocks and points	GCEXPLOD or EXPLODE
hatching	plines	GCEXPLOD
label tables	plines and text	EXPLODE
dimensions	rounded text	TEXTRND
lot labels	normal text	LABELSETS Text
lot segment labels	EAT text	LABELSETS Text
point labels	text	LABELPOINT Explode
symbols on points	points and text with symbol font	LABELPOINT Explode
symbols on points	points and blocks	SYM2BLK
mass haul diagrams	plines and text	MASSHAUL and MASSDIAG
dynaviews	objects	EXPLODE or GCEXPLOD

Depending on how the blocks were created, GCEXPLOD and EXPLODE explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
If the exploded block or text object has an elevation, the pline retains the elevation.
Points in blocks do not retain their point numbers.
Blocks can be nested inside blocks, so you may need to repeat.
Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Use DELETE or BLKREAD.
A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block. Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
Use GCPURGE to purge all unused blocks.
Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks.
Use GCBLKFIX to explode blocks, modify the colours of the objects and recreate the blocks.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCEXTEND

Bound: Specify a pline or set as a limiting boundary. The boundary does not need to be closed.
Plines: Select plines to extend or trim.
Max Extend distance
: Specify a maximum extend distance or enter *.
Both Ends
: Extend or trim in the direction of the last segment from the end closest to the boundary or both ends so that the pline ends on the boundary or lines projected from the ends of the boundary.
Add Pt
: If extending, create a new pline segment between end and the new location.
Move Pt: If extending or trimming a straight, move the end of the pline segment.

Import .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file produced by Ezigrade from Foresoft.

Select Existing, Design and Field layers and set the coordinate system.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			NFS

GCEZGOUT

Export .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file for Ezigrade from Foresoft.

Specify Coordinate system, Existing, Design, Benchmark and Field layers, grid settings and boundary.

Select .EZIGRADE or .AGD file type to export.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			NFS

GCFALL

Create plines in the current layer showing paths of maximum DTM slope that approximate the direction of flow of liquids such as water.

Each path stops at a maximum path length if specified, a low point at the bottom of a depression or the lower of two points on a DTM edge link.

Where linked points have exactly the same elevation, one of the elevations is modified very slightly to enable consistent flow directions.

Where there are multiple possible paths, only one of the paths is followed.

Water depth is not considered; any rise of any height is an obstacle that can create a low point.

Click in Start Loc: then select a location within the DTM.

GCFALL creates a pline on the current layer that falls from that location in the steepest direction and continues across more triangles until the limit is reached. Click more locations to create more flow paths. Click Close to close the command.

Select "Triangle Centroids" to create plines that begin to fall from every triangle on the DTM.

For each catchment, the colours of flow plines are distinguished and a circle is created at the common terminus with the elevation of the DTM and a name showing the total area of triangles and the longest path. The paths are created on the current layer; the circles have the same layer name but with _CIRC on the end. Existing plines on those layers can be deleted.

Water from a single triangle can flow in multiple paths. Specify one, three or six flow path locations per triangle.

In Settings, select Create Catchment Boundaries and specify a layer. Then select Triangle Centroids to create plines of catchments and flow paths.

To hatch catchments, HATCH selecting catchment boundaries by colour AND layer.

For flow path plines, choose a linetype with a symbol that indicates direction, such as 142, 145, CROW'S FOOT, DIR DASH, DIRECTION, LEADER, LEADER D, TADPOLE, TYRE_TRACK_>>>> or XLEADER. The pline is created in the direction such that the symbols point downhill.

Load these linetypes in LINETYPESET from DIRECTIONAL.LIN, GC10.LIN, LEADERLINE.LIN, TMODEL.LIN, TMODEL_2.LIN or TMODELT.LIN in C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ folder. Your choice of linetype and plan view scale affects the size of the symbols and the time taken to display the paths.

Insert arcs into selected sets or plines and increase radii of small arcs in plines.

At each point in selected sets, a new arc with the entered minimum radius and its new points is inserted. No arc is inserted where an arc already exists or the distance to either adjacent point exceeds the new tangent length. Specify "Delete set IPs" to delete existing set points at new arcs.

At each vertex in selected plines, a new arc with the entered minimum radius is inserted or the radius of an existing arc is increased. If the distance to either adjacent vertex exceeds the new tangent length, the new radius is reduced to fit. Splines, spirals and vertical curves are not modified.

When an arc is inserted at the beginning of a closed figure, the start chainage is adjusted to match the previous chainage at the new start location.

Filter excess points from sets by offset and radius tolerances, recreate arcs from chords or replace sets with alignment plines.

Relayer filtered points to layer 0. If layer 0 is invisible, these points disappear.

GCFILTER can reduce the size of background maps to be uploaded to instruments.

Sets:: Select sets to be filtered.
Line Tol:: Horizontal offset tolerance on straights.
Arc Tol:: Horizontal offset tolerance on arcs.
Elev Tol:: Vertical offset tolerance.
Filter Points: Remove points within Line or Arc tolerance and within Elev Tolerance.
Convert Chords to Arcs: Convert chords to arcs where the implied radii and centres of arc match.
Convert to HAL/VAL Plines: Convert sets to horizontal alignment plines in Plan view and corresponding vertical alignment plines in Profile view.

Create a set that follows segments or links in both directions from a selected segment.

The first segment is a copy of the selected segment. Segments are then added to each end along segments or links to the point closest to the direction of the previous segment until no point falls within the specified deflection angle.

The new segments can follow existing set segments or triangle sides, can be sets or plines, can be on the current layer or on the layer of the selected set and are the line colour of the current layer.

Use to distinguish breaklines such as kerbs from supplied DTMs.

See also GC66, GCFALL, WALK and DELCROSS.

TML date			Source
27/05/17			Geocomp Update or $200

GCFIXXML

Read a specified .XML file and write another with new lines inserted between every pair of >< characters.

.XML files contain ASCII characters in fields delimited by tags defined by characters. Tabs, spaces and new lines may be included for human readability but are not required by the .XML specification so, to save space, .XML files may have been written all on one long line which creates otherwise valid .XML files that cannot be read by Terramodel and some other software. GCFIXXML brings the longest line length to fewer than 255 characters by inserting a new line character between every pair of >< characters.

Create points at nominated interval, bearing and number within a boundary on the specified layer.

Insert the grid origin at the south west corner.

See also DTMGRID, GRIDEXPT, GRIDELEV, GCLABGRD and GRIDMAKE.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draft\|Label grid	Geocomp Update or $250	265

GCGEOIN

Import points, lines and attributes from Leica .GEO coordinate files. GEO files are part of the Leica SBG Universal Machine Control (UMC) system.

To export .GEO files, see also GCUMC3D.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCGPXIN

Import points from a GPX file and transform from lat/long coordinates to a specified coordinate system.

Limit to point inside a boundary or close to an alignment.

See The GPS Exchange Format.

Create region boundaries and report their cut and fill volumes to P3Pad, CSV, text and hatching.

Create region boundaries as closed plines in a rectangular grid (for broad zones) or between xlines (for roads), or select existing boundaries (such as stockpile toes).

GCGRDVOL can improve on EARTHWORK, EARTHWRK and AVGEND for many situations.

Create closed boundaries to be selected at Grids/Regions.

Select New grid
Locate the north west corner
Enter the bearing
Enter the number and width of columns
Enter the number and height of rows
Select a layer and colour for the grid
Click OK to create a grid of closed rectangular plines
Each pline name indicates the row and column

Select Sub grid
Select any pline box to define the extents of a Box
Enter the bearing
Enter the number of columns
Enter the number of rows
Select a layer and colour for the subgrid
Click OK to create a grid of closed rectangular plines within the box
Each pline name indicates the box and the row and column

Select a layer and colour for the regions
Click Create Regions using active alignment and Xlines
Each pline name indicates the chainage range

If your regional boundaries are

the same again (e.g. monthly volumes)
from other sources (e.g. stockpiles with irregular shapes)
imported (e.g. transferred by TMXOUT and TMXIN)

and are already in the project there is no need to recreate them here.

Label each region with text showing Cut Volume, Fill Volume, Nett Volumes, Average Depth or Region Name.
Enter the Prefix, layer name, style, colour and vertical shift for each label type.
To avoid labels overlapping, specify text styles with different vertical justification or enter different shifts (in text height units).
To distinguish label types, specify prefixes, layers or colours.
Delete previously created labels and hatching, or not.
Specify a text bearing.
Hatch each region with patterns and colours to indicate whether there is more cut or more fill.
Report
- Cut and fill volumes
- Maximum depths of cut and fill
- Net volumes
- Average depths
- Region names
- Cut and fill and boundary areas
- Topsoil volumes (if any)
- Dead regions (if any)
- Cumulative cut, fill and nett volumes.
For reports that overflow P3Pad, generate a CSV file.
Delete regions with no included volume.

Apply the shrink and swell factors defined in EARTHWORK Settings.

Once you have defined regions and settings, select Compute Volumes.

Exist: Existing DTM surface layer
Proposed: Proposed DTM surface layer
Grids/regions: Select region boundaries (typically by layer)
DTM Bdy: Select an optional limiting boundary
Top Soil: Estimate topsoil volume by multiplying entered thickness by the area of cut. The reported cut volumes are not adjusted for topsoil.
Compute Vols: Compute the volumes, labels and reports

Any dead regions are excluded from the results by SETSMOOTH.

See also EARTHWORK to report volumes within one boundary, GC20 to detail volumes within multiple boundaries, MASSHAUL to create a mass haul diagram, and EARTHWRK and AVGEND for less accurate end-area volumes.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
05/06/17		Reports\|More...\|Grid volumes	Geocomp Update or $200	222

GCGSIOUT

Export an alignment in Leica RoadPlus .GSI format.

Choose from HAL and VAL or Roadjob.

Import horizontal alignment into the plan view, the vertical alignment into the profile view and the cross sections into the plan view.

The cross section points are strung according to descriptions in the cross section file.

The file names are assumed to have .GT7 file extension, and have the same name except for "- H", "- V" and "- XS" prefixes.

Export horizontal and vertical alignment, and cross sections extracted at xlines, to separate files.

Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets from the nominated main HAL instead of the current alignment record.

Offsets are computed at the nominated interval so the adjusted alignment will initially follow approximately same path, but the adjusted alignment will now follow any edits to the main registered alignment.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCHALDEL

Remove selected registered horizontal alignments from the HAL Manager.

The plines are not deleted.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCHALEDT

Edit the main horizontal alignment of a roadjob graphically.

Move the selected IP to a location, insert a new IP after the selected IP, delete the IP, or change the radius of arc and the lengths of spiral in (back) and spiral out (ahead).

Report the alignment geometry and offsets from the design alignment to an as-built set record.

GCHALEDT selects by roadjob instead of objects because it would be so easy to select the wrong alignment by mouse.

Register your HAL using HALMANAGER
Select your HAL as the main horizontal alignment of your roadway using ROADJOB
Make the pline of the HAL visible and selectable
In GCHALEDT
1. Select your roadway from a list
2. Click in the IP field
3. Click on a curve or bend in the HAL to select an IP

Watch for messages in message scroll.

Road: Select a roadjob.
IP: Select an intersection point from the main horizontal alignment of the selected roadjob.
Move IP: Move the selected Intersection point to the new location
Insert IP: Insert an IP at the selected location
Delete IP: Delete the selected IP
Loc: Enter or click on a location to select the IP.
Rad: Enter the new radius at the IP or keep the old radius.
Sp In: Enter a new entry spiral length
Sp Out
AsBuilt Set: Select any set from which to report offsets
Report: Report HAL geometry and offsets for any selected set.
Close: Close the command.

The HAL file is imported as a pline in the plan view.

Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the HAL.

A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the horizontal alignment manager.

The IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.

A report is displayed showing each chainage, offset, easting and northing of each IP.

Export a pline in the Plan view consisting of straights, arcs or spirals, but not splines, to a Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL) file.

The output file name must be six-digits with extension .HAL, for Geocomp (DOS) to read it.

The default cross sections specified in the .HAL are at 10m intervals and to the edge of DTM. To extract sections at other intervals or extents in Geocomp (DOS), first use SDS 84 command to change the interval or offsets.

Report elevations of roadway surfaces at intervals and offsets.

Road

Select a roadway.

Hal Alignment

Select an alignment from a list of the names of registered alignments and the number of their alignment offsets.

Offset from HAL

The reported Total Offset is the sum of the entered offset and any alignment offset.

Settings

Chainage | Station range: Enter the chainage | station range and interval.
Export CSV file name: Enter the name and location of the export .CSV file.
Generate report: Generate a P3Pad report, or not.
Export: Export a .CSV file and a P3pad report or both
Cancel: Cancel changes to settings

The .CSV shows the elevations of each surface at each chainage | station. The P3Pad report also shows the road name and description, the HAL, the entered offset, and, for each interval, the total offset and alignment coordinates.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $250

GCHAULMN

Add a table of quantities (MASSIMPORT) of a material to be imported or exported into a Mass Haul computation (MASSHAUL) along a selected Road Job.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCHELP

Display a report showing details of key and paths and names of configuration files used by Terramodel and Geocomp Update and store the details as project variables.

Report

Terramodel with Geocomp Update version
Security key|Serial|licence|dongle number
Toolpak version number
GeocompSystems.dll version number
GCHELP Revision number and date

Report the location of the tmodwin.ini that configures the initial Terramodel user-interface. The true location can be a copy of this file hidden by Windows in a VirtualStore.

Terramodel searches the folders in the Terramodel Search Path in sequence for many user-definable files including the prototype project, workspace, toolbar buttons, TML commands, aliases and blocks. The sequence is the current project folder, then user-definable folders, then C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel.

Typical user-definable folders include C:\TMCUSTOM\ for your user-definable files and C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\ for Geocomp Update software.

Make any required changes to the paths. Use Ctrl Enter to start each path on a new line. Click "Update TSP" to update the TSP in the current TMODWIN.INI.

To verify the changes, restart Terramodel then use TSP to check the paths and files.

Report the location of the prototype project on the TSP. Browse to select a prototype project file, like SYSTEM but with checks.

If a project is open, report the current project units and sheet units defined by MEASUNIT.

Report the name of the current workspace. Use TOOLBOX to select, display and edit workspaces.

Report the location and name of any menu configuration file. Use MENUCFG to select any different file.

Report any environmental variables used to locate TMODWIN.INI or network licensing keys.

Report any Terramodel modules on the security key. Field data module is not reported as that module is not dependant on the key. See also ABOUT Products.

Station/Chainage: Run STAORCHN to set station or chainage convention for some commands.
Check for Updates: Run UPDATE to open the webpage to check for and download updates to Terramodel.
Edit TMODWIN.INI: Run EDITINI to edit TMODWIN.INI.
Help Terramodel: Run HELPTM to open the Index for Terramodel Help.
Help Import/Export: Run HELPIE to open the Index for Import and Export Help.
Help Toolboxes: Run HELPTOOLBOX to open the Index tab for Toolbox Help.
Documents: Run DOCUMENTS to open a page of links to documents.
TML List: Run TMLLIST to open the TML List.
Support Links: Open a page of public support links.
Contact Us: Open a page of Contact details for Geocomp Systems.

Locate records, report some information to message scroll and enable some basic edits.

The selected objects are displayed in the highlight colour.

Objs:: Select objects by mouse, by entering record numbers preceded by r= or by entering point numbers.
<: Select the object in the same view with the next record number below that of the last selected object, and zoom to the extents of that object or recentre if the object is a point.
>: Select the object in the same view with the next record number above that of the last selected object, and zoom to the extents of that object or recentre if the object is a point.
Close: Close an open set or pline by connecting the end to the start.
Open: Open a closed set or pline, open by deleting the last segment.
Off: Turn the object off.
On: Turn the object on.
Show Dirn: Show the direction of a set or pline.
Reverse: Reverse the direction of the set or pline.
Explode: Explode the object, if a block.
Isolate | Unisolate (object layer): Isolate or unisolate the layer of the object.
ID: Report object information in Message Scroll.
Hatch: Display temporary hatching to show selected closed sets or plines. Turn off this hatching by rolling the mouse wheel or redrawing.
Report: List object properties.
Recentre: Recentre the view to the location of the object.
Extents: Recentre the view and zoom to the extents of the object.
Cancel
: Close the command.

Select a pline or set in the plan view and a location in plan, profile, xsect or super view.

The pline or set is made the active alignment and the location of the cursor is displayed in each view.

Click on Recentre Views to recentre open views at the current location.

If Update Plan View is selected, the centre of the Plan view moves to the location you select.

If Update XSect View is selected, the cross section of the nearest xline is made the active chainage.

Import surfaces from multiple .IFC files.

Specify layers for Upper, Side and Surfaces.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $200

GCIMPORT

Import Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) or use the DOS Data Collector Interface to import survey data.

Geocomp DOS software is a separate DOS application with similar functions to Terramodel for Windows. It can download raw data in a number of different data collector formats, convert them to a Geocomp Standard Field File (.FLD) and then Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) with coding, stringing and symbols all automatically applied.

Computed coordinates are stored in a .PTS file with feature code and stringing in a matching .STR file. The resulting 3D points are assigned block or symbol, layer, name and group according to the feature code. They are strung where required with sets of configurable layer, colour and linetype. Blocks representing tree canopies can be sized by the recorded radius.

GCIMPORT imports these files into Terramodel. Other DOS Geocomp import commands are GC09, GCHALIN, GCVERIN, GCCONIN, GCDTMIN, GCPLTIN, GCPLFIN, GCCSVIN, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, PTJOIN and IMPORTGC.

Select "Import .Pts .Str etc." button and browse to select a GEOCOMP .PTS file. Other files, such as STR (Strings), ANT (Annotations), DMN (Dimensions), LTO (Lots), HAL (Horizontal Alignments) or VER (Vertical Alignments) with the same name as the PTS file in the same folder, are also imported.

This dialog also allows for selection of the ENT table. This table controls the layer names, descriptions/names, colours, linetypes and symbols according to the Geocomp entity number. If the Geocomp files have been derived from survey, the entity and stringing have been worked out from the feature coding.

The layer name can be the short description, long description or moss string code in the ENT file. The entity number may be added to the front of the layer name.

The record name (sometimes called description) is derived from the Geocomp string description, the short name (alpha-code), the long name or the moss (point or string) code in the ENT file.

The Group is derived from the Geocomp Entity.

Points are initially placed in layer 0. As the strings are imported, the points are relayered to the same layer as their sets. Points with no strings remain in layer 0. If "Copy Points into different layers if Point is in different Entities" is enabled, points used by more than one entity will be copied into each layer. Otherwise, the point will be placed only in the layer of the entity of the last string attached to that point.

If "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" is selected, blocks or symbols are automatically placed by group. The heading of Geocomp.MAP describes the format of the mapping file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK.

A Geocomp plot parameter file can be used to control text attributes when importing DMN (Dimensions) and ANT (Annotations).

The colour of the points and sets is derived from the GEOCOMP.CLT file in the Terramodel Search Path. If the entity is not in GEOCOMP.CLT, the colours are derived from the colours of the existing layer. If the layer does not exist, it is created, and the colours of the new layer and objects come from the default layer. (See also GC16 which uses the CLT to set the colours without importing the objects).

The DOS Data Collector Interface in GCIMPORT enables Terramodel users without DOS Geocomp but familiar with it, to download and import these same files.

The only people who should consider using this DOS Data Collector Interface are experienced DOS Geocomp users who do not have a DOS Geocomp key but do have a 32-bit Windows XP Pro computer, a Terramodel key with CAD module, and Geocomp Update G, H, J, K or L.

DOS Geocomp users can use their own software to download surveys and create .PTS and .STR files. Terramodel and DOS Geocomp users can import into Terramodel with IMPORT .PTS/.STR (see above) or IMPORT Scripts, RDE and AUTODRAFT.

Sufficient environment space and free conventional memory must be made available.

ANSI must be supported to download from any instrument other than a Geodimeter.

Geocomp Updates installed these interface files into C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp. If these are installed anywhere else, edit the TM.BAT and the GEOCOMP.PAR files and set a project variable. Contact Geocomp Systems for details.

Select your data collector type, communication parameters and coding character positions. See the Geocomp manuals for an explanation of these settings.

Open a new project
Run GCIMPORT
Select Data Collector. This will launch the Data Collector Interface.
From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't do this, you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
Select 3, Data Collector Interface
Select 2, Transfer from [currently configured data collector]
Download the file from the data collector. This creates a data file with a six-digit number (with a file extension dependent on the data collector format) in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp.
Alternatively, download the data using some other software (e.g. Terramodel Download Script, Geocomp, SokkiaComms, Leica Survey Office, Nikon TransIT or Geodimeter Software Tools) and copy the raw data into the C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp directory with a name six-digit number format.
If you get a black screen, you have an ANSI problem. See www.geocomp.com.au/support/geocomp/ansi for solutions on Windows XP.
Select 3, Create Standard Field File. This is a raw data file in a standard Geocomp format.
If you need a control point file, create it in advance using GCPTSOUT and a target of Geocomp CRD. The .CRD file name is in the format CONTnn.CRD where nn are digits indicating the control point file number. The character positions of the station description in the name of the point are critical.
Optionally, Select 8 to edit or view the .FLD file, or use any text editor.
Select 4, Reduce Standard Field File. This creates a pair of Geocomp .PTS and .STR files. The .PTS file contains the coordinates and the .STR file contains the stringing and coding information.
From the main Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 then Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.
Select Import Survey Data in Terramodel to import the survey data into the current plan view.

Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate data collector format as the Target. Save the coordinate file in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp. Use a six-digit name with an extension depending on the target.
Run GCIMPORT
Select Data Collector
From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't change these values you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
Select 3, Data Collector Interface
Select 6, Transfer to [currently configured data collector]
Upload the file to the data collector.
From the Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.

Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate Data Collector format as the Target, or use an alternative method appropriate to your uploading software.
Upload the file according to your software instructions.

Refer to www.geocomp.com.au/support/terramodel/acu.

TML date	Guides	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	Geocomp 10 User Guide Geocomp 10 Reference Manual Geocomp Feature Code Table The manuals for your total station or data collector The manuals for your instrument's file transfer software, if used	File\|Misc. Import\|Geocomp .PTS + .STR Toolbar button	Geocomp Update G, H, J, K or L	30

GCIN2SET

Insert selected points into selected sets if the points are within a specified offset from the set.

The entered tolerance is stored as a project variable. The initial value is derived from the SetArcTol value in the [System] section of TMODWIN.INI.

If there is already a point in the set at that location, the point is not inserted, unless you replace 2D points with 3D points. If you replace 2D points, selected 3D points are inserted and can be relayered to the same layer as the set. 2D points at those locations can be separated from the set or deleted.

For example, if you have been supplied 2D linework as plines, and 3D points at some of the pline vertices, GCCONVRT plines to sets then GCIN2SET to add the 3D points to the set on the set layer. Also, if you have a rectangular grid of plines intersecting at grid points, each point will be added to two sets.

Create points with incrementing point numbers at locations.

Configure a prefix, suffix, last point number increment, elevation and name.

Create text records at selected locations with values that start at a specified real number or letters and increase by a specified increment.

The text could indicate house numbers, lot numbers, boreholes, and so on.

The text is created, the increment is added, and then the new value is defined ready to create the next text object. If the value is a real number, the value is trimmed to the number of decimal places. If the value contains any letter, the last character is incremented by the integer part of the increment. If the next character would be after Z or z, the next letter is appended. Any prefix or suffix is added after the increment is applied.

Number/Text:

Enter a starting real number or any other text

Increment:

Enter a real number or a number of letters to increment by

Location:

Enter the location of the new text

Settings

Prefix:: Enter any prefix
Suffix:: Enter any suffix
Text style:: Select the text style
Direction:: Specify the text direction
Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal places for real numbers
Copy text settings: Select a text object from which to copy text settings
OK|Close: Exit settings

OK

Create text and increment the current number/text

Cancel

Cancel without creating any more text

For sequence	start with	increment by	and set
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 ...	1	1	0 decimal places
-0.50, -0.25, 0.00, 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.00, 1.25 ...	-0.50	0.25	2 decimal places
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, A10 ...	1	1	Prefix A and 0 decimal places
a1, b1, c1, d1, e1, f1, g1 ,h1 ,i1 ...	a	1	Suffix 1
W, Y, Z, AA, AB ...	W	1
A, C, E, G, I ...	A	2
A, AA, AAA, AAAA, AAAAAA ...	A	27
A, A, A, A, A ...	A	0

Place a symbol or block for each selected circular set, scaled to match the diameter.

The most common use is to place large numbers of tree blocks scaled to fit canopy or trunk diameters.

Optionally, delete the original circles.

For a few circles, UNITBLK or BLOCK Insert may be better.

If the circles are plines, CONVERT to a set first, then set the group with GC52 or SGRP.

The block is chosen from a mapping file according to the group of the set. This is the same mapping file used by GCIMPORT and GC09. See Geocomp.map for an example which includes an explanation of the format.

GCIMPORT can import survey data including circles. If you elect not to "Map points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" at the time, use GCINSBLK to replace the circles later.

Use GC09 to place blocks or symbols on points by group, GC35 to create points at centroids of sets or plines, BLOCK Multiple to place blocks on multiple points or AUTODRAFT to place blocks on multiple points by name.

Report the areas of selected closed plines and subtracting the areas of any other closed plines which are wholly inside them.

The closed plines are also relayered onto a selected layer.

Design ramps and process a complete irrigation pivot.

Specify a pivot point, tower height, existing DTM, pivot boom details and settings, then design ramps and process the complete pivot.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			NFS

GCIRDESN

Merge a topographic DTM, a ramps DTM and a clearance DTM into a pivot irrigation design DTM.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			NFS

GCIRINFO

Check pivot irrigation boom cross sections.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			NFS

GCIRPROF

Create pivot irrigation profile along a boom defined using GCIRBOOM.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			NFS

GCJOINMP

Create sets on the current layer between selected points.

Join,

starting from most westerly point, to nearest point, leaving gaps where outside a maximum distance, or
in point number order, or
in consecutive point number order

See also PTJOIN, GCJOINPT and AUTODRAFT.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	15

GCJOINPT

Create sets by joining points according to the feature code and string data in the name following the conventions of Geocomp software.

Join selected points with sets according to feature codes defined by sequential characters starting from the beginning of each name and immediately after any point code separator characters. The characters from the entity start position to the entity end position are treated as the feature code. The characters from the string start position to the string end position are treated as the string number.

Points and sets can be separated into layers or placed on the current layer.

If you specify a Geocomp ENT file, integer feature codes are matched against the entity field in the first column, and other feature codes are matched against the short description in the second column.

Colours and linetypes are determined by the layer settings, unless you specify a colour and linetype file (CLT) file (see GC16).

Blocks and symbols can be placed according to a MAP file (see GC09).

Optionally, specify that the layer name is derived from the long description in column 7 of the ENT file.

GCJOINPT has been replaced by AUTODRAFT where a Feature Code is called a Field Code, a String Number is called a Feature Instance ID, points with Lines are strung even when the string number is blank, and the ENT, CLT and MAP files have been replaced by the ADC file.

See also GCIMPORT, PTJOIN, GCJOINMP and GCCSVIN.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
08/02/22	Geocomp Feature Code Table		Geocomp Update or $250	125

GCKMLIN

Import placemarks and paths from a .KML or .KMZ file, created in Google Earth .or similar, within a selected boundary pline or within a maximum offset of a pline HAL.

The WGS84 latitude and longitude coordinates in the KML are transformed into eastings and northings in the specified coordinate system. Click on Change to pick a different system. The available systems are defined by GCCOORD and COORDCON.

To export from Google Earth, use File, Save, Save image... or Save place as..... and select .KML format.

A .KMZ file contains one.KML file and may also contain folders with other files such as images. GCKMLIN extracts the components into their folders. If the KML file has the name doc.kml or the same name as the .KMZ, GCKMLIN imports the KML. If the .KML name does not match, browse to select and import the .KML. If the .KMZ includes photos, select Image Info to create links to the images.

To import an image saved from Google Earth, use Terramodel Image Manager (IMAGE).

Lines with elevations are imported as points and sets. To modify elevations = 0.00 to *, use GC69. To select objects with any elevation, use right-mouse Elev with range * to *. To select objects with no elevation, use Right-mouse Elev with NOT * to *.

TML date		Menu	Source
09/03/22		File\|Misc. Import\|Google Earth KML	Geocomp Update or $0

GCKMLOUT

Display aerial or satellite images of the selected location in Google Earth, NearMap or a Web Map Service.

Transform your data into a geodetic coordinate system.
Install or configure Google Earth Pro or similar display application.
Connect to the Internet
Run GCKMLOUT
Select Terramodel objects to display on the map.
Change the current Coordinate System, if it does not match your objects.
In Settings, select an output type and relevant parameters.
Browse to select the output file name.
Export the relevant objects in the relevant file format.
The Windows application or Web Mapping Service opens at the location of the selected objects.
Configure and save your map.
Import your map into Terramodel with IMAGE, if you want.

Export selected points, sets and plines, in a Google Earth .KML file, then open Google Earth to display the objects.

The colours of exported points, plines and sets match the colours displayed in Terramodel at the time of export.

Once you have located the data in Google Earth, change the rotation, tilt, colour and style and the visibility of points, lines, Geocomp Systems logo and other data layers. Reset the Tilt and Compass by View|Reset or by R key. Save the image by File|Save|Save Image...

Google Earth: Export objects to Google Earth .KML format then open the .KML with Google Earth or Google Earth Pro, if installed, to display the objects on the Google Earth global model.
Near Map: Export objects to Nearmap .KML and open NearMap with your default Internet browser. Login to Nearmap then open at the extents of the .KML to display an orthorectified image, but not the objects. To use the image in Terramodel, export the image as a .JPG with its georeferencing .JGW world file then add the image to IMAGE Manager.
Other WMS Map: Select a Web Map Service to open from a list. Settings not relevant to WMS are not selectable.
Show Point Elevs: Include any elevations in Google Earth point labels.
Show Point Numbers: Include point numbers in Google Earth point labels.
Show Object Names: Include object names in Google Earth labels.
Float above surface: Display objects at elevation if above the Google Earth surface. Turn off to display objects on the Google Earth surface.
Show Drop Lines: For objects displayed above the Google Earth Surface, also display extrusions between the object and the surface.
Fill Closed Plines: Fill closed plines with their pline colours.
Export images from Image manager: Export all images from Plan view that are visible in IMAGE and bundle into a .KMZ with the selected objects.
Text Scale: Specify the size of exported text.
Line width: Specify the line width of exported objects.
Icon Scale: Specify the size of point icons.
Icon name: Specify the name of the icons.
Fill transparency %: Specify the transparency for filled closed plines.
Interpolation of Points around Curves: Specify a maximum 3D distance and a chainage interval for interpolating points and chords around curves.

Specify a standard Google Maps icon to mark points on Google Earth in the point colour (not the icon colour). Enter the name and location of a .PNG file at http://maps.google.com/mapfiles/kml/.

For example,

Enter	to display this icon	from this URL
/shapes/open-diamond		http://maps.google.com/mapfiles/kml/shapes/open-diamond.png
/pushpin/wht-pushpin		http://maps.google.com/mapfiles/kml/pushpin/wht-pushpin.png
/paddle/wht-blank		http://maps.google.com/mapfiles/kml/paddle/wht-blank.png
/paddle/wht-circle-lv		http://maps.google.com/mapfiles/kml/paddle/wht-circle-lv.png

To fill closed plines or sets with their colours, select "Fill Closed Plines". For solid fill colours, select 0% transparency.

Pline boundaries created by SHADEDTM, SHADEISO and SHADESLP are always filled.

Use fill instead of hatching to reduce the file size.

To export images as well as objects, display only those images in Image Manager (IMAGE) and then, in GCKMLOUT, select "Export Images from Image Manager" to copy the image to a \Files folder and then zip those images with the .KML into a .KMZ file.

Select "Other WMS Map" to select a Web Map Service from a list. Each WMS serves a map of the location of the selected object or objects to your computer in a particular file format according to applicable settings. You may need to install or sign up to a corresponding service to view the map. If you want a WMS that is not on this list, please try the User-defined WMS or let us know.

Available Web Map Services include:

Mapconnect from Geoscience Australia
North Carolina 2010 Orthophoto from NCSU
Northern Territory from NTLIS
DMSG data from DM Solutions Canada
User-defined WMS
Nearmap from nearmap
Queensland Globe from Geoscience Australia
Google Maps from Google
Bing Maps from Microsoft
Open Street Map from OpenStreetMap
NSW SIX Maps from NSW LPI Spatial Information eXchange
Yahoo! Maps from Yahoo!

Once you have displayed the map, the image can be captured or exported for use in Terramodel Image Manager (IMAGE).
The coordinates are transformed from the selected geodetic coordinate system to latitudes and longitudes in the .KML or .HTML file. See GCCOORD or COORDCON.
To transform points from an arbitrary coordinate system, to a selectable geodetic coordinate system, use GC3DADJ or GC07.
The image quality is only as good as the data source.
You will need an Internet connection to view the data on the map.
"&" characters in names are not valid in .KML so are substituted by "and".
Leader lines and text borders are not exported. Text with leader lines are exported at the leader line location. Text with subject points are exported at the point locations.

Google Earth saved images are not orthorectified and have no registration file. They be added to IMAGE Manager and the manually Registered by picking a pair of Source points in Terramodel and corresponding Destination points on the image.

If Source points are not visible in the image, create them like this:

In Terramodel
1. Create or select two points far apart but within the area of interest
2. Use GCKMLOUT to export those points to Google Earth
In Google Earth
1. Save the image with the two points visible
2. Turn off the points
3. Save a second image
In Terramodel Image manager
1. Add the image that shows the points at corners with arbitrary locations
2. Include the pline box.
In Terramodel POINTS command
1. create new points at the locations of the points in the image
In Image manager,
1. detach the image
2. Add the second image at the corners of the pline box
3. Register using the new points as the Source and the original points as the Destinations.

TML date		Menu	Source
24/10/17		File\|Misc. Import\|Google Earth KML	Geocomp Update or $0

GCLABGRD

Create a north-south|east-west grid of plines, labels, or both, within multiple bounding plotboxes.

Select a layer for the grid lines, or select No Grid. The grid can be lines, ticks or dots (short plines)

Select a layer for the labels, or layer 0 for no labels.

Select easting and northing intervals for the grid.

For easting and northing labels, select layers, decimal places, styles, prefixes, suffixes, the number of spaces from the border and whether to label inside or outside the plotbox. The initial default suffixes are derived from the X and Y coordinate labels for the Plan view in VIEWSET.

Plot boxes can be any closed pline, including closed plines those created by PLANSET. Gridlines can cross a polygon up to 20 times.

Label all intersection points on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, and optionally Delta, Easting and Northing.

Chainages are labelled with "Ch".

The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an entered or graphically selected offset.

Label selected closed sets with EAT text showing the lot numbers and lot area.

The lot numbers are derived from the set names.

The areas up to 10,000 square units are labelled as m². Alternative areas above 10,000 square units are divided by 10,000 and labelled as Ha.

The precision of the basic and alternative areas is controlled by UNITSSET.

If you want feet and acres or other area unit labels, or you don't want to use EAT text, use LABELSETS instead.

Use commands such as LABELSETS, LOTJOIN, NAME, QSET and RENUMLOT to set the lot numbers as set names.

See also GCDIMLOT which labels dimensions using EAT text and GC80 which reports lot areas.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Text\|Lot numbers	Geocomp Update or $250	91

GCLABPEG

Create text labels at a specified offset from all points in a selected set, showing the word PEG followed by the point name and chainage.

Tick boxes enable extra labels for delta angle (to minutes or seconds) and coordinates.

Use PROJECTV to control the left/right direction.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCLABPNT

Label points with user-definable text labels at an offset perpendicular to a HAL on a specified layer with rounded rectangle borders and leader lines.

Enter the text and text style in the Settings.

The text can include EAT codes referring to the subject points.

To start a new line of text, use Ctrl Enter. To control the format of offsets, use UNITSSET Labeling. To label groups of subject points, enter \SUB{Group}.

For points on a HAL, create a temporary HAL to control the side on which to place the labels. If no HAL is selected, the insertion point of the text is the specified offset to the west of the point.

The border properties are fixed. These can be edited with commands such as EDIT and MATCHOBJ.

Points:: Select points to label
HAL:: Select a horizontal alignment
Offset:: Enter an offset from the HAL
Text layer:: Select a layer for the labels
Settings: Enter text for the label, which can include any EAT codes relevant to points. Also select a text style.
OK: Create text labels for each selected point.
Cancel: Close the command without creating text

Import lidar (light radar) survey points from .LAS or .LAZ files following a specification of the American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing.

.LAS files contain many points with with X, Y and Z coordinates and, sometimes, values for RGB (red|green|blue), Intensity, NIR (Near infra-red) or Classification.

.LAZ files contain compressed .LAS data.

Start by importing only the extents, which locates the possible range of points relative to your project and reports the comments in the heading of the file. Prepare any limits or filters, and then use GCLASIN again to import the points.

If not a .LAZ, skip to ".LAS extents" below
Click on Import
Change file type to .LAZ files
Select any .LAZ file to extract .LAS data from all .LAZ files in that folder
OK to return to Import dialog and select .LAS files

Specify "Import LAS File Data Extents ONLY".
Click Import
Select as many .LAS files as you want
Click Open to create pline boxes and text that show for each selected .LAS file the extents, file name and number of points.
Compare the boxes against your other data to determine which .LAS files are relevant.
Prepare or identify any limiting boundaries or corridor alignments.

Run GCLASIN again.
This time, do not select "Import LAS File Data Extents ONLY".
Choose any limits to reduce the number of points to import
Select Import
Select as many .LAS files as you want.
Import points from the selected files that are within the specified limits.

Limit the number of imported points

Boundary/Hal: Limit to a region by closed pline boundary or limit to a corridor by a maximum offset from an open HAL pline.
Max offset from HAL: Limit by maximum offset from a HAL and any Xlines. The default offset is 100m.
Closed Plines Layer: Limit by closed pline boundaries on a layer. 0 to deselect.
Limit RGB: Limit the range of colours defined by decimal Red, Green and Blue values to between Max 65536 and Min 0.
Limit intensity: Limit the range of intensity values to between Max 65536 and Min 0. Objects that reflect more light can have higher intensity.
Limit NIR: Limit the range of near-infrared radiation values to between Max 65536 and Min 0. High values of NIR can indicate life such as trees.
Limit Classification: Limit the classes to between Max 256 and Min 0. Codes for common classes 0 to 9 are displayed.

Optionally, divide the extents of X, Y and Z by the cube root of the entered maximum number, to define the number of cuboids and their extents, and then import one point from inside each cuboid, if any.

Enter a grid interval in project units, to create points on that X,Y grid with elevations derived from the mean of nearby points adjusted by the inverse squares of the distances from the points.

P3Pad reports for each .LAS file, the file name and path, comments from the file that explain the content, any boundaries used and filters applied, the number of points imported, the ranges of Intensity, Red, Green, Blue, NIR and Classification found in the file, and the time taken to import the data.

Properties found in the file can be used to filter the input by ranges. For example, select trees by high NIR, road pavements by low RGB, windows by high Intensity, overhead cables by the blueness of the reflected sky, or ground points by classification between 2 and 2.

If there are no RGB colours in the file, the groups, names, and colours are derived from the values of Intensity, if any. The point colours are derived from the colour in the current PALETTE and colourmap that most closely matches the RGB values or Intensity values (divided by 256) of the points in the file.

To approximate observed colours, often greys, browns and greens, for a .LAS with RGB values, manually create your own palette with up to 64 colours of the surveyed surface, with a corresponding colourmap of up to 255 colours, import the palette and colourmap with EDITINI and make them current with PALETTE.

To create points with colours that match colours in 3DVISUALISER and Visualizer, choose OldPal for your palette and Default for your colourmap.

To extract a .LAS file from a .LAZ, use GCLASIN or another application that uses LasTools. They cannot be extracted by typical unzipping utilities.

To import .LAS data only within a distance from control points on a layer, insert circle blocks with that radius onto a layer, explode those blocks then specify that layer for closed plines in GCLASIN.

Refer to the comments in the P3Pad report for any guidance about the coordinate system or units. If the coordinates are all close to 0,0, they might be in decimal degrees rather than metres or feet. If so, and you confirm when prompted, the longitudes and latitudes are converted to eastings and northings in the current From coordinate system specified by GCCOORD.

.LAS files can be very large. Use SYSTEM to set the maximum number of points in a .PRO file.

Export selected points to binary .LAS point cloud files following a specification of the American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing.

.LAS files contain many points with with X, Y and Z coordinates and RGB (red|green|blue) colours from the Terramodel point display colours.

Relayer and colour selected objects by name according to a comma-delimited mapping file with name, layer, colour.

PLAY.MAP is a supplied example mapping file.

To relayer but not recolour, leave the colour field empty.

See also PTLAYCOL, AUTODRAFT, LAYERMAP and CHNGNAME.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	40

GCLFAOUT

Trimble Quantm uses a linear_features.lfa file to define crossing requirements at linear features.

The set name defines the linear feature description and the layer name defines the linear feature label.

Sets must have all 3D points or all 2D points. If you have some 2D points in the set, assign elevations first, for example by DTMPTS or GC50. If a set has all 2D points, Quantm will interpolate from the DTM.

Export special zones using GCSZAOUT.

Export DTM data using GCTMAOUT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $POA

GCLINPTS

List points with an undefined easting or northing or both.

The report also lists the first available point number, the last point number and the maximum and minimum non-zero values for easting, northing or elevation, if any.

Points with undefined coordinates are most commonly created when RDE cannot compute the coordinates from the available survey information. Such points, and any sets connecting them, are not visible and thus not selectable by Window, Crossing or Inside controls. They can be selected by other controls, such as Record, View and Point number range.

Elevations are not considered. To select points with undefined elevations (2D points), see GCNOELEV.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCLLGRID

Create labelled plines representing latitude and longitude according to the selected Coordinate System.

The settings provide control over the coordinate system, pline spacing and labelling.

Change coordinate system

Select a coordinate system.

Labels...

Interval: Enter the grid line step. The default step interval is 1. For example, enter a value of 3 to label every third grid line.
Offset: Enter the distance in sheet units for the label offset from the edge of the pline box. The default value is 0.5 cm.
Decimals: Enter the number of decimal places for labels. If the seconds are not selected, this value is used for minutes. If minutes are not selected, degrees. For example, to label in the form DDD MM SS.ss, include seconds in Label Components, and enter a value of 2 seconds. For the form DDD MM.dddd, untick seconds and enter 3 decimal places. For DDD.dddd, untick seconds and minutes and enter 4 decimals. Degree signs ° are represented by the character \176 unless changed by a project variable.
Textstyle: Select the text style for latitude and Longitude labels. If labels appear to be missing, they may simply be too small or too large. If labels cross the pline box, you may want to edit them.
Label Components: Enter any required prefix or suffix. For example, for Southern latitudes, use "-" prefix or "S" suffix.

Grids...

Grid interval: Enter the grid interval in seconds of arc. The default interval is 10. For Longitude, one second of arc is approximately 30.9 metres. For Latitude, one second of arc varies from approximately 30.9 metres at the equator to 0 at the poles.
Resolution: Enter the number of pline control points per grid interval. More vertices better approximate the true curve but take longer to compute. For example, with an interval of ten seconds of arc, for a pline segment every two seconds, enter a resolution of five.

Import|Export

Save the label grid settings file format version between projects.

To label grids in multiple boundaries, enter GCLLGRID M at the command line.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		HDMS\|Coordinate\|Draw latitude and longitude grid	Geocomp Update or $250

GCLNGIN

Import long section as a pline in the profile view

Label points in selected sets with a single text object showing elevations from both an existing DTM and a design DTM at that location, or the elevation difference between the DTMs.

For each point, the text is oriented along the longest of the two connecting segments on the first lot tested.

The design elevation is labelled with F/S.

The text can have a leader line.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCLPTS

List the coordinates and some properties of selected points to a P3Pad or .CSV report. GCLPTS replaces LPOINTS which does not include options to report the RDE status, Group, CSV or Ranges.

The Options include any permutation of Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, RDE status, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number, Group or Range and whether to also export to a comma-separated .CSV file.

RDE Status shows, by Yes or No, whether the point is associated with the Raw data editor. If Yes, some points may also have a status code which, in combination with the listed coordinates, and remarks in RDE, can help you work out which points have been fixed in RDE or changed outside of RDE. RDE points that have been deleted in Plan view, can be marked as ignored by RDE and are listed with *,*,* coordinates by GCLPTS — if selected by View; they cannot be selected by Window. RDE points that have been moved outside of RDE are marked as ignored by RDE. Points with unknown RDE status codes are reported with "?", which usually indicates some edit outside RDE. Use Previous to select these points with unknown codes by a command such as RELAYER, or even GCLPTS again.

Select Ranges to append to the P3Pad report the first available point number, the last point number used and the coordinate ranges.

Geocomp Update installs GCLPTS for LIST Points. LIST also lists Layers, Objects, Unused Points, Sets, Plines and Lots.

See also LPTSRAD which also reports bearing and distance from a stand point and PORTSC1 which reports heights as depths.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Reports\|List [Points]	Geocomp Update or $250	26

GCMAGNET

Assign names, elevations, numbers and feature attributes to points from text created by Topcon Magnet.

Once you have surveyed using Topcon Magnet, transfer your data to Terramodel with point properties and linework.

In Magnet

Complete your survey
Make any edits such as adding lines
Export using AutoCAD with Text Fields
Select .DWG or .DXF file format

Then, in Terramodel

Save your project
File, Download\Import
Import AutoCAD .DWG or .DXF
Run GCMAGNET command
Select all points from Magnet (e.g., by View)
Specify "Delete matching text records"
OK

Points and text are processed in record number order. Do not make any edits that interfere with this order after importing from .DWG or .DXF and before running GCMAGNET.
If you select "Delete matching text records", any remaining text indicates discrepancies.
In data from .DWG files, the record numbers of text records from Magnet follow the points. From .DXF, they precede the points. Both formats work OK, but .DWG format has a more compact file.
Adjacent record numbers of any text on on PNTNO, PNTELEV, PNTDESC and PNTATTRS layers are assigned to the Point number, Elevation, Name and Feature attributes respectively.
The point number is changed to the value of any text on the PNTNO layer. If a point already exists with that number, that point is first renumbered to the next available point number.
Text on the PNTELEV layer is not used if the point already has an elevation with higher precision. If the point has no elevation, the value is used. If the difference between the two elevations is significant, the text is not deleted and the difference and the old or new point number is reported to message scroll.
The point name is changed to the value of any text on the PNTDESC layer.
The feature attribute of the point is changed to the value of any text on the PNTATTRS layer.
Lines created in Magnet joining points with varying elevations are imported as sets
Lines created in Magnet joining plines with the same elevation are imported as plines. GCMAGNET deletes these plines are replaces them with sets joining the points.
The names do not include string numbers. To transfer points to Terramodel with string numbers but not strings drafted in Magnet, export a CSV file using a custom report that combines names and strings into a single feature code. Then import the .CSV into Terramodel and run AUTODRAFT. With this method, you do all the edits in Terramodel.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCMAPIN

Import contours from a .MAP file interpolated from Shuttle Radar Topograhy Mission (SRTM) data.

Create a file of layer names of selected objects.

The .MAP file is in the format:

Old layer name, New layer name

New layer names match the layer names of the objects; in old layer names, any character that is not a letter, digit, -, _ or $, is substituted with _, to be consistent with DXF files created by DXFOUT.

To replace layer names in a DXF file:

Create objects in Terramodel with suitable layer names.
Use GCMAPOUT to create the initial.MAP file.
Use a text editor to define the new layer names
Use DXFOUT to export objects to a 2000 format .DXF file.
Use DXFCHANG to replace layer names in the DXF file.

Terramodel layer names can be up to 17 characters long, yet DXF layer names can have up to 255 or 2049 characters depending on the CAD software. With GCMAPOUT and DXFCHANG, create .DXF files with longer layer names and more characters.

To modify the layer names of objects in the project file:

Use GCMAPOUT to create the initial .MAP file.
Use a text editor to define the new layer names
Use LAYERMAP to replace layer names

Display temporary vertex markers on visible plines. To turn off the markers, run GCMARKER again or refresh the display with REDRAW or similar.

To use GCMARKER with other commands, create a GCMARKER button in a toolbox.

The marker size is set by SYSTEM. The colour is the cursor colour which can be configured by EDITINI. Restart Terramodel after making any changes to configuration.

MKV also displays temporary markers, for a single pline or set. Markers turned on or off by MKV are toggled off or on by GCMARKER, and vice versa.

See also F8 and F8T which display point markers.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	60

GCMATCH

Create new contour segments across the gaps. Then JOIN to create contiguous contours.

Use GCMATCH to match contours at sheet edges and cross gaps at labels.

Also match sets within a tolerance.

See also DTMMATCH which edge-matches overlapping DTMs and MATCH and MATCHOBJ which modify selected properties of objects to match a picked object.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCMATIN

Add to, modify or replace the road materials by importing from a file.

The list is exported by GCMATOUT.

Each material has a name, shrink/swell factor, colour, and is classed as embankment, unsuitable or neither.

Use the Road Material Manager (MATERIALS) to edit materials.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCMATOUT

Import into another project using GCMATIN.

Each material has a name, shrink/swell factor, colour, and is classed as embankment, unsuitable or neither.

Use the Road Material Manager (MATERIALS) to edit materials.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCMERGE

Create a final layer by merging multiple regions from layers in a sequential layer list.

The objects on the Initial DTM layer are first copied to the Final DTM layer. Then, for each layer in a layer list in alphabetical order, objects in the Final DTM are clipped to boundaries on the listed layer then all the objects from the listed layer are copied into the Final DTM layer. Breaklines are also draped onto the Final DTM 2 mm inside the clipping boundaries. The process is repeated in alphabetical order for each layer in the layer list.

The clipping boundaries are at the "Clip Dist" outside the region boundaries. Make the Clip Dist greater than 3 mm to reduce potential crossing breakline problems.

If "Use DTM Edge" is specified, one region boundary is created for each DTM layer. Otherwise, every closed set with more than three segments is a region boundary.

GCMERGE can be used to merge multiple surveys or design components into big models. If you use GCMERGE to build an end-of-month DTM, spell layer names so the alphabetical order is also the data order (for example, EOM 09 20090822A).

Import multiple ASCII coordinate files in common formats.

Specify whether the files is space-separated .PTS or comma-separated .CSV.
Select a data order from this list: E N Z, N E Z, P E N Z, P N E Z, P E N Z D, P N E Z D, E N Z D or N E Z D.
Next
Browse to select a file to import. If the file extension is not .PTS or .CSV, select from All files.
Click next again to import another file of the same format
Click Cancel when you have completed importing all the files.

Lines with unexpected data, such as blank fields, letters or spaces, header lines and * for elevations are skipped.

Deep negative elevations are read as 2D.

See also GCPTSIN, IMPORT, GCCSVIN and so on.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	in-built help		Geocomp Update or $200

GCMULCON

To use GCMULCON:

Set the contour interval using CONTOURSET
Copy or relayer the contour plines to a single layer
Run GCMULCON
Pick the layer with the contour plines
Pick a starting contour height
Pick two locations to define a line across multiple contour plines
The command computes two possible elevations for the last contour, one for uphill and one for downhill.
Apply one of the two end elevations to all the selected contour plines

GCMULCON correctly allows for the line to cross the same contour multiple times.

This is similar to LABELCONTOURS, except the elevations are assigned rather than read.

See also GCONECON, GCCONTXT, GCMATCH, GCRIVER and PLTO3D.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	258

GCMULTDC

Create a roading .DC file of alignments for every selected 3D set.

See also GCDCOUT and IMPORT Roading DC files.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCMULTGD

Create one Geodimeter roadline .RLN file for each set containing horizontal and vertical alignment only.

Use for uploading strings for set-out onto a Geodimeter.

Create an .xml file of alignments for every selected 3D set.

See also GCXMLOUT and IMPORT LandXML files.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCMULVOL

Compute volumes within boundaries for materials defined by pairs of DTM surfaces listed in a table.

The volumes are computed between each sequential pair of DTM or depth surfaces.

Bdys:: Select limiting boundaries.
Create CSV File: Create a .CSV file with fields for Start Surface, Finish Surface, Boundary Name, Material, Cut Volume, Cut Area, Fill Area, Boundary Area and Boundary Perimeter.
Exclude Dead Regions: Omit volumes within dead regions.
Top and Bottom: Enter pairs of top and bottom layers, and material names, limited by an existing DTM and a Design DTM.
Top Down: Enter of list of layers and materials starting from the top surface. The second and subseqent layers can be elevation surfaces or depth surfaces.
Define surfaces and materials: Enter a table of surfaces and materials.
Compute Volumes: Report volumes of the materials within each boundary between each pair of surfaces. For Top and Bottom, the volumes are of cut and fill. For Top down, the volumes are cut only.
Cancel: Close without computing volumes.

The selected boundaries may represent mining "blocks".

Copy the name of an object onto selected objects.

Copy name from objs:: Select the object with the name to be copied
To Objs:: Select the objects to be renamed
OK: Rename selected objects
Cancel: Close without changing any names

The name of a text object is the text of that object. The name of a block is the block definition of that object. Block objects can be renamed by selecting a different block.

See also NAME, NAMEPTS, NAMESETS, PTS2NAME, CHNGNAME and NAMECASE.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCNAMEPT

Rename points along a set from a starting integer with optional prefix and suffix.

Select all points within a specified tolerance of any set or pline on a layer for selection by Previous in another command.

Set and Pline layer:: Select a layer of sets and plines
Points:: Select points to be considered; Tolerance:; Enter a maximum horizontal distance
Select only Points "Near Line" to selected Sets and Plines: Update the current selection set of objects to only the points within tolerance
Cancel: Cancel without updating the current Terramodel selection set

Use GCNEARLN to select points
Run a command to process the selected points, such as COLOUR, DELETE, or GCLPTS.
Select records by Right-mouse Previous
Complete the command

Another way to select objects near a set or pline is to use the NearLine select control.

Make all the objects to select visible.
Note the record number of the set or pline (or include the record in the clipboard).
Run the command in which the objects are to be selected.
Select by NearLine.
Click on the black dot.
Enter an offset.
Select the set or pline by mouse or enter r= the record number.

To select all the points in the selected set, use the default offset of 0.000.

To select any other objects, enter a positive offset value even if they are right on the line. Objects are selected if they fall within both the linear extent and the distance on either side.

Points, sets and plines must be entirely within the extents. Text and blocks must have insertion points within the extents.

The reference set or pline can be selected even when sets or lines are turned off on Search settings.

Import Grid (.NED) data created by Trimble Quantm for Alignment Planning.

GCESRIIN imports similar data files created by other applications.

Import NMEA strings tagged as $GPGGA´ from GPS receivers.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCNOELEV

Select all objects from selected points, sets, plines, text and blocks that have no elevation.

Use the Previous selection of the right-mouse-button to use these objects in another command.

Sets are also selected if all connected points have no elevations.

In other commands, objects with no elevation report elevations of *.

GC50 interpolates elevations from 3D points onto 2D points in the same set.

GC53 retains the elevation on the point but excludes the point from any DTM surface.

GC69 turns points with elevation = 0 into 2D points with elevation = *.

GCCONCHK interpolates elevations from 3D points with identical elevations onto 2D points in the same set.

GCLINPTS lists points with no easting or no northing.

DTMPTS interpolates elevations from a DTM onto 2D points.

2D objects can also be selected using the right-mouse-button for any desired filter then for

inside an elevation range, by AND Elev and enter range
outside an elevation range, by AND NOT Elev and enter range.
with any elevation, by AND and Elev and enter range * to *
with no elevation by AND NOT Elev and enter ranges * to *

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|More...\|Select 2D points	Geocomp Update or $250	88

GCOBJIN

Import points and faces in Wavefront .OBJ format.

Import the vertices as points, and optionally the faces as well.

.OBJ files can 3D models of solids, point clouds, laser scans and so on.

OBJ files can contain other object types such as NURBS surfaces and splines. Simplify these into triangles using another application before running GCOBJIN.

Import a DTM surface to Wavefront .OBJ format.

Select a DTM layer and any limiting boundary, select Settings and then specify the name and location of the output file.

.OBJ files can be used to display 3D models in applications such as CloudCompare and Microsoft Office 2016.

Pick the set, offset, elevation difference and side.

Pick the set, then

if you know the offset and the direction of the set, enter the values
if you know the offset, but not the direction, enter the offset and pick the side
if you don't know the offset or direction, pick a location to enter the offset and side

See also MULTIOFF, OFFSETPOINT, OFFELEV, GC99, OFFELEVM, LAYOUT and SIDESLOPE.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	71

GCOFLINE

Select all points in selected sets for selection by Previous in another command.

Sets:: Select sets
Include Arc Centre Points:: Include or exclud arc centre points
Select all Points "OfLine" selected Sets: Update the current selection set of objects to only the points in selected sets
Cancel: Cancel without updating the current Terramodel selection set

Use GCOFLINE to select points in sets
Run a command to process the selected points, such as COLOUR, DELETE, or GCLPTS.
Select records by Right-mouse Previous
Complete the command

Another way to select points in a set is to use the OfLine select control.

When selecting objects in a command, select OfLine in the Right-mouse button menu.

Click on the black dot then select a set.

The reference set or pline can be selected even when sets are turned off on Search settings.

Modify the elevation of one contour pline or set at a time and increment up or down.

Set the intended contour interval using CONTOURSET
Copy or relayer the contour plines to a single layer (optional)
Run GCONECON
Enter a contour elevation
Pick a pline or set
- The elevation is modified
- The colour is modified
- The default elevation for the next contour is reset

The "contour" can be a pline or set.
The colour of the completed contours is always modified to 3.
Specify whether the elevation of the next contour to be selected is Up or Down by the contour interval or the Same.

Geocomp SDS data consists of at least two files with the same name and certain file extensions. The name must be a six-digit integer for DOS Geocomp to read them.

Points

The points file (.PTS) contains the easting, northing, elevation and a standpoint number. The standpoint is 0 when exported from Terramodel. If point has no elevation in Terramodel, the elevation is -9999 in the PTS file, which means no elevation. The point number is derived from the line number.

Strings

The string file (.STR) contains the stringing for those points. The STR file is automatically created with the .PTS file of the same name. Each string has a description (see below) and an entity (see below). The string number is the line number in the string file.

Annotation

The annotation file (.ANT) contains text. This file is only created when text is selected and not exploded. EAT codes in text are replaced with the value. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and new line by two spaces.

Description

The description is the first 20 characters of the name in the .STR file. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and , by ;.

Entity

Geocomp data are divided into entities ranging from 1 to 999 in the .STR file. To set the entities, chose from:

Match record name with short entity name
Match record name with moss code
Match record name with long entity name
Use group number of record
Decode the layer name from the first few characters (e.g. get entity 102 from layer 102_TOP.)

Choose whether you want to explode blocks, linetypes or text.

The maximum number of points or strings that Geocomp 9.x can read is approximately 32,000. For Geocomp 10.08, 10.1 and 10.2, the maximum is approximately 132,000.

Type	EXT	Command
Cross sections	CES	EXPORTGC and GC37
Contours	CON	GCCONOUT
Digital Terrain Models	DTM	GCDTMOUT
Horizontal alignments	HAL	GCHALOUT
Vertical Alignments	VER	GCVEROUT

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		File\|Misc. Export\|Geocomp PTS + STR	Geocomp Update or $250	68

GCPAD

Create a new set on the current layer, at an offset of 0.005 inside a a lot or pad at the specified elevation.

Select one or more boundaries defining a lot or pad, enter a new elevation and select a location inside all selected boundaries.

Pan to the adjacent screen in the direction of the numeric keypad.

As shown in the following table, type in GCPAN, a space and a numeric keypad button indicating the direction.

NW = GCPAN 7

 N = GCPAN 8

NE = GCPAN 9

 W = GCPAN 4

 E = GCPAN 6

SW = GCPAN 1

 S = GCPAN 2

SE = GCPAN 3

If you want to use a mouse to move to a location, Shift while holding down the middle mouse wheel, or select PAN, RECENTER, GC34 or the VPAN toolbox in the Geocomp workspace.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Secured	133

GCPANEL

Create points to set out concrete roadway panels given a panel alignment, start chainage, panel gap and hole edge distance.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $500

GCPAVSET

Specify a roadway, pavement depth, as-built layer, chainage range, an interval, offsets (in m) and export CSV file name.

The CSV file includes at the specified offsets, for every xline or interval, the chainage and the difference in mm between design elevations interpolated from the road design and as-built elevations interpolated from the as-built DTM layer.

The optional report also shows the road name and description, layer depth, design elevation and as-built elevations.

If elevations cannot be interpolated from both surfaces at any offset, the output files are deleted with a warning.

You may need to use GC91 or similar to extend the surfaces beyond the as-built points to ensure that elevations can be interpolated. The xlines at the reported offsets should be at chainages of the as-built points. The specified chainage range should not exceed the as-built surface.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $250

GCPILE

Create points for each pile given alignments, chainage range, spacing, offsets, elevation and pile numbers.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	340

GCPLFIN

Import and edit plot files in HP-GL and HP-GL/2 format.

Import HP-GL or HP-GL/2 plot file from Geocomp or other software if you don't have the source data, or you just want to send the plot to a Windows printer which does not support HP-GL or HP-GL/2.

Lines: PD, PU, PA, PR
Pen numbers: SP
End of page: PG, NR, Esc%01A
Arcs: AA
Text labels: LB, LO, SI, SL, DI
Page size: PS

Polyline-encoding: PE
Color and pen mapping: PC, PW
and all the others

The supported commands make up most HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plot files

Plot files which have been polyline-encoded to reduce the file size, including those from Terramodel, are not supported. </p

Specify colour mapping during import.

Use the pen carousel to define the pen thickness and colour for each pen.

The plot is placed in the current layer in the sheet view in at the specified location.

Everything is imported as plines.

Dimensions are in sheet units.

The text labels use TMODELF font. Change the font with TEXTMETRICS or FONTCHNG.

If a .PDF contains vector linework, extract these to HP-GL or .DXF with a third-party converter.

Terramodel can print to a PDF printer.

To import Geocomp .PLT files, see GCPLTIN.
Use GCPLFIN rather than GCPLTIN, to closely approximate Geocomp plots.
Create a PLF from your PLT with SDS 94, RDP 494, or PU4.
Linework and symbols are converted to plines.
If the first character in the Geocomp .CMD file is *, text is retained as labels, otherwise text is exploded to plines.
While Geocomp can be configured to output PLF files to suit almost any vector plotter, GCPLFIN is optimised to import PLF files in HP-GL format.
If you specify the Geocomp pen number to equal the Terramodel colour number, and map the colour number to equal the Terramodel pen number, the selected Terramodel pen carousel will use the same pen numbers as the Geocomp plot.

In Geocomp

Copy GCPLFIN.CMD from C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp to C:\GC10\CFG as OTHER.CMD
Configure Geocomp to use OTHER plotter format
Create a .PLT, for example using Geocomp command SDS 93
"Send plotter instructions to disk file" using Geocomp command SDS 94 or PU 4.

In Terramodel

Configure a carousel
Add a plotter configuration for your Windows plotter and carousel
Create a new Terramodel project
Open the Sheet view
Set a suitable current layer
Run GCPLFIN command
Edit the plot if required.
Plot at 1:1 scale to your Windows plotter (unless you want a different scale).

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $125

GCPLTIN

The Geocomp PLT file format is unique to Geocomp DOS. The font, character height, character width, label origin, orientation and slant are set in the PLT using the entity definition in the Geocomp plot parameter file.

Modify text by commands including TEXTMETRICS, TXTSCALE, TEXTALIGN, TEXTCASE, TEXTFIT, GCTXTFIT and ALIGNTXT.

Layer

Layers are determined by the entity of the record and the selected Geocomp entity file.

Font

The Geocomp font is substituted by the Terramodel font used in the text style nominated for that font. Some suggested equivalents:

Geocomp font	Terramodel font
0	iso3098b, tmodelp
5	tc-romns
10	tmodelf, tc-mono
98	subdiv
99	iso3098b, tmodelp

Character height

The character height is derived directly from the character height in the PLT file text record.

Aspect ratio and text width.

The aspect ratio in Terramodel is the character width in the PLT file multiplied by the width factor divided by the character height in the Geocomp PLT file [Aspect ratio = width * factor / height]. The width of a text record is dependent on the Terramodel font, character width, width factor and characters used. Leave the width factor as 1.0 unless you want to consistently stretch or compress text from a certain font.

Colours

Select Terramodel colour numbers to substitute for Geocomp pen numbers 1 to 20. Use PLOTSET, PLOTTERSET and CAROUSEL to control the colours and thicknesses on paper. Use PALETTE to control the display colours.

Linetype

Numbered Geocomp linetypes are substituted by linetypes of the same name, otherwise Solid is used. These linetypes can be loaded from GC9.LIN.

Symbols and blocks

Geocomp symbols are substituted with the closest equivalent Terramodel point symbol, unless "Use Terramodel blocks instead of point symbols" is enabled, in which case the matching Geocomp symbol block is used. For example, Geocomp symbol 68 (+) is labelled with point symbol 34 or block GCSYM068.

File format

To import HP-GL/2 files, see GCPLFIN. Use GCPLTIN rather than GCPLFIN, if you don't want to explode linetypes and text.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $125	FC D

GCPRFEDT

Edit an Intersection Point from a vertical alignment profile in the profile view.

Val

Select a vertical alignment pline

Settings

Set Max Grade: Limit the curve to a specified maximum grade
Set Min Grade: Limit the curve to a specified minimum grade; Set Grade increment; Limit the grade precision to a specified increment
Compute volume after each change of alignment: Compute volumes from cross-sections where possible
OK: Accept changes to settings
Cancel: Cancel changes to settings

Mode

Add: Add or insert a vertical curve of a specified length at a location
VC Length: Modify the length of the vertical curve at an IP
Delete: Delete a specifed IP
Raise/Lower: Add an elevation difference to a range of IPs
Drag: Move an IP by the difference between two locations
Block Drag: Move a range of IPs by the difference between two locations
Break VC: Break a vertical curve into two vertical curves at a chainage | station
2 Grades: Create a new IP at the intersection of two grades defined by four IPs.
Report: Report the alignment of the profile
Volume: Report volumes between cross-sections using the current RoadJob

OK

Compute the changes to the vertical alignment

Close

Close without making further changes

Create profiles along multiple HALs interpolated from multiple DTMs.

Hals:: Select horizontal alignment records or select no records to use the active alignment only.
DTM Layer List: Select DTM layers by a layer list or [None] to select visible layers.
Delete previous profiles: Delete any previously created plines in the profile view that refer to the selected HALs
Create Profiles: For each HAL, create profile plines in the Profile view, referenced to its HAL, interpolated from break points in each selected DTM layer, with the colours, linetypes, object names and layer names from the DTM layers.
Cancel: Cancel the command

The profiles are broken at the edges of the DTM and within dead areas.

If an alignment is active, GCPROFIL, by selecting no records and no layer list, creates profiles from the same DTMs as PROFILE does by breaks and * for DTM layer mask.

Import data from a TPSetout/TPStakeout .PTA survey points file.

See also TPSETOUT for exporting to TPSetout and TPSTKOUT for exporting to TPStakeout.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCPTDIST

Report record number, layer name and point numbers for each segment.

Indicate with **** whether any segment is less than a specified maximum distance.

Report average distance between points for each set and overall.

Use GCPTSDIST to show that you have taken sufficient observations in surveys of linear features such as roads.

Use GCDIVIDE to interpolate points at a minimum distance.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCPTSIN

Import points from an ASCII file containing point definitions compatible with another software product.

Source: Select the ASCII file format for the source point data.
Duplicate: Renumber, Discard, or Overwrite duplicate points.
Start Pt: Enter the starting point number for renumbering duplicate points in this command only. The default is greater than existing point numbers in the file and the start point number in POINTSET.
Import Points: Opens the Import File dialog box to specify the name and path of the input file and import the points.

Select from a range of coordinate survey formats.

Agtek (.ASC or .AGT)
Civilsoft (1 and 2) (.CVL)
Geopak (.TXT)
Lewis and Lewis (.LEW)
Lietz SDRMap (.ASC)
LisCAD (.TXT)
TDS (.TXT)
Wildsoft (.TXT)
Lat-Long (.TXT)
Geocomp Control (.CRD)
Geocomp Field coordinates .(FLD)
Trimble E N D (.PTS)
Carlson Raw (.RW5)
Trimble Recon LM80 (.TXT)
Desc East North Elevation (.PTS)
Leica (.CST)
ASCII GPS (.ASC)
Leica GSI16 (.GSI)
Geodimeter Area (.ARE or .AGA)
LandXML (.XML)
Trimble RTX (.XML)

Point_ID,Point_descriptor,latitude_ddd.mmss,longitude_ddd.mmss,elevation

426,BLDG,-37.49050916,145.0909342,109.000

Create an ASCII file containing point definitions compatible with other software products.

Select from a range of coordinate survey point formats for uploading into survey instruments for setout.

Pts: Select the points to be transferred
Target: Select the target software format.
Report Editor: Export to P3Pad, where you can view the results, add comments, etc., prior to saving the file.
Direct to File: Export directly to a selected file
SDR Job Heading: If the target is an SDR Job, enter a heading
Export: Export the report to P3Pad, or browse to export to a specified the output file.

CivilSoft 1 and 2
Geopak
Lewis and Lewis
Lietz SDRMap
LisCAD
TDS ASCII
Wildsoft
Leica with 8 character descriptions .GRE
Leica with 8 character descriptions .GSI
Leica with 16 character descriptions .GSI
Sokkia SDR2x
Sokkia SDR33
Geodimeter Area .ARE
Nikon 700 series Upload
Geocomp Field .FLD
Geocomp Control Point .CRD
Trimble $PTNL,PJK .TXT
Leica 1200 LandXML
Trimble Recon LM80

The Job name field is currently only used with Sokkia formats.

Some of the formats have been modified slightly compared with the similar PTSOUT, such as adopting Easting/Northing order.

Points with undefined (*) easting or northing, are not exported. Points with undefined elevation (2D points), may be exported depending on the format. With some formats, choose whether to export the point number or the point name.

Change the elevations or names of points imported from 2D CAD drawings where the points are labelled with text objects.

Text Objs: Select text objects.
Pts Layer: Select points by layer
Tol: Enter a tolerance for the distance from point to the text.
Replace All: Replace all elevations or names, or just those which do not already have elevations or names.
Delete if changed: Delete text objects for those points which have been changed.
Pt Elevation | Pt Name: Replace either the point elevations or the point names.
Insertion Pt | Centroid: Measure the tolerance to the insertion points of the text or to the centroids of the text boxes.
OK: Modify the points.
Close: Close the command.

Purge all blocks which are not used in the project.

To delete unused blocks nested in other unused blocks, select Repeat.

If you import a DWG with blocks, the block definitions remain in the project even if you delete the block objects. Purging these blocks can reduce the project file size substantially, especially if each block has a unique name.

GCPURGE is faster than the Purge in BLOCK. For hundreds of blocks this can mean seconds rather than hours.

If you have missing external blocks, run DELBLKS first.

TML date			Source
08/02/22		Draw\|Block\|Purge all unused	Geocomp Update or $200

GCQA

Compare points in a survey against a design DTM.

The report shows the chainage, offset, design DTM elevation (=rl), point elevation (=fl) and elevation difference (dz) for each selected point.

You have the option to ignore points outside the DTM extent and specify a stripping depth.

The chainage and offset is computed relative to the active alignment.

Display profiles (or cross sections) interpolated from DTM layers between two locations.

Pick layers, a section display method, locations in a view (typically, Plan view) then move the mouse to display profiles in the XSect view between those locations.

DTM | Layer List: Select a DTM layer or a DTM layer list.
Line: Select From and To locations to display profiles along a line between them.
Shift: Select From and To locations to display profiles along a line and then move the To location to display profiles parallel to that line.
Rotate: Select About location and then move the To location to display profiles along the line between the two.
Alignment: If an active alignment has been set, select a From location by chainage and offset to display profiles at the chainage of the To location along a line from the left offset to the right offset.

No objects are created. The view scale and length of profiles are automatically adjusted.

Profiles are only shown where the DTMs are valid and not in a dead region.

Move a selected point of intersection along a horizontal or vertical alignment to a new location and calculate the resulting cut and fill roadway quantities.

Road: Select a road job.
Hor or Ver Align: Select an Intersection Point (IP) in a horizontal or vertical alignment.
New IP Loc: Enter the new location for the selected IP.
Re Calc Volume: Report new cut and fill quantities from the modified alignment, the original alignments and the stored templates, to the Message Scroll.

Define your road with Roadjob Manager (ROADJOB), Shape manager (SHAPEMAN), Template Manager (TEMPLATE) and alignment managers (HALMANAGER and VALMANAGER) first.
Undo (UNDO) after each modification to return the alignment to its previous form.
GCQV is an improved version of QV.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	RG 1244		Geocomp Update or $250

GCREDRAW

Redraw all view modes.

If the current view is the Plan view, and "Fix View scale" is off in EDITINI, first change the plan view scale so that point labels created by F7, F8, F9 and F11 are a consistent, small but legible height as you zoom in and out. If "Fix view scale" is on, do not adjust the plan view scale, and all point labels change size during zooming. Those point label heights can be adjusted in EDITINI.

GCREDRAW is similar to the Viewscale Default for Pt Labels button (VIEWSCAL) followed by REDRAW.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		View\|Redraw for labels Toolbar button	Geocomp Update or $200	132

GCRENUM

Sequentially renumber points in selected sets, starting at the highest point number in the project plus one.

See also RENUM, RENUMBER, REVERSE and GCNAMEPT.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	129

GCREPORT

Start a new report in P3Pad editor by clearing any current report or opening a new P3Pad report window.

Any new report created by a Terramodel command, will replace, or add to the end of, any currently open report. To keep a report, select File from the P3Pad menu then Save As...

Editor features include Text formatting, Print Preview, Find and Replace, Insert Date and Time and Embed or Insert objects such as images.

The P3Pad report editor can be used to edit Terramodel reports, or write new text. The reports can be Saved and Opened in Text or Rich Text (RTF) formats. Use TXT format to reuse in commands such as TEXT or TXTIN.

Changes to page setup, typeface or font size for new reports take effect only after you close the report editor.</p

To configure the page setup and fonts during the current Terramodel session only:

Run any Terramodel command that generates a P3Pad report
Use File|Page setup menu to configure the paper size, orientation and margins
Use Format|Font menu to configure the font style, size and colour
Use Format|Paragraph menu to configure the paragraph indentation
Use Format|Tabs menu to configure the tabs
Close the P3Pad report
Generate a new report.

To reset the configuration to defaults:

Exit Terramodel
Start a new session.

To configure the default font name, size (in points), left margin (in inches) and top margin (in inches) :

Take a copy of C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\P3PAD_REPORT_TMODWIN.INI
Edit that file with a text editor
Run EDITINI
1. Show Old INI file ;
2. Browse to select and open that file ;
3. Select [Report] ;
4. Import selected sections ;
5. OK ;
6. Close

To save all format and content changes to the document:

Save As.. Rich Text Format (.RTF).

To save content without formatting:

Save As... Text document (.TXT)

To configure the printer used by P3Pad reports:

Use Windows Settings or Control Panel to configure the default Windows printer.

To preview the report, including margins:

Use File|Print preview or configure the default printer as a PDF printer.

To configure the name and address in the headings:

Use SYSTEM.

To configure the project description in the headings:

Use PROJINFO.
The description is not shown if the project name and path are too long.

To line up columns:

Use a font such as Courier New or Courier Prime Code which is fixed width (and displays m² correctly).

To use a different editor such as WORDPAD or NOTEPAD:

Copy and paste or save and open.

To find and replace characters in a report:

In P3Pad, use Ctrl-H or select Replace from the Edit menu.

To find and replace characters in a report saved to a text file:

Use SNRFILE.

To import or display the report saved as a text file:

Use TXTIN to import as lines of text, TEXT to display the file as text or CSV2TAB to import a table as text and plines.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	201

GCREVIEW

The only attribute that is changed is the View mode. The coordinates are retained.

The objects are removed from the original view, unless you do not "Delete Old".

Review a point from Plan to XSect: A point in the PLAN View with Easting X = 1000, Northing Y = 2000 and Elevation Z = 100 when reviewed to the XSECT view becomes Offset X = 1000, Elevation Y = 2000 and Chainage Z = 100.
Import profile: If you have an ASCII file of a profile in the format "Chainage,Elevation" you could IMPORT into the PLAN view then review to the PROFILE view.
Rotate a copy in 3D: Review objects from the Plan view to View 8, without deleting them. Then use GC3DROT to rotate the copied objects.

See also REVIEW which always deletes the objects from the original view.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 1246	Modify\|ReView	Geocomp Update or $250

GCRIVER

Create a point wherever a 2D "river" pline crosses a pline representing a contour, with the elevation of the contour pline then create a set along the path of the river pline and interpolate elevations along the set.

For best results, remove flat triangles in LINKSET before forming the terrain model.

See also GC50, GCONECON, GCMULCON, GCCONTXT and ELVPLINE.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	185

GCRLNOUT

Export an Roadline 3D (.RLN) file with "roadway templates", and "side templates" from a HAL and VAL at xlines crossing selected sets.

The .RLN file is suitable for uploading to Geodimeter Program 39 using Geodimeter Software Tools or the .RLN Upload Script (EXPORT).

Select "Use names" to include names in the .RLN file.

Select "Limit 12 Pts" if uploading, as only 12 points can be uploaded for each side template. Alternatively, if the file is to be imported into Terramodel using a .RLN Import script (IMPORT) for editing in a Roadway, the limit is not required.

The station | chainage, offset, elevation, elevation difference and % grade are reported to P3Pad.

Rotate objects around a location by an angle or by the deflection between two bearings.

To rotate sets, select the points.

At the prompts for angles and bearings, right-mouse-click allows for entry by Bearing and Angle, selecting a segment or selecting two locations.

See also ROTATE, RTSCALE, ROT3D, GC3DROT and GC07.

TML date			Source
08/03/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCRUNWAY

Report the conformance at defined offsets of a runway DTM relative to a roadway of the design.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCSCALE

Multiply X (Easting), Y (Northing) or Z (Elevation) of selected objects by scale factors, relative to a location.

Values entered into each field are stored as project variables.

Carefully select all relevant objects only. Consider whether to include points in sets, radius points, objects that have been turned off and invisible and locked layers. Consider selecting objects by Crossing, View or Layers.

To multiply the coordinates, enter values for X, Y or Z Scale.

To avoid scaling in a direction, enter * for X, Y or Z Scale.

To scale relative to a location, enter X, Y or Z coordinates.

To scale without moving the origin, enter 0 for the X, Y or Z.

To scale text, blocks and dynaviews around their insertion points, leave the X,Y Location blank.

To scale from mm to m, use 0.001 in Scales X, Y and Z; from feet to metres, use 0.3048 in Scales X, Y and Z; from southing to northing, use -1 in Scale Y; from depth to height, use -1 in Scale Z.

To multiply or divide EAT text without scaling the subjects, use EAT code math.

Report the easting, northing and DTM elevation at the cursor.

The elevation is interpolated from the selected DTM surface.

The chainage and offset from any active alignment is also reported.

Import large Lidar scan data sets and filter by ranges of colour, intensity, vertical angle, boundary and chainage.

For example, filter scans from a moving vehicle to distinguish buildings, cables and pavements.

Elevations can be corrected by N-values on a layer defined by AUSGEOID.

Filtered points can be saved to the project, or to an external file, or both.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

GCSDROUT

Export a Roadjob, HAL/VAL or 3D sets to an .SDR file.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCSKIPMN

Replace skip ranges from skips defined in a CSV file or by pline boxes.

Use GCSKIPMN when you have too many skip ranges to manage by manual editing with SKIP.

Add or replace skip ranges from a file which you have previously created in a spreadsheet application.

Create pline boxes at the current skip ranges in both the plan and profile views, centred on the road alignment. After editing these boxes for position and range and updating the alignments, Create Skips from selected boxes.

Roadjob: Select the roadjob.
Sort: Sort the skip ranges in chainage order.
Report: Report the skip ranges.
Import: Import skip ranges from a CSV file with start chainage, end chainage, skip name.
Swap: Swap skips.
Box Width: Specify a width in m for pline box.
Create boxes: Create pline boxes at skips.
Create skips: Create skips at selected pline boxes.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCSPELL

Check spelling of words in selected text objects against a dictionary.

To configure the initial dictionaries, run FIXGCSPELL or use a File manager (EXPLORER) to browse to C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\GCSPELL.REG and double-click to open and add the configuration to the Windows Registry.

Text: Select text to be checked.
Options: Configure options including the main dictionary language.
Dictionaries: Select and modify dictionaries.
OK: Check spelling.
Cancel: Cancel spell checking.
Help: The help for the spell checker.

For Help, use the main Help button rather than the Help buttons under Options and Dictionaries.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	built-in Help button		$200

GCSTLOUT

Export a layer list of DTM surfaces to a stereolithography .STL format file.

Each DTM layer is written as a separate SOLID.

.STL files can be used to view or print 3D models of triangles in many applications such as SketchUp, Cloud Compare, 3D Viewer and Print 3D.

Some applications cannot open .STL files with large coordinates. To reduce the number of significant figures but retain the precision, answer Yes, at the prompt "Do you wish to Truncate Eastings and Northings?".

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCSTRATA

Create multiple points with the same coordinates as selected points, with layer names and elevations derived from a CSV file.

Relayer the points according zones of typical strata as suggested by a geologist.
Create a CSV file with rows for new layers and columns of depths for each zone.
Run GCSTRATA.
Select the points.
Choose whether to compute elevations or depths.
Select the CSV file.
Choose whether to delete the original points.
Create a new point with a new elevation on the layer in the left column for each point with layer name matching the first row.

For example, using this table, and selecting depths, for each point on layer B4, create a point on each of the six listed layers with the same easting and northing. The elevation of the new point on layer 1_topsoil is 0.1, on layer 2_alluvium is 0.3, etc.

Layer,        A,    B1,    B2,   B3,    B4,

1_topsoil,   0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   0.2,  0.1,

2_alluvium,  0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   2.5,  0.3,

3_colluvium, 0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   2.5,  0.5,

4_RS,        4.8,  2.3,   3.7,   4.7,  1.5,

5_XW,       12.8,  3.6,  12.8,   9.1,  4.1,

6_MW,       13.6,   20,  22.7,  20.1,   28,

If the points are to be used for depth surfaces, select depths so the Z value is derived from the table. If for elevation surfaces, the value in the table is subtracted from the elevation of the original point.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCSTYLE

Modify the metrics of selected text to match a text style and update the default text style.

Select text objects and a text style.

Create a DTM surface for use as a Subgrade below selected boundaries representing depths of material.

The Final DTM is the underside of many subgrade layers each defined by a boundary and a depth below the previous subgrade.

Create a layer list of layers containing closed pline boundaries. The boundaries are processed in alphabetical layer name order.

GCSUBDTM copies all points and sets from the Initial DTM onto a new DTM, drapes the first boundary on the first layer name onto the new DTM, clips the new DTM inside the boundary, creates a new set inside the boundary at a horizontal offset from the set (=Clip Dist) and vertical offset from the DTM (=elevation of pline) and then copies that part of the initial DTM that is outside the boundary to the new DTM layer.

The process is repeated for all closed plines with elevations on the next layer in the specified layer list. The layers are worked through in alphabetical order until the Final DTM is created.

The elevations on the plines are depths (thicknesses) relative to the previous new DTM. A positive elevation value results in a new surface below the previous surface. Negative elevations build the surface up.

This Final DTM could then be a sliced DTM in ROADWAY, a termination surface in SIDESLOPE, a surface for volumes or exported to machine control.

Optionally, compute volumes or keep intermediate DTMs.

See also CHEKROAD, GCDTMGDE and GCSUBDTM.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCSZAOUT

Export .SZA files for Trimble Quantm Alignment Planning. Specify zones that require special treatment such as cost and crossing requirements.

Select zones by closed plines or sets (or blocks containing closed plines or sets) to export to the special_zones.sza file.

The name of the pline or set (or subject of the block) defines the zone description. The layer name defines the zone label.

Export linear features using GCLFAOUT.

Export terrain data using GCTMAOUT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

GCTABLE

Label points with EAT text arranged in a table framed by plines.

The columns show Point number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Chainage, Offset or blank.

Points

Select the points.

Origin

Enter the location of the upper left corner of the table.

Settings

For each of seven possible columns, specify a property to list. Highlight a row in the list box to make the column specifications editable.

Title: Enter up to 61 characters for the title of the table.
Use Title Box: Include a title at the top of the coordinate table.
Width: Enter the number of characters to define the width of each column. Enter 0 to omit a column.
Heading: Enter the heading for the top of each column.
Prefix: Enter a prefix of nil to 13 characters in length. To further widen a column, increase column width instead adding leading spaces to prefix.
Value: Select from Pt# (point number), North (y-value), East (x-value) or Elev (elevation), Name (point name), Chainage (station), Offset (horizontal offset) or None (a blank column).
Lines/Page: Enter the maximum number of rows for each page of the table. New pages are created for rows that exceed that number. The horizontal separation between tables is 1 sheet unit at the current view scale.
Layer: Select the layer on which to create the table text and plines.
Text style: Select text style with a fixed-width font such as tmodelf so the characters line up vertically. The point numbers and coordinates are right-justified. The names are left-justified. The headings are centred.
Colour: Select the colour of the EAT text. The headings and plines are created in the line colour of the current layer. HAL for CH and Offsets; Select a horizontal alignment record
Sort points based on chainage: Sort points by statioj | chainage or by point number in alphabetical order starting with integers.
OK: Accept changes to settings.
Cancel: Cancel changes

OK

Create the table.

Cancel

Cancel.

The text labels show the current properties of the points, not the properties at time the table was created.

If the selected points contain field values that exceed the specified column width, you are prompted to increase the column width or return to Settings.

The numbers of decimal places are controlled by the precision settings in UNITSSET at the time the table was created. If you change precision, recreate the table.

The offsets are displayed in the offset EAT code format labelling settings in UNITSSET. This format controls the included characters, the left and right indicators and the zero offset notation.

Place user-definabled "tadpole" blocks between two sets representing the top and toe of a batter.

Each block is placed at the specified spacing from from the set joining points of higher elevation to the lower set. The blocks can therefore swap direction at transitions between cut and fill. It doesn't matter which you pick as "Top" and "Toe" unless you are drafting in 2D.

Blocks are scaled to just less than the horizontal distance between the sets. Blocks which exceed the specified maximum length are not placed. Tadpole blocks one unit long are placed with a small gap at the lower end.

Typical tadpole blocks are GCTADPOL, TADPOLE TYPE 1 and TADPOLE TYPE 2.

To create your own tadpole block, draw plines so that the location for the higher batter string is at 0,0 and the lower is at 0,1. Then use BLOCK to Create the block from the plines with the origin at 0,0.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCTMAIN

Import terrain data prepared for Trimble Quantm for you to check before submission.

Use MOSSIN to transfer proposed alignments in GENIO format from Quantm to Terramodel.

See GCTMAOUT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

GCTMAOUT

Create a .TMA file for submission to Trimble Quantm Alignment Planning for route optimization. The .TMA file is a grid of points interpolated from a DTM within a boundary.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Check your .TMA file by reimporting it using GCTMAIN.

Export Special Zones using GCSZAOUT.

Export Linear Features using GCLFAOUT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

GCTFWIN

Locate ortho-rectified images by creating text and pline boxes.

.TFW files are supplied with geo-referenced .TIF image files to locate the images in applications such as Image Manager (IMAGE). The coordinates of the north-western corner of the image and the size of the pixels can be read from .TFW files. .JGW files for .JPG images and .PGW files for .PNG images have the same file format as .TFW.

GCTFWIN creates text showing the file names at the north-western corner of each world file at the default text height for the view scale.

By entering the size of images, the corners of the image can also be located. To create pline plotboxes of the same size, enter the height and width in pixels. Enter 0 for no plotboxes.

Then click OK to browse and select one or more .TFW, .JGW or .PGW files.

Text and plotboxes are created in the Plan view with the current layer and line colour.

The width and height in pixels of any image can be shown by any photo editor or by Windows File Explorer | Properties | Details.

.TFW files are assumed to have no skew or rotation.

Copy roadway templates by name to multiple stations | chainages that are specified by either importing a .CSV file or by selecting a layer of objects.

Roadjob: Select the roadjob.
Roadway: Select the roadway from that road job.
Design or Subgrade: Specify whether the template is for Design or Subgrade.
Pline/Set layer: Select a layer of sets or plines which cross the roadway alignment at the required stations | chainages.
OK: For each set or pline that crosses the alignment, copy the template that has the same name as the object to the station | chainage of the object.
Read Chainage | Station and Template Name from CSV: Import a .CSV file containing records with station | chainage and template name and copy templates with the specified names to the specified stations | chainages.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

See also TMANAGER, COPYTEMP and NEWTEMPS.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $200

GCTRACE

Report the areas or show the extent of regions enclosed within multiple boundaries around a location by creating new sets, plines or hatching on the current layer in the current view.

Bdys: Select boundaries by plines, sets or text.
Create Bdy: Create sets, plines or None.
Delete Dup Pts: If sets, remove duplicate points.
Report: Report to P3Pad the new boundary record numbers, names and areas.
Lot #: Name the new boundary sets or plines with incrementing integer "lot" numbers.
Snap dist: Enter the maximum Snap Distance above which gaps are not crossed.
Hatch | Scale: Select a hatch pattern and scale. Select [None] for no hatching.
Inside: Select locations to define regions by tracing inside the selected boundaries.
Cancel: Cancel tracing regions.

Typical applications for GCTRACE include reporting areas, hatching regions and creating closed figures from messy linework.

GCTRACE combines the features of TRACEBDY which creates internal boundaries with a fixed maximum snap distance and HATCHENC which reports areas and creates hatching within internal and external boundaries.

Closed regions which are inside the selected objects but outside the selected location are excluded as "islands". To trace outside plines or sets, make them an island by including an even larger boundary and select a location just inside that.

The report includes Basic Area, Alternative Area and accumulated Alt Area written with units and rounding according to the MEASUNIT and UNITSSET settings. These are always reported to message scroll.

If your pline boundaries are splines, select only a few at a time and keep the view resolution interval small in DISPLAYSET.

The direction of the boundary set or plines is derived from one of the selected objects.

To have hatches or boundaries on different colours or layers, run GCTRACE again or modify the objects later.

Select a new current layer
Run GCTRACE
Specify Set or Pline for the new boundary
Specify a snap dist to suit the job
Select all the sets and plines that limit the boundaries
Click the Inside field
Choose a region by clicking a location
The boundary is created.

Select a new current layer
Run BOX or GCBOX to create a temporary pline box outside all the sets and plines to be selected
Run GCTRACE
Specify Set or Pline for the new boundary
Specify a snap dist to suit the job
Select all the sets and plines that limit the boundaries, including the box
Click the Inside field
Click a location outside the selected sets and plines but inside the box
The boundary is created.
Delete the temporary box.

Select a new current layer
Run GCTRACE
Specify a suitable hatch and scale
Specify None for the new boundary
Select all the sets, plines and text that you want to limit the boundaries
Click the Inside field
Choose a region by clicking a location
The region is hatched
Change colour or hatch pattern or current layer, if you want
Click another location
Another region is hatched.

Select a new current layer
Run GCTRACE
Specify a suitable hatch and scale
Specify None for the new boundary
Specify Report
Select all the sets, plines and text that you want to limit the boundaries
Click the Inside field
Choose a region by clicking a location
The basic and alternative areas are written to the message scroll and the area is reported to P3Pad. The hatching shows which areas you have computed
Change colour or hatch pattern or current layer
Click another location
Another region is hatched and the areas are accumulated in message scroll and P3Pad.

Specify a new current layer
Run GCTRACE
Specify a snap dist of say 0.005m
Specify to create sets
Specify an initial lot number
Optionally, specify report
Optionally, specify a hatch pattern and a scale to see where you have been
Select all the sets and plines, but no text, to limit the lots
Click inside the first lot
The closed set for the first lot is created with the lot number for the set name
The next lot number increments by 1
Click inside the second lot, etc., until all lots are defined
If you hatched, delete or relayer the hatching

Specify a new current layer
Run LOTJOIN
Select all the sets and plines
Select lot number text

Specify a new current layer
Run GCTRACE
Specify a snap dist to suit the job
Specify to create a report and plines
Specify a hatch and scale
Select all the sets or plines limiting the region making sure that the internal boundaries do not intersect the external boundaries
Click a location inside the external boundaries and outside the internal boundaries
The hatching confirms the region for which the area is reported
Delete the hatching and use the plines in other commands such as HATCH, SHADEISO or GCGRNGRD.

Show text boxes using Quick text in Display Settings
Specify a new current layer
Run GCTRACE
Specify a hatch and scale
Select all the sets and plines and text
Click a location inside the boundary lines and outside the text boxes

In CONTOURSET, don't spline, clip lines or label
Generate CONTOUR plines
Run GCTRACE
Specify a hatch and scale
Select the contours by layers
Click locations inside the closed boundaries.

Use GC35 to create points at centroids
Use LABPT to create text at centroid points
Specify a new current layer
Run LOTJOIN
Select all the sets and plines
Select lot number text
If you want anticlockwise sets, REVERSE afterwards.
If you want to keep the original directions, use GCTRACE instead
DELETE the original objects later, if you want.

Set the default text style using the command line and an argument. For example, type GCTSTYLE "seg label" to change the default text style to seg label.

Use in combination with a toolbox, alias or macro.

See also TEXTSTYLE, GCSTYLE and STYLESET.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	190

GCTTAOUT

Export a set to Trimble .TTA and .TTX file.

Enter an offset and a road name.

For newer Trimble instruments, export a .DC file using Trimble Roading 3D (DC) export (EXPORT), GCDCOUT or GCMULTDC.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCTURN

Create plines showing the swept path of a vehicle.

Place vehicle outlines at intervals along the path.

Store dimensions and layers for a single vehicle or a prime-mover and one or two trailers.

For simple cases, GCTURN can be used in place of AutoTURN and AutoTrack.

Watch a short demonstration (.wmv).

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	GCTURN vehicle dimensions		$350.00

GCTXTFIT

Adjust the aspect ratio of selected text so the selected text aligns to a selected location.

For each selected text object with left or centre horizontal justification, modify the aspect so that the right hand edge of the text box lines up vertically with the X coordinate of the selected location.

Text is not modified where the difference in aspect is more than 25% or the text has left horizontal justification.

Export selected text records to a file or P3Pad report.

Text: Select text objects
File:: Select the name and location of a new .CSV file
Sort on Northing: Sort on record number or by descending northing for columns of text.
Report: Report text to P3Pad with record numbers.
Recs for Heading: Enter the number of text records to be written to the heading lines.
Recs per Line: Enter the number of text records to be written to each line, after the heading
OK: Export to CSV or report or both
Cancel: Cancel command

EAT codes are exploded to normal text.

Multi-line text objects are written to single lines separated by | characters.

To convert text to coordinates, select text by crossing with no heading lines, enter the number of columns for Recs per Line, and then export to .CSV. This assumes the selected text has been created row by row, left to right. Then read the coordinates into a spreadsheet or other application or into Plan view using IMPORT ASCII points.

To export tables of text to a .CSV, specify the number of records for a heading and the number of columns. To import such a table, use CSV2TAB.

Replaces TXTOUT.

Export the centreline, coordinate, profile and triangle files required for any equipment fitted with current versions of Leica Geosystems Universal Machine Control 3D.

Define an alignment using a road job, then select plines or sets to export as a .GEO file or a selected DTM to export as an .XML.

Click on Create UMC 3D Files to be prompted for Arc-to-Chord tolerances and the .LIN output file name. Then click OK to create the files and load them directly onto Leica Machine Control.

Road job: Select a roadjob to export the main alignment as centreline (.LIN) and profile (.PRF) files.
GEO (3D Lines):: Select points, sets or plines to create a .GEO file.</
DTM:: Specify a DTM layer to export as a LandXML file.
DTM Bdy:: Limit the DTM to a boundary.
Create UMC 3d Files: Create the files
Cancel: Close the command without exporting

Arc to Chord: Wherever the plines or sets contain arcs or spirals, additional coordinates are written to the .LIN, PRF, or .GEO files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances.
Generate Report: Report to P3Pad every record written to the LIN, PRF, GEO or XML files.
Export Filename:: Specify the location and name of the .LIN file. Any PRF, .GEO or .XML file names will match.

Create Files

Write .LIN and .PRF files then any .GEO or .XML files

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

The best way to export strings for any Leica iCON Machine Control is to use ROADRUN, selecting Group, to generate an .XML file. To export a DTM, create a different .XML file with DTM2XML. Do not combine strings and DTM into a single XML file.

See also GCGEOIN, POWERGDE and GRADESMT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCUNJOIN

Create a set or pline for each segment in selected sets and plines, with the option to delete the old objects.

GCUNJOIN does not break plines containing spirals or vertical curves.

DISJOIN is an alias for GCUNJOIN.

Delete registered Vertical alignments from the VAL Manager while retaining the pline records.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCVALOFF

A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the vertical alignment manager.

The vertical IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.

A report is displayed showing each chainage, vertical offset and elevation of each IP.

The .VER file is imported as a pline in the profile view.

Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the VER.

Export a pline in the profile view to a vertical alignment.

Export the straights and parabolic vertical curves.

For circular curves, only the IP is converted.

Change wrap status of a DTM layer to "wrapped" or "unwrapped", without transforming the points.

Use GCWRAP when you have "unwrapped" data on a "wrapped" layer, or vice versa.

See TUNNELDTM.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GCXLINES

Create or replace xlines along a selected roadway on the nominated layer.

The chainages and offsets are computed from, and the xlines refer to, the main horizontal alignment of the selected roadjob.

Specify the left and right offsets for extents of the new xlines. These offsets also limit the extents of roadways in commands such as ROADSPOT and GC42AB.

Specify an interval for the new xlines. If you don't want xlines at intervals, specify a very large interval.

The xlines are deleted and created on the nominated layer. The default xlines layer is that of the first xline on the alignment. If there are no xlines, the default layer is from the GCXLINES:LAYER project variable set by PROJECTV. If the variable has not been set, the default is the current layer.

The chainage format and precision is controlled by UNITSSET.

The message scroll reports the main alignment name and description for the current road and default xlines layer.

Create xlines at Hal and Val points
Create xlines at templates
Create xlines at start and end of skips but not across skips
Create xlines at points near alignment on design surface
Limit xlines to a chainage range
Keep current xlines
Keep current xline labels
Interpolate the extents of new xlines from current xlines
Label xlines with chainages perpendicular to the alignment
Prefix xline labels with text such as Ch, Sta or KP
Prefix xline labels with the road name

Import points and parcels from a LandXML .XML file.

Select a boundary to import only points that fall within a closed pline.

Select a maximum offset to import points within that offset from an open pline.

Any parcels are imported as sets.

For .XML files that will not import because they have lines longer than 255 characters, import points only with BIGXMLIN, or use GCFIXXML to insert new lines and try GCXMLIN again.

See also the LandXML IMPORT script, which can also import surfaces and alignments, and GCPTSIN, which configures point numbering.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCXMLOUT

Export roadjob strings at xlines in LandXML cross section format.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

GCXTIE

Select segments from two sets, corresponding slopes and beginning and ending locations.

For example, locate a channel in a median by battering from the carriage ways.

List files on a Geodimeter data collector with option to delete.

After requesting the Geodimeter instrument type and some communication parameters, open the Instrument Directory dialog box, which displays the Area and Job files that are currently stored in the Geodimeter instrument or data collector.

Use GDMDIR to:

Determine the current contents of the collector before going into the field.
Delete files on the collector using the computer.
Confirm serial communication before configuring import or export scripts.

To download Geodimeter survey files see, IMPORT. To edit, see GFE and RDE. See also GST.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|Geodimeter\|Geodimeter directory/delete files... File\|Geodimeter directory/delete files... Geocap\|Transfer\|Instrument directory/delete files...	Field Data Module	GST

GEOCALC

Transform coordinates in ASCII files between common coordinate systems.

GeoCalc 4.20 is a stand-alone application from Geocomp Systems which has been replaced in Terramodel by GCCOORD and COORDCON.

Converts coordinate data files between commonly-used mapping systems.
Uses seven-parameter transformations.
Has user-definable parameters for almost any spheroid or mapping system.
Includes a large number of predefined mapping systems and spheroids.
Includes Geocentric Datum of Australia.
Compares geodesy of the same point in two different mapping systems.
Displays geographic, geocentric and projection coordinates of three dimensional points in any defined Mapping System.
Displays point scale factor and grid convergence.
Is a 32-bit application for Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8 or 8.1.
Includes complete documentation in Help (assuming that you understand the concepts).
Was last updated in November 1999.

Local Grid - chose your own
Mercator
Transverse Mercator - Australia (AMG, ISG, MGA), NZ, Germany, Canada, USA, Great Britain and Russia
Stereographic - Polar regions, Nederlands, Hungary, Poland
Lambert 1 Parallel - France, Belgium, Denmark
Lambert 2 Parallel - World Aeronautical Charts
Cassini-Soldner
Gnomic
New Zealand Map Grid
Skew Orthomorphic

WGS84
WGS72
WGS99
Australian GDA94 | MGA94
Bessel 1841
Malaysia Kertau 1948 Everest Modified
North American Datum 1983

GeoCalc supports a wide range of ASCII text coordinate formats for import and export. Coordinates can be expressed as Latitudes and Longitudes, Easting and Northing or X,Y,Z. The following coordinate file formats are predefined:

Geocomp Spatial Data System (.PTS & .STR)
Geocomp Field File (.FLD)
GeoNav Coast File (.CST)
UKOOA P1/90
X Y Z

Use Control Panel to uninstall any previous versions of GeoCalc from Geocomp Systems.
Download and run gcalc420.exe (2 MB).
Unzip the files a temporary location like C:\temp\geocalc\.
Run setup.exe from your location.
Run GeoCalc from the Windows Start Menu or Apps, or enter GEOCALC at the Terramodel command line.
Read Help for GeoCalc to discover how to use GeoCalc.
To open Help for GeoCalc:
- On Windows XP, run GeoCalc and select Index from the Help menu.
- On Windows Vista, 7, 8 or 8.1, run GeoCalc, select Index from the Help menu, follow the instructions from Microsoft to download and install WinHlp32.exe, and then select Index from the GeoCalc Help menu.
- On any Windows, in Terramodel with a current Geocomp Update, run GEOCALC and HELPGEOCALC.

Exe date	Guide		Source	GC
23/11/99	HELPGEOCALC		$0	UTM

GEOMINQ

Report bearing and slope distance between two locations to message scroll.

In Points mode, select two points Points or two locations. In Segment mode, select a set segment.

For two locations, or a pline segment, the show the bearing and horizontal distance.

For two points or a straight set segment, the show the point numbers, bearing, horizontal distance, and zenith angle if the points have elevations.

For an set arc segment, show the point numbers, radius, chord length, arc length, tangent, EX and delta angle.

See also DISTANCE which shows the horizontal distance project units and sheet units at the current view scale, with the option to accumulate.

See also GC29 which shows point numbers, bearing, horizontal distance, dE, dN, vertical angle, slope distance and grade.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Reports\|Geometry inquiry Inquire\|Brg/Dist	Field Data Module	17

GEOMRPTS

Select objects and print a report of measured values between selected objects.

Create reports on the geometry of sets, plines and horizontal alignments, "inverse" measurements between designated points, as well as radial stakeout reports.

Reports of points, set and pline geometry are from measurements between points in sets, or each vertex in the pline. Radial stakeout reports points that refer to two other points. HAL reports are to lay out a horizontal alignment and points and show the geometry.

Settings

Choose what to include in the reports

New page for each object inversed: Start a new page for each set or pline.
Print ‘angle right’ between points: Report the angle between adjacent line segments at each point, turning to the right, from the backsight on the previous point, to the foresight on the next point.
Print enclosed area: Report the enclosing area and perimeter of Sets or Plines
Print stationing | Print chainage: Report the station | chainage of points along the Sets or Plines. Use STATION to edit the beginning station | chainage of a set or pline.
Print report identification: Prompt to enter a report identification to add to the heading of Sets, Plines and Radial reports.
Print slope distances and vertical angles: Report slope distance and vertical angle in addition to the horizontal distance, using the mode in UNITSSET.
Print bearing and distance between points: Report the bearing and distance between points.
Print block and lot names for sets: Report block and lot names assigned by LABELSETS.
Print summary for sets: Report lot areas, lot names and block names for closed sets which have been labelled by LABELSETS.

Points

Report the Chainage, Easting, Northing, Elevation and Name of a list of points and the bearing, horizontal distance, slope distance and zenith angle between adjacent points.

Sets

Report the Chainage, Easting, Northing, Elevation and Name of point in selected sets, and the bearing, horizontal distance, slope distance and zenith angle between adjacent points, and the radius point, radius, deflection angle, degree of curvature, arc length, chord length, chord bearing, tangent length, middle ordinate and external for any curves.

Plines

Report name and elevation of plines, the chainage, easting and northing, of vertices, the bearing and distance between vertices, and the and the centre of radius, radius, deflection angle, degree of curvature, arc length, chord length, chord bearing, tangent length, middle ordinate and external for any curves.

Radial

Report the coordinates, bearings and distances of selected points (Pts:) relative to an occupied point (Occupied:) and a back sight (Bs:) point.

Sort: Sort in order of increasing turning angle, or the the order of their record number.

Lot summary

Create a table of plines and text showing lot areas, lot names and block names for closed sets which have been labelled by LABELSETS.

HAL

Report the geometry of an alignment, including radial stakeout, at intervals and within a corridor.

HAL: Select the horizontal alignment
Occupied: Locate the occupied point.
Bs: Locate the backsight point
Pts: Select any point objects along the alignment to be included

Close.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
23/03/23	RG 429	Reports\|Geometry/Stakeout Inquire\|Brg/Dist reports	Field Data Module	17,41

GEOSYS

Use this to define your local grid before importing Trimble GPS Real-Time Kinetic (RTK) data to compute with RDE.

Establish a geodetic system for the project to which any imported GPS (WGS84-based) data will be converted. This geodetic system cannot be modified after a point is created.

Do not perform geodetic corrections (i.e. "Flat Earth")

Ignore any data that requires geodetic corrections and do not import it. If an imported DC file contains an embedded coordinate system, that coordinate system becomes the current geodetic system.

Use local projection

Use Easting and Northing settings in Computation Settings and Tolerances | General Settings tab in Raw Data Editor (RDE) to create a non-standard geodetic system.

Use current geodetic system

Use the geodetic system currently displayed in the following list box as the "local" geodetic system. When GPS (WGS84-based) data are imported, coordinates are converted to the geodetic system set by this command. To import a DC file with an embedded coordinate system, the two coordinate systems must be the same. The WGS84-based data are not stored; however the geodetic system is stored so that the original data can be re-created if necessary.

Select new geodetic system

Set a different project geodetic system and geoid model before any points are created within the project. Choose from

Coordinate System and Zone
Calibrated Site
Default projection (Transverse Mercator) (or enter your own projection parameters)

GEOSYS uses the Trimble Coordinate System Manager (CSM).

COORDCON and GCCOORD use a different coordinate system library unrelated to GEOSYS.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|GPS Geodetic System...	Field Data Module

GFE

Edit Geodimeter format files including .RAW, .JOB, .UDS, .ARE, .PTS and .PCO.

.RAW and .JOB files contain survey observations. .UDS files contain programs, .ARE and .PTS files contain coordinates of points and .PCO files contain point code libraries.

GFE functions have mostly been replaced by IMPORT, EXPORT and RDE.

Geodimeter data files are unitless so you must independently determine the data units and check that the GFE Settings correspond. For example, by default GFE assumes that the angle units are Grads; you may want to change the setting to DMS. The Easting|Northing column headings may appear to be the wrong way around.

GFE is installed with Terramodel. No security key is required. Geodimeter .JOB files open in GFE by default. GFE fails to open .JOB files in other formats such as Trimble JOB files.

GFE Help is available from the Help menu in GFE, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPGFE command.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPGFE	File\|Geodimeter\|Geodimeter File Editor... File\|Geodimeter File Editor...	Field Data Module	GST

GM1

Raise the lowest point on a DTM by 1 mm and repeat until no triangle has a slope greater than the entered maximum % value.

Export Coast, Runline, Centreline, Vessel, Waypoint, Antenna, Station, Clip, Design or Grid database data for GeoNav.

TML		Menu	Source
08/02/22		HDMS\|Export\|GeoNav detail	HDMS

GNCSTIMP

Import Coast, Runline, Centreline, Vessel, Waypoint, Antenna, Station, Clip, Design, Grid database or Dredge log data for GeoNav.

TML		Menu	Source
08/02/22		HDMS\|Import\|GeoNav detail	HDMS

GOLFAREA

Report, sum and label the area of each selected closed set or pline representing a fairway, green, bunker or tee.

The areas of all greens, bunkers and tees with centroids inside a fairway are subtracted from the area of that fairway.

The fairways are selected by record. The greens, bunkers and tees are selected by layer.

Export selected points to a .GPX file optimised for reading into Garmin Mapsource software.

Use Settings to choose the coordinate system from which your coordinates will be converted to latitude and longitude on WGS84.

The waypoint name is derived from either the Terramodel point number or name.

Export the centreline, plan, layer and triangle files required for dozers or graders fitted with Leica Geosystems GradeSmart 3D Machine Control.

GRADESMT writes coordinates computed along selected strings to 0.0001m precision using specified tolerances in Carlson .CL, .PLN and .LAY file formats. A DTM can also be exported as a Leica TPStakeout TSB file.

Road job

The exported centreline (.CL) file contains coordinates at chainages along the main alignment of the selected roadjob. Each record in the .CL file is in the format 0,chainage,L,northing,easting. Create one roadjob for each centreline.

2D (PLN):

Select sets or plines to export as a .PLN file for export as a Plan or background map. Each selected set or pline is written to the .PLN as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,northing. If you want hatching, blocks or text in the Plan, explode them to plines first.

3D (LAY):

Select sets joining 3D points to export as a .LAY file for export as a Layer of strings. Each selected set is written to the .LAY as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,northing,elevation.

DTM:

Specify a DTM layer to be exported to the Leica TPStakeout ASCII triangle file (.TSA) and binary triangle file (.TSB).

Settings

Chainage Range: Limit the exported coordinates to within a chainage range. The initial default values are derived from the selected roadjob. If you change the alignment, reset the start and end chainages.
Triangles per grid (BinTri):: As this integer value for triangle density increases, the grid squares increase in size and reduce in number. This value is a trade-off between the precision and file size of the TSB file. The initial default value is 20.
Arc to Chord: Wherever the strings contain arcs, the additional coordinates are written to the .CL, .PLN and .LAY files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances, in another trade-off between precision and file size. The same tolerances are also approximated along spirals, combining curves and splines.
Generate Report: If enabled, every record written to the CL, PLN, LAY and TSA files is also reported to P3Pad.
Export Filename:: Specify the location and name of the .CL file, and thus the .PLN, LAY, .TSA and .TSB files.

Create Files

Write a .CL file, then PLN and LAY files if objects were selected. Then, if the DTM layer is not 0, and you confirm that you want to Export triangles, the TSA file is exported and a separate command window opens to run the Leica program BinTri.Exe which converts the TSA file into a TSB. You will need to press any key when prompted, twice.

If you have multiple alignments, repeat with a different roadjob. These files can be combined into a .PRJ project file using Leica GradeSmart software.

To verify elevations at locations in the .TSB, use Leica TPStakeout software on a Leica survey instrument.

See also TPSTKOUT, POWERGDE, GCUMC3D and ROADRUN.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $500

GRIDELEV

Generate a grid of points: The Grid Layout dialog allows for control of the number of rows and columns, the start location, the rotation and the layer on which the grid points are generated. The grid starts in the top left hand corner, goes across then down. If any points already exist on this layer you will be prompted for the option of deleting any existing points. Thus it is important to have each set of grid points on a unique layer.
Interpolate elevations onto the grid points: This function calls DTMPTS command. Select the DTM layer from which to interpolate the heights and the grid points (by the layer on which you created the grid points).
M.A.D. Report: Generate a report in Mile-a-Day format.; The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as an .ELE file.
L.F. Report: Generate a report in Landform format.; The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as a .TXT file.
C.A.G Report: Generate a report for Comput-A-Grade irrigation software by Merrilees.; The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as an .FRL file.

For all reports, the heading is derived from layer name of the grid points. The report lists only the number of points specified when creating the grid earlier. If you have manually inserted or removed points then this report will be wrong.

Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM, a bounding pline and an interval.

Specify a bounding box, a DTM layer and a grid interval.

Click Export to be prompted for a file name.

X, Y, Z coordinates are written directly to the file based on the interval and boundary.

Round the coordinates to the nominated interval or increment from the lower left corner of the boundary. The boundary "box" does not have to be rectangular.

Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space not project file size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including Spreadsheets.

Create a grid of points or plines then label them like this:

Use SNAPSET to set the grid origin and bearing
Use GRIDSET to define the grid spacing and type
Use GRIDSET to turn the grid on
Use BOX to create a limiting pline
Use GRIDMAKE to create the points or plines
Use GCLABGRD or LABELGRID to label the grid.

Transform all objects in Plan view from "ground" coordinates to a "grid" coordinates, or vice versa, by applying a combined scale factor and rotation around a point.

Convert to Grid

Convert objects from the current Ground coordinates to Grid coordinates

Convert to Ground

Convert objects from the current Grid coordinates to Ground coordinates

Settings

Origin Point: Select point number and layer for the origin
Lock layer: Lock the origin point layer to prevent accidental deletion or transformation
Currently in Grid or Currently in Ground: Display whether the current coordinates are in Grid or Ground
Enable switch: If the coordinates are incorrectly displayed as Ground, when they are in fact in grid, or vice versa, enable the coordinates to be switched.
Combined Scale Factor:: Enter a combined scale factor
Compute CSF: Compute the combined scale factor at the origin point
Rotation: Enter a rotation
Apply rotation: Rotate the objects, or not
OK: Transform all objects in Plan view, that are not on a locked layer, from Grid to Ground or Ground to Grid, and update the status

Configure the colour, type, spacing and visibility of a display grid for each view mode.

The Grid on tick box, makes the grid visible unless the interval is too close to display or no grid line passes though the display.

Set the Horizontal and Vertical distance between grid intervals, in ground units, for the horizontal and vertical directions. For the Plan, Sheet, and Xsect view modes, the vertical control is dimmed and the vertical spacing is set equal to the horizontal spacing.

Set the grid type to Dots, Ticks or Lines. When the Ticks option is selected, enter the horizontal and vertical length of the tick marks in sheet units.

To change the gridset mode at the command line or in a toolbox,

For gridset mode	Enter at command line
None	Gridset 0
On	Gridset 1
On/Off	Gridset -1

To create a grid of points or plines, use GRIDMAKE or GCGENGRD.

To snap to the grid or rotate the grid, use SNAPSET.

To restrict the direction of cursor movement, use CURSOR.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Grid settings...	Field Data Module	93

GRIDVOL

Report volumes and create text showing the values in each region. Select regions defined by closed plines of any shape or create rectangular grid cells.

Generate grid: Create regular grid cells as a series of abutting rectangular plines.
Single: Compute the cut & fill volume for a single selected region.
Multiple: Compute the cut & fill volumes for selected grid cells. Report result for the individual cells and the total cut & fill volumes.

Place the generated cells and subcells on different layers, so they can be selected or displayed easily.

If you label the cells with text, use vertical justification in the styles to prevent overwriting.

Regions can be any shape, including stockpile boundaries.

See also GCGRDVOL which also controls boundaries, reports, text layers, style and hatching and can create regions between xlines.

Command date		Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08		Reports\|More...\|Grid volumes	Secured	222

GRP2NAME

This can be helpful where you want to use groups with a function that uses names. For example, where you want to export to a format that includes a name or description field.

You may then want to use DESC to change numeric names to alphanumeric.

See also REGROUP which changes the group to match the layer and LAY2NAME which changes the name of each object to match its layer.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	76

GSIDTMOU

The DTM can be uploaded into Leica Total Stations that include DTM stakeout software, such as TC1100.

Choose between 8-character and 16-character GSI format. Coordinate shift values are set where the coordinates are 1000000 or above.

DTM Layer Name, JobID and export file name.

Export all triangles in the DTM or only DTM triangles entirely inside a pline boundary.

Depending on the software installed on the Leica total station, you may be able to also export triangles by TPSTKOUT or EXPORT LandXML or DXF 3DFaces.

See also GCGSIOUT and EXPORT LandXML for alignments and GCPTSOUT for points.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

GSSWP

Type GSSWP at the command line to launch your default web browser and start a new window for the Geocomp Systems Support web page.

Geodimeter Software Tools (or GST) 2.02, GEOTOOL and GEOMODEL were supplied by Geodimeter or SpectraPrecision as stand-alone applications for communication with Geodimeter survey instruments and contouring.

Their functions are largely replaced by Trimble Data Transfer Utility (TDTU) and Terramodel functions GFE, GDMDIR, RDE, IMPORT and EXPORT.

For more details, see our GST page.

Application date	Guide		Source	GC
16/05/00	in-built help		Spectra&#8203Precision Trimble Geocomp Systems	MM 3

HALDATA

Create or edit a horizontal alignment pline through entry of intersection point coordinates and curve data into a table.

Double-click on a field to edit.

HAL: Select an existing pline and open the table.
New: Open the table to enter a new pline.
OK: Create the new pline or modify the existing pline.
Cancel: Cancel changes.

Alignment

New: Start a new alignment
Save: Save changes to the pline
Report: Report to P3Pad using Alignment report from REPORTS.
Exit: Exit the data entry table.

Edit

Edit: Undo changes.
Delete: Delete a row.
Insert: Insert a row.
Go to...: Select the row before a station | chainage.

Display

Redraw or zoom the display.

Name

Enter the name of the pline. The name of any registered HAL can also be modified.

Beginning chainage | station

Enter the chainage | station of the start of the pline.

The data types are:

POB: Point Of Beginning: Enter the coordinates of the beginning of the alignment.
Arc: A circular curve: Enter the coordinates of the IP and the radius.
Combining: A combining curve with spiral | arc | spiral | arc | spiral. Enter the IP, two radii, three clothoid spiral lengths and a "% delta 1st angle". For "% delta first arc", enter either a positive value for the portion of the total delta angle at the IP as divided between the two arcs, or a negative value for the length of the first arc.
Point: Intersection point with no curve: Enter the IP coordinates only.
Spiral: A spiral curve with spiral | arc | spiral: Enter IP, radius and two clothoid spiral lengths.

Column names can be configured in ABBREVSET.

See also CURVE, VALDATA, SEGEDIT and HORIZALIGN.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Alignments\|HAL data entry	Field Data Module

HALMANAGER

Horizontal alignments designate the path of the design.

Chainage | station equations introduce abrupt changes in chainage | station values. Alignment offsets adjust the alignment to the left or right between chainage | stations.

The table shows all the registered horizontal alignments, with their names, record numbers, numbers of chainage | station equations and numbers of offsets. Select any alignment to edit.

Horizontal alignment

Display or edit the name and record of any registered horizontal alignment.

Name: Change the name of the registered alignment.
HAL: Enter or select the set or pline to be registered as the HAL.

New alignment...

Create a new registered alignment by specifying a HAL record and the name of the registered alignment. The default name is the object name, or HALn if the object has no name.

Chainage | Station equations...

Close

Close the chainage | station equation manager

New...

Back chainage | station: Enter the value of the chainage | station where you want the station equation to apply.
Ahead chainage | station: Enter the new value of the chainage | station at the position of the back chainage | station.
Increasing: Chainage | station values increase beyond this equation.
Decreasing: Chainage | station values decrease beyond this equation.
OK: Create the new chainage | station equation
Cancel: Cancel changes to this equation

Delete

Delete the chainage | station equation

Alignment offsets...

Close

Close the alignment offset manager

New...

Chainage | station: Enter the offset to be applied to the alignment from this chainage | station to the next offset.
OK: Create the new chainage | station offset
Cancel: Cancel changes to this offset

Delete

Delete the chainage | station offset

Close

Close the alignment manager

Delete

Delete the highlighted registered HAL from the list.

Chainage | station equations create abrupt transitions from one system of chainages to another, within the same registered alignment.

Like normal alignments, chainage | station equations normally use increasing chainages. Decreasing chainages might be used for alignment surveys that meet at a common location.

Often alignments with station equations can cause confusion that can be reduced by replacement with multiple registered alignments with no chainage | station equations.

Segment numbers in alignments refer to locations between equations. The segment number follows the station value separated by a colon.

A HAL with no equations contains 1 alignment segment that extends from beginning to end. When you assign the first equation, the portion of the HAL before the back station | chainage is defined as roadway segment 1, while that portion following the ahead station (and preceding the back station of the next equation) is defined as segment 2. Each time you define a station equation, the HAL is resegmented to contain a starting segment, plus an additional segment for and between each equation. If you define an overlapping station equation as follows, Sta. 16+00.00 back = Sta. 13+00.00 ahead you’ve created a 300’ long section of alignment segment 2 for which station values duplicate those of segment 1. When entering the station value 15+00.00, a command will interpret that to be the location at 15+00.00 in segment 1 since it is encountered first. If you want to designate the location at 15+00.00 within roadway segment 2, you would enter 1500.00:2, explicitly indicating that the desired station is within roadway segment 2.

0 is used to define a position along an alignment ignoring station equations. Given the above example, 1500:0 would be displayed as 1500:1, and 1800:0 would be displayed as 1500:2.

Offset alignments simplify template transitions and do not have to be recreated after you modify the original alignment. A centreline HAL can have multiple registered alignments, each with multiple equations and offsets.

At xlines along selected HAL, design VAL and Existing VAL, report chainage, easting, northing, design elevation, existing elevation, elevation difference and grade.

Optionally, consider skips from the current road job.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

HALXYZ

Select a set and a chainage, perpendicular and elevation offsets to create a new set.

Set: Select a set
Chainage Offset: Enter the chainage offset along the set.
Perpendicular Offset: Enter the horizontal offset perpendicular to the set.
Elev Diff:: Enter the vertical offset
OK: Create new points and a set connecting those points with straight segments.
Cancel: Cancel the command without creating any points or sets

HALXYZ is an alias for HAL_XYZ.TML.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

HAREAB

Calculate the area of a set or pline and store as a parameter for use with BASIN.

Basin: Select the basin point for which you will calculate areas.
Area Type: Select Pre-developed, Developed or Bypass watershed type.
Bound: Enter the boundary set for the watershed. Use DTMDRAIN to delineate the drainage boundaries, or create them with SET or BL.
OK: Calculate and display the area in the Message scroll.
Close: Close the command

HAREAB also assigns any calculated areas to parameters of the basin, which are used by BASIN. If several subareas combine to form a predeveloped or developed drainage area, outline the group of areas with a set, then pick that set as the boundary.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Basin\|basin area	Secured

HATCH

Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines.

Select Pattern to hatch with a predefined hatch pattern using HATCHPAT.

Select User to hatch at a user-defined angle and spacing using HATCHUSER.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	277
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Hatch closed lines	Field Data Module	277

HATCHENC

Create a single block by hatching within a single region defined by multiple boundary lines.

Select a predefined hatch pattern, a scale and a location inside the boundary lines.

The block boundary is defined by tracing inside selected boundaries.

The hatch patterns can be selected from a list controlled by HATCHPAT.

The hatch scale is stored as a project variable.

HATCHENC has been replaced by GCTRACE which can also create plines or sets, control the maximum snap distance and report Basic and Alt areas.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Hatch\|Within multiple lines Draw\|Hatch enclosed area	Field Data Module	277

HATCHPAT

Create internal blocks by hatching within each selected closed boundary using a predefined hatch pattern at a specified scale.

To hatch regions, select a hatch pattern from the drop-down list, closed boundary records, and a scale.

The initial scale is derived from the plan view scale and the sheet units.

Each button in the Hatch toolbox, included in the Geocomp.ws workspace, selects a corresponding hatch pattern from the default hatch pattern file.

The listed patterns are read from the first TMODEL.PAT found on the Terramodel Search Path. The default pattern is the first in the file. Use TSP to check which TMODEL.PAT is in use. TMODEL.PAT is commonly in C:\TMCUSTOM, C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP, C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\ or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\.

For example, with Geocomp Update P, the patterns in use are by default in C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\TMODEL.PAT. To edit the hatches, copy to this file to C:\TMCUSTOM\, rename C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\TMODEL.PAT to TMODEL-P.PAT, and make your edits to C:\TMCUSTOM\TMODEL.PAT.

If the hatch pattern you want is not on the list, select the Load button from the list dialog and select a pattern from another hatch pattern file. Any hatched blocks you create are stored in the project, but the patterns are not. To create more blocks with the same pattern in a future session, load the pattern again or add the pattern to TMODEL.PAT for selection.

If you have different .PAT files with the same name, check that TSP finds the right file before you load.

The hatch patterns are defined in a common AutoCAD-compatable format. Add or edit your own hatch patterns or import patterns from other sources. Manually edit with a text editor or graphically edit with HatchKit for Terramodel from Cadro.

Patterns defined to few significant figures can scramble at large coordinates. Use patterns in TMODEL.PAT supplied with Geocomp Update K or later or use HatchKit to recompile hatches at high precision.

Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines using entered hatch angle, space and scale.

The spacing and scale are in sheet units.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	278
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Hatch\|With user-defined pattern Draw\|Hatch closed lines\|User	Field Data Module	278

HAULROAD

Select a ROADJOB with registered HALs, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, superelevation and widening; if the same design criteria apply througout, design a long road in minutes!

Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them.

The settings include design speed, default cross slope, max super, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratios. Redesign or recreate curves, superelevations, widening, xlines, profiles and RoadDTM and recompute volumes.

Edit Hal and Edit Val buttons allow you to edit your alignments with GCHALEDT and GCVALEDT.

HAULROAD requires training and a project based on prototype_haulroad.pro.

List summary information and hydrographs for a basin at a specified point.

The report heading is: HYDROLOGIC REPORT - SUMMARY OF PEAK FLOW RATES.

See BASIN.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\Basin\List basin summary info	Secured

HCCN

Calculate weighted coefficients and curve numbers for a basin, given areas and C/CN factors for watersheds.

Impervious: Non-porous surface materials such as concrete and asphalt.
Landscaped: Grass or some other ground cover.
Natural: Undisturbed.

Basin point: Enter or select the basin point. See BASIN.
All: Enter offsite and onsite areas and C/CN values for Predeveloped Conditions, Onsite Developed Conditions and Bypass Developed Conditions.
Predev: Enter enter onsite and offsite areas and C/CN values for the predeveloped watershed.
Develop: Open the Onsite Developed Conditions dialog box, to enter onsite areas and C/CN values for the developed watershed.
By-pass: Enter onsite areas and C/CN values for the bypass region of the watershed.
List: List the weighted coefficients or curve numbers to P3Pad.
Close: Close the command

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Basin\|Curve Number /C factor	Secured

HCOVER

Create a cover sheet for hydrology reports.

Run HCOVER
Enter any text for your Project name, Location, County and State.
Click OK to report these to P3Pad with the heading "HYDROLOGICAL STUDY FOR", followed by your entered Project name, Location, County and State, then the company name and address you have defined in SYSTEM command, and finally the date and time.
Include this text with your hydrology reports.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Create cover sheet...	Secured

HDEFS

Rainfall Database File

Enter the name of the file (maximum 8 characters, with a 3-character file extension) that contains the rainfall database information for the rational and SCS methods of analysis. This database information is used to interpolate the Intensity, Duration, and Frequency (IDF) curves for the rational methods, and provides total rainfall amounts for two time bases for the SCS method of analysis.

To view and select from a list of rainfall database files, click Browse.

Use RAIN to list the current IDF database to the report editor.

Rainfall Distribution File

Enter the name of the file (maximum 8 characters, with a 3-character file extension) that contains the list of time periods and the total incremental percentage of precipitation for a related time period, used for the SCS method of analysis.

To view and select from a list of rainfall distribution files, click Browse. Sample SCS files installed into C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ include:

Type I (I.SCS)
Type II (II.SCS)
Somerset (SOMERSET.SCS)
Type IA (IA.SCS)
Type IIA (IIA.SCS)
Florida St John Water Management District (IIFLSTJN.SCS)
South Florida Water Management District (IIFLSFWD.SCS)
Type III (III.SCS)

Use RAINT to list the rainfall totals for the current SCS time base to the report editor.

Layer name (drain)

Enter the name of the layer for the points and sets defining basins, ponds and reaches. This layer name will appear as the default Drain layer in DTMDRAIN.

Time Interval (Min)

Enter the calculation interval, in minutes, for the SCS calculation method.

SCS Time Base

Enter the SCS time base for calculations. Time bases vary from 6 hours (for very steep areas, emergency spillways, etc.), to 72 and 120 hours for very flat areas for very flat areas.

Unit peak coeff (300-600)

Enter the coefficient to vary the shape of the curvilinear unit hydrograph. This value is typically 484, unless local agencies require the use of different values. It can approach 600 in steep, mountainous areas, and 300 in low, swampy areas.

Minimum drainage height

Enter the minimum depth to which DTMDRAIN allows shallow depressions across a surface to fill and overflow into adjacent areas, without including them as separate drainage areas. A depth greater than this minimum will cause DTMDRAIN to outline areas as drainage basins. This value will appear as the default in the Min height: control of the DTMDRAIN.

Calc Method

Choose your method of calculation to analysis the hydrology from Soil Conservation Service (SCS), Dekalb (Rational method), and Universal (Modified Rational method). See Hydrology Calculation Methods under HGEN.

Plot Graphs (allow creation of)

Create graphs from the information it calculates. Plot plot the graphs using HDRAW.

Return Periods

Add or Delete up to eleven different Available and Selected return periods, previously defined in your rainfall database file.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Hydro defaults...	Secured

HDMS

A suite of tools for processing hydrographic survey data.

HDMS processes hydrographic survey data from in various ASCII formats including GeoNav from Geocomp Systems, HYDROpro from Trimble, and Reson.

Depth labels can be applied, formatted and weeded.

Depths, points and contours can be coloured by depth ranges.

HDMS selects the HDMS commands HDMSDLAB, HDMSRLAB, HDMSTLAB, HDMSEVT, HDMSDW, HDMSBIN and HDMSABT.

To select commands from the HDMS menu, first use MENUCFG to select a menu file such as GEOCOMP+HDMS.M or GEOCOMP+HDMS_US.M.

About Hydrographic Data Management System (HDMS).

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|About HDMS	HDMS

HDMSBIN

Thin hydrographic point data into square bins.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Bin\|Create a depth bin	HDMS

HDMSCOL

Colour objects by depths specified in a Depth Color and Layer style (.DCL) file.

Create contours at depths specified in a Depth Color and Layer style (.DCL) file.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Colour by depth\|Create contours HDMS\|Color by depth\|Create contours	HDMS

HDMSCSL

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Compare sounding lines	HDMS

HDMSDCLBLK

Add blocks to depth points and colour the blocks using a DCL file.

To run the example:

Copy C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\Docs\HDMSDCLBLK TEST.PRO, a sample Terramodel project file containing a 5 x 5m grid of depths, to a data folder.
Start Terramodel.
Open the project file hdmsdclblk test.pro.
If you haven't got a HDMS menu, use MENUCFG to select the menu file GEOCOMP+HDMS.M or GEOCOMP+HDMS_US.M.
From the HDMS Menu, select Colour by depth then Colour blocks.
Select some Depth Records.
Select Layer on which to place the Blocks.
Click [Next>>].
Select HDMSDCLBLK-1x1 from the list (If HDMSDCLBLK-1x1 is not on the list, Browse to select it from C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\.)
Tick Map colour so each block is displayed with the block colour (otherwise you will display the colour of the objects in the block.)
In the Scale box, enter 5.0 or use the mouse to measure some other grid size. (The depths in HDMSDCLBLK TEST.PRO are in a 5 x 5m grid, so a scale option of 5.0 will scale the 1 x 1m block to 5 x 5m.)
In the Rotation box, leave the value as 0.0 degrees. (If you depth grid is rotated, enter the rotation in degrees from north.)
Leave the Create new Layer for each Level option un-ticked. (Selected if separate layers for each DCL level are required for export.)
Click [Browse...] to select the example file Outer Hbr Blue.DCL from C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp.
Click [Edit] to view or edit this DCL file.
Click [Ok] to create a grid of blocks coloured according to the depth of the points. (To colour the points, use HDMSCOL.)

Previously created blocks are not removed; blocks are added each time you run HDMSDCLBLK.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	in-built help	HDMS\|Colour by depth\|Colour blocks HDMS\|Color by depth\|Color blocks	Geocomp Update or $250

HDMSDLAB

Label hydrographic depths.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Label\|Label depths	HDMS

HDMSDW

Label and clash hydrographic depths.

Label hydrographic depths then weed out clashing labels by proximity and depth priority.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Label\|Label and clash depths	HDMS

HDMSEVT

Label hydrographic survey events.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Label\|Label events	HDMS

HDMSNWSE

Smooth a DTM surface using Nearest Neighbour Weighted Surface Estimation.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Bin\|NN weighted surface estimation	HDMS

HDMSRLAB

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Label\|Label runlines	HDMS

HDMSRTR

Round, truncate or restore hydrographic depths.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Round, truncate or restore depths	HDMS

HDMSTC

Adjust the time of selected hydrographic depth records.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Adjust sounding time	HDMS

HDMSTLAB

label hydrographic trackplots.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Label\|Label trackplots	HDMS

HDRAW

Draw hydrographs in the sheet view.

Basin: Enter the basin point.
Layer: Select the layer in the sheet view on which the hydrographs will be drawn.
Predev: Plot the pre-developed hydrograph.
Dev: Plot the developed hydrograph.
Outflow: Plot the pond outflow hydrograph.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Hydrographs\|Draw hydrograph	Secured

HEATMAP

Shade elevation differences between two DTMs using coloured blocks.

Specify two DTMs, any stripping depths, any boundaries, a layer for shading, depth ranges, a block size and a legend.

For each depth range, specify the higher and lower depth and the block colour. Also under Depth Ranges, specify the block size.

If a legend is required, specify the title, style, colour and location.

Click Shade to create a temporary isopach surface, and a grid of blocks coloured by depth ranges, and the legend.

The total horizontal areas and the cut, fill and net volumes are reported to P3Pad.

See also SHADEISO which creates hatches within boundaries. SHADEISO can be more precise but slower than HEATMAP.

Create pline boundaries for each shaded region.
To separate networks of triangles, separate the boundaries.
Use SETMOOTH to define dead regions to be exclude from the shading.
Add a legend in any view showing samples of the shading for each range on the shading layer. Specify the legend text style, location and square size.
Import and export colours for the ranges from one project to another using an SIR (shade isopach ranges) file.
Compute the minimum and maximum isopach depth ranges to help you decide what depth ranges to enter.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	224

HECIN

Import cross section data, stream geometry and calculated flood-level surfaces created in HEC-RAS format.

Two types of HEC-RAS files can be imported, geometry (.GEO) and GIS (.GIS). These files are created from within HEC-RAS. GIS files typically only have the existing ground and GEO files typically have the existing ground and stream profiles.

To send terrain data from HEC-RAS to Terramodel, first enter coordinates for all of the cross sections, and the stream centerline, before exporting the data.

Consult the HEC-RAS User’s Guide, especially Appendix B.

Refer to DOCUMENTS for sample data files. The Wailupe DTM.pro contains the data from the HEC-RAS example file Wailupe. This project files demonstrates how to name several layers so that the data is properly organized to create multiple DTMs as required. This file has also been edited so that the multiple DTMs are properly created.

Use HECIN to specify the layers for each type of data in your prototype .PRO file.

Before using imported data make a careful analysis of the DTM and make adjustments as required.

Import layers: Assign imported Stream, Cut line, Profile, and Bank data to specific DTM layers.
Export Layers: Specify layers for up to four export profiles (for example, the calculated 25-yr, 50-yr, 100-yr, and 500 yr flood level surfaces). Any profiles in excess of four are placed on the "Default" export layer.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	ADD 9.7 347	File\|Misc. Import/Export\|HEC-RAS Import	Field Data Module

HECOUTGC

Export three-dimensional river schematics and cross-section stream geometry data in HEC-RAS format.

Hal

Select a Horizontal Alignment for the stream.

Begin ch

Enter the chainage at the start of the measurements to export.

End ch

Enter the chainage at the end of the measurements.

Options

File: Enter or select name and location of the .GEO file to be created.
DTM Layer: Select the layer of the surface model
Reach Name: Enter the name of the reach

OK

Export the data

The first step is to properly create the DTM and stream centerline. Define the stream using a pline as the horizontal alignment (HAL). Assign a station to the HAL as desired. Use XLINES to create cross section lines as required. The xlines do not have to be of the same length, perpendicular or straight. Xlines should not cross. The area to be modeled should be accurately surveyed and a suitable DTM created. Include banks and sharp changes in grade. Typically, collect data along each cross section.

To import a .GEO file into HEC-RAS, refer to Chapter 13 of HEC-RAS User’s Guide.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	ADD 9.7 347	File\|Misc. Import/Export\|HEC-RAS Export	Geocomp Update or $250

HELPGEOCALC

GEOCALC is a stand-alone application for geodetic coordinate transformation of ASCII files which has been superseded by GCCOORD and COORDCON.

The documentation for GEOCALC is in its Help file. This Help file cannot be opened within GeoCalc on Windows 10 or later, but can be opened in Terramodel by HELPGEOCALC.

Exe date	Guide	Menu	Source
23/11/99	In GeoCalc: Help \| Using Help	In GeoCalc: Help \| Index	Geocomp Update

HELPGFE

Open the Index Tab for Geodimeter File Editor.

Before Windows 10, if WinHelp32 has been enabled, help for Geodimeter File Editor (GFE) can be opened through selecting Help Topics from the Help menu in GFE. Since Windows 10, this is longer is no longer possible, but HELPGFE can open the Index to that help file.

See CONTENTS and DOCUMENTS.

Help date		Menu	Source
29/10/08		File\|Geodimeter\|Geodimeter File Editor help index File\|Geodimeter\|Geodimeter file editor...\|Help\|Help topics File\|Geodimeter file editor...\|Help\|Help topics Help\|Index\|Geodimeter file editor	Geocomp Update

HELPIE

Open the Index Tab for Import-Export Help.

Before Windows 10, if WinHelp32 has been enabled, help for Import and Export commands can be opened through selecting Contents from the Terramodel Help menu. Since Windows 10, this is longer is no longer possible, but HELPIE can open the Index to that Import-Export help file.

The text of Import-Export Help has also been incorporated into this TML List (TMLLIST).

See also CONTENTS, IMPORT, EXPORT, IMPORTSMGR, EXPORTSMGR and DOCUMENTS.

Help date		Menu	Source
12/03/09		Help\|Index\|Import + Export	Geocomp Update

HELPRDE

Open the Index Tab for Raw data editor Help.

Before Windows 10, if WinHelp32 has been enabled, help for Raw data editor (RDE) can be opened through selecting Contents from the Terramodel Help menu and through the Help menu in RDE. Since Windows 10, this is longer is no longer possible, but HELPRDE can open the Index to that RDE help file.

The text of RDE Help has also been incorporated into this TML List (TMLLIST) under RDE.

Open the Index Tab for Terramodel Help.

Before Windows 10, if WinHelp32 has been enabled, help for Terramodel commands can be opened through selecting Contents from the Terramodel Help menu. Since Windows 10, this is longer is no longer possible, but HELPTM command can open the Index to that Terramodel help file.

The text of Terramodel Help has been integrated into this TML List (TMLLIST). Other Help documents are available from the Index submenu of the Help menu.

Open the Index Tab for Toolbox Help.

Before Windows 10, if WinHelp32 has been enabled, help for Toolboxes (TOOLBOX) can be opened through selecting Help... from the drop-down menu on any toolbox in any workspace. Since Windows 10, this is longer is no longer possible, but HELPTOOLBOX can open that help file.

See CONTENTS.

Help date		Menu	Source
29/10/08		Help\|Index\|Toolbox Toolbox\|-\|Help...	Geocomp Update

HELPTV

Open the Index Tabs for Visualizer Help.

Before Windows 10, if WinHelp32 has been enabled and Terramodel Visualizer (TV) has been installed, help for Visualizer can be opened through selecting Contents ... from the Help menu in Visualizer. Since Windows 10, this is longer is no longer possible, but HELPTV can open that help file.

See and CONTENTS.

Help date		Menu	Source
22\03\02		In Terramodel: Help\|Index\|Visualizer Complete In Visualizer: Help\|Contents	Geocomp Update

HELPTVL

Open the Index Tabs for Visualizer Help.

Before Windows 10, if WinHelp32 has been enabled, help for 3D Visualizer (3DVISUALISER) can be opened through selecting Contents ... from the Help menu in any 3D Visualiser window. Since Windows 10, this is longer is no longer possible, but HELPTVL can open that help file.

Generate hydrographs for a specified basin point.

Select the basin point objects for hydrographs.

After HGEN computes the hydrographs, a summary of the peak flows for selected storm events will be displayed in P3Pad.

If you selecte the Universal Rational Method of analysis, select Yes to locate the hydrograph peak at 1xTc, or No to locate the hydrograph peak at 3xTc.

The SCS calculation method used by HGEN employs the same methodology to generate a runoff hydrograph as the Soil Conservation Service’s TR-20 method. This portion of the Hydrology module has been tested extensively and the results compared against the PC version of TR-20. For curve numbers over 70 and with typical ranges of precipitation, the peak flow rates between the two programs deviate, on the average, by no more than one percent. Extreme ranges of curve numbers and precipitation values agree to within three percent. The primary reason for the deviation between peak flow rates is that TR-20 reports an additional interpolated peak between data points, while Terramodel only reports values at the user-specified intervals, typically every 5 minutes.

When comparing Terramodel’s SCS option to studies done using the TR-55 method, be aware of the differences between TR-55 and TR-20. The original tabular method of TR-55 was developed by making several computer runs with the TR-20 program. In each case, a runoff curve number (CN) of 75 was used with rainfall volumes such that three inches of runoff volume was generated. Any deviation from the data points used to create the charts and graphs for TR-55 will produce results that vary from TR-20. Although the 1986 update to TR-55 added charts to cover a larger range of values, users are still forced to base their calculations on a linear interpolation of charts for calculations that are non-linear. The 1986 TR-55 update lists several conditions for which TR-55 should not be used, and recommends using TR-20 for more accurate results. The TR-55 method was created to emulate TR-20 using charts and graphs, and any difference between the two reflects the inaccuracy of TR-55.

Selecting inappropriate curve numbers is one cause of inaccurate results using the SCS method. Unlike the rational method, some combinations of precipitation and curve numbers will actually generate no runoff. Small amounts of runoff are spread over the duration period (6/24/72/120 hours) and may produce peaks that are unexpectedly low. Unlike the rational method, where C factors have a linear effect on the peak flow rates, curve numbers do not produce linear results. The following table demonstrates how small variations in curve numbers affect the amount of direct runoff (DRO). For additional information regarding the SCS method, refer to the references listed at the end of this section.

P(in)
CN 25 DRO(in)CN35 DRO(in)CN50 DRO(in)CN
75 DRO(in)CN 95 DRO(in)1
0.000.000.000.000.562
0.000.000.000.381.484
0.000.000.331.673.436
0.000.251.143.285.418
0.130.802.255.047.4010
0.471.593.566.889.39

"Universal Rational" is a method based on the Baumgardner / Morris FHWA method published in 1982, and provides an approximate procedure for developing a runoff hydrograph using the rational equation, Q=CIA. When using this option, you have the choice of placing the hydrograph peak at either 1xTc or 3xTc. By placing the peak at 3x Tc (the recommended option) you can achieve a more realistic (conservative) design. Increasing the amount of flow that occurs before the peakmore realistic (conservative) design. Increasing the amount of flow that occurs before the peak enables the pond to partially fill before the peak flow rate occurs, more closely emulating the rainfall distribution used by the TR-20 method.

The Baumgardner / Morris FHWA method is also described in the State of Florida Department of Transportation Drainage Manual. We recommend you limit this method to basins of less than 500 acres and times of concentration of less than 30 minutes. The valid minimum and maximum times of concentration are 5 minutes and 144 minutes, respectively.

The DeKalb Rational method was developed for use within the metropolitan Atlanta area. The methodology is based on the rational formula and unit hydrograph theory, as detailed in the DeKalb County Drainage Procedures Manual.

In developing this methodology, flood hydrographs were created using the rainfall database curves (IDF curves) by computing incremental rainfall intensities and arranging them to form a storm pattern.

Two typical dimensionless hydrographs were developed for use in the Atlanta area by DeKalb county. Terramodel selects the appropriate hydrograph based on the time of concentration. Each ordinate is then simply a percentage of the peak, where the peak is based on Q=CIA. The peak flow rate always occurs at 5xTc. the base of the hydrograph extends to 10xTc. We recommend you limit this method to basins of less than 500 acres and times of concentration of less than 30 minutes. The valid minimum and maximum times of concentration are 5 minutes and 144 minutes, respectively. The table below shows the dimensionless hydrographs that are used with the DeKalb Rational method:

T/TC
TC = 20 MINUTES1
0.160.042
0.190.083
0.270.164
0.450.325
1.001.006
0.340.307
0.270.118
0.190.059
0.120.0310
0.000.00

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Hydrographs\|Generate hydrograph	Secured

HGNIMP

Import depths, runlines, trackplot lines and events created by GeoNav DOS software in .GPT format.

TML	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Import\|GeoNav GPT depths	HDMS

HIDE

Hide or reveal a single segment of a set.

A hidden segment is not displayed or plotted but can still be selected, labelled, modified, used as a breakline, and so on.

To hide or reveal a single hidden set segment, select the segment with a mouse. To reveal all segments for selected sets, use REVEAL.

To display all segments, use Ignore Hide in DISPLAYSET.

Pline segments cannot be hidden.

Revealed segments which are OFF or on invisible layers remain off or invisible.

A colour mapped to pen 0 by PLOTSET will not plot.

A set or pline with a pen-up-only linetype is effectively hidden but selectable.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Set\|Hide segment Modify\|On/Off\|Hide set segment	Field Data Module	49

HLIST

List hydrographs in detail in P3Pad.

Point: Enter the basin point for a detailed list of generated hydrographs for the storm events entered into Hydrology Default Settings (HDEFS).
Basin: List developed watershed hydrographs
Predev: List Predeveloped watershed hydrographs
Pond: List the pond outflow hydrograph
Inflow: List the pond inflow hydrograph.

TML date		Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Basin\|List hydrograph	Secured

HNAVEDIT

Open HYDROpro NavEdit software to export hydrographic survey data.

The NavEdit module of HYDROpro software from Trimble must have been installed.

	Guide	Menu	Source
	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Export\|NavEdit	POA

HORIZALIGN

Use registered alignments with commands such as GCACTIVE and ROADJOB.

See also HALMANAGER to create and delete registered alignments, add chainage equations or enter alignment offsets.

Command date	Guide		Source
12/03/09	HELPTM		Field Data Module

HRLIST

List inflow and outflow hydrographs for a reach.

Reach: Enter the reach for the list of inflow and outflow hydrographs.
OK: List hydrographs in the report editor.

Before using HRLIST, to list reach hydrographs, use HGEN to generate hydrographs for the basins or ponds, then use HROUT or HROUTR to route the hydrographs through the reaches and ponds.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Hydrographs\|Inflow/Outflow hydrographs	Secured

HROUT

Route the basin and reach hydrographs through a pond.

Before routing a hydrograph through a pond, use PONDVOL and PONDOUT to store pond areas (or volumes) and outlet devices .

Pond: Enter the basin/pond point object through which the hydrographs will be routed.
Print report: Report detailed routing to P3Pad.
Min. Flow: Enter a minimum flow value (the flow at which the report listing will begin and end) in cubic units per second.
OK: Route the basin and reach hydrographs
Close: Close the command

HROUT adds the hydrographs for the basin together for each storm frequency and routes them through the pond. If the pond capacity is exceeded (the depth of flow in the pond is higher than the highest elevation that you entered when you stored the pond), HROUT will warn you, although it will continue the computations using the maximum outflow value available.

Where multiple hydrographs are to be added together, HROUT uses the hydrograph with the shortest time interval as a basis for the computations, and interpolates all other hydrographs to this time interval. The resulting hydrograph represents the pond inflow hydrograph, and can be listed using the Inflow option of HLIST.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Routing\|Pond routing	Secured

HROUTR

Route the basin and reach hydrographs through a reach.

Use REACH to assign reach parameters to the set line before attempting to route hydrographs.

Select the set to which you have assigned reach attributes, and through which you’ll route hydrographs.

HROUTR uses the Muskingum method of stream flow routing. With this method, the constant X expresses the relative importance of the inflow and outflow in determining storage., and ranges from 0.20 for trapezoidal channels to 0.45 for concrete lined channels. The storage constant, K, is the ratio of storage to discharge and is frequently calculated as the travel time through the reach.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Routing\|Reach routing	Secured

HYDROIMP

Import depths, runlines, trackplot lines and events created by Trimble HYDROpro software in .HPT format.

TML	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	hdms.pdf	HDMS\|Import\|HydroPro HPT depths	HDMS

Report or edit properties such as object type, point numbers, north and east coordinates, elevation, name, record number, reference record number, CAD properties, layer name, colour number and linetype.

See EDIT for more details of the properties.

Report to Message Scroll the deflection angle and bearings between two lines or three points.

Select two lines by bearing. Pick segments of sets of plines, or right-click to select by Bearing and Angle or Point to Point.

Pvt:: Enter or select the location of the "pivot", which is also the vertex.
Ahd:: Enter or select a location on the "ahead" line.
Defl:: Enter or select a location on the "deflection" line.

Display the station | chainage and offset at the cursor from a selected set or pline.

Select an alignment set or pline. The ACTIVE alignment is the default, unless no active alignment has been set.

For Point, select a location. A rubber band is drawn from the cursor to the lowest chainage perpendicular to the alignment. Chainage and offset are shown in the coordinate scroll. The rubber band and coordinate scroll are updated as the cursor moves.

A negative offset is to the left of the alignment (looking in the direction of increasing chainage).

US English language dialogs and menus refer to IDSTATION. British English dialogs and menus refer to IDCHAINAGE.

See also GCIDCHN, CENVIEW, GC03 and STAORCHN.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Reports\|Identify chainage Reports\|Identify station Inquire\|Identify chainage Inquire\|Identify station	Field Data Module

IGRP

Turn all objects in a group, and all other objects off.

Select an object in that group, or enter the group number.

See also QISOLATE, LAYERSET, OFF, OFFALL, ON, ONALL, ONGRP and SETGRP.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Field Data Module	47

ILINE

Create points at each intersection of selected sets or plines, on the specified layer, in the specified order and with interpolated elevations.

If elevations can be interpolated from both records, the elevation is interpolated from the set or pline with the lower record number.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Point\|At intersections	Secured	303

ILL

Make all layers on a layer list visible or invisible.

Position, display, plot or modify raster images behind your project.

All images are reloaded each time an image is added or revised or a project is opened.

Each image is listed in a table. Select an image from the list then make any changes.

Classification

S Source: An original source image. An image that was Added to the project using the "Add" button, or a derived image designated as a keeper. This image will not be altered or deleted by the Image Manager. A source image is detached from the image manager, and the image file is preserved on disk.
C Clipped: A portion of a new image derived from a clip operation. Images can be clipped to sets or Pline boundaries. An image that is clipped will be deleted from disk when deleted from the Image Manager.
D Dynaimage: A new image derived from an association with a dynaview. Images are not automatically "seen" through dynaviews; this type of image results from the intentional association of an image with a dynaview. This image will be deleted from disk when deleted from Image Manager.
R Registered: A new image derived from the two point registrations of a source image. Two point registration rotates original image data to fit it to the new registration points. This image will be deleted from disk when deleted from the Image Manager.
* Unresolved: Unresolved images represent references to external image files that either no longer exist, or cannot be found. If a project file is moved and image files are not moved with the project, this can occur. Resolve this issue by IMAGEPTH, or by "Modifying" the target image and browsing for the image, or leave these images in an unresolved state (such as when a network disk is temporarily unavailable). Since unresolved images are not associated with a file on disk, deleting the unresolved image will only delete its reference in the Image Manager list. Unresolved images will not display or print.

View

The view mode of each image.

Image Name

The file name and type.

Display

Display (Y) or hide (N). Change with the mouse or Display mode

Size

The approximate size in units for the view.

Brightness

Adjust the overall lightness or darkness of an image. A greater value results in a brighter image. The values can range from -100 to 100, with a default of 0.

Contrast

Adjust the difference in shading between regions. A greater value results in more contrast. The values can range from -100 to 100, with a default of 0.

Fade

Make images less dominant when compared to objects. On the screen, a high fade value darkens images; on a printer, a higher fade lightens images to produce a similar muted effect. The values can range from 0 to 100, with a default of 0.

Display image

Toggle display of the image.

Draft Mode

Turn on to reduce refresh times and to display transparent pixels in .TIF and .PNG as black. Turn off to see through transparent pixels in clipped, rotated and overlapping images, and to treat adjacent images as single composite images when you rotate them.

Image Up | Image Down

Images at the top of the list are displayed over any overlapping images. Images are initially sorted by date with newer images at the top. Use the buttons to reorder images.

Info

Display more detailed information about an image.

Modify

Modify the source image, specify, add or export a registration file, manual placement, aspect ratio and pline border.

Register

Rotate, translate and scale image by two point pairs. Replace file or create new one. Requires Image manager module.

Source picks: Pick two points on the image as Source Pick A and Source Pick B. Pick points defined by key features such as object corners.
Destination picks: Pick corresponding two points in the project window as Destination Pick A and Destination Pick B.

Resulting image: Specify whether to replace the original image file or create a new file.

Clip

Clip image inside or outside a boundary and retain or replace the image file. Requires Image manager module.

Clip away information: Remove pixels inside or outside a boundary
Clip boundary: Select a closed pline or set
Clip result: Replace the original image file or create a new file with a specified name and location.

To clip an image to a boundary, the source image must be visible. To replace clipped pixels with transparent pixels, create a TIF or a PNG.

Dynaimage

Associate an image with a dynaview, clip to dynaview extent or boundary, combine mosaics, and save the resulting image. Requires Image manager module.

Keeper

Keep any derived image (the result of registering, clipping or associating with a dynaview). When images are first added, they are source images and labeled with an "S". As you clip, register, and create dynaimages, you create new, derived images. Rather than overwrite the source images, the derived images that can also be clipped, registered, and otherwise modified. Derived images are overwritten as you make further changes unless you designate them as keeper files. Requires Image manager module.

A side effect of changing a derived image into a source image is the creation of a TFW file for that image. The file is not converted to a source image (and the TFW file is not created) until you click Done. Use the Keeper button to toggle the image classification from derived to source until you commit with the Done button.

Add

Source image:: Select an image to add to your project. For .TIF, .BMP, .JPG or .GIF formats, filter on Image files or the specific file extension. For .PNG, .JPEG, .TIFF, .DCX, .DIB, .PCX, .PICT, .TGA, .WMF or .WPG formats, filter on All files.
Manual placement:: Specify the location of the upper right and lower left corners of the image
Registration file:: Select a registration (world) file, if supplied, to specify location of north-west corner, pixel size and number of pixels.
Apply Registration file: Compute placement of upper right and lower left corner of image from selected registration file.
Keep aspect ratio based on height: Modify the upper right corner to keep the aspect ratio or modify the ratio to keep the location of the upper right corner.
Add pline border to image: Add a pline around the image in the specified view.

Done

Exit Image manager and display the images.

Delete | Detach

Remove a link to an image from your project. The button toggles as either Delete or Detach to reflect the classification of the highlighted file. Original, or source images cannot be deleted, so the button displays as Detach for these files. Clipped, registered, and dynaimage files are derived images which can be deleted, so the button displays as Delete for these files. To delete or detach files, highlight the file in the Image Manager and click the Delete or Detach button. Deleted files are deleted from your disk drive. Detached files are removed from the Image Manager, but remain on your disk drive.

Field data module is sufficient to display images. CAD module enables editing with IMAGE manager. Image manager module enables Register, Clip, Dynaimage and Keeper functions.

If an image is missing when you open a project, Browse for another image file, Postpone browsing for that image or Cancel Image manager.

Images rotated by other than 90 or 180 degrees include additional triangles to maintain cardinal orientation. Pixels in these triangles, and any clipped regions, are transparent, provided you specify .TIF or .PNG format when you enter the new file name. If you specify .JPG, these pixels will be black because .JPG does not support transparency.

Where images overlap, the pixels of the top image are displayed. Where there are no pixels, the background colour is displayed in Terramodel and the paper colour is displayed on plots. Where the only pixels are transparent, the background and paper colours are visible if Draft mode is OFF, and displayed as black, if Draft mode is ON.

If the display background is black, one cannot see whether draft mode is on or off, or whether those pixels are transparent. For this reason, when working with transparency, change the background colour to something other than black. To keep a dark background, select a colour such as dark blue. To reveal what colour will be plotted on paper, use a background with a similar colour to the paper, such as white. Use EDITINI to change the background colour, and the cursor and highlight colours if you need to maintain contrast.

Some images cannot be displayed by Terramodel, with an error that indicates the file is too big, or in an unrecogised format. Also, .JPG photos from Apple devices can be rotated in a non-standard way that Image manager does not honour. A possible solution is to open the .JPG in a photo editor then save as a .TIF. MS Paint and 3D Paint are supplied with Windows. 3D Paint will automatically reduce the size of large files. Applications such as GeoViewer and Claris CAD will display and geolocate edit very large images. Global Mapper will also tile images.

Images are memory intensive. Images do not use system memory when they are not displayed. Very large images may not display or plot correctly. If so, reduce the size by cropping, tiling or pixel size to that required for your presentation media such as paper or screen. .JPG files decompress to use much more memory than the file size.

To create a .TFW for a source .TIF image, create a pline that surrounds the image and clip to that boundary. No clipping will actually occur because the boundary is larger than the image. A derived clip image will result. Designate this image as a "Keeper," to also create a .TFW for it.

Memory refers to Computer RAM. Disk space refers to memory requirements on hard disks.

As there is no undo, be careful not to overwrite source image data with processed image data.

Image file size on disk is not always a good indicator of how much memory is required to view the image (JPG images are compressed when stored to disk).

To support image processing (Contrast, Brightness, Fade, Rotation and Clipping), all 1-bit and 4-bit images are promoted to 8-bit images when loaded into memory. 1-bit images require 8 times more memory, and 4-bit images require twice as much memory.

Clipped and dynaview images are written to disk as 8-bit or 24-bit images, even if they are derived from 1 or 4 bit source images.

A plan-view rotation of 45, 135, 225, or 315 degrees will double the amount of memory required to store the rotated images for the plan-view. Plan-view rotations near North up, East up, West up, or South up require the least extra memory.

To expose black edge artifacts on rotated and clipped images, use EDITINI to change background color to other than black.

Images Pan and Zoom faster in Draft Mode. If you have a black background and none of your images interfere with each other, use Draft Mode for faster response times.

An image will not rotate correctly if the .TFW specifies an aspect of other than 1.0.

Converting 24-bit source images to 8-bit using an external photo-editor will reduce your disk and memory requirements by two-thirds.

If you can reduce the resolution of your images by one half, you reduce your disk and memory requirements by three-quarters. For example converting a 24-bit 5000x5000 image to an 8-bit 2500x2500 image will reduce the disk space and memory required to save, load, and display the image from 71.5 MB to 6 MB (1/12th of the original requirement).

More dynaimages require more disk space and memory.

Use the Image Manager to turn off images, and free up memory.

Image Manager creates and manipulates files on disk. If you use image manager to manipulate images and then do not save the project, the original state of the image files will not be restored. It is easy to create "orphaned" images this way. For example, if you have a 100 MB source image that you clip to a 50 MB file called clip01.bmp, exiting Terramodel without saving the project will leave clip01.jpg on your disk drive with no relation to a Terramodel project. Use a file manager such as Explorer to delete this file.

Change file locations for Image Manager (IMAGE).

If you open a project file in Image Manager that has links to images on different paths, the images are not displayed unless you browse to select the new paths for each image.

With IMAGEPTH, browse to select any image in the new location, then change the path of all images in a project to the single location, or detach all missing images.

Restart Terramodel immediately after changing the image path.

Display properties in Image manager such as visibility and location are retained.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

IMANAGER

Create, copy and delete traffic island templates from stations | chainages in roadways.

Station | Chainage: Display each beginning station | start chainage.
Name: Display the name of the template. Edit the name of the current template.
# Shapes: Display the number of shapes in the island template on the left and right side at that station | chainage.

Road job: Select a road job.
Roadway: Select a roadway from the selected road job.
Edit...: Click Edit... or double-click on the template to open the Island Editor (ISLAND).
Copy...: Copy and island template to a roadway, name and beginning station | start chainage.
Delete: Delete the highlighted island template.
New ...: Enter the roadway, name and beginning station | start chainage for a new island template.
Import Template..: Import a file of island template data from an .RTL file.
Export Template...: Export island templates to an .RTL file.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|Island manager	Secured

IMPORT

Using a system of configurable scripts, import survey data into Terramodel, directly from some survey instruments or data collectors, or from a data file.

Scripts download or import from a wide range of survey instruments and software including:

ASCII points
Callidus
DiNi
DWG and DXF
Elta
ESRI shapefiles (.SHP)
Geocomp
Geodimeter
Hand entry
iWitness
LandScape
LandXML
Leica
Liscad
MicroStation V7 DGN
Nikon
Smigs
Sokkia
SpectraPrecision
SMI
Terramodel
Topcon
Trimble
Tripod Data Systems (TDS)
USGS

Some scripts come standard with Terramodel. Some are supplied with the Geocomp Update.

Some scripts download, some import and some download then import. Some scripts export or upload (see EXPORT).

The first item on the Import Script menu is always Import Script Manager (IMPORTSMGR). Scripts turned on by the manager are listed for selection from the File | Download/Import menu. Scripts turned off are hidden.

Scripts always open when run from the command line, even when they are hidden from the list. Therefore, scripts defined in the Alias Manager (ALIAS) can always be opened by entering the alias. For example, PENZDIN command always opens the "P,E,N,Z,D _i" ASCII points import script, if that script and alias exist.

Data that are based on coordinates are imported as points. Data that are based on survey observations are passed to the Raw Data Editor (RDE) which computes the coordinates and enables you to edit the data. These points are created as you exit RDE. Some other data are imported as plines, sets, text or blocks.

Some scripts allows you to select multiple files to import from the same folder.

If the script opens Raw Data Editor, and the RDE window is on a display that is not visible, the import script locks up. To reset the RDE window to open on the default Windows display, use Task Manager to end the Terramodel task, restart Terramodel and run FIXRDE. Then open a project and import your data into RDE.

At the "View file contents" page of a script, check that the previewed contents look like the data you expect to see.

ASCII files are encoded with characters in a common format defined by American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII points files contain Eastings, Northings and, usually, other fields.

The "ASCII points" import script prompts for points files with extensions .PTS, ASC or DAT. For other file extensions, such as .TXT or .CSV, change the "files of type" to Misc. points files. Multiple points files can be selected at once.

At "View File Contents", check the displayed contents and, if needed, enter a different data order or use a different script or command.

If an ASCII file will not display in preview, it might be a 64-bit ASCII file. If so, use STRIPNUL to remove all null characters, and then try to import again.

At "Point settings, select the layer for the imported points. Optionally, select a point number shift. Skip over "Point descriptor expansion" (see below).

Selecting a clipping boundary can reduce the number of imported points.

If you change the same settings each time you import data from the same source, consider defining your own script with Import Script Manager.

"P,E,N,Z,D _i" and "P,N,E,Z,D _i" are scripts in the most common ASCII points format. These can be opened with aliases PENZDIN and PENZDOUT. ASCIIIN opens "ASCII points".

Other commands that import ASCII points formats include GCCSVIN, GCMFI, GCPTSIN, FBLOCK, LIDARGRD and LIDARIN.

For Geodimeter .ARE files, use GCPTSIN. .ARE files are files that contain points in an different ASCII format that is not delimited by characters or columns.

The first time you use any command that forms a DTM, duplicate points on the DTM layer within a tolerance of 0.001 project units are relayered to layer 0.

Before you do that, use GC92 to check the imported data for duplicate points with height differences that you might want to relayer and plines that you might want to convert to sets.

Once the points have been created, if the names have been feature-coded, run AUTODRAFT to modify or create colours, layers, block, text, sets and plines.

Import CAD data or raw survey data from one project into another.

File(s): Enter the full path and name of or browse for one of more Terramodel projects.
Import CAD objects: Import all CAD data.
Import raw data: Import any raw survey data and enable layer and level preferences.
Keep original layer: Assign the original layer to the imported raw data. If the layer does not exist in the target .PRO file it will be created.
Raw data points layer: Select the layer for the imported raw data points.
Level: Select an RDE computation level for the imported raw data points.
Import all jobs: If raw survey data is imported, "Import all jobs" or select survey jobs from the Raw data in the project being imported. The imported surveys are displayed in RDE.

Many export and upload functions are described here: Transfer data to and from Trimble.

3300 | 3600 Elta | 3600 GDM | 3600 TDS | 5600 Elta | 5600 GDM | 5600 TDS | Callidus ASCII | Constructor 100 | Constructor 55 | ELTA GPS | Geodimeter coords (are)_i | Geodimeter raw (job)_i | TS315: Survey points import scripts.
Geocomp Geodimeter AGA _i | Geocomp Geodimeter JOB _i | Geocomp Trimble JOB _i: Geodimeter points import scripts in Geocomp Updates.
DiNi Digital Level | Trimble DiNi File: Digital level.
Example (job)_i | fdm sample_import: Sample data.
FieldD (trv)_i: Import .TRV traverse.
Roadline and Roadline 3D: See P29 and P39.
SCS900 (dxf): Site Control System 900 import via .DXF. Use SCS900IN instead. See Import points, strings and DTM via .TXT and Import points, strings and DTM via .DXF.
Survey Controller | Survey Controller v1-3: Download via Survey Controller. See Download points and Download points via Windows Explorer.
Survey Data Card: See Import Survey Controller .JOB via Survey Data Card.
TDS .RW5: Import Tripod Data systems (TDS) .RW5 survey.
Trimble DTM (ttm): Import Trimble Digital Terrain Model as .TTM.
Trimble raw survey data (dc): Import surveys as .DC. See Import points as .DC via script and Download and import points as .DC via script. A .DC file can be embedded inside a .JOB file.
Trimble Roading 3D (dc): Import a roadway as .DC. See Download a roadway as .DC via Data Transfer Utility and Download a roadway as .DC via Windows Explorer.

ESRI shapefiles consist of at least three files in the same folder: .SHP containing geometry, .SHX containing the index and .DBF containing attributes. See ESRIIN.

To import ESRI DEM gridded elevation data, use GCESRIIN.

The LandXML import script imports points, surfaces and alignments from .XML files in LandXML format.

The import script also validates but does not import parcels. To import parcels, use GCXMLIN.

To import only import points within a boundary or corridor, use GCXMLIN or BIGXMLIN.

To import only import points and configure point numbering and duplication, use GCPTSIN LandXML.

.XML (eXtensible Markup Language) files can also define data in other .XML formats specific to various industries. Separate conversion commands are needed to import from each format. For example, use MULTIPIN to import FieldLevel .XML, GCPTSIN to import Trimble RTX .XML or XML2ADC to import CodeDictionary .XML files.

.XML files can have lines of data that are too long for the LandXML import script. Use GCFIXXML to break up these lines by inserting new line characters.

.TTM files are a file format for DTMs in Trimble instruments. Import these into Terramodel using the Trimble DTM (ttm) script. At the prompt to "Import into view", always select the first view on the drop-down menu to import into Plan view (even if this prompt calls the first view some other name).

There are no scripts to import surveys formatted in Raw Data Editor (RDE) syntax, but surveys can be copied from the Raw Data Editor into any text editor, saved as .RDE files with edits, and copied back into RDE.

The description of any survey job imported into RDE using a script is in the format "FILE NAME.EXT imported at [time and date]". The description of any new survey job created by "Create Survey Job" in RDE is "<Hand entry> created at [time and date]". These descriptions can’t be edited in RDE.

To add a survey to Raw data editor with the name of an imported .RDE file:

Use Import Script Manager (IMPORTSMGR) to turn on the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script supplied with Geocomp Updates.
Use a file manager to copy an .RDE file that contains only comments, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\Docs\EMPTY.RDE, to your survey files location, with a new name and the extension .RDE.
Use the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script (IMPORT) to import the .RDE file with the new name.
Raw Data Editor creates a new survey job with the description "[new file name.RDE] imported at [time and date]".
Copy from the .RDE file that has your survey.
Paste into Raw data editor.

For examples of importing surveys using .RDE files, see Using RDE for Survey Control, FLD2RDE and RAW2RDE.

The default script is AutoCAD (dwg or dxf). Geocomp AutoCAD (dwg) and BricsCAD scripts import using the Geocomp_64 colour scheme. DWGIN command calls Geocomp AutoCAD (dwg). DXFIN command calls Geocomp AutoCAD (dxf).

The Autocad Conversion File (.ACF) substitutes colours, fonts and linetypes. See EXPORTSMGR for details.

Linework entities that have multiple elevations are imported as sets; those with a single elevation are imported as plines. If you want any of those plines to be sets, such as a pad with a single elevation, or a cadastral boundary, use GCCONVRT to convert them.

After importing 3D data from a DWG or DXF, and before forming any DTM, use GC92 to

check for duplicate points with height differences
check for points at the same location as vertices of plines
move apart points that are within 0.001 project units, so that near-vertical walls form DTMs correctly.

If the project contains the layer DXF_PT_CHK, duplicate points are removed during the import. This prevents GG92 from reporting duplicates, and slows the import a lot. Removing duplicate points later by DTM formation is much quicker. Delete this layer from all projects including prototype projects.

Terramodel layer names have a maximum of 17 characters. AutoCAD layer names can now be much longer. If the AutoCAD layer name is longer than 17 characters, characters must be omitted.

To change the layer names in a .DXF file to new layer names in an output .DXF file, use DXFCHANG. To convert .DWG to .DXF before importing or using DXFCHANG, use ACADCONV.

To import a specified number of characters from the beginning of each layer name, use the project variable "DWGIMPORT:LAYERNAME" with an integer value = from 0 to 16. The remaining characters come from the end of the layer name. For example, if you specify 2 characters, you get the first 2 and the last 14. If the project variable is not set, you get the first 17 characters as normal. To edit project variables, use PROJECTV.

For example:

Value of project variable	.DWG or .DXF layer name	Terramodel layer name
0	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313	E TYPE_A1 140313
5	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313	ELEC E_A1 140313
16	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313	ELEC LV CABLE TY
Not set	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313	ELEC LV CABLE TY
0	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)	0313 (SS 140521)</td
5	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)	ELEC (SS 140521)
16	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)	ELEC LV CABLE TY
Not set	Elec LV Cable Type_A1 140313 (SS 140521)	ELEC LV CABLE TY

Some characters may be substituted to maintain compatability. See DXFCHANG.

If the Browse buttons to select the .DWG, .DXF and .ACF files are missing, see SSERIFE to install the required Windows font.

If you get an error message or crash when you try to IMPORT a .DWG or .DXF, this could be because the file:

Problem	Possible solution
Is too new.	Convert the file to an earlier version using ACADCONV or some other application or ask Geocomp Systems for advice about changing the import script.
Contains objects that are unsupported by the command.	Try the import script installed with Geocomp Update N, or use ACADCONV or some third-party application to convert to an earlier version.
Contains proxy objects created by third-party software.	Use that software to export a .DWG or .DXF with standard objects.
Contains vports that are not recognised.	Use ACADCONV to downgrade to R10 .DXF format.

Terramodel cannot import or export MicroStation V8 .DGN .files. If you happen to have MicroStation or AutoCAD issued since 2010, use that to import .DWG files exported from Terramodel and .DGN files exported from MicroStation, and to save as .DWG (2000 format) for Terramodel to import using a .DWG import script.

Terramodel cannot import MicroStation .DTM files. Export DTMs from Microstation in another format such as .DWG or LandXML.

To transfer data to and from versions of MicroStation before V8, import .DGN using the MicroStation import script. These files are referred to as V7 .DGN files. They do not support alphanumeric layer names like .DWG does.

All imported points with elevations that have an absolute value less than or equal to 0.001 are stored as two-dimensional.

The following objects are ignored: Cell definitions, Cell instances, Reference files, Shapes, Conics, Ellipses (except a unit ellipse as noted above), Surfaces, Solids, Point strings, Cones, Bspline surfaces and curves, and multiline entities.

If you get a message of "Too many objects" while reading in the DGN file, increase the maximum number of objects with SYSTEM.

DGN object	Terramodel object	Comment
Lines and ellipses	Points, Sets or Plines	Lines with a zero length and circles with a unit length radius can be set to create a point. Sets are created if points in the line have different elevations. Plines are created if all points in the line have the same elevation.
Line strings, curves, complex strings and arcs	Sets or Plines	Sets are created if points in the line have different elevations. Plines are created if all points in the line have the same elevation.
Text	Text	Font numbers are mapped to font names. Text justification can be different.
Levels	Layers	Levels are mapped to layers.
Colors	Colors	Colors are mapped to colors.
Linetypes	Linetypes	Linetypes are mapped from line number to Terramodel linetypes.
Fonts	Fonts	Fonts are mapped with user-definable conversion settings. Justification and font styles can be different.
Shared cells	Blocks	Shared cell definitions are used to create block definitions and insert blocks. Cells are ignored.

MicroStation source file: Select the view mode for the imported data, select one or more V7 .DGN files to import, then click Next.

Conversion mapping file

Select a MicroStation conversion mapping file (.MCF) and click Next.

Conversion settings

Select conversion settings then click Next.

Import summary

Check the import summary then Import and Finish.

To import Digital Elevation Models in the United States Geological Survey .DEM format, use the "USGS (dem)" script. An alias for this script is typically DEMIN.

Import to view

Select the view into which the data is to be imported.

File

Enter or browse to select the path and name of the .DEM file.

Starting point ID

Enter the starting point ID. As each point is imported, the first available integer point number greater than this starting number will be used.

Draw outline

Draw a pline box within the designated view, indicating the extents of the data.

Optional enclosing boundary | Pick bndy

Enter the record number or pick any closed pline or set within which the imported points must lie. If that pline or set is not actually closed, a closed boundary will be formed using an imaginary line from the last to the first point on the line.

Preview

A preview window displays file content.

Import

Import the points from .DEM.

DEM files are produced by the US Geological Survey (USGS) and are distributed by Earth Science Information Centers (ESIC), as well as other private companies.

.DEM files consist of a sampled array of elevations for a number of ground positions at regularly spaced intervals such as three-arc-second (approximately 100m grid) data files of the USA (1.5 million points) or 7.5 minute (mostly a 30m grid) for sections of USA (150,000 points).

Note the units of the data file and make the appropriate system settings and coordinate conversions as required. All values are read directly from the file and are not translated.

3-arc-second data is imported with latitude and longitude coordinate values in decimal degrees for X and Y. These points can also be converted using the coordcon command. Convert to feet or metre coordinate systems using COORDCON.

Refer to Data Users Guide 5 Digital Elevations Models from ESIC.

Commands that import gridded DEMs in other file formats include GCESRIIN, GCNEDIN and LIDARGRD.

Select the Road job and specify the import file type "Geocomp Existing", or "Geocomp Design" depending on the desired surface in the .CES file.

IMPORTGC is an alias to IMPORTXS which uses IMPORTGC.TML to import Geocomp .CES format files.

See GC37 to create .CES files.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	157

IMPORTSMGR

Hide, reveal, create, edit, delete or run import scripts.

Import script menu

Select import scripts to be shown from those listed in IMPORT or on the File | Download/Import menu.

New...

Enter the script name to appear in the File | Download/Import menu. By convention, suffix the name of download scripts with _d, import scripts with _i, and download and import scripts with _d+i.
Specify whether the action of the script is to
- Download from an instrument/data collector to disk,
- Download to disk and import, or
- Import from disk.
Step though Next buttons to specify the details of the script.

Edit...

Edit the details of one selected script.

Delete

Delete one selected script by deleting the .xi or .xi_ file from the script file location.

Run

Run the selected script.

Close

Close the script manager.

Import scripts are stored as files of the same name as the menu item. If the script is ticked in Import Script Manager, the file extension is made .xi so the script is listed in the File | Download/Import menu. If not ticked, the extension is .xi_ and the script is not listed (unless an .xi is also present). Export scripts have the extension .xe or .xe_.

If turning on on a tick in the manager does not add a script to the menu, use Windows File Explorer (EXPLORE) to show "File name extensions" and "Hidden items", and then manually change the file extension of that import script from .xi_ to .xi. The location of the script file is either C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\ or C:\Users\UserName\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\. Substitute UserName with your User name. The script is displayed if a file with the extension .xi exists in either location.

If turning off a tick in the manager does not remove a script from the menu, use Windows File Explorer (EXPLORE) to show "File name extensions" and "Hidden items", and then manually change the file extension of that import script from .xi to .xi_. The location of that import script is either C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\ or C:\Users\UserName\AppData\Local\VirtualStore\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\ImportExport\. Substitute UserName with your User name. Rename .xi to .xi_, or .xe to .xe_, or delete them, in both locations.

Unwanted scripts can be deleted by the Delete button and by deleting in Windows File Manager.

Changes to installed scripts can be overwritten by later updates, so give your own scripts unique names and back them up.

When creating an import script, preset import parameters to create a default set of responses. Some elements of your import process should not change from import to import. Other elements should only be entered as you run the script. During script creation, you are presented with every available import parameter.

There are three input possibilities for each control:

Leave blank for the user to input information at runtime. "Show this page at runtime".
Enter a default value for the user to verify. "Show this page at runtime".
Enter a default value for a field the user cannot view or change. Do not "Show this page at runtime".

Some controls are required at runtime. For instance, every import requires you to name an import file & data format template (*.lgr) file.

Not all fields are required during script creation. Fill those which are likely to be standard.

If you selected the action to download or download and import, select the device to download from.

Generic instrument: Define a device that communicates via a serial port and is not already available for selection from the list.
Direct communication: Select from a list of devices that communicate via a serial port: TDS Husky, TDS on HP48, Zeiss with Trimble 3000 on Elta, Zeiss M5, Geodimeter 400/500/4000 or 600, Geodat 400/402 or 126, Leica GIF, Nikon DTM 310/500, Pentax Pcs 300, Sokkia SDR 20/33, SMI V6, SMI V5 on HP48, TPC on Husky, Topcon GTS-3/700, DGM, Ellar, Nikon AP700, NSS, Panterra, Psion, Steanne or Survpak.
Time out (ms): Enter a time out period in milliseconds.
Data format: Select a data format where applicable.
Add/Edit Devices: Add to the list or edit devices defined by Trimble Remote Device Manager.
Global settings: Specify whether to query file overwrites, make backup copies of data files or delete files on device after transfer.

When creating or editing a script that downloads, devices can be selected from the Trimble Remote Device Manager to download from instruments and data collectors.

Predefined devices include GPS Receiver (4000/5000 series), SDR Data Recorder, Trimble Survey Controller (TSC1 and TSCe), Trimble Survey Data Card, Trimble 3600/5600 (GDM), Trimble 3300, DiNi Digital Level and TDS Survey Pro CE (Ranger).

To add or edit a device, select Add/Edit Devices...

New...

Select a device class from the list and configure a name and a data location such as a COM port, a drive letter and path or ActiveSync.

Delete

Delete the device from the list.

Properties

Display properties of a device. Changing some properties can require creation of a new device.

Close

Close the device manager dialog.

Help

Open Help for Trimble Remote Device Manager.

These help pages are also available in .PDF format.

If you selected the action to import or download and import, select one of these file formats: ASCII points, AutoCAD, ESRI Shape file, Landscape, LandXML - XML, MicroStation, Raw survey data, Roading 3D (dc), Roadline (aln), Roadline 3D (rln), TDS (job), TDS's Road layout (rd5 and tp5), Terramodel (pro), Trimble DTM - TTM or USGS digital elevation model. For more details of these formats, see below.

If your format is not on the list, try ASCII points or Raw survey data.

Formats are defined in .LGR ("logger") files in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Formats and can be edited by the Data Format Editor (DFEDIT). Some formats have documentation in the same folder.

For scripts with more than one pages of settings, running the script displays a sequence of pages with a Next button to open the next page. When editing the script, these pages are arranged in tabs.

Only script tabs relevant to the file format are shown.

Instrument/Data collector

Select a device for direct connection or the Trimble Remote Device Manager.

Communication settings

Specify com port settings for downloading via serial cable.

Language translation | directory contents

For Geodimeter instruments, select the language and file types.

Source file(s)

Specify the input location or name.

Leave blank, to browse for files with default file extensions, starting in the project folder.
Enter a path, to browse for files with default file extensions, starting in the entered folder.
Enter a path and file to select exactly that file.
Enter a suitable file extension, such as *.dwg or *.csv, to browse for those files only, starting in the project folder.

Destination folder

Specify the location of the output file.

Raw source

Specify a data format template (.LGR or "logger") file, that describes the format of the input file. Refer to description of formats below.

Point settings

Specify the layer for the imported points, the minimum starting point number, the maximum value of undefined elevations, what to do with duplicate point IDs and whether to shift point numbers. To leave blank names empty, do not do not use the last description if none present.

View file contents

Preview the file contents.

Template specific

Enter or select settings specific to the data format template.

Default units settings

Select the default units for imported linear, pressure, temperature, horizontal angle, azimuth or vertical angle. Select specific units, "as per project" for the units of configured by UNITSSET) or "as per template" for the units specified by the data format template.

Coordinate shift

Enter any shift in easting and northing for coordinates of all imported points.

Raw data settings

Select the layer for the imported points, the level of survey precision for the Raw Data Editor (RDE), and whether to import coordinates or bearings and whether to open RDE for editing.

Point descriptor expansion

Replace numeric names with alphanumeric names based on a point code (*.PCO) file.

Expand point descriptions only if you explicitly coded your points to suit. Otherwise, do not show at runtime.

Expand point descriptors: Replace names, or not.
Descriptor expansion file:: Browse to select a .PCO file.
Use abbreviated descriptor: Replace names that match the first field with the second field.
Use full descriptor: Replace names that match the first field with the third field.
Interpret descriptor extensions as real numbers: If not selected, prefix the name with the value in the name following the decimal point and then the third field. If selected, suffix the name with the value in the name following the decimal point and then the third field.
Show this page at runtime: Turn this off to hide this page when running the script.

For example, if the selected .PCO includes the line:

200,aus pine,Australian Pine Tree,in. dia

, and the point name is "200", then the name can be expanded to "aus pine" or "Australian Pine Tree". If the point name is "200.16", the name can be expanded to "16 in. dia aus pine", "16 in. dia Australian Pine Tree", "aus pine 16.0 in dia", or "Australian Pine Tree 16.0 in dia".

See below for settings of specific formats.

Import summary

Display a summary of import settings before importing the data.

ASCII points formats include columns of coordinates delimited by spaces or commas.

In view file contents, indicate the data order and delimiters of the fields in the source files. Enter P for Points field, E for Easting, N for Northing, Z for Elevation, D for Description/Name or S for Skip a field. For example, script P,E,N,Z,D .CSV _i has the data order P,E,N,Z,D delimited by commas, the default file extension .CSV and the default point layer POINTS.

In the Points source file tab, select Generic Points Comma.LGR template when working with commas. Select Generic Points when working with spaces. This has the option to "allow 'space' in description" when description/name is the last field.

See also GCCSVIN, GCMFI, GCPTSIN, FBLOCK, LIDARGRD and LIDARIN.

Import to view: Specify the view mode for the imported entities. Paper space / Layout entities are imported into the Sheet view mode.
Dwg/Dxf file(s): .DWG and .DXF files are entity exchange files for CAD applications. Leave blank, for the script to browse for .DWG with the option of selecting .DXF. Include *.DXF or *.DWG to filter on that file extension. Include a path, to browse from that path. Enter a full path and name to import a specific file.
Conversion mapping file: Select a conversion mapping file (.ACF) to control the substitution of colours, fonts and linetypes of imported entities.
Edit...: Modify values in the current .ACF. To add values, or make any major changes, copy the .ACF with a new name to C:\TMCUSTOM, edit using any text editor, and select the new .ACF in a new script.

Terramodel 10.61 by default imports up to DWG 2007 format which is the default for AutoCAD 2009. Terramodel 10.61 with Geocomp Update N imports up to DWG 2013 format which is the default for AutoCAD 2017. To import newer formats, see ACADCONV.

For information about importing duplicate points, elevations and long layer names, see .DWG and .DXF files under IMPORT.

Import scripts can be called by commands such as DXFIN and DWGIN using aliases.

If the script does not display the Browse buttons, use SSERIFE to install the required Windows font.

AutoCAD Configuration files (.ACF) are used by scripts to substitute ("map") colours, fonts, linetypes and line widths when converting to and from .DWG and .DXF.

To see the contents of the .ACF used by the script, click on Edit... To edit an .ACF, use a text editor. The format is described by comment lines.

Colour numbers of the imported objects correspond to colour numbers in the .DWG or .DXF, except that colour numbers can be substituted by the .ACF.

Names of linetypes in the project correspond to linetype names in the .DWG or .DXF except that names can be substituted by the .ACF.

Linetypes with names not loaded into Terramodel are substituted with SOLID.

Use LINETYPESET to load linetypes into Terramodel from .LIN files in C:\TMCustom\, C:\TMCustom\Geocomp or C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English.

Names of fonts in the project correspond to names of fonts in the .DWG or .DXF. Font names in the .ACF are substituted.

Font names not in Terramodel are reported to message scroll as "not found" and are displayed in the default Terramodel font, usually tmodelf.

Terramodel fonts are similar in appearance to AutoCAD .SHX fonts.

Specify the default layer and the default object type to create.

Specify a Landscape mapping file (.LCF), and a restoration folder.

For Microstation V8 DGN data, import via .DWG instead.

MicroStation source file

Import to view: Select the view mode for the imported data.
File(s): Browse to select one of more V7 .DGN files to import, then click Next.

Conversion mapping file

Select a MicroStation conversion mapping file (.MCF) and click Next.

Layer map...: Map MicroStation V7 level numbers from 0 to 63 to Terramodel layer names.
Colour map...
: Map MicroStation V7 colours to Terramodel colours.
Font map...: Map MicroStation V7 font numbers to Terramodel font names.
Linetype map...: Map MicroStation line styles to Terramodel line types.

Conversion settings

Select conversion settings then click Next.

Convert to points: Convert "zero-length lines" and "Unit circles", otherwise these objects which can be used for points will not be imported.
Import pattern components: Explode dashed lines, or use the mapped linetype.
Import objects mapped to layer 0: Import objects mapped to layer 0, or not.

See also LAYUSTN, USTN2MOS and AutoCAD import scripts.

Specify a raw data template .LGR file.

Specify a road job during the import of a .DC file.

Specify any coordinate shift.

See also NEW, OPEN, P29, SEGEDIT and GST.

Specify any coordinate shift.

If downloading, specify communication settings and the file filter.

These job files are in Geodimeter .JOB format.

See also GST, Trimble job formats and TDS RW5 import script.

Set the easting, northing, elevation, and station shift at the point of beginning.

Specify whether to import CAD or raw data objects and the layer for raw data objects.

Specify the view mode and layer of the new objects.

See IMPORT.

Import cross sections directly into a roadway from a cross section file.

There are three ways to define cross sections in a roadway, by templates, DTM surfaces and importing stored sections from a file. IMPORTXS imports stored cross sections from a file in Terramodel Roads V8, Texas RDS, Agtek, NCDOT, "Ch,Offset,Elev", "Ch Offset Elev", Softdesk, CEAL Existing, CEAL Design, Geopak, FDOT Terrain, FDOT Finish, Geocomp Existing or Geocomp Design format.

Register a HAL in the HALMANAGER
Define a Road Job in the ROADJOB Manager.
Create xlines using GCXLINES
Insert surfaces using the SURFACE Manager. The order of the surfaces may be important.
If a surface is a finished design surface, define it as Finish.
Check that all surfaces to be imported are not sliced.
Specify for each surface, whether they are elevation or depth surfaces.
In the XSection Manager, Select Import XSection.
Select a Roadjob.
Select Cross Sections to import a stored cross section a selected layer
Select 3D points, to import onto a layer which is already has 3D points.
Select from the listed Import File Types. See note below.
Press Import to select the cross section file.
If the points represent a surface, select Sort points on offset.
Close XSection import and XSection manager.
Go to XSection Editor to see the cross sections.
Return to Import XSection if you have more surfaces to import.

Import cross sections as described above.
Select Geocomp Existing format to import the first surface (typically the Existing) in the .CES file.
Select Geocomp Design format to import the second and any other surface (typically Design).
Sections are placed using chainages in the selected HAL, not centre-line coordinates in the CES file.

Import sets defining roadway strings from a file in a format such as .12DA, GENIO or .DWG.
Use GC92 to check for duplicate points.
Set an active horizontal alignment.
Register an alignment and define a roadjob.
Use SURFACES to insert a surface for your cross sections with Elevation and Slice.
Use GCXLINES to define Xlines at the same intervals used to create the cross section strings.
Use GC37 to create a cross section file in Geocomp .CES format.

Pick your HAL
For Objs:, select sets that define roadway strings.
Select Create .CES and Select Sort offsets.
OK to save .CES file.

Run IMPORTXS. Select the roadjob, the
Select Geocomp Existing format.
Browse to select the .CES file.
Select sort points on offset.
Close
Use XSECTIONEDT to view the cross sections, or RDX to plot the cross sections.

Register a Horizontal Alignment.
Define Xlines at similar intervals to your field cross sections.
Select XSOUT.
Pick your HAL, and select all your points to be included in the sections.
Define a tolerance for which your points may lay off the Xlines.
Select an output type as ROADS and name the file.
Register your HAL in the Hal Manager.
Use the Road Job Manager to create a new road job which uses the previously defined HAL.
Use the Surfaces button in the Road Job Manager to insert a surface into your cross sections. Select Elevation and Slice.
Run IMPORTXS. Select file type of Terramodel Road V8 and import the .xsc file created above.
Use XSECTIONEDT to view the cross sections, or RDX to plot the cross sections.

To import a file of points with chainage, offset and elevation, without a Roadway, see GC65FILE.

Create text records at selected locations with values starting at a specified integer and incrementing by one.

Great for house and lot numbers.

Select a prefix, suffix, text style and direction.

See also GCINCTXT which allows for other increments and real numbers.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Text\|Incrementing text	Field Data Module	92

INSALT

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

INSERTZ

Report which sets use a selected point.

For estimating surfaces for volume calculations. Draw a set like a pline, specifying elevations for only those points where the elevation is known, leave the rest of the points with elevations = *. Elevations where unknown are automatically interpolated or extrapolated from the 3D points.

The points with known elevations are given the name "tm_3d", and the others are named "tm_2d".

Use INTERP3D to recompute the elevations on "tm_2d" points if any of the "tm_3d" points are later changed.

Modify elevation of 2D contour plines from 3D contours plines.

Elevations are interpolated from elevations of points in the same set with name "tm_3d".

Use INTERP3D to recompute elevations interpolated by INT3DSET after any points in the set have been changed.

See also GC50 which does not require named points, but therefore cannot be updated automatically.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	RG 1252	Draw\|Set\|Update interp. 3D	Field Data Module

INTOSET

Insert the selected points into a selected set if the points are within a specified distance of the set.

The entered tolerance is stored as a project variable. The initial tolerance value is derived from the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI.

If there is already a point in the set the original point is unchanged.

See also GCIN2SET which can select multiple sets and replace 2D points with 3D points.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update

IRBAY

Survey, design, estimate and plot flood irrigation projects in a single application.

Given the bay layout and existing surface, adjust the slopes and levels of each bay to optimise and balance the earthworks.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual		POA

IRBENT

Enter elevations on irrigation bay grid points.

Use with IRBAY.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual		POA

IRBGRID

Generate grid of irrigation bay label points.

These points can be used to enter elevations with IRBENT or label cut|fill with text.

Use with IRBAY.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual		POA

IRBTAB

Generate a table of plines and EAT text grid showing selected irrigation bays.

The table includes the bay name, areas, volumes, slopes and width.

Use with IRBAY.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual		POA

IRCDTAB

Report grades and widths for each drain or channel layer in a layer list.

The set with the lowest horizontal offset on each side is assumed to be the edge of the bed. The set with the next lowest offset is assumed to be the top of batter. The depth is the difference in elevation between the top and the bed.

This report shows the layer name of the channel Section, Length, Bed width, Grade %, Grade 1:, Vol Cut, Vol Fill, Batter 1:, Compact %, Bed width and Flow rate.

This report shows the layer name of the channel Section, Length, Bed width, Grade %, Batter slopes and Net volume.

The volumes in the standard reports are calculated to a specified Existing surface DTM.

This report shows, for each xline, the Chainage, Grade downstream, Depth, Bed elevation, Bed offsets and Batter offsets.

The chainages and offsets are calculated from a horizontal alignment that is the reference object of sets created by commands such as ROADDTM or SIDESLOPE. Nanually REFER sets to the HAL.

Survey, design, estimate and plot of flood irrigation projects in a single application.

For a trapezoidal channel (or drain), enter five of these variables, Flow, Bed Width, Batter Slope, Flow Depth, Bed Slope or Manning Coefficient to determine the Flow, Drain Slope or Manning's Coefficient.

Part of IRBAY.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

IRDTMS

Generate a DTM on a single later from specified bay sets and an offset between bays.

TML date			Source
08/02/22	Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual		POA

IRHAUL

Specify existing and design DTMs, a cut|fill ratio and a grid spacing.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

IRPUTAT

Requires IR_PUTAT.ADF.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

IRSTRUC

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

IRSUMTX

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	Irrigation Bay Design User's Guide and Reference Manual		POA

ISCLOSED

Select closed or open sets or plines.

Select sets or plines and whether to further select closed or open. The current object selection then consists of those objects which were open or were closed.

To use those objects in another command, like say COLOUR, select by Previous.

If checking for closed contours, first create them without clipping lines under labels.

Create traffic island templates.

The Island Editor is similar to the Template Editor (TEMPLATE) and Subgrade Editor (SUBGRADE). The most significant difference is that islands are designed from the outside in.

Island Editor uses MultiHal transitions to tie the outside edge of the template (usually a kerb) to set with common names. Build the template from shapes towards the centre of the island.

Design a road using commands in the Roadway menu.
Create a set or several sets that outline the edge of the islands.
Name these lines with a base name and wildcard (ex: Island1, Island2, Island3). Line names are case sensitive.
Enter an island template chainage in the Island Manager IMANAGER.
Open the Island Editor (ISLAND).
Add the first shape (usually the outer kerb of the island) to the template with a multiHal transition.
Enter the base name and wildcard of the sets outlining the islands in the MultiHal object control.
Build the rest of the island template towards the centre of the island.

The display shows the roadway in cross section at a station | chainage.

FILE

Create and save templates.

New
Save
Save as...
Save on the fly (toggle)
Exit

DISPLAY

Control how the template is displayed.

AutoAll (toggle)
All
Redraw
Magnify
Zoom
Recenter
Previous

SETTINGS

Open Road Design Settings (RDDESIGNSET).
Open Road Design Grid (ROADGRID).

SHAPE

Open Shape Editor (SHAPE).

WARNINGS...

Show road warnings (when applicable).

Chainage | Station

Enter the chainage | station of the displayed roadway cross section or select with the arrow buttons or the slider.

Class

Select the shape class for the next shape to be added to the island template.

Shape

Select the next shape to be added.

New Island

Specify that the next shape to be inserted is the first shape in an island, usually the outer kerb of the island, with a MultiHal transition, and optionally specify an alignment point and to locate on design.

LEFT SIDE | RIGHT SIDE

Select which side or sides of the alignment to insert, append or delete the next shape.

Delete

Delete the selected shape

Insert

Insert the selected shape into the island template before the highlighted shape, on each selected side.

Append

Append the selected shape into the island template after the last shape, on each selected side.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|Island editor	Secured

JOB2AGA

Convert a Geodimeter job file created by a Geodimeter or Trimble instrument into a Geodimeter Raw data file with .AGA file extension suitable for use with GCIMPORT.

Geodimeter Raw files are slightly different to Geodimeter .JOB files.

This function does not convert Trimble DC .JOB or Journal .JOB files.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

JOBOUT

From an instrument point and foresight points, report re-engineered pseudo-observations to Geodimeter .JOB format.

If you save the report to a text file with .JOB file extension, to import the data into an other application. For example, you view or edit the data in the Geodimeter File Editor (GFE), import the data into the Raw Data Editor (RDE) using the 'Geocomp Geodimeter _i' import script (IMPORT), or correct for a vertical collimation error by creating, editing and importing a Geocomp .FLD file using GCIMPORT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

JOIN

Join a pline or set with other plines or sets with common ends.

Select a First object then Lines. Compare the X and Y coordinates of the ends of the object with the ends of selected Lines (of the same type). If there is a match, join the objects together, then repeat until there are no matches.

Properties such are colour are derived from the first object.

If the objects must have consecutive record numbers, use GC84. To connect two plines or sets across a gap, use CONNECT. To break sets and plines into segments, use DISJOIN.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Join	Field Data Module

JOINPL

Join contour plines across specified gap size.

Join pairs of text records into a single text record separated by a decimal point.

For each selected text record in turn, find all text within the specified tolerance and then from those records, find the one with the next record number and create a new text record.

The new text record is created from the text in the records, separated by a decimal point, on the current layer, with the text properties of first of the two records.

If the records are imported elevation text broken into whole and decimal parts, the resulting text can be used by TEXT2PNT to create points with the complete elevation.

Compare the old and new text carefully to see if the logic applies to the text as you expect. The results may be "wrong" if the tolerance is wrong, the text is not in pairs, or the record numbers are not in the desired order.

"Delete old text if joined" to see whether any left over text was not matched into pairs.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	FC T

KEAYSOUT

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $175

KORKDTM

TML date			Source
29/10/08			Secured

LABBENDS

Suffix point names that begin with HB in a selected set to show deflection angles.

Specify a minimum deflection angle and units of decimal degrees, degrees and minutes or degrees, minutes and seconds.

The new names start with HB, followed by the deflection angle and LHB for Left Hand Bend or RHD for Right Hand Bend.

To label the points, use a command such as F11, LABELPOINT, LABPT or CALLOUT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

LABELANG

Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set using the current text style.

See also IDANGLE, GCANG, GCLABIP, ANG and LABELHAL.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Draft\|Label angle-right	Field Data Module or Geocomp Update

LABELARC

See also TEXTALONG, GCALONG and LABELSEG.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Secured	91

LABELCONTOURS

Place contour labels on plines manually.

Add labels to contour plines which have been generated by CONTOUR, manually created, imported from a file or clipped.

Mode

Pick

Contour: Pick a location on one contour
Label: Label the contour at the location
Close: Close without labelling

Cross

Contours: Select contour plines
Pt 1: Select a location
Pt 2: Select a second location
label<: Label the contours where they intersect the line between the two locations
Close: Close without creating more labels

If any contour plines contain splines, use GCCHORD to replace with many straights first.

Contours can be clipped at labels using CLIP Inside or TEXTBACK.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draft\|Label contours	Secured	93

LABELGRID

Label a closed pline with coordinates at regular intervals.

Use with GRIDMAKE which creates the grid lines at the SNAPSET origin and GRIDSET interval.

Box

Select a closed pline.

Settings

Select the View, Interval, Layer, Text style and Placement. In Profile views, enter different values for Chainages | Stations and Elevations. In XSect views, enter different values for Offsets and Elevations. The Placement relative to the coordinates can be Above, Centered or Below.

Create the labels.

Close the command.

Label a single location on a HAL, or a whole HAL.

Settings control station | chainage prefix, rotation angle from perpendicular or a bearing, left offset suffix and justification, right offset suffix and justification, whether to label whole part of chainages, and whether to label the chainage and offset on the same line.

Settings

Store labels on layer: The layer on which to place the labels. The label colour is from the layer colour.
Point labeling length: The length of the line (in sheet units) at HAL points. Enter -1 to suppress HAL Point labels.
Station label interval: The distance along the alignment between labels.
Minor ticks interval: Enter the distance along the alignment between minor tick marks. Enter 0 to omit minor ticks.
Label tick width: The width of the ticks (in sheet units) at station labels. Enter 0 to omit ticks.
Minor tick width: The width of the minor ticks (at intermediate stations).
Label offset: The distance from the alignment to the offset text. A positive distance places the text to the right, negative to the left.
Label text style: The text style for all HAL labels.
Justify minor ticks: Position minor ticks on the Left, Centre or Right of the HAL.
Include "+00" in label: Include "+00" in all station labeling
Label sta on alignment: Place station labels parallel to the alignment, otherwise perpendicular.
Align stations from 0+00: Increments the station labels from 0.00, otherwise the beginning station.
Label curve tables: Label the curves with tables.
Draw curve table box: Draw a box around each curve table.
Point of intersection...: Populate Points of Intersection Tables with Delta, Chainage, North or East.
Arc table format...: Populate Arc Tables with Angle, Arc, Chord, Chord bearing, DC, External distance, Middle ordinate, radius or tangent length.
Spiral table format...: Populate Spiral Tables with Angle, Chord, Length, LT, ST, XS, YS, K or P.

Label

Create Hal labels on a HAL, between start chainage and end chainages.

Single

Label a single location on a HAL.

Settings

Station | Chainage prefix: Enter up to 16 characters of text to prefix each station | chainage.
Left offset suffix: Enter up to 16 characters of text to suffix offset values for the left side of the alignment. Typical entries are "South" or "Left".
Rotation angle (cw): Enter the angle of rotation of the text relative to a line from a point perpendicular or radial to the HAL.
Right offset suffix: Enter up to 16 characters of text to suffix offset values for the right side of the alignment. Typical entries can include "North" or "Right".
Label whole part of station | chainage: Include the whole station | chainage value, or just that part to the right of any "+" in station | chainage labeling.
Sta and offset on same line: Place the station | chainage and the offset on the same line of text, or place the offset directly under the station | chainage.
Draw lines: Create a pline from the point to the label on the same layer as the labels.
Rotate text from: Specify whether the labels are oriented perpendicular to the alignment, or on a specified bearing.
Justify right offsets | Justify left offsets: Justify the offset labels are to the Left or Right of the point you are labelling.

HAL

Select a set or pline.

Leader pt

Select the location of station | chainage and start of the leader line.

Text loc

Select the text location.

Close

Label selected HALs inside each selected pline box on the selected layer.

Text objects in the selected text style showing the name of the alignment are placed along the alignment close to the centre of each selected plotbox.

Change lot area labels created by LABELSETS to show the Alternative Area set in UNITSSET Labeling and Conversion Factors. The Alt areas are typically Acres or Hectares.

For each selected set, if the area of the set is greater than the entered value, and the "Acreage" text height is 0.000, change the "Acreage" text height to the same value as "Sq. Units" (if non-zero), and change the "Sq. Units" value to 0.000. The text height is in sheet units and may vary from lot to lot.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	64

LABELOFF

Label points with text showing offsets from an alignment.

Prefix Offset: Enter any prefix.
Suffix Offset: Enter any suffix.
Text Layer: Select the text layer.
Text style: Select the text style.
Text Bearing: Enter or select the text bearing. Enter * for text perpendicular to the alignment.
Display Offset in Metres or Millimetres: If project units are metres, display Offset in metres or millimetres.
Append Units: Append units (m, mm or Ft) to text.
Use EAT code: If units are metres, show offsets in the Offset EAT Code format configured by UNITSSET.
Leader style: Add a straight, broken or curved leaderline. Select None for no leaderline.
Leader linetype: Select a linetype, such as LEADERLINE, that indicates direction from the text to the point.
Border style: Select a text border style. Select None for no border.
Border Linetype: Select a text border linetype.
Gap
Enter the gap between the the point and the end of any leaderline.

Label intersection points with no curve on selected HAL, with IP Chainage | IP Station, Delta angle, Easting and Northing.

Stations | Chainages are labelled with "Sta".

The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an entered or graphically selected offset.

Label selected points with symbols and labels derived from point label blocks.

Freeze/Thaw

Toggle the display of all point labels.

Settings

Copy Settings from Pt

Select a labelled point from which to copy point label settings.

Symbol

Map to Symbol: Map symbols to point names as defined in the SYMBOL.MAP file
Number: Enter a symbol number from the SYMBOL.FNT file
Size: Enter a size (in sheet units) for your symbols. The size given here remains constant regardless of the drawing scale.
Rotation: Enter a rotation angle. The closest 2° increment is used.

Block Label

Description: Select the description of a block containing a predefined point label.
Rotation: Enter the rotation angle (between 0° and 337° 30') in 22° 30' degree increments
Offset: Enter the offset distance (in sheet units) from the point to the insertion point of the label. This distance is rounded to an even number of multiples, between 0 and 15, of the offset delta distance.
Brg to Label: Set the bearing from the point to the insertion point of the block along the offset distance in 22° 30' increments
Add Line: Draw a line from each labeled point to the insertion point of its label
Hi/Low Only: Label only DTM points at high and low spots.
Mirror About X: Mirror the label about the X axis. Any text with in the label will still be readable.

Offset Delta

Enter the maximum distance from a point to a label. A typical value is 0.10 or 0.15 (sheet units). A value of 0.0 prevents the label from being moved.

Pts

Select the points to be labelled.

On/Off

Turn on or off the display of the point labelling for selected points.

Explode

Explode point labels into text and pline objects on the layer of the point.

Move

Move the block label, but not the symbol, to a new location, provided Offset Delta is not 0.00.

Label

Label the selected points

See also F7, F8, F9, F11, GC93, PTLAB and SYM2BLK.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM symbol chart	Draft\|Label points with blocks	Field Data Module	110

LABELROADHAL

Label a registered horizontal alignment using LABELHAL settings which control chainage prefix, rotation angle from perpendicular or a bearing, left offset suffix and justification, right offset suffix and justification, whether to label whole part of chainages, and whether to label the chainage and offset on the same line.

Settings

Store labels on layer: The layer on which to place the labels. The label colour is from the layer colour.
Point labeling length: The length of the line (in sheet units) at HAL points. Enter -1 to suppress HAL Point labels.
Station label interval: The distance along the alignment between labels.
Minor ticks interval: Enter the distance along the alignment between minor tick marks. Enter 0 to omit minor ticks.
Label tick width: The width of the ticks (in sheet units) at station labels. Enter 0 to omit ticks.
Minor tick width: The width of the minor ticks (at intermediate stations).
Label offset: The distance from the alignment to the offset text. A positive distance places the text to the right, negative to the left.
Label text style: The text style for all HAL labels.
Justify minor ticks: Position minor ticks on the Left, Centre or Right of the HAL.
Include "+00" in label: Include "+00" in all station labeling
Label sta. | chn. on alignment: Place station | chainage labels parallel to the alignment, otherwise perpendicular.
Align stations from 0+00: Increment the station | chainage labels from 0.00, otherwise the beginning station | chainage.
Label curve tables: Label the curves with tables.
Draw curve table box: Draw a box around each curve table.
Point of intersection...: Populate Points of Intersection Tables with Delta, Chainage, North or East.
Arc table format...: Populate Arc Tables with Angle, Arc, Chord, Chord bearing, DC, External distance, Middle ordinate, radius or tangent length.
Spiral table format...: Populate Spiral Tables with Angle, Chord, Length, LT, ST, XS, YS, K or P.

Label

Create Hal labels on a HAL, between start chainage and end chainages.

Single

Label a location on a HAL with a leader point and text at a location.

Station | Chainage prefix: Enter up to 16 characters of text to prefix each station | chainage.
Left offset suffix: Enter up to 16 characters of text to suffix offset values for the left side of the alignment. Typical entries are "South" or "Left".
Rotation angle (cw): Enter the angle of rotation of the text relative to a line from a point perpendicular or radial to the HAL.
Right offset suffix: Enter up to 16 characters of text to suffix offset values for the right side of the alignment. Typical entries can include "North" or "Right".
Label whole part of station | chainage: Include the whole station | chainage value, or just that part to the right of any "+" in station | chainage labeling.
Sta and offset on same line: Place the station | chainage and the offset on the same line of text, or place the offset directly under the station | chainage.
Draw lines: Create a pline from the point to the label on the same layer as the labels.
Rotate text from: Specify whether the labels are oriented perpendicular to the alignment, or on a specified bearing.
Justify right offsets | Justify left offsets: Justify the offset labels are to the Left or Right of the point you are labelling.

Close

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Label\|Label HAL Roads\|Labeling\|Label HAL Channel\|Label\|Label HAL Channel\|Labeling\|Label HAL	Secured	84

LABELROADVAL

Label a registered vertical alignment with stations | chainages, elevations and vertical curve details.

Settings

Store labels on selected layer: Select the layer for labels.
Offset curve length: Enter the distance in sheet units between the vertical curve length label and the VAL.
Curve table dist +/-: Enter the distance in project units between the curve table and the VAL.
Design speed: Enter a design speed to include in the table, that is not used in calculations.
Text style: Select text styles for stations | chainages and elevations (Profile), profile grade (Grade) and other text (Other).
Text orientation direction: Orient the text to the left or right with respect to the sheet.
Elevation text position: Place the elevation text to the Left | Center | Right of the new vertical line at each interpolated station | chainage.
Second profile: Interpolate and label the elevations for the secondary profile to the specified number of descimal places.
Include prefix label: Include curve prefix labels such as PVC, PVI and PVT as defined in Abbreviation Settings (ABBREVSET) Vertical.
Draw curve table box: Create a pline box around each curve table.
Station | chainage interval: Enter the interval in project units for station | chainage and elevation labelling in tangent and curve segments.
Table format...: Select labels for the vertical curve table from Stopping sight distance, Passing sight distance, Sag | Crest, PVC, PVI, PVT, K factor, Middle ordinate, vertical curve length and Design speed.
OK: Accept changes to settings
Cancel: Reject changes to settings.

Val

Label a registered VAL and HAL over a range of stations | chainages.

Box

Label elevations of one or two registered VALS and a HAL and around a plotbox.

Single

Label a single station | chainage above or below a VAL.

Close

Close the command.

Create EAT text objects labelling the bearings or distances of selected straight set segments, and the curve properties of curved set segments.

The resulting labels dynamically update to display the revised segment geometry as the points that define the labelled set segments move. Labels that are created such that they are aligned with and placed along the line segment move with that segment as it moves. The labels are created in accordance with the current straight line and arc segment label styles which control the content and placement of the geometric properties associated with a line and curve segment respectively.

Auto: Label a straight or curved set segment with a smart text label showing the bearing, distance, or curve properties of that segment. The position of the label is set automatically along the segment. If the points making up this segment move, the text will follow and will be updated to reflect the altered geometry.
User: Label a straight or arc set segment with a text label showing the bearing, distance, or curve properties of that segment. Use where the segment is too short for the label to fit along the segment. The location of the label can be pulled away from the line segment. If desired, a leader line will automatically point from the label to the midpoint of the line segment. If the segment's points move, the displayed geometry will update and the leader line endpoint will move with the segment, but the label's location will not move.
Pt to Pt: Label a bearing and distance between two selected point objects, whether or not they are connected with a line segment. The label can be located at any position and orientation that you select, or it can automatically be positioned along the line between those two points.
Multiple: Label all the currently unlabelled segments of the selected sets with bearings and distances.

These labels reference the points which they label so they dynamically reflect the current geometry.
The segment labels include abbreviations set by ABBREVSET.
To convert the segment to EAT text, use LABELSETS Text.
Select a current length suffix for all labels from one of five length options in UNITSSET Labeling. The length suffix can be blank, or include a space, a unit such as m or metres and a classification such as "(F)" to indicate a field measurement.
LABELSEG opens in any of four optional modes. The default mode is that of the last used option.
Straight pline segments are labelled with standard text that is not linked to points and therefore does not dynamically update.

See also GCDIMLOT which dimensions using EAT text that is easier to edit and LABELSETS which labels sets with lot numbers and areas.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draft\|Label segments	Secured	75

LABELSETS

Sets

Identify the sets to be labeled.

On | Off

Turn on and off the display of the selected labels.

Text

Creates text objects from the set labels of the selected sets, and stores them on the current layer.

Number

Modify the lot number and name of sets.

Prefix: Enter any prefix
Starting #: Enter a starting number
Set: Select a set
Number: Modify the lot number of the set to the current starting number, modify the name of the set to the prefix followed by the number, and increment the starting number by 1 ready for you to select the next set in the series.
Close: Close renumbering

Freeze

Toggle the display of all set attribute labels. Select Freeze to hide attribute set labels. Select Thaw to display the labels.

Settings

Customize your set labels with block number, lot number and label attributes.

Names: Enter for a lot name of up to eight characters for text on the first line of the set and a prefix of to eight characters for your lot numbers.
Left | Center | Right: Determine the placement of the lot and block labels inside each set.
Text Height: Enter the text height, in sheet units, for the Block, Lot number, Square units and Acreage labels. The number of decimals is controlled by UNITSET.
Text attributes: Enter the bearing, select a text style (which determines the text height), colour, any symbol number (e.g. 40, a circle), symbol size, and a offset distance for the symbol (e.g. to centre the symbol around the lot number).

Label

Complete the set labelling after you have selected your sets and customized the set labels.

Label a station | chainage with text leader lines at a station | chainage and offset from a horizontal alignment.

Run LABELSTA command (or its alias LABELCH).
Select a horizontal alignment (HAL) in the Plan view mode.
Define an offset distance from the centerline graphically by entering an offset in sheet units.
Pick a station | chainage to label
Click OK to create the station | chainage label using the current text style.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08		Draft\|Label chainage values Draft\|Label station values	Field Data Module	93

LABELTABLE

Create, edit, move, name or control visibility of tables. Label tables are used to tabulate dimensions of short lines in subdivisions.

Rows in the table show dimensions of selected segments, with the line numbers also placed beside the segments.

Table objects are only created by LABELTABLE and so are distinct from plines, text and blocks. Other commands, such as GCTABLE, create "tables" of plines and text, but these are not table objects.

Freeze

Freeze to hide or Thaw to display all tables.

Settings

Copy settings from

Copy settings from another labeltable.

Table type

L Table: Table with Bearings and Distances.
C Table: Table with curve properties.
LC1 Table | LC2 Table: Table with curve and tangent properties.

Table bearing

Enter the direction of tables.

Configure the appearance of the table.

Create

Create a new line/curve table.

Delete

Delete an existing table.

Name table

Assign a name to an existing table.

Revise

Change an existing table.

Tbl on/off

Toggle the display of a selected table on or off.

Add entry

Add a selected line or curve segment to an existing table.

Delete entry

Delete a selected line or curve segment to an existing table.

Move entry

Move a table entry from one location in the table to another.

Flip entry

Move a segment label to the other side of the segment and reverse the bearing direction.

Label entry

Change the label segment style for that segment.

Maketext

Convert a segment label (but not a table) to text objects.

On/off entry

Turn on and off the display of selected table entries.

Turn entry

Rotate the segment label reference 180° while leaving it on the same side of the segment.

Label a vertical alignment with stations | chainages, elevations and vertical curve details.

Settings

Store labels on selected layer: Select the layer for labels.
Offset curve length: Enter the distance in sheet units between the vertical curve length label and the VAL.
Curve table dist +/-: Enter the distance in project units between the curve table and the VAL.
Design speed: Enter a design speed to include in the table, that is not used in calculations.
Text style: Select text styles for stations | chainages and elevations (Profile), profile grade (Grade) and other text (Other).
Text orientation direction: Orient the text to the left or right with respect to the sheet.
Elevation text position: Place the elevation text to the Left | Center | Right of the new vertical line at each interpolated station | chainage.
Second profile: Interpolate and label the elevations for the secondary profile to the specified number of descimal places.
Include prefix label: Include curve prefix labels such as PVC, PVI and PVT as defined in Abbreviation Settings (ABBREVSET) Vertical.
Draw curve table box: Create a pline box around each curve table.
Station | chainage interval: Enter the interval in project units for station | chainage and elevation labelling in tangent and curve segments.
Table format...: Select labels for the vertical curve table from Stopping sight distance, Passing sight distance, Sag | Crest, PVC, PVI, PVT, K factor, Middle ordinate, vertical curve length and Design speed.
OK: Accept changes to settings
Cancel: Reject changes to settings.

Val

Label a selected profile over a range of stations | chainages.

Box

Label elevations of one or two selected profiles with vertical curves around a plotbox.

Single

Label a single station | chainage above or below a VAL.

Close

Close the command.

Create text showing the grade or distance between locations.

Points

Select two points and a text location.

Segment

Select a segment and a text location.

Multiple

Select plines or sets.

Settings

Text style

Select the text style.

How to show grade angle

Show any grade angles using one of these methods:

Do not display grade
1H in
Percentage
Slope angle
1V in
1m:10,000m .01%

Prefix | Suffix: Enter any prefix or suffix.

How to show distance

Show any distances using one of these methods:

Do not display distance
Horizontal distance
Slope distance
Vertical distance
DX and DY

Include SD, HD or VD: Where relevant, add a prefix to indicate slope distance, horizontal distance or vertical distance.
Prefix | Suffix: Enter any prefix or suffix.

Delete Old Text

Delete any old text linked to the same pairs of points.

Text border

Add a border to the text.

Show Downhill Arrow

Create an arrow to indicate downhill direction.

Between Pts: Place any such downhill arrow between the points or beside the text.

OK

Accept changes to settings.

Cancel

Cancel without changes to settings.

OK

Label pairs of points by points or by segment.

Cancel

Cancel labelling.

If you don't want text to flip when drawn from right to left, use a text style with Legible orientation.

For text border settings, see DRAFTSET. For label precision and for length unit options, see UNITSSET.

To label grades, both locations must have elevations.

Labels created from segments link to segment points. If the labels show vertical differences, use TXTHTDIF to recalculate the differences after later moving those points.

In the XSect, Profile or FlipUp views, the labels refer to the active alignment. Use ACTIVECHAINAGE to step through cross sections in the Xsect view.

See also DRNGRADE for drains and GC37 to report and label grades between strings at multiple cross sections.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $250

LABPT

Label selected points with EAT text showing point number, easting, northing, elevation, name or symbols.

Define the Settings by editing in a form, graphically using editing commands, by copying an existing example or by loading from a file.

The text objects are scaled from the sheet units in Settings to the current view scale and remain that size in project units even when the view scale changes.

Use tick boxes to select from point number, northing, easting, elevation, description (=name) and symbol. The elevation can be split into two parts on either side of the decimal point

For each text label type, Edit point label settings to control the layer, colour, X offset, Y offset, Direction, Prefix, Suffix, Font, Height, Slant, Aspect, Justification and Orientation.
For any symbols, edit the settings to control the symbol number, size, rotation and whether to use a mapping file to replace the symbol according to point name.
OK.

Layer: Select the layer on which to store this label.
Color: Select the color in which to draw this label.
X,Y OFFSET: Position the label with respect to the point using distances in sheet units. Positive values place the label’s insertion point to the right of the point (for x-offset) or above the point (for y-offset). Negative values place it left and below.
Direction: Enter the direction of the label in this bearing control.
Prefex: Enter any prefix text of up to 24 alphanumeric characters.
Suffix: Enter any the suffix text of up to 24 alphanumeric characters.
Font name: Select the font.
Height: Enter the height in sheet units for this text.
Slant: Enter the angle of the slant in degrees from vertical. Use 0 for no slant. Text slants of 10° or 15° are common. Positive angles cause the label to slant towards the right.
Aspect: Enter the width to height ratio to adjust the width of the text. A value of 1.0 is normal. A value greater than 1.0 makes the label wider. A value less than 1.0 makes the label narrower.
Horizontal just: Select the horizontal justification for the label to place the insertion point at the left, center or right of the text. The X,Y offsets are measured to the text insertion point.
Vertical just.: Select the vertical justification for the label to place the insertion point at the top, middle or bottom of the text. The X,Y offsets are measured to the text insertion point.
Orientation: Select the desired text orientation style for the label from Rigid, Fixed or Legible. Refer to STYLESET.

LABPTQ

Label selected points with EAT text showing any permutation of point number, elevation or name.

Specify the text style and colour for each label. The labels can be on a specified layer or the point layer.

Create a surface of troughs from a specified start low point and longitudinal and transverse slope settings.

Especially for use in landfill drainage systems.

Start Pt

Start point

Longitudinal:

Bearing of trough

Len:

Length of trough

Settings

Longitudinal ground slope: % Slope in direction of trough
Minimum trough slope: Minimum % slope along which a drop of water will flow as it travels from the top ridge of the trough to the invert.
Computed cross slope: The cross slope computed from the longitudinal and trough slopes
Transverse ground slope: % slope of the trough floor in the direction perpendicular to the trough length.
Width of trough (top to top).: The required horizontal distance between the ridges.
Number of troughs: Number of troughs to create

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	RG 1233	Cogo\|Create landfill floor	Field Data Module

LAY2NAME

Change the name of each selected point, set and pline to match its layer.

This can be helpful where data has been classified by layer, but you need to include names in a plot or exported file.

Select the current layer or create a new layer from the toolbar.

Open the layer selection from the toolbar, select from the list of existing layers and then OK, or
Highlight the current layer on the toolbar, select an object and then the Escape key, or
Enter LAYER at the command line, then select from the list of existing layers and then OK

Open the layer command from the toolbar or command line, select New, enter the layer name, colours and linetype, then OK.

Modify names, colours and linetypes of layers or objects on those layers.

Select comma-separated ASCII .MAP file in one of these formats:

old_layer,new_layer
old_layer,new_layer,new_line_colour
old_layer,new_layer,new_line_colour,new_point_colour
old_layer,new_layer,new_line_colour,new_point_colour,new_linetype

For each line in the .MAP file in turn, where the old_layer name matches a layer name in the project, change the old_layer name to the new_layer name and modify the default line colour, point colour and linetype for new objects on that layer.

Wild cards * and ? can be used in layer names.

Select "Modify objects' colours and linetypes" to also modify line colours, point colours and linetypes of existing objects on the layers in the .MAP file.

Use # to start any comment lines.
No other properties are modified.
If the new property value is empty (marked by consecutive commas), the property is not modified.
The maximum length of a Terramodel layer name is 16.
Spaces are valid Terramodel layer name characters

LAYERSET: Graphically modify layer properties
LAYERNEW: Add to a map file of new layer names
DXFCHANG: Rename layers in DXF files
GC16: Modify colours and linetypes of objects by layer, group or record name
COLRLINE: Modify colours and linetypes of objects by layer
TMXLAYERS: Export all layer names with their default colour numbers and linetype names
LLRPT and CREATELL: Report and transfer layer names with their layer lists, default colour numbers and linetype names

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

LAYERNEW

Create a new layer using prompts, a command line argument or a toolbox button.

Enter LAYERNEW with no arguments to be prompted to enter new layer name, line colour, point colour, and linetype. The Create New Layer button becomes available once you enter a new layer name that does not already exist. Click Create New Layer to create the new layer and make the new layer current.

Maintain a list of your project layers in your default spreadsheet application with more details than can be described in 17 characters. Such details might include the source, date, purpose or an equivalent long layer name.

To create or open the list, enter LAYERNEW with no arguments and select Run Excel. Then, when you "Create New Layer", if an .XSLX with the same name as the project exists, that file is opened. The .XLSX does not exist, but a .CSV with that name exists, the new layer name is added to the end then the .CSV is opened. If neither the XSLX nor .CSV exists, a new .CSV is created containing all the layers in the project including the new layer.

To enter values directly into the command line, enter LAYERNEW followed by a space, a new layer name and colour attributes.

The line_colour_number and point_colour_number of the new layer are optional integers from 0 to 255. The linetype of the new layer is SOLID.

For example:

LAYERNEW layername line_colour_number point_colour_number

The layer name is required. Only characters to the first space are considered. To include spaces, enclose the layer name with "". For example, enter LAYERNEW top of bank to create layer TOP; enter LAYERNEW "top of bank" to create layer TOP OF BANK; enter LAYERNEW "top of bank" 30 125 to create layer TOP OF BANK with line colour 30 and point colour 125.

Use LAYERNEW with or without arguments in a workspace to create a new layer at the click of a toolbox button. Layernew.bmp is available for use in the button.

The CSV files can also be used to create mapping files for use with LAYERMAP and DXFCHANG.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

LAYERSET

List, Create, Edit or Delete layers used to logically display and select common objects.

New objects derives their colour and linetype from the current settings of the layer on which they are placed.

Layers are also used to a separate digital terrain models (DTMs).

To select a single layer, left-click the mouse on the desired name in the layer list box. To select multiple layers, press and hold Ctrl or Shift while left-clicking. To select all of the layers in the layer list box, use the Select All.

Changes in the colour and linetype settings for layers apply to new objects; they do not change the properties of any existing objects.

Name

Change the name of one selected layer.

Colour

Specify the colour of all objects except points to be created for each layer. Use colour 0 to specify colour by layer and thus display objects in the colour of the layer.

Pt colour

Specify the colour of all points to be created for each layer. Use colour 0 to specify colour by layer and thus display points in the colour of the layer.

Linetype

Specify the linetype of all sets and plines to be created for each layer.

Status

Specify whether each layer is visible, snappable or locked.

Visible: Set to visible to display objects on the layer within the zoom extents, that have not been concealed by some other command such as OFF, ACTIVE, HIDE or DYNAVIEW. When a layer is visible, "V" appears in the second column of the layer list box. When a layer is invisible, none of the objects on that layer are displayed. Objects that are visible can be selected by graphical means such as Windows and Crossing or by clicking on a Record, unless Snap is off. Invisible objects can be selected by other means such as by colour, layer, linetype, etc.
Snap: Enable selection of visible objects using Record, Windows and Crossing. When Snap is off, objects cannot be selected this way. When snap is enabled, "S" appears in the second column of the layer list box.
Lock: Prevent modifying objects on the layer and adding objects to the layer. When a layer is locked, "L" appears in the second column of the layer list box.
Isolate: Display a single selected layer. When the layer is isolated an I" appears in the second column of the layer list box. When isolated, only objects on the selected layer are displayed. When isolation is turned off, the layer remains visible and all other layers return to their previous display status.
Delete: Delete selected layers. When the delete status is set, the V, S, and I designations are replaced with "####" and are dimmed. Layers must be empty, in all views, before they can be deleted. Selected layers are not actually deleted until you click OK.

Select All

Select all the layers displayed in the layer list box. When all layers are selected only the visibility, snap, and lock status options can be set.

Select by Llist...

Select layers by a layer list or create a new layer list.

Info

Display the number of points on a selected layer as well as the minimum and maximum extents of the points on the layer.

Offsets...

Enter offsets to elevation and chainage for objects in the profile view for the highlighted layer, measured with respect to the first layer you created for the profile view.

New...

Create a new layer.

Mask setup

Mask is a filter to show only layers with names that have common characters, which keeps you from scrolling through the entire list.

Mask: Enter a mask. The mask supports wildcard characters, for example: DTM* to list layers that start with DTM.
Use mask: List layers that match the mask, or reset the mask. By default, only visible and unlocked layers are listed.
Include Off layers: Turn on the tick to include invisible layers in the mask. Turn off, to list only visible layers. To update the change, toggle "Use mask" off and then on.
Include Locked layers
: Turn on the tick to include locked layers in the mask. Turn off, to list only unlocked layers. To update the change, toggle "Use mask" off and then on.

OK

Apply all accumulated status changes, regardless of the layers currently displayed in the layer list box.

Cancel

Cancel the command

Set layers to visible or invisible.

Choose whether to set layers to visible or invisible.

To set a layer to visible, first select the Visible button, then select one or more layers from a list of invisible layers and click OK.

To set a layer to invisible, first select the Invisible button, then select an object on that layer, or click on layer selection and select one layer, or roll the mouse to the next layer in alphabetical order.

Click Cancel to stop making changes to layer visibility.

Objects on visible layers within the zoom extents are visible, unless concealed by some other command such as OFF, ACTIVE, HIDE or DYNAVIEW.

Any isolated layer is unisolated.

List by layer, for the selected points, the Layer name, View names, number of records, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.

To select all objects in all views, simply click OK.

The totals of each column of numbers and the limits of extents are shown at Totals.

The full names of all eight possible views are listed after the table.

Layer name: List all layer names used by any selected objects, in alphanumerical order.
Views: For each listed layer, list any views used by any selected object. For example, PlShV7 can show that there are objects on the listed layer on Plan, Sheet and View7 views. Most view names listed are abbreviated to the first two characters of the view names specified by VIEWSET. For example, Pl for Plan view, Pr for Profile, Sh for Sheet, Xs for Xsect (Cross sections), Su for Super (superelevation) and Sh for Sheet. Numbered views, such as View6, are abbreviated like V6.
Total records: Count the number of records on that layer.
Total points: Count the number of points on that layer.
3D Points: Count the number of points on that layer with elevations .
3D Points not in DTM: Count the number of points on that layer with elevations that are non-contourable.
Easting | Northing | Elevation Minimum: List the lowest values of any eastings, northings and elevations of points on that layer.
Easting | Northing | Elevation Maximum: List the greatest values of any eastings, northings and elevations of points on that layer.

Make selected layers visible, and other layers invisible, or vice versa.

By Objs: Select layers by selecting objects.
Save to Layer List: Create or modify a layer list from the selected layers.
Layer List: Select layers by a layer list.
Make Visible: Make visible all selected layers and make all other layers invisible.
Make Invisible: Make invisible all selected layers and make all other layers visible.

See also LLISTSET, QUIKLSET and SHOWDYNA.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		View\|Layer list Toolbar button	Geocomp Update or $250	130

LAYOUT

Create sets or plines at offsets, intersections and cul-de-sacs from centreline alignments.

Layout rights of way, footpaths, kerbs, gutters and intersections for an entire subdivision with a few steps.

Create layers for up to six "Layouts".
Create the centrelines for each road.
Use Settings to enter the offsets and intersection types for each layout.
Use Cul-de-sac to create typical cul-de-sacs.
Use Offset to create offsets.
Use Intersect to create intersections after creating Offsets.

Settings

Layer

Select the layer for centreline alignments. This is also the name of the .LAY file containing the layout attributes.

Settings

Layout #: Select a layout number from 1 to 6, or fewer if you have fewer layers.
Layer: Select a layer for the offset sets or plines. If you intend to intersect with another offset sets or plines, create them on the same layer.
Radius: Enter the size of the radius for fillets at intersections.
Offset: Enter the horizontal offset to the new alignment.
Side: Specify whether to create the alignment on the left side, right side or both sides.
Return: Specify whether to create Square, Chamfered or Arc returns.
Type: Specify whether to create sets or plines.
OK: Accept changes to settings
Cancel: Cancel changes

Close

Offset

C/L Streets: Select centreline alignments
OK: Create sets or plines offset to the centrelines
Cancel: Cancel creating offsets

Intersect

Layer: Select the layer for centreline alignments.
OK: Create intersections of plines and sets on Layout layers for alignments on the selected centreline alignments layer.
Cancel: Cancel

Cul-de-sac

Select end of C/L

Select the end of the cul-de-sac centreline.

Settings

Prompt whether to assign cul-de-sac parameters as attributes then prompt for parameters.

Bulb radius: Enter the innermost (kerb) radius of the cul-de-sac.
Right of way radius: Enter the the outermost (right-of-way) radius of the cul-de-sac.
Offset: Enter the offset distance from the center of the cul-de-sac to the end of the alignment.
Which end: Place the cul-de-sac at the beginning of the alignment, the end of the alignment or and Neither.
Offset direction: Specify whether the cul-de-sac is offset to the left or right of the alignment (looking in the direction of increasing stations | chainages).
OK: Create the cul-de-sac sets or plines.
Cancel: Cancel

LAYOUT stores the attributes of the layouts in a file with .LAY file with the same name as the layer selected in Settings. This file might be created on the Desktop. Store this file in the same directory as the project file.

Use CULDESAC for more complex cul-de-sacs.

Command date		Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09		Cogo\|Streets\|Layout	Field Data Module or Geocomp Update	71

LAYOUT3D

Create 3D sets with information from plans.

Relayer and colour selected objects created by ROADDTM based on the first four characters of the name.

The name attribute of each RoadDtm object is derived from the point codes in the Road Template Shapes.

If the first four characters in the name match the first four characters in the selected .MAP file, then relayer the object to the layer nominated in the map file. If the layer in the map file does not exist, is first created with the nominated colours.

Each line in the map file is in the format:

Name,Layer,Colour

Command date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

Report the East and North coordinates of the selected location.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update	72

LCN

See also SHEET2XS, STOREXS, XSHILO and VICRDSEC.

			Source
			Hamilton

LEVEL3W

Add or edit three-wire level (stadia) LevelData attributes to a level loop benchmark point.

Reduce 3-wire differential level notes, compute the elevations of all leveled points based on the elevation of the benchmark point and update the LevelData attributes of the level loop benchmark.

Select BM

Enter a point number for the benchmark for your level notes. Select the same point each time you edit the data for a specific level loop.

Loop name

Enter a level loop name of up to 80 characters.

Edit

Enter, edit and delete level note attributes.

Setup number

Display the setup number for each reading in the level notes list box.

Point type

Indicate the type of each reading. BM represents benchmark, TP stands for turning point, and Int indicates an intermediate point. Select the type as you enter each reading using the radio buttons below.

Station ID

Enter an instrument station identifier for a new or edited level reading.

Back sight

Upper, Middle and Lower: Enter the backsight readings for the Upper, Middle and Lower wires.
Back: Some metric rods are graduated in feet on the back as a quick check of average metric readings. For this type of instrument, enter the backsight back reading.

Fore sight

Upper, Middle and Lower: Enter the backsight readings for the Upper, Middle and Lower wires.
Back: Some metric rods are graduated in feet on the back as a quick check of average metric readings. For this type of instrument, enter the backsight back reading.

Change

Change the level reading highlighted in the level notes list box to what you’ve entered in the Station ID, Backsight and Foresight above.

Append

Append the current level reading in the Station ID, Backsight and Foresight above the end of the list.

Insert

Insert the current level reading in the Station ID, Backsight and Foresight above the level reading highlighted.

Delete

Delete the level reading highlighted.

Report

Report the adjusted level data to P3Pad.

Units

Select the default rod units for your level data. Select from feet, inches, centimetres, half-centimetres or millimetres.

OK

Accept changes to level loop data

Cancel

Cancel without changing level loop data.

OK

Make changes to LevelData attributes of the level loop benchmark point.

Close

Close without changing attributes of the level loop benchmark point.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	RG 676	Cogo\|Utilities\|3 Wire level reduction	Secured	level

LEVELLST

Report points with single-wire or three-wire level loop attributes added by LEVELS or LEVEL3W.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	RG 679	Cogo\|Utilities\|Level note reports	Secured

LEVELS

Add or edit single wire level (stadia) attributes to a level loop benchmark point.

Select BM

Enter a point number for the benchmark for your level notes. Select the same point each time you edit the data for a specific level loop.

Loop name

Enter a level loop name of up to 80 characters.

Edit

Enter, edit and delete level note attributes.

Setup number: Display the setup number for each reading in the level notes list box.
Point type: Indicate the type of each reading. BM represents benchmark, TP stands for turning point, and Int indicates an intermediate point. Select the type as you enter each reading using the radio buttons below.
Station ID: Enter an instrument station identifier for a new or edited level reading.
Back sight: Enter a value for the backsight rod reading.
Fore sight: Enter a value for the foresight rod reading.
True BM Elevation: Enter a benchmark elevation. This value is required for the first level shot unless you selected a setup point that already has a true elevation.
Benchmark | Turning point | Intermediate point: Select the point type for the highlighted current level reading.
Change: Change the level reading highlighted in the level notes list box to what you’ve entered in the Station ID, Backsight, Foresight and True BM Elevation controls above.
Append: Append the current level reading in the Station ID, Backsight, Foresight and True BM Elevation controls above to the end of the list.
Insert: Insert the current level reading in the Station ID, Backsight, Foresight and True BM Elevation controls above the level reading highlighted.
Delete: Delete the level reading highlighted.
Adjust: Adjust the elevations of the level notes using the elevations of the beginning benchmark, intermediate benchmarks with known elevations.
Report: Report the adjusted level data to P3Pad.
Units: Select the default rod units for your level data. Select from feet, inches, centimetres, half-centimetres or millimetres.
OK: Accept changes to level loop data
Cancel: Cancel without changing level loop data.

OK

Make changes to LevelBM attributes of the level loop benchmark point.

Close

Close without changing attributes of the level loop benchmark point.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	RG 673	Cogo\|Utilities\|Level note reductions	Secured	level

LIDARGRD

Import X, Y, Z and intensity from common ASCII lidar (light radar) file formats in a grid.

Lidar file: Browse to select an ASCII file with the format X,Y,Z,Intensity
Boundary/Hal: Import only points within a closed boundary pline
Max offset from Hal: Import to points within an offset from the selected HAL
Grid Interval: Import only points near grid locations defined by coordinates evenly divisible by the grid interval
Grid east and North Offset: Enter values to be added to the even grid coordinates
Max distance: Import only points within the specified Max Distance of grid locations

For example, if the points in the ASCII file are on a grid at roughly 1.0 spacing and you only want points at 10m spacing, specify a Grid Interval of 10and Max Distance less than 1.0.

If the grid coordinates are not evenly divisible by the interval, for example the interval is 1.0 yet eastings are 10.5, 11.5, 12.5, etc., enter a Grid East Offset of 0.5.

Any intensity value is assigned to both the colour number and the name. Features such as trees can be made to stand out with colourmaps and penmaps that map these colour numbers to suitable display or plot colours.

Import X, Y, Z and Intensity or colour from common ASCII lidar (light radar) file formats.

The comma-separated and tab-separated formats can include fourth or fifth fields to distinguish objects such as trees by colour or name in Terramodel.

Limit points
- To import points only within a boundary, select a boundary.
- To import only points near an alignment, select a HAL and enter a maximum offset.
- To import all points, do not select any record.
Click Import
Browse to select ASCII files to import. Default file extensions include .THN, .GRD, .TXT, .NON, .XYZ, .FST, .ASC, .CSV, .DAT and .PTS. Use All files to select files with other extensions.

X,Y,Z or X Y Z: Create points with Easting, Northing and Elevation from the three fields. The colour is derived from the current point colour.
X,Y,X,Colour or X Y Z Colour: Create points with Easting, Northing and Elevation from the first three fields and the colour number and point name from the fourth field.
X,Y,Z,Colour,Group or X Y Z Colour Group: Create points with Easting, Northing and Elevation from the first three fields, the colour number from the fourth field, the group number from the fifth field and the name from the fourth and fifth fields.

Export X, Y, Z and colour to an ASCII lidar (light radar) .PTS file formats.

The fields are X, Y, Z, -200, R, G, B. -200 is a default value for intensity. Colours are represented by the RGB values of points as displayed in Terramodel.

Recompute X and Y of points on a set by linear interpolation and even spacing, between two points. The elevations are unchanged.

Use this to estimate the position of coordinates where the X and Y positions are incorrect but the sequence and elevations are correct, for example when a GPS and echo sounder pass under a bridge together.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

LINETYPE

Modify the linetype of selected plines or sets.

Select from linetypes previously loaded by LINETYPESET.

Load definitions from a .LIN file or purge definitions from the project file.

List and select linetype definitions.

Browse...: Browse to C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP and select a linetype definition file.
Load: Select some linetype definitions, load them into the project and replace any previous definitions of the same names.
Done: Return to Load | Purge | Done

Purge linetype definitions not used by objects or settings in the project.

Select all: Select all unused linetype definitions
Purge: Purge selected linetype definitions
Done: Return to Load | Purge | Done

Return to the command line

The maximum number of linetype definitions that can be stored in a project is 254.

Removing a linetype definition saves a small amount of memory and reduces the length of the list of linetypes.

The Terramodel .LIN file format is different to the AutoCAD .LIN and Geocomp .LNE formats.

LinetypeToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINETYPETOGGLE which simulates the Linetype toolbar toggle in the Window menu.

Create samples of linetypes loaded into the current project.

Create an array of text and plines, in the sheet view, on the current layer, for each loaded linetype, with text showing the linetype name and a pline with that linetype.

The array of samples gives a visual indication of which linetypes are usuable in the current project.

Use LINETYPESET to load and and purge linetypes.

Once the number of linetypes loaded into a project exceeds 254, any new linetype definitions are not loaded, so those linetypes are not displayed correctly, even though their names are selectable in dialogs. LINETYPS warns when that limit has been exceeded, shows the index number of each linetype and creates text and plines showing usable and unusable linetypes in different colours. To ensure all loaded linetypes are usable, first decide which linetypes to purge. Then delete all the sample plines and text by layer and use LINETYPESET to purge the unwanted linetypes and load any new ones. Run LINETYPS again. Repeat until samples of all the linetypes you want are created with no errors.

To open charts listing all linetypes that can be loaded from .LIN. files supplied with Geocomp Update, use DOCUMENTS.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	180

LINEZERO

Modify the linetype of selected plines or sets to By Layer.

Plines or sets with a linetype of By Layer are displayed according to the linetype configured in LAYERSET for the layer they are on.

See also COLOUR to Colour By Layer and LINETYPE to select other linetypes.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

LINKSET

Control the way all DTM points are linked by commands that form DTMs.

Elevation tolerance for flat triangles

Set this tolerance for use with Remove Flat triangles.

Maximum edge distance

Where the distance between two edge points is greater than this maximum edge distance, the edge link is excluded unless this would prevent every DTM point from being linked into a single connected DTM, or there is a DTM edge formed by a series of connected breakline sets. This reduces the number of long thin triangles around the edge of the model.

Maximum edge angle

Where the angle opposite an edge link is greater than the maximum edge angle the link is excluded. This controls the number of thin edge triangles. The maximum value is 179°.

Display links

Display links for the selected DTM layers.

Link colour

The colour in which all links are displayed. If the colour is 0, the line colour of the layer in LAYERSET is used.

Display links on layers

Select one or more DTM layer for which links are to be displayed

Remove flat triangles

Rearrange links to remove as many any flat triangles as possible along breaklines when the elevation is within the specified tolerance of the first point in the set. This enhances DTMs created from digitized contour lines.

Show triangle slope

Show the slope of each triangle by an arrow. The display size of the arrow is fixed, so the zoom level determines the plotted size of the arrow. See also MG1 and GCFALL.

Quick contours

Interpolate and display contours with no smoothing for the selected DTM layers in the link colour. To create smooth contours, or create plines or text labels, use CONTOUR.

Quick isopach generation

This should be normally OFF so that during volume computation where the two DTM surfaces intersect additional points and breaklines are created in the isopach surface for a more accurate volume.

Remove link between BLs

When enabled, commands that cut cross-sections or profiles from a DTM will remove points interpolated on link lines between breaklines from the cross-section or profile unless:

The point on the link line lies 0.10m or more away from the interpolated line segment
The two adjacent breaklines share a common endpoint
The cross section line crosses two or more link lines between the two breaklines

Enable this when required for uploading strings to certain instruments or for labelling plots.

Advanced

Link buffer

Specify the number of unused links to initially allocate to each point. By initially allocating additional memory for each link during the linking process, fewer memory operations are required during linking and the link time is reduced. A value of two is recommended for optimal speed. Higher values will waste memory during linking and may take longer.

Link step

Determines the order in which points are linked. If the link step is the recommended value of ten, every tenth point is linked before all the other points are linked, added to the DTM. This can save DTM formation time with some gridded data sets. Increase this value if you exceed the maximum number of links that can be connected to a single point.

Once you have established the correct maximum edge distance and angle for a particular DTM layer, create a DTMEDGE to retain those settings, before changing the link settings to suit a different DTM layer in the same project.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Link settings	Field Data Module

LinkToggle

LinkToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINKTOGGLE which toggles the DTM links using LINKSET then REDRAW.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|linktoggle	User-definable

LIST

List information to the P3pad report editor, where it can be formatted, manipulated and saved to a file or sent to your printer.

Layers: Use LLAYER to report the number of objects on each layer in the project and the default colours and linetypes. Objects on all view modes are counted.
Objs: Use LOBJS to list selected objects, with layer, type of object, name, number of elements (for plines and sets), colour, linetype or font and record number.
Points: Use LPOINTS to list selected points with Point number, Record number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol number, or general information or GCLPTS to list Point number, Record number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, RDE Status, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol number, Group or coordinate ranges and save to CSV.
Upts: Use LUNUSED to display the unused point numbers within a point number range.
Sets: Use LSETS to list selected sets with record numbers, names, the number of points in each set and the list of the point numbers forming the set. Arc centres are shown as negative point numbers.
Plines: Use LPLINES to list selected plines with record number, name, layer, colour, linetype, reference object, start station | chainage, elevation, elevation, and for each control point (vertex) coordinates and curve information.
Lots: Use LLOTS to create a table of plines and text showing block number, lot number, basic area, alternative area and % area, for selected closed sets already labelled by LABELSETS.

Each report be selected from the LIST button, or by entering the specific command into the command line, or entering LIST then the first letters on the specific button. For example, to list the plines, enter LPLINES, LIST PL or LIST then select the Plines button. LISTPL will also run LPLINES if the alias has been created.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	27
12/03/09	HELPTM	Reports\|List Inquire\|List	Field Data Module	27

LISTARCS

For selected sets and plines, report to P3Pad the record number, whether open or closed, record name, if splined, and the radius of any arc, the length of any spiral and length of any vertical curve.

If the record is closed, the report also lists the area and whether clockwise or anticlockwise.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

LISTFONT

List the loaded fonts in the message scroll and create table of sample text in the sheet view on layer LIST_FONTS.

This the list of fonts used by text objects, text objects in blocks, text style settings and other Terramodel settings.

LISTFONT does not list other available fonts. See TEXTMETRICS and FONTCHNG to load other fonts.

As text is imported from a .DWG, .DXF or .DGN file, if the text font is mapped by the selected AutoCAD Conversion Mapping File (.ACF) or MicroStation Conversion Mapping file (.MCF) to a Terramodel font, the text font will be substituted.

If the .FNT file for a loaded font is missing and not substituted, message scroll displays a warning once, and any text in that font is displayed in the default font, usually TMODELF. To get rid of missing-font warning messages, you could:

Change the font of the text using TEXTMETRICS or FONTCHNG,
If the text was imported from .DWG, .DXF or .DGN, add the missing font to the .ACF or .MCF conversion mapping file and import again into a new project, or
Place a .FNT file of the right name in the Fonts folder. For example, use FONTC.EXE to convert an .SHP font.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

LISTGRP

List all group numbers, other than 0, in use by any selected object, to message scroll, in numerical order.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	86

LISTLOTS

For each selected set, list the name, point numbers and the bearing, distance, (and arc and radius if relevant), of each segment.

If the set is closed, the area is shown.

Optionally, save the report to a .CSV file.

Compare natural surface points, with a design pipe and alignment.

Specify the Design HAL, top of pipe set, natural surface points and pipe diameter.

The report shows Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, RL (Top), Pipe cover, Trench depth, Segment grade and Deflection angle.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

LISTREF

List to P3Pad the names and paths of the master project file and all the reference files for the current project.

See REFFILE.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

LISTTEXT

List selected text to a P3Pad report in easting order.

EAT codes are not converted.

See also GCTXTOUT which can export by record number, northings or tables.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

LLAYER

Report the number of objects on each layer in the project and the default colours and linetypes.

Objects in all view modes are counted.

The same as LIST... Layers.

Modify the layer list property of selected dynaviews.

See DYNAVIEW and LLISTSET.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Layer list	Field Data Module	90

LLISTSET

Add or delete layers from a layer list and designate which of those layers can be shown with background prominence.

If a layer list is associated with a dynaview, only objects on layers on the layer list are displayed within the dynaview, even if the visibility of the layer is turned off. Layer list names can have up to 17 characters.

A layer list is a list of layer names, within which you can add or delete member layers and designate which of those layers are to be shown with background prominence. Assign a layer list a name, as you would a layer.

A layer list can be associated with a dynaview, to control the layers displayed within that dynaview. Only objects that reside on layers that are members of the assigned layer list are displayed within the dynaview. The objects on these member layers are displayed, even if the visibility of the layer is turned off. Objects located on other layers, which are not members of the layer list are not displayed.

Layer lists can also be used to select layers to copy, report, display, and so on.

Layer list names: This column lists the names of the layer lists in your project. Select a layer list name to highlight, in the second column, which layers are members of that layer list.
Layers: This column lists the names of the layers in your project. Select the layers to be members of the selected layer list with your mouse using Left-Click, Crtl-Left-Click or Shift-Left-Click.
Background prominence: This column lists the names of the layers in your selected layer list. Select the layers for potential background prominence with your mouse. Unselected layers always plot with foreground prominence. Selected layers plot with background prominence when "Use shift" is turned on in PLOTSET.
New: Enter the name of a new layer list.
Delete: Delete the selected layer list.
Rename: Rename the selected layer list.
Save: Save the layer list with its configuration of layers and background prominence layers.
Capture: Reset the list of layers in the selected layer list to capture the only those layers marked as Visible in LAYERSET.
Save: Save the changes to the selected layer list. Layer lists are stored in the project file.
Close: Close without further changes to layer lists

A layer in a layer list can be given "background prominence". Objects on a layer can be plotted from one dynaview with "foreground prominence", from other with "background prominence", and from another, be not plotted at all. By default, a dynaview plots all visible layers. If a dynaview has a layer list, all layers on that layer list are plotted with the "foreground" colours defined by the plot carousel, unless they are given "background prominence" and "Use Shift" is turned on.

If "Use shift" is enabled in the Advanced settings of PLOTSET, the value of the colour shift entered there is added to the colour number of objects on those layers with background prominence in the dynaview, and the the value of the pen shift is added to the pen number.

Prominence does not affect the plot order, but the plot order can affect prominence. If "Sort by Pen" is not selected in PLOT, prominence can be used, and objects are plotted in increasing record number order. If "Sort by pen" is selected, all objects are plotted with foreground prominence, and all objects are plotted in increasing pen number order. Any raster screening is done by the plotter driver, not by Terramodel, despite what the User Guide says.

For example, if existing contours and their labels are colour 11, and the pen map is 1_to_1, and pens 65 to 128 in the selected carousel are similar to pens 1 to 64 but with lighter colours or thinner lines, and "Use shift" is on with colour shift = 0 and pen shift = 64, and "Use height" is off, and "Sort by pen" is off, a dynaview of "existing feature" layers will plot contours in the "foreground" with pen 11, and another dynaview of "design feature" layers will plot the same contours with pen 75 (=11+64).

Create a table of plines and text showing block number, lot number, basic area, alternative area and % area, for selected closed sets already labelled by LABELSETS.

Same as LIST Lots.

Report each layer within each layer list.

Report each layer within each layer list to P3Pad and to a .CSV in the project file location. The format of the .CSV is

layer_list,layer_name,line_colour,point_colour,linetype

To create a layer list of all layers, first use LAYERSET to make all layers visible, then LLISTSET to Capture the visible layers to a new layer list. Layers with no objects are included.

Use LLRPT and CREATELL to transfer layers, layer lists, layer colours and layer linetypes from one project to another.

Create a table of coordinates from selected points with columns for Point number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description, Latitude and Longitude.

Points: Select the points.
Origin: Enter the location of the upper left corner of the table.
Settings

The points are sorted into integer points in point number order followed by alpha points in alphabetical order.
The eastings and northings update as the points are moved.
To update the latitudes and longitudes, recreate the table.
If a suitable "From" coordinate system has not already been configured, you will be notified to first use another command such as GCCOORD or GCLLGRID to specify the "From" system.

Open the linetype dialog to change the linetype of new sets and plines in the current layer.

This is the same as clicking on the linetype picker on the toolbar, or changing the linetype of the current layer using LAYERSET.

The linetype can also be changed at the command line using an argument.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Toolbar	Field Data Module	2

LOADATT

Load or reload a selected attribute definition file (.ADF) for use with commands that use those attributes of objects.

Command date			Source
29/10/08			Field Data Module

LOBJCOLOR

Open the line colour dialog to change the colour number of new plines or sets in the current layer.

This is the same as clicking on the left-hand colour picker on the toolbar, or changing the colour of the current layer using LAYERSET.

The colour can also be changed at the command line using an argument.

List selected objects, with layer, type of object, name, number of elements (for plines and sets), colour, linetype or font and record number.

The same as LIST... Objs.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|List [Objs]	Field Data Module	27

LOTJOIN

Create closed sets by tracing clockwise inside selected sets and plines around locations at the insertion points of selected text objects.

The new closed sets are created on the current layer with names derived from the corresponding text objects.

If you don't have the text, create it with GC35 and LABPT.

LOTJOIN can be used to:

Create closed sets for subdivision lots with names from lot numbers for use with lot-related commands such as LABELSETS and GCLABLOT.
Transfer names from text onto mining block boundaries for use with GCGRDVOL.
Trace multiple boundaries, instead of GCTRACE which traces one lot a time.
Replace closed sets with sets that are all clockwise, for use with OFFELEVM.

See also AUTOSET for when you just have the points.

TML date			Source	GC
17/02/22			Secured	64

LPLINES

List selected plines with record number, name, layer, colour, linetype, reference object, start station | chainage, elevation, elevation, and for each control point (vertex) coordinates and curve information.

The same as LIST... Plines.

See also NPSCHART, GEOMRPTS Plines, REPORTS Alignment and REPORTS Geometry.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Reports\|List [Plines]	Field Data Module	84

LPOINTS

List selected points with options to include Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number and General Information.

In the Geocomp Update, LPOINTS is an alias for GCLPTS which includes options for Group and Export to CSV.

To list Layers, Objects, Unused Points, Sets, Plines or Lots, see LIST. To list radiations, see LPTSRAD. To list with heights as depths, see PORTSC1.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	RG 423	Reports\|List [Points]	Field Data Module	26

LPTCOLOR

Open the points colour dialog so to change the colour number of new points in the current layer.

This is the same as clicking on the right-hand colour picker on the toolbar, or changing the default colour of new points on the current layer using LAYERSET.

The colour can also be changed at the command line using an argument.

List coordinates, radiations and properties of selected points.

B+D to Pt Name: Replace point names with bearing and distance.
Bearings | Distances | Point number | Record number | Northing | Easting | Elevation | Name | Layer | Colour | View | Symbol No. | General information: Report the values of selected fields in the P3Pad report.

Label selected profiles with a table beneath showing chainages, elevations and grades.

Set your active alignment
Create or extract profiles
If your profiles extend over multiple sheets, create plotboxes
Select profiles in the profile view in the order you want them labelled
Treat all profiles as Design, or not
The Help button summarizes the process
Click on Label
Modify any settings.
Click OK to create a table of labels below the profiles
Delete any previously created labels when prompted
Dynaview the labelled profiles to the Sheet view

Select plines or sets in the Profile view that represent long sections or vertical alignments.

To control the order of the rows of labels, select by Record and click on the objects one at a time in order from top to bottom.

Any selected sets are converted to plines, unless "Only label IPs with names when the Profile is a SET" is turned on.

Only plines can have vertical curves.

Check that each profile to be selected refers to the active horizontal alignment, or to another alignment that does so.

If the sections require multiple sheets, select plotboxes to define the chainage range of each sheet. For single sheets, you do not need to select any plotboxes. If selected plotboxes do not refer to an alignment, when you label you are prompted whether to refer them to the active alignment.

Profiles are labelled with grade and vertical curve details when either

The profile includes at least one vertical curve,
"Treat all Profiles as design" is turned on, or
The information table in profile labelling settings shows Y to "Label Design".

The Help button shows brief instructions.

The profile plines are listed in a table by record number and name in the order they were selected. Each has Y or N for "Label Design" indicating whether the profile is to labelled with grades and any vertical curves. To change this status, click on the row in table and change Y or N at the top of the last column.

Other Profile information to be specified includes linework layer, linetype, chainage and elevation text style, start chainage, end chainage, chainage interval and whether to label at xlines.

If you selected plotboxes, the start chainage, end chainage and datum elevation are computed from the plotboxes. If not, the initial values are derived from the extents of the selected plines. Manually edit the ranges, or reset them after you make any edits to the plines.

Specify box text style, box width, horizontal line space, datum elevation (see above), vertical curve label interval, vertical curve text style, chainage label text style, decimal places for Cut|Fill, Design Elevation, Existing elevation and chainages, whether to include a side box, match colour, split vertical curve details, label VIP deflection angles, include distances, include sample lines, include design grades or generate a report.

To label only specific points in a profile, convert the profile to a set, give those points names, and then select "Only label IPs with names when the Profile is a SET".

Specify whether to label horizontal curve, superelevations, cut|fill differences, empty boxes, and plan polygons.

Any cut|fill values are shown with the entered label in a new box above the label box for the first profile, The values are differences between the elevations of the last and first profiles. To reverse the sign, select "-ve Cut/Fill".

To show the extent, names and colours of user-defined closed plines and sets in the Plan view that define regions along the active alignment, select an "Additional Info Layer List for Plan Polygons" with layers in reverse alphabetical order. Such regions might represent, for example, tenure, trench material, pipe type or municipality.

To keep profiles along the same horizontal alignment together, use ACTIVE to set an active alignment before creating profiles and plotboxes. To match profiles along different alignments, for example to match the chainages of left and right kerb profiles to a centreline profile, REFER the kerb horizontal alignments to the centreline alignment before extracting the kerb profiles. In the profile view, profiles that refer to a horizontal alignment, and labels that refer to those profiles, are hidden as you change to different active alignments with ACTIVE.

If you need profiles at more than one vertical scale, either create and explode a dynaview before changing vertical scales, or use another view like View 8, to create the more labelled profiles.

See also LSECUK, TPLSEC, LVC and LABELVAL.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	built-in help	Draft\|label profiles (LSEC1)	Geocomp Update or $275	493

LSECUK

Create a table of plines and text below profile plines with rows showing elevations, chainages | stationing, northing, easting and and vertical curves and columns, marked with tick marks or droplines, showing intervals, cross sections and break point, etc.).

There are settings for the

start and end
intervals along the profile
text and location of the "side box
dropped lines
grid
crossing Hals

For a sketch showing typical elements of the table, see LSEC_UK diagram.

The profiles can that refer to a HAL or be profiles in a registered road job.

If a column is too narrow, the column is expanded to fit the text and any dropline is dog-legged.

The vertical curve data row marks the extent of the curve with matching arrows, the intersection point (IP), and vertical curve length. The straight sections are labeled with the slope.

Select profiles

Select plines in the Profile view.

Settings

Reset

Reset the Start, End and Datum elevation settings to the full extent of the roadway.

Start

Enter the start chainage | station

End

Enter the end chainage | station

Datum elevation

Enter the elevation of the top of the table

Chainage | Station interval settings

Place columns in the table at the beginning and ending, and at

Plot Interval: Specified regular intervals
Cross section: Each cross section location along the HAL referred to by selected profiles.
Plot break points: Each location at which the slope breaks along any selected profile.
Plot intersections: Each location at which the selected profiles intersect.

Table properties

Select the layer, linetype and text style for all table objects except the grid and side box text.

Side box settings (Configure labels)

Plot side box

Create a box on the left or right to label each row.

Text style

Select the text style for the title and labels for intervals, northings, eastings, horizontal curves, vertical curves, cut and fill.

Side labels

Interval label: Enter the label to identify the row of interval data.
Northing label: Enter the label to identify the row of northing data.
Easting label: Enter the label to identify the row of easting data.
Horizontal curve label: Enter the label to identify the row of horizontal curve data.
Vertical curve label: Enter the label to identify the row of vertical curve data.
Cut label: Enter the label to identify the row of cut data.
Fill label: Enter the label you want to see to identify the row of fill data.
Title: Enter a title to appear above the side bar to the left or right of the beginning or ending stations.

Side box settings (Select a profile)

From the list of selected profiles, highlight the current VAL. The list displays the profile number, record number, whether or not to display a vertical curve, the label for vertical curves, and the Label name.

Change label name: Edit the Label name for the current VAL, or accept the default which is the profile layer.
Change VC label: Enter Y or N to display (or not display) data about the vertical curve, if one exists, and select the format for the vertical curve slope.

Current VAL tabulated data

Label northing and easting for current VAL: Create rows of Northing and Easting for the current profile.
Label horizontal curve data for current VAL: Create a row of horizontal curve information for the the current VAL for the extent of the curves on the HAL labelled as follows: R = radius, L = length, LHC = left hand curve and RHC = right hand curve.
Label cut / fill against current VAL: Create two rows showing the cut and fill elevation differences to the current profile for each other profile.

Current VAL interval data

Mark high and low of current VAL

Mark the locations on the current profile for which the slope is zero, that is, all locations where the slope changes from positive to negative or vice versa. The position is given a column.

Block name: Enter or select a block name to insert a block at the highs and lows of the current profile.

Mark crossing HALS or current VAL

Mark the locations on the current profile where the HAL that is referred to intersects HALs that you select at the time you label the profiles.

Block name: Enter or select a block name to insert a block at the intersections.

Volume settings

Include volumes from a selected registered roadjob, and enter Cut and Fill labels.

Grid settings

Create a grid of X and Y lines and labels on X or Y axes, with labels, and specified intervals, linetypes, colours and text styles, on a specified layer.

Tick and drop line settings

Mark all profile with tick marks

Create a tick mark (even if Vertical drop lines and tick marks has None selected).

Tick mark length: Enter a length for the tick marks in sheet units.

Tick mark placement

Mark any ticks above, on or below the line.

Mark vertical line with tick mark (Uncheck for droplines)

Create a tick mark or a dropline on the profile line for each interval selected.

Vertical drop lines and tick marks

Create the drop lines or tick marks from NONE, HIGHEST POINT, LOWEST POINT or CURRENT VAL.

Label

Select any crossing HAL sets from the Plan view and then Label the profiles according to the settings.

Close without labelling.

See also LSEC1, TPLSEC, LVC and LABELVAL.

The TML name is LSEC_UK. If LSECUK does not run from the command line, create an alias from LSECUK to LSEC_UK or enter LSEC_UK.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	HELPTM	Draft\|Label profiles (UK) Draft\|Label profiles	Standard or Geocomp Update	493

LSETS

List selected sets with record numbers, names, the number of points in each set and the list of the point numbers forming the set. Arc centres are shown as negative point numbers.

The same as LIST... Sets.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08		Reports\|List [Sets]	Field Data Module	61

LUNUSED

The same as LIST... Upts.

Command date		Menu	Source
29/10/08		Reports\|List [Unused]	Field Data Module

LVC

Label one vertical curve with an odd number of labels.

Create labels showing stations | chainages and elevations, evenly-distributed between an even number of "segments" along one vertical curve selected by mouse, and a line showing the VC length and VIP elevation.

Vertical curve: Select one vertical curve from a pline in the Profile view.
Defaults: Configure the linetype, layer, text style, number of segments, above or below, and prefixes and suffixes.

Execute the instructions contained within a saved keystroke macro file.

Select macros from a drop down list of all .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\Macros.

Specify a pause interval in milliseconds.

Click Run to execute the selected macro with the specified pause interval between each step.

A macro can be run from a toolbar. For example, to cascade views from the command line, type "macroplay cascade" to play our cascade.mac which is the same as picking Cascade from the Windows menu.

A macro can also be used in a command ALIAS. For example, create an alias with Command "macroplay" and Arguments "cascade", to play the cascade macro by typing CASCADE at the command line. This new command can now also be used in a toolbox.

Launch a macro when Terramodel starts by including MacroPlay in the target property of the Terramodel shortcut.

If "Enable command completion" is turned on in FAVORITES, the macro may not work properly.

Macros are created by MACRORECORD.

To find Macros created by Geocomp Systems search this list for "Macro" or open DOCUMENTS then select Macros under Programming.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM README_macros.pdf	File\|Macro\|Play	Secured

MacroRecord

Record series of keystrokes as a single command to run later.

When you run MACRORECORD, the message is displayed in the message scroll area: "Macro recording started. Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording."

Then execute the Terramodel commands that you want to include in your macro.

Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording then save the macro giving it a suitable name.

Use MACROPLAY to execute the saved macro.

To enable picking objects with a mouse, use the Insert key to indicate the start of interactive selection and the End key to indicate the End.

While in macro-recording mode, use of the keyboard and mouse buttons is restricted to actions that can be replayed by Terramodel. Commands cannot be selected from menus using the mouse. You must navigate with keys such as Alt + "letter" combinations, Enter, Tab, key and cursor arrows and function keys.

Macros are saved as .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM such as C:\TMCUSTOM\Macros.

Keystroke macros are completely different to TMLs.
Third-party macro software such as AutoIt can be a better solution.
Before creating a macro, turn off "Enable command completion" in FAVORITES.
Before creating a macro, move the mouse to the side of the desk and turn it upside down as a reminder not to use it.
Do not use a touch display.
Do not use the up arrow cursor key to select a previously used command; type the command again
Do not play a macro from a macro.
Do not play a macro from the toolbar or a toolbox.
A macro can be executed by a command that uses MACROPLAY in an alias.
If the macro is for another computer, check whether the menus, aliases and modules on that computer enable the keystokes.
Search this TML List to see if what you want to do has already be done.
Consider commissioning someone like Geocomp Systems to write a TML instead.
Backspaces and deletions will play as you typed them.
Your keyboard must have a Break key. You might also need a Fn key to enable Break.
To launch an external program, use EXEC or a batch file (RUN).
Write down every step of the macro.
Take your time to get it right.

Let's say you want to record a macro to start Identify (ID).

Start Terramodel
Check that your keyboard has a Break key.
Turn your mouse over.
Open a project.
Use FAVORITE to turn off command completion.
Use SYSTEM to check the location of your macro folder.
Enter MACRORECORD and Enter at the command line.
The following message is displayed in the message scroll area: "Macro recording started. Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording."
Enter keystrokes to run the commands by entering into the command line or selecting from the menu. For example,
- Enter ID then Enter key at the command line
- Enter Control I at the command line, or
- Press Alt-P + I
Tab to the Close button
Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording.
The Save Macro File box appears and the mouse is available.
Locate and type a file name.
Save as a .MAC file.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|Macro\|Record	Secured

MAGNIFY

Enter a factor for your view scale. A value greater than 1.0 expands the image, a value less than 1.0 shrinks the image.

Magnify can be used with arguments. For example, alias ZI to "Magnify 1.5" meaning Zoom In x2 and ZO to "Magnify 0.5" meaning Zoom Out 2X.

Import NMEA strings from Magellan Explorist 600 GPS receivers.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MAGELLIN

Import NMEA strings tagged as $PMGNWPL from Magellan GPS receivers.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MAGELOUT

Export Magellan GPS Waypoint .UPT file.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MAPIIN

Import MapInfo .MIF and .MID files from GIS applications.

Browse to select a .MIF file and click Import.

Graphical object types imported are point, line, pline, region, arc, text, rect, roundrect and ellipse.

A point can have a symbol and attributes. Any "old" Mapinfo symbol is substituted with the Terramodel symbol most similar in appearence.

Attributes defined in any .MID (Mapinfo database) file with the same name are also imported. Use DISPFEAT to select, report and label attributes.

The current colour is used unless a colour from 0 to 255 is specified.

Fonts, patterns and brushes are ignored.

To import a .TAB database, first convert to .MIF and .MID using a program like Mapinfo or TAB2TAB.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $200

MAPIOUT

Export map linework to .MIF for use in GIS applications.

Specify a central longitude and scale factor.

The corresponding database file is .MID. MAPIOUT writes an empty .MID for those applications which require one, such as Trimble Pathfinder.

Each .MID specification requires a custom TML. For example, FYATBOUT is an example of a custom command to export to MapInfo .MIF|.MID with attributes to suit D-SPEC (as-built drainage specification). Contact Geocomp Systems if you require a custom TML.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or POA for custom .MIF/.MID	320

MAPPOINTS

String points and place symbols using an ASCII mapping file.

Points

Select points to be strung

Map file

Select a .MAP file in the format: Feature code,lineype,layer name,line colour number.

Properties

Line identifying symbols: Enter characters to identify beginning, ending and double-coding
Arc identiying symbols: Enter characters to identify arcs defined by point at start, on curve or at end
Ignore symbols: Enter rows of characters to identify points that are not to be strung
Use map file: Specify whether to use the map file or create sets with SOLID linetypes on the current layer
Edit map file: Open the .MAP file in a text editor such as Notepad

Create

Create sets joining points

Scale and tidy objects created in the sheet view by the Quick explode function in MASSHAUL so that the units of the axes are chainage and volume.

Select an empty view, such as View 8. Use VIEWSET to enable vertical exaggeration in View8 and to enter a value that suits the diagram. A typical value is 0.1. After any change of vertical exaggeration, use ALL to apply the change to the current view.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	477

MASSHAUL

Create a graph of earthwork volume against distance.

The mass haul diagram helps you find the best haul routes for any phase of the job. See the mass haul information diagram and a text report. Set up and select phases, set haul ranges, define significant points, specify material for import or export, and balance areas along the job. Balance your materials or enter materials individually for more control. The Mass Haul Diagram report shows one material at a time and automatically updates as you work with your mass haul diagram.

Before you use the mass haul diagram, make sure:

The project you want to work with is open.
You have defined the materials available at the job site.
You have set up your phases if you plan to work in phases.
You have assigned any significant points (e.g. roadways, bridges, etc.) that will affect your diagram.
You have set up your subgrade materials in the Subgrade Editor if you plan to balance your materials in the mass haul diagram yourself.
You have set up the mass hauling properties for the materials, including marking subgrade materials as Embankment.

Type MASSHAUL into the command line.
As the mass haul diagram for the current road job is created, the main horizontal alignment for that road job is automatically set as the active alignment and appears as a white line in the diagram. The white line represents your working mass ordinate. If you make changes to the working mass ordinate, the new data will assume the white color and the original data will be displayed in a different color. The lines in the diagram represent the cut and the fill at a given point along the alignment. "Hills" in the diagram represent areas of cut while "valleys" in the diagram represent areas of fill.
To select or deselect a view, click the Diagram, Profile, or Report check box.
Set up your Haul Ranges.
Select the phase you want to work with by clicking on the phase box, and clicking on the phase.
Mark positions for material import or export.
To auto-balance the entire phase:
1. If the Material box does not have All selected, click on the Material box, and click on All.
2. Click Actions and Auto-Balance.
To balance each material individually:
1. Click the Material box, and click on the material you want to balance.
2. Click on Actions, and Balance by Range.
3. Click on the first range in the diagram you want to balance. click on either a "hill" or a "valley" in the diagram.
4. Balance each range the way you plan to balance each range on the site. Mass Haul volumes are affected by the order in which you balance the ranges. Lines appear within the range, once it has been balanced, showing the amount of material for each range limit you have set up. A symbol denoting the general direction of dirt movement along with the balance number appears on the diagram. Sometimes a message box appears telling you that Terramodel is not able to balance at the selected point. This message box generally appears when the material is already balanced or when you have not set up haul ranges.
5. Repeat until you have balanaced the material.
To remove all the balances in your diagram, click Actions, Balance, and Clear All Balances.
To remove one balance at a time, click Actions, Balance, and Delete Balance.
To send the Mass Haul Diagram report, click Actions and Reports.
To prepare the Mass Haul diagram for plotting, use Quick Explode.
To close the Mass Haul diagram, click File and Exit.
If you used Quick Explode, use MASSDIAG to scale the diagram for plotting.

File

Exit the Mass Haul Diagram dialog

Actions

Phase names...

Open Phase Names Manager (PHASENAME).

Haul Ranges...

Phases: Select a phase, or None
Haul range limits: Enter a haul range limit and Add, or select a haul range limit and Delete.
OK: Accept changes to haul range limits.
Cancel: Cancel any changes

Sig points...

Designate roadways, bridges, or other site features that cross the road job's main alignment where hauling is affected by some obstacle that may delay or block hauling. Skips always affect the mass haul diagram and will automatically be labeled.

Road...: Select a roadway.
Hal...: Select a HAL.
Special...: Enter chainages | stations of any significant points, with their names, that might affect hauling fill material.
Edit...: Select any skips listed in Skip Manager (SKIP).
Delete: Delete significant points
OK: Update significant points

Indicate how each significant point affects hauling:

None: Does not affect.
Exception *: Calculate the hauled material separately.
Block: Blocks the haul route

Import/Export...

Open the material import/export manager (MASSIMPORT).

Balance

Auto-balance, balance by range, clear all balances or delete balance.

Report Labels

Specify which items to include in the report, and in which order.

Reports

Report the mass haul to P3Pad.

Display

Control how the mass haul diagram or profile is displayed .

All
Redraw
Magnify
Zoom
Recenter
Previous
Options (Turn on or off options in Diagram, Profile or Report).
Settings

Design...

Road Design Settings (RDDESIGNSET)

Grid...

Mass haul diagram grid settings (SCALEGRID)

Quick Explode...

Ref Pt: Enter the location in the Sheet view of the lower left corner.
Sheet size: Select a sheet size
Scale: Enter horizontal and vertical scales, or leave blank.
Explode: Explode the mass haul diagram into objects on the current layer in the Sheet view. The text style is TMODELF. Use MASSDIAG to scale and tidy the exploded objects.

Phase

Select any phases

Material

Select any materials

Diagram

Display the mass haul diagram. Selected "Lines" of materials and balances can be turned on if Options are enabled in the Display menu.

Profile

Display profiles.

Report

Display a table with the columns selected at Report Labels in the Actions menu. The columns can include the Symbol, Cut chainage | station, Fill chainage | station, Cut volume, Import volume, Fill volume, Export volume, Total volume, Cross haul volume, Balance volume, No haul volume, Range and Average distance. The rows show Details, Subtotals, Totals, Exceptions * and Lines, as specified in Options.

Specify the chainages | stations for locations such as borrow pits and stock piles where material is imported or exported for a MASSHAUL diagram.

Phase: Select a phase to which the import or export of materials listed below applies.
Station | Chainage: Enter the station | chainage where introduction or removal of the material occurs.
Quantity: Display the volume of material to be imported or exported.
Type: Indicate whether the material is to be imported or exported.
Distribution: Enter a distance over which the import is distributed.
Material: Display the material being imported or exported.
Delete: Delete the highlighted material import/export assignment.
Add: Add a material Import/Export assignment.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Masshaul\|Import/Export	Secured

MATCH

Modify selected objects to match selected properties of a reference object.

Objs:: Select objects to be modified
Ref Obj:: Pick one object to compare with
Cancel: Close the command without modifying

Once you pick the reference object, use tick boxes to indicate which properties of the selected objects to modify to match the properties of the reference object.

Only properties of the reference object type are selectable.

Tick box settings are not retained.

The term "Ref Obj" is not used here in the sense used by REFER or any other command.

Modify selected objects to match selected properties of a picked object.

Objs:: Select objects to be modified
Picked object:: Pick one object to compare with
Match selected Objects with Picked Object: Indicate which properties of the selected objects are to be modified to match the properties of the picked object. Tick box settings are retained for the current session only.
Cancel: Close the command without modifying

Manage the materials for road design, subgrade and existing surfaces.

The Material Manager is a list of all the materials in your road design and certain properties. Commands in the Roads module use the materials to:

perform separate volume accumulations for each material.
control the design.
compose roadway pavements and subgrades.
in subsurface soil strata, a roadway subgrade, or a shape.

Each project file includes Cut and Fill materials. If Add as many as you need to separate surface strata you enter in Surface Manager (SURFACE) to determine quantities of cut and fill of each material. Closed shapes can have a pavement construction material.

Fill materal

Enter the name of the default fill material, the fill shrink/swell factor, and the fill display colour. Values greater than zero represent swell, while values less than zero represent shrink.

Other materials

Create a list of materials other than fill.

Name: Display or edit the name of each material.
Shrink/Swell: Display or enter the shrink/swell factor for the material.
Unsuitable: Specify that the material, such as topsoil, is unsuitable for the roadway. Unsuitable materials cut by a surface or subgrade shape in the template are completely removed and not available for use in fill.
Embankment: Specify that the material is suitable for a subgrade embankment as shown on a Mass Haul diagram (MASSHAUL).
Colour: Select the display colour for the material.

New...

Enter a new meterial.

Delete

Delete a material.

Close

Close the material manager.

See also GCMATOUT, GCMATIN, ROADMAT, RDDESIGNSET, SURFACE and XSECTIONEDT.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Materials... Channel\|Materials...	Field Data Module

MATRIX

Create multiple copies of selected objects in rows and columns.

Select the objects, then specify the number of rows and columns. Click Horz to specify the bearing of and spacing between rows. Click Vert to specify the bearing of and spacing between columns.

Command date		Menu	Source
12/03/09		Edit\|Matrix	Field Data Module

MDLIN

Import .CDU data files from Quarryman Autoscanning Laser System (ALS) by Measurement Devices Ltd (MDL).

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

MEASUNIT

Set the units of measure for the project and the sheet.

Measurement units for new projects (NEW) are derived from the prototype project specified in SYSTEM. Use GCHELP to confirm the current prototype. If this .PRO file is not found on the TSP, the measurement units will default to feet and inches.

If you find that you are working in a project with the wrong units, because your prototype was incorrect, the best solution is usually to make current the correct prototype and then start again with a new project. If you "Convert Units" instead, you will be working with a project based on some other prototype.

Select from feet or meters (=metres). Do not select User-defined units unless you have commands specially programmed for this purpose using TML.

Select from inch, cm, mm, dm or m. If the project units are feet, select inch. If the project units are meters, select cm. If you select any other sheet unit, text created by LABELPOINT will scale incorrectly as might cross sections created by XSHEET and RDX.

To "Convert units" from metres to feet, or "Convert from feet to meters", in an existing project, select either International foot or U.S. Survey foot. This scales X, Y and Z coordinates of all objects by the factor. This also scales dimensional settings in the project such as Units Settings (UNITSSET) which changes the volume units from cubic metres to cubic yards and the Alt area units from Ha to Acres (or vice versa).

If project units are feet, select Project to Sheet. If project units are metres, select Project to Project.

Select a file a containing the menus for selection above the main graphics display.

Terramodel uses default menus, unless your initialisation specifies a menu file. Use GCHELP to find out which menu configuration file you are using, if any.

Use MENUCFG to browse to select a menu configuration file and update the initialisation, or use EDITINI to import the [System] section from an initialisation file that specifies the menu file.

If you have installed Geocomp Update M or N, select one of the Geocomp menu files. Menu files are updated with each Geocomp Update.

Menus include some commands that vary according to the installed language (English, English (US), Spanish, French or German) and other commands that are hard-coded into the .M file.

If no menu configuration file has been selected, Terramodel uses one of these menu files, depending on the modules on the security key.

Menu configuration file	For use with
SPCAD.M	Field data and CAD modules
SPCONSTR.M	ConstructionPak
SPDESIGN.M	DesignPak
SPFIELDDATA.M	Field Data module
SPSURVEY.M	SurveyPak
TMODWIN.M	TerraPak
TUNNEL.M	Tunnels
GSTPLUS.M	Geodimeter Software Tools
PAYDIRTSITEWORKCAD.M	Paydirt SiteWork CAD

These .M files can be selected from C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\... according to the installed language.

Use ABOUT to list the modules on your key.

For Geocomp Updates, select one of these menu files from C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\:

Menu configuration file	For use
GEOCOMP.M	outside USA for survey and construction
GEOCOMP_US.M	in USA for survey and construction
GEOCOMP+.M	outside USA for survey and construction including Tunnel, Hydro and Pipe menus
GEOCOMP+_US.M	in USA for survey and construction including Tunnel, Hydro and Pipe menus
GEOCOMP+HDMS.M	outside USA for hydrographic survey and channel construction
GEOCOMP+HDMS_US.M	in USA for hydrographic survey and channel construction
VIEWER.M	by clients and managers to view Terramodel project (.PRO) files.

.M files can be manually edited in a text editor. Copy an existing file into C:\TMCUSTOM and give it a new name before editing or selecting with MENUCFG.

MENUCFG changes the name of the current menu configuration file in the [System] section of the initialisation file TMODWIN.INI.

Terramodel searches through the Terramodel Search Path (TSP) to find and use the first menu file with the name configured in TMODWIN.INI.

EDITINI can import a menu configuration from the [System] section of the following initialisation files in C:\TMCustom\Geocomp:

Initialisation file	Menu configuration file
FIELD_DATA_TMODWIN.INI	SPFIELDDATA.M
GEOCOMP_AUST_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI	GECOMP.M
GEOCOMP_USA_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI	GECOMP_US.M
HDMS_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI	GECOMP+HDMS.M
VIEWER_TMODWIN.INI	VIEWER.M

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|System configuration\|Change menus...	Field Data Module	CG F

MERGE

Create a merged DTM by copying an Inside DTM and that portion of an Outside DTM outside the extent of the Inside DTM.

The Inside layer is typically a Design surface, such as one created by DESIGN. The Outside surface is typically an existing surface. It must extend beyond the Inside surface, though it does NOT have to completely encompass the Inside surface. The Merged layer should start empty.

Set names are not transferred to the new layer.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two overlapping surfaces, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, DTMMATCH to match elevations of two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Merge layers...	Secured	198

MESSAGESCROLL

Toggle on or off the message scroll display above the command line.

MessageScroll is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY MESSAGESCROLLTOGGLE which simulates the Message scroll command in the Window menu.

See also CLEARMESS which clears current messages from the message scroll and EDITINI which can reset defaults including turning on message scroll.

Macro date		Menu	Source
20/06/13		Window\|Message scroll File\|Macro\|Play\|messagescrolltoggle	Field Data Module or Geocomp Update

MG1

At the centroid of each triangle of a selected DTM, create a point with elevation equal to the % slope in the steepest direction with a symbol, a label showing slope or a report.

The points, labels and symbols are placed on the current layer in the current line colour. If text or symbols are too big or too small, undo or delete the new objects, change the Plan View Scale with VIEWSCAL or GCREDRAW, and run the command again.

The precision is controlled by UNITSSET Precision % Slopes or Slope ratios.

DTM Surface: Select a DTM layer
Create arrow: Insert a shaded triangle as text in the symbol font that shows the direction of slope, or shows a double triangle where the triangle is near level.
Create text: Create text that shows the slope (unless near level).
% Grade | 1:Grade: Show and report the slope as percentage or as 1:
Create File: Report to a comma-delimited file the Easting, Northing, Elevation, Slope and Aspect.
Enhanced file: Report to a comma-delimited file the Easting, Northing, Elevation, Slope, Aspect and Area.
File: Specify the output file name.
OK: Create the points, labels and report.
Cancel: Cancel the command

Nominate a roadway and phases for MASSHAUL and import a cut|fill volume report in .CSV format.

See also GCHAULMN which has more options.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update	476

MICROSS

Open the Windows installer for Microsoft Sans Serif font.

The default font used in GC01 command is the vector 7-point TrueType font of the Microsoft Sans Serif typeface. This is the default Windows font after Windows 98.

If this font has not been installed, the command line of GC01 command can display incorrectly.

To install this font, enter MICROSS at the command line to open the Windows font installer MICROSS.TTF supplied with Geocomp Update N and display examples of this font. Then click on Install.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MIRROR

Copy selected objects to new locations the same distances beyond an axis defined by two points as the current distances to that axis.

Labelling and some other parameters are not copied. The new objects retain the original layer names. Tables are not mirrored.

Text objects are still readable. If you want backwards text, EXPLODE to plines first.

Mirror selected dynaviews about their Y axes and move their insertion points if rotated.

TML date			Source
29/10/08			Secured

MKBLK

Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block from selected Terramodel objects.

Define an insertion point, a Y scale point (for 2 and 3 point blocks) and a Z scale point (for 3 point blocks).

The selected objects are scaled into a 1 * 1 unit block. Use the measured point to point distances to scale the object. In order to have consistent results when you insert the block, you should orient a block from bottom to top (in the Y direction) and from left to right (in the X direction). EXPLODE any hatching and text into plines first.

Objs: Select the objects that create the unit block.
Ins:: Define the insertion point for the unit block.
Y:: Select a location for the Y direction and scale. The distance from the insertion point to this point is scaled to 1.0 unit in the Y direction of the unit block. Two and three point blocks are rotated and scaled along the Y axis.
X:: Select a location for the X direction and scale. The distance from y-axis to this point is scaled to 1.0 unit in the X direction of the unit block.
OK: Click the OK button to create the unit block with a block name and (optional) description.

A unit block is created so that the critical dimension of the block in the plan view is one unit in size. This means that the placed block will be the size of one unit times the scale you enter. For example, if you create a block from some objects making up a "tree canopy" one unit in diameter, and enter a scale of 3.50 when you place it, the tree block will be 3.50m across. UNITBLK and AUTODRAFT can use up to three block placement points. A one-point block is placed on the insertion point. A two-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1 and (0,1) at point 2. A three-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1, (0,1) at point 2 and (1,0) at point 3.

Create multiple-point blocks using BLOCK Create if your block data are arranged with those coordinates. With MKBLK, transform the block as you create it by selecting locations to be "Ins" (0,0 or point 1), "Y" (0,1 or point 2) and "X" (1,0 or point 3).

The new block is internal. To make the block external, use BLOCK Save.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	Three-point blocks Block FAQ	Draw\|Block\|Make	Field Data Module	196

MKBLKINT

Convert selected external blocks in the project into internal blocks.

Display temporary vertex markers at each point of a set or vertex of a pline.

The vertex marker size is set by SYSTEM. The colour is the cursor colour.

No objects or labels are created; when the screen refreshes the markers have gone.

Import Survey, Design and Models including alignments, surveys, design strings and triangles from Moss GENIO data.

Interpret GENIO codes using a .MIN mapping file, log errors, and treat 2D, 3D, 6D and 12D strings separately. In preparation, review the MOSS GENIO project to decide the corresponding Terramodel objects (layer, line style, etc.). Then create an import map file to your specifications, if necessary.

MOSSMIN creates an initial .MIN from the codes in a MOSS GENIO file. See MOSSMIN for the .MIN file format.

Default GENIO and map file names can be set by PROJECTV.

The workspace MOSS.WS includes buttons for MOSSIN and MOSSOUT commands.

Each survey supplied by a MOSS-user uses their field code standards.

Every MOSS string must have a 4-character MOSS field code and an optional 4-character sub-field code. By convention, the first one, two, or three characters of the field code describe the object the MOSS string represents. For example: P* = points, F* = fences, L* = spot level, G* = geometry strings, M* = mathematically calculated strings, etc.

The field code can also store increment information in the last one, two, or three characters. For example, if Terramodel exports five points, these points might be labeled P000 to P004.

Specify what to use for the beginning character(s) of the field code and to switch the auto increment feature on or off. Designate one of the following to be the base of the MOSS field code:

Terramodel object name
The Terramodel layer
string defined in the map file

As a general rule, MOSSIN imports as point objects, any feature with a name beginning with P and L* field codes.

MOSS 2D points have elevations of –999. These are imported as *.

The format of a MOSS station string is E (Easting), N (Northing), Z (Elevation), P (Point ID). This Point ID is prefaced with the string PSSA. Use SYSTEM to set the Max alpha pts: field to a value greater than the number of stations in the MOSS file.

2D strings are imported as contour plines with straight segments. To splines these after import, see SPLINE. To convert these to sets, use CONVERT or GCCONVRT. MOSS often uses Y*, Z*, or X* field codes for contour lines.

MOSS usually uses 3D strings for survey data. Specify NONE as the linestyle for these strings to import as points only.

MOSSIN interprets a MOSS 200007703 080 card as a curved set line and negative coordinates as indicating straight line segments. Negative coordinates in a MOSS 7703 080 card are treated as a break or gap in the string.

MOSS usually uses an M* field code for 6D strings. These 6D string points are mathematically calculated from a MOSS 12D Geometry (G*) string. Map these to sets. 6D strings are created as points at an interval and at the tangent points along a design alignment. Use the following rules to recreate the alignment geometry:

Straight line elements have an infinite radius.
Arc elements have a fixed radius.
Transition curves have an increasing or decreasing radius.

Check by comparing the imported 6D string against the supplied plot and running alignment reports.

Moss input map file: "Use map file" to select a MOSS Input file (.MIN) file.
Group using map file: Assign group numbers
Group entire file using: Enter a single group ID
Error log file: Create a new error log file or append to an existing log file. Specify the name of any such file.
Moss 2D strings: Create plines or points and sets from from MOSS 2D strings.
Moss 6D strings and 3D curve strings: Create sets with arcs or sets with straight segments from 6D strings.
Center points on separate layer: Specify a separate layer for arc-centre points. This layer can be made invisible with LAYERSET.
Create 6D HAL on layer: Specify a separate layer from 6D HAL for Roadway Design.
Moss 12D strings: Create pline alignments or points and sets from MOSS 12D strings.

Report features in a selected MOSS GENIO to P3Pad, save the report as a .MIN file in Text format then manually edit the file to enter corresponding properties.

The MOSS .MIN file is used by MOSSIN to map features in a MOSS GENIO file to desired Terramodel properties. MOSSMIN creates or adds to a .MIN file from the features in a specified MOSS GENIO file. Use the first 1, 2, 3 or 4 characters from the feature code or the characters before the first space.

Comment lines begin with a #.

The String Code Definition Line is comma-delimited with the following six fields:

Field Number	Field Name	Instructions
1	MOSS String Code	Use * as a wildcard
2	Layer	Assign objects to this Terramodel layer
3	Colour	Assign objects to this Terramodel colour. –1 = Default layer colour.
4	Linestyle	Assign object(s) this Terramodel linestyle. –1 = Default layer linestyle NONE = No line (Use to create points only.)
5	Group ID	Assign object(s) to this Terramodel Group. 0 = No group assigned
6	Alignment registration	Register alignments. NONE HAL VAL BOTH If you are not using commands in the Roads menu, select NONE.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

MOSSOUT

Export MOSS GENIO data using an .MSX mapping file.

In the dialog, specify how to handle specific string types.

In the MSX file, for each record (or layer) name filter, specify the name, the layer name or fixed characters for the 080 record in the GENIO file.

Also specify a DEFAULT name filter for selected objects which do not match the name or layer filter.

The whole file is a single GENIO model, unless you specify multiple models using layerlists.

If the GENIO file is intended for set out using Trimble Survey Controller or Trimble Access, use SURVCONT instead.

The order of these fields within the map file is mandatory. The first field acts as a filter, delimiting the Terramodel objects that will use the parameters on that line. The second through fifth parameters designate the rules that Terramodel will use to create the MOSS string field code. The sixth and seventh parameters tell Terramodel how to assign elevations to exploded block elements.

Every MOSS string must have a maximum 4-character MOSS field code and an optional 4-character sub-field code. By convention, the first one, two, or three characters of the field code describe the kind of object the MOSS string represents, for example, P* = points, F* = fences, L* = spot level, G* = geometry strings, M* = mathematically calculated strings, etc. The field code can also store string number information in the last one, two or three characters.

If Terramodel exports five strings of the same type, the MOSS field codes for these five strings might use F to begin the field and increment the remaining spaces. These point field codes would range from F001 to F004.

Each survey submitted to a MOSS-user must use their field code standards.

The export map file allows you to specify the beginning characters of the field code and to switch the auto-increment feature on or off.

Designate one of the following to be the base of the MOSS field code:

the Terramodel object name
the Terramodel layer the object is on
a replacement text string defined in the map file

Use the last two options on .DWG or .DXF files that have been imported because the objects in these files have no names.

Spot elevations, 3D survey observations of locations that have no feature, are conventionally handled as level strings with field codes starting with L* in MOSS. If the client requires spot elevations to be handled this way, then they should be surveyed appropriately for Terramodel. By keeping the naming convention, Terramodel can treat a set of points named L* as a series of discreet points and still export them as a level string, a convention that MOSS requires. If the Terramodel user names their spot levels with names that start with something other than L*, then these points should be renamed before the export process.

MOSS does not handle crossing level strings (breaklines). Unless a typical MOSS rectangular grid survey technique was adopted for creating spot level data, the exported data will probably generate some errors during import into Moss.

Terramodel point objects are exported as MOSS GENIO points. Terramodel points with * (undefined) elevation are exported with a MOSS level value of –999.

MOSS expects all single point features to have a field code that begins with the character P. Also note that Moss will not allow a string with just one point (i.e., MOSS would reject a single Point coded F).

Prefixing the F with a P can change the Points meaning in Moss.

Selected text strings are exported to MOSS Text Items. MOSS only supports text strings in a single orientation.

Terramodel straight line segments are exported as normal MOSS 3D strings (7703 080 cards).

Sets that contain arc segments can be exported as one of the following:

MOSS 3D strings with no curve fitting (7703 080 cards). Generate extra points along curved areas, if you desire.
MOSS 3D strings (200007703 080 cards). In this format, positive coordinates indicate curved information, and negative coordinates indicate straight line data.
MOSS 6D strings.

To invoke the curve fitting options in MOSS, the input GENIO file must be drawn with the 825 Draw option 2 set to DETA. This can be done via an Input Macro (see the Macro below) or specified in the Draw Options in the GENIO Display Plan with style set options within MOSS. Each feature within the style set that requires the curve fitting needs to have the 825,2=DETA setting.

Input Macro:

DRAW,FILENAME
803,7=100
825,2=DETA
999
DISPLAY

Plines without curves can be exported as MOSS 2D or 3D strings. If the pline has an elevation, the elevation can be associated with either. MOSS uses 3D strings with associated elevations to create Models.

Splined plines, such as contour lines, can be exported as MOSS 2D or 3D strings just like plines without curves.

Horizontal and Vertical Alignment plines are created out of specific geometric elements. Plines that are 2D and contains only straight lines, circular arcs, spiral (transition) curves, and parabolas (vertical curves) can be output as MOSS 12D strings.

MOSSOUT requires a map file that stores instructions to translate the Terramodel objects into MOSS entities. The export file is an ASCII text file that defines the translation parameters that Terramodel uses to create MOSS Field Codes and other related information. Refer to sample .MSX files supplied with Terramodel.

Comment lines must begin with a #.

The Feature Code line is a comma-delimited line with the following seven parameters. The order of these parameters is mandatory. The first field acts as a filter, delimiting the Terramodel objects that will use the parameters on that line. The second through fifth parameters designate the rules that Terramodel will use to create the MOSS string field code. The sixth and seventh parameters tell Terramodel how to assign elevations to exploded block elements.

Field Number	Field Name	Description
1	Field Applied to Terramodel Object Name	If the object name matches the filter, the rest of the line parameters are applied to objects during the export. DEFAULT is the filter applied to any Terramodel object without a name. The * character can be used as a wildcard for one or more characters. If a filter is not found, Terramodel displays a message that it could not map an object.
2	Use Terramodel Name	The number of characters in the Terramodel object name for the MOSS string code. Only one or two characters are typically designated so a unique number can be added using the Auto Increment feature. Acceptable values are: 0 – Do not use Terramodel name for MOSS string code. (Set this field to 0 if using the Terramodel layer for the MOSS string code.) 1-8 – Number of characters to use for MOSS string code. Characters 1-4 are used for string code. Characters 5-8 are used for sub-field string code.
3	Use Terramodel Layer	The number of characters in the Terramodel object name for the MOSS string code. Only one or two characters are typically designated so a unique number can be added using the Auto Increment feature. Acceptable values are: 0 – Do not use Terramodel name for MOSS string code. (Set this field to 0 if using the Terramodel layer for the MOSS string code.) 1-8 – Number of characters to use for MOSS string code. Characters 1-4 are used for string code. Characters 5-8 are used for sub-field string code.
4	Use String	String to use for the MOSS string code. This field is ignored when you use the Terramodel object name or layer to create the MOSS string code.
5	Auto Increment	ON – For each new MOSS element, create an incremented variable. The variable increments from 0 … 9, A … Z, then 10 … 1Z, etc. This incremented value is appended to the MOSS string code, right-justified and zero-filled to 3 spaces. (The leading fourth space must come from the Fixedstring, the Terramodel name or the Terramodel layer.) OFF – No increment variable is created for the MOSS string code. Auto Increment does not apply to the subfield string codes.
6	Block Element Elevation	NONE – Do not assign the exploded block elements an elevation. In MOSS, use –999 Null Level for the elevation. INSERT – Assign the elevation of the block insertion point to each exploded block element. MODEL – Calculate the elevation of the insertion point on a specific DTM layer and assign this elevation to each exploded block element.
7	Block Elevation DTM Layer	If you specify MODEL in the previous field, enter a Terramodel DTM layer to interpolate elevations.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
23/03/23	ADD 9.7 353	File\|Misc. Export\|Moss GENIO File\|Misc. Import/Export\|Moss Export	Secured	FC M

MOSSTRI

Import triangles from Moss GENIO data within a clipping boundary.

You have options to create sets for triangle sides and to separate models into layers.

If the GENIO file includes any objects other than DTM triangles, or you don't need to clip the triangles during the import, use MOSSIN.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MOVE

Move selected objects by the difference between a pair of entered X,Y (or X,Y,Z if 3D is ticked) coordinates.

If you only have the difference in X,Y, enter 0,0 in From.

To move objects from one layer to another, use RELAYER. To move objects from one View to another, use REVIEW or GCREVIEW.

To move a set, make sure you select the set and the points used to define the set.

If Dragging is ON in SYSTEM, objects are visible as you move them. If Drag Text Quick is ON in DISPLAYSET, text is displayed as text boxes only during the move.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Move	Field Data Module	35

MOVEPAD

Create batters from a pad DTM to the current DTM and calculate cut and fill quantities.

Project batters up or down from the selected set (around the outside of the pad DTM) to meet the current DTM layer.

As you shift pad layer by mouse using From and To locations, or a new elevation for the whole pad layer, MOVEPAD recomputes and displays cut and fill quantities in the message scroll.

To shift the elevation by increments, use the dPad toolbox to select the set with MOVEPAD movepad toolbar button , enter the shift increment with PADSHIFT padshift toolbar button then shift the pad up with PADUP padup toolbar buttton or down with and PADDOWN paddown toolbar button .

The new batter points are given the same name as the layer. These points can be deleted by name the next time MOVEPAD is run. Do not use the layer name for any other point on a DTM layer.

The slope settings are defined by DESIGNSET or EDIT.
If there is no current DTM layer, set one first with DTMCH.
You select a set, which selects the pad layer.
Select one set, with the one cut slope and one fill slope.
The selected set must be a valid DTM edge.
The batters must project to intersect the current DTM layer.
If you nominate a new elevation, the elevations of all points on the pad layer are replaced resulting in a horizontal pad.
If your pad layer includes multiple elevations such as ramps, kerbs, crossfalls or steps, do not enter an elevation.
Shrink and swell factors are not applied.

Most of these limitations can be overcome using CUTFILL instead.

The layer is derived from column 4 in the data file.

The name/description is from the grid row and column numbers in dat file columns 4 and 5.

Columns 6, 7 and 8 are easting, northing and elevation.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MTL

Move the location of a text leader line.

Select a text object and specify a new leader line point location.

Specify the leader line styles, linetypes and gap.

Turn Auto TAB ON, to select another text object by default. Turn OFF, to keep moving the location for the same text object.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Metz

MULTCODE

Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes listed in a selected AutoDraft report.

AUTODRAFT compares the characters in a point name, from the beginning to the first space, with the field codes defined in an AutoDraft Configuration file (.ADC). If the first few of those characters match a field code, AutoDraft strings and labels the point according to the code. Also, if the first character after a space matches the multi-code separator character defined in the .ADC, and the following characters match a field code, the point is also strung and labelled according to that other field code.

For example, a multi-code character of + enables a point double-coded with the name "FENC01 +PATH02" to represent both the end of a fence and also the edge of a path.

Some other applications, such as Trimble Business Center and Trimble Survey Controller, instead of using a multi-code separator, groups of characters following a space are considered field codes if also found in the table of field codes. If the survey has been coded this way, for AutoDraft to string and label the points correctly, the multi-code separator character must be first prefixed to these field codes using MULTCODE.

In AUTODRAFT
- Open the AutoDraft Configuration File using Edit
- In Global Settings, check the Multiple field code separator character
- In Feature Definitions, check the field codes
- From the Reports menu, select Full
In P3Pad
- Save the report as a text document
Start a new project
Import a survey which has been multi-coded with spaces only instead of separator characters
In MULTCODE
- Select the points
- Select the report text file
- Add Multi Code Characters
In AUTODRAFT
- Select the points
- Select the .ADC file

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MULTICOPY

Copy selected objects to a location, as in COPY, and continue to copy the same objects by selecting more locations.

To copy a group of points and shift their point numbers, first assign a starting point number in POINTSET.

To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, click OK without specifying the From and To locations.

Tick Lay to place objects on current layer, otherwise place on original layer.

To enable entry of X, Y and Z into From and To coordinates, select 3d.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|MultiCopy	Field Data Module

MultilayerDTM

Specify a layer to be either a normal layer or the base layer for a DTM defined by points and sets on multiple layers.

For most situations, copying objects to dedicated DTM layers by GCCOPY is much better then setting up MultiLayerDTMs.

Create the component layers with objects to be included (e.g. ABCD 1, ABCD 2, etc.).
Create a new layer to use for the base (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD).
GCCOPY at least three DTM points from any of the component layers into the base layer.
Create a layer list with the same name as the base layer (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD).
Include the component layers (e.g. ABCD 1, ABCD 2, etc.) in the layer list (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD).
Run MULTILAYERDTM command.
Select the base layer (e.g. DTM BASE ABCD).
OK
Use DTMINFO on all points in Plan View to confirm which layers are included.
Use DTM BASE ABCD as a DTM layer in any command that uses a DTM.

If you select a layer to be a base layer that does not already have a layer list with the same name, LLISTSET opens for you to define the layer list.
The objects on the base layer and component layers collectively define a single multilayer DTM.
The layer list must have same name as the base layer.
A layer that is a component of one multilayer DTM cannot be a component of another multilayer DTM.
A layer that is a component of a multilayer DTM cannot form a DTM on its own.
To use component layers as stand-alone DTM layers, use MULTILAYERDTM to change the base layer into a normal layer.
The base layer must contain at least three contourable points.
Dead regions are not honoured.
Commands do not indicate whether or not selected layers are base or component layers of a multilayer DTM. For example, if CONTOUR fails and reports that your DTM layer has less than three 3D points, yet points on that layer have elevations and are contourable, that layer might be a component of a Multilayer DTM.
Use DTMINFO to report whether any points are on "Multi DTM" (base) layers or "Part Multi" (component) layers.
Use EDIT or GC53 to report and modify whether points are contourable.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08		DTM\|Define multilayer DTM	Field Data Module	43

MULTIOFF

Create a pline or set, or segment of a pline or set, at a horizontal and vertical offset and then prompt to create new objects at the previous offsets.

Obj:: Select a set or pline. The initial default object is the first segment of any active alignment.
Off:: Enter a horizontal offset or use the mouse to enter a horizontal offset and direction.
Right/Left:: Use the mouse to indicate the direction in which the new object is to be created.
Elev Diff:: Enter a positive or negative value to be added to elevations of the new objects.
Pline: Create a pline.
Set: Create a set.
Fixed radius: For plines with arcs, fix radii and adjust offsets, or fix offsets and adjust radii.
Seg only: Offset from the selected segment only or from the whole pline or set.
OK: Create a new pline or set, offset from the pline or set in the specified direction by the absolute value of the entered offset, and select that new pline or set to be the object from which the next pline or set is to be offset. The new elevations are the elevations of the current object plus any elevation difference. If a set is offset from a pline, or vice versa, the elevation is from the start of the object or segment.
Cancel: Stop creating new objects and close the command.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	71

MULTIPIN

Import Trimble MultiPlane RTK Survey or Trimble FieldLevel .XML data, transform the coordinates from the multiplane coordinate system to your specified coordinate system.

Map Settings: Select the new coordinate system for the benchmark (GCCOORD)
File: Browse to select a .TXT or .XML input file
Txt File Feet or Txt File Metres: If TXT file, specify the data units
Into Layer: Select layer for Survey points
Topo Pts into Layer: If XML file, select layer for Topo Pts
Import: Import the points from the file
Cancel: Cancel without importing points

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

MVIEW

Create dynaviews of selected plotboxes in the selected view.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update

MXVALIN

Import a vertical alignment from .MX report from Moss.

The .MX report is not very precise so neither are the resulting coordinates. Use MOSSIN to import a GENIO file instead where possible.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

NAME

Modify the names of selected objects to a single name of up to 80 characters.

Terramodel sometimes refers to the name as the Description.

Modifying the names of blocks or texts will change their appearance.

Names are case-sensitive.

When selecting objects by Name in any command, wildcards can be used. ? specifies a single character. * specifies any number of characters.

Specify the layer for objects with no name.

The selected objects may include text and blocks. Note that the name of a text object is the text.

See also LAY2NAME, GCLAYCOL, PTLAYCOL, GCMAPOUT and DXFCHANG.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

NAMELOTS

Change lot names to match lot number text.

Change the names of selected sets to match the selected text object nearest the centroid of each closed set.

Each text object is used no more than one time.

Change the case of names of selected objects to Upper, Lower, Sentence or Title.

Any objects can be selected, including points, sets, plines, text, blocks, dynaviews and tables, so be careful.

Upper: CHANGE TO UPPER CASE ALL LETTERS
Lower: change to lower case all letters
Sentence: Change to upper case the first character and change to lower case all other characters.
Title: Change to Uppercase the Initial Letters of the First Word and Words Between Spaces and Change to Lowercase These Common Short Words Without Punctuation: an of or a the is on but for and in

Rename each point in selected sets to match the name of the set.

Where the set has no name, the points will have no name.

See also NAMESETS to rename sets and points blank with blank names.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

NAMERP

Rename each selected set which has a blank name to match the name of the first named point in the set, and rename points with blank names to match the names of the sets.

Sets

Select sets

Number of characters used from Point name

Specify the number of characters from the start of each point name to be considered.

Change blank Pt names names to Set names.

Optionally, where the set point has no name, modify the name of the point to match the name of the set.

Modify names of sets, and points if specified.

Cancel

Cancel without modifying names.

NAMESETS can be useful with MOSS GENIO conversions.

See also NAMEPTS to rename points to match set names.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

NEW

Open the prototype project, then save the project with a new name and location.

Create a new Terramodel project (.PRO), Roadline alignment (.ALN), Roadline 3D alignment (.RLN) or Multiplane project (.MP2).

The new Terramodel project is built on the prototype project specified in SYSTEM, which controls the initial measurement units, conversion factors, layers and objects of the new project.

Select type .ALN or .RLN to open the P29 Roadline or P39 Roadline 3D editor for data entry. To start a new .MP2 MultiPlane project, first install MultiPlane.

See also OPEN, SAVEAS, PCOPY and REFFILE.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|New Toolbar button	Field Data Module	1

NEWTEMPS

Copy a selected design or subgrade template in a roadway to a specified station | chainage.

See also GCTPLATE, COPYTEMP and Copy button in TMANAGER.

TML date			Source	GC
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $200	413

NEXTVIEW

NEXTVIEW is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY NEXTVIEW which executes Control-F6 on the keyboard.

Macro date		Menu	Source
Macro		File\|Macro\|Play\|nextview	User-definable

NFS

Modify the name of selected points to match the station | chainage of a selected horizontal alignment.

See also GC02 to change or append the name by chainage, offset or Hal points.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update	176

NODE

Change the properties of selected pipe node point.

Select pipe node

Select a set in the plan view that represents a pipe or, after completing PIPEDRAW, select any part of the node in the profile view, to open the Node Design Entry Table dialog box, to enter the properties for the node at the nearest point on the pipe.

Pipe number

The pipe number is the record number of the set that is attached to the node. More than one set can drain into the same node, although only one set can leave a node.

Node/Manhole number

The number of nodes up to this one from the discharge end of the branch.

Node properties

Name

Enter a name (up to 16-characters) to the node for identification.

Shape/ material

Select the shape and type of material for the node from the list of circular and rectangular node in the ASCII file TMNODE.TBL.

Size

Select the node size from the TMNODE.SIZ ASCII file for the node you specified in the Node Shape/Material prompt above.

Type

Select the type of node from:

Manhole: which is drawn with a point at the top
Headwall: which is drawn with a "foot"
Transition: which is drawn as a single vertical line. Transition nodes are also calculated differently. Pipe and inlet losses are ignored, and the velocity of the node is assumed to be the same as the velocity in the downstream pipe. Headloss is calculated based on the node coefficient, if any, that you specify. Transition types can be used to model changes in grade and trapezoidal channels that have no accompanying structures.
Box: which is drawn as a rectangle

Headloss coefficient

Enter a coeficient for additional head loss at a node. Use the pipe inlet and outlet coefficients for node head losses at all node types (keeping this value at zero) except for transition nodes.

Node elevation

Inlet: Enter an elevation for the top of the node. The default elevation is the elevation of the inlet point.
Floor: Enter the inside floor elevation of the node. This value can be below the invert of the outgoing pipe, but never above the invert of the incoming pipe. The node floor elevation also affects the node water surface calculations.

Flow rate properties

Drainage area: Enter the area (in acres or hectares) that contributes to the pipe flow at the node for the Q=CIA flow computation method.
Rainfall intensity: Enter storm intensity in inches per hour or mm per hour, or use PIPESOLV to update automatically the intensity and the "Discharge Into Node" for PIPECALQ.
C/CN factor: Enter the dimensionless ground cover (C) factor used by the Q=CIA flow computation method.
Basin time of concentration: Enter the time of concentration for the basin draining to this node used to compute the intensity (I) for the Q=CIA flow computation method.
Discharge (Q) into node: Enter the flow into the node for use with the Q Summation flow computation method, which sums the Q values of all of the upstream nodes to determine the total Q in a pipe, or compute this discharge automatically when you use the Q=CIA computation method. Enter cubic feet per second (cfs) when measurement units are feet or litres per second when units are meters.

Tailwater properties

Elevation: Enter the water surface elevation at the most downstream node in a system. For all other nodes, Terramodel calculates and updates the water surface elevation as needed.
Velocity: Enter the velocity at the most downstream node in a system. For all other nodes, Terramodel calculates and updates the velocities as needed. Enter the value in feet per second when measurement units are feet and metres per second when set to metres.

Prev | Next

Select the Previous or Next node

OK

Update the properties of the node

Cancel

Close the entry table without accepting any changes

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	UG 392	Pipe\|Node properties	Secured	DGE 5

NPSCHART

Create a table of plines and text which list properties of a selected set or pline.

The columns headings are chainage, northing, easting, radius, delta, length, tangent and degree of curvature.

Optionally, enter a table heading.

Manage data in a Nikon AP700 or AP800 database.

NS-95 is a DOS utility from Nikon that can work with AP700 and AP800 survey jobs on 16-bit and 32-bit Windows computers only. NS-95 will report an error on 64-bit Windows.

Geocomp Update N includes NS-95 version 2.20.

Open or create a Terramodel project in C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\. To use any other valid DOS directory, first copy NS95.EXE and NS95.CFG to that directory.

Enter NS95 at the Terramodel command line or the Windows command prompt C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP> (CMD).

The initial menu options are:

[J]ob Manager
[A]dd Coordinates
[I]mport Coordinates
[E]xport File Data
[S]ettings
[C]ode & Parameter Files

Within each option, the functions shown on the bottom line are selected by function keys. For example, within the Job Manager press the F1 key for Create, F2 for Copy, etc. This replicates the behaviour of the Nikon instrument software. Use the Escape key to close a menu.

The Settings (for Units, etc) are saved in NS95.CFG.

An NS95 job consists of a number of database files. These typically have extensions .DBC, .DCI, .DII, .DPI and .DTI. These jobs are typically created on PCMCIA cards by Nikon DTM 700 and 800 series total stations.

To get a survey job out of the database, either download the data from the instrument in Nikon ASCII Raw data format, or use NS95 to Export in [N]ikon v2.00 Raw File format.

To import the raw data into Terramodel, use the Geocomp Nikon Raw _i import script (IMPORT). Alternatively, use the Nikon script which communicates using the Remote Device Manager.

NS95 can also be operated using command line parameters from Windows command prompt or Terramodel.

Function	Switch	Parameters
Create AP800 job	/jcr	jobname jobdesc jobclient jobcomment
Create AP700 job	/jc7	jobname jobdesc jobclient jobcomment
Copy job	/jcp	fromjob tojob
Move job	/jmv	fromjob tojob
Delete job	/jdl	jobname
Add point to job	/jad	jobname ptnum id north east elevation code
NS95 settings	/res	dmode amode hz coord tmode pmode sl cr scale crc azim
Import from text	/iac	jobname filename
Import civilsoft	/ics	jobname filename
Import order	/ior	importorder
Export coordinates	/eac	jobname filename
Export Civilsoft	/ecs	jobname filename
Export DXF	/edx	jobname filename
Export Nikon v1.0	/en7	jobname filename
Export Nikon v2.0	/enr	jobname filename
Export SDR2x	/esd	jobname filename
Export TDS	/etd	jobname filename
Export Landsoft	/els	jobname filename
Prepare code file	/cod	textfile codefile

Install Terramodel on 32-bit Windows XP
Obtain a copy of NS95.EXE from your Nikon survey instrument supplier
Create a valid DOS (up to 8-character) data directory
Copy NS95.EXE (and NS95.CFG if you have one) into the DOS data directory, or add the location of NS95.EXE to the DOS path
Check that NS95.EXE runs from the command line in that DOS directory
In Terramodel, create an ALIAS called NS95 with the command EXEC and the argument NS95
Set the Terramodel data directory to the NS95 data directory by opening or creating a project in that directory

Exe date	Guide		Source	GC
24/01/01	Nikon NS-95 2.0 Instruction Manual (NS95_V20.pdf)		Geocomp Update Your Nikon dealer	NS95

NSWSCIMS

Import survey mark points from New South Wales Survey Control Information Management System (NSW SCIMS) report in a CSV file format.

Import a file of elevation differences (N-values) to be used to transform New Zealand Geoid 2016 elevations to or from New Zealand Vertical Datum 2016.

The N-values are in a one-minute grid of Latitude and Longitude.

Select a suitable boundary to limit the number of imported points. For example, importing New_Zealand_Quasigeoid_2016 with no boundary covers the whole country. At the other extreme, selecting a boundary that is too small will import insufficient grid points to interpolate N-values over your whole site.

Obtain a suitable NZGeoid .SID file containing N-Values.
In Terramodel,
1. Start a NEW project.
2. Import any clipping boundaries.
3. Select or create an empty current layer with a suitable name like N-VALUES 2016.
4. Run NZGEOID to import N-values from the file.
5. Use TMXOUT to export the clipped N-Value grid to .TMX for later use.

Change: Select a geodetic coordinate system.
For Bdy:: Select a limiting boundary in that coordinate system.
Transform Lat. Long into East, North: Transform the grid into Eastings and Northings in that coordinate system if for adjusting elevations. Do not transform if for adjusting distances.
Import N values into Current Layer: Import points from the file that fall within the boundary.
Cancel: Cancel.

Download NZGeoid2016 .SID files from Land Information NZ (12MB).

AUSEOID: Import Australian N-values
GC54: Correct elevations
GC29UTM: Measure distances
TRAVUTM: Traverse
GCSCANIN: Import lidar

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

OBJREG

Group objects drawn on a sheet to a dynaview of sheet.

Modify (register) the group property of objects within a sheet, that has been previously created by PLANSET. All objects created within a sheet must be grouped with that sheet to allow the objects to be manipulated as a part of that sheet, as the sheets are moved around within the plan set or deleted.

Objects can be grouped with the overall sheet, or with a particular dynaview located within a sheet. An object grouped with the overall sheet is moved with that sheet as the sheet is moved within the plan set, such as when another sheet is inserted or deleted ahead of it in the sheet queue. Objects grouped with the overall sheet are not associated with any particular dynaview and therefore are not associated with a particular alignment. Text of a general note is an example of an object to associate with the overall sheet.

An object grouped with a specific dynaview is manipulated with that dynaview. For example, when two sheets are combined to place multiple alignments on a sheet, the objects grouped with the dynaviews that are moved to the other sheet are moved along with them. Objects can be grouped to a plan view dynaview so that as it is rotated or moved within the sheet, those objects are rotated and moved with it. A profile view dynaview can be moved in this manner, but not rotated.

Objs

Select the objects to be grouped.

Dynaview

Dynaview: Select the dynaview to which you wish to group the objects.
Attached: Attached objects are always rotated or moved with the dynaview to which they are grouped. Objects representing plan features and callouts labeling them, are examples of attached objects.
Associated: Associated objects are grouped with a dynaview, but not attached to it. As you move a view, you can choose whether or not to move associated objects with it. Associated objects are never rotated with a plan view. Certain labels, such as those that label the plan view, its alignment name or scale, are perhaps intended to be horizontal. By grouping them to the dynaview as associated objects, they will not be affected by the plan view rotation.
OK: Modify the group of selected objects and the dynaview.
Cancel: Cancel changes to groups.

Sheet

Group the selected objects with the overall sheet in which they lie, as opposed to with a particular dynaview. Objects can be selected from multiple sheets, when registering them to the overall sheet.

Cancel

Cancel the command

One group number is associated with each sheet. Register objects of a general nature, not associated with a particular plan or profile dynaview. After selecting the objects, click on the Sheet button to assign them to the sheet in which they lie. Since the program determines the appropriate sheet, you may include items from multiple sheets when grouping to a sheet. There are four group numbers associated with a plan or profile dynaview.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 357	Draft\|ASAP-Plan Set\|Object registration	Field Data Module

OBJSNAP

Enable running snap modes, and their order of precedence.

Running snaps help locate and place particular objects. As you try to locate any object or location, Terramodel tries to find the first snap first within the cursor aperture, then if not found, the second, and so on.

The available running snaps are Point, Mid, End, Gravity, Center, Insert, Nearest and Free.

The most common order of running snaps is Point, End and then Free; which first looks for a point, then the end of a set or pline, then finally any location at all.

The running snap modes are always active, but can be temporarily overridden in comands that locate objects.

Change the order of precedence by dragging snap modes to different positions in the Order box. The top position has the highest precedence.

Include Free to enable selection by Window. Any mode in the list after Free is never considered. If be sure of selecting an object instead of a location, temporarily remove Free. Always restore your preferred running snaps before finishing a Terramodel session, otherwise in your next session commands can mysteriously appear to not function or act in an undesirable manner.

Report the vertical difference between sets where they cross.

If the sets cross more than once, report at the closest intersection to the location used to select the first set.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

OFF

Turn off selected objects in any view.

Selected objects can be turned off regardless of your SEARCH settings.

To turn the objects back on, use ON to select them the same way, or by Previous if you haven't selected anything else. Select by View or use ONALL to turn everything on. You won't be able to select by Window or Crossing.

To make a whole layer invisible, without turning the objects on or off, use LAYERSET. To hide a set segment, use HIDE.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|On/Off\|Objects off Modify\|Object off	Field Data Module	48

OFFALL

Turn off all objects in selected views. The default view is the current view. Objects are turned off even for types not searchable according to SEARCH settings.

To turn objects on, use ON or ONALL.

ON/OFF is independent of LAYERSET visibility. For an object to be displayed, it must be both ON and on a visible layer.

TML date		Menu		GC
08/02/22		Modify\|On/Off\|All off		Geocomp Update or $250	47

OFFELEV

Create pline or set, or segment of pline or set, at an offset from a pline or set.

Pick the set, side, offset and elevation difference.

Specify multiple sets from which to offset and whether to create them on the left, right or both sides.

Create set offset from a selected set. The default set is the set you just created.

Create a set at horizonal and vertical perpendicular offset from a selected set.

A postive vertical perpendicular offset results in a point above the set in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal slope of the set.

Sets: Select sets from which to offset.
Horizontal Offset: Enter a horizontal offset.
Vertical perpendicular offset: Enter a vertical perpendicular offset.
New layer: Select the layer for the new points and sets.
OK: Create the new points and sets at the offsets on the new layer.
Cancel: Cancel.

TML date			Source
11/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

OFFSEG

Create pline or set, or segment of pline or set, at an offset from a pline or set.

See also MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFSETDIST, which offsets from alignments, OFFELEV, which also offsets vertically, OFFELEVM, which also offsets vertically from multiple sets, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDESLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Edit\|Offset segment	Field Data Module	71

OFFSETDIST

Create pline or set offset from a pline or set alignment.

Any spirals are replaced with chords.

See also GCHALOFF, which creates plines at offset alignments, MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFELEVM, which offsets from multiple sets, OFFSEG, offsets from a segment, OFFELEV, which also offsets vertically from one set, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDESLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Offset distance	Field Data Module	71

OFFSETPOINT

Create a pline or set at the horizontal offset of a location from an alignment.

Any spirals are replaced with chords.

See also VARIOFF, which offsets through locations at an interval, MULTIOFF, which offsets from the new line, OFFELEVM, which offsets from multiple sets, OFFSEG, offsets from a segment, OFFELEV, which also offsets vertically from one set, GCOFFELV, which also offsets vertically, SIDESLOPE, which can also create batters, and GC99 which uses a table of offsets.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Offset point	Field Data Module	6

OFLINES

Report the number of points, plines, text, sets, tables, attributes, dynaviews, and blocks in the Plan, Profile, Sheet, XSect, Super, View6, View7 and View8 views.

Only used object types and populated views are listed.

If view names with spaces are not displayed correctly, use COUNT or OLIST2.

Report to P3Pad the number of points, plines, text, sets, tables, attributes, dynaviews, and blocks in the Plan, Profile, Sheet, XSect, Super, View6, View7 and View8 views.

Only used object types and populated views are listed.

See also OLIST, COUNT, LAYINFO, DTMINFO and LIST.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Field Data Module

Turn on (make visible) selected objects in any view.

Objects can be selected regardless of SEARCH settings.

To turn selected objects off, use OFF or OFFALL.

To turn the same objects back on, before you select anything else, select by Previous. You won't be able to select them by Window or Crossing.

To turn everything on, select by View or use ONALL.

To make a whole layer visible, without turning the objects on or off, use LAYERSET. To reveal a hidden set segment, use REVEAL.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|On/Off\|Objects on Modify\|Object on	Field Data Module	48

ONALL

Turn on all objects in selected view modes.

The default view mode is the current view. Select a view mode or All Views, and then Turn Objects On.

Objects are turned on even for types not searchable according to SEARCH settings and objects not selectable or not visible by LAYERSET.

To turn objects off, use OFF or OFFALL.

ON/OFF is independent of LAYERSET visibility. For an object to be displayed, it must be both ON and on a visible layer.

TML date		Menu		GC
08/02/22		Modify\|On/Off\|All on		Geocomp Update or $250	47

ONGRP

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
08/02/22	ongrp.txt		Wendell	48

OPEN

Close any open project, then open a nominated pre-existing Terramodel, Roadline or Multiplane project.

The Info button allows you to interrogate a project file before you open it. The Info includes file size, date last modified, number of objects, database version, largest point number, largest record number and number of alpha points.

Objects in Terramodel .PRO files can also be imported by IMPORT and copied by PCOPY.

.PRO files exported from Trimble Business Center are built on C:\Program files\Trimble\Trimble Business Center\tmodel.pro which determines the measurement units and so on.

Select type .ALN to open the alignment in P29 Roadline editor. Select .RLN to open a 3D alignment in P39 Roadline 3D editor. To open an .MP2 MultiPlane project, first install MultiPlane.

See also NEW, SAVEAS, PCOPY and REFFILE.

If a network location starts with //, to make it easy to find, map it to a drive letter, (e.g. X:). If mapped drives are hidden from Terramodel, to reveal these mapped drives, open C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\EnableLinkedConnections.reg to update Windows Registry. (Your IT dept might need to allow that).

Terramodel is configured by a different initialisation file, whether you open Terramodel first then use OPEN to open a project, or you open a .PRO file from Windows which then starts Terramodel. For details, refer to Location of TMODWIN.INI under EDITINI.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|Open Toolbar button	Field Data Module	1

ORDERFORM

Generate report showing the current serial number, purchase code and modules in an email in your default email client program.

You will only need this report if requested by your Trimble dealer. Manually change the To: email address to that specified by your Trimble dealer before sending the email.

Close the email dialog to return to Terramodel.

OrderForm is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ORDERFORM&#8203EMAIL which runs ABOUT|Products...|Order Form.

If this macro does not run because the key does not have the CAD module, use ABOUT.

If this macro does not create an email, use ORDERPRINT.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Help\|About\|Products\|Order form\|E-mail File\|Macro\|Play\|orderformemail	User-definable

ORDERPRINT

Print a report showing the current serial number, purchase code and modules to your default Windows printer.

You will only need this report if requested by your Trimble dealer. If your default is a paper printer, print then fax or scan and email as specified by your Trimble dealer. If your default is a PDF or TXT printer driver, email that report. .PDF is preferred.

If no report appears, change your default Windows printer.

OrderPrint is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ORDERFORMPRINT.

If this macro does not run because the key does not have the CAD module, use ABOUT.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Help\|About\|Products\|Order form\|Print File\|Macro\|Play\|orderformprint	User-definable

OVALITY

Create a circular pline around a centre location with radius equal to the average distance from the centre location.

The report shows centre location, average radius and, for each point, the point number, easting, northing and offset from circle.

Make non-contourable all points on the selected layer, that are below any closed triangular set on the same layer, and modify the colour.

Photogrammetry and solid modelling software can create 3D meshes of closed triangles with overhangs. Such meshes have overlapping breaklines and therefore form an incorrect DTM. By removing from the model those points under triangular sets, the resulting DTM approximates the uppermost surface.

Add points on a grid at the bottom of the cliff face for those triangles that partially overlap.

To use OVERHANG,

Import or copy the points and sets into a single layer
Do NOT extract contours, quick profiles or 3D views
Run OVERHANG from the command line
Select the layer
Add grid points if needed
Make underhang points non-contourable
You may then want to form DTMs, create 3D views, delete points or sets, 3DFILTER, and or so on.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

OVERWALL

Copy points near Xlines to Xsect view, join with sets and label each chainage.

HAL:: Select a horizontal alignment with Xlines
Points:: Select points in Plan view
Sect Tol:: Enter a maximum chainage difference from Xlines
Max Join Dist:: Enter the maximum length for new segments
Create Blocks: Create blocks in XSect view

Create or edit a Roadline .ALN file.

.ALN alignment files are in Geodimeter 2D Roadline format.

.ALN files also can be opened and edited by SEGEDIT, NEW and OPEN.

Import .ALN files into Terramodel, using an IMPORT script defined by IMPORTSMGR with source file format Roadline (.aln). .ALN files can also be exported using a similar script.

See also GCRLNOUT, P39, NEW, OPEN and GST.

P29 emulates Program 29 in Geodimeter instruments.

See also P39 for 3D Roadline alignments.

Command date	Guide		Source
12/03/09	HELPTM		Field Data Module

P39

Create or edit a 3D Roadline alignment in Geodimeter (.RLN) format.

The Roadline 3D Editor opens a dialog of 3D roadway geometric data from a HAL, VAL and a typical section from a pline in the xsect view. This data can then be manually edited or added to in a series of tables.

RLN files can imported, exported and uploaded using import and export scripts using Roadline 3D (.rln) format.

P39 emulates Program 39 in Geodimeter instruments.

See also GCRLNOUT, P29, NEW, OPEN and GST.

Command date	Guide		Source
12/03/09	P39_doc1		Field Data Module

PAD

Create a rectangular set of four segments joining points located by opposite corners with a single specified elevation.

Create DTM from sets defining lots and text inside each lot.

See also LOTJOIN, GCTRACE, PAD and GCPAD.

			Source
			Hamilton

PADDOWN

Subtract an increment specified by PADSHIFT to the elevation of all points in the pad set specified by MOVEPAD.

PADDOWN uses a command with aliases assigned to pad down toolbar button in the dPAD toolbox in the Geocomp.ws workspace.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Toolbox	Geocomp Update or $250

PADSHIFT

To raise or lower a pad during MOVEPAD without setting all elevations to the same value:

Open the dPAD toolbox in the geocomp.ws workspace.
Set the PADSHIFT project variable using .
Click on the PADUP or PADDOWN button to raise or lower the pad.
Recreate the batters using the MOVEPAD button.

The default elevation increment is 0.5.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Toolbox	Geocomp Update or $250

PADUP

Add an increment specified by PADSHIFT to the elevation of all points in the pad set specified by MOVEPAD.

PADUP uses a command with aliases assigned to pad up toolbar button in the dPAD toolbox in the Geocomp.ws workspace.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Toolbox	Geocomp Update or $250

PALETTE

Select the current palette and colourmap to control the displayed colours of objects.

The palette is a table of Red, Green and Blue (RBG) colour index triplets, and the colourmap is a table relating these triplets to colour numbers.

PALETTE displays the 255 object colours, in ranges of 64, defined by the current palette and colourmap. To see the effect of a new palette or colourmap on objects in a project, click OK then refresh the display. Changes to palettes and colourmaps apply to all projects for a user on a computer.

The display colour of each object is determined by mapping the colour number to the palette triplet number, then finding the RGB colour of that triplet.

Palette triplets are numbered from 0 to a maximum of 63. Palettes with less triplets, repeat until 63. Colormaps relate these triplets to colour numbers from 0 to 255. Colour number 0 is exceptional: in the current colourmap, colour 0 defines the default background colour; objects of colour 0 are displayed in their layer colour. Colourmap maps typically map colour 0 to palette triplet 0.

The RGB components range from darkest (0) to brightest (255). Blacks, greys and whites are defined by three identical values. Colours are defined by any other permutation.

For example, if colour 5 is mapped to palette triplet 6, and triplet 6 has RGB value of 0,0,255, objects with colour 5 are displayed in blue.

The default background colour is usually displayed in black or white because that colour number is usually 0, colourmap value 0 usually maps to triplet 0, and triplet 0 is usually 0,0,0 or 255,255,255.

Use EDITINI to select background, cursor and highlight colours. Choice of colours can be a matter of preference or accessibility.

Some colours are swapped automatically to make them easier to see. For example, objects with 0,0,0 (black) triplets only display as black if the background is white. Otherwise, they display as white. Objects with the same colour number as the background colour are displayed in the default background colour.

PALETTE always displays the background colour as colour 0 even when another colour has been selected. For example, if the default background colour is black, and the background colour has been changed to a blue colour number, in the PALETTE dialog, colour 0 is shown as blue, and the otherwise blue colour, as black.

The palettes and colourmaps in PALETTE are read from TMODWIN.INI. To edit or create palettes or colormaps, use EDITINI to save a copy of TMODWIN.INI to a location for editing, such as Documents, then use a text editor to open the INI file. Copy the relevant section with a different name, make your changes, use EDITINI again to "Show Old Ini File" and import just the changed sections by name. Do not use spaces in palette names.

To control colours on plots, see PLOTSET and CAROUSEL.

To remove a palette or colourmap, use EDITINI to import an empty palette or colourmap with the same name.

If the palette size is less than 64 or the colormap size is less than 256, the colours repeat from 1. If any RGB triplet is not defined for a palette, the colour is substituted with the colour from the repeating 20-colour default Windows palette.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|System configuration\|Palette+Colormap... File\|System configuration\|Palette+Colourmap... Settings\|Palette+Colormap	Field Data Module

PAN

Move a location on a view to another cursor position using the mouse.

Also pan by Control P, holding down the mouse wheel or clicking on a the VPAN toolbox button.

Create a pline approximating a parabola by entering values for the variables for the parabolic equation:

y = A - (x ^ Exp) / B

Origin

Locate the origin.

A

Enter the A constant.

B

Enter the B coefficient.

Exp

Enter the exponent.

Settings

Range of x

1000 - [ ] = xmin: Enter the minimum value of x.
1000 + [ ] = xmax: Enter the maximum value of x.

Valid range of y

1000 - [ ] = ymin: Enter the minimum value of y.
1000 + [ ] = ymax: Enter the maximum value of y.

Number of increments

Enter the number of increments the pline will be divided into for the total length between xmin and xmax.

Bearing

Enter a bearing to rotate about the origin.

Create parking bays or stalls.

Stalls with angles less than 180 degrees are created on the left side (looking from the selected end of the segment). Stalls with angles greater than 180 are created on the right. For example, to place 45-degree angled bays on the left hand-side of a road where you drive on the left, enter an angle of 135.

For parallel parking, use an angle of 90 and reverse the dimensions of length and width.

Select line segment

Select one segment of a set or pline.

Attributes

Parking stall length: Enter the length of the stall.
Parking stall width: Enter a stall width measured along the line segment.
Parking stall angle: Enter the angle of the stall side lines measured from the selected segment.
Average remainder: Create an even number of stalls, or create each stall at the width specified.
Place backline in stall: Create a pline at the back edge of each stall.

Create

Create the plines.

Close

Close.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 626	Cogo\|Create parking stripes	Field Data Module

PCOPY

Copy selected objects from a reference project into the active project.

The source project can be a reference project, or the master project, if that is not the active project.

PCOPY, in combination with reference files, provides an alternative to TMXOUT and TMXIN. PCOPY transfers more information than via .TMX, such as linetype definitions.

Project: Select a reference file by the prefix defined in Reference File Manager (REFFILE). By default, they are integers.
Objs: Select the objects to copy.
OK
: Copy the selected objects into the active project.
Cancel: Cancel the copy

The original objects remain within the source file. As an object is copied into the active project, any attributes assigned to that object are maintained, and those attribute definitions are created within the active project.

Object Layer: When an object being copied is on a layer that does not exist within the active project, that layer is created in the active project. Objects always remain on a layer of the same name.
Object Linetype: When an object being copied has a linetype definition that does not exist within the active project, that new linetype becomes defined in the active project. Objects always continue to have the same linetype name, even if the definition of that linetype varies from source project to active project.
Point Object with Integer Point number: As points are copied into the active project, integer point number conflicts are resolved by renumbering the points. If an identical point number exists in the active project, the point is not copied, with no notification.
Referenced Object: As an object is copied to the active project, if it is referenced to another object, and if that object is also copied, the intended reference to the other copied object is maintained. If the object that it refers to is not also copied, the reference record is reset to zero.
Object Group Number: As an object is copied into the active project, its group number will be retained, even if there are other objects in the active project with the same group number.
Internal Block Object: As an internal block object is copied into the active project, if no internal block of that name currently exists there, such an internal block definition is created within the active project. The new block is created at the same location as the original block. If a block definition of that name already exists within the active project, that definition is used. If two projects have internal blocks with the same name but different definitions, the copied block can look different to the original.
External Block Object: As an externally defined block is copied in the active project a new instance of that block is simply created.
Text Object: When a text object copied into the active project, if it includes an EAT code containing a reference to a subject object, that subject will also automatically be copied into the active project, even if it was not explicitly selected. If the EAT code contains a reference to a HAL, as required to label the HAL, the HAL object will also be copied to the active project.

Divide a phase template into distinct phases for which volumes and mass haul diagrams are to be individually accumulated.

The phase lines listed from top to bottom within the phase line list box, as shown above, define the phases from left to right in the template. In defining these phase lines, you are defining the right edge of the phase. Its left edge is either at the right edge of the previously defined phase (the previous phase line in the list), or at the left edge of the template, if there is no phase defined to the its left.

If no phases have been defined, the Phase Manager (PHASEMAN) opens first.

File

Create and save templates.

Open the Phase manager (PHASEMAN)
New
Save
Save as...
Save on the fly toggles on or off automatic saving of revisions to a selected template as a new template. When On, as you select a template, move to another station | chainage using the scroll bar and then edit that template, a new template is stored at that new station | chainage.
Exit

Display

Control how the template is displayed in the graphics screen.

AutoAll (toggle)
All
Redraw
Magnify
Zoom
Recenter
Previous

Go to...

Shape Editor...

Open the Shape Editor (SHAPE).

Phase names...

Open the phase names manager (PHASENAME).

Settings

Open Road Design Settings (RDDESIGNSET).
Open Road Grid Settings (ROADGRID).

Shape

Open the Shape Editor (SHAPE).

Warnings...

Whenever error conditions are detected, the Warnings Menu item is enabled.

Clear
: Clear all the error conditions so you are no longer warned of the errors.
Details
: Explain the highlighted error condition so you can correct it.
Refresh
: Remove the details to display the original list.

Help

Use this item of the TML List.

Below the menu, the display shows:

Chainage | Station: The current chainage | station.
Arrows and a slider: Select a different chainage | station.
Phase: Current phase template.
Phase line: The location of a phase line.
Line
: Locate a phase line.
Reset: Reset phase lines.

Below the slider is a diagram of the current cross section with any phases.

Below the cross section diagram is the list of phases and buttons to Insert, Append or Delete phases.

Enter a list of phases with phase name, Type, C/F, H Loc, HAL, H Off, V Loc, VAL and V Off.

Create and manage phases.

Define chainage | station limits and the cross-sectional extents of individual phases, for designing roadways constructed in two or more phases for reasons such as maintenance of traffic, constuction timing, reporting volumes or creating mass haul diagrams.

Phases are templates in which the cross-sectional limits of each particular phase are defined. Like normal roadway templates, a phase template starts at a given chainage | station and continues until another template is defined, or until the end of the road job.

Phase templates differ from other templates. If a phase is included in one phase template and not in the adjacent phase template, the phase retains its full cross-sectional properties in the region where it is defined and abruptly disappears without transition in the region where it is not defined.

Road job: Select the road job.
Chainage | Station: List the start chainages | stations for phase templates in this road job.
Name
Assign names to phase templates.
Edit...: Open the Phase Editor (PHASE), to define the cross-sectional limits of a phase within the phase template.
Copy...: Copy a phase template to another location along the same road job or to another road job.
Delete: Delete a phase template.
Quick phases...: Quickly divide a phase template into two on the left and right sides of an alignment.
New...: Create a new phase template.
Close: Close without changes to phase templates.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Masshaul\|Phase manager... Channel\|Phase\|Phase manager...	Secured

PHASENAME

Edit the name, visibility, colour and linetype of phases.

Road designs can be divided into named phases for reports and mass haul diagrams. These phases can be shown hatched in cross section commands. Phase shading is turned On or Off in RDDESIGNSET at Shade areas.

Name: Edit the name of the selected phase.
On: Turn a phase ON to include in volume reports and to shade. All phases that are turned OFF are lumped into one volume category and are not shaded even when shading is turned on.
Colour: Assign a color to a phase line for the mass ordinate in the Mass Haul diagram (MASSHAUL) and for display in the Phase Editor (PHASE), Template Editor (TEMPLATE), Subgrade Editor (SUBGRADE) and Cross Section Editor (XSECTIONEDT).
Linetype: Assign a linetype to a phase line for the Mass Haul diagram (MASSHAUL) in sheet view. The Mass haul diagram dialog shows all lines as solid.
New...: Create a new phase name.
Delete: Delete a phase name.
Close: Accept changes to phase names.
Cancel: Cancel without changes to phase names.

The six shading patterns are determined by the position in the Phase Names dialog. Patterns for seventh and subsequent phase names are repeated in the same order.

Position in dialog	Shading pattern
First	Horizontal hatch
Second	Vertical hatch
Third	Forward slash
Fourth	Backward slash
Fifth	Diagonal hatch
Sixth	Cross hatch

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Phase names... Channel\|Phase\|Phase names...	Secured

PHOTOCSV

Create points at coordinates in a .CSV file that represent the locations of photographs.

The file contains photo file name, latitude (south) and longitude (east), in degrees, minutes and seconds, in this format:

P1000385.JPG," 37° 49' 6.980000"""," 145° 11' 20.340000"""
P1000383.JPG," 37° 49' 6.800000"""," 145° 11' 20.940000"""
P1000371.JPG," 37° 49' 7.710000"""," 145° 11' 12.540000"""

Create a new point in a selected set (L1) at the intersection with another selected set or pline (L2).

The default elevation is interpolated from the first set.

The default point number name is the next available point number.

The default name is the previously entered name.

See also INTOSET, GCIN2SET, ILINE and DRAPE.

21/01/16

pinset.txt

Wendell

PIPE

Assign pipe attributes to or change the properties of a selected pipe.

Select branch, pipe: Select the set in the plan view or, after PIPEDRAW, select part of the pipe in the profile view. If you select a node in the profile view, the closest pipe in the branch will be selected.
Properties: Open the pipe design entry table
Close: Close the command

Pipe number

The record number of the set

Section number

The number of the pipe section in the branch, starting from the downstream end.

Pipe properties

Name: Enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the pipe identifier (used in reports and PIPEDRAW.
Shape/material: Select the shape and type of material for the pipe segment from options defined in the ASCII file TMPIPE.TBL. The shapes are CIR (Circular pipes), ARCH (arch pipes), RECT (rectangular pipes) and TRAP (trapezoidal channels). The pipe shapes are illustrated in the pipe block chart.
Size: Selects the size for the pipe segment. The available sizes are controlled by the shape of pipe, and are contained in the ASCII file TMPIPE.SIZ.
Bedding class: Enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the class of bedding for reports.
Manning’s n: Enter a Manning’s roughness coefficient value for each pipe.

Entrance coefficients

Common inlet loss coefficients typically range from 0.2 to 0.5. See Table 12, Entrance Loss Coefficients, page 179 of "Hydraulic Design of Culverts", FHWA HDS No. 5.

Submerged: Enter a coefficient for entrance losses when the pipe entrance is submerged. The default value is 0.5.
Free: Enter a coefficient for entrance losses when the entrance is not submerged. The default value is 0.35.

Outlet coefficients

Outlet loss coefficients typically range between 0.5 and 1.0.

Submerged: Enter a coefficient for entrance losses when the pipe outlet is submerged. The default value is 1.00.
Free: Enter a coefficient for computing entrance losses when the outlet is not submerged. The default value is 0.75.

Pipe elevations

Outlet: Enter an elevation for the downstream end of the pipe segment.
Entrance: Enter an elevation for the upstream end of the pipe segment.

TMPIPE.TBL is the ASCII file that defines pipe shapes and material types, and the roughness coefficients for each material type. TMPIPE.SIZ and TMPIPE_M.SIZ contain sizes for circular pipes and trapezoidal flat-bottom and v-bottom shaped channels. The default TMPIPE.TBL looks like this:

#SHAPE/MATERIAL MANNINGS N
ARCH/CMP 0.024
ARCH/CMP(3X1) 0.027
ARCH/CSP(6X1) 0.030
ARCH/CONCRETE 0.012
RECT/CMP 0.024
RECT/CONCRETE 0.012
CIR/CMP 0.024
CIR/CMP(SPIRAL) 0.021
CIR/CONCRETE 0.012
TRAP/EARTH 0.030
TRAP/CONCRETE 0.012

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Pipe properties	Secured	DGE 4

PIPEAIN

Import pipe points from a CSV file of coordinates then connect by Asset_ID or String number.

These are not the attributes used by pipe design commands.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

PIPEADD

Create a specified pipe survey attribute on points in selected sets.

Optionally, create new sets and copy points into specified layers.

These are not the attributes used by pipe design commands.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			POA

PIPEBREK

Break a pipe set at a point into two pipes and copy the Asset_ID.

Select pipe: section: Select a set segment of a pipe to change the crown elevations. Select the pipe from a Plan View or select a single pipe segment in a Profile View.
Entrance elevation: Enter a new elevation for the upstream crown of the pipe, or enter the grade in this format %0.25 to calculate the elevation based on the length of pipe.
Change: Modify the crown elevation and update the pipe and node elevation attributes. The inside top and bottom of the pipe are drawn from center of node to center of node. These lines can be used for temporary construction lines and to graphically identify the location of the pipe without having to complete PIPEDRAW.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Elevation by crown	Secured	DGE 5

PIPECALQ

Compute and store the flow rate Q from rainfall coefficient C, intensity I and catchment area A.

View the results through NODE or use PIPERSLT to step through each pipe.

See Designing with Road, Pipe and Hydro in the Terramodel User's Guide.

Node: Select points that have been defined as nodes using NODE.
OK: Compute the flow rates.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Calculate Q from C,I,A	Secured	DGE 9

PIPECHRT

Create a pipe chart from pipe attributes including node names, point numbers and elevations, pipe lengths, sizes and grades and basin information.

Select pipe: Pick the pipe segments to be included in the chart. The default is the active alignment, if set. Select the branch in a plan or profile view.
Layer: Select the layer for the chart.
Location: Enter the location of the lower left corner of the chart.
OK: Create the chart using the current text style.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Draw pipe chart	Secured	DGE 12

PIPEDALL

Draw and label all pipes and nodes in all branches on a specified layer in the profile view.

Pipes are drawn using the current PIPEDRAW settings.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Draw all pipes	Secured	DGE

PIPEDEF

Edit the default pipe and node settings.

Pipe Properties

Shape/material: Select the typical pipe shape and type of material Terramodel for designing a pipe system and assigning pipe attributes to a set. The selection options and their corresponding Mannings values are contained in the ASCII file TMPIPE.TBL, which you can customize. Pipes can be circular, rectangular or and arch, and channels can be trapezoidal.
Size: Select the default size of pipe for design and for assigning pipe attributes to a set. The available sizes are controlled by the shape of pipe you specified in the Shape/Material prompt above. The selection options and their corresponding sizes are contained in the ASCII file TMPIPE.SIZ or TMPIPE_M which you can customize.
Minimum cover: The minimum cover is used to calculate the downstream invert elevation attributes of pipes and the Hold Cover option of PIPEDSGN. Enter the minimum distance from the top of ground to the top of pipe.
Minimum slope: Enter the minimum slope of the pipe (in feet or meters) for the Hold Grade option of PIPEDSGN.
Bedding class: Enter a name of up to 16 characters to describe the class of bedding for installation.

Manhole Properties

Shape/material: Select the typical shape and type of material for s circular and rectangular nodes in a pipe system, and for node attributes at a point, from the ASCII file TMNODE.TBL.
Size: Select the default node size for designing a pipe system and for node attributes to a point, from those specified in the the ASCII file TMNODE.SIZ or TMNODE_M.
Minimum drop: Enter the elevation difference between incoming and outgoing pipe inverts at a node (forcing this elevation drop across the node) for assigning pipe attributes to a set, or for PIPEDSGN.
Base height: Enter the elevation difference between the outgoing pipe invert and the invert of a node, often used to allow space for debris collection or grouting, when assigning pipe attributes to a set, or for PIPEDSGN.

Q Computation Method

Select the method to calculate the flowrate (Q) in a pipe from

Q Summation: where Q values for all upstream nodes are added together to compute the Q for a pipe
Q=CIA: Rational method. This method has an implied constant of 1 when the units are in inches/hour, acres and cfs. When the units are hectares, mm/hr and l/s the constant is 1/360 (Q=CIA/360).
None: Enter Q values directly at each node

Rainfall Database File Name

Enter or select the name of the ASCII .RNF file for interpolating the rainfall intensity, duration and frequency (IDF) values for each region. For more information, see Store a Rainfall Database below.

Storm Frequency (Years)

Select the storm frequency used to calculate storm intensities for the Q=CIA computation method from the rainfall database, which can contain up to 11 different frequencies. Each time you change the storm frequency, use PIPESOLV to update the flowrate values.

Store your own regional rainfall database information in an ASCII text file in the project directory.

Rainfall databases for the USA are defined in the U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Technical Paper No. 25 (TP-25). County and state storm water detention or drainage manuals are also available.

Each rainfall database file is divided into two sections. The first section contains the Intensity, Duration and Frequency (IDF) information for calculating flows using rational method applications.

This rainfall data comes from a log-log graph. A log-log interpolation of the data rather than straight-line interpolation more accurately reflects the original data.

In the default rainfall database, for Altanta, Georgia, USA, the first column lists times of concentration from 5 minutes to 1440 minutes (24 hours), while columns 2 through 7 contain the intensities for 2, 5, 10, 25, 50 and 100 year storm frequencies. Add up to 5 additional columns to provide intensities for a maximum of 11 return periods.

The second section of the rainfall database file lists the total amount of rainfall for the 6- and 24-hour storm events for each return period.

This is the format of the default database, ATLANTA.RNF.

Lines in the file that contain remarks for informational purposes are preceded with a "#" symbol.

# STORM FREQUENCY (Years)
# TIME ----------------------------------------------------------------
2 5 10 25 50 100
#----------------------------------------------------------------------
5.0 5.03 6.78 7.77 9.06 10.00 10.83
6.0 4.82 6.39 7.46 8.61 9.45 10.35
7.0 4.60 6.07 7.04 8.17 8.99 9.81
8.0 4.37 5.77 6.70 7.76 8.51 9.36
9.0 4.19 5.51 6.43 7.37 8.22 8.98
10.0 4.04 5.28 6.17 7.17 7.85 8.55
11.0 3.91 5.12 5.96 6.93 7.61 8.29
12.0 3.79 4.96 5.76 6.87 7.37 8.03
13.0 3.66 4.79 5.56 6.44 7.13 7.77
14.0 3.54 4.63 5.36 6.20 6.89 7.51
15.0 3.41 4.47 5.15 5.96 6.65 7.25
20.0 2.98 3.90 4.50 5.25 5.78 6.33
25.0 2.68 3.53 4.05 4.72 5.22 5.72
30.0 2.38 3.16 3.61 4.20 4.66 5.10
40.0 2.04 2.68 3.08 3.56 3.96 4.33
# The following is the total rainfall for 6 and 24 hours
TOTAL
6.0 2.70 3.80 4.70 5.60 6.60 6.90
24.0 3.70 4.80 5.70 6.60 7.60 7.90

Establish the default pipe and node properties with PIPEDEF before using PIPEDSGN to design the pipes. Establish the computational settings before using PIPESOLV.

This command does not change any pipe or node properties of existing objects, only those that are going to be created.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

PIPEDRAW

Draws and label a pipe branche in the profile view.

Pipe: Select the pipe branch in a Plan View or a Profile View.
From: Specify the number of the first node number to draw. The default is the first node of the branch.
To: Specify the number of last node to draw. The default is the last node.
Layer: Select the layer on which to draw the pipe branch
Settings: Open the pipe and node settings (PIPELL).
OK: Draw the pipe branch in the profile view.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Draw pipe	Secured	DGE

PIPEDSGN

Design portions of a branch using the pipe and node defaults.

Options

Hold Grade | Hold Cover: Design a selected branch by holding either the grade or the minimum cover parameter configured in PIPEDEF.
Select pipe element: Select the pipe set to be designed.
Design: Apply the default pipe and node parameters and design the selected pipe.
Close: Close the command

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Pipe design	Secured	DGE 9

PIPEDUMP

List attributes of a selected pipe to a file.

The list is written to a text file called pipes.dmp on the Windows desktop.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392		Secured	DGE

PIPEINFO

For a selected set representing a pipe, report pipe dimensions relative to alignments and a DTM layer.

The report to P3pad shows, for each point, the Back Point Number, Intersection Point Number, Forward Point Number, True 3D Angle, 3D Chainage of Intersection Point, Horizontal Deflection Angle, Vertical Deflection Angle, Bearing In, Bearing Out, 3D Distance In, 3D Distance Out, Zenith Angle In, Zenith Angle Out, Slope In and Slope Out.

A report to a .CSV file shows, for each set segment, the KP chainage, pipe chainages, Invert levels, length, height difference, DTM elevation, cover, grade and horizontal and vertical deflection.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			POA

PIPELBR

List detailed, calculated properties for nodes and pipes in a selected pipe branch.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|List pipe branches	Secured	DGE 10

PIPELBR

Lists detailed, calculated properties for nodes and pipes in a selected pipe branch.

Select pipe: Pick the pipe branch from the plan or profile view.
OK: Report the detailed calculations in P3Pad.
Cancel: Cancel the command

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Pipe label settings	Secured	DGE 18

PIPELL

Edit the default node labels used by PIPEDRAW.

Pipe labels

Pipe label

Enter text for a callout to label pipes along with selected Pipe labels.

Pipe labels

Select pipe labels to be placed into the pipe label at the current cursor position.

Size: The size of the pipe.
Shape: The shape of the pipe.
Name: The name of the pipe.
Valid: Y or N, is the current solution for the flow valid?
Length: The length of the pipe.
Slope: The slope of the pipe.
Flow-type: The flow configuration of the pipe.
Discharge: The discharge from the pipe.
Vel. avg: The average velocity in the pipe.

Pipe label location

Select above or below the invert of the pipe.

Draw Yc & Yn

Draw the critical depth and normal depth lines, if the pipe is not in enclosed flow.

Draw HGL

Draw the hydraulic grade line.

Draw EGL

Draw the energy grade line.

Auto rotate text

Automatically rotate the pipe label parallel to the pipe or specify the text rotation for the pipe label.

Take manhole widths into account in the calculation of pipe length

When not enabled, the length is the horizontal distance from center of node to center of node. When enabled, one half the width of each node is subtracted from the total length.

Take manhole widths into account in the calculation of pipe grade

When not enabled, the grade is based on the horizontal distance from center of node to center of node. When enabled, one half the width of each node is subtracted from the total length to determine the grade.

Pipe color

Select the colour to draw the pipe.

YN color

Select the colour to draw the normal depth line.

YC color

Select the colour to draw the critical depth line.

Text color

Select the colour used to draw the text.

HGL color

Select the colour to draw the hydraulic grade line.

EGL colour

Select the colour to draw the energy grade line.

Text style

Select the colour used to draw the text.

Leader line style

Select the leader line style, or to [None] to indicate no leader line.

Leader line type

Select the linetype, which can be a linetype with an arrow head symbol at the beginning, for a leader line drawn from the center of the pipe invert to the callout text.

Border Style

Select the text border style, or [None] to indicate no border.

Border Linetype

Select the linetype for the border.

Node Labels

Upper Node label | Lower Node label

Enter text for callouts to label upper and lower nodes along with selected Node labels.

Node labels

Select pipe labels to be placed into the pipe label at the current cursor position.

Name: The name of the node.
Station: The station (or chainage) of the node.
Shape: The shape of the node.
Size: The size of the node.
Invert In: The invert of the pipe where the flow enters the node from the branch being drawn.
Invert Out: The invert of the pipe where the flow exits the node. Each node can have only one exit.
Floor elev: The invert of the floor of the node.
Rim elev: The top of the node. The elevation of the point is used to set this elevation when initially designed.
Discharge into node: The discharge that enters into the node from outside the pipe.
Valid analysis: Y or N, is the current solution for the flow valid?
Node wall thickness: Specify the node thickness. The lines drawn for the node are the node size plus the wall thickness.
Auto rotate text: Automatically rotate the node label parallel to the pipe or specify the text rotation for the node label.
Text style: Select the colour used to draw the text.
Leader line style: Select the leader line style, or to [None] to indicate no leader line.
Leader line type: Select the linetype, which can be a linetype with an arrow head symbol at the beginning, for a leader line drawn from the center of the pipe invert to the callout text.
Border Style: Select the text border style, or [None] to indicate no border.
Border Linetype: Select the linetype for the border.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Pipe label settings	Secured	DGE 18

PIPEMAXV

List all pipes, have a velocity above a specified maximum, to P3Pad.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG	Pipe\|List large velocity	Secured	DGE

PIPEMINV

List all pipes that have a velocity below a specified minimum, to P3Pad.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|List small velocity	Secured	DGE

PIPEOBST

Label a pipe in the profile view at obstructions.

Create labels along a pipe pline selected from the profile view at selected obstruction plines or sets selected from the Plan view.

The labels are created on the obstruction layers in both the plan and profile views, in the selected text style, with the name of the obstruction, the elevation of the profile and the chainage.

Directly enter the flow rate for any pipe when the flowrate calculation method is None.

Select branch, pipe: Select the pipe branch or segment from a plan view or select a single pipe segment in a profile view.
Q: Enter the flowrate.
Save Q: Store the flowrate as an attribute of the pipe.
Close: Close the command

Use PIPESOLV to view the affects of PIPEQ. The only Q computation method that does not automatically update and overwrite this value is "none". This value is stored as an attribute of the pipe, not node. This value is not used by the Q Summation method.

See Designing with Road, Pipe and Hydro in the Terramodel User's Guide.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Input Q	Secured	DGE 5

PIPEREPT

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

PIPERSLT

Report the calculated results for the selected pipe or node.

Report calculated results for a selected set which is a pipe defined by PIPE or a selected point which is a node defined by NODE.

The report for a pipe includes

Element number, Record number, Layer name, Discharge (Q) and Discharge type.
At the entrance and outlet, Head, Depth, Velocity and Water surface elevation.
Normal and Critical Depth, Velocity and Discharge.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Display results	Secured	DGE

PIPESCLQ

Scale pipe flow rate Q for selected nodes by a factor.

Select nodes: Select the nodes in the Plan View for which the flowrates are to be scaled.
Q scale factor: Enter the scale factor.
OK: Apply the scale factor

View the scaled flow rates using PIPESOLV or PIPEDRAW. Use PIPESOLV to view the affects of PIPESCLQ. Flow rates are attribute of the node and not pipe. This Q value is only used by the Q Summation method.

See Chapter 11, Designing with Road, Pipe, & Hydro, "Flow Rate Calculation Methods" in Terramodel User’s Guide.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Scale Q values	Secured

PIPESOLV

Calculate the flowrates, hydraulic properties and water surface profiles for selected branches.

Select pipes to solve: Select branches (set objects) from the plan view.
OK: Analyse the pipe branch.
Cancel: Cancel the command

View the results of the analysis using PIPERSLT, PIPEDRAW, PIPELBR, PIPESUM or PIPEWSP.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Pipe solve	Secured	DGE 9

PIPESUM

Create a summary report of all pipes in the project and display the report in P3Pad report editor.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Create summary report	Secured	DGE 10

PIPESWAP

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $1000

PIPEV

Scale, average, or zero the velocities for all pipes.

Select the method for modifying velocities of all pipes in the project.

Average: Use the 40 depth attributes calculated by PIPESOLV to calculate the average velocity velocity of each pipe.
Scale: Enter a scale factor to be applied to all velocities.
Zero: Modify the average velocity attributes to zero.
OK: Apply the selected revision method to the pipe velocities.
Cancel: Cancel without making the changes.

The Average pipe velocity is only used for the Q=CIA flowrate computation method. Each time PIPESOLV is used, the average velocities are updated for each pipe solved.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Modify velocity	Secured

PIPEWSP

List the water surface computations for each pipe in a selected branch, to P3Pad.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|List water surface profile	Secured	DGE

PIPEWELD

Create points at the final locations of pipe joins that have been surveyed after the pipes have been assembled but before the pipes are placed underground.

Select a Pipe Weld Set joining 3D points for the alignment along which the welded pipe has been laid, an As-Built Set for the same pipe joining 3D points at welds surveyed before the pipe was placed in the trench, and an As Built Weld Points layer.

For each point in the pipe weld set, determine the 3D distance along that set and then create a point on the specified layer at the 3D distance measured along the as-built set. If the pipes are surveyed in opposite directions, the as-built set is reversed. Any difference between the 3D lengths of the sets can be evenly distributed to allow for pipe stretching. Use SETSTA or CHAINAGE to adjust the start chainages beforehand.

Attributes can be copied from the weld points to the as-built points.

PIPEWELD is especially suited to laying long flexible gas pipelines, something like this:

Lay pipe segments beside the proposed alignment
Weld them together into longer pipe sections
Survey the pipe welds recording X,Y and Z coordinates and any attributes
Place the pipe sections into the ground
Survey the beginning and end of each pipe section
Adjust the start chainages as required
Run PIPEWELD
Select two sets representing the before-and-after status of a section of pipe
Click OK to create the new points and report
Repeat for the next pipe section

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $1000

PIPEXING

Draw pipes that cross the selected alignments or pipe branches.

Draw the inside diameter of circular pipes showing the invert and height of the crossing pipes (including pipes connecting at a manhole). Circular pipes appear oval if you have applied a vertical exaggeration factor to the profile view. Each invert is labeled with the invert elevation where it crosses the alignment.

It is possible for a pipe not to intersect an alignment at its center, but still conflict with an alignment because of its diameter. This command does not consider the actual dimensions of the pipes, only the centrelines.

Alignment: Select an alignment or pipe branch from the Plan view. The default is the active alignment, if any.
Pipes: Select sets, that are pipes that cross the alignment or pipe branch, from the Plan view. The set must have pipe attributes.
Layer: Select the layer in the profile view on which to draw plines that represent the crossing pipes in the layer colour.
OK: Draw the selected crossing pipes in the profile view.
Cancel

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 392	Pipe\|Draw crossing pipes	Secured	DGE 7

PLANSET

The Automated Sheet Assembly and Production module (ASAP) automates the creation and recreation of large numbers of plans along alignments.

Sheets can include

A border and title block.
Dynaviews of the sheet contents.
North arrows.
Titles.
Labels.
Sheet numbers.
Project information.

Once set up, many of PLANSET functions happen automatically. Configure the format and content of the sheets using the configuration settings, to

Arrange the sheets in the plan set.
Number sheets and update the numbering automatically as the plan set changes.
Prepare an index of drawings, and update references as needed.
View and plot individual sheets by selecting from a list of sheet numbers and titles.
Add, delete, or move sheets within the plan set.
Insert textual references to alignments or sheet numbers, and update them automatically.
Automatically update sheet titles.

Sheet type: Configure the Sheet Type (PSTYPE).
Settings: Configure the Settings (PSSET).
Plotboxes: Configure the plotboxes (PSBOX).
Sheets: Configure the sheets (PSSHEET).
Plan set: Plan set manager (PSMAN).
Indexes: Configure the indexes (PSINDEX).
Close: Close Plan Set.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
23/03/23	Assembling & Managing a set of plans User Guide Chapter 12 Reference Guide p304	Draft\|ASAP-Plan set	Secured	167

PLAN2DBX

Export selected points and sets to a Leica LandXML .XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database.

The database files can be used with Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D and iCON.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

LandXML file: Enter the name and location of the LandXML file to be created.
Heading: Enter any heading for the LandXML file.
Use Terramodel Point Number | Name for Cg-Point name: Export the point number or the point name as Cg-Point name.
Create Leica DBX Files: Also convert the LandXML file to .X?? files that make up a Leica RoadRunner DBX database. This conversion uses Leica RoadRunnerAddOn which is installed with Geocomp Updates. This also requires some software updates from Microsoft to run. If you select 'Create Leica DB files', but no .X?? files are created in the same folder as the .XML, download and install Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86).
Sort Records on Name: Sort exported records on name.
Export to LandXML: Export selected points and sets to LandXML, and convert to DBX database if enabled.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

See also ROADRUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and DTM2LDBX.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

PLANPROF

Close views then select the Plan and Profile views, tile horizontally, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

PlanProf is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROF.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|planprof	User-definable

PLANSHEET

Close views then select the Plan and Profile views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

PlanProf is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANSHEET.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|plansheet	User-definable

PLATFORM

For each design DTM listed in a layer list, adjust elevations until the desired cut, fill or nett volume to an existing DTM is reached.

Orig

Select the original DTM layer.

Strip

Enter any stripping depth to be subtracted from the existing surface elevations.

Design DTMs(Layer List)

Select a layer list of design DTMs to be adjusted.

Settings

Volume balance options: Adjust the balances on Nett, Cut or Fill volume until the entered volume is reached within the entered volume tolerance.
Shrink Swell factors: Enter shrink and swell factors for volumes if not equal to 1.0.
Default Design Batter Slopes: Specify whether to also compute sets where batters from design DTMs intersect the existing surface at entered cut or fill slopes.
Report | Create CSV File: Report to P3Pad or a .CSV file.

OK

Modify elevations of listed DTMs layers.

Cancel

Cancel the command without making more chages to elevations.

Any changes to Shrink and swell factors are also made to EARTHWORK Settings.
Default batter (tie-in) cut and fill slopes are entered by DESIGNSET and edited for individual sets by EDIT Slopes.
To constrain movement of some points on design DTMs, use point names CUT ONLY, FILL ONLY, FIX, FIX X, FIX Y, FIX Z, FIX XZ, FIX YZ, FIX XY or FIX XYZ.
Some constraint examples:
- FIX a long pad or water storage at one end and move the other end
- FILL ONLY above an existing pipe
Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.
Set distance and volume units by labelling and conversion factors in UNITSSET.
The design DTM must be enclosed by a DTM edge of one or more breakline sets.
Any batters must intersect the existing surface.

Create a pline joining vertices.

Once three vertices have been entered, enter any curve at the previous vertex using CURVE.

A vertex is also known as an intersection point, IP, control point, curve point, cp or node.

A pline can have a single elevation, for example a contour, or no elevation. A pline does not connect to any points, even points that have been used to locate vertices, and therefore is not part of a DTM. If you want your pline to connect to points, have multiple elevations or act as a breakline, create a set instead (SET).

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Pline\|Line	Field Data Module	3

PLINFILT

Filter plines without arcs in 2D by line offset tolerance.

See also SETFILT, BLFILTER, GCFILTER and FILTER.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	127

PLNNONAM

Turn OFF all objects and then turn ON all plines without names.

Run PLNNONAM again to turn all objects on.

Objects on invisible layers remain invisible.

Plot all or part of a project to a plotter, printer or PDF file.

Plot only a Window, inside multiple plotboxes, or one plot box.

Select a plotter configuration, carousel, scale and Windows printer driver settings.

The best way to plot is with scale 1:1 from a dynaview in the sheet view.

Mode

Define the extents of the data to be plotted

Window: Locate opposite window corners. The default locations are the extents of data in the current view.
Box: Select a rectangular set or a closed pline created using BOX or PLOTBOX.
Multiple: Select multiple plot boxes to be plotted together.

OK

Open plot configuration

Plot: Send plot instructions to the plotter driver.
Cancel.: Cancel the plot.
Setup...: For Windows plotters, configure the properties of printer driver including the paper size and orientation.
Configuration: Select a plot configuration. To add a plot configuration, see PLOTTERSET.
Carousel: Select a carousel previously defined by CAROUSEL.
Sort by pen: Plot in incrementing pen number order, or plot in record number order. Only sort by pen once you have defined a corresponding system of colour numbers, penmap and carousel.
Plottable area: The size of the selected plot window is compared with the paper size.
Scale: Enter the plot scale. The default is the scale of the current view. In sheet view, this is 1:1.
Scale to fit: Compute a scale that will fit the plot window into the paper size.
Page layout: For HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plotters, select a paper size.
Rot 90: Rotate by 90 degrees. For Windows plotters, use Setup instead.
Mirror: Mirror the image for plotting on the back of transparent film.
Offset: Enter any offsets from the lower left corner of the plotter limits to the lower left corner of the plot window.
Plot to file: Save plot instructions to a file instead of sending them to the plotter. To create a .PDF, do not plot to file here, but instead select a plot configuration with a PDF plotter driver, which will prompt for a file name when you plot.

Cancel

Cancel plotting

Create a rectangular pline box by enter height and width in sheet units.

The box is scaled to project units using the current plan view scale.

This box can be used as the boundary in the Plan View of a DYNAVIEW in the sheet view.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	93
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Pline\|Plotbox	Field Data Module	93

PLOTSET

Configure resolution, penmap and background prominence parameters in plots.

Curves and splines are substituted by short straights. Specify increments and segments for curves and splines, typically 0.01, 0.01, 0.01 and 20.

In Advanced pen map settings, map pen numbers to up to six text heights or specify a colour or pen shift. Any colour or pen shift you specify is added to the colour or pen number of objects in dynaviews, where the object's layer has background prominence in the layer list. The shift does not apply to pen sorting.

The current pen map determines which pen number is to be used to plot each object colour. Edit and store pen maps in TMODWIN.INI; only the current pen map is stored in the prototype file.

The actual plot colour and pen thickness is determined by the choice of carousel when plotting. The colours displayed in the pen map settings are from the current palette and colourmap, which are independent of the pen map and carousel colours.

See also PLOT, CAROUSEL, DISPLAYSET, LLISTSET and EDITINI.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	90
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|Plot setup\|Plot params...	Secured	90

PLOTTERSET

Add, edit or delete plotter configurations to suit your installed plotters or printers.

To set up a plotter configuration for a Windows printer:

In Windows Setup or Control Panel, install the Windows printer driver
Test print to that printer
In Terramodel, run PLOTTERSET
Click on Add
Enter the name for a plotter configuration, for example "HP Laser A3 black cadastral"
Click on the Plotter... button
Change your plotter driver to Windows printers
Select your plotter from the list
Do not select plot to file.
Choose whether to sort by pen
Select a default pen carousel
Click Edit to confirm pen colours and pen widths
OK, Close, OK, Close
When you first PLOT, click on Setup, to configure the paper size, and so on, in the Windows plotter driver.

To see a print preview, control the number of copies to be printed, or generate a file for plotting later, plot to a PDF printer driver which opens the PDF and then print from your PDF reader.

To set up a plotter configuration to generate a PDF:

Install a PDF printer driver
In Terramodel, run PLOTTERSET
Click on Add
Enter the name for a plotter configuration, for example "PDF A4 colour"
Click on the Plotter... button
Change Driver to Windows printers
Select your PDF printer driver from the list
Do not select plot to file.
Choose whether to sort by pen
Select a default pen carousel
Click Edit to confirm pen colours and pen widths
OK, Close, OK, Close
When you first PLOT, click on Setup, to configure the paper size, and so on, in the PDF plotter driver.

The HP-GL and HP-GL/2 printer drivers use graphics languages for older vector plotters that do not have Windows printer drivers and do not plot images. They typically move physical pens or pencils from a carousel.

Define separate plotter configurations for each physical pen carousel arrangement (e.g. one for coloured pens and one for all black pens of different thickness).

To set up a plotter configuration for a HP-GL or HP-GL/2 plotter:

In Terramodel, run PLOTTERSET
Select HPGL2 and click on Edit
Click on the Plotter... button
Select a plotter from the HPGL or HP-GL/2 lists
Select a COM, LPT or other port
To capture the plot instructions, either select Plot to file, or select a port that redirects to a file.
Choose whether to sort by pen
Enter values for margin allowance, offset, mirror, rotate 90 and scale to fit. If you don't know these values now, edit these after you have determined them using trial plots.
Select Pen Plotter for the default carousel
Use CAROUSEL to assign the RGB values for the eight standard HP plot colours for pens 1-8 regardless of what pens you physically place in the carousel.
Use CAROUSEL to assign pen speeds to suit your pens and media.
OK, Close, OK, Close

Close

Close configuration.

Add

Enter a name for a new plotter configuration then edit.

Edit

Configuration

Show the name of the selected plotter configuration.

Plotter

Driver | Model | Port

Show the selected plotter driver, model and port.

Plot to file

Redirect the plot to a file of plot codes. Use only to examine the raw format. Do not select when plotting to .PDF.

Sort by pen

Plot in incrementing pen number order or in record number order.

Plotter...

HP-GL Series Plotters: Select a vector pen plotter from a list of models that use HP-GL plotter language, and the port to which the plotter is connected.
HP-GL/2 Series: Select a vector pen plotter from a list of models that use HP-GL/2 plotter language, and the port to which the plotter is connected.
Windows Printers: Select a Windows plotter or printer from a list of your installed Windows printer drivers.

Paper Size

For vector plotters, specify page size and margins in sheet units. The height is in the direction of paper feed.

Page Layout

Mirror: Mirror the plot image, for example for the back surface of mylar sheets.
Rotate 90: For vector plotters, rotate the image 90 degrees.
Scale to fit: Scale the plot to fit the paper. Use Dynaviews instead where scaling matters.
Offset: Apply X and Y offsets.

Pen Carousel

Select the default pen carousel (the list of pen colours and thicknesses for PLOT).

Define carousel: Edit pen carousels (CAROUSEL).

OK

Accept changes to the plotter configuration.

Cancel

Cancel changes.

Delete

Delete a plot configuration. Delete any configurations, such as the pre-installed HP 1055CM, HP DesignJet and LaserJet, that do not apply to your plotters or printers. If you delete HPGL2, that will be restored to the list later.

Set as default configuration

Select one configuration to be the default for PLOT.

Suspend lock driver

Turn this off. Only turn this on if you have trouble plotting to a pen plotter attached to a Sentinel key which is attached to a parallel port .

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|Plot setup\|Plotter setup...	Secured	PU 3

PLTO3D

Modify the elevation and colour of a contour pline.

First nominate the first elevation, an interval, an increment and a colour. Then pick the first pline. The elevation and colour that that pline is then modified and the default elevation is incremented. The next pline you select is assigned the new default elevation.

To form a DTM, GCCONVRT or CONVERT the plines to sets.

See also GCONECON to increment by the contour interval, GCMULCON to modify multiple plines, GCCONTXT to interpolate elevations from contour label text, ELVPLINE to interpolate elevations from a DTM or GCRIVER to interpolate elevations onto a digitized river valley.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Field Data Module or Geocomp Update	258

POINT

Create a new point on the current layer with the current point colour.

Loc:: Enter a location (northing and easting or X and Y). Right-click in the graphics area to compute a location.
Z:: Enter an elevation or leave blank for no elevation
Pn:: Enter a point number. To accept a default, enter * or adopt a suggested number.
Name:: Enter a point name (or description) of up to eighty characters or leave blank.
Point: Create the point
Close: Close the command with creating any more points

Use POINTSET to configure default point numbers.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Point\|Point	Field Data Module	50

POINTSET

Configure numbering of points as they are created.

Numbering

Automatic: Number new points automatically as they are created, beginning with the Start pn. This is the most common setting.
Prompt, warn if in use: Prompt for a point number as each new point is created. Accept the default or enter another number. If you enter a number already assigned, you are prompted for another point number.
Prompt, no warnings: Prompt for a point number as each new point is created. Accept the default or enter another number. If the point number you enter is already assigned, overwrite the old point.
Start pn: Assign a starting point number for new points as they are created, for default point numbers when prompted and for importing a points file that does not have point numbers.

Protect pn in use from deletion

Protect points that are part of a set from deletion unless the set line is also deleted. This is usually OFF. If ON, a point within more than one set, is not deleted if only one of those sets is deleted.

Prompt for name

Prompt for a name for each individual new point as it is created. Commands that create multiple design points (such as DESIGN) or that automatically name points will not prompt for a name, regardless of this setting.

Max integer pn

Specify the maximum point number to be stored as an integer.

OK

Accept any changed settings

Cancel

Cancel without changing any settings

These point settings are project variables. See also SYSTEM which can configure the System variables Max Objects and Max alpha pts that are stored in P3Server.ini.

Any new point with an integer number greater than Max Integer pn is stored as if an alphanumeric (and thus uses more memory and is limited by Max Alpha Points).

To avoid cases where creation or importing of ranges of certain integer point numbers is prevented, Max Integer pn should equal Max objects less Max alpha pts. Commands in Geocomp Update can increase the Max integer pn if less than this number.

Importing ASCII points (IMPORT) controls the numbering of imported points within the limits of POINTSET.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Point settings...	Field Data Module	45

POLYGON

Create a pline with the specified number of sides and a specified distance to the vertices from a centre location.

In Profile and XSect view modes, the current vertical exaggeration factor is applied so the pline appears to be a regular polygon even though it is not.

TML date		Menu	Source
29/10/08		Draw\|Pline\|Polygon	Field Data Module

PONDDEF

Compute areas from closed contours and store the areas and elevations as attributes of a pond point.

Pond: Select the location of a point that represents the pond. The contours must surround this pond point. Use BASIN to create a basin at this point first.
Contours: Select up to 32 closed contour plines.
PondDef: Calculate the areas and store the contour elevations and areas as attributes of the point for use in PONDVOL.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Ponds\|Pond definition from contours	Secured

PONDLIST

List pond outlet devices and plot Stage|Storage|Discharge curves.

Pond: Locate the point object that represents the pond.
Layer: Select the layer in the sheet view for the Stage | Storage | Discharge curves.
Plot graph: Plot the Stage | Storage | Discharge curves for the pond outlet devices.
List: Report to P3Pad the outlet devices you have entered .

Use PONDOUT to store pond devices before you list them.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Ponds\|List pond	Secured

PONDOUT

Define pond outlet devices.

Pond

Locate the pond point.

Edit

Edit pond outlet devices

Pond Name

Enter up to 80 characters for the name of the pond.

Num

Display the number of the outlet device.

Outlet Device

Select an outlet device type for the outlet and enter parameters. See below.

None
Rectangular weir
Circular standpipe
Cipolletti weir
Broad-crested weir
Trapezoidal channel
Circular orifice
User defined
Vee-notch weir

Invert Elevation

Enter the invert elevation of the outlet device.

Design

Enter maximum depth, coefficient, and maximum Q design parameters for the Broad crested weir, Rectangular weir, Circular orifice, Cipolletti weir or Vee notch weir outlet device. Click OK to revise the dimensions for the outlet device according to the design parameters you entered.

User Defined

Enter elevation, discharge pairs for special outlet configurations that are not included in the outlet device choices.

Delete

Delete the highlighted outlet device from the list.

List Devices

List of currently defined outlet devices to P3Pad.

Save

Save the current outlet device configuration.

Close

Close the command

The required input parameters for the rectangular weir are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Coeff of discharge: Enter the coefficient of discharge, C.
Weir width: Enter the width of the weir at the invert, W.

The rectangular weir is a type of sharp-crested weir. The formula used is: Q=0.667CWH^1.58.02496 where, W = Width of weir and H = Head (depth) of water above the invert. A suggested value of C is 0.60.

The required input parameters for the circular standpipe are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Standpipe diameter: Enter the diamter of the standpipe, D.
Coeff of discharge: Enter the coefficient of discharge, C.

The design of a circular standpipe or morning glory spillway is described in Design of Small Dams, p415f. As water begins to overflow into the standpipe, the lip acts as a sharp-crested weir. As the depth of water increases, the weir becomes completely submerged and the standpipe functions as an orifice. However, the value of "C" must change as the depth of water transitions between these two basic equations. The relationship of C to the depth has been calculated in the above reference and is included in the calculations. This non-linear relationship is defined by multiple data points. The transition between equations is complete when the depth of water is equal to the diameter of the standpipe. The two equations used by this device are Q=C(3.14159)DH^1.5 (when H is less than or equal to D and the value of C is varied from 4 at zero depth to 1.018 when the depth is equal to the diameter) and Q=CA√(64.6H) (when H is greater than D and C is entered by the user (a value of 0.50 typically gives an even transition between the two equations)) where, D = Diameter of the standpipe, H = Head (depth) of water over the lip of the standpipe and A = Cross-sectional area of the standpipe.

The required input parameters for the Cippolletti weir are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Coeff of discharge: Enter the coefficient of discharge, C.
Weir width: Enter the width of the weir at the invert, W.

The Cippoletti Weir is type of sharp-crested weir where the side slopes are 4:1. The concept of the Cipolletti weir is that the discharge from the triangular ends makes up for the contractions that reduce rectangular flow. The formula used is Q=(3.367(C/0.6WH^1.5)) where, W = Width of weir and H = Head (depth) of water above the invert. A suggested value of C is 0.60.

The required input parameters for the broad-crested weir are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Coeff of discharge: Enter the coefficient of discharge, C.
Weir width: Enter the width of the weir at the invert, W.

A broad-crested weir has a nearly horizontal crest that is sufficiently long in the direction of flow so that the nappe will be supported and hydrostatic pressures will be fully developed for at least a short distance. The formula used is Q=CWH^1.5, assumes vertical sides and is typically used for flow over a roadway, top of a dam or emergency spillway. Typical values of C range from 2.63 to 3.32. C varies with the depth of water, and breadth and cross section of the weir. A suggested value is 2.8.

The required input parameters for the trapezoidal channel are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Channel width: Enter the width of the channel at the invert, W.
Side slope ratio: Enter the slope of the sides of the channel, in the ratio of horizontal/vertical.
Manning's N: Enter Manning's roughness coefficient for the channel material
Channel slope: Enter the slope in direction of flow, in the ratio of horizontal/vertical.

The formula for a trapezoidal channel is Q=(1.49/N)A((A/W<subp)^0.667)(S^0.5), where where, N = Manning’s roughness coefficient, A = Cross sectional area of the channel, W_p = Wetted perimeter and S = Longitudinal slope.

The required input parameters for the circular orifice are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Coeff of discharge: Enter the coefficient of discharge, C.
Orifice diameter: Enter the diameter of the orifice, D.

A circular orifice is typically assumed to be a circle within a thin flat plate. When the depth of the water is less than the diameter of the orifice, Terramodel assumes that the orifice will act as a broad crested weir having a width equal to the orifice diameter and a coefficient of 3.0. For a small orifice diameter relative to the depth of the pond, variations in the diameter have little impact on the sizing of a pond. Where large diameter orifices are used relative to the depth of the pond, you should consider if this is the appropriate device for your situation.

The formula is Q=3.0DH^1.5 when H is less than D, and Q=CA√(64.4(H-R)) when H is greater than or equal to D, where D = Diameter of the orifice, H = Head (depth) of water above the invert, A = Cross sectional area of the orifice and R= Radius of the orifice. A suggested value of C is 0.60.

For other outlet devices, compute the outflows and enter them with User Defined.

Enter pairs of elevations, and discharge values(in cubic units per second), for the outlet device.

The pairs are automatically sorted by elevation.

For each user-defined device, enter the discharge for the lowest elevation (invert) as zero (0), even if the elevations of other outlet devices are lower. Terramodel will accurately consider the contributions of other flow devices when computing the total discharge from the pond. Only enter elevations of critical points at each outlet device, such as at inverts and changes in shape.

The User Defined outlet device is not supported in the Design option of PondOut.

The required input parameters for the Vee-Notch Weir are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Coeff of discharge: Enter the coefficient of discharge, C.
Angle from vertical: Enter the angle, A, along the sloped sides of the weir (measured from the vertical).

The Vee-Notch Weir is a type of sharp-crested weir. This equation is valid for a vee-shaped cut into a thin flat plate. (A vee placed into a concrete wall does not meet the specific description of a sharp crested weir.) The equation used is Q=CH^2.5tan(A) where, A = Side angle (from vertical) of the weir, in degrees and H = Head (depth) of water above the invert. Typical values of C range from 2.4 to 2.9. A suggested value is 2.55.

The required input parameters for the trapezoidal broad-crested weir are:

Invert Elev: Enter the invert elevation of the weir.
Bottom width: Enter the width of the weir, W, at the invert.
Side angle/Deg: Enter the angle A (measured from vertical) along the sloped sides of the weir.

PONDSUM

Create report summary showing peak inflow and outflow, maximum elevation, maximum volume and routed outflow.

Basin: Enter the point that represents the basin.
Pond: Enter the point that represents the pond.
OK: Report peak inflow and outflow, maximum elevation, maximum volume and routed outflow to P3Pad.
Close: Close the command

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Ponds\|Pond peak flow rate	Secured

PONDVOL

Enter or edit pond volume data for a point.

Pond: Locate the point that represents the pond.
Name: Enter up to 80 characters for the pond name.
Area: Enter pond areas at elevations.
Volume: Enter incremental pond volumes as an elevation, area/volume pair, then highlight the next line without data to record your values and begin a new set of elevation, area/volume pairs.
List: List the pond areas and volumes to P3Pad.

Use PONDDEF to define pond points first.

The volumes are calculated by end-area method from a table of attributes stored at the point and from closed contours surrounding that point.

To change a line of data you’ve already entered, highlight it and enter new values.

It is not necessary to record an elevation, area/volume pair for each outlet because device pond volumes are computed at those elevations automatically.

The number of each data pair is displayed.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Ponds\|Pond definition from contours	Secured

PORTSC1

List points with coordinates in the same report as LPOINTS, except that elevations are multiplied by -1 to report depths. The elevations of the points are unchanged.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

POWERGDE

Export the centreline, plan and triangle files required for dozers or graders fitted with Leica Geosystems PowerGrade 3D Machine Control.

Define an alignment using a road job, then select plines or sets to export as a PLN file or a selected DTM to export as an XML.

Then load the files onto Leica UMC 3D Machine Control running PowerGrade software.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Road job: The exported centreline (.CL) file contains coordinates at chainages along the main alignment of the selected roadjob. Each record in the .CL file is in the format 0,chainage,L,northing,easting. Define one roadjob for each centreline.
3D (PLN):: Select plines or sets to export as a .PLN file. If you select any sets or plines, a .PLN is created. Each set or pline is written to the PLN file starting with POLYLINE followed by the colour number and point name. Subsequent lines define coordinates as easting,northing,elevation or easting,northing.
DTM:: Specify a DTM layer to be exported as a LandXML file. Limit the DTM to a boundary.
Create Files: Open the prompt Settings and output file name.

Close views then select the Plan, Profile and Sheet views, tile horizontally, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

PPS is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFSHEETVERT.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|planprofsheetvert	User-definable

PPSX

Close views then select the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

PPSX is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFSUPERXSECT.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|planprofsuperxsect	User-definable

PPX

Close views then select the Plan, Profile and Xsect views, tile vertically, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

PPX is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFXSECT.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|planprofxsect	User-definable

PPXS

Close views then select the Plan, Profile, Xsect and Super views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

PPSX is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANPROFXSECTSUPER.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|planprofxsectsuper	User-definable

PREDAREA

Select a set that represents a road frontage. Select sets that represent the remaining boundaries of an initial parcel of land. Configure Settings. Then click PredArea to create closed sets of predetermined area that represent lots within the parcel.

Frontage

Select a single set

Boundary

Select sets with common points that together define the remaining parcel boundary. The frontage and one of the boundaries must intersect.

Settings

Minimum area

Enter the minimum lot area in square project units. The area must be than zero.

Minimum frontage

Enter the minimum distance along the frontage of each new lot. The distance must be greater than zero.

Cul-de-sac radius

Enter a distance just greater than the largest cul-de-sac radius. Any curve with a smaller radius is considered to be part of the cul-de-sac frontage when considering setbacks.

Min rear length

Enter any minimum lot width at the rear setback line.

Lot side lines

Bearing: Enable entry of a bearing for the side lot lines.
Perpendicular: Enable creation of side lot lines perpendicular or radial to the frontage at the point where they intersect.

Hide overlapping lot lines

Turn off any sets segemnts that overlap.

Setbacks

Enter any setback distances.

Frontage: Enter the depth and width of setbacks from the frontage along tangents (straights), cul-de-sacs and other arcs.
None: No setbacks are considered
Rear: Enter the minimum setback depth and width at the rear of the lot.
Build env: Enter the minimum setback depth and width at the rear of the building envelope.
Show as: Create any setback lines as sets or plines
OK or Cancel: Accept changes to settings, or not.

Predarea

Create: Create one or more lots. Enter a starting lot number, a bearing if applicable, and locations near the centre each of lot.
Corner: Create a corner lot. Enter a bearing and a location near the centre of the lot.
Pivot: Create a lot given a fixed point on the frontage.
Settings: Return to Settings.
Undo: Undo one or more lots just created.

AdjArea	PredArea
Create single lot	Create multiple lots
Use set and pline boundaries	Use set boundaries
Create closed pline	Create closed set
Consider boundaries, area and direction or rotation	Consider frontage, minimum area, rear length, angle and setback

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Lots\|Predetermined area Cogo\|Predetermined area	Secured

Display the current view at previous extents.

Enter Client data for PLANSET into a form.

The project variables are:

PRJCLNT field	Project variable	EAT Code insertion aid	EAT Code
Client name	PRJD_CLNT_NAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CLNT_NAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CLNT_NAME}
Street address	PRJD_STRT_ADDR1	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_STRT_ADDR1	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_STRT_ADDR1}
Street address	PRJD_STRT_ADDR2	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_STRT_ADDR2	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_STRT_ADDR2}
City	PRJD_CLNT_CITY	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CLNT_CITY	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CLNT_CITY}
St	PRJD_CLNT_STATE	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CLNT_STATE	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CLNT_STATE
Zip	PRJD_CLNT_ZIP	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CLNT_ZIP	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CLNT_ZIP}
Phone	PRJD_CLNT_PHONE	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CLNT_PHONE	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CLNT_PHONE}
Fax	PRJD_CLNT_FAX	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CLNT_FAX	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CLNT_FAX}

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf	Draft\|ASAP-Project data\|Client data...	Field Data Module

PRJINFO

Enter General Project Information for PLANSET into a form.

The project variables are:

PRJINFO field	Project variable	EAT Code insertion aid	EAT Code
Project name	PRJD_PROJ_NAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_PROJ_NAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_PROJ_NAME}
1st Subtitle	PRJD_PROJ_NAME1	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_PROJ_NAME1	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_PROJ_NAME1}
2nd Subtitle	PRJD_PROJ_NAME2	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_PROJ_NAME2	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_PROJ_NAME2}
Job number	PRJD_JOB_NUM	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_JOB_NUM	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_JOB_NUM}
Department	PRJD_DEPT_NAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_DEPT_NAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_DEPT_NAME}

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf	Draft\|ASAP-Project data\|General information...	Secured

PRJLOC

Enter Project location Information for PLANSET into a form.

The project variables are:

PRJLOC field	Project variable	EAT Code insertion aid	EAT Code	Comment
Community	PRJD_COMM_NAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_COMM_NAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_COMM_NAME}
City	PRJD_CITY_NAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CITY_NAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CITY_NAME}
County	PRJD_CNTY_NAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CNTY_NAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CNTY_NAME}
State	PRJD_STATE_NAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_STATE_NAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_STATE_NAME}
Section number	PRJD_SECTION	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_SECTION	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_SECTION}	Integer up to 36
Township number	PRJD_TWNSHIP	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_TWNSHIP	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_TWNSHIP}	Integer
Township direction	PRJD_TWNSHP_DIR	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_TWNSHP_DIR	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_PRJD_TWNSHP_DIR}	North or South
Range number	PRJD_RANGE	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_RANGE	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_RANGE}	Integer
Range direction	PRJD_RANGE_DIR	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_RANGE_DIR	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_RANGE_DIR}	East or West

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf	Draft\ASAP-Project data\Project location...	Secured

PRJLTEXT

Link text to a PLANSET project variable.

Modify a selected text object to show a project variable for use with PLANSET.

Select a project variable set by PRJINFO (General), PRJLOC (Location), PRJCLNT (Client) or PRJSTAFF (Staff).

For example, you create a sample text object which displays SAMPLE TEXT in a title block with your desired font, size and colour. Then in PRJLTEXT you select text then the Client Name variable. The text is replaced by EAT text \PROJ{V,s,PRJD_CLNT_NAME} that displays any Client Name you specified by PRJCLNT.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf	Draft\ASAP-Project data\Link text	Secured

PRJSTAFF

Enter Staff data for PLANSET into a form.

The project variables are:

PRJSTAFF field	Project variable	EAT Code insertion aid	EAT Code
Project manager	PRJD_PRJMGRNAME	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_PRJMGRNAME	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_PRJMGRNAME}
Engineer of record Name	PRJD_ENG_REC_N	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_ENG_REC_N	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_ENG_REC_N}
Engineer of record Reg. no.	PRJD_ENG_REC_RG	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_ENG_REC_RG	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_ENG_REC_RG}
Engineer of record State	PRJD_ENG_REC_ST	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_ENG_REC_ST	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_ENG_REC_ST}
Surveyor of record Name	PRJD_SRV_REC_N	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_SRV_REC_N	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_SRV_REC_N}
Surveyor of record Reg. no.	PRJD_SRV_REC_RG	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_SRV_REC_RG	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_SRV_REC_RG}
Surveyor of record State	PRJD_SRV_REC_ST	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_SRV_REC_ST	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_SRV_REC_ST}
Designed by	PRJD_DESIGN_BY	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_DESIGN_BY	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_DESIGN_BY}
Drawn by	PRJD_DRAWN_BY	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_DRAWN_BY	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_DRAWN_BY}
Checked by	PRJD_CHECKED_BY	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_CHECKED_BY	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_CHECKED_BY}
Approved by	PRJD_APPROVE_BY	Project\|Variable\|PRJD_APPROVE_BY	\PROJ{V,S,PRJD_APPROVE_BY}

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	HELPTM, asap doc.pdf and tg-plans.pdf	Draft\|ASAP-Project data\|Staff data...	Secured

PRODUCTS

Generate a report showing the current serial number, purchase code and modules.

Products is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PRODUCTS which uses ABOUT. MacroPlay requires CAD module.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|products	User-definable

PROFILE

Create profile plines in the Profile view on a specified layer by interpolation from masked DTM layers along a horizontal alignment.

The alignment can be a pline or set. The profiles are interpolated along the horizontal alignment in segments according to the resolution in DISPLAYSET at either breaks (DTM links / triangle edges) or chainage intervals (and optionally HAL points). If the HAL is referenced to another HAL, each profile is created using the chainages of the parent HAL.

The profiles are broken at the chainage range, DTM edge and within dead areas.

So that the profile pline is referenced to the alignment, VIEWSET should have "Auto reference off" enabled for the profile view. If a pline exists on the specified layer that is referenced to the specified HAL, you will be prompted if you want to delete the previous profile.

The profiles are extracted from every valid DTM layer with a name matching the DTM layer mask in the Settings. Wildcards are allowed such as * for all DTM layers and DTM* for just DTM layers starting with the letters "DTM".

If a layer is isolated by LAYERSET, only that DTM layer is interpolated, regardless of layer mask.

Each pline is assigned the point colour and linetype of the DTM layer from which it is extracted.

Each pline also refers to the selected HAL. If the HAL is refers to another HAL, each profile is created based on the stations | chainages of the parent HAL. The station | chainage of each vertex of the profile is adjusted as required.

See also GCPROFIL, which selects by a layer list and multiple HALs, and ROADPROF which uses SURFACE manager.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Create profile	Secured	401

PROJECTV

List or edit all project variables.

Project variables relate to the project as a whole and are stored in the project file. Most variables are created and edited through commands. They are not properties or attributes of specific objects, nor are they initialisation variables stored in TMODWIN.INI.

Project variables can be displayed on EAT text, including variables you create. Do not use PROJECTV to modify variables that you have not created, unless you know what is likely to happen. If in doubt, ask for help.

Filter

Filter the list by entering project variable names with wildcards.

New

Enter a new project variable

Edit

Edit a project variable.

Name: Enter the project variable name of up to 27 characters
Type: Select Integer, Double or String
Value: Enter the new value

Delete

Delete the highlighted project variable

Report

Report the details of the project variables that match the filter to P3Pad.

Close

Close without further changes to project variables

See also VARIABLE, PROJINFO, PRJINFO, SYSTEM, EDITINI and DISPFEAT.

Command date	Guide		Source
12/03/09	HELPTM		Field Data Module

PROJINFO

Edit project variables for Description, Draftsperson, Revision and Drawing Number and display the created, last modified and last plotted dates.

For example:

From the File menu, select File menu, then Project Information...
Enter your name into the "Draftperson" field
In TEXT, click on EAT Codes... to open the EAT code insertion aid
Select a Code Type of Project
From the list of Options, select Variable
From the list of Variables, select AUTHOR
The displayed value of the AUTHOR project variable should be your name
Click OK to insert the EAT code \PROJ{V,S,AUTHOR} into the text
Select a location to place the text, such as in a title block
Click Text
Your name should be displayed as text.

PROJINFO field	Project variable	EAT Code insertion aid	EAT Code	Comment
Description	—	Project\|Title	\PROJ{T}	In the heading of all reports to P3Pad where the project file name and path are short enough
Draftsperson	AUTHOR	Project\|Variable\|AUTHOR	\PROJ{V,S,AUTHOR}
Revision	REVISION	Project\|Variable\|REVISION	\PROJ{V,S,REVISION}
Drawing no	DRAWING	Project\|Variable\|DRAWING	\PROJ{V,S,DRAWING}
Created	CREATED	Project\|Variable\|CREATED	\PROJ{V,S,CREATED}
Last modified	—	Project\|Modified	\PROJ{MM#/DD/YR H1:MM:SS} or similar	The date when the project was last saved. Choose from a range of formats.
Last plotted	PLOTTED	Project\|Variable\|PLOTTED	\PROJ{V,S,PLOTTED}	Only available after the first PLOT from this project

See also PROJVARS to edit survey description, PRJINFO for PLANSET variables only and PROJECTV for all project variables.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|Project Information	Field Data Module

PROJVARS

This function shows and allows editing of project variables for Description, Project number, project surveyor and survey date as well as datums, adopted survey marks and dates.

These values can all be used by EAT code text, such as in title blocks.

Use PROJINFO for user description, PRJINFO for PLANSET variables only and PROJECTV for all project variables.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

PSBOX

Create, delete and edit alignment-based plotboxes for PLANSET.

Create plotboxes

Create plotboxes along selected horizontal alignments using Plan Set Settings (PSSET).

Delete plotboxes

Alignments: Select horizontal alignments
Delete selection: Delete plotboxes associated with selected alignments that have no dynaviews.
Delete all: Delete all plotboxes in the project file created by PLANSET and with Planset naming convention but no dynaviews.

Plan plotboxes

Break

Break a plan view plotbox into two separate plotboxes that rotate to follow the alignment, at a specified station | chainage.

Join

Rejoin two previously-broken plan view plotboxes into one.

Move Matchline

Select a new location for a matchline between sheets or a matchline between broken plan view plotboxes. When moving a matchline between sheets, you are shortening one plotbox and lengthening the adjacent one. A matchline is the pline segment perpendicular to the alignment, and coincidental to the two adjacent plotboxes. A plotbox end is the pline segment that is perpendicular to the alignment and located at either alignment extreme.

Matchline: Select the matchline or plotbox end to be moved in the plan view.
Station | Chainage: Locate the new station | chainage.
Adjust others: Adjust the length of all subsequent plotboxes, so as to retain their original length.
Move: Move the matchline.

Profile plotboxes

Positioning

Reposition a profile plotbox relative to the boundary.

Plotbox: Select a plotbox.
Taller | Shorter: Increases or decrease the height of the selected plotbox by one major horizontal grid line interval configured in Plan Set Settings (PSSET). A vertically shifted profile view with multiple shifted segments adjusted by one segment causes all associated plotboxes to increase or decrease in height by the same amount.
Up | Down: Move the selected plotbox up or down by one grid interval.
Left | Right: Move the left or right edge of the selected plotbox, and the edge of the adjacent plotbox, by one grid interval.

Insert Step

Break a profile plotbox (or one segment of a vertically shifted plotbox) into two segments, each of which can be shifted vertically in order to accommodate steep terrain. Each profile view can have up to six segments.

Delete Step

Delete a vertically shifted profile plotbox segment. The portion of the alignment encompassed by the deleted plotbox is taken up by the adjacent plotboxes.

Plotbox visibility

Control the visibility of plan and profile view plotboxes.

Isolate alignment: Isolate an alignment so its plotboxes remain displayed in the plan view while all others are turned off. In the profile view, the objects and plotboxes associated with all other alignments are turned off, as well.
Show all: Display all plotboxes.
Hide all: Hide all plotboxes. Once you have placed the plotboxes, hiding them can help to reduce the clutter.

Create an index of drawings or an index of symbols. The index is automatically updated every time a change is made to the sheet configuration.

Locate index: Locate the upper left corner of the index.
Drawing: Generate an index of drawings at the specified location. If this index already exists, move it to the location and update or, if no location is specified, update in its current location.
Symbol: Not yet implemented.

An existing index of drawings is automatically updated every time a sheet is added, deleted, or moved within the plan set. To update the index to apply revisions to the configuration settings which control its appearance recreate the index without specifying a location.

Changes to sheet titles or alignment names do not require that the index of drawings be updated in order for these to be displayed. They are created using EAT text which automatically changes to display the current state of the object. If the length of a text object changes substantially, update the index so that it remains suitably formatted.

Manage sheet creation by PLANSET.

View individual sheets.
Get detailed information on a sheet.
Place the sheet insertion point marker.
Combine drawings from two sheets into one.
Change the order of sheets in the plan set.
Delete sheets.
Create blank sheets.
Create, delete or edit master sheets.

View

Select a sheet graphically or from a list, display the extents of that sheet, the next sheet or the previous sheet, or report Information about that sheet.

Plot

Plot selected sheets.

First | Last: Select a single sheet, or a sequential range of sheets within the same sheet queue.
Drawing List: Select a sheet from the list.
HAL: Select all sheets associated with the same alignment as the First sheet.
Plot: Plot the selected sheets.

Ins. pt

Select the sheet or master sheet, then click Place IP to insert a point marker as a solid colored area that fills the gap between sheets, or lies at the end of a sheet queue to mark where the next sheet will be created. The marker is a block named SHEETINS that contains a pline 1-unit square hatched by ten vertical pline segments, and is scaled horizontally to fit the sheet gap, and vertically to equal the height of the sheets in the queue.

Combine

Combine up to four alignment-based sheets into one (where they fit onto one sheet).

Reorder

Reorder a single sheet or a sequential range of sheets from one location to a new location within the plan set, and reassign all sheet numbers and drawing IDs. If you move a sheet from one sheet queue to another, the sheet is altered to take on the content of the new master sheet.

Delete

Delete Sheets a sheet or range of sheets.

Blank

Create a new sheet using Plan Set Type (PSTYPE).

Master

Create and delete master sheets, and assign a drawing ID prefix to an existing master sheet.

Create master

Every sheet within the plan set must be located within a sheet queue established by a master sheet. The sheet dimensions and content in a master sheet are taken from the base sheet to which it refers. Objects added to the master sheet appear in every drawing sheet in its queue. A base sheet must contain at least a plotbox establishing the size of the sheet. A standard border and title block is typically drawn on the base sheet within that plotbox. Consider the paper size and margin when sizing the plotbox. To prevent the plotbox plotting, place it in the plotter’s margin, or use a colour mapped to pen 0.

Base: Select the plotbox of the base sheet with which the master sheet is associated.
Loc: Enter the location of the lower left corner of the first master sheet in the plan set. Subsequent master sheets are created automatically, beneath the sheet queue that contains the sheet insertion point marker. All subsequent sheet queues are moved down one row.
Drawing ID prefix: Enter a drawing ID prefix to be assigned to the master sheet.
Create: Create the master sheet.

Delete master

Select a master sheet to delete. A master sheet can only be deleted if its sheet queue is empty. To combine two sheet queues, use Reorder Sheets then delete the master sheet of the empty queue. All lower master sheets and their respective sheet queues are moved up.

Relocate queue

Select the master sheet to be relocated. Change the order in which master sheets and their respective sheet queues are presented within the plan set, and update the sheet numbers, and reorder the drawing index.

Master sheet: Select the master sheet to be relocated.
Relocate: Relocate the selected master sheet into the sheet queue position after the one which contains the insertion point marker.

Edit drawing ID prefix

Enter the drawing ID for a master sheet.

Edit plan set configuration settings, save the settings to a file, or load a configuration settings file.

Settings for sheet types used by PLANSET are stored in the project file such as a prototype file, and can also be stored in an an external file. Use the settings libraries to easily switch settings. Most settings are specific to the current sheet type; a few are global.

File

Save configuration settings to an external binary .PSS file, or Load them.

Layers

Select the layers for the new plotboxes and sheets, and the layer lists for the dynaviews.

Sheet Configuration

Sheet separation: Enter the sheet separation in sheet units. This must be large enough for the sheet insertion marker to be easily seen between the sheets when the entire plan set is displayed.
Alignment separation: Enter the separation between up to four alignments on the same sheet, if they will fit.
Sheet outline colours: Select the colours of the master sheet and drawing sheets. Every master sheet and drawing sheet is surrounded by a closed sheet outline plotbox pline which can be used to plot the sheet, and is also a basic and essential element of the sheet.
On sheet locations: Enter offsets in sheet units to locate any dynaview, raster image or north arrow block. A raster image can be clipped to a dynaview or a rectangular region.
Plot box dimensions: Enter size of plan and profile plotboxes.

Labels

Specify text, offsets and colours for any included labels for Sheet title, Alignment name, Plan and Profile view titles, scales, Drawing ID, sheet number, Designed by, Drawn by, Checked by and Approved by.

Sheet titles: Every sheet title can be edited before creating each sheet. Otherwise, sheet titles entered here such as to "edit title" or "Plan and Profile" are created on every sheet for editing afterward, using EDIT.
Plan and Profile titles: Enter titles to label the plan and profile for a plan and profile sheet.
Scale templates: The horizontal and vertical scale template indicates the scale of the drawing in a template that contains literal text and a symbol (#). The # symbol is replaced with the current drawing scale value. For example: Horz. Scale: 1" = #' can be replaced by Horz. Scale: 1" = 50'.
X and Y offsets: Enter horizontal and vertical offsets in sheet units from the sheet outline plotbox to the insertion point of the label. Enter 0.0 to create the label centered along the length of the alignment.
Edit: Accept changes made to the currently highlighted label and highlight the next label.
Cancel changes: Click on another label or advance to the next label or click on Close, to cancel editing changes.

Profile Grid

Configure the grid intervals, grid colours, labels and visibility of the grid for profiles.

Grid intervals

Enter the intervals for major horizontal line, minor horizontal line, vertical line, elevation label and chainage | station label. To omit, enter 0.

Grid colours

Assign colors to Major Lines (horizontal and vertical), minor horizontal lines and the outline box.

Visibility

Display or hide grid lines. Minor grid lines can interfere with your ability to see the profile content clearly when displaying a sheet. Turning them off temporarily can help.

Labels

Configure the text style, formatting, and exact placement of station | chainage and elevation labels within the profile grid.

Station... | Chainage...

Configure the placement and style of station | chainage labels. See also End station | End chainage labels and Station equation | Chainage equation labels below.

Textstyle

Select the text style. Horizontal and vertical justification are automatically adjusted.

Colour

Select the colour for labels.

Template

Enter a template containing any literal text and \STA\ which is replaced by the station | chainage value. For example:

Template	Value	Result
\STA\	23+45.67	23+45.67
\STA\	2345.67	2345.67
STA \STA\	23+45.67	STA 23+45.67
Ch: \STA\	2345.67	Ch: 2345.67
Chainage \STA\ m	2345.67	Chainage 2345.67 m

Horz. offset

Enter the horizontal offset from the vertical station | chainage grid line being labeled to the insertion point of the label text. Typically 0.0.

Vert. offset

Enter the vertical offset from the profile grid outline box to the station | chainage label text. If registering the labels to the top of the grid, a positive offset places the bottom of the label text above the top grid line. If registering the labels to the bottom of the profile grid, a negative offset places the top of the label below the bottom grid line.

Registration

Place the labels along the top or bottom of the profile grid.

Rotation

Display intermediate labels as horizontal text or as vertical text, rotated 90° and reading from the right.

Format

Format station | chainage labels with or without + symbols. Since the label interval is an integer value, these labels cannot contain decimal values.

Placement

Select the horizontal justification and placement of the labels to the Left, Centre, or Right of the vertical grid line.

Elevation...

Enter the text style, colour, offsets, and placement of elevation labels.

End station... | End chainage...

Specify the text style, colour, template, offsets, format, rotation, registration, placement of the stations | chainages at the end of the grid, and whether to include them. Refer to Station | Chainage above.

Sta. equation... | Chn. equation...

Specify the text style, colour, template, offsets, format, rotation, registration, placement of back and ahead stations | chainages of chainage equations. Refer to Station | Chainage above. For example, enter Back station template "Back Station = \STA\" and Ahead Station template "Ahead Station = \STA\" for resulting text like "Back Station = 23+45.67" "Ahead Station = 22+12.94".

Create Grid

Create the lines and text making up the profile grid when creating sheets.

Match lines

Configure the placement and labeling of matchlines. Matchlines also identify the drawing reference of the adjacent sheet that contains the matching graphics.

Drawing Index

Configure the content and format of the drawing index.

Headings

Index Title: Enter a title for the index.
Sheet Number: Enter a heading for the sheet number column. To omit sheet numbers, leave this blank. Use the ^ symbol within the heading to position the underlying column of sheet numbers. Sheet numbers are right-aligned. A heading of SHT ^No. places the right edge of the sheet number column between the space and the N. If you do not use the ^ symbol, the right edge of the sheet number column will be one character position left of the right edge of the heading text.
Drawing ID: Enter a heading for the drawing ID column. To omit drawing IDs, leave this blank. Use the ^ symbol within the heading to position the underlying column of drawing IDs. The drawing ID list is left-aligned. A heading of DW^G ID places the left edge of the drawing ID column between the W and the G. If you leave the ^ symbol out of the heading name, the left edge of the drawing ID column will be one character position right of the left edge of the heading text.
Sheet Title: Enter a heading for the sheet title column. If the sheet title is longer than the heading the heading is centered. If not case, the left edge of the sheet titles lines up with the left edge of the heading.

Line spacing factor

Enter the line spacing as a multiple of the text height. This determines the spacing between text insertion points. A factor of 2.5 will therefore place white space between the text of 1.5 times the text height.

Column gap

Enter the gap in sheet units between columns.

Alignment-based plans

Sheet information to be included in the index for alignment-based plans. Sheets 1-3 are site-based plans. Their sheet titles are always shown. Sheet 13 is a miscellaneous sheet type. The titles of miscellaneous sheets are always shown. The remainder of the sheets are plan and profile sheets which are alignment-based. They are distinguished by the alignment names and the stationing | chainage limits shown on each sheet. The positions of insertion point markers in drawing lists are indicated by .

Colours

Select the colors of the text in the index.

Text styles

Select the text styles.

Border

Select whether to include a border, the border colour and the width of the margin, from the outer limits of the contained text to the border.

Symbol index

Not yet implemented.

Sheet counter

Designate the text object to total the number of sheets in the plan set. This is updated every time a sheet is created or deleted from the plan set. Select text on the base sheet or master sheet to be shown on every drawing sheet, via dynaview.

Close

Close plan set configuration settings.

Use Plan Set Sheet Assembly to:

Create individual sheets.
Add Images.
Move a plan or profile view around within a sheet.
Rotate a plan view.
Register objects which you manually create on a sheet to that sheet, or to a particular dynaview on the sheet.

Create sheets

Plotboxes: Select plotboxes.
Dynaimages: Create dynaimages with the sheets.
Add to sheet: Only displayed when double sheets are being created. Select an existing sheet of the same type that does not currently have a lower view drawn, so that the first of the selected plotboxes will be drawn as the lower view of that sheet, even if it is associated with another alignment. It will not allow you to select a sheet of a different type, or one that already has both an upper and a lower view. See Plan Set Sheet Type (PSTYPE).
Create sheets: Create sheets based on the selected plotboxes.
Cancel: Cancel sheet creation.

Add images

Dynaview

Select the plan view dynaview for dynaimages to create a separate dynaimage for each source image located within the plan view for which any portion lies within the designated extents.

Dynaview extents

Clip the dynaimage to the extents of the dynaview.

Rectangular

Clip the dynaimage to the default rectangular extents.

Display: Create and display a closed pline clipping boundary around the default rectangular extents.

OK

Create the dynaimages and delete any existing dynaimages of those dynaviews.

Cancel

Cancel add images.

Move view

Relocate a plan or profile dynaview within the sheet on which it was originally created.

Dynaview: Select a dynaview.
Incl. Assoc.: Move associated objects with the dynaview.
From | To: Specify the movement vector by a pair of coordinates.
OK: Move the dynaview.
Cancel: Cancel movement of the dynaview.

Rotate view

Rotate a dynaview around a location by an angle on a sheet. The corresponding north arrow is rotated to match.

Register objects

Close

Close Plan Set Sheet Assembly.

The clipping boundary pline can be edited by other commands while still using PLANSET commands, though it must remain closed.

Dynaimages that are no longer desired can be deleted within the Image Manager (IMAGE).

Create points perpendicular to a HAL by manually entering surveys with no electronic distance measurement, just a tape and levelling or tacheometry.

Measure with a level, a tape and a target on a rod. Adopt an instrument elevation.

HAL

Select a HAL

Chainage | Station

Enter the chainage along the alignment

Inst Elev

Enter the elevation of the instrument

PStation | PChainage

Offset: Enter a horizontal offset distance from the HAL; -ve to the left,+ve to the right.
Rod reading: Enter the target height
OK: Create the point on the current layer in the view with the HAL
Cancel: Cancel creating the point and return to PStation | PChainage prompt

Close

Return to the main PStation | PChainage prompt

Measure with a tape. Derive elevations from elsewhere. See also GC65.

HAL: Select a HAL
Chainage | Station: Enter the chainage along the alignment
Elev: Enter the elevation of the point
PStation | PChainage: Create the point
Close: Return to the main PStation | PChainage prompt without creating the point.

Measure with a tacheometer, a staff and a tape. Adopt an instrument elevation. See also GC60.

HAL

Select the horizontal alignment.

Station | Chainage

Enter the station | chainage along the HAL at which the reading was taken.

Inst Elev

Enter the elevation of the instrument

PStation | PChainage

Dist from center of inst to principal focus (c): Enter a C-factor for stadia reduction which depends up on the specific instrument used, but is typically 0 (zero).
Stadia interval factor coeff (K): Enter a K-factor for stadia reduction. This value depends upon the specific instrument used, but is typically 100.
Stadia interval: Enter a stadia interval or offset of the point with respect to the alignment. A negative value indicates an offset to the left. A positive value is to the right.
Rod reading: Enter the rod reading (target height) for each point. A negative value is added to the instrument height. A positive value is subtracted.
Vertical: Enter the vertical angle to each point.
OK: Create the point using the stadia values on the current layer in the view with the HAL and return to enter the next chainage.
Close: Return to enter the next chainage

Close

Close the stadia entry

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Point by chainage Cogo\|Point by station	Secured

PSTYPE

Select the type of sheet to create with Plan Sheet Assembly (PSSHEET).

Plan (alignment)

A Plan view along an alignment.

Double: A double sheet contains two plan views.

Plan and Profile

Plan and profile views along the alignments.

Double: A double sheet contains two profile views, or a plan and a profile view.

Cross-section

Cross-sections through DTM surfaces along an alignment in a roadjob.

Miscellaneous

An empty sheet for any content not created automatically.

2D blocks are ignored. Points are named with the block name.

Change the case of alphabetic characters in selected point numbers to Upper, Lower, Sentence or Title.

Upper: CHANGE TO UPPER CASE ALL LETTERS
Lower: change to lower case all letters
Sentence: Change to upper case the first character and change to lower case all other characters.
Title: Change to Uppercase the Initial Letters of the First Word and Words Between Spaces and Change to Lowercase These Common Short Words Without Punctuation: an of or a the is on but for and in

Report chainage | station, offset, elevation and name where xlines cross selected sets.

Create a boundary set around the portion of a DTM that drains to a point.

DTM: Select the DTM layer.
Drain: Select the layer for the created set. The default is the Layer name specified in HDEFS.
Pt: Select the drainage point.
OK: Create the set
Cancel: Cancel the command

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Hydro\|Drainage to point	Secured

PTINSIDE

Select points inside or outside all closed sets or plines on a layer.

The new selection can be used in commands by right-click and selecting Previous.

Objects inside closed objects can also be used in commands by right-click and selecting Inside.

23/03/23

Geocomp Update or $250

291

PTJOIN

See also SET to join points by ranges of sequential point number, AUTODRAFT to join points by name, GCJOINPT to join points by Geocomp code or GCJOINMP to join points with gaps.

08/02/22

Geocomp Update or $250

291

PTLAB

Create or edit point label blocks for use with LABELPOINT and HDMS.

Point label blocks are external blocks numbered from 001 to 255. They have names in the format PTLM???.BLK (for cm sheet units), and PTLAB???.BLK for inch sheet units, and are stored in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Blocks.

These blocks define point labels used to efficiently label multiple points. Point labels once created are not blocks, but properties of points. Point labels can contain a point number, easting, northing, elevation or description, with defined offsets, precision, prefix, justification, font, height, aspect, slant, colour and rotation (in 22.5 degree increments).

Load: Create a temporary point in the sheet view and sample text of a selected point label block.
Insert: Configure label type, offset, precision, prefix, justification, font, colour, height, aspect and slant.
Save: Save the point label block with a new number and description.
Cancel: Close point label block editing and delete the temporary point and text.

OPEN a new temporary project based on your prototype
In MEASUNIT, check that the sheet units are cm (or in), but not mm.
DELETE everything in the sheet view by view.
While in the sheet view, use PTLAB command to load a point label block.
- To edit a point label block, use Terramodel commands from the menus to edit the sample block shown.
- To create new point label block, or add a label to an existing block, use INSERT.
- To create a new point label block as a variant of an existing point label block, LOAD the block then SAVE with a new name and description, then edit that.
When you next run LABELPOINT, the description of the block may be added to the list of descriptions in [POINT_LABELS] or [POINT_METRIC_LABELS] of C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\p3server.ini (or its copy in VirtualStore). If not, add this manually.

To create a new point label block with point name and elevation 4.0 cm high to the left of the point:

OPEN a new temporary project
Check that the measurement units for sheet units are cm.
DELETE everything in the sheet view by view.
Run PTLAB command.
Load a similar point label block such as 078)2.0-Lt-NM/EL
Without leaving the PTLAB command make changes to the sample. In this case, Modify Scale around 0 0 by X 2.0 and Y 2.0
Save
Assign a Point Label block number that is not already used by a ptlm*.blk file in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Blocks (such as 201)
Enter a suitable short description (such as 4.0-Lt-NM/EL)
Save
EXIT Terramodel
Open C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\p3server.ini in a text editor
Save to a location that allows editing (e.g. Desktop)
Add the name to the end of the list of [POINT_METRIC_LABELS] like this 201=4.0-Lt-NM/EL
Copy the edited file to C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\p3server.ini, replacing the original
Restart Terramodel
OPEN a project with points
Label points with the LABELPOINT command.

Relayer and colour selected points by name according to a comma-delimited mapping file.

The Mapping file format is:

name,layer,colour

PLAY.MAP is a supplied example mapping file.

To relayer but not recolour, leave the colour field empty.

See also GCLAYCOL, AUTODRAFT, LAYERMAP and CHNGNAME.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
08/02/22	RG 1239	Modify\|Point layer/colour Modify\|Point layer/color	Geocomp Update or $250	40

PTS2ADC

Create points for testing AUTODRAFT.

Create three columns of arbitrary points on the current layer with names for testing numerical point and string field codes with AUTODRAFT.

Create closed pline or set around the extent of selected points.

The edge distances are controlled by LINKSET.

Copy selected points to a specified layer in the profile view to show obstructions, pits, trees and so on relative to profiles.

The chainage | station and offset are relative to the specified HAL.

A report shows Point number, Chainage, Offset, Elevation and Name.

Points with no elevation are shown in the report but not copied to the profile view.

Pts: Select points in the plan view.
Layer: Select the layer for the new points and plines.
Hal: Select the horizontal alignment.
Include leader line: Create 1.0m vertical pline at each copied point.
Join points: Join points in the profile view with a pline.
OK: Create points in the profile view at the chainage | station and elevation of selected points, create any plines, and report to P3pad.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

Export a list of coordinates in the format X Y Z PTNo. For example:

-10.29 -1.97 105.0 13
-12.00 -3.64 6.0 24
-13.79 -1.23 7.0 25

See also Export ASCII points (EXPORT), PTSOUT and GCPTSOUT.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	188

PTS2TRV

Creates a traverse file (.TRV) or append to an existing .TRV file. An occupied point (instrument point) and backsight point are specified for the selected side-shot (foresight) points.

.TRV is an old Trimble field file format.

Click the Filename button and specify a .TRV file name.
Select a backsight point.
Select the instrument setup point.
Select foresight points.
Click OK to save the points to the file.
Add more points
Close

TML date			Source
29/10/08			Field Data Module

PTSETATB

Replace feature attributes of sets with those of the first point in each set.

Optionally, include the Name attribute.

Import points from an ASCII file containing point definitions compatible with other software products.

Select from a range of coordinate survey formats.

Agtek
Civilsoft (1 and 2)
Geopak
Lewis and Lewis
Lietz SDRMap
LisCAD
TDS
Wildsoft

STORE101,351.23240000,571.21910000,250.0000*
STORE102,417.57860000,580.37270000,250.0000*
STORE116,367.53760000,514.20540000,248.0000*
STORE123,372.07230000,545.98590000,248.0000*
STORE237,344.31470000,540.81340000,246.0000*

STORE
101 351.2324 571.2191 250.0000 *
116 367.5376 514.2054 248.0000 *
117 402.7426 522.4720 248.0000 *
123 372.0723 545.9859 248.0000 *
237 344.3147 540.8134 246.0000 *

1,1,1,1,1
101,571.21910000,351.23240000,250.0000,,
116,514.20540000,367.53760000,248.0000,,
117,522.47200000,402.74260000,248.0000,,
123,545.98590000,372.07230000,248.0000,,
237,540.81340000,344.31470000,246.0000,,

101,351.23240000,571.21910000,250.0000,
116,367.53760000,514.20540000,248.0000,
117,402.74260000,522.47200000,248.0000,
123,372.07230000,545.98590000,248.0000,
237,344.31470000,540.81340000,246.0000,

Setup point: Enter a setup point
Edit Pt: Locate a point to be edited
New Elev: Enter the new elevation or enter an elevation difference from the setup point using @, or enter a vertical angle from the Setup point using P, %, Z, V or by selecting a set segment. The initial default elevation is the the existing elevation of the Edit Pt.

For example, enter "1.5%" for a grade 1.5% up from horizontal.
For a 1:150 grade, enter "R150:1" because the format is R vertical.

Refer to Terramodel User Guide for Coordinate Geometry Controls.

Modify elevation of a point based on slope and distance from another point.

Enter a Setup point, a point to be Edited, a distance and a slope.

Create an ASCII file containing point definitions compatible with other software and survey instruments.

Formats include:

CivilSoft 1 and 2
Geopak
Lewis and Lewis
Lietz SDRMap
LisCAD
TDS ASCII
Wildsoft

See GCPTSOUT which includes these all formats and more.

Close views then select the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views, tile, zoom all for each view then select Plan for the Current View mode.

PXPS is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY PLANXSECTPROFSUPER.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Macro\|Play\|planxsectprofsuper	User-definable

QISOLATE

Isolate or unisolate the current layer by ISOLATE button on toolbar or QI alias.

If the current layer has not been isolated by LAYERSET, QISOLATE isolates the current layer so it is the only visible layer, even if some other layer is currently isolated.

If the current layer is currently isolated, the isolation flag is removed, so all visible layers are displayed.

Since isolating a layer makes the layer visible, if the layer was previously invisible it will remain visible until it is next made invisible by a command such as LAYERSET.

Display profiles along the path between two locations, for all visible DTM layers matching the layer mask.

The colour of each profile is determined by the line colour of the DTM layer.

Update the display to see the effect of changes to the layers, grid or scales.

From

Select the location in the Plan view from which to start the profile.

To

Select the location in the Plan view to which to end the profile.

OK

Layer mask

Select the layers from which profiles are interpolated. Simple wildcard naming is allowed. The "*" is used to indicate that multiple characters can be substituted. (For example, a single "*" will display all layers and "DTM*" will display all layers beginning with the characters "DTM".)

Grid

Display the current grid as defined for the profile view using GRIDSET.

All

Zoom to the extents of all visible layers.

Zoom

Zoom to a window or use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out.

Update

Update the displayed profiles, grid and scales to suit the current settings.

Exaggeration

Auto VEF on: Apply vertical exaggeration that fits the profiles within the graphics area.
Auto VEF off: Apply the entered the vertical exaggeration.

Done

Close the quick profile display.

Cancel

Cancel

See also PROFILE which creates a pline and GCQP which updates the quick profile as you move the mouse in the Plan view.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Quick profile Toolbar button	Field Data Module	492

QSET

Create 2D traverses and lot boundaries quickly from bearings, distance and arcs.

Begin set

Locate the beginning of the set.

Assign lot numbers

Prompt for the lot prefix and lot number when closing the set for use by LABELSETS.

Add Pt

Brg: Enter the bearing of the next segment.
Dist: Enter the distance along the next segment.
Undo Pt: Undo the previous point and segment.
Curve: Enter curve properties for the next segment such as backsight bearing, radius, chord length, arc length, delta angle, tangent length, degree of curvature and left or right direction.
Close: Create a closing segment to the point at the beginning location.
Add Pt: Add the next segment.
Cancel: Cancel creating new points and segments.

See also ARC, GCARC, BLDG, BUILDING, TRAVERSE and TRAV2D.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Cogo\|Traverse\|Quick set	Field Data Module	64

QSGRIDIN

Import a grid of locations with elevations from a .QGD file, and corresponding .QRL file, exported from QSurv survey software.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

QSGRIDOU

Export a grid of locations within a pline box at a regular interval with elevations interpolated from a DTM to a pair of .QGD and .QRL files for use with QSurv survey software.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

QSURVOUT

Export a selected horizontal alignment, optional vertical alignment, and objects, to .HOR, .VAL and .CES files to suit Qsurv survey software, at Xlines and within chainage, offset and boundary limits.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

QUIKLSET

Scroll through each layer by name to display the objects and report and numbers of each object type on the status line.

Run QUIKLSET.
Select a layer by keyboard arrows or mouse scroll wheel.
Change any settings for the selected layer.
- Choose Auto All, to automatically zoom to the limits of the visible objects as settings are changed
- Chose Visible, to make the selected layer visible.
- Choose Isolate, to display only the selected layer.

If Isolate is ON, scrolling through the layers can be a quick way to see which layers are which.

If the layer selection is active (highlighted), scrolling with the mouse wheel only changes the active layer. Scrolling with the Control key held down zooms the image. If this behaviour is reversed in Windows 10, go to Settings | Devices | Mouse and turn off "Scroll inactive Windows".

Layer: Select a layer, by arrow keys or the mouse wheel.
Auto All: Display extents of visible objects and, if Isolate is ON, display the extents of each displayed layer in turn
Visible: Change visibility of the displayed layer
Isolate: If ON, display only objects on that layer and count objects of each type and in each view
Info: Report the colours, linetype, visibility, snapability and number of each object type of the displayed layer
OK: Modify the visibility and isolation of the displayed layer to match; Cancel the command

Move a selected intersection point along a horizontal or vertical alignment to a new location and calculate the resulting cut and fill roadway quantities.

Road: Select a roadjob.
Hor or Vert Align IP: Select an intersection point in a horizontal or vertical alignment.
New IP Loc: Select a new location for the IP.
Re Calc Volume: Calculate new cut and fill quantities from the modified HAL and VAL and stored templates and display total cut, fill and net in the Message Scroll.
Close: Close the command

Define your road with Roadjob Manager (ROADJOB), Shape manager (SHAPEMAN), Template Manager (TEMPLATE) and alignment managers (HALMANAGER and VALMANAGER) first.
Undo (UNDO) after moving an IP to return the alignment to the previous form.
GCQV is an improved version of QV.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
29/10/08	RG 1244		Secured	471

RAILCANT

Compute elevations for railway tracks defined by sets, from alignments and gauge.

H:: Select a horizontal alignment from a Plan view.
V:: Select a vertical alignment from a Profile view.
C:: Select an alignment in Profile view that specifies the cant in project units.
Start Ch:: Enter the start station | chainage.
End:: Enter the end station | chainage.
Settings: Enter the rail width (gauge) in project units.
Points:: Select points for which elevations are to be modified.
Apply Cant: Replace elevations on selected points with elevations computed from HAL, and VAL and Cant alignments.
Cancel: Cancel.

Report chainage, offset, cant and elevation difference of railway tracks at monument points.

Monument points, also known as TAMs, are fixed points beside a railway outside the extent of works.

CL HAL

Select a railway HAL.

Rail sets

Select the left and right rail of a track.

Monument Pts

Select monument points.

OK

Report at each selected monument point

Point number
Chainage
Offset to nearest rail
Cant (elevation difference between rails)
RL Diff (elevation difference between monument and nearest rail)
Track layout
Point name

Close

Close the command

Create or modify offset alignments for a railway by adjusting for cant and gauge.

Rail C/L

Select a railway road job with registered main and offset alignments.

Settings

Rail width: Enter the rail guage in project units.
Centreline midway between rails: Is the HAL the centreline midway between the rails, or do the rails rotate about the rail with the lower elevations at a half-gauge distance from the HAL?

Compute Hal/Cant offsets

Compute or modify offset alignments.

Cancel

Cancel

Create and register alignments with suitable names
- Horizontal alignments
  - Left
  - Right
  - Centreline
- Vertical alignments
  - Left
  - Right
  - Centreline
  - Cant
- Slope alignments
  - Left
  - Right
Create a roadjob with the centreline
In RAILWAY,
1. Select the roadjob
2. In Settings,
  - Enter the gauge.
  - Select whether the centreline is midway or the rails rotate about the lower rail.
3. Compute Hal/Cant offsets.

Specify the cant in project units by an alignment in Profile view.

For an example of a project file with suitably named alignments, see C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\Docs\&#8203Upline RailwayGC03.pro.

See also RAILCANT, GCHALOFF and GCVALOFF.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

RAIN

List the current Rainfall Intensity, Duration and Frequency database.

Report to P3Pad the table of rainfall intensities over a range of durations and frequencies from the .RNF file that is used for the Rational method at the current location.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Rainfall\|Rainfall reports	Secured

RAINT

Report to P3Pad the 6-hour and 24-hour total rainfall values in the current rainfall database file for the SCS method.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Rainfall\|Rainfall report totals	Secured

RANGE

Find the highest and lowest points within a boundary or along a set.

If the selected object is a closed set or pline, find the highest and lowest visible points within the boundary.

If the boundary is an open set, or you choose "Only use points along the set", find the highest and lowest points along the set.

The numbers and elevations of the highest and lowest points are reported in the message scroll. The points are labelled with circular symbols which can be turned off or exploded into text with LABELPOINT.

Non-contourable points are considered. 2D points are ignored.

Import Carlson .RW5 survey file for Raw Data Editor.

Use Import Script Manager (IMPORTSMGR) to turn on the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script supplied with Geocomp Updates.
Copy an .RDE file that contains only comments, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\Docs\EMPTY.RDE, to your survey files location with a new name and extension .RDE.
Use the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script (IMPORT) to import the .RDE file with the new name.
Raw Data Editor (RDE) creates a new survey job with the description "[new file name.RDE] imported at [time and date]".
Exit RDE.
Run RAW2RDE command.
Browse to select a .RW5 file created by a data collector with Carlson software.
Select OK to import the survey, convert the survey to .RDE format, display the survey in P3Pad and display the Procedure button "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen".
Click "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen" to open RDE.
Use Alt-Tab keys together to bring P3Pad editor to the current window.
In P3Pad, use Control-A to Select All text.
Alt-tab to RDE window.
In RDE, use Control-C keys to paste text.
Exit RDE to process the survey and create points.

Create a table of text and plines showing R, I, T, A, S, V, E & W properties of a selected curve.

Select the vertical alignment design criteria from a design criteria file.

For each roadway to be designed with Road Design Editor (RDVALEDIT) or Superelevation Editor (SUPERELEV), select the design speed, functional classification, terrain, stopping or passing distance factor, number of lanes, maximum superelevation rate and predefined design criteria files.

The superelevation design variables are stored with the project file and can therefore be included in a prototype file.

Road job

Select a road job.

Roadway

Select a roadway from that roadjob.

Design speed

Select a design speed from the the design speed increments in the design criteria file.

Vertical profile design criteria

Design Criteria File

Enter the name of the roadway design criteria file (.RDC) for this roadway. The .RDC file contains criteria for the geometric design of the horizontal and vertical alignment of roadways issued by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASHTO).

Browse...

Select the name of the .RDC file. AASHTO.RDC has units of miles per hour and feet; AASHTO_M has units of kilometres per hour and metres. Use a file with units that match your project.

Functional Classification

Classify the road from a list of names such as Freeway or Rural Minor Arterial.

Terrain

Select Level, Rolling or Mountainous terrain. This controls the maximum allowable roadway grade criteria.

Default K Factor Basis

Select the basis for default K factors assigned to vertical curves. Assign K factors based upon the absolute minimum safe passing sight distance, the absolute minimum safe stopping sight distance, or the desirable minimum safe stopping sight distance.

The design criteria for safe passing sight distance applies to crest vertical curves only. If this is the default, sag curves are designed with absolute minimum K factor for safe stopping sight distance.

Superelevation design criteria

Superelevation Rates File: Enter the name of the superelevation design criteria file (.SPR) for this roadway. The .SPR file contains superelevation rate tables issued by AASHTO or Roads and Transportation Association of Canada (TAC).; Browse...; Select the name of the .SPR file. AASHTO.SPR has units of miles per hour and feet; CANADA.SPR has units of kilometres per hour and metres. Use a file with units that match your project.
Number of Lanes: Select the number of lanes (2-lane or 4-lane) for the rate table in the .SPR.
Maximum Superelevation Rate: Specify a maximum superelevation rate for the default for the Max. superelevation in Superelevation Editor (SUPERELV).

Save

Save changes to design criteria of the selected roadway.

Cancel

Cancel without changes

Configure road design settings.

Control the display of the graphics screen editors and the operation of the roadway design computation.

The Road Design Settings enable:

Display Interactive Design, Shade Areas or Clip Subsurface Lines.
Template shapes, Subgrade shapes, Transitions, superelevations, Curve Correction or Phases in design calculations.
Display Lines, Labels, Areas, Axis, Centreline or Volumes.
Attaching templates to the roadway HAL/VAL or finished cross sections
Skewed cross section volumes
Extrapolation of surfaces

Display

Interactive Design

Perform a design interactively, and display the resulting graphics in consideration of the roadway’s interaction with the existing ground surface and subsurface materials.

On: Show the way the components of a roadway design are applied and projected to existing ground surfaces.
Off: Do not project the roadway to the ground surface. In XSECTIONEDT, only the ground surface and subsurface strata is shown. In TEMPLATE and SUBGRADE, the ground surface is not shown, and the template shapes are shown as defined without clipping or projecting to the ground surfaces.

Shade Areas

Shade closed shapes and individual material regions within SHAPE, TEMPLATE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT.

Clip Subsurface Lines

Clip the lines of surfaces to within the template wherever they intersect. Surfaces that are not affected by the design are not shown.

On: Only those surfaces that are affected by the design (existing ground surface and subsurface strata; those to be excavated) are shown in TEMPLATE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT.
Off: Subsurface lines continue through the template, showing all defined surfaces.

Display Grids and Labels

Lines: Display interior grid lines in TEMPLATE, SHAPE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT.
Axis: Display the horizontal and vertical grid axis lines and tick marks in TEMPLATE, SHAPE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT.
Labels: Display the grid offset and elevation labels, and surface slope labeling in TEMPLATE, SHAPE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT.
CL: Display a solid vertical line at the centerline of the template or cross-section, and turn on the station | chainage label in TEMPLATE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT. If CL is off but Lines is on, display a centerline in the centerline colour with the specified grid type instead of a solid line.
Areas
: Display a summary of cross-sectional areas (in project units squared) for each encountered material.
Volumes: Display a summary of volumes in units indicated by UNITSSET as incremental volumes from the previously viewed cross-section (not accumulated).

Use in design calculations

When the Interactive Design is ON, select which road design components to apply to the design or analysis. These affect the design of the roadway, which in turn indirectly affects the way the design appears within the various editors.

Template Shapes: Include template shapes.
Subgrade Shapes
: Include subgrade shapes.
Transitions: Include roadway transitions.
Superelevations: Include superelevations
Curve Correction: Include curve corrections to the templates
Phases: Consider individual phases.

Roadway Hal/Val: Use the roadway HAL as the horizontal control and the roadway VAL as the vertical control for the templates. This option is typically used when designing a new roadway.
Finish Cross Sections: Use the horizontal and vertical positions of the outside edges of the finish cross-sections as the controls for the templates. This option is typically used for rehabilitation work such as adding a new lane.

Skewed cross-section volumes

Compute average end area volumes using cross-sections that are skewed (not perpendicular to the alignment). Avoid skew angles that exceed 20° and cause large errors.

Extrapolate surfaces

Extrapolate the extents of surfaces outward when viewed in the cross-section, for the purposes of volume computations. The extrapolated extensions are not shown in the various editors. Surfaces are extended by lengthening the first or last segment of the line as needed.

On: The top existing surface is extended to tie into the proposed surface and subsurfaces of existing materials are extended to the width of the top existing surface.
Off: The top existing surface defines the lateral limits of all other surfaces, including the proposed design. All surfaces are clipped to the outer limits of the top existing surface. Subsurfaces of existing materials are not extended. Instead, the length of the surface cross-section defines the lateral limits of the material. For volume purposes, the material is limited by a vertical line at the edge of the surface cross-section down to the next material.

Accept changes

Cancel

Cancel without accepting changes

Raw Data Editor collects all imported survey job data and displays it in a single format. RDE includes an interactive editor that allows you to view, search, edit and delete raw data that is displayed in a consistent format independent of the data source. RDE automatically converts the angles and distances of the raw observations taken in the field into best-fitting least squares coordinates. RDE also allows you to control settings and tolerances used during computation.

Add new information to raw survey data, to modify the current raw data, or to delete (or comment out) raw data you do not want to use. RDE also allows you to define the initial assumptions for the calculation process and to set tolerance definitions for three computation levels of raw data.

As you enter the new information, the RDE recomputes (and optionally adjusts!) the coordinates for all the stations and sideshots.

When you exit RDE, the raw data survey locations have been optimally calculated and already integrated with your project. Return to further edit your raw data later.

Data imported using IMPORT Scripts is automatically brought into RDE.

Label and join the points with AUTODRAFT after exiting RDE.

RDE processes raw data measured and recorded with a total station, and other survey data. RDE automatically finds and calculates traverses, resections and intersections and can automatically adjusts the resulting coordinates by Least Squares variation of coordinates. RDE does not need to be told how to compute any station. Backsight and foresight information and the order of station occupation are irrelevant. RDE only requires that a point ID is recorded with each observation and that good surveying technique is used in the field.

The RDE allows you to import GPS Real-Time Kinematic data consisting of the vector difference between a local base station and the receiving instrument and that associated covariance matrix. If you import GPS data, you must define a local geodetic grid with GEOSYS beforehand.

RDE also processes level data, such as the data imported from the Trimble DiNi digital level or entered by hand. RDE automatically computes level data before any other gathered elevation data.

Terramodel imports data in many different formats produced by total stations and other survey data files. RDE displays all these types of raw data in the same simple, easy-to-understand and user-definable format regardless of the source of the data. If the format of your total station is not listed in the Import Script Manager (IMPRTSMGR), ask for our advice.

RDE allows use of three levels of computation for coordinating stations: Primary, Secondary and Tertiary. These levels determine which parts of a control network to compute first, second or third and can control traverse routing. Stations on higher levels can be treated as fixed locations when computing stations on lower levels. Alternatively, the whole network can be computed together using least squares and computation levels used just to weight the various parts of the network differently. Initially each survey job is assigned a computation level during the import process. Subsequently each occupied station can be assigned its own specific level. Each level has separate computation settings and tolerances.

With RDE change, delete or insert survey information without modifying your raw data files. Update observations based on field notes and new information and make corrections.

RDE computation takes place behind the scenes. The RDE user tracks the computation process through messages which include multi-angle reduction results, traverse and least squares reports and tolerance failures.

No other command is available until you exit RDE.

The RDE window can be maximised, minimised and restored. The window is displayed where the previous window was last located. If that position is not visible, because that display has since been disconnected or turned off, the window is not visible and import scripts appear to lock up.

Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

FIXRDE is an alias which updates the Windows Registry to reset the window to a location on the primary display, and to configure the Raw Data Appearance to show "Data field emphasis" and "Smaller data tags".

There are no scripts to import surveys formatted in Raw Data Editor syntax, but surveys can be copied from the Raw Data Editor into any text editor to make edits and saved as .RDE files. These surveys can be copied and pasted back into RDE.

The description of any survey job imported into RDE using a script is in the format "FILE NAME.EXT imported at [time and date]". The description of any new survey job is " created at [time and date]". These descriptions can’t be edited in RDE.

To add a survey to Raw data editor with the name of an imported .RDE file:

Use Import Script Manager (IMPORTSMGR) to turn on the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script supplied with Geocomp Updates.
Use a file manager to copy an .RDE file that contains only comments, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\Docs\EMPTY.RDE, to your survey files location, with a new name and the extension .RDE.
Use the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script (IMPORT) to import the .RDE file with the new name.
Raw Data Editor creates a new survey job with the description "[new file name.RDE] imported at [time and date]".
Copy from the .RDE file that has your survey.
Paste into Raw data editor

FLD2RDE creates .RDE data from 12D .FLD field surveys. RAW2RDE creates .RDE data from Carlson .RW5 surveys.

For more details, refer to Raw Data Editor help from the Index submenu of the Help menu (HELPRDE), Terramodel User Guide Chapter 9, FDM User Guide, RDE White Paper and Using RDE for Survey Control.

The basic network methods require the CAD module, and the least squares methods require the COGO module.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPRDE, UG Chapter 9, FDM User Guide, rdewhitepaper.pdf, Using RDE for Survey Control	Edit\|Raw data editor	Field Data Module	DC 8

RDGUIDE

The Road Job Workflow Guide is a wizard designed to help you create a basic road job with roadway data and provide a place from which to access HALs, VALs, and xlines associated with your roadways when you need to review or edit them.

If you have any data that you want to use in your road job, such as lines or surfaces, import them before you use the Road Job Workflow Guide. For more advanced road job tasks, use related commands, such as Road Job Manager (ROADJOB), Roadway Manager (ROADWAY, Horizontal Alignment Data (HALDATA), Vertical Alignment Data (VALDATA), Segment Editor (SEGEDIT) and GCXLINE.

Create a road job by naming and describing it, or select an existing road job (ROADJOB). When you create a road job, a roadway of the same name is created by default.
Create a HAL by entering point of intersection (IP) coordinates (HALDATA), by entering segment geometry (SEGEDIT), or by picking a pline or set, or select an existing registered HAL (HALMANAGER).
Add any station | chainage equations (HALMANAGER, Review the IPs coordinates of the HAL (HALDATA) or segment geometry of the set (SEGEDIT) and report bearings, distances, stations | chainages and coordinates (REPORTS Alignment).
Add cross section lines to default left and right extents (XLINES) at regular intervals or at transition points along your main HAL.

Define a design by specifying an existing ground surface and either a design surface (SURFACE) or a template (TEMPLATE).
Review and edit the road job if it includes a design surface (XSECTIONMANAGER).

Parts of a road job can include

Road job
Roadway
Horizontal alignment (HAL)
Vertical alignment (VAL)
Cross section (xline)
Design
Surface

Terramodel project: Must have at least one road job and one roadway defined to perform a roadway design.
Road job: Must have at least one roadway defined.
Roadway: Must have at least one HAL defined. While every road job must have a main HAL, a VAL is never associated with the road job itself. It is associated with a roadway. Must be defined by both a HAL and a VAL if the road design is template-based.
HAL: May be designated as the roadway's main alignment, indicating that it is the HAL on which cross-section stationing is based.
VAL: Optional, and assigned to a specific roadway

A basic road job hierarchy follows this structure:

Project Road job
- Roadway
  - HAL
  - VAL

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	Instant Expert: Roadway Data Processing Training Guide: Designing a Roadway User Guide from pages 354: How to use the Roadway Commands	Roads\|Road job workflow guide	Field Data Module	Geocomp 10 User's Guide

RDSCACALN

Import an alignment from a Caice geometry report .TXT file exported from RDS.

Enter RdsCacAln at the command line.
Browse to select a CAiCE® file.
Click Import.
Select alignments from the file.
Select "Make Road" to create a Road Job for each alignment, cut and fill materials as necessary, and existing and finish layers.
Select whether to create all points in the file, just the points in the alignments, such as PI, PC, PT, and RP., or no points.
Click OK

Configure settings for creating a DTM from a roadway (ROADDTM).

Name

Enter a default name of up to 17 characters for new points and breakline sets that do not have names from point codes.

Surface

Select the surface from which to generate the DTM.

[Finish Design]: Create sets from the top of the finished design.
[Subgrade Design]: Create sets from the finished design outside of any subgrade areas but modified to coincide with the bottom of the lowest of any subgrades.
Any existing surface: Create sets from a surface defined in defined in Surface Manager (SURFACE)).
Any design surface: Create sets from any surface defined by a level in defined in Template Manager (TEMPLATE).

Point code

Include only points that match this point code in the DTM. * and ? can be used as wildcards. To select all points on the surface, enter *. Omitting a point code prevents ROADDTM from creating any DTM points.

Chainage | Station Range

Enter the beginning and ending chainages | stations along the road job for the DTM.

Width

Create over the full cross section or over only one side of a roadway.

Roadjob: Create the DTM with respect to the alignment for the current road job.
Roadway: Create a DTM with respect to the alignment for a roadway within the current road job. This means that the only data that will be created will come from the design for the specified roadway. Select a roadway from the list box to the right.
Full cross section | left side only | right side only: Create sets across the full cross-section, only on the left side of the alignment, or only on the right side. These settings are also used by CSTAKE to limit a construction staking report.

Offsets

Create additional points that are offset vertically and horizontally from a designated cross-section node. This feature is intended primarily for the generation of construction staking reports where you may often wish to stake points that are not actually nodes in the cross-section.

Vertical: Enter an amount by which Terramodel will vertically shift the points it calculates from the selected surface. A positive value shifts the point elevations up, a negative value shifts the point elevations down.
Horizontal: Enter an amount by which Terramodel will horizontally offset the points it calculates from the selected surface. The horizontal offset is measured in the plane of each cross-section. Positive values offset away from a roadway centerline and negative values offset toward a roadway centerline.
On ground: Create a new DTM point based on the northing and easting of the corresponding point on the design surface (offset as indicated if applicable), deriving its elevation from the existing ground surface at the resulting location. One example of where this option might be useful is to calculate points at a defined distance outside of the slope tie point for slope staking reports.
On slope: If there are horizontal offsets, determine the inside slope at a point on the design surface, continue that slope to the horizontal offset distance entered in the Horizontal control and create a point. It can be useful for creating temporary grades for a string line that a motor grader or other machines can follow.
At elevation: When horizontal offsets are used, determine the elevation of a point on the design surface and create a new point based on that elevation and the horizontal offset distance entered in the Horizontal control. This option is provided for those cases where you must use the design elevation.
Point code: Designate a point code or point code name filter that identifies the cross-sections nodes from which offset points are to be created. In doing so, only those points with point codes that match the point code filter will be offset as indicated in this dialog box. Designate that all points to be created on the DTM be offset as indicated by placing a * here.

Objects to create

Points and Breaklines

Create points at surface nodes and breaklines that connect those points.

Run breaklines along only, or along and across.
Build breaklines through point codes and shapes, or shapes only.
Project subgrade to finish surface holding slope or at a specifies slope, for fill and cut conditions.
Points plus daylight line.
Exclude daylight points and line.

Daylight Line Only

Create points and breaklines only at the intersection of the outside roadway tie slopes and the original DTM.

Points only

Create only points at surface nodes.

Computation parameters

Compute at

Xlines: Create points at xlines
Interval: Create points at the specified chainage interval
Xlines and Interval: Create points at both xlines and the specified interval
Thin computed cross sections: Remove points created at intervals unless the points are greater than the tolerance from the true alignment. Points created at xlines are not thinned.

Depth surface: Create points with with depths (elevations relative to the existing (top) surface listed in Surface Manager (SURFACE)) or elevations.
OK: Accept changes to Road DTM Settings
Cancel: Cancel changes to settings

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Settings\|DTM... Channel\|Settings\|DTM...	Field Data Module	482

RDSECHO

Report data in a project for a selected road job.

Echo data: Select which of these to include: Materials, Phase names, Shapes, Hals, Vals, Settings and RoadJob.
Report listings: Specify the order of items in the report
Report
Close: Close the command; Generate the report
Print to screen: Report to P3Pad
Print to File: Report to a .CSV file

Import an alignment from a Geopak geometry report format exported from RDS software.

Edit the functional classification, distance and grades in a vertical design criteria (.RDC) file.

Design criteria file

Enter the filename of the roadway design criteria (.RDC) file to be edited.

Browse

Select the roadway design criteria file.

Maximum roadway grades

Specify maximum roadway grades for design speeds.

Functional classification: Classify the function of the roadway from the list in the design criteria file.
Grade table...: Display the table of maximum grades at design speeds for Level, Rolling and Mountainous terrain for the selected functional classification.

K factor basis

Select the basis for minimum rate of curvature (K factor) from

Passing absolute: the absolute minimum safe passing sight distance.
Stopping absolute: the absolute minimum safe stopping sight distance.
Stopping desired: the desirable minimum safe stopping sight distance.

K factor table...: Display the table of K Factors at design speeds in crest and sag curves for the selected K Factor basis in the design criteria file. Absolute minimum safe passing sight distance criteria only apply to crest curves.

Round grades to nearest %

Enter the percent grade multiple to which roadway grades are rounded when graphically locating a PVI. For example, enter 0.04 to round the grades to an even multiple of 0.04% and recompute the station | chainage and elevation of the PVI.

Round curve length to nearest

Enter the curve length multiple to which the curve lengths are rounded up. If blank or 0.0, the VC length for the K factor is computed exactly.

Maximum change in grade w/o a vertical curve

Enter the maximum allowable algebraic change in % grade that can occur at a PVI without requiring the use of a vertical curve. A VC will not automatically be inserted at a PVI during visual editing when the grade change is less than or equal to this value.

Vertical curve design controls

Enter the default Design Settings (DESIGNSET) for vertical alignments including Eye height, Object height, Headlight height and divergence angle.

Curbed section min. Grades

Not yet implemented

OK

Accept changes to design criteria

Cancel

Cancel changes

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Alignments\|VAL design criteria... Channel\|Alignments\|VAL design criteria...	Secured

RDVALEDIT

Edit the geometry of a vertical alignment in a roadway based on the geometric design criteria.

Dynamically drag PVIs and vertical curves into locations that matches the alignment and the ground profile and insert the minimum acceptable vertical curve.

The alignment is limited by the geometry of adjacent curves and the design criteria, taking care of design constraints such as absolute minimum or desirable minimum K factors associated with safe stopping or passing sight distances and maximum allowable grades.

The design criteria are established by RDVALDESCRT and DESIGNSET.

Insert a PVI

Clear Lock PVI and click on the tangent segment. The alignment attaches to your cursor, and the focus advances to Loc as you drag the PVI and its vertical curve into place.

Place the PVI visually with a free point snap, or use any other point snapping modes, or click on Edit to further constrain or fully specify the geometry.

The design criteria limits the maximum grade associated with the alignment’s functional classification and terrain type. Vertical curves are based on the K factors and stopping or passing distances.

Move a PVI

Clear Lock PVI and click on the vertical curve or the PVI. The PVI attaches to your cursor, and the focus advances to Loc as you move the PVI. The vertical curve adjusts its length to maintain its current K factor as you drag the PVI, as do the adjacent vertical curves since moving a PVI changes an adjacent tangent segment grade. Place the PVI visually, use a point snap mode, or click on Edit.

Delete a PVI

Clear Lock PVI, click on the VC or PVI, then while dragging it, click on the Del. button.

Adjust a VC length

Turn on Lock PVI to lock the PVI in place, click on the curve or the PVI. The length is altered so the curve passes through your cursor, as long as the solution is within the allowable range of curve lengths. Click Edit to explicitly specify the curve’s geometry.

VAL

Select the vertical alignment and PVI (intersection point) or vertical curve to be edited, or the tangent segment into which a new PVI is to be inserted.

Lock PVI

Specify whether the PVI location is to be locked or editable.

Loc

Enter the location of a PVI or through which the vertical curve passes.

Edit

Edit a PVI location or vertical curve data by constraining the visual editing process or by defining a PVI location and vertical curve design. Most geometry can be edited, while PVC and PVT locations are computed and displayed.

Select "Hold" to hold that value constant.

After partially constraining the design, click on OK to resume visually editing the alignment under that constraint. For example, constrain either the roadway grades or the elevation of the low point on a curve, and still dynamically edit the alignment. When you have data sufficient to fully specify the design be held constant, the other controls are disabled. Then, when you click on Calculate button, the values in the other controls are calculated based on the constrained values that define the curve geometry, and when you click on OK, the revised alignment geometry is shown.

Static text indicates the functional classification, design speed and terrain type for the selected alignment.

PVC

% In: Enter the grade approaching the point of vertical intersction (PVI). A positive grade slopes up in the direction of stations | chainages, and a negative grade slopes down.
Sta | Chn: Display the computed station | chainage of the point of vertical curvature (PVC).
Elev: Display the computed elevation of the PVC.

PVI

Sta | Chn: Enter the station | chainage of the PVI.
Elev: Enter the elevation of the PVI.

PVT

% Out: Enter the grade departing from the PVI. A positive grade slopes up in the direction of stations | chainages, and a negative grade slopes down.
Sta | Chn: Display the computed station | chainage of the PVT.
Elev: Display the computed elevation of the PVT.

High / low point

Sta | Chn: Enter specify the station | chainage of the VC low point or high point.
Elev: Specify the elevation of the low point or high point.

Crest k factor

K

Enter the K factor.

Use

Select the basis for minimum rate of curvature (K factor) from

Stopping: the stopping sight distance.
Stopping absolute: the absolute minimum safe stopping sight distance
Stopping desired: the desirable minimum safe stopping sight distance
Passing absolute: the absolute minimum safe passing sight distance
Passing: the passing sight distance

Sag k factor

K

Enter the K factor.

Use

Select the basis for minimum rate of curvature (K factor) from

Stopping: the stopping sight distance.
Stopping absolute: the absolute minimum safe stopping sight distance
Stopping desired: the desirable minimum safe stopping sight distance

Curve length

Enter the curve length.

Sight distance

Enter a specific sight distance, either stopping or passing. The VC length will be based on the sight distance.If the Crest K factor considers passing sight distances, and if the VC is on a crest, the object height associated with passing sight distance will be used. Otherwise, the object height associated with stopping sight distance is used. Object heights are specified in Design Settings (DESIGNSET).

Hold

Select Hold to hold the value when calculating. Any three hold buttons (the crest and sag K factors are considered one button) are enough to create the VC.

Calculate

Calculate and display the other parameters which result from the defined solution. If a solution is successfully found the dialog box will be updated to reflect the calculation. If the solution could not be calculated, an error message is displayed.

OK

Accept changes to the VC

Cancel

Cancel changes to the VC

ID

Use GEOMINQ to display the curve data in the message area, or click on a tangent to display the length of the tangent segment and its slope.

Del.

Delete the current PVI.

Undo

Undo previous alignment editing operations.

Close

Close the VC editor.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Alignments\|Val editor (design criteria based) Channel\|Alignments\|VAL editor	Secured	412

RDX

Create road cross-sections at each xline in the Xsect view, and display the cross sections as dynaviews in the Sheet view.

Create cross-sections in Xsect View, draws a plotbox around each cross-section, and insert dynaviews, arranged within columns on the cross-section sheet.

There are settings for properties of sheets, columns, cross sections, tables and layer names. These settings can be exported and imported.

All values are in sheet units unless otherwise noted. Use cm or inch sheet units for best results.

Select a Road Job | Selected Surfaces

Select a horizontal alignment and surfaces by Road Job, or by a HAL and DTMs.

Road Job: Select a road job, and list some surfaces in that road job.
Hal: Select a HAL record and select surfaces from DTM layers.

Chainage | Station Range

Select beginning and ending chainages | stations. The defaults are from the alignment.

Erase ALL Cross Section Sheets and Dynaviews

Erase all previous cross sections, for all alignments, or not.

Overwrite ALL other Cross Section Sheets for Alignment

Overwrite all cross sections for the alignment, or add more cross sections to sheets.

All of the cross-section of a particular alignment at a particular station | chainage is displayed in the dynaview. To have two distinct sets of cross-section sheets associated with the same alignment, use two distinct alignments, or employ layer lists to control the visible contents.

Sheet properties

Enter the height and width of the new sheets, the location in the sheet view of the origin of the first sheet and the separation distance between sheets. The height and width should be less than the available space on the paper and in any title block.

Column Properties

Enter the height, width, separation and offsets of columns of cross sections. The width times the maximum number of columns plus separations must be less than the width in Sheet Properties. Column height equals (sheet height) minus (2 * Bottom). Column width equals (sheet width / number of columns) minus (2 * Left) minus (Separation * (Max number of columns – 1)).

Select Axis labels and Grids to create a labelled grid over each column.

Size

Enter the height and width in sheet units of the columns that contain the cross-section drawings.

Placement

Auto Comp

Automatically compute the Height and Width of the columns.

Separation

Enter the horizontal separation between adjacent columns, in sheet units.

Max Number of Columns

Enter the maximum number of columns that for a sheet.

1st Column Offset From Sheet Edge

Bottom: Enter the vertical offset from the bottom of a sheet to the bottom of the cross-section column.
Left: Enter the horizontal offset from the left edge of a sheet to the left edge of the first column of cross-sections on the sheet.

Axis labels

Enable drawing and labeling of the horizontal axes for the entire column.

Grids

Enable the display of horizontal and vertical grid lines within the cross-section columns.

OK

Accept changes to cross section column properties

Cancel

Cancel changes

Cross Section Properties

Specify the scale, placement, labels and table of cross sections.

Scale

Enter the horizontal and vertical scale.

Match scales

Reset the XSect View scales to match the plot scales.

Placement in Columns

Configure the order and separation of cross sections.

Minimum separation

Enter the minimum separation between adjacent columns.

Centerline Offset

Centered: Locate the centreline (0.00 offset from the alignment) at the centre of the column.
Auto: Locate halfway between the left and right extents of the section at the centre of the column.
Offset from column: Locate the centreline at the entered offset from the left of the column.

Place cross sections

Stack sections from Bottom to Top, or from Top to Bottom.

Axis Labels

Create labelled axes over each section.

Roadway labels

If a roadjob was selected, label cross sections with elevations and slopes according to shape classes. For example, label pavements with grades and existing, finished and subgrade elevations.

Quantity Label

If a roadjob was selected, label cross sections with volume quanties between sections.

Chainage (or Station) Label

Label each section with the chainage (\STA\) and additional text. For example, in the template field enter "Ch=\STA\" to create the label "Ch=100.00".

Table Settings

Label each section with a table of offsets and elevations.

Side box labels

Include a side box with layer names

Table Datum Level

Locate the vertical datum of the top of the table, by the nearest major grid, an offset below the minimum elevation or an absolute elevation.

Label Datum

Enter the description and number of decimal places for the datum label.

Table Rows

label the Horizontal Offset, Northing, Easting, Design elevation or elevation difference between two surfaces.

Swap order of Table Rows

Turn on for offset and existing surface at the bottom of the table; off for them at the top.

Interval settings

Create columns of labels at even offset intervals, breaks in slope, where two surfaces intersect (catch) or at crossing HALs to be selected when creating the sections. crossing 3D HALS.

Block Name

Select a block to insert at crossing HALS if 3D.

Label header

Create labels in a box above the datum showing Chainage, Scale factors, Centreline coordinates or direction.

Tick and Dropline settings

Mark all Profiles with tick marks: Insert short tick mark plines
Mark vertical lines with Tick Mark: Insert tick marks or drop lines from the specified surface

Layers

Specify layer names and colours for Sheet border, Column border, XS Linework, Station | Chiange labels, Axis lines, Axis Ticks, Axis Labels, Major Grids and Minor Grids. For current layer, specify layer 0. For layer colour, specify colour 0.

Import RDX Settings

Import settings from an .RDX file.

Export RDX Settings

Export settings to an .RDX file.

Create

For each Xline, create plines in the XSect view for each surface, add any labels, tables or grids, create a plotbox and create a dynaview in the Sheet view.

Cancel

Cancel without creating any more sections

Create cross section plots from a roadway in a style different to the usual RDX. For most situations, RDX is preferred.

The TML name is RDX_GC. If RDXGC does not run from the command line, create an alias from RDXGC to RDX_GC or enter RDX_GC.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $500	492

RDXLINES

Create xlines along a registered road alignment with default extents on the current layer.

Xlines are plines that define the locations of cross sections along an alignment.

Register a horizontal alignment (HALMANAGER).
Set the current layer to XLINES (for example).
RDXLINES command.
Select a registered HAL.
Select the Default Type.
Modify or accept the default left and right Xline extents.
Select another Xline type.
Create the Xlines.
Change the xline type or default extents and create any additional xlines.

Horizontal alignment

Select a registered horizontal alignment.

Xline

Type

Check the defaults then select an Xline type, other than Defaults.

Defaults

Left | Right: Enter the default left and right offsets for all Xline creation and roadway reporting commands including XLINES, GCXLINES, ROADSPOT and GC42AB.
OK: Accept changes to the default offsets
Cancel: Do not accept changes

HAL Pts

Begin | End: Enter beginning and ending chainages | stations.
Xline: Create xlines perpendicular to the HAL at each of the PC, PT, TS, SC, SS, LS, ST and PI points with no arcs, to the default left and right offsets.
Cancel: Do not create Xlines.

Interval

Begin | End: Enter beginning and ending chainages | stations.
Int: Enter the interval.
Xline: Create Xlines perpendicular to the HAL at the interval and within the range to the default left and right offsets.
Close: Do not create Xlines.

Point

Point: Enter a location or use the mouse to create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at the mouse location to the default left and right offsets.
Xline: Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at the entered location to the default left and right offsets.
Close: Do not create Xlines.

Chainage | Station

Enter a chainage | station or use the mouse to create at the mouse location a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL to the default left and right offsets.
Xline: Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at the entered chainage to the default left and right offsets.
Close: Do not create Xlines.

Pline

Pline: Select a pline.
Xline: If the pline crosses the HAL, modify the pline into an Xline by changing the name to XLINE and referring the pline to the alignment.
Close: Do not modify the pline.

Close

Close the command

Xlines which are plines that:

Have only straight segments
Have the name XLINE (in capital letters)
Refer to a set or pline alignment in the Plan view
Cross the alignment to which it refers

If, and only if, any pline meets all these conditions, it is an Xline, regardless of visibility, layer, colour, number of segments or direction.

Define the parameters of a reach for a specified set.

If you have not previously assigned reach attributes to the specified set, REACH will and ask if you want to create a reach.

Name: Enter a reach name of up to 80 characters
K: Enter a value in hours for the storage constant.
X: Enter a unitless value to express the importance of the inflow and outflow in determining storage.

HROUTR, which routes hydrographs through reaches, uses the Muskingum method of stream flow routing.

Its storage constant, K, is the ratio of storage to discharge and is frequently calculated as the travel time through the reach. One way to estimate K is to determine the velocity of the channel at 75% of the peak flow rate. Using this velocity and the length of the reach, you can determine the travel time.

X expresses the importance of the inflow and outflow in determining storage. Values of X range from 0.20 for trapezoidal channels to 0.45 for concrete lined channels. For a simple pond, the X value would be 0, whereas X would be 0.5 when the inflow and outflow are equally important.

REACH attributes are attached to set segments, and a set can connect several basins or ponds. The order in which the set connects the points determines the direction of flow in the reach. The first point is always the most downstream end of a reach and always a pond, while the upstream point must always be a basin or a pond.

HROUT combines the outflow hydrograph from a reach with any other basin or reach hydrographs that enter a pond, and stores them as a composite inflow hydrograph for the pond.

Use HRLIST to view the effects of a single reach.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08	UG 405	Hydro\|Routing\|Create reach from set	Secured

READATTB

Suffix to point names all attribute values defined in ATTRIB records for each point in the specified DC file, which has a point number matching a point in the Raw Data Editor (RDE).

You have the option of including the attribute name in addition to the attribute value.

ATTRIB values from some points in raw survey DC files, especially GPS points, may not be imported. Use READATTB if the Trimble raw survey data (dc) import script does not suffix any required ATTRIB values from the DC file to the point name. If ATTRIB values have already been added to the point name when imported from the DC into RDE, the attribute values are duplicated in the name.

READATTB does not assign ATTRIB values from the .DC file to Terramodel attributes. See FYATBIN for that.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

REARLOTL

Replace segments in a set with a single segment.

Rear lot line segments: Select multiple segments with a mouse
Straighten: Replace the selected segments by a single segment between the first and last endpoints and delete the points which are no longer used.
Close: Close the command

Use REARLOTL to replace a rear lot line created by PREDAREA composed of multiple straight or arc segments with a single straight segment across the rear of the lot.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	RG 1245	Cogo\|Lots\|Straighten rear lot line Cogo\|Straighten rear lot line	Field Data Module

RECENTER

Relocate the centre of the active view window to a specified coordinate.

Enter RECENTRE or hold down the Shift key then click on the mouse wheel.

See also GC34 which can recentre at a point number.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	View\|Recenter View\|Recentre	Field Data Module	47

REDO

Restore the most recent changes made by UNDO.

Only changes stored in the Undo buffer can be restored. The size of the Undo buffer is set by SYSTEM to a maximum of 19,999 objects.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Redo	Field Data Module

REDRAW

See also GCREDRAW which also resets the Plan view scale so point labels are legible.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	View\|Redraw Toolbar button Function key F3	Field Data Module	132

REFER

Refer selected objects (Objs) to one selected reference object (Parent) such as the current active alignment.

This process works as a natural by-product of creating horizontal alignments, vertical alignments, labelling the alignments and creating dynaviews around portions of the alignments to create fully annotated plan and profile sheets.

For example, multiple overlapping dynaviews can show only showing the objects that they are supposed to.

Objs: Select objects.
Parent: Enter or select one record number to be the "Parent", or "Ref Obj" of the selected objects. Leave blank to clear a Parent | Ref Obj.
OK: Update the reference objects of the selected objects.
Cancel: Cancel without modifying reference objects.

Multiple "child" objects can refer to (reference, be a child of) only one "parent" (reference) object. Each parent may in turn refer to another object. This is the "family tree".

Terramodel determines the great-grand parents of the dynaview, and plots all objects, with a reference, that are descendants of the great-grandparent, with the exception of objects, and their descendants, that are children of other dynaviews.

Where an object has the same record for both parent and child, objects will not display correctly in dynaviews. Use REFER to clear the parent of one of these objects.

ID command shows the record number of the selected object (Obj) and its parent object (Ref Obj).

If an active alignment has been set by ACTIVE, commands that prompt for horizontal alignments suggest that alignment by default. Objects in the profile view which refer to an alignment other than the active alignment are hidden.

Xlines refer to alignments. EAT and Along text can refer to attributes of a parent object with {\PAR}. Commands that label and plot alignments such as PLANSET and LSEC1 refer labels to vertical alignments which in turn refer to horizontal alignments.

A DYNAVIEW refers to a plotbox. An objects that refers to a visible parent, such as a plotbox pline, is displayed whether or not they fall within the limits of the parent. If you refer any object to the parent of a dynaview (the plotbox) it is plotted with the dynaview. All other objects are clipped to the limits of the plotbox.

Objects with parents that are not a part of the tree, can be hidden by Auto off when editing a dynaview.

In LAYOUT, the offset lines refer to the centreline of each road, but the centreline is typically not referenced. With Auto off enabled, the offset lines are not displayed in a dynaview. Refer the dynaview and centrelines to the same object so they are displayed.

Use RELAYREFto relayer objects to their layers of their reference objects.

Terramodel also uses the term "reference" for unrelated concepts such as "reference planes" (ELEVREFPLANE), "reference projects" (REFFILE), "reference stations" (RDE), "reference surfaces" (SURFACE), "Geodetic Reference Systems" (COORDCON) and matching properties (MATCH).

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Reference	Secured

REFERADD

Add multiple reference files to the Reference File Manager.

Browse to select multiple files.

Select a new location for reference project files.

Use REFERPTH to select a location for reference files that are listed in Reference File Manager (REFFILE) but cannot be found because either the master project file or at least one of the listed reference project files has been moved.

Reference File Locations: Browse to select any .PRO file in the folder where the reference files are now.
Change Reference File Paths: Change the path of every reference file listed in Reference File Manager to the selected folder.
Cancel: Cancel the command without changing paths.

REFERPTH modifies all paths to the one path. To refer to multiple paths, use REFFILE to select each reference file separately.

Manage reference files for a project.

Reference files are displayed while working on a master project.

The Terramodel project that you open is the master file and is, by default, editable. Divide your job into several reference files, each addressing a different aspect of the overall design. If someone else works on a file to which you refer, and saves their work, see those changes. A team of people can collaborate on a project, each simultaneously editing a different portions, as contained within particular project files, while optionally viewing other related project files.

The layer settings for a reference file are separate from the layer settings used when that file is an active, editable file. This duplicate set of layer settings is used for display only within the master project. When you open the master project, the referenced project is displayed according to the layer settings stored in the master project. When you save duplicate layer settings, only the master project file is updated.

If you change the status of a referenced file to active, its own project layer settings are reinstated. If you change the layer settings while it is still active, the layer settings will be saved with the active project settings; they will not be saved with the master file. Edit the layer settings from the context of the currently activated reference project, without affecting those settings in the current master project.

Reference file properties include the file location to enable multiple users to refer to the same file on a central server. If you move the reference files, select the files in the new location.

Close all other commands before running REFFILE.

Project: List the currently registered reference files with a prefix, a project name, and associated visiblity, snap, lock, and active parameters. The opened project is listed as 0, the master project, and is, by default, the active project.
Prefix: Enter a prefix of up to 4 characters or accept the default integer prefix. This prefix is used by PCOPY to select reference files.
Add: Select a project to add to the reference file list.
Remove: Select a project to be removed from the list of reference projects on OK and indicate by R in the right-most column.
Lock: Set the project to a read-only state, if it is not locked by another user and mark with an asterisk.
Unlock: Set the project to a read-write state and removes the asterisk.
Visible: Toggle on or off visibility of objects in any inactive reference project within Plan view and mark with V if on. An active project is always visible. REDRAW to refresh the display.
Snap: Toggle on or off selectability of objects in a reference project and indicate with S if on. To snap to an object in a non-active reference project, select by object snapping; running snap modes are not functional.
Color as ref:: Display all objects in a selected reference file in a single color. This overrides the layer color settings and individually assigned colors. This feature can be used to distinguish reference projects.
Activate: Select the active project. Only one project can be active, and thus editable, at a time.
Layer settings: Display Layer settings for the reference project
OK: Accept the changes
Cancel: Close without accepting any changes

Only objects in the active project can be edited.
With the exception of layer settings, only those settings within the master project can be edited.
A project file must stand alone. No operation may be performed that would result in a project file which can not be opened by itself, without certain reference files. For example, in the active project, you can not create a set of points that reside only in other projects.
A master project can not reference itself.
Nested references are not shown. If a reference project references another project, the objects in the other project are not displayed.
Raster images loaded within a reference project are not shown.
TML commands can only react with objects located within the active project.
A layer list, defined in a reference project, can not be assigned to a dynaview created in the master project.
Layer list definitions may not include member layers contained in a referenced project.
Running snaps are nonfunctional when snapping to objects in a reference file. A specific object snap must be selected in all cases.
Within the plan view, the visibility of the objects in each project is controlled by the current visibility setting for that project, as established in the Reference File Manager dialog box. Within the other views, however, only those objects in the currently active project are displayed. The current project’s objects are always displayed, since activating a project, automatically sets its visibility setting on.

The Reference File Manager dialog box presents a list box showing the name and the project reference prefix of the master project and each of the reference projects. The list is sorted alphabetically by the prefix. It also displays the properties of each project, identifying the one that is currently active and those that are locked, and noting those for which the visibility, snap, and color as reference setting is enabled.
To add a reference project to the list, click Add. Click the reference file you want to add, and click Open. When a project is added, it is given a default integer prefix.
To remove a reference project from the list, click the project, and click Remove. The Remove button toggles the currently selected project for removal. All projects marked for removal are removed when you click OK. After removing the reference to a project, redraw the screen to make its objects disappear.
To edit a project file prefix, click the desired project in the list and type the desired text into the Prefix control.
To establish the active project, double-click the project, or click the project, and click Activate. The project is labeled Active.
To keep others from using a reference project, click the project and click Lock.
To allow others to use a reference file you previously locked, click the project, and click Unlock.
To change the visibility, snap, or color as reference status of a reference file, click the file name, and tick the box.
To change the reference color of a reference file, click the file name, and select the colour.
To change the layer settings of a file, click the file, and click Layer Settings. The layer settings of the selected project can be altered, even if it is in a read-only state. However, those altered settings will be saved with that project only. Any changes you make to the Reference File layer settings will not be visible when you open the Reference File within the Master Project, as the Master Project maintains layer settings for the reference file which you may also change.
Click OK to close the Reference File Manager dialog box and put the new settings into affect. REDRAW to display new files you have added.
To view the latest version of a reference project, either activate the reference file to automatically reload it, or close and reopen your master project to reload all reference files.
Reopening the master file drops all locks on reference files.
Use LISTREF to determine the folders of the reference files.
Use REFERADD to add multiple reference files.
Use REFERPTH to update all paths after moving projects.

Reference files allow multiple users to simultaneously access data in the same project. To prevent losing data, only one user on the network can edit a project file at a time. When a file is in an editable state, the current user must lock the file. The following rules outline the procedures of locking and accessing reference files over the network.

Enable file locking for each Terramodel version by checking the Lock file on open check box, within the Server group box of the System Configuration dialog box. Every computer residing on a network should maintain Terramodel’s file locking in an enabled state. If you do not do so, the Terramodel project files that you open or reference will not be locked. In that case, other users on the network may be capable of editing the same file while you do so. This can result in loss of either person’s edits as one user overwrites the work of the other.

When file locking is enabled, as you open a project, or lock a reference file, Terramodel creates a lock file of that same name, in the same directory as the project file, using a filename extension of .PLK. The presence of such a lock file, related to the project that one user is trying to open or lock, indicates to Terramodel that another user has locked that file. This prevents that other user from opening that file as a master project, or from activating it in a read-write state. As the user who has locked a file closes that file normally, the lock file will be deleted. In the even of an abnormal termination, such as a power failure, the lock file may have to be manually deleted before any user other than that whom created it can again open its related project file. The user who created a lock file, left as a result of abnormal program termination, can however, open the project file once again without having to delete the lock file.

The file lock setting affects only the creation of the lock file. Terramodel will not open a locked file, even if file locking is not currently enabled on the system. The following notes assume that file locking is enabled on all systems on your network.

When you attempt to open a project, Terramodel verifies that it is not currently locked. If the project is available, Terramodel opens it as editable and puts a lock on it for you. While you have that project opened and active, it remains locked; no one else can edit that project. However, another user can use it as a reference file.

If you have created a reference link to a project, and attempt to make it an active project (that is, editable), Terramodel checks to see if it is currently locked. If the project is locked, you can not activate it. If the project is not locked, Terramodel locks it, reloads the project (to update any possible changes). This allows you to edit it and save your edits. This only happens for reference projects. The master project remains locked until you close it. When you activate a project, the previously active project will remain locked. If you wish to make it available for editing by others on the network, you must unlock it. Locking Non-active Reference Projects If you need to temporarily activate another project to edit it, you can retain your lock on the currently active project file. This prevents another user from locking that project and preventing you from reactivating it. When you activate the second project, Terramodel retains your lock on the previously active project. To release your lock on a project after deactivating it, use the REFFILE to unlock it. You can also lock a reference project other than the active project, as long as it is not currently locked.

When File Locking is ON and Terramodel crashes and AUTOSAVE works as expected, re-open the project and continue work.

Scenario 1a: File Locking OFF, AutoSave ON.: Basil is working on a project and several editable reference files when Terramodel crashes. He goes to lunch. In the meantime, Jo edits the master project and saves her changes. Nguyen edits one of the Reference projects and saves his changes. Basil comes back from lunch, starts Terramodel, recovers and saves his work. All of Jo's work and all of Nguyen's work is gone. None of the three (or more) parties involved has any way of knowing the others' use of the files. Hours of work could be lost.
Scenario 1b: File Locking ON, AutoSave ON.: Basil is working on a project and several editable reference files when Terramodel crashes. He goes to lunch. In the meantime, Jo attempts to edit the master project. File Locking prevents her. Nguyen attempts to edit one of the Reference projects. File Locking prevents this too. Basil comes back from lunch, starts Terramodel, recovers and saves his work. No work has been lost. The lock files are owned by Basil, so there's no need for Basil to manually remove them after the crash. Jo and Nguyen can chew Basil out for going to lunch with the files locked, but no data has been lost.
Scenario 2a: File Locking OFF, AutoSave OFF, Reference files in use.: Basil opens project A and references C. Nguyen opens project B and references C. Each makes the reference editable. Each time Nguyen or Basil saves, the other's changes to C are overwritten. Neither has any way of knowing the other's actions. Hours of work could be lost before the "accident" is discovered.
Scenario 2b: File Locking ON, AutoSave OFF, Reference files in use.: Basil opens project A and references C. Nguyen opens B and references C. Either Basil or Nguyen can make the reference editable, but not both at the same time. No work will be lost.

REGALIGN

Register selected sets and plines in the Plan as horizontal alignments, in the Profile view as vertical alignments, and in the Profile view that refer to selected horizontal alignments, as vertical alignments.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	66

REGROUP

Change the group of each selected object that is on a layer name with an integer value from 0 to 65535, to match the layer name.

Objects on any other layer name are not regrouped.

Relayer selected objects from one layer to another.

See also GCCOPY, LAYERMAP, LAYERSET, LAYUSTN, FIXDTM, GCNEARLN and GCOFLINE.

For a set to be a breakline it must be on the same layer as the points.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Relayer	Field Data Module	40

RELAYFIG

Relayering lots that are closed shows which lots still need to be examined.

RELAYFIG is helpful when cleaning up lot boundaries after digitizing or import.

Relayer objects, selected by object or by layer list, to the layers of their reference objects.

Remove all DTM links from the active project.

Removing DTM links can save memory space and .pro file size for archiving, emailing, and uploading to survey instruments.

Every command that requires a DTM automatically regenerates the links.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	DTM\|Remove links	Field Data Module

REMTRIS

Remove set segments on the selected layer with lengths equal to the nominated grid interval or the interval multiplied by the square root of 2.

Use REMTRIS to remove superfluous triangle edges imported from a DTM on a square grid.

Renumber points one at a time with incrementing point numbers.

Enter the new point number then select a point. The number of the selected point is immediately changed to the new number, or the next available number.

After each change, the default new point number is set to the next available point number.

To specify whether to change the Point number, Layer, Colour or Name, select Properties.

Points in the Raw Data Editor must be renumbered in RDE instead.

Compress: All: Renumber integer points in a project to consecutive integers starting from 1. Any gaps in the sequence are removed. Alpha point numbers are not changed.
Compress: Some: Renumber all selected points to consecutive integers starting from a specified number. If any of the new point numbers clash with existing point numbers, no points are renumbered. At least one of the selected points must have an integer number; the others can be integer or alpha points. If all the points have alpha point numbers, RENUM a point first.
Compress: Shift: Add specified shift value to selected integer point numbers. If any of the new point numbers clash with existing point numbers, no points are renumbered.
Record: Select the points for Some or Shift.
Start: Specify the Starting integer point number for All or Some.
Shift: Specify the positive or negative integer value to add for Shift.

Sets retain connections to renumbered points.
Point numbers associated with raw data can only be changed within the Raw Data Editor.
Use RENUM to select points one at a time.
Use GCRENUM to renumber points in the direction of sets.
Use ASM01 to renumber points in chainage |station order.
Use ADD2PTNO to add a prefix or suffix to point numbers.
Use GC79 to renumber points to match their point names.
Use PTS2NAME to rename points to match their point numbers.
use EDIT to edit a point.
Use RDE to edit a point in raw data.
Use RENUMREC to reorder record numbers.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Renumber points	Field Data Module	42

RENUMLOT

Increase (or decrease) all selected lot numbers by the same integer value.

For selected lots (closed sets), with lot numbers (names) that start with an integer within the specified range, replace the lot numbers with new numbers equal to the sum of the integer and the increment.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

RENUMREC

Copy selected objects, other than points, to the next available record numbers, then delete the old objects. The new objects have higher record numbers and so display and plot later. They can also be thought of as over, above, in front of or on top of the other objects.

The new record numbers are the next available. If there were no gaps in the sequence of record numbers before running the command, all the new objects will have record numbers higher than all the objects that were not selected. Such gaps are created by any command that deletes objects, such as DELETE and RENUMREC. Gaps are removed by any command that refreshes record numbers, such as SAVE and EXIT.

To ensure renumbered records are in front (or over or above), first SAVE. To renumber records so they are behind (or under or below), first DELETE sufficient objects with lower record numbers to create a big enough gap in the numbering.

Sort the new record numbers in one of three ways:

Sort on Names: Copy unnamed records first then copy in order of alphabetical name.
Sort on Groups: Copy group 0 records first then copy in order of integer group.
No Sort: Copy records without sorting, which is noticeably quicker for large datasets.

If "sort on pen" is not enabled in PLOT, objects are plotted in increasing record number.

To renumber a text record and create new hatching behind it, see TEXTBACK.

Two different points cannot have the same point number and therefore cannot be copied to new records while keeping the old numbers.

Record numbers of points cannot be modified. To force points to the top, create a gap in lesser record numbers and then use RENUMREC to renumber higher records into that gap.

To reverse the order of selected records, use REVRECNO.

If point numbers don't matter, TMXOUT then TMXIN might do a similar job.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $250

REPORTLT

For each straight segment of selected sets, report the start point number, end point name, bearing from the start point to the end point and the segment length.

This report is ideal for tabulating sets drawn from corner points to reference mark points.

The report is comma-delimited. Save to .CSV for use in spreadsheets to add headings, text styles and columns for extra data such as plan numbers.

Segments containing arcs are ignored.

See also CSV2TAB, LABELTABLE, LISTLOTS, Alignment REPORTS and GC80.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	27

REPORTS

Report coordinate geometry of sets, plines or points in user-definable formats.

Report on selected objects using a report definition selected from a report definition file. The report definition file is the first TMODWIN.RDF in the TSP, unless a user-defined .RDF has been selected.

Reports are written to P3Pad editor for editing and saving in .TXT or .RTF formats. To display a saved .TXT file, use TEXT with $File:. To Find and Replace characters in the resulting TXT file, use SNRFILE. To configure P3Pad, see GCREPORT.

Report:

Select a report format. Reports in the default TMODWIN.RDF file often include:

HAL: Horizontal alignment in Geocomp SDS84 format
Alignment: Horizontal alignment in detail
Closure: Bearings, distances and coordinates around lots
Layer Col Length: Layer, colour and length
Legal Writer (ft): Legal descriptions of lots in metes and bounds
Geometry: Geometry in a report similar to GEOMINQ
Stakeout HAL: Stake out of alignments
Sta & Offset: Station and offset
Chn & Offset: Chainage and offset
Sta Off Elev: Station, offset and elevation
Chn Off Elev: Chainage, offset and elevation
Vertical: A report of a vertical profile
Vertical-Detail: A detailed report of a vertical profile

Objects:

Select objects

Setup

Enter values for chainage increment, vertical increment, setup point or backsight bearing, if applicable.

User

Select an .RDF file other than TMODWIN.RDF. The path and file is remembered in the current project file. To be the default in new projects, update your prototype. Reports in TMOD_AUS.RDF refer to chainage rather than station. Reports in TMOD_USA.RDF refer to station rather than chainage.

Generate the report in P3Pad

Cancel

Cancel the command without generating the report

A definition file can store formats for different reports. Each report is stored under a different name of up to 16 characters (including spaces). The first section of the report establishes the header information, abbreviations, and standard calculation defaults. The second section establishes the output format for the data. Refer to installed .RDF files for examples. Geocomp Systems can create report definition files for you.

Blank lines and lines starting with # are ignored.
The first valid line contains the report name for you to select from the list in REPORTS.
The second valid line contains five characters that must be set as either "Y", to enable a feature, or "N".

1

Enable reporting points at the specified station | chainage.
2

Enable points to be interpolated and reported along a vertical alignment at the specified interval.

3

Enable prompts for the Setup Point and Backsight Bearing. These values are used for stakeout-type reports.

4

Reserved for future use.

5

Reserved for future use.
The third valid line contains up to five settings:
1. The maximum number of characters per line.
2. The characters used for degrees, minutes and seconds. Where a space character is required, use a single underline (_).
3. The Report Heading Code, for which there are four options:
  
  N
  
  No heading required.
  
  T
  
  Print heading on first page only.
  
  P
  
  Print heading (defined in \TITL\ section) on each page.
  
  H
  
  Use standard Cogo heading.
4. (Optional) substitution of special text for certain bearings. When set to Y, this user-defined text is substituted wherever a bearing is exactly 0°, 90°, 180° or 270°. Typical text would be "due north", etc.
5. (Optional) The system of coordinate/bearing/distance rounding used for curves.
  
  C
  
  Use rounded bearings/distances through curve centers.
  
  R
  Round the first point coordinates before using them in curve construction. Documentation for other lines
Two lines that define the text used for curve and deflection angle direction.
Eight lines define the text for the direction of the concave part of a curve.
Eight lines that define the text used for the direction along the arc of a curve.
Four lines that define the bearing format for when a bearing is requested and substitutes the correct numeric values for the "\" character. If the special bearing option is on, four additional lines of text are required to define the four special bearings (for example, "due north", etc.).

The second section of the definition file contains the output format code, which consists of phrases or sets of instructions. The first phrase is a title phrase and is used at the start of each report. Because there are 31 possible types of geometry that can be encountered, the report can contain 31 additional types of phrases.

The phrases for geometry and some example reports are illustrated in pages 450–456 of the Terramodel Reference Guide.

Each phrase must end with the < character so REPORTS knows when the phrase is complete. Not all possible phrases have to be listed in a report format, but the order in which they appear should follow the way they are presented above. If REPORTS encounters a geometric configuration not listed, it will default back to the preceding phrase. For example, if you want the same information for all curves you need only a CBEG phrase from the curve grouping.

Within each phrase, there may be text to be copied to the output report file and variables to be calculated. There are many defined variables which range from simple attributes of a point (for example, point number, elevation or coordinates), to complete curve or spiral geometric properties.

These variables contain information for five points. Points 1, 2, and "R" are the points defining the current segment in the set or pline. For a line, points 1 and 2 define the beginning and end of the line. For a curve, point 1 is the point of curvature, point "R" is the radius point, and point 2 is the point of tangency. For spirals, point 1 is the beginning of spiral and point 2 is the end of spiral.

The other two points referred to by the Reports command are used to create stakeout alignment reports. The occupied or setup point "S" is defined by the user if angles and distances from a setup point to points on the alignment are required. If a station increment distance is specified, the Reports command will compute the location of a point at each station increment along the alignment. This variable is referred to as point "A".

REPORTS retrieves the object type of each segment (curve, spiral or straight line) from the project file and then uses this object type and the previous object type to select which phrase to use from the definition file. The text and variables within the selected phrase are then executed.

REPORTS can compute the station and offset of a point from the active alignment (see ACTIVE). The report titled Station & Offset below shows an example of this type of report. The following is a list of the valid variable definitions.

\NLIN\: Start new line in output report.
\FORM\: Add form feed to report.
\TAB xxx\: Tab to column "xxx" in report.
\PAGE\: Output current page number.
\SYS1\: Output company name (from config).
\SYS2\: Output address line 1 (from config).
\SYS3\: Output address line 2 (from config).
\SYS4\: Output project file name.
\SYS5\: Output project title.
\NEEDxxx\: Start new page if less than xxx line left.

\NAME\: Name.
\LAYR\: Layer.
\LTYP\: Linetype.
\COLR\: Color.
\AHNM\: Name of active alignment.
\LEGN\: Leg number.

\P1DS\: Description of point 1.
\P1NM\: Point number of point 1.
\P1XX\: X coordinate value.
\P1YY\: Y coordinate value.
\P1ZZ\: Elevation of point 1.
\P1DZ\: Elevation difference from setup point.
\P1ST\Computed station of point 1.
\P1AZ\: Azimuth from setup point to point 1.
\P1SD\: Distance from setup point to point 1.
\P1AN\: Angle from backsight to point 1 around setup.
\P1LY\: Layer name of point 1.
\P1CO\: Color of point 1.
\P1AS\: Station of point 1 on active alignment.
\P1AO\: Offset of point 1 on active alignment.
\P1AX\: X coordinate of point 1 projected to active alignment.
\PLAY\: Y coordinate point 1 projected to active alignment.

\P2DS\ to \P2CL\: (Same as variables for point 1 above, but for point 2).

\PRDS\ to \PRCL\: (Same as variables for point 1 above, but for point "R").

\PSDS\: Point description.
\PSNM\: Point number.
\PSXX\: Point coordinates.
\PSYY\: "
\PSZZ\: "

\PAXX\: Point coordinate.
\PAYY\: "
\PAST\: Point station.
\PAAZ\: Azimuth from setup point.
\PASD\: Distance from setup point to point on alignment.
\PAAN\: Angle from backsight to point around setup.
\PACL\: Chord distance from previous point.
\SPAZ\: Bearing/Az of point on spiral.

\LNBR\: Line bearing.
\LNDS\: Line distance.
\LNDF\: Deflection angle from previous segment.

\CCLE\: Curve chord length.
\CCBR\: Curve chord bearing.
\CANG\: Central angle.
\CARC\: Arc length.
\CEXT\: External distance.
\CMID\: Middle ordinate.
\CTAN\: Tangent distance.
\C1BR\: Bearing from PC to CC.
\C2BR\: Bearing from CC to PT.
\CRAD\: Radius.
\CPIX\: Curve PI x coordinate.
\CPIY\: Curve PI y coordinate.
\CDGA\: Degree of curve. Arc definition.
\CDGC\: Degree of curve. Chord definition.
\CDIR\: Curve direction. "Concave to the north . . .".
\CAGN\: Along the curve direction. "Northly, . . .".
\CTYP\: Curve direction, left or right.

\SPLN\: Spiral length.
\SAZL\: Azimuth of long tangent.
\STNL\: Long tangent.
\SAZS\: Azimuth of short tangent.
\STNS\: Short tangent.
\SPIL\: Tangent to alignment PI.
\SPDC\: Degree of curve.
\SPIX\, \SPIY\: Coordinates of spiral PI.
\APIX\, \APIY\: Coordinates of alignment PI.
\ADEL\: Total Alignment Delta.

RESECT

Locate a setup point from locations of three known points and the angles between these points.

Pt 1

Enter the location of Pt 1.

Angle pt 1 to pt 2

Enter the angle (an angle right measurement) between Pt 1 and Pt 2.

Pt 2

Pt 2: Enter the location of Pt 2.
Angle 2 to 3: Enter the angle (an Angle Right measurement) between PT 2 and PT 3.
Pt 3: Enter the location of PT 3.
Continue: Continue entering data.
Cancel: Return to the first command line

OK

Create a point at the resection on the current layer in the Plan view with name "Resection".

Cancel

Cancel without creating any more points

Import Reson ASCII .PTS hydrographic depth data.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		HDMS\|Import\|Reson ASCII points	Geocomp Update or $250

RETTABLE

Create a table of text and plines showing R, I, T, A, a, b, c & d properties of a curve.

This option creates a table generated in the plan view to show the elevations of the quarter points in kerb returns.

Select a segment (usually an arc) of the horizontal alignment and the vertical alignment. Pick a location in the plan view for the table. In Settings, pick a text style and vertical offset. The segment length is reported in the message scroll area.

The elevations of the points at the start of the segment, one quarter, half way and three quarters along and the end are computed from the VAL and placed in a table. Points with elevations shown as ** are outside the range of the VAL.

If you pick a segment other than an arc, you are notified.

Reveal all segments in selected sets which have been hidden using HIDE.

HIDE toggles the status of a set segment between hidden and revealed. This status is a persistent property of the segment.

Any revealed segments are reported to MessageScroll.

Revealed segments which are OFF or on invisible layers remain off or invisible. The Ignore Hide setting in DISPLAYSET reveals all segments, even hidden ones.

REVEAL is an alias to UNHIDE.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Modify\|On/Off\|Reveal set segments	user-definable	49

REVERSE

Reverse the direction of multiple sets or plines.

Objs:
Select sets, plines or text.: Reverse the direction of selected sets or plines.
Reverse text bearings: Reverse segment points in selected EAT text such as bearings.
Reverse: Reverse the sets, plines or text bearings.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

The only attribute that is changed is the View mode. The coordinates are retained.

The objects are removed from the original view, unless REVIEW is is an alias for GCREVIEW which you choose whether to "Delete old".

For example, a point in the PLAN View with Easting X = 1000, Northing Y = 2000 and Elevation Z = 100 when reviewed to the XSECT view becomes Offset X = 1000, Elevation Y = 2000 and Chainage Z = 100.

In another example, if you have an ASCII file of a profile in the format "Chainage,Elevation" you could IMPORT into the PLAN view then review to the PROFILE view.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	RG 1246	Modify\|Review Modify\|Change view mode	Field Data Module

REVRECNO

Replace selected objects with new objects in the reverse record number order.

For example, select closed plot box plines so that multiple sheets created by PLOT plot to the printer in the reverse order.

The new records renumber from the first available record number. For example, if you first SAVE so there are no existing gaps in numbering, REVRECNO recreates the records with new record numbers above all existing record numbers, and leaves gaps in the record numbering at the old record numbers, which are filled by any command that create fewer new objects before the next SAVE. This includes REVRECNO and RENUMREC.

See also RENUMREC which renumbers records by name, group or relative to other objects.

TML date			Source
23/03/23			Geocomp Update or $300

Open On-line Reference Guide Terramodel for Windows.

See also other documents (DOCUMENTS), User Guide (UG) and TMLLIST).

Date			Source	GC
1997			Field Data Module or Geocomp Update	GC1007RM.PDF

RGRAPH

Draw a graph of Intensity, Duration and Frequency (IDF) from the current rainfall database in the Sheet view on the specified layer.

Link points, sets and plines to external photos and text objects by defining attributes.

RMGC is designed to keep track of trees and other assets on a golf course, but it can be used for other purposes as an alternative to a Geographic Information System (GIS).

In Settings, define full software and data paths for your image viewer and text viewer applications, for example, C:\Windows\system32\mspaint.exe or C:\Windows\system32\notepad.exe.

Name the Terramodel objects and rename the external files so that they match. For example, if tree5 is a point name, the associated files might be tree5front.tif, tree5back.tif and tree5.txt.

Select the folders for the Terramodel project file and the associated image and text files carefully.

Once the names of objects have been defined, use the Attribute dialog to:

Define up to four lines of comments, for example, "Planting date: 1/2/98", "Ducks crossing ahead" or "Pipe diameter 225".
Rename the object
Find all of the images associated with this object (based on the name), such as a photo of the tree or from a golf tee
Show any of these images in the image viewer application
Find one text file associated with this object (based on the name), such as a history of work done
Show this history file in the text viewer application.
Create a new history text file for an object by entering the name of the file in the Current History File field. Be selective about naming these files as you have only one history file for each object.

Insert or modify a curve at every vertex of a pline with the maximum possible arc radius up to a specified value.

Import descriptions of roadjobs from a .CSV file.

Create points and sets on a DTM surface layer in the Plan view from any surface in the cross-section data.

Road: Select a road job from Road Job Manager (ROADJOB).
Layer: Select a layer on which to create the points and sets.
Settings: Open Road DTM Settings (RDSDTMSET).
Create: Create the points and sets.
Close: Close the command.

Configure the grid displayed in the Shape Editor, Template Editor, Subgrade Editor, Superelevation Editor, Phase Editor and XSection Editor.

Type of grid settings

Other: Configure the grid settings for the Shape Editor (SHAPE), Template Editor (TEMPLATE), Subgrade Editor (SUBGRADE) and XSection Editor (XSECTIONEDT).
Superelevation
: Configure the grid settings for the Superelevation Editor (SUPERELV).

Display On/Off

CL: Display a solid vertical line of the selected colour at the centerline of the template or cross-section and to turn on the station | chainage label in TEMPLATE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT. If CL is off but Lines is on, draw a centerline in the color for centerline, but use the grid type from GRIDSET instead of a solid line.
Grid: Display interior grid lines of the selected colour in TEMPLATE, SHAPE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT.
Axis: Display the horizontal and vertical grid axis lines and tick marks of the selected colour in the TEMPLATE, SHAPE, SUBGRADE and XSECTIONEDT.
Labels: Display the grid offset and elevation labels of the selected colour in TEMPLATE, SHAPE, SUBGRADE, and XSECTIONEDT. If Axis and Labels are on, the grid labels shift in to accommodate the axis lines and ticks. When Axis is Off, the grid labels shift out.
Areas: Display a summary of cross-sectional areas (in project units squared) for each encountered material.
Volumes: Display a summary of volumes. Volumetric units are controlled by UNITSET.

Label height

Enter the size, in screen pixels, for grid labels.

Grid type

Display the grid as Dots, Ticks or Lines.

Maximum number of lines

Enter the maximum number of horizontal and vertical lines to display the entire grid. ROADGRID tries to fit the most grid lines at the entered spacing. Numbers such as 21 or 13 are typically more successful.

Grid spacing

Width: Enter trial distances (in sheet units) between vertical grid lines.
Height: Enter trial distances (in sheet units) between horizontal grid lines.

If no match is found, the default grid has power of 10 spacing and a maximum number of lines of 400.

Super

Configure superelevation profiles for SUPERELV.

Color: Select a color to be used to draw the superelevation diagram for the left side of the roadway in SUPERELV. The right side superelevation diagram is drawn with the selected color number + 1.
Vert Exagg: Enter the vertical exaggeration of the superelevation (as a factor of the horizontal scale).
Draw Only One Super: Display the superelevation of only the one shape that matches the designated normal cross slope, or display all shapes to which superelevation is to be applied, and draw only the shape that matches the indicated normal cross slope with the designated color and the others in background color.

OK

Accept changes to grid settings

Cancel

Cancel without changes to grid settings

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Settings\|Editor grid... Channel\|Settings\|Editor grid...	Field Data Module	412

ROADJOB

Manage the roadways, alignments and surfaces of roadjobs.

A road job can be composed of multiple roadways such as eastbound and westbound carriageways and ramps with their own HALs and VALs. For simple roadjobs, with a single roadway with the same name, changes to the roadjob also apply to that roadway.

Current road job

Name: Display or modify the name of the current road job. By default, one roadway has the same name as the roadjob. Changes to name in ROADJOB update that roadway.
Road job chainage | station: When On, roadways use chainages | stations from the main horizontal alignment of the road job. When off, roadways use the chainages | stations of their horizontal alignments.
Description: Enter or modify a description of up to 80 characters.
Main horiz align: Select the main registered horizontal alignment for the road job. Do not select an offset alignment.
Vert align: Select any registered vertical alignment for the roadway.

Close

Close without making further changes to roadjobs.

Name | Main hal | #Roadways | Description

List and make selectable each roadjob, its main HALs and Description and show the number of its Roadways.

New...

Create a new road job and select its HAL and VAL. To use road chainages | stations, turn this on when creating each road job.

Delete

Delete all roadways, templates, subgrades, superelevations, skips and stored cross-sections associated with the selected roadjob and its roadways, but not surfaces, shapes, or shape classes.

Design...

Open the Road Design Critera (RDDESIGNCRIT) to assign design criteria to each roadway. These critera include the functional classification, design speed, and terrain type, and whether vertical curves are to be designed on passing or stopping distances.

Surfaces...

Open the Surface Manager (SURFACE) to select surfaces for the roadjob.

Roadways...

Open the Roadway Manager (ROADWAY) to manage roadways in the roadjob.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|Road job manager... Tunnels\|Tunnel manager... Channel\|Channel design\|Channel job manager	Field Data Module

ROADLIST

Report to P3Pad the name, description, main HAL name, and HAL record number of each each road job.

Define the shrink and swell factors for road materials.

For materials defined in Materials Manager (MATERIALS) and used in a RoadJob (ROADJOB), specify shrink and swell factors over ranges of stations | chainages for use in Mass Haul (MASSHAUL).

Shrinking and swelling percentages for materials adjust for loose volumes as they are being trucked or otherwise hauled, as compared to their in-place volume.

Use these hauling volume properties to reflect changing conditions along the course of a particular road job.

Use GCMATIN and GCMATOUT to transfer road materials between projects.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Mass haul\|Road job materials	Field Data Module

ROADPROF

Create profiles from all DTM surfaces defined in the surface manager for a selected road job.

Select the sliced surfaces in the Surface Manager (SURFACE). They may be elevation or depth surfaces.

Add to or replace previously created profiles.

Create roadjobs or roadways from selected registered horizontal alignments.

If a current roadjob exists, create roadways in the roadjob. The roadjob or roadway is created with the same name as the registered HAL, unless a roadjob or roadway with the same name already exists.

Optionally, copy the surfaces in the Surface Manager (SURFACE) from the current Road Job.

Create roadways in the current roadjob, or in separate roadjobs.

Transfer roadjobs with registered alignments from one project to another by the LandXML export (EXPORT) and LandXML import (IMPORT) scripts.

Command date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

ROADRPT

Report roadway information within a chainage range including alignment, ditch, tie, subgrade, template and superelevation information.

Road job

Select a road job.

Roadway

Select a roadway.

Report

Write the report to Screen or File

Station | Chainage

Enter the beginning and ending stations | chainages.

Data displayed

Select information to show in the report.

General Information: Include the starting and ending stations and roadway segments, along with the names of the main, horizontal and vertical alignments for the roadway.
Alignment Information: Report the cross-section’s position relative to the roadway horizontal alignment and relative to the main alignment.
Since cross-sections are oriented along the main alignment, stationing matches along the main alignment, but may differ with the stationing along the roadway alignment. See Road Job Station | Chainage in Road Job Manager (ROADJOB).
Ditch Information: Report the name of the ditch and the situations in which the ditch is to be used. Offset, elevation and slope information for the ditch shape is also shown (left to right).
Tie Information: Report the name of the tie and the situations in which the tie is to be used. Offset, elevation and slope information for the tie shape is also shown (left to right).
Subgrade Information: Report the offset of each subgrade point from the center of the subgrade template, each point’s elevation, and the relative slope between subgrade points.
Template Information: Report the offset, elevation and slope information for the roadbed and shoulder shapes at the specified station | chainage.
Superelevation Information: Report the superelevation information that applies to the specified roadway.

Report listings

Select the order of the data in the report. General Information and Superelevation are always displayed first.

Print to screen

Report to P3Pad.

Print to file

Report to a .TXT file.

Export an alignment, and 3D sets or plines with vertical alignments, to an XML file for Leica Roadrunner, iCON or UMC3D for use in machine control.

Register a horizontal alignment and optionally a vertical alignment.
Create a roadjob with those alignments.
Enter ROADRUN at the command line.
From the plan view, select any 3D sets or any plines that have corresponding vertical alignments.
Create Leica database files, only if needed.
Assign the start chainage of each exported alignment to either 0.00 or the chainage of the registered alignment at that location.
Select Group to give the group of strings a name of your choice.
Specify the .XML file name and location.
Click Export.
Load the resulting files into a Leica machine control system.

When you Export, the .XML file is created with the name and location in the File field, a project variable with that name and location is stored and, if specified, corresponding Leica database files are created.

The initial value of the File: field is set by the project variable. If the project variable has not been set because ROADRUN has not previously exported files in this project, the defaults are the name and path of the current project. Manually edit the values of the File: field.

If you click Browse, the .XML name is set to the same as the selected HAL, and the location is set to a folder with the same name as the selected HAL, under the location of the current project file. A new folder is created if it doesn't exist already. Save the new values (with any changes you make) or Cancel.

Use HALMANAGER and VALMANAGER to register the main alignments.
Use ROADJOB to define a roadjob of the registered alignments.
Export only the registered horizontal alignment, or sets or plines as well.
The output alignments must be 3D, so select sets with elevations on every point, or plines (HALs) with profiles (VALs) that refer to them.
If more than one vertical alignment refers to the same horizontal alignment, a prompt enables you to select the correct VAL.
If no VAL refers to the HAL, a vertical alignment pline with the same name as the HAL, is used.
The visibility of any profile-view object that refers to a vertical alignment is controlled by the active alignment.
Group sets or plines into separate surfaces for carriageways or side roads, provided their chainages increase in the direction of the registered alignment.
Around traffic islands, recreate, break or reverse some sets or plines as needed before including them in a Group.
If the sets or plines are not logically related to the same centreline, for example a carpark layout, do not Group them.
Leica LandXML format includes RR fields not present in other LandXML files.
The registered alignment can have chainage equations.
The alignment names are derived from the set or pline names, trimmed to 14 characters.
If alignment names are repeated, they are made unique by incrementing suffixes.
RR, ROADRUN and ROADRUNNER are aliases for ROAD_RUN command. If RR, ROADRUN or ROADRUNNER do not run, create aliases to ROAD_RUN or enter ROAD_RUN.
The .XML alone may be sufficient for your Road Runner and iCON. For example, RoadRunner requires the database files; iCON does not. 'Create Leica DB files' if they are required for your Leica machine control application.
Leica database files have extensions like .X15 and .XCF. The number of files and their extensions depends on the objects you select.
Progress messages during the creation of the .XML file are reported to P3Pad. Progress messages during the conversion of .XML file to .X?? files are reported to a .LOG file.
If you select 'Create Leica DB files', but no .X?? files are created in the same folder as the .XML, download and install Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86).

Join points in the specified layer with sets parallel to the main alignment of the specified roadjob.

For use after ROADDTM. See also CHKRDDTM.

TML date			Source	GC</
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	157

ROADSIGPOINT

Define significant locations where roadways, bridges, or other site features cross the main alignment.

MASSHAUL considers these significant points as obstacles that might delay or block, or where hauled material is calculated separately.

Road...
Select a road job.
Select a roadway.
Select how the roadway affects the masshaul (None, Expection or Block).

HAL...
Select a registered HAL.
Select how the HAL affects the masshaul (None, Expection or Block).

Special...
Enter the station | chainage
Enter any name of the special significant point.
Select how the special point affects the masshaul (None, Expection or Block).

Skips are always significant points. To create or delete any skips, see Skip Manager (SKIP).

Edit how the Roadjob, HAL, Special or Skip affects the masshaul.

Delete significant points.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Mass Haul\|Significant points	Secured

ROADSPOT

Display the northing, easting, elevation, chainage, offset, cross-slope and grade at a selected location on a roadway design surface, and optionally create a point.

If the location is at a node in a cross-section, display the average of the cross slopes on either side of the node and the average of the longitudinal grades just ahead of and behind the node.

Road job: Select a road job from a list of registered road jobs.
Create Pt: Created a point at the location on the current layer at the computed elevation.
Loc: Specify a location within the limits of the DTM.
Spot: Compute the elevation at the selected location and report to Message Scroll along with the north and east coordinates, the chainage and offset (with respect to the road job), the cross slope of the roadway and the longitudinal grade of the roadway at that location.
Close: Close

Create, edit and manage roadways within road jobs.

A road job can be composed of multiple roadways such as eastbound and westbound carriageways and ramps with their own HALs and VALs.

Road job name

The name of the current road job, as last selected in the Road Job Manager (ROADJOB).

Current roadway

Assign a name and horizontal and vertical alignments to the current roadway.

Name: Display the name of the selected roadway.
Horiz. align: Select the registered horizontal alignment for the current roadway.
Vert. align: Select the registered vertical alignment for the current roadway.

Name | Horz. align. | #Supers | #Templates

List and make selectable each roadway, its HAL and its VAL and show the numbers of its superelevations and Templates.

New...

Create a new road way and select its HAL and VAL.

Delete

Delete the selected roadway.

Design...

Close

Close without making changes

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|Roadways\|Roadway manager... Channel\|Channel design\|Channels\|Channel manager...	Secured

ROTATE

Rotate selected objects around a specified point by a specified angle.

To rotate sets, select the points.

At the prompts for angles, right-mouse-click allows for entry by Bearing and Angle, selecting a segment or selecting two locations.

See also GCROTATE, RTSCALE, ROT3D, GC3DROT, GC07 and GC93.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Rotate	Field Data Module	37

ROT3D

Relocate any points and sets in 3D space. Three of those points must be data points, which have names starting with D1, D2 and D3, or d1, d2 and d3, that correspond to three control points, which have names starting with C1, C2 and C3, or c1, c2 and c3.

Report the difference in distance between the points as a result of the transformation.

For example, take a design of a bridge or building component and transform it to another location and orientation for assembly or casting, or transform points on a manufactured object to see if it will fit the intended location.

To lay a structure flat, use GC29 to compute the 3D distances, then use those distances in plan to create the 3 control points.

See also GC3DADJ for a conformal 3D adjustment using up to 10 pairs of points, GC56 for swapping coordinates and GC3DROT for rotating around axes.

TML date			Source	</
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

RPAN

Move the centre of the current view to the selected location.

Shift-MiddleMouseClick on a wheel mouse is similar. See also RECENTER.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
08/02/22	rpan.txt		Wendell	47

RTSCALE

Simultaneously rotate, translate (move) and scale selected objects.

3D

Scale and translate objects in the x, y, and z (elevation) directions using the northings, eastings, and elevations specified in the From: and To: controls. When not checked, Terramodel will only scale and translate objects in the x and y directions.

Objs

Select the objects you want to change.

From

Enter a point, location on the screen, or x, y and z coordinates from which you want the objects translated, rotated and scaled in this point control.

To

Enter a new point, location on the screen, or x, y and optional z location to move the objects to in this point control.

Settings

Set the clockwise angle of rotation, the scale factor and the amount of elevation translation.

Angle: Enter in this angle control the amount (between -360° and 360°) by which you want to rotate the selected objects. A negative value rotates the objects in a counter-clockwise direction. To specify the angle between two bearings, use the deflection angle snap mode by pressing the right mouse button when the focus is on the angle option.
Grid factor: Apply this scale factor in x and y to the selected objects, with respect to the position you entered in the From: control.
Ratio: Calculate the grid factor as the ratio between an original distance and an adjusted distance.
Elev trans: Translate the elevations by adding or subtracting an elevation difference.

See also ROTATE, MOVE, GCSCALE and GC07.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Utilities\|Rotate translate & scale	Secured	37

RUN

The command line syntax is RUN "directory" "filename.ext". This will open the file, using the application associated with the file extension, in the specified directory. Directories relative to the Terramodel directory can be used.

RUN is an ALIAS which executes TMRUN.EXE, supplied with the Geocomp Update.

See C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\ALIAS.INI for examples of how to use TMRUN in an alias.

The extension can be anything including ,bat, .url, .pif or .lnk. These file types can be used to extend arguments beyond the maximum 66 characters.

Save all objects to the current project.

When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by deleting objects.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM and UG	File\|Save project Toolbar button	Field Data Module	16

SAVEAS

Save all objects to the named project and keep previously saved objects in the previous project.

When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by by deleting objects.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	UG	File\|Save project as...	Field Data Module	24

SCALE

Multiply the eastings and northings of point, pline and text objects by scale factors.

If the Y scale value is blank, the X scale factor is used for both.

Some common uses are

Use	X factor	Y factor
mm to m	0.001
feet to metres	0.3048
southing to northing	1	-1

EAT codes can include a factor to change the unit of the display without changing the value of the point.

To scale a set, make sure you select the set and the points that define the set.

When scaling sets with arcs, be sure to include the radius points in the selection set.

Multiply the elevations of point, pline and text objects by a single scale factor.

Some common uses are

Use	Z Factor
mm to m	0.001
feet to metres	0.3048
depth to height	-1

EAT codes can include a factor to change the unit of the displayed text without using SCALELV to change the elevation of the point. For example, to display floor elevations in mm while the elevation is in metres, use the EAT code insertion aid to multiply by a value of 0.001.

Establish the settings for the grid displayed in the Mass Haul Editor (MASSHAUL).

Display

Display the base line, labels, axis or grids and specify the colours.

Grid type

Display the grid as lines composed of dots, tick marks at the grid edge, or solid lines.

Gridline spacing interval

Horiz:

The interval along the vertical axis for minor horizontal grid lines.

Vert

The interval along the horizontal axis for minor vertical grid lines.

Major grid lines every nth interval

Horz: The major horizontal grid multiple.
Vert: The major vertical grid multiple.

Label height (pixels)

Designate the label height in units of pixels.

Scaling factor (Larger is wider)

Control the ratio of the vertical scale of the diagram to the horizontal scale. In a mass haul diagram, the vertical axis coordinates are measured in units of cubic project units, i.e., cubic feet, or cubic meters, while the horizontal axis coordinates are in chainage. Common values might range from 20 to 100, depending on the length of the project. Enter value of 0 to attempt to find and set an appropriate scale factor.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Mass Haul\|Diagram grid	Field Data Module

SCIMSTAB

Create a table of survey mark points from New South Wales Survey Control Information Management System (NSW SCIMS).

Use NSWSCIMS to import SCIMS survey marks first.

Command date			Source
19/05/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SCLBLKS

Scale selected blocks by a factor or set Map colour, Auto scale, AutoRotation and Dynaview clipping.

All values are modified at once so if you only want to change one value (e.g. the scale) without changing another (e.g. map colour) be careful with your selection sets and tick boxes. You may need to run this command more than once. You may prefer to run some other command.

Blocks: Select the blocks to be modified.
Block scale: Enter a block scale.
Multiply by scale factor: Multiply the X and Y scale of each block by the entered scale. The relative sizes of selected blocks are unchanged. To double the sizes, enter scale factor of 2.0. To keep the blocks the same size, enter 1.0.
Reset block scale: Modify the X and Y scale of each block to the entered block scale. The scale of all selected blocks are made equal. To give all blocks a scale of 2.00, enter a block scale of 2. Blocks drawn with unit radius will still be twice the size of blocks drawn with unit diameter.
Map colour: Turn ON Map Colour to display blocks with the colours of the blocks. Turn OFF, to display with the colours of the objects in the blocks.
Clip by Ins Pt in Dynaviews: Turn ON, to clip blocks to rectangular plotboxes. Turn OFF, to clip only blocks with insertion points outside the plotbox.
Auto Scale: Turn ON, to automatically resize blocks (such as north points) as the current view scale changes so as to retain the same size in the sheet view. Turn OFF, to fix the sizes of blocks (such as tree canopies) in view units.
Auto Rotate: Turn ON, to retain the orientation blocks in a rotated dynaview. Turn OFF, to rotate blocks (such as north points) around insertion points with the data.

Scale closed selected plines about their centroid by the specified value.

If the pline boxes are plotboxes, dynaviews change size to match. The underlying data and dynaview scales do not change.

Use a scale factor greater than 1 to overlap abutting plotboxes such as those created by PLANSET.

Import a Trimble Site Controller System (SCS900) record.txt or .CSV file file into a specified layer.

To create a record.txt file, on the SCS900 control unit, select Settings, then Data output options then Store raw data to record.txt file.

To export attributes surveyed in SCS900, survey using an .FXL file that defines the attribute fields, and then export a .CSV containing the coordinates and attribute values.

SCS900 File .TXT or .CSV:: Browse to select a record.txt file or a .CSV file from SCS900.
FXL File containing Attribute Definition: If a .CSV file is selected, and the file contains any attributes, browse to select the .FXL file with the definitions of those attributes.
Import into Layer:: Select the layer for the new points
Include Date and Time in Point Names: If record.txt is selected, optionally append the Local Time and Date to the new point name.
Use imported Point Number: Import the point number from the "Point Name" field in "record.txt", or the first field in the .CSV. Otherwise, assign new integer point numbers, starting at the next multiple of 10,000 above the next available point number.
Import: Import points from the data file.
Cancel: Close the command without importing any points.

For the record.txt file, point names are derived from the "Point Code" and "Point Name".

For the .CSV file, the fields are "PointCode", Easting, Northing, Elevation, Code, and then any attribute values. For the .FXL file, codes, with any attribute names, are defined in LineFeatureDefinition and PointFeatureDefinition records. For each line in the .CSV file, the Code should match one of those codes defined in the .FXL, and the number of attribute fields should match the number of attribute names for that Code.

Trimble Business Center (TBC) and .DXF files are not required to transfer points from SCS900 to Terramodel.

To export to SCS900, see SCS900OUT.

To report or display attributes, use DISPFEAT.

TML date			Source	</
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

SCS900OUT

Export a roadway to Trimble Site Control System (SCS900) using the SCS900 export script.

SCS900 export script allows the user to create files by exporting objects selected from Terramodel, or add previously created files to the synchronization folder. Adding files to the synchronization folder effectively copies the file to the appropriate folder for the field device.

Prepare data for a new or existing site, create the appropriate field data files, and transfer them to a synchronization folder accompanied by work order instructions, as follows:

Receive new data for a new or existing site
Import the data into Terramodel to review
Identify initial tasks
Identify the data that is required by the field crew to carry out those tasks.
Filter out unnecessary data in the imported files
Clean, prepare and manipulate data so that it is usable by the field crew.
Using the Terramodel SCS900 Export script,
- Export surface files, site and design maps, and control point and stakeout point files as required,
- Create work order instructions, and
- Transfer data (and work order) to the SCS900 by synchronization.

Install Microsoft® Active Sync® or similar and Trimble Office Synchronizer. These steps assume ActiveSync.
Set up the Office Synchronizer and define the synchronization folder, e.g. C:\Trimble Sync, on any drive accessible to the incoming field crews. If this is left blank and you have run Office Synchronizer previously on this computer, then the last used synchronizer folder will be used.
Run SCS900 on the controller, define the Units settings and the root data folder location as \Disk. This will create the device data folder as \Disk\Trimble SCS900 Data.
Connect the controller running SCS900 to the PC using the USB cable and multiport adaptor. Connect to a power supply before you switch it on.
Switch on the controller, and answer Yes to the "Connect to Desktop" question.
Active Sync will start automatically on the PC. At this point, the controller is connected with the computer. The first time you connect with Active Sync, you must choose whether to create a Partnership or connect as a Guest. Partnership mode allows a) connection with USB or ethernet, b) allows automatic PC to device time synchronization and c) allows only 2 PC Partnership relationships per device. Guest mode allows a) connection with USB only and b) allows any number of PC Guest relationships per device. Please refer to the Active Sync help for more details.
Office Synchronizer (TOS) will then start automatically, and detect the controller. The Office Synchronizer will prompt the user to enter the device name. Using this device name, the Office Synchronizer will set up the SCS900 folder structure on the computer under the root synchronization folder that was defined earlier. Within TOS there is an option to set synchronization to automatic or manual. Please refer to the TOS help.
Finally, run Terramodel in order to set up the SCS900 export script file before you begin your work.

Select File | ExportUpload | Export Script Manager (EXPORTSMGR).
Highlight the SCS900 script and click Edit.
Edit the Synchronization folder field or use the Browse feature to point to the root of the synchronization folder, e.g. C:\Trimble Sync. If this is left blank and you have run Office Synchronizer previously on this computer, then the last used synchronizer folder will be used by the script.
Click Select/Create and configure site folder tab. In the Site Maps, click Export. Select the Conversion Mapping File SCS900 background.acf.
In the Control Points file, select Export. Select the settings that you defined on SCS900 for the coordinate order output. If SCS900 was set to P,E,N,Z,D, select that here also. Click from the offered list to finish this selection.
Click the Select/Create and configure designs folder tab. Under Design Maps click Export. Select the Conversion Mapping File, SCS900 (dxf).acf.
Under Stake Points, select Export, under Output format select the settings that you defined on SCS900 for the coordinate order output. i.e. If SCS900 was set to P,E,N,Z,D select that option here also. Click OK to finish this selection.
Click OK.

If the current palette is SCS900/SVO, the colours in the output .DXF maps match those in SCS900.

For the site map, select SCS900 background.acf so the color of all objects is light grey (colour 8) to differentiate them from design map data.

For the design map, select SCS900 (dxf).acf so the colors of selected objects match.

Use a text editor to edit .ACF files.

SCS900 uses a single font, a continuous (solid) linetype and single line thickness.

"Explode blocks" causes any selected block to be exploded during the export into its component lines, arcs, text and points. A block is visible within the graphics of SCS900, but not selectable. To make plines that make up blocks selectable in SCS900, the blocks need to be exploded on export. "Explode blocks" does not modify the blocks in Terramodel.

Points in these .DXF maps are not be selectable in the field. Only visible items that you select are exported.

Design maps are selectable in the field data. They provide you with points, lines and alignments for stakeout.

To distinguish live (Design) data from background reference only (site) data, use the recommended conversion mapping files.

Points exported to SCS900 through the design map are automatically added to the stakeout point list. SCS900 will not allow two points to exist with the same point number, so if writing multiple stakeout files as .DXF and .CSV files be sure not to send out the same point in two separate files.

The points that you send to SCS900 in a .DXF file for stakeout can be either 2D or 3D points. SCS900 shows pointnames when selecting points during stakeout, so name (NAME) the points, as required.

JOIN or CONNECT plines and sets before exporting, as required.

A work order allows the office supervisor or SCS900 user to set up instructions and data for tasks that need to be completed in the field. The Work Order creation means that when on site, opening the Work Order will automatically load all the correct site and design level data, and provide a written instruction of what is required to the field crew. The Work Order folder stores all the data that is measured, reported and output on site during execution of the task. Work Orders can be created in the office or on the controller in the field.

The benefit of creating the work order in the office is that it can be previewed in the office prior to dispatching the crew. The preview process causes all the data required to be compiled on the PC, which on large projects takes a significantly shorter time than it would on the field controller.

On opening the work order in the field, the crew will find that the time to load information is then significantly shorter than if they open the work order without having previewed it in the office.

The Work Order Status will always be Open with data for a New Work Order. If reviewing an existing work order, the status can be Closed i.e. completed, or Open without data meaning that no data has been loaded or measured in the field.

A design surface can provide a reference surface model for surface stakeout, height information for alignment based stakeout, a finished grade surface for grade checking operations, cut and fill determination and/or a reference base surface for volumetric computations.

A design surface can also provide Live Design Map Data, that can supply the work order with lines and alignments for either guidance or stakeout, and point data for stakeout. There can be one or more design maps stored at the design level.

It can also be used to provide an ASCII coordinate point list for stakeout; this file is a simple P,E,N,Z,D or P,N,E,Z,D comma separated file containing the locations of points to be staked out.

An underlying surface provides a surface model that can be used to determine laid material thickness during grading operations. The surface model here has to be a previously measured surface and can be created directly in the field using SCS900.

Select and configure site controller

Synchonisation folder

Select the root synchonisation folder.

Select controller

Select the device for this session. Each device that has been connected to the PC or network via Office Synchronizer has been given a unique name and has a folder created below the synchronization folder. The next time you connect with the selected device, any updates you have made to these files will be transferred to the SCS900 field device according to the synchronization rules.

Feature code file

A feature code file named CODES.TXT lists all the feature codes, one code per line. If a device has been selected and a feature code file exists for this device, click Add file…

Global geoid file

If a device has been selected and a Global Geoid file with extension .GGF exists for this device, to add a geoid file, click Add file…

Geoid files may be available from Trimble office software, your Trimble dealer or your surveyor. A Geoid file is not necessary for successful operation of SCS900.

Operators file

The operators list is a text file, listing all the operators of SCS900. If a device has been selected and an operators file exists for this device, to add an operators file, click Add file….

Select/Create and configure site

When you create a new site, a site.ini file is created which uses the current project settings for measurement units, angle units and station | chainage format to set the SCS900 settings on the field device.

Select site

Select the site from the list.

Site data configuration

Background maps

List available site maps.

SCS900/Dxf file: Enter the filename for the site map.
Conversion mapping file: Select SCS900 background.acf.
Explode blocks: Enable to convert all blocks into their component points and lines upon export.
Objects selected: Select objects from the current project.

Export

Create a new site map from objects in Terramodel.

Add file

Copy a site map from another folder.

Delete

Remove a site map from this site folder (and from the SCS900 device).

DC Calibration file

Add file...: Copy a calibration file (Site.dc) from another folder.

Control points file

List the Control points file.

Export: Create a new points file with name control.csv from selected points.
Add file...: Copy a control points file from another folder.
Delete: Delete a control points file for this folder and the SCS900 device.

Local geoid file

Add file...: Copy a local geoid file from another folder.
Delete: Remove a local geoid file from this site folder (and from the SCS900 device)

Select/Create and configure designs

Create and manage multiple design folders and create data to represent a new design or construction phase. Create a design or underlying surface file. Design level information includes one of the following:

.TTM – a surface model DTM for the design surface or an underlying surface. In LINKSET, remove links between BLs.
.PRO – a roadjob (ROADJOB) in a project with alignments, xlines and a surface.
.DXF – one or more active design maps.
.CSV – one stakeout points list.

Only a single roadway (.PRO) or surface model (.TTM) is allowed in a single design folder.

Select/Create and configure work order

Create and manage work orders for a specific crew and device, and link instructions to a specific site and design surface data. A field crew simply opens a work order in the field, reads the instructions and uses the associated data files for their task. When the field crew returns at the end of the day and performs the download sync, the office manager can locate and review the completed field work knowing that it is stored in the correct location automatically.

New
Select a task from the task list.
Enter instructions in the Content text box and fill out the appropriate information.
Save
Finish.
The next time the device selected above is connect to the computer, this file will be uploaded.

General: Miscellaneous.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, and Work Order Status.
Check surface grade: Measure an existing surface that is to be compared to a designated design surface. This can be used to determine the amount of fill or cut remaining to achieve the design grade. The report can indicate whether the measured surface elevation is within required tolerances of the design. This task monitors and documents progress towards and finally meeting the design specifications. Data required for this task includes design surface data and surface grade tolerances.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Measurement Density, Grade Check.
Check material thickness: Measure the upper surface of material. This will be compared to a previously measured surface of the underlying material, which allows the material thickness to be computed. Data required for this task includes the underlying surface data, the material thickness specified in the design, and the required tolerances.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Measurement Density, Thickness Check
Check grade and material thickness: Measure the surface of a material to compare the existing surface to a design surface and, simultaneously calculate a material thickness by comparing the existing surface to a previously measured surface. Data required includes the design surface, the surface grade tolerances, the underlying surface, material thickness in the design, and the required material tolerances.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Measurement Density, Grade Check, Thickness Check
Measure surface and site features: Topo surface and the Measure site features operations combined. Perform measurements of random points, breaklines and surface boundaries to be represented as a surface. Also measure existing point-based, line-based or enclosed boundary site features. This work order typically collects information used to map and model existing site features or topography.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Measurement Density
Stakeout points and alignments: Perform field staking of individual points, based on point location data.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Stakeout
Stakeout side slopes: Perform field staking of points, along or horizontally and/or vertically offset from a specified alignment. Points can be staked at specified station and offset values.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Stakeout, Reference line
Stakeout surface: Perform field staking of a specified design surface.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Grade Check, Measurement Density
Stakeout roadway: Perform field staking of points, along or horizontally and/or vertically offset from a specified alignment. Points can be staked at specified station and offset values.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Stakeout
Multiple tasks: Combine any of the above tasks.
Tabs: Instructions, Design Data, Work Order Status, Grade Check, Thickness Check, Measurement Density

The settings for a work order have been grouped by work task. The SCS900 user will need to set those settings which are not set by Terramodel.

Instructions

In the Content text box, enter the instructions to the field crew. All alpha-numberic keys work as usual, as well as [Shift] and [Caps Lock]. To delete, Click [Delete] or [Backspace]. Use mouse or arrows to move the location of text insert. [Tab] moves to the Instructions tab.

The name of the instruction file is taken from the name of the work order, with a .txt extension. If you are looking at an older set of data, the name of the existing .txt instructions file is displayed.

Design Data

Design settings

Design: The surface your field data will be checked against. Select a surface from the dropdown list. This list consists of all the surfaces in this site's design folder. (Return to the design folder to add a new design surface.)
Side slope offset: Enter an offset (in ground units), and indicate whether the offset is up or down.
Offset type: Select Vertical or Perpendicular.

Underlying surface design

To measure thickness between the measured surface and an underlying surface, select the underlying surface from the dropdown list. Enable the corresponding checkbox to ensure that a value is written to the workorder.ini file for use in the field.

Work Order Status

Not Started: Work order has been created in the office, but work has not started.
Work-in-progress: Work has been started by the field crew, but is not complete.
Field operations completed: Work has been completed by field crew.
Office operations completed: Work has been completed by office staff.

Priority: Select Low, Normal or High.
Due date: Enter the month, day and year or pick the date from the calendar.

Grade Check

Surface grade tolerances

Above design by: Enter the tolerance a field measurement can be above the design surface.
Below design by: Enter the tolerance a field measurement can be below the design surface.

Thickness Check

Design material thickness

The thickness of the material being calculated from the field measurements of a surface and the underlying surface design.

Material thickness tolerances

Thicker by: Enter a tolerance value. The calculated thickness between the measured surface and underlying surface must be no thicker than the design thickness (set above) by this amount.
Thinner by: Enter a tolerance value. The calculated thickness between the measured surface and underlying surface must be no less than the design thickness (set above) by this amount.
Measured: Select Vertically or Perpendicular to indicate the direction to measure material thickness.

Measurement Density

Coverage map grid size

Enter the size of the grid cell for the field coverage map in project units, i.e. 10 equals a 10-foot square cell for a project in feet.

Continuous measurement settings

Distance interval: Enter a horizontal distance in project units. Each time the survey rod or reciever detects this change in distance, a point is recorded.
Elevation change: Enter a elevation change in project units. Each time the survey rod or reciever detects this change in elevation, a point is recorded.

Reference Line

Horizontal offset: Enter a value (in ground units) for the offset. Then, select the direction of the offset, left or right along the line.
Vertical offset: Enter a value (in ground units) for the vertical offset. Then, select the direction of the offset, above or below the line.

Each device / crew has its own folder under the root synchronization folder. A crew that is running Trimble SCS900 data will then have a copy of the Trimble SCS900 data folder created under the device, for example:

Script date		Menu	Source	</
29/10/08		File \| Export/Upload \| SCS900	Field Data Module. Requires SCS900 device and software.

SCURVE

Select an intersection point or arc in a set to add or edit the arc.

Set pt

Select a point or an arc in a set

Select and enter a curve parameter

Arc len: Enter the arc length.
Chord: Enter the chord length.
Dc: Enter the degree of curvature as an angle.
External: Enter the shortest distance from the IP to the arc.
Mid-ord: Enter the longest distance from the arc to the chord.
Radius: Enter the radius of the arc.
Tangent: Enter the tangent distance between the end of the curve and the intersection point.

Scurve

Create or edit the arc.

Close

Close the command.

Control which objects can be selected by searching in the project.

Control whether commands can searchg for Points, Plines, Sets, Text, Blocks, Block contents, Dynaviews or Tables.

Shift Click anywhere in the dialog box to toggle all the check boxes on or off.

When quick search is off, the object closest to the centre of the pick box is selected. When quick search is on, the first object found inside the pick box is selected. Quick search shortens the time taken to select objects, but can result in unexpected selections.

The Aperture is the size of the cursor pick box, in pixels, used to select objects. The aperture size is also configured in SYSTEM.

Search settings are stored with the project file. When you have finished working with Search Settings, remember to turn all object types on and quick searches off. Otherwise, the next person working with the project can be very confused, even if it is yourself.

Since attributes are not objects, they can't be selected by record regardless of the Search settings.

Commands such as RENUMBER, TEXTMETRICS, TXTSCALE, TEXTALIGN and TEXTROTATE which operate on a specific object type are not influenced by Search settings.

Edit plines and sets in a table of segments.

Compute the geometry of a curvilinear pline from geometric parameters for each individual line and curve segment without having to first establish the IP locations.

Change bearings, distances, stations, shapes, and any other elements that define arcs, spirals, straights, or combining spirals, with or without affecting other entities that are dependent upon the segment. Check alignments and save the alignment to your project or to a file.

Designate which parameters to hold, and allow a change in the geometry of one segment to affect the location of subsequent segments. For example, correct an error in one leg of a traverse and automatically correct the position of the subsequently defined segments.

The Segment Editor displays and updates the segment as you make changes in the data entry table. The table lists the starting (POB) chainage and coordinates in the first row and geometric data for each line or curve segment in the following rows.

To add a segment to the end of the line, click on an Empty Shape cell. To insert a segment, select a cell in the row before the insertion point, then Edit/Insert.

Click the down arrow, and select the shape you want to apply to the segment. Press Tab.
Click on the down arrow in the Hold column, and select a Hold option to define what information should held as the geometry of any preceding segment is altered. Press Tab.
Enter the Bearing for the segment, and press Tab.
Repeat for the other parameters of the segment until all editable cells are filled for the row.

To change the geometric data associated with a segment, double click in the cell that contains the data you want to change, and type the correct information. When you click in a cell in the data entry part of the Segment Editor, the cursor in the graphic screen hops to the end of the segment you are working with, and the column headings change to show you what the data in the row represent.

Where points are relocated, the existing points are not moved, but are instead removed from the set, while new points are created as needed.

To change the geometric data associated with a segment or to mark data as editable or not editable, double click on the row number. Make your selections in the Line Properties, Arc Properties, Spiral Properties or Combining Spiral Properties dialog box, and click on OK.

Obj: Select an existing pline and open the table.
New: Open the table to enter a new pline.
OK: Create the new pline or modify the existing pline.
Cancel: Cancel changes.

File

New: Start a new pline
Open file: Browse to open an .ALN or .ARE alignment file.
Save to project: Save changes to the pline
Save to file | Save to File as...: Save to an .ALN or .ARE alignment file.
Check alignment: Check the geometry of the alignment.
Exit: Exit the segment editor table.

Edit

Edit: Undo changes.
Modify: Modify the segment by modifying geometric values such as coordinates, bearings, radii or distances.
Cut | Copy | Paste: Move data
Delete: Delete a row.
Insert: Insert a row.
Inscribe...: Insert an arc, spiral or combining curve.
Go to...: Select the row before a station | chainage.

Display

Redraw or zoom the display.

Configuration

Configure which columns of properties can be modified for each (POB (point of beginning), Line (Straight), Arc (Circular curve), Spiral curve or Combining curve, and in which order.

Select objects in the current view which have specified feature attribute values.

Step	Action	Result
1.	Enter SELECTAT at the command line	Start SELECTAT command
2.	Select some objects	Select a subset of objects with at least one feature attribute
3.	Refine selection based on selected record's attributes	Display a table of all attributes of any object in that subset
4.	Activate attribute names	Specify by name which attributes
5.	Enter search values	Specify values of activated attributes
6.	OK	Select objects from previously selected objects that have all the specified values for all the activated attribute names and then exit the SELECTAT command
7.	Select objects by Previous in another command	Execute that command for objects in the subset of your original selection set that have the specified values of the activated attribute names.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN and FYATBOUT.

TML date			Source	</
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SELECTGP

Select objects in the current view by entering a group number.

The objects with that group number can be selected in subsequent commands by right-mouse-button Previous.

This avoids the limitation of Right-mouse-button Group which requires you to select an example object of that group.

Groups must be integers in the range 0 to 65535.

Non-integer values such as those including text or decimal points are treated as group 0.

See also GC52, GCLPTS, IGRP, ONGRP and SGRP.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	60

SELECTPT

Select points in the current view which are not connected to any set.

The selected points can then be selected in subsequent commands by right-mouse-button Previous.

Install Sentinel System Driver 7.6.0 which enables Terramodel to read the serial number and modules from the Sentinel Security key (dongle).

Sentinel drivers are published by Thales (previously Gemalto, SafeNet and Rainbow) to enable their Sentinel hardware keys which secure software products including Terramodel and Paydirt.

Terramodel requires drivers for both USB and Parallel ports to be installed, even when you only have a USB key. The drivers are not required if you do not have a Sentinel key.

Enter SENTINEL at the command line, to use an alias to launch the installer for Sentinel System Driver 7.6.0. When prompted, select Modify, and install the drivers for both ports.

7.6.0 is the first Sentinel System Driver that supports Windows Enterprise Credential Guard and Device Guard, and the first version that does not install the Parallel Port driver by default.

Alternatively, enter SENTINEL759 to install the previous version, 7.5.9, which does not support Windows Enterprise but does install drivers for both ports by default.

To also install Sentinel network drivers, use Sentinel Protection Installer 7.6.9, available from Thales.

Remove all Sentinel Drivers from your computer.

Typically, a Terramodel user would only run this if SENTINEL is having trouble installing the driver due to previous installations.

Run SENTINELMEDIC to troubleshoot first.

EXE date	Guide		Source
06/07/07	ReadMe		Geocomp Update or geocomp.com.au or Thales

SENTINELMEDIC

Run Sentinel Advanced Medic 1.3.1 and select Troubleshoot to check whether a Sentinel Security Key can be found and whether drivers have been installed.

Create a set joining new or existing points.

SET follows the running snap mode settings of OBJSNAP. To connect to existing points enable the Point running snap. In order to create new points at any position enable the Free running snap.

To be prompted when points are being created, enable "Prompt if create pn in set command" in SYSTEM.

Loc:: Enter the point number or position for each set point or new point location.
Close set: Connects the beginning and end points of a set with a set segment to form a closed set.
Undo: Undo the most recently created set segment and any newly created point.
Settings: Assign the set's smoothness, name and beginning chainage.
New: Complete the current set and start creating a new set.
Pn: Create a set joining a series of point numbers (1,5,10) or ranges of point numbers (1..10).
Add: Add a new segment to the end of current set being created
Close: Close the command

Draw segments between existing points.: A set can be a continuous line with 65,000 points.
Create set segments without selecting existing points.: As you draw the set, new points are created at the ends of the segments. If you've activated Automatic Numbering in POINTSET, the next available point number will be assigned automatically. If you haven't activated Automatic Numbering, as each set point is created, you will be prompted for point numbers. Activate a prompt for point Name.
Join existing point numbers: Use the Pn button to join existing points in point number order.

Interpolate elevations onto 2D points and add 3D points.

See also GC50, ARCBREAK, GCCHORD, GCDIVIDE and GC682SET.

			Source
			Hamilton

SET2PROF

Create a pline in the profile view with vertices at each chainage where the corresponding point has an elevation.

The first and last point must have an elevation.

See also SET2PRFL, PTS2PROF, FLIPUP and GC41.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08		Draw\|Pline\|Val from 3D set	Secured	66

SET2PRFL

Create parallel plines or sets in the profile view to represent a pipe.

Create a set or pline in the Profile view with elevations from a set in the Plan view.

Enter a Pipe Ht to create a parallel set or pline above (+ve) or below (-ve) the profile.

Specify whether the Pipe Ht is a vertical or perpendicular offset, whether to create a pline or set and whether to create on the current layer or the set layer.

To allow for wall thickness, collar size and trenching, GCCOPY the set in the Plan view with a negative Elev Diff, then enter a bigger Pipe Ht in SET2PRFL.

The reference object (parent) of the lines is the original set in the plan view.

Create profiles and register horizontal and vertical alignments, and corresponding roadjobs, for each selected set.

Use SET2ROAD to create roadways to export to SCS900, because unlike .DXF, roadways can handle curved 3D alignments.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SET2TRAV

From points in a traverse layer, and a spur layer, report re-engineered pseudo-observations to a file in Geodimeter .JOB format.

Save the report to a text file with .JOB file extension, to then import the data into an other application. For example, import the data into the Raw Data Editor (RDE) using the 'Geocomp Geodimeter _i' import script (IMPORT).

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SET2TRV

Create a Traverse (.TRV) file from the selected set.

TML date			Source
29/10/08			Field Data Module

SETAREA

Create a new set by copying two selected sets into the current layer, creating two new sets connecting the ends, joining the four sets into a single closed set then reporting the enclosed area to the message scroll.

The current colours and linetype become those of that layer.

Layer selection on toolbar: Highlight the layer selection on the toolbar and then pick any object, or pick from the list.
LAYER: Select from a list.
CURRENT: Select an object or select from a list.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
04/08/17	setcurl.txt		Wendell	2

SETDISTS

At each step along the HAL, report the chainage | station and the horizontal distance, elevation difference and grade between the two sets.

Filter sets without arcs in 2D by line offset tolerance.

See also BLFILTER, GCFILTER, PLINFILT and FILTER.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	127

SETGRP

The next group is the highest group currently in the project plus one.

See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and GC52 which sets to a nominated group.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
20/01/16	setgrp.txt		Wendell	2

SETLABEL

Label selected sets with EAT text, based on the object name, on the current layer.

The label is placed along the sets at the midpoint.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
20/01/16	setlabel.txt		Wendell	92,171

SETNONAM

Turn on all sets with no names after turning ALL objects OFF.

Run SETNONAM again to turn all objects ON, even those that were off before.

Objects on invisible layers remain invisible.

Create up to nine 3D sets at multiple offsets.

A set can have one of four smoothness values that affect the way contour lines, profiles and cross sections are created, how surfaces are rendered by 3D Visualizer, how surfaces are exported and how volumes and areas are calculated, in some commands. DTM formation is not affected. Changing the smoothness of sets does not affect existing objects such as contours until they are recreated.

Sets: Select sets to which the specified smoothness property is to be applied.
Soft: If B-Spline or Overhauser splining is enabled in Contour Settings (CONTOURSET), contours (CONTOUR) have spline curves with a single vertex at the intersections of contours and breaklines with soft smoothness. Use to show smooth transitions, such as natural features.
Hard: If B-Spline or Overhauser splining is enabled in Contour Settings, contours have spline curves with two vertices on either side of intersections of contours and breaklines with hard smoothness. Use to show harder bends such as tops and bottoms of banks.
Sharp: If B-Spline or Overhauser splining is enabled in in Contour Settings, contours have spline curves with vertices on either side of and at intersections of contours and breaklines with sharp smoothness. Use to show abrupt changes at breaklines such as kerbs, gutters and edges of concrete pads. Use sparingly as breaklines with hard and sharp smoothness can take much longer to render in 3DVISUALISER.
Dead: Dead regions (also known as dead areas) are defined by closed breaklines with a dead smoothness. Typical dead regions are swamp, vegetation, building and danger zones in surveys and exclusion and unchanged zones in designs.

Commands that clip contour, profile or cross section plines within dead regions include CONTOUR, PROFILE and XSHEET.

Commands that export surfaces to file without the triangles inside dead regions include GCSTLOUT, DTM2LDBX, DTM2XML, GC12DOUT, GCUMC3D, GRDPTS, GCDTMOUT, GCTMAOUT, and POWERGDE.

Commands that subtract dead regions from areas or volumes include CUTFILL, GC20, GC30, GC44CSV, GCMULVOL, SHADEDTM, SHADEISO and SHADESLP.

Commands that do not consider dead regions include LINKSET (DTM links and quick contours), 3DVISUALISER (3D views) and EARTHWORK (volumes and areas). Use DTMSET, CONTOUR and SHADEISO or GC20 instead.

Commands that show or create dead regions include DEADSETS.

Use BL to create a breakline set.

Use EDIT to modify the smoothness of a single set.

Use DESIGNSET to make the smoothness for all new sets Soft. (If the default is Sharp or Hard, on large projects 3DVISUALISER can be very slow. If the default is Dead, new DTM edges make the whole DTM a dead region.)

For the smoothness property to be used by an applicable command, the set segment must be a breakline. For dead regions, the set must also be closed. Breakline segments must be straight, not be crossed by another breakline with a higher record number and join two DTM points in the same layer as the set. DTM points must have elevations other than *, be contourable (not excluded from DTMs) and be on the same layer. The DTM requires least three DTM points able to form a triangle, therefore not all in a straight line.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Set smooth	Field Data Module	DTM S

SETSTA

Set the the beginning station | start chainage of an alignment by assigning a station | chainage to any location on the alignment.

To enter a new station value for the start of a pline or set, use STATION.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Edit\|More...\|Chainage at location Edit\|More...\|Station at location	Field Data Module	84

SEWBC

Create sewer block controls from a Sewer branch alignment, Lots, Tie Points and a DTM layer.

The TML name is SEW_BC. If SEWBC does not run from the command line, create an alias from SEWBC to SEW_BC or enter SEW_BC.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

SFLOOR

Create points on a layer to define a "safe bottom" landfill DTM surface between a top surface and a bottom surface.

Bottom surface

Select the DTM layer that is the bottom surface

Top surface

Select the DTM layer that is the top surface

Settings

Safety factor (%): Enter the ratio of the differences in elevation from the bottom surface to the new surface and the top surface.
Safe bottom layer: Select the layer for new DTM points

Create

Create the new points on the new surface layer at the locations of the points on the bottom DTM layer and elevations between the bottom and top surface elevations.

Close

Close the command

Use a dialog to track group usage.

The default group is one more than the highest group used in the project.

See also GC52 to just nominate the group and SETGRP to set the group to the next group.

TML date			Source	GC</
08/02/22			Trimble or Geocomp Update	40

SHADEDTM

Hatch regions of a DTM within boundaries by elevation ranges and report the areas.

Specify a DTM, boundaries, elevation ranges and a layer for the hatching.

For each elevation range, specify the higher and lower elevation and the hatching colour, style and scale.

Click Shade Elevations to hatch each region for each elevation range and then report the total horizontal and surface areas for each range to the message scroll.

SHADEDTM forms hatching on the hatching layer in the DTM view. This is the view that has the most contourable points on the specified DTM layer, which is not necessarily the Plan view or the current view. Any boundaries must be in the DTM view. Temporary DTMs are formed inside each boundary where possible using LINKSET Settings.

To separate networks of triangles, separate the boundaries.
Use SETMOOTH to define dead regions to be excluded from the hatching and areas.
Sort ranges on elevation to help you identify any gaps between ranges.
Show hatching boundaries as closed plines, with the same colour and layer as the hatching, for use with commands such as GC10, GC82 or GCGRDVOL.
Add a legend in any view showing samples of the hatches for each range on the hatching layer. Specify the legend text style and sample size (at least as big as the text height).
Import and export colours, hatch patterns and and hatch scales for the ranges from one project to another using an .SER (shade elevation ranges) file.

Hatch regions of two DTMs within boundaries by isopach range to create a cut|fill map and report the areas.

Specify two DTMs or one isopach surface DTM, isopach "depth" ranges and a layer for the hatching. If

For each isopach range, specify the higher and lower isopach and the hatching colour, style and scale.

Click Shade Depths to create a temporary isopach surface, hatch each region for each isopach range and then report the total horizontal areas and the cut, fill and net volumes to message scroll and P3Pad.

SHADEISO forms hatching on the hatching layer in the DTM view. This is the view that has the most contourable points on both specified DTM layers, which is not necessarily the Plan view or the current view. Any boundaries must be in the DTM view. Temporary DTMs are formed inside each boundary where possible using LINKSET Settings.

To separate networks of triangles, separate the boundaries.
Use SETMOOTH to define dead regions to be exclude from the hatching and areas.
Retain the hatching boundaries as closed plines, with the same colour and layer as the hatching.
Add a legend in any view showing samples of the hatches for each range on the hatching layer. Specify the legend text style and sample size (at least as big as the text).
Import and export colours, hatch patterns and and hatch scales for the ranges from one project to another using an SIR (shade isopach ranges) file.
Compute the minimum and maximum isopach depth ranges to help you decide what depth ranges to enter.
Report the surface areas for each range and the total cut and fill volumes to a nominated .CSV file then open the CSV in a spreadsheet application.

Modify the colours of selected points by elevation ranges.

For each elevation range, specify the higher and lower elevation and the new colour number.

Click Colour Points to modify colours for each elevation range.

Sort ranges on elevation to help you identify any gaps between ranges.
Add a legend in any view showing the colours of each elevation range.
Import and export colours for the ranges from one project to another using an .SER (shade elevation ranges) file.

Hatch regions of a DTM by slope ranges and report the areas.

DTM layer

Specify a DTM layer.

Bdys:

Include only regions inside selected boundaries.

Hatching layer

Select a layer for the hatching.

Exclude layer

Exclude regions inside boundaries on selected layer.

Slope ranges

Define a table of slope ranges.

For each slope range, specify the higher and lower slope and the hatching colour, style and scale.
Save colours, hatch patterns and and hatch scales for the ranges to read in another project using an SSR (shade slope ranges) file.
Sort slope ranges in slope order to check for gaps in sequence
Show hatching boundaries as closed plines, with the same colour and layer as the hatching
Label surface areas
Save areas to a CSV.
Use the maximum triangle slope or the crossfall slope at the centroid perpendicular to a specified registered alignment. Maximum slopes are always positive. Crossfall slopes are positive when sloping up and negative when sloping down.

Legend

Add a legend at any location in any view showing square sample hatches for each range. The samples are labelled with the slope range, horizontal area and slope area in a specified text style. The samples are at the specified size or the text height, whichever is bigger.

Shade Slopes

Report the minimum and maximum triangle slopes to the message scroll, hatch each region for each slope range, report the total horizontal areas, surface areas and the cut, fill and net volumes to P3Pad and draw the legend.

SHADESLP forms hatching on the hatching layer in the DTM view. This view, which has the most contourable points on the specified DTM layer, use usually the Plan view but could be a Profile or FLIPUP view. Any selected boundaries must be in the DTM view.

Temporary DTMs are formed inside each boundary where possible using LINKSET Settings.

Dead regions defined by SETMOOTH are also excluded.

Compute sets on the current layer at the edges of sun shadow defined by selected sets projected onto a DTM at a specified Altitude and Azimuth.

Latitude and Longitude: Message scroll displays the location of the centre of the display as Latitude and Longitude.
DTM:: Specify the DTM to project the shadows onto.
Sets:: Specify sufficient objects that cast the shadow.
Step:: Specify an interval along the sets at which to compute the shadow points.
Azimuth to Sun: Enter the bearing to the sun at the desired time.
Altitude (Vertical angle from Horizon to Sun).: Enter the Vertical angle from Horizon to Sun at the desired time.

Determine the Altitude and Azimuth values by entering the Latitude, Longitude and Time into a calculator at Geoscience Australia or US Naval Observatory.

Message scroll suggests values for Latitude and Longitude for the centre of the display using the current "From" Coordinate System defined by GCCOORD or COORDCON.

Terramodel angle units are defined by UNITSSET.

Define any dead regions in the DTM by SETSMOOTH.

See also SUNSTAR, DTMSHOT, GC17 and GC72.

Latitude, longitude, bearing and azimuth are all measured in degrees, minutes and seconds.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $500

SHAPE

Create and edit shapes for road design.

The shape editor display has the shape name and class at the top, the shape graphics in the middle, the shape segments and properties at the bottom left and the controls to create and edit shape segments at the bottom right.

The display shows the shape segment coordinates as horizontal and vertical offsets from the begining of the shape.

The Grid settings... button opens Road Grid Settimgs (ROADGRID) to control the appearance of grid lines in the display.

Vertical exaggeration is the same as that for XSect View which is controlled by View Settings (VIEWSET).

If your shape editor does not include the Arc tab, you are using the old shape editor. To use the new shape editor, use PROJECTV to delete the SHAPEEDITOR project variable.

: Open a new shape by clearing the current shape and re-initializing the segment parameters to zero.
: Copy the segment values from the current shape to a new shape and append copy to the name of the original shape.
: Delete the current shape and display the image and segment parameters for the next shape in the list.
Class: Select the shape class in which the selected shape is to be found.
Shape: Select the current shape for viewing and editing from the shapes in the current class.
: Zoom to the extents of segments in the current shape.
: Redraw the display of segments.
: Zoom to the previous extents of the display.
: Zoom to the extents of a window.
: Zoom to the extents of a smaller window.
: Zoom to the extents of a larger window.
: Redraw the segments around a moved location.
: Redraw the segments around a newly selected location.

Segment list

To copy or delete multiple segments, click the first segment you want to change, then hold down SHIFT while clicking the last segment in the group, or drag the cursor down the list to the last segment. To highlight multiple non-consecutive segments, hold down the CTRL key while clicking your segment selections.

Segment control buttons

Use buttons to add, insert, delete, copy and shift the order of selected segments.

New: Initiate the entry of a new segment.
Insert: Insert a segment above the segment highlighted.
Delete: Delete one or more highlighted segments.
Copy: Copy the highlighted segment to the bottom of the list.
Move up: Move the highlighted segment to above the segment immediately above it.
Move down: Move the highlighted segment to below the segment immediately below it.
Undo: Reverses the most recent changes made to segments.
Redo: Restore the changes made by Undo.

Straight tab

Enter parameters for straight segments.

Syntax

The syntax of the geometry specification includes a horizontal component and a vertical component, separated by a comma. Shape segments can be cut and pasted, even from one shape into another within Shape manager (SHAPEMAN).

Edit Data

Enter the geometry of a new shape segment or of an existing segment to position the end point of the shape segment with respect to either its beginning or the beginning of the overall shape.

Use the default data entry format or explicitly enter using another entry mode.

To edit a segment, highlight the segment in the list box, then enter the new segment geometry definition here.

Enter the segment geometry by entering X units first, then Y units, separated by a comma or a space.

Edit the shape of a segment graphically by picking its end location.

Point code

Assign a point code to the end of the currently highlighted shape segment. ROADDTM uses this point code to filter points, and to name of each point generated to model this position on the cross-section, and to name interconnecting breaklines.

Default Entry Modes

Display the modes of horizontal and vertical data entry for your shape segment. The mode you select is the default mode of data entry, so that you are not required to use explicit entry mode indicator codes. To use an entry mode other than the current default, explicitly indicate the desired mode by adding the prefix or suffix shown.

Horizontal

Horz dist: Enter an incremental horizontal distance from beginning of a shape to its end (preceded by @)
: Enter an incremental slope distance from the beginning of a shape to its end (preceded by S)
Max depth: Using a vertical entry mode, enter a maximum depth (preceded by M), which implies a maximum horizontal distance.
Offset dist: Enter an absolute horizontal offset with respect to the coordinate system of teh shape editor.

Vertical

Grade (%): Enter a percent grade (followed by %)
Ratio: Enter a slope ratio, as run:rise
Zenith: Enter the slope as a zenith angle (preceded by Z)
Nadir: Enter the slope as a nadir angle (preceded by N)
Vert dist: Enter a vertical offset distance to the end (followed by E)
Horizon: Enter the slope as a horizon angle (preceded by H)
Elev: Enter an incremental vertical distance from the beginning of the shape segment (followed by D)

Apply

Edits the current segment, to accommodate the segment geometry, and advance the highlight to the next segment in the list. There is always an empty segment at the end of the segment list to allow for additional segments.

Arc tab

Enter the parameters for curved segments.

Radius: Enter the radius.
Deflection Angle: Enter the deflection angle.
Delta: Enter the delta angle
Curve on Left | Curve on Right: Select the direction of the arc segment.
Point Code: Enter a name for use in construction staking.
Curve Solutions: Compute curve solutions (CURVESOL).
Apply: Edit the current segment, currently highlighted in the Segments list, to accommodate the segment geometry, and advance the highlight to the next segment in the list. There is always an empty segment at the end of the segment list to allow for additional segments.

Name

Enter the name of the shape

Shape type

Cut/Fill

Use the shape in both cut and fill

Cut

Use the shape only in cut

Fill

Use the shape only in fill

Material

Use the shape only in a selected material

Side shape designed for

The shape as drawn is designed to be used on

Both: both sides of a template
Left: the left side of a template
Right: the right side of a template

A shape designed for one side but used on the other is mirrored.

CAD

Colour: Select a colour to display the shape
Linetype: Select a linetype for plotting and ROADDTM.

Closed shape

Define how a closed shape connects to adjacent shapes.

Inside Point: Specify the point on the inside of the closed shape to which the adjacent shape should connect.
Outside Point: Specify the point on the outside of the closed shape to which the adjacent shape should connect.
Material: Select or create a material from the list of defined by the Road Material Manager (MATERIALS). Closed shapes such as kerbs and footpaths of often use a concrete material.

Tie to ground

End the shape at the intersection with the existing ground surface.

Starting point: Specify the point on the shape from which the shape will tie to ground. Enter 1 for the first point in the shape, 2 for the second, and so on.
First intersection | Last intersection: End the shape at the first or last intersection with the ground.
Width of subsurface bench: Not yet implemented.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Shapes\|Shape Editor Channel\|Shapes\|Shape editor...	Field Data Module	411

SHAPECLASS

Manage the shape class library.

Shape classes provide a way to categorize the shapes that you create, while the shape class library lets you organize the shape classifications.

Export (and import) shape class libraries containing definitions of all shapes in a class.

Each shape class is assigned one of these types: Roadbed, Shoulder, Ditch, Tie, Median or Miscellaneous.

Shape class types are given a priority in the order listed above. This priority is used as two roadways are merged, such as at a ramp connection to a main highway. In merging the roadways, as shapes intersect, the ones with the lowest priority drop out first. In this manner, ties, which intersect first, drop out before ditches. Ditches drop out before shoulders, and shoulders before road beds.

Shape class types are also used when generating a DTM from the design using ROADDTM. They provide guidance in connecting like features between cross-sections with sets which function as breaklines. The connecting sets are created at similar positions, between shapes of like shape class type.

Create a "Subgrade" shape class with Miscellaneous Type for use in Subgrade Manager (SUBGRADE).

Current shape class

Name: Change the name (maximum 16 characters) of the current shape class highlighted in the list.
Type: Select the shape class type for the current class. Choose from Roadbed, Shoulder, Ditch, Tie, Median, or Miscellaneous.

Class

List the names of your shape classes and highlight the current class.

#Shapes

List the number of shapes in each class.

Type

List the types of shape class.

Close

Close the shape class manager

New

Add a shape class and select the class type.

Copy

Copy the current shape class to create another shape class that contains copies of all the shapes in the original shape class.

Delete

Deletes the highlighted current shape class.

Import

Import a shape class and its shapes from an external roads shape class library file (.RSL). Any class of the same name as an existing class will cause any shapes with the same name in both the new & old classes to be overwritten.

Export

Export a shape class and its shapes to an external roads shape class library file (.RSL).

A ditch can be formed between two roadways. If the edge shapes both have the shape class type of Median, the shape of the ditch depends on whether they overlap.

The high ditch solution results when they overlap. The higher portions of the shapes are are retained in the new surface.

The low ditch solution results when they do not overlap. The first segment of the higher median shape is extended, as shown by the dashed line, to its intersection with the lower median shape. If this extension does not produce an intersection, the last segment of the lower median is extended to produce an intersection. The bottom elevation is defined by the lower of the median shapes.

High ditch solution
Low ditch solution

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Shapes\|Shape class manager... Tunnels\|Tunnel design\|Shapes\|Shape class manager... Channel\|Shapes\|Shape class manager...	Field Data Module	411

SHAPEMAN

List, copy, delete or edit roadway shapes.

For a selected shape class, list the shapes, with the number of segments, whether used in cut or fill and whether tied to ground.

Manage shape classes, create new shapes, edit using Shape manager (SHAPE), copy, delete, import and export shapes.

Class: List the names of the currently defined shape classes and highlight one as the current class. Double-click on a shape class to open the Shape Class Manager (SHAPECLASS) at the current class.
Shapes: List the names of the shapes of the current shape class. Double-click to open the Shape Editor with the selected shape.
# Segs: Show the number of segments contained within each shape.
Use in: Display the conditions under which the shape will be used, i.e. only in cut conditions, only in fill conditions, in either cut or fill, or only within a specifically designated subsurface material.
Tie flag: Display "T" if the shape ties to existing ground.
Class manager...: Open the Shape Class Manager (SHAPECLASS) at the highlighted shape to create, edit, copy and delete shape classes.
New...: Create a new shape.
Edit...: Open the Shape Editor (SHAPE) to add, delete, or edit segments in the currently highlighted shape.
Copy...: Copy copy the properties and segments of the highlighted shape to another shape name.
Delete: Delete the highlighted shape.
Import class...: Import a roads shape class library file (.RSL) into your project to restore previously created and stored shape classes, along with their shapes.
Export class: Export a shape class and its shapes to an external roads shape class library file (.RSL) to create and maintain libraries of predefined shapes.
Close: Close the shape manager

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Shapes\|Shape manager... Tunnels\|Tunnel design\|Shapes\|Shape manager... Channel\|Shapes\|Shape manager...	Field Data Module	411

SHAPESET

Road job: Select a roadjob.
Roadway: Select a roadway in that Roadjob.
Chainage | Station: Select roadway shapes.
Shapes in Design | Shapes in Subgrade: Select whether shapes are in Design or in Subgrade.
Create sets in Layer: Select a layer.
OK: Create sets on the layer.
Close: Close without creating sets.

See also LCN, STOREXS, XSHILO and VICRDSEC.

			Source
			Hamilton

SHOWDIR

Show the direction of a set or pline by a temporary arrowhead linetype or a moving arrow head. Continue selecting to show more sets or plines.

To clear the temporary arrows, redraw by clicking the REDRAW or GCREDRAW toolbar button, press function key F3 or roll the mouse wheel. Then click the Show button to show the direction of the most recently selected record.

The message scroll reports for each set or pline as it is selected whether open or closed and the type, record number, layer, colour, reference object, group, name and length.

The SHOWDIR linetype is used. The size of the arrow heads can be adjusted by the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

If SHOWDIR linetype is not already loaded, it is loaded from SHOWDIR.LIN. If SHOWDIR.LIN cannot be found, linetype 142 or TYRE_TRACK_>>>> is used. If none of those linetypes are loaded, or the view has a vertical exaggeration, a temporary a arrowhead is moved along the line at an adjustable speed.

The SHOWDIR linetype can be changed by editing SHOWDIR.LIN.

The start|end of each closed figure is shown by a marker in the cursor colour.

Record:: Select sets or plines, one at a time, to display with temporary arrow heads in the same colour. Report to message scroll whether it is open or closed and the type, record number, layer, colour, reference object, group, name and length.
Speed: If a suitable linetype is not loaded, specify a speed to move arrow head symbols.
Show: Show the direction of the most recently selected record.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

Select a set or pline with a mouse to show the direction by temporary arrow head symbols in the same colour. Continue selecting to show more. If a pline or set is going the wrong way, reverse it. To change your mind, reverse it again.

To clear the temporary arrows, redraw by clicking the REDRAW or GCREDRAW toolbar button, press function key F3 or roll the mouse wheel.

The size of the arrow heads can be adjusted by the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

If SHOWDIR linetype is not already loaded, it is loaded from SHOWDIR.LIN. If SHOWDIR.LIN cannot be found, linetype 142 or TYRE_TRACK_>>>> is used. If none of those linetypes is loaded, temporary arrow heads move along the line at an adjustable speed.

The SHOWDIR linetype can be changed by editing SHOWDIR.LIN.

Record:: Select sets or plines, one at a time, to display with temporary arrow heads in the same colour. Report to message scroll whether it is open or closed and the type, record number, layer, colour, reference object, group, name and length.
Speed: If a suitable linetype is not loaded, specify a speed to move arrow head symbols.
Reverse Current Direction and Show New Direction: Reverse the direction of the most recently selected record and show the new direction.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

Show objects only on any layer that is visible in any dynaview.

Show dynaview layers makes all layers displayed by any dynaview visible. This includes all layers in any layer list used by any dynaview and, if any dynaview has no layer list, all currently visible layers.

Objects that are turned off, segments that are hidden and profiles that refer to alignments other than active are still not shown.

Show Dynaview Layers: Temporarily make visible all layers that are visible in any dynaview and make invisible all other layers.
Restore: Restore layer visibility status to show the same layers that were visible before selecting Show Dynaview Layers.

Generate radiating and offset breaklines that approximate the shape of a side slope projected from a given horizontal alignment.

The HAL can have elevations associated with it, or select a vertical alignment from which to extract elevations.

Using SIDESLOPE,

Create up to five offset alignments on each side of the base alignment.
Configure a separate cross slope for each offset alignment.
Project the outermost offset alignment to a defined 3D surface, a datum plane, or a sloping plane defined by one, two or three points, to create a side slope approximation using breaklines that define the DTM.
Construct ramps, including benching, based on an alignment and longitudinal slope.
Project a design surface inward on a closed alignment.

The horizontal alignment is the basis from which the side slopes and offsets are horizontally located.
Select a Sideslope horizontal alignment as a pline or set located in the plan view.
If the selected pline has an elevation associated with it, SIDESLOPE bases the vertical information for the design on the elevation assigned to the pline, or select a vertical alignment from the profile view.
If the Hal is a 3D set, a set with points that have elevations, SIDESLOPE uses those elevations for the vertical component of the design, or select a vertical alignment from the profile view.
To select a horizontal alignment, pick a HAL from the plan view.

SIDESLOPE takes the vertical component of the projection of offsets and side slopes from a vertical alignment or from the elevation information associated with a horizontal alignment.
An existing VAL that refers to the HAL and shares its name is used as the default VAL or, if a VAL is not found, any object that refers the HAL or shares its name.
If the HAL is a pline with an elevation assigned to it, or a 3D set whose points have elevations, SIDESLOPE can use that as its vertical component. Alternatively, select a pline or set from the profile view to represent the vertical component.

Settings are arranged in Tabs. Click OK to accept changes in all tabs, Cancel to reject changes in all tabs.

When SIDESLOPE creates offset alignments and projects sideslopes, it uses breaklines to create an approximation of the curved and straight sections of a selected horizontal alignment on a DTM, based on the vertical information you select.

The General tab sets the precision for projecting side slopes to the termination surface and forming breaklines that approximate the selected alignments. In addition, select the method to create the side slope representation: the Cross slope method or the True side slope method. Load, save and create side slope configuration files.

To configure the precision for projecting side slopes:

To set the interval (along the HAL) at which the side slope will be projected to the termination surface, enter a value in the Surface projection interval field, or click to derive an interval value from a selected object.
To specify the interval (along the HAL) at which points are placed along the breakline approximation of the alignment and the offset lines, enter a value in the Point formation interval field. This interval allows you to create additional points that may be used for staking. If you don’t want to create additional points, enter an interval value greater than the length of the alignment.
Enter a Maximum alignment deviation value in the adjacent field, or click to derive a deviation value from a selected object. This value controls the spacing along the alignment at which the breakline approximation of the alignment will be formed. It is measured from the middle ordinate of an arc segment on the alignment’s curve to the length of chord associated with the breakline segment.

To model the DTM surface between the alignment and the first offset line, or to project sideslopes from the alignment directly to the termination surface, SIDESLOPE creates a 3D breakline that forms an approximation of the selected alignment.

To create the breakline approximation of the alignment:

If your horizontal alignment is a pline, select "Form when subject alignment is a polyline". The points and sets are stored on the current layer.
If your horizontal alignment is a set, select "Form when subject alignment is a set".
Breaklines and sets are formed when the HAL is a 3D set
- on the current layer without an associated vertical alignment. The breakline approximation points will only be created within the extents of the horizontal curves, and a new set will be created that connects the 3D points on the HAL as well as the newly-created curve points.
- not on the current layer without an associated vertical alignment, new breakline approximation points are created on the current layer along the extents of the HAL, including within horizontal curves, and a new set is created that connects the new points. If one or more HAL points is on the current layer, you will be reminded about the possibility of duplicate points.
- on the current layer with an associated vertical alignment, you will be reminded about the possibility of the 3D points being in conflict with the vertical profile definition.
The breakline approximation points are assigned the name "Breakline approximation of 'the name of your horizontal alignment'. If you have not assigned a name to your HAL, the breakline approximation points are given the name "Breakline approximation".
To simply create offset alignments without linking them to the subject alignment, clear these check boxes.

Cross slope: Create an offset set at a constant horizontal and vertical offset from the selected horizontal alignment. Because of the influence of the longitudinal slope, unless the vertical alignment is flat, this cross slope will not represent the true slope of the side slope segment. Use this method in those instances where holding the specific side slope value is not imperative.
True side slope: Create a offset set with the cross slope value that results in the specified slope at any point along the HAL, regardless of the vertical alignment, and forces the projection to match the specified slope. Use this method for landfills or for alignments that reside on a slope, where holding a specific side slope is important.

Lateral breaklines control link formation and contour smoothing. These breaklines are assigned the name "SS Lateral BL", and are created between the horizontal alignment and the first offset or side slope intersection points, between all offsets, and between the outermost offset and side slope intersection points.

If you prefer that these breaklines not appear on the screen, select "Hide lateral breaklines".

Many of the settings contained in the Side slope settings dialog box are stored in an external side slope configuration file (*.SSC). Create, load, and save configuration files.

To create a new side slope configuration file, click New to clear some of the check boxes and options of the Offset line and Left side slope projection and Right side slope projection tabs in the settings dialog box as if you are starting the configuration process anew, but retain many of the variable settings you entered, such as distances and slopes. Settings entered after clicking New can be saved by clicking Save.

To load a side slope configuration into the current project file, Click Load, select a side slope configuration file. If necessary, change directories.

To save a side slope configuration file, click Save, then enter the name of the file.

Settings are stored and updated in the configuration file as follows:

SIDE SLOPE SETTING	STORED IN SIDESLOPE CONFIGURATION FILE	UPDATED IN SIDESLOPE CONFIGURATION FILE BY SELECTING NEW BUTTON
Beginning and ending stations	No	No
Surface projection interval	Yes	No
Point formation interval	Yes	No
Maximum alignment deviation	Yes	No
Breakline approximation of the subject alignment	Yes	No
Side slope specification method	Yes	No
Surface definition settings	No	No
Create offset line	Yes	Cleared
Offset line configuration settings	Yes	Offset option buttons re-initialized to start with Offset 1
Constraint surfaces	No	Set to None
Create true offset line	Yes	Cleared
Constraint mechanism	No	No
Ramp edge creation setting	Yes	Cleared
Ramp direction	Yes	No
Ramp starting station	No	No
Ramp slope	Yes	No
Maximum uninterrupted ramp length	Yes	No
Ramp bench length	Yes	No
Side slope projection settings	Yes	No
Side slope termination surface	No	No

Alignment chainage | station extents: Display the begin and end chainages | stations of the selected HAL.
Side slope limits: Enter the limiting begin and end chainages | stations of the new side slope
Set to: Set the the side slope limits to match the alignment extents
OK: Accept changes to settings in all tabs
Cancel: Cancel current changes to settings in all tabs

Configure the surface at which the side slopes terminate. These surfaces can be a DTM surface layer, a level plane, or a plane defined by one, two or three points. Once created in a project, these surfaces can be used to terminate any side slope.

You can have a maximum of 20 surfaces in your project.

To define a surface, click New then Enter a Surface name of up to 80 characters.

To delete a surface from the list, select the surface and click Delete.

Level plane: A plane at a given elevation that extends infinitely in all directions. Enter the elevation for the plane.
DTM surface: A DTM layer formed from 3D points and sets. To reduce confusion, give this surface the same name as the DTM layer.
1 point plane: A plane passing through a 3D reference location, specified by entering coordinates or by selecting a 3D point, that extends infinitely in all directions, at an entered inclination angle and bearing.
2 point plane: A plane passing through two given 3D reference locations, specified by entering coordinates or selecting 3D points, that extends infinitely in all directions, at a cross slope as measured along a line perpendicular to the line between the two locations, at an entered inclination angle and bearing.
3 point plane: A plane passing through three given 3D reference locations, specified using coordinates or 3D points, that extends infinitely in all directions.

Control the formation of up to five 3D straight-line-segment-based sets on each side of the selected horizontal alignment. These sets can be offset both horizontally and vertically from the alignment or the previous offset alignment.

Create offset lines. The first line on each side is offset from the alignment, the second line is offset from the first, and so on. As you select an offset option, configure the offset conditions. A checked and disabled check box beneath an offset option indicates that the offset has already been configured. An enabled check box that has not been checked indicates that offset must still be configured.

Configure the offsets in order, from the alignment outwards. Once offset one has been configured, select any offset two for configuration, then any offset three, etc.

Specify slope values, create a 2D offset line or a 3D breakline approximation, specify a constraint surface and choose the cross slope method or the true side slope method.

Create offset line

Select any two of the following settings and enter their values:

Horizontal offset: Enter a positive horizontal offset distance from the horizontal alignment or the previous offset to the offset line, or display a computed horizontal offset when any two of the other settings have been specified. When a horizontal offset is designated, the slope distance option is disabled.
Vertical offset: Enter a vertical offset distance from the horizontal alignment or the previous offset to the offset line, or display a computed vertical offset when any two of the other settings have been specified. A positive value indicates an upward offset, a negative value indicates a downward offset.
Slope distance: Enter a slope distance from the horizontal alignment or the previous offset to the offset line, or display a computed slope distance when any two of the other settings have been specified. A positive value indicates an upward offset, a negative value indicates a downward offset. When a slope distance is designated, the horizontal offset option is disabled.
Cross slope | true side slope: Enter the cross-slope or the true side slope, according the the General tab setting, or display the cross slope. A positive value indicates an upward slope, a negative value indicates a downward slope. (The true side slope is not shown because that depends on the slope of the alignment at any given point.)

Name

Enter a name for the offset line and point objects.

Constraint surface

Select a constraint surface from the list of surfaces previously defined in the Surface definition tab, or None.

Constraint mechanism

Select a mechanism to alter the offset line where it lies either above or below the constraint surface:

Lower limit: hold slope/vary horizontal offset: Form the offset line in accordance with the horizontal and vertical specifications only where it is at or above the constraint surface. Where it is below the constraint surface, the offset line follows the surface itself, honouring the specified cross slope.
Lower limit: hold horizontal offset/vary slope: Form the offset line in accordance with the horizontal and vertical offset specifications where it is at or above the constraint surface. Where it is below the constraint surface, the offset line follows the horizontal offset specification, varying the vertical offset and cross slope to intersect the constraint surface.
Upper limit: hold slope/vary horizontal offset: Form the offset line in accordance with the horizontal and vertical specifications only where it is at or below the constraint surface. Where it is above the constraint surface, the offset line follows the surface itself, honoring the specified cross slope.
Upper limit: hold horizontal offset/vary slope: Form the offset line in accordance with the horizontal and vertical offset specifications where it is at or below the constraint surface. Where it is above the constraint surface, the offset line follows the horizontal offset specification, varying the vertical offset and cross slope to intersect the constraint surface.

Create true offset line

Create a 2D planimetric representation of an alignment offset horizontally from the selected alignment, on a specified layer. This alignment is created in addition to the breakline approximation.

Configure an offset line to form the inside edge of a ramp that starts at a specified ramp starting station | chainage that is coincidental with its reference alignment, and proceeds in a designated direction at a designated slope. The ramp will slope down if the slope of the offset line is downward, and up if upward. An additional offset line can also be created to establish the entry style, width and cross slope of the ramp.

Create ramp edge

Enable ramp configuration of the next offset line

Ramp entry style

Parallel: Model an entrance to the ramp that runs parallel to the subject alignment.
In the diagram below, A represents the second offset line that forms the outside edge of the ramp. B represents the subject alignment, and C represents the first offset line that forms the inside edge of the ramp.
Intersection: Model an entrance to the ramp that is tangential to the ramp alignment.
In the diagram below, A stands for the starting point of the second offset line. B is the second offset line that forms the outside ramp edge. C is the starting point of the first offset line. D is the subject alignment, and E is the first offset line that forms the inside ramp edge.
Turning: Model an entrance to the ramp that is perpendicular to the reference alignment of the inside ramp edge, then makes an immediate turn to parallel the reference alignment.
In the diagram below, A is the starting point of the second offset line. B is the starting point of the first offset line. C is the subject alignment. D is the first offset line that forms the inside ramp edge, and E is the second offset line that forms the outside ramp edge.

From ramp

Select the Ahead option to create the ramp in the same direction as the subject alignment. Select the Back option to create the ramp in the opposite direction.

Ramp starting station | chainage

Enter the starting chainage along the alignment.

Ramp slope

Enter a longitundinal slope to be used for the ramp. Enter a positive value for the ramp to slope upwards, and a negative value for the ramp to slope downwards. The sign of the slope must match the sign of the cross slope from the subject alignment to the offset line representing the ramp edge. For example, a cross slope of –3:1 from the subject alignment to the ramp edge offset line must be accompanied by a longitudinal slope that slopes downward.

Maximum uninterrupted ramp length

Enter a maximum distance that the ramp will slope before a flat bench section is inserted. The elevation of the bench is based on the elevation the ramp attained at the maximum length.

Bench length

Enter the length of any bench section. The ramp slope will resume at the end of the bench section.

Configure the side slopes projected from the outer-most offset line or, in the absence of any offset lines, from the selected horizontal alignment.

Define a termination surface in the Surface definition tab first.

Create projected side slope

Create points and sets created where an intersection with the termination surface is found

Both up and down: Project side slopes in an upward or downward direction.
Up only: Project side slopes in upward only.
Up only: Project side slopes in upward only.

Upward cross-slope | true side slope)

Enter the upward vertical angle of a cross slope or true side slope, or pick an object on the screen to derive its slope.

Downward cross slope | true slope)

Enter the downward vertical angle of a cross slope or true side slope, or pick an object on the screen to derive its slope. Enter a positive value.

Maximum upward vertical offset

Enter any maximum allowable upward vertical offset from the selected horizontal alignment to the intersection of the side slope with the termination surface. Where these are reached, the side slopes are terminated to form bench sections. Sequentially-numbered points are connected to a set that forms a constrained side slope edge that connects to the end of the adjacent side slope intersection line.

Maximum downward vertical offset

Enter any maximum allowable downward vertical offset from the selected horizontal alignment to the intersection of the side slope with the termination surface. Where these are reached, the side slopes are terminated to form bench sections. Sequentially-numbered points are connected to a set that forms a constrained side slope edge that connects to the end of the adjacent side slope intersection line.

Name

Enter a name for the side slope intersection line and the constrained side slope edge (appended it with ).

Termination surface

Select a termination surface from the list of previously created surfaces.

Left or Right side termination surface

List the name of the opposite side termination surface. As you configure the left side slope projection, the surface assigned to the right side slope projection is shown, and vice versa.

Replicate on left | right

Configure a matching side slope projection for the other side of the alignment.

Register an active alignment then, at intervals over a chainage range, create lines representing a driver's line of sight where limited by a DTM surface.

From the resulting lines, see whether the design sight line requirements have been met. If not, change the alignment or the amount of cut into the batter to suit and try again.

Choose the driver's height above the pavement surface and an offset from the HAL.

Typically, you would run this twice, with positive and negative offsets, to represent travel in both directions.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

SITEWORKIN

Import data direct from Trimble Paydirt SiteWork.

Trimble Paydirt SiteWork is a separate application from Trimble for estimating quantities that is optimised for use with a tablet digitizer. SiteWork version 5.23 includes Terramodel CAD module. Both applications must be installed.

Start SiteWork directly or through SITEWORKIN.
Open a SiteWork project
Make the Plan Data or Cut/Fill Report Windows active
Select Tools|Export|To Terramodel
Select Surfaces to export
Select data type to export
Click OK to export the data
Open Terramodel
Display the Terramodel project

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
22/01/09	Paydirt SiteWork User Guide Paydirt SiteWork Tutorial SiteWork Help	Windows Start\|Trimble Office\|Paydirt SiteWork 5.23\|Tools\|Export\|To Terramodel	Trimble

SITEWORKOUT

SiteWork button

Export data to Paydirt SiteWork.

In SiteWork
1. Project | New or Project | Open
2. Tools | Import | Using Terramodel
In Terramodel
1. Import any data such as a Terramodel .PRO
2. Make any edits in Terramodel
3. SITEWORKOUT or EXPORT SITEWORK or File | Export/Upload | Sitework or SiteWork Toolbar button
4. Enter the name for the new SiteWork Surface
5. Select objects to be exported
6. Pick reference points and enter the locations of two points to orient the data to the drawing board.
7. Select "Skip reference" if you will not be digitizing
8. Finish
9. Repeat for each new SiteWork layer
10. File | Exit
In SiteWork
1. View | Refresh

Install Paydirt SiteWork 5.23
Install Terramodel 10.61 with Geocomp Update N and August 2021 N+ update or later
In Terramodel
1. Run EDITINI
2. Select “Show old ini”
3. Browse to select C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\sitework_toolbar_tmodwin.ini
4. Select [Toolbar]
5. Import
6. Restart Terramodel

This toolbar includes Geocomp buttons. If you prefer different buttons, compare the toolbar in this TMODWIN.INI with your toolbar in your TMODWIN.INI, and then create your own toolbar to import with EDITINI.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
22/01/09	Paydirt SiteWork User Guide Paydirt SiteWork Tutorial SiteWork Help	Windows Start\|Trimble Office\|Paydirt SiteWork 5.23\|Tools\|Import\|Using Terramodel	Trimble

SKIP

Define chainage ranges to be skipped in a road job.

Click New to specify a start chainage, end chainage and name for a section of road to be skipped.

For complex roads with many skips, use GCSKIPMN.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|Skip manager... Channel\|Channel design\|Skip manager...	Secured

SLICE

Set chainages by interval or XLines. Nominate horizontal and vertical offsets. Nominate cut and fill slopes.

Plan view: Select the horizontal alignment in a plan view.
Profile view: Select a vertical alignment (VAL) in a profile view. Any VAL that is unique to the HAL is the default.
Settings: These settings control the DTM layer from which points will be interpolated, the beginning and ending stations that define the range that will be interpolated, the interval at which points will be interpolated and the parameters defining how the interpolation will be made.

Slice can interpolate only one side of an alignment at a time.

Slice creates points only at a specified interval. Since surfaces defined in this manner will not match at the intermediate points, if both surfaces are contoured you may notice small differences in the contours.

Slice projects a simple template onto a DTM using a HAL and VAL to interpolate points.

Create B-splined plines by entering vertex locations.

B-splines are useful for splined leader lines and vegetation and golf course boundaries.

Spline curves are adjusted to fit as they are created.

points.

Beg cp: Select the location for the first vertex on the pline, such as the tip of the arrowhead of a leader line.
Next cp: Select more vertices for the pline.
Add Cp: Insert intermediate vertices.
Settings: Specify the colour and linetype.
New: Create the splined pline to the cursor location and begin a new pline.
Close: Create the splined pline to the cursor location and close the command.

Create plines around DTM triangles where the slope is within a specified range.

A pline boundary is created around all the qualifying triangles.

The slope units are controlled by the Default Vertical Angle Entry mode in UNITSSET. Specify a ratio, percentage or a vertical angle from zenith, horizon or nadir.

If you specify a different current layer for each slope range, it's easier to HATCH all the triangles at once by layer.

If plines can JOIN, GC82 can compute the horizontal or surface areas.


Slope 1%: Enter a minimum slope
Slope 2%: Enter a maximum slope
DTM layer: Select the DTM layer
OK: Create pline boundaries
Cancel: Cancel

Slope alignments define cross-slope as a function of the chainage within the Super view, where the coordinates are chainage and cross-slope.

Slope alignments control the transition of shape segments. The slope of the segment to which it is applied at a chainage is the Y coordinate of the slope alignment at that chainage in the Super view.

The table shows all the registered slope alignments, with their names, record numbers and numbers of offsets. Select any alignment to edit.

Slope Manager uses the same dialog as VAL Manager (VALMANAGER). If the Alignment Type is set to Profile, change the alignment type to Slope. The manager continues to display the alignments of the chosen type until you select the other type, regardless of whether you select the Slope Manager or Val Manager command.

Slope alignment

Display or edit the name and record of any registered slope alignment.

Name: Change the name of the registered alignment.
Pline/Set: Enter or select the set or pline in the Super view to be registered as the slope alignment.

Close

Close the alignment manager

Delete

Delete the highlighted registered slope alignment from the list.

New alignment...

Create a new registered alignment by specifying a slope alignment record in the Super view and the name of the registered alignment. The default name is the object name, or VALn if the object has no name.

Offsets...

Close

Close the alignment offset manager

New...

Chainage | station: Enter the chainage | station from which the offset is to begin
Vertical offset: Enter the slope offset in % to be applied to the slope alignment from this chainage | station to the next offset (even though the dialog incorrectly shows Vertical offset).
OK: Create the new chainage | station offset
Cancel: Cancel changes to this offset

Delete

Delete the chainage | station offset

Alignment type

Change the alignment type to Slope

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	RG 385	Roads\|Alignments\|Slope manager... Channel\|Alignments\|Slope manager...	Field Data Module

SMANAGER

Create, copy, delete import and export, subgrade templates and assign templates to road jobs.

For use with Subgrade Manager (SUBGRADE).

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|Subgrade manager... Channel\|Channel design\|Overdepth manager...	Secured

SMOKEDUC

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SMPROAD

Create road string sets in a plan view from a single template, with batters and ditches.

SMPROAD requires a DTM, HAL, VAL, and a template created by Simple Template (SMPTMPL).

Hal

Select a horizontal alignment (HAL) in the plan view along which points will be created.

Val

Select a vertical alignment (VAL) in the profile view. The placement of the template is controlled by both the HAL and VAL.

Stations | Chainages

Enter start and end chainages | stations

Settings

Use X lines: Calculate road points at xlines or at the increment
Station | chainage increment: Enter the interval along the HAL at which you want roadway points calculated.
Template: List templates created using SMPTMPL.
Roadway or ID name: Enter a name for the new points.
Dtm layer: Select the DTM layer to which the sideslopes of the template will be projected.
OK: Accept changes to settings
Cancel: Close without accepting changes

SmpRoad

Create the road points and sets

Cancel

Cancel the command

The roadway module is not required for SMPROAD.
The set points may be created at xlines. If at interval, the interval may be from chainage 0.00 or the nominated chainage (depending on an attribute of the simple template).
The points are created on the current layer.
Use SMPROAD to design simple roads (including ditches).
When you include ditches in the design, each ditch must have a profile of the same name stored in a profile view. You must have a tie-in to have a ditch.
Create ditches and templares using SMPTMPL.
Ditch boundaries have the same color as the ditch profiles, so you can easily distinguish between the road surface, the ditches and the tie-in slopes.
When SMPROAD projects sideslopes, both ends of the cross-sections are connected to form a closed surface for use with EARTHWORK to compute volumes.
Templates contain special attributes and are only recognized by SMPROAD when they have a name and are created in a Xsection view.
Ditches are placed according to attributes set in SIMPLTMPL.
Ditch profiles refer to the main profile. To omit ditches, either don't create them or don't refer them to the ditch profile.

This template is used with simple roads function SMPROAD. Only one simple road template can be defined at one time.

The template consists of a pline drawn from left to right in the xsect view, with attributes such as batters and a vertical offset.

The offsets from 0,0 in the XSection view are the offsets from the alignments.

A left ditch and a right ditch can be located at a batter from the edge of the template at a fixed grade until the elevation of a ditch profile is met. Each ditch continues outwards at that elevation to the nominated ditch width and then batters to the DTM.

Template

Select the pline in XSect view to use as a template.

Properties

Template name: Enter a name for the template to be included in the Template list box in SMPROAD.
Vertical offset: Enter an offset distance from the template to the vertical profile, such as when a VAL is at the top of the pavement, but the template is to the top of the base. A negative offset distance places the template below the vertical profile, while a positive offset places the template above the profile.
Align sta. from 0 | Align chn. from 0: Start chainages | stations from zero, or from the beginning station specified in SMPROAD.

Left ditch | Right ditch

Cut slope: Enter the slope projected from the ditch to the DTM when the edge is in cut.
Fill slope: Enter the slope projected from the template to the DTM when the edge is in fill.
Ditch bottom width: Enter the width of the flat bottom of the ditch.
Ditch slope: Enter the slope projected from the edge of the template to the invert of the ditch profile.
Ditch name: Enter name of the ditch profile pline in the profile view.
Tie: Project tie slopes on each side of the template to the DTM. When not checked, create points at the edge of the template only.

SmpTmpl

Create the template after you have assigned the template attributes

Cancel

Cancel the command

Use to create a template prior to using SMPROAD.
Create each template from a single pline that does not "fold" back onto itself.
Create the pline from left to right or right to left.
The zero coordinate of the Y axis defines the center of the template that will be tied to the HAL and VAL. The position of the template relative to the X axis is not important.
Stack multiple templates on top of each other.
Each end of a template can also include a ditch profile.
To use a ditch profile, specify a ditch name, create a profile in the profile view of the invert of the ditch and assign the same name to the ditch profile. Refer the ditch profile to the vertical profile.
When using a ditch, SMPROADS holds constant the slope from the edge of template to the ditch, and interpolates the invert location of the ditch from the ditch profile by varying the distance from the ditch to the edge of the template.
When ditches are included, tie-in slopes are projected from the outside of the ditch to the specified DTM.
Where no ditches are included, tie-in slopes are projected from the outside edge of the template to the DTM.

Toggle on or off the Snap status of a layer.

Control graphical selection of objects on a layer using Window, Crossing and Record selection.

Use SNAPLYR with an argument in an alias or toolbox button.

Usage: SNAPLYR layername

Don't use with layer names with space characters. Only characters before any spaces are considered.

The snap status is shown and can also be controlled by LAYERSET.

Force the display cursor to snap to a grid with specified origin, azimuth, horizontal interval and vertical interval.

View: Select the view mode for the snap settings
Origin: Select the origin for the snap grid, for example, 0,0 for the corner of a building.
Azimuth: Select the bearing of the snap grid. Usually the azimuth is set to 00°00'00". You could set it a building grid.
Snap On/Off: Toggle snapping on and off.
Snap interval spacing: Set the Horizontal and Vertical intervals of the snap grid.

To change the snapset mode at the command line or in a toolbox, for

Snapset mode	Enter at command line
None	Snapset 0
On	Snapset 1
On/Off	Snapset -1

See also CURSOR which also sets direction of cursor movement, GRIDSET which sets the grid spacing, GRIDMAKE which honours some grid snap settings and OBJSNAP which sets the running snap modes.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Snap to grid settings	Field Data Module	grid1

SNR

Replace all examples of a sequence of characters in selected alphanumeric point numbers, text or names of points, plines and sets. SNR is case-sensitive.

Objs:: Select objects to be modified
Record name or text: Modify text or the names of points, plines and sets
Alpha point number: Modify alphanumeric point numbers
Search
: Specify the character string to be found
Replace: Specify the replacement character string
OK: Replace each found character string with the replacement character string
Cancel: Close without modifing any selected objects

Text = hello world
Search = world
Replace = john
New text = hello john

SNR finds and replaces text in EAT codes like any other text; this can invalidate EAT text if not done correctly, as in this example:

Text = Z \SUB{Z,2}
Search = Z
Replace = Elev
New text = Elev \SUB{Elev,2}

Refer to non-keyboard characters in text by their three-digit decimal ASCII value, such as \010 for new line and \176 for degree (°) sign. What you see depends on the Terramodel font. Not all fonts contain all characters. For example, in some fonts degree sign is \127. In fonts such as symbol.fnt, specify a symbol by this method. See Font FAQ for font charts.

Open a selected file and write a copy to a new file, replacing characters according to a mapping file.

The format of the .MAP file is:

old text,new text

Characters are case-sensitive; "ABC" is distinct from "abc".

Any line in the .MAP file that starts with # is treated as a comment line and ignored.

The In and Out files must be ASCII-encoded such as .XML, .TXT, .DXF or .CSV, but not binary such as .DOC, .DWG or .XLS.

Each line in the map file is processed for the whole external file, then the next line in turn. The order is critical. You might need to use temporary characters.

C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\LEGAL.MAP is an example of a mapping file. This one expands degree, minute and second signs to words for reports generated by REPORTS Legal writer(ft).

A character can be defined by a code for an ASCII value. Here are some common examples:

Character	Code for ASCII value
Tab	\\009
New line (add only)	\\013\\010
Escape	\\027
#	\\035
,	\\044
\	\\092
‘	\\145
’	\\146
–	\\150
—	\\151
°	\\176
±	\\177
²	\\178
³	\\179
New paragraph	\\182
·	\\183
Ø	\\216
ñ	\\241
÷	\\247
ü	\\252

Create points and sets to locate soil nails.

Select a HAL pline, an optional VAL pline, a left or right direction, a slope and a .CSV file.

The fields in the .CSV file are

point_name,chainage,horizontal offset,elevation,length

For each row in the .CSV, SOILNAIL creates a point at the chainage, offset and elevation (or relative elevation if a VAL is selected) and a second point, to the left or right of the alignment, at the length (slope distance) and slope angle (in degrees from horizontal). Each pair of points is created on the current layer with the specified name and is linked by a set.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SORTSET

Sort record numbers of selected closed sets in name order.

Check spelling of text against dictionaries and correct.

Select the corner of the set to be splayed and nominate a splay distance and text style.

A new segment is placed in the set.

Optionally place a pline at the old corner and dimensions as text.

Legible text orientation is useful for the text style.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SPLINE

Smooth plines using a spline function.

Splines are mainly used to smooth contour plines, but they can be used to smooth other plines.

The three options are

None: No smoothing is applied
B Spline: B plines pass inside each point used to locate the curve. B splines are commonly used in CAD applications.
Overhauser: Overhauser splines pass through each point used to locate the curve. Overhauser splines are commonly used for contouring.

Only spline plines with straight segments. Sets cannot be splined. Plines containing curves cannot be splined. Circular, spiral, combining or vertical curves cannot be added to splines. Arcs added to splined plines will be incorrect.

Splines are displayed and plotted as a series of straight pline segments. The number of segments per spline for display is controlled by the View resolution in DISPLAYSET, and for plotting in PLOTSET.

SLL creates a B-spline graphically. CONTOURSET configures contour splining. EDIT can spline a single pline.

CURVE inserts an arc, spiral, parabola or combining curve that is not a spline. FILTER and GCCHORD can be used to replace splines with straight segments joining locations on the spline path.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Spline\|Despline	Field Data Module	smooth

SPLITSET

Split closed sets into smaller closed sets based on settings specified by the user.

SPLITSET can split land into aliquot parts, based on midpoint protraction, and can split a lot based on selected points.

Report easting, northing and DTM elevation coordinates at a location.

Open the Windows installer for MS Sans Serif font.

The default font used in the menus and command line is the regular raster 8-point font of the MS Sans Serif typeface. This was the default Windows font up to Windows 98 after which it was replaced by the vector font Microsoft Sans Serif.

If this font has not been installed, which is common on newer computers, menus and commands display with some other font, which is often larger or bolder and not as clear. This can also cause other display problems such the Browse buttons in AutoCAD import scripts (IMPORT) being moved off the dialog.

If you have installed Geocomp Update N or P, enter SSERIFE or FIXFONT at the command line. This opens the Windows font installer and displays examples of SSERIFE.FON. Then click on Install.

Report point number, angle-right, distance, northing, easting, elevation and name of selected points relative to selected instrument, foresight and backsight points.

Compare the 2D or 3D locations of selected staked (setout | as-built | as-constructed | monitored) points against design (reference) points and create a report.

The staked points are matched to the design points by one of three methods:

Proximity: Search for a design point within a user-defined tolerance of each staked point
Proximity and Layer: Search for a design point on a user-defined layer and within the user-defined tolerance of each staked point
Point number (offset): Search for a design point number that matches each selected staked point number by a user-defined offset value.

In addition, select an offset distance from each staked point to search for a design point.

Select staked/monitored points:

Select the points for a staked report.

Settings

Point Matching Method

Select a methods to match the selected points with the reference points. Then enter values for any active option on the right.

Proximity: Match each selected point with the closest point within the specified Tolerance.
Proximity & layer: Match each selected point with the closest point on the specified layer that is within the specified tolerance. If all the reference points are on the same layer, this option is faster than Proximity.
Point number: Match each selected point by adding the Point shift value to the point number. The Point shift field allows both positive and negative values. For example, if selected points were numbered from 1001 to 1010 and reference numbers in the project were numbered from 1 to 10 then enter 1000 for the point number shift.
Offset: Enter an offset value so as to match a selected point with another point (+/-)offset from the selected point.
Tolerance: Enter the tolerence value to use when matching the points in the selection set with the other points in the project. To match, the point must not be further away than the tolerance distance.
Layer: Select the layer that contains the reference points to be matched.
Point shift: Match each selected point with a point from the remaining point list with a point number equal to the selected point number plus the point shift value. For example, if a selected point number was 3 and the Point shift value was 1000 then the matching point would be 1003.

Report Options

Point tolerance

Enter horizontal and vertical tolerances for the staked report data. For each delta northing and delta easting that exceeds the user-defined tolerance, the data are marked with an asterisk. If the Failures only button is checked, only records exceeding the tolerances are listed.

Design coordinates

Report the northing, easting, and elevation of the design/reference point.

Delta XY

Report the differences between the "staked" coordinate and the "design" coordinate.

Staked coordinates

Report the northing, easting, and elevation of the staked or monitored point.

Station offset

Report the station and offset of the design point from a selected the horizontal alignment (HAL).

Failures only

Report only those points that fail the tolerance test.

Delta distance

Report the horizontal distance between the design/reference point and the staked or monitoring point.

Staked point numbers

Report the point number of the staked or monitored point.

Settings

Report the settings used to create the report.

Terms

The selected points are assumed to be the staked data within the report. The matched points column headings can be Design or "Reference".

OK

Create the staked report in P3Pad.

Cancel

Cancel the command without creating a report.

Staked assumes that the "staked" data points are selected and the "design" or "reference" points are the points that are matched.
If you import the staked points into an already created design project, import them onto a separate layer to enable the Proximity & layer method.
For the Point number method, RENUMBER can offset point numbers.
For the Point number method, the point shift is positive (+) if the reference points numbers are larger that the selected point numbers.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Reports\|Staked\|Monitoring	Field Data Module

STAKING

Report roadway staking for engineering.

The staking report provides staking information for a cross-section in a specified road job at a specific station.

Road job

Select a road job.

Roadway

Select a roadway.

Existing ground

Select an "existing ground" surface.

Report

Report roadway staking to P3Pad or File

Design surface

Compute the staking limits based on the top of the finish surface or the bottom of the subgrade.

Chainage | Station

Limit the chainage range of the report.

Data displayed

Use tick boxes to select which information to include in the report, and the order within the report.

General Information: Report the starting and ending chainages | stations and roadway segments. General Information will always be displayed first.
Alignment Information: Report the position of the cross-section relative to the roadway horizontal alignment, and relative to the main alignment if different. Chainages match the main alignment, but may differ from chainages along a roadways (See ROADJOB).
Ditch Information: Report the name of the ditch, how the ditch shape is used, followed by the ditch low point or average low point for a flat bottom ditch. Offset, elevation, elevation differences and slope information for the ditch shape are also shown from left to right.
Tie Information: The name of the tie, how the tie shape is used and Offset, elevation, elevation differences and slope information for the tie shape, from left to right.
Road Information: Report the offset, elevation, and elevation differences for the roadbed and shoulder shapes at the chainage | station.
Catch Points: Report the offset and elevation of the catch points for the design at the chainage | station.

Print to screen

Display the report in P3Pad.

Print to file.

Save to report to a specified file.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
29/10/08	RG 1000	Road\|Reports\|Staking\|Engineering	Secured

STAORCHN

Configure commands in Geocomp Update to use station or chainage terminology.

Commands that honour this configuration include GC02, GC65, GC65FILE, GCSPOT and RDX.

This notation convention is stored in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI rather than a project variable.

This [Geocomp] section can be included in settings imported by EDITINI such C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\GEOCOMP_AUST_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\GEOCOMP_USA_DEFAULTS_TMODWIN.INI.

Import a .TER file containing least-squares adjustment data created by STAR*NET.

TML date			Source	</
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

STATION

Set the beginning station (also known as the start chainage) of a horizontal alignment pline.

Stations increase away from the first point or vertex.

Station equations can be assigned to registered horizontal alignments by HAL Manager (HALMANAGER).

CHAINAGE is an alias to STATION command.

If the US English language version is installed, dialogs for commands written by Trimble refer to Station. If British English, these dialogs refer to Chainage.

Some commands use the convention configured by STAORCHN.

To select menus which refer to Station, use MENUCFG to select a _US.M menu file. To refer to Chainage, select a different .M file.

The Terramodel Help refers to Station.

This TML List usually refers to Station | Chainage.

The status bar shows the name and sometimes short description of the current command or the command currently selected on the menu. The right hand end of the status bar shows the custom control in operation.

Statusbar is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY STATUSBARTOGGLE which simulates the Status bar command in the Window menu.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Window\|Message scroll File\|Macro\|Play\|statusbartoggle	Standard User-definable

STEXT

Create a text object from a single line of entered text at a location with specified text style, metrics and rotation.

Single line text field: Enter a single line of new text
Loc: Locate the insertion point of the new text object.
Style: Select or edit a text style.
Metrics: Specify the text font, height, slant, aspect ratio, justification, orientation, and direction settings by manually entyry or from a text object.
Rot: Enter a bearing for the text (measured from due north) in degrees. The default is due east.
Text: Create a single line of text of up to 4000 characters
Close: Close the command

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Text\|Single Line Text	Secured	92

STOREXS

See also LCN, SHEETXS, XSHILO and VICRDSEC.

			Source
			Hamilton

STREAM

Digitize plans, especially contour plans, by create points, sets or plines from a stream of locations entered by mouse or digitizer.

The elevations can be derived from digitizer input, keyboard input or DTM interpolation.

The locations can be filtered by distance, curve or elevation.

Loc:

Enter the location of a single point, a point in a set, or a vertex in a pline.

Z:

Enter an elevation.

New

Create a new set or pline.

Undo

Remove the most recently entered point or vertex.

Create

Create points or pline vertices at entered locations.

Name

Enter a name for the previously entered point, and a default name for subsequently created points.

Options

Auto

Automatically create streams of locations as the cursor moves.

Settings

Create

Select the type of objects to create from Points, Sets or Plines.

Elev from

Specify how the elevations of the 3D points are to be derived.

Hardware: Interpret the elevations from your digitizer. A 2D digitizer (including a mouse) will always create 2D points.
Keyboard: Enable entry of elevations at the keyboard. See also 3D Start Elevation and Elevation Increment parameters below.
DTM: Interpolate the elevations from a selected DTM layer.

Filter

Assign filtering parameters to limit the number of points or vertices.

Option

None: Do not to filter the data as it is entered.
Distance: Enter distance filtering parameters to eliminate points too close together. Create a point or vertex when the horizontal distance and minimum elevation are reached or exceeded, or the maximum elevation is reached or exceeded. This option is typically used when tracing contours.
Curve: Enter curve filtering parameters. Limit the number of points created as the cursor movement changes direction. A point or vertex is created when the tube defined by the horizontal length and width is exceeded by a vector and the minimum elevation is reached or exceeded, or the maximum difference in elevation is exceeded. This option is used when collecting points and sets.
Elevation: Enter filtering parameters for elevations. Limit the number of points created as the elevation of the cursor changes. A point or vertex is created when the elevation difference and minimum distance are reached, or the maximum distance is reached. This option is used when collecting points and sets.

Apply discards

Use the last discarded point to verify adherence to the filter parameters. Applying discards creates more points and adds more definition to the filtered points.

Distance and Curve

Enter default parameters when collecting points, sets and plines.

Length diff: Assign the minimum distance (in feet or meters) between points or vertices. Create the next point or vertex if it meets or exceeds this minimum distance from the last entered point or vertex and the minimum Z delta is exceeded.
Width diff: Assign the minimum width of the tube defined using the last two points or vertices. This option is only used by the curve filter option and filters points based on the change in direction (curvature) of points or vertices being entered. When the tube is "broken" a new point or vertex is created.
Min Z delta: Store the minimum elevation difference (in feet or meters) between two adjacent points or vertices, and create the next point or vertex if the elevation difference meets or exceeds this minimum elevation difference from the last entered point and the length difference is reached or exceeded.
Max Z delta: Store the maximum elevation difference (in feet or meters) between two adjacent points vertices, and create the next point or vertex if the elevation difference is greater than this maximum elevation difference from the last entered point or vertex regardless of the other settings.

Elevation

Enter the maximum elevation difference and minimum and maximum distances between two points or vertices.

Z diff: Enter the minimum difference in elevation (in feet or meters) between two consecutive points or vertices, and create the next consecutive point or vertex if it meets or exceeds this minimum elevation difference from the last entered point.
Min distance: Assign the minimum distance (in feet or meters) between two consecutive points or vertices, and create the next consecutive point or vertex if it meets or exceeds this minimum distance from the last entered point or vertex.
Max distance: Assign the maximum distance (in feet or meters) between two consecutive points or vertices, and create the next consecutive point or vertex if it is less than this maximum distance from the last entered point or vertex.

3D start elevation

Enter the default elevation to be assigned to 2D points as they are streamed in, when "Elev From" is set to Keyboard.

Elevation increment

Enter the increment for suggested elevations, when "Elev From" is set to Keyboard.

Report points as they are created

Display the easting, northing and point number in the Message Scroll as each point is created.

OK

Accept changes to Settings

Cancel

Cancel changes to Settings

Close set/pline

Connect the end of the set or pline to the beginning.

Close

Close the dialog

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Stream	Secured	102

STRIPNUL

Copy a the contents of a selected file containing null characters to another file without null characters.

The new file has the same name and the new extension .ASC.

Null characters are added throughout data files intended to be read exclusively by 64-bit applications.

For example, an ASCII .CSV file containing nulls throughout can be opened by common 64-bit applications such as Excel but the ASCII import script (IMPORT) of Terramodel, a 32-bit application, cannot display the contents or import the file until all the nulls have been stripped away by STRIPNUL.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

STYLESET

Create, edit or delete text styles and highlight one text style as the current text style for new text.

The text style determines the font, height, aspect ratio slant and justification of new text.

Text style names can have up to 12 characters.

See LISTFONT for a description of the list of available fonts.

Text is created at height defined by the view scale and this height in sheet units (e.g. cm).

The aspect ratio is a scale factor applied to the text width.

The slant is specified in degrees to the right of vertical.

The insertion point is to the left, centre or right and top, middle or bottom of the text according to the horizontal and vertical justification.

The text orientation can be rigid, fixed or legible.

Rigid: As rigid text is rotated, the text direction is rotated. Rigid text can display upside down.
Fixed: As fixed text is rotated, the text direction is not changed, even in a dynaview.
Legible: As Legible text is rotated, the text direction is rotated, but the text is flipped over where required so that so that it is the right way up when viewed from the bottom or right side of the sheet.

Create and edit subgrade templates.

A subgrade represents a particular material placed beneath the finish surface.

Subgrades are typically used to model pavement courses, base courses and stabilized subgrades, each one being defined as a separate subgrade.

Each subgrade is assigned a unique level number L-1, L-2, L-3, etc. indicating the subgrade's vertical position. Level 1 is typically the uppermost subgrade, immediately beneath the finish surface. The level number is just a designation used to denote where a new subgrade is started.

A subgrade is defined by one or more shapes, and has an associated material type and a depth. In the case of the uppermost subgrade, its depth is measured from the finish template surface. The depth of subsequent subgrades is measured from the bottom of the subgrade beneath which they lie.

Subgrades are intended to be flexible, giving you the ability to place a subgrade anywhere it is needed. The beginning of a subgrade is located horizontally by a combination of the Locate by, Horiz. Align., Chain, and Offset controls. The vertical position is controlled by the Locate by, Depth, and Chain controls.

Above the cross section display, there are these menus:

File

Create and save templates.

New
Save
Save as...
Save on the fly toggles on or off automatic saving of revisions to a selected template as a new template. When On, as you select a template, move to another station | chainage using the scroll bar and then edit that template, a new template is stored at that new station | chainage.
Exit

Display

Control how the template is displayed in the graphics screen.

AutoAll (toggle)
All
Redraw
Magnify
Zoom
Recenter
Previous

Transition

Apply transitions to the highlighted left or right template shape.

None: No transition; any changes in shape apply abruptly at the start of the next template
Template: Transition between two shapes with the same number of points
ROW...: Limit transition to the right-of-way unless above a maximum slope
Horizontal...: Transition to a horizontal alignment
Vertical...: Transition to a vertical alignment
Slope...: Transition to a slope alignment
Horiz/Slope...: Transition to a horizontal and a slope alignment
3D Set...: Transition to a 3D set
MultiHal...: Transition to multiple lines with similar names using wildcards

Settings

Open Road Design Settings (RDDESIGNSET).
Open Road Grid Settings (ROADGRID).

Shape

Open the Shape Editor (SHAPE).

Warnings...

Whenever error conditions are detected, the Warnings Menu item is enabled.

Clear
: Clear all the error conditions so you are no longer warned of the errors.
Details
: Explain the highlighted error condition so you can correct it.
Refresh
: Remove the details to display the original list.

Below the menu, the display shows

Current chainage
Current shape class. Always select a shape in the subgrade class.
Current shape
Cross section
Shape entry for the left and right sides

Calculate the astronomical azimuth of a line using observations to stars or the sun

Open an .AZI file containing your observations. See Chapter 10 of the Terramodel Reference Guide for the format of .AZI files and the star table STAR.INP.

Select a star by number from a list including the sun and 63 other navigational stars.

Enter the latitude, longitude, date and time of observation.

In the Observation Time-Angle Dialog box, enter number of foresights, star sighting number, stopwatch and horizontal angle then calculate azimuths. Observations are collected using the Hour-Angle method.

Number of foresights

Enter the number of foresights. Use 1 for a single observation, or an even value for multiple foresights.

Number

List the number of the star sighting. The labels for the types of sightings are:

BSD: Backsight Direct
FSD: Foresight Direct
FSR: Foresight Reversed
BSR: Backsight Reversed

Stopwatch

Enter the stopwatch reading for the sighting highlighted in the list box and advance to Horizontal Angle. The stopwatch readings are added to the Universal Time.

Horizontal angle

Enter the stellar plate readings (horizontal angles) for the sighting highlighted, and click the number of the subsequent sighting to highlight it.

Azimuth

Display the calculated azimuth of each sighting.

Use in average

Toggle Yes to include of the highlighted reading in the final azimuth average. Toggle to No to omit less accurate readings.

Save data

Store the readings in an existing .AZI file or in a new file.

Calculate azimuths

Calculate the azimuth from each sighting to the star and display it in the Azimuth column.

Average azimuths

Average the azimuths for each sighting in the list box whose "Use in average" toggle is set to Yes, and display the Results. For single observations, display the backsight azimuth, a reference correction angle, and the azimuth of the observed star. For multiple foresights, display the average azimuth computed from each sighting. To omit a less accurate reading from the calculations, highlight the line of the reading and remove "Use in average". Remember to omit an equal number of reverse and direct readings.

Create polylines

Draw a pline to represent the computed average azimuth.

Select point: Specify the location from which to draw the pline.
Polyline length: Enter the length of the pline.
Pline: Create the pline on the current layer, color and linetype.

All Polaris and star coordinates are based on the new fundamental FK5 reference system. The default lists includes coordinates for 63 stars. Add more as necessary.
SUNSTAR uses Elgin, Knowles & Senne, Inc.’s ASTRO program for its calculations. Their internal ephemeras design period is for the years dating from 1065 through 2010, and should provide the following accuracy: "You should obtain a maximum error of 0.6 arc-seconds for Polaris observations made at 60 degrees North Latitude and 0.4 arc-seconds at 40 degrees South Latitude, assuming good field procedures and a properly operating instrument. For other stars, you should be able to attain a maximum error of 0.2 arc-seconds. For the sun, you should attain a maximum error of 1.9 arc-seconds if the sun’s altitude is 40 degrees."
SUNSTAR assumes that the order of data entry alternates between direct and reverse sightings. We recommend a minimum of six pointings on a celestial body, with three in the direct (erect) position for the theodolite and three in the reverse (inverted) position.
The suggested procedure for sighting:
1. Backsight the point to establish an azimuth.
2. Sight (directly) the celestial body and record three readings, along with the time of each sighting.
3. Reverse the theodolite scope and record three or more readings and the time of each sighting.
4. Sight the original backsight point with the theodolite in the reverse position.

SUNSTAR reads the declination, ascension, and proper motions of stars used for azimuth calculations from an external ASCII file called STAR.INP similar to this:

 
1 ALPHERATZ 0.0823265 29.052558.000104.0016332.06
2 BET HYI 0.2545056-77.151540.010692.0032372.80
3 DIPHDA 0.4335372-17.591182 .000164 .000325
4 POLARIS 2.3148664 89.155072 .001988 .000152
5 HAMAL 2.0710403 23.274466 .000138 .001483
6 ALDEBARAN 4.3555237 16.303339 .000044 .001897
7 RIGEL 5.1432268 8.120598 .000000 .000013

in this format:

Col 1-10 Star number
Col 11-20 Star name
Col 21-30 Right ascension
Col 31-40 Declination
Col 41-50 Proper motion in right ascension
Col 51-60 Proper motion in declination

Add other stars in the FK5 catalog to this file by assigning each star a unique star number and entering the star data in the format shown above.

STAR NUMBERS
NO. STAR NAME MAGNITUDE
0 Sol
1 A Andromedae (Alpheratz) 2.2
2 B Hydri (SAO 255670) 2.9
3 B Ceti (Diphda) 2.2
4 A Ursa Minoris (Polaris) 2.1
5 A Arietis (Hamal) 2.2
6 A Tauri (Aldebaran) 1.1
7 B Orionis (Rigel) 0.3
8 A Aurigae (Capella) 0.2
9 A Orionis (Betelgeuse) 0.5v
10 A Carinae (Canopus) -0.9
11 A Canis Majoris (Sirius) -1.6
12 A Canis Minoris (Procyon) 0.5
13 B Geminorum (Pollux) 1.2
14 A Hydrae (Alphard) 2.215 A Leonis (Regulus) 1.3
16 B Leonis (Denebola) 2.2
17 A Virginis (Spica) 1.2
18 0 Centauri (Menkent) 2.3
19 A Bootis (Arcturus) 0.2
20 A Coronae Borealist(Alphecca) 2.3
21 A Scorpii (Antares) 1.2
22 A Ophiuchi (Rasalhague) 2.1
23 A Lyrae (Vega) 0.1
24 S Sagittarii (Nunki) 2.1
25 A Aquilae (Altair) 0.9
26 E Pegasi (Enif) 2.5
27 A Piscis (Australisu Fomalhaut) 1.3
28 A Pegasi (Markab) 2.6
29 S Octantis (S. pole) 5.5
30 A Phoenicis (Ankaa) 2.4
31 A Cassiopeiae (Schedar) 2.5
32 A Eridani (Achernar) 0.6
33 Eridani (Acamar) 3.4
34 A Ceti (Menkar) 2.8
35 A Persi (Mirfak) 1.9
36 G Orionis (Bellatrix) 1.7
37 B Tauri (Elnath) 1.8
38 E Orionis (Alnilam) 1.8
39 E Camelopardalis (Adhara) 1.6
40 E Carinae (Avior) 1.7
41 L Velorum (Suhail) 2.2
42 B Carinae (Miapiacidus) 1.8
43 A Ursae Majoris (Dubhe) 2.0
44 G Corvi (Gienah) 2.8
45 Al Crucis (Acrux) 1.6
46 G Crucis (Gacrux) 1.6
47 E Ursae Majoris (Alioth) 1.7
48 Eta Ursae Majoris (Alkaid) 1.9
49 B Centauri (Hadar) 0.9
50 A Centauri (Rigel Kentar) 0.3
51 A2 Librae (Zubenelgenubi) 2.9
52 B Ursae Minoris (Kochab) 2.253 A Trianguli Austr.(Atria) 1.9
54 Eta Ophiuchi (Sabik) 2.4
55 L Scorpii (Shaula) 1.7
56 G Draconis (Eltanin) 2.4
57 E Sagittarii (Kaus Austr) 2.0
58 A Pavonis (Peacock) 2.1
59 A Cygni (Deneb) 1.3
60 A Gruis (Al Na'ir) 2.2
61 B Crucis (Mimosa) 1.5
62 G2 Velorum (Al Suhai) 1.9
63 G Geminorum (Alhena) 1.9

The table above includes all of the 57 standard navigational stars. Sirius and Procyon are both binary systems whose positions, without proper correction, may be in error 0.8 arc seconds by the year 1994. Betelgeuse varies in magnitude from 0.1 to 1.2 (brightness). Beta Hydri is a south circumpolar star. Sigma Octantis is the south polar star.

Star name (Greek letter) prefixes: A = Alpha B = Beta E = Epsilon G = Gamma L = Lambda S = Sigma 0 = Theta.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM and RG 683	Cogo\|Utilities\|Star shot reduction	Field Data Module	astro

SUPERELV

Display the superelevation diagram and enter and edit superelevation parameters.

The interface is for data entry by parameter or by chainage | station. As you change a parameter, the parameters are held and the chainages adjust. When you change a chainage | station, the chainages | stations are held and the parameters adjust. You also have the option of computing the superelevation data automatically.

Road job

Select the road job.

Roadway

Select the roadway.

Grid settings

Open the Road Grid Settings (ROADGRID).

Superevelation Diagram

Display the superelevation templates at a station | chainage graphed as horizontal offset versus maximum superelevation rate %.

Super nodes

Display the points of intersection (PIs) and horizontal curves along the selected roadway, and the maximum superelevations for superelevated curves. SUPERELV considers the beginning and ending points of an alignment, each curve in the alignment, and any alignment breaks, as separate superelevation nodes. PIs are numbered beginning at one.

Max superelevation

Enter the maximum rate of superelevation for the curve as percent slope.

Normal cross slope

Enter the absolute value of the normal cross slope of the road when a superlevation template has not yet been defined. Enter 2, for example, for a superelevation of -2%.

Vertical curve length

Enter the length of a parabolic vertical curve for each break point in a superelevated profile to smooth the transition and the superelevation diagram.

Pivot point

Specify how the template is rotated for superelevation.

Inside: Rotate the template about the most inside point of the shapes that have the super flag set.
Center: Rotate the template about its center point.
Outside: Rotate the template about the most outside point of the shapes that have the super flag set.

Join to previous super

Specify how to treat adjacent superelevation profiles.

Compound: Enter the maximum distance that a compound superelevation profile can be separated from the previous superelevation profile and still be considered joined.
Reverse: Enter the maximum distance that a reverse superelevation profile can be separated from the previous superelevation profile and still be considered joined.

Runoff % in curve

Where spiral curves are employed, the superelevation runoff is typically affected over the length of the spiral. In instances where spirals are not used, the superelevation runoff is placed so that a portion occurs within the tangent and the remainder within the curve. In either instance, enter the proportion of the superelevation runoff contained within the limits of the curve (including its spiral curves).

In: Display or enter the percentage of the approaching superelevation runoff length that lies within the curve.
Station | Chainage: Display and enter the station | chainage at which the superelevation runoff ends and full superelevation begins. The calculated value is based on the In Runoff length and the In percentage. Entry of a value alters the In % and the In Runoff length.
Out: Display or enter the percentage of the departing superelevation runoff length that lies within the curve.
Station | Chainage: Display and enter the station | chainage at which full superelevation ends and the superelevation runoff begins. The calculated value is based on the Out Runoff length and the Out percentage. Entry of a value alters the Out % and the Out Runoff length.

Runoff length

Enter the superelevation runoff length, i.e., the length required to transition from the point at which adverse crown is removed (points 2 & 5) to full superelevation (points 3 & 4) when approaching the curve (In) and departing the curve (Out).

In: Enter the runoff transition length on the approach to the curve.
Station | Chainage: Enter the beginning station of the approach runoff transition in this station control. This corresponds to location 2.
Out: Enter the runoff transition length on the departure from the curve.
Station: Enter the ending station | chainage of the departure runoff transition. This corresponds to location 5.

Runout length

Enter the tangent runout length, i.e., the length required to transition from the normal crown (points 1 & 6), to the point at which the adverse crown is removed, on either the approach to and departure from the curve.

In: Enter the tangent runout length approaching the curve.
Station | Chainage: Enter the beginning station | chainage of the tangent runout on the approach to the curve. The calculated value is based on the In Runout Length and station | chainage.
Out: Enter the tangent runout length departing the curve.
Station | Chainage: Enter the ending station | chainage of the runout length going out of the curve. The calculated station | chainage is based on the Out Runout Length and station | chainage.

Hold rate

Specify that the same transition rate used for the superelevation runoff is also used for the tangent runout. When On, compute the tangent runout length using the transition rate calculated from the In and Out Runoff Lengths. When Off, compute the tangent runout transition rates from the In and Out Runout lengths. When On, enter Station | Chainage values for the Runoff % in curve and Runout length to calculate the Runoff % in curve and Runout length In values as well as the Runoff length Station value for you. Use this feature if you know the stations | chainages where the Normal Crown begins and ends, but not an intermediate station | chainage where an Adverse Crown (rising side reaches flat) condition occurs.

Roll-over limit

Define the limits when creating roll-over shapes for superelevations. A roll-over limit limits the difference in cross slope between the outermost template shape affected by superelevation and the template shape adjacent to it that is not affected by superelevation. To apply roll-over limits to multiple successive shapes not marked for superelevation, the shapes not adjacent to the superelevated shape must be marked with the roll-over flag in the Template and Subgrade Editors.

Use Limit: Turn on or off roll-over limits for your superelevations. When On, your specifications apply to the superelevated shape.
Outside: Enter the maximum difference between superelevated and roll-over shapes for outside curves.
Inside: Enter the maximum difference between superelevated and roll-over shapes for inside curves.
Min %: Enter the most shallow slope allowed for roll-over shapes.
Max %: Enter the most steep slope allowed for roll-over shapes

Add

Click a PI or Curve in Super Nodes then enter superelevation parameters.

Delete

Delete the superelevation definition for the PI or curve highlighted in Super nodes.

At station | At chainage

Specify superelevation at any point along the roadway, even on a tangent segment.

Station | Chainage: Enter the beginning and end stations | chainages for full superelevation.
Treat super as: Specify whether the curve is to the left or right.

Use this to recreate a superelevation diagram without having the associated tangent and runoff lengths. "At station" superelevations appear in Super nodes as stations | chainages with superelevation rates.

Copy

Copy a defined superelevation from one station | chainage to another, and from one roadway to another.

Road Job

Display the road job from which to copy.

Roadway

Display the roadway from which to copying.

Superelevation Node

Display the name of the superelevation node which you selected for copying.

Copy superelevation to

Road Job

Select the road job to copy to.

Roadway

Select the roadway to copy to.

Super Node

Copy to a selected super node.

Station | Chainage

Copy to a range of stations | chainages for full superelevation.

Treat super as

Define the direction of the superelevated slope

Curve to the Left: Slope the superelevated template shapes down from right to left.
Curve to the Right: Slope the superelevated template shapes down from left to right.

Auto compute

Specify default parameters to automatically walk the horizontal alignment and compute and assign the superelevation requirements for each curve. The Superelevation editor is refreshed to reflect the changes.

Close the superelevation editor.

Existing superelelevation requirements are deleted.
Missing spirals are not created.
Existing spirals are not adjusted.
Linear interpolation is used to compute the superelevation rate when an exact match is not found.
Combining spirals are supported.

Create a Road job and appropriate templates.
Check the superelevation design criteria (RDDESIGNCRIT).
- Verify that the Design Speed of the Road job is appropriate for the Superelevation section.
- Check the Superelevation design criteria.
- Save
Run Superelevation Editor (SUPERELV).
Check the Road job and Roadway and the Superelevation nodes.
Click the Auto Compute button.
Enter defaults
Click OK
The In, Station, Out, Station data is filled in and the slopes for the Superelevation nodes are displayed.

Tangent runout is the length of alignment needed to transition from the normal crown section to the point at which the adverse crown is removed on the outside of the curve. Superelevation runoff is defined as the length of alignment needed to transition from the point at which the adverse crown is removed, to the point at which full superelevation is achieved.

When you enter values in these controls, Terramodel interprets how you want to define the superelevation transitions based on the choices you have made. Each value impacts the other values and as you change one, the others are automatically recalculated and displayed within the superelevation diagram. Parameters that you cannot enter are displayed, but dimmed.

Components of a typical Superelevation Transition

You may need a superelevation to transition from one point to another, where these two known points do not correspond to either the superelevation runoff length or the tangent runout length. As an example, in the illustration below we know that we want the full superelevation of 5.1% to occur at station 6+90 and that the point at which a 2% superelevation is achieved is to be at station 7+75. We do not know the corresponding station at which adverse crown removal would occur, and therefore we do not know the runoff length. However, we can compute this using the method of similar triangles as shown below.

Runoff length diagram

Rather than compute the runoff length in this manner, we can let Terramodel do it for us by entering the equation for the runoff length. The calculations illustrated above show how to compute the runoff length. Since the distance controls can act as a calculator, you need only type in "85x(5.1/3.1)" and the runoff length will be calculated for you.

Create superelevation diagram plines in the Super view for a selected road job.

The superelevation is defined in the Superelevation Editor (SUPERELV).

There can be multiple shapes within the template that are superelevated. As an example, the travelled way can have a normal cross slope of -2.00% while a paved and superelevated shoulder can have a cross slope of -6%. The normal cross slope, as defined within the Superelevation Editor, is that of the travelled way.

Road job

Select a road job

Normals | All | Selected

Toggle the default settings for which shapes to include.

Settings

Road job: Select a road job.
All slopes: Include the outer edge of shape segments of all slopes.
All normals: Include only the outer edge of the shape segments at the normal cross slope.
Selected: Include selected shapes.
Roadway: Select a roadway
Add | Remove: Select shapes that superelevate in the roadway, and add them to the list of slopes to plot, or remove them.
OK: Accept changes to Settings
Cancel: Cancel changes

OK

Create the plines in the Super view.

Close

Close the command

Report your GPS location, plan, profile and cross sections.

Log locations from a Global Positioning System receiver attached to a Terramodel computer, and display views from the current Terramodel project at each location.

If the computer and GPS are mounted in a vehicle, a site supervisor can see where the vehicle is now in relation to the existing surface and proposed design.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	Sample Supervis images		POA

SURFACE

Manage road job surfaces used by Roadway commands.

Model the existing ground surface as well as any subsurface soil or rock strata beneath which the road or other works. The cross-sectional extent of a subsurface material stratum is defined by the area beneath the associated surface, and above any underlying surfaces. The surfaces can be used for plotting, conversion to points and sets or volumes.

For design and subgrade surfaces defined by templates, see TEMPLATE and SUBGRADE instead.

The name of a surface is derived from the name of a selected layer. A "stored" surface surface is defined by cross-section data imported from a file. A "sliced" surface is defined by interpolating through a DTM layer at Xlines.

Volumes between surfaces can be computed.

The surfaces are stored with the road job. When a road job is deleted, its associated surfaces are deleted as well.

The list defines the existing ground and subsurface strata, materials and flags. The uppermost surface in the list must be an elevation surface. Normally the uppermost surface in the list is the ground surface. The order in which the surfaces are listed must be the order in which they will be encountered from top to bottom.

Virtual surface merging means that where surfaces intersect, they can be used in road jobs without having to create new merged DTM layers. When a listed surface intersects the surface listed below it, the later surface is virtually altered by merging the surface listed above it into it. As this occurs, all points in the later surface within the areal extent of the preceding surface are ignored and replaced instead by the points within the preceding surface. If the resulting surface intersects the next one listed below it, this process is repeated.

Define the top surface for computation as an elevation surface, not a depth or reference surface.

Road job: Specify the road job
Surface: Display the list of "existing" surfaces working down from a top surface
Material: Select the material above the surface from the list in the Materials Manager (MATERIAL).
Insert...: Insert a new surface before the one highlighted.
Append...: Append a new surface to the end of the list.
Delete: Delete the highlighted surface from the list.
Stripping...: A stripping surface defined by a table of chainages and stripping depths. This feature is not fully implemented so we do not recommend its use. This creates a stripping surface below the top existing surface but the surface manager displays this as the top surface; some commands correctly adjust for this, other commands for plotting and volumes do not. We suggest that you define stripping by a depth or elevation surface instead. Depths transition evenly between between chainages. For each such stripping surface, select a name such as STRIPPING, a material defined as "unsuitable" in Materials Manager (MATERIAL), the depth of stripping material below the top-listed surface, and whether to strip, in cut, fill or both, down to the limiting depth of cut or fill.

Chainage | Station

Elevation flag

An "elevation" surface has absolute elevations. The top surface in the list must be an elevation surface.

Depth flag

A "depth" surface has depth measurements relative to the top surface, such as bore hole depth data. If a point on a depth surface has an elevation value of 8.56 feet, its elevation on this surface will be 8.56 feet below the top surface.

Slice flag

Interpolate the surface from the DTM at xlines. If not checked, stored cross-sections are used instead.

Reference flag

A "reference" surface, such as a seasonal high water table, is shown in cross-sections but not used in any design calculations

Finish Surface

For a finished surface defined in the Template manager, select layer 0 and not "Slice". For a finished surface defined by a DTM layer, select the layer, a material and "Slice". For a surface to be widened by templates, also attach design templates using RDDESIGNSET.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road Design\|Road job surfaces... Channel\|Channel design\|Channel Job surfaces...	Field Data Module

SURFAREA

Report, between specified chainages in road job, the chainage differences and the incremental and cumulative average end areas of the existing surface.

The Roadjob must be registered with the Roadjob Manager.

Only one phase is included in the total.

Generate a surface area report of the tie slopes of a road. Surface area figures are calculated for each material, usually, cut and fill. The linear distance for the tie slope for each cross section is an average end area calculation.

Road job: Select a registered Roadjob.
Beg. Chainage: Select the beginning station or accept the default.
End. Chainage: Select the end station or accept the default.
Print to: Print the report to Screen or File, or both.
Full report: Report lists the surface area of tie slope totals at each station for each registered material, usually cut and fill.
Station totals: Report the surface area of tie slopes at each station.
Totals only: Report the total surface area for tie slopes for the whole Roadway.
Report: Create the report
Close: Close the command

SURPEXPT

Export strings in text .STR format for Surpac mine modelling software.

The Surpac String Number is the same as the Terramodel Layer Name.
To convert the layer name to the appropriate Surpac string number, prefix the layer name with the string number. This gives you control over the string numbers. For example, for layer "CONCRETE" to become string 155 rename the layer to "155-CONCRETE".
Focus closely on the string numbers as this is controllable at the Terramodel end. A clean data set is vital.
Liaise with the client regarding the string number convention and get them to agree on their numbers.
Surpac does not work well with point features. They can exist but if points can be strung, string them. Generally only export individual points if the feature cannot be represented as a line.
Surpac is 3D mine model software, not a CAD package. Fancy AUTODRAFT features such as blocks are wasted. Text is lost altogether so the Surpac user may need to put text back in.
Do not mix point features and line features on the same layer.
To avoid creating duplicate points in Surpac, do not "Export SET points".
The Surpac file name convention is "ALPHATEXTnnnnnnn.str".
The groups are derived from the Surpac string numbers.
SURPACOUT is aliased to SURPEXPT.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	FC S

SURPIMPT

Import text strings from Surpac mine modelling software.

There are two ways to import Surpac string files into Terramodel with the correct layers: using AUTODRAFT and using Entity files.

In AUTODRAFT, create an .ADC file containing Surpac string numbers for feature codes.
Run SURPIMPT
Select the file to import
Leave the entity file field blank
Do not "Import into separate layers"
Do not "Use long entity names"
Tick "Place Surpac String No first in Obj name"
Once you have imported the file, run AUTODRAFT with that ADC file to string and relayer.

Use a text editor like Notepad to set up a Geocomp Entity File (.ENT), with entity numbers representing Surpac String Numbers and long descriptions matching Terramodel Layer names. For example:
```
155,CONC,Y,Y,CONC, ,155-CONCRETE
```
Run SURPIMPT
Select the file to import
Select the entity file
Tick "Import into separate layers"
Tick "Use long entity names"
Do not "Place Surpac String No first in Obj name"

Select "Use 6th field to decode Layer Name" if, and only if, the Surpac .STR file has a 6th column for layer name.

Choose whether to join strings with numbers from 900 to 999.

SURPACIN is an alias for SURPIMPT.

If the file is in Surpac Binary .STR format the conversion stops. You will then need to ask the Surpac user for a Text .STR (or a .DXF or a GENIO) file from Surpac.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250	FC S

SURVCEXP

Export the centreline, profile and cross section files required for machine control with Carlson SurvCE.

SURVCEXP writes coordinates computed along selected strings to 0.0001m precision using specified tolerances.

Road job

3D Sets

Select sets joining 3D points to export. The profile is exported to a Carlson .PRO file (not a Terramodel .PRO). The cross sections are exported to a .SCT file.

Settings

Chainage Range: Limit the exported coordinates to within a chainage range. The initial default values are derived from the selected roadjob. If you change the alignment, reset the start and end chainages.
Extend Xlines: If enabled, extend to the selected sets.
Generate Report: If enabled, every record written to the .CL, .PRO and .SCT file is also reported to P3Pad.
Export Filename:: Specify the location and name of the .CL file, and thus the .PRO and .SCT files.

Export

Write a .CL file, PLN and SCT files, and CSV files if selected.

If you have multiple alignments, repeat with a different roadjob.

See also GRADESMT, POWERGDE and DTM2XML.

Carlson SurvCE can also import XSC files created by EXPORTXS as section files.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SURVCONT

Export MOSS GENIO data using an .MSX mapping file to a Trimble Survey Controller with the GENIO add-on.

In the dialog, specify how to handle specific string types.

In the MSX file, for each record (or layer) name filter, specify the name, the layer name or fixed characters for the 080 record in the GENIO file

Also specify a DEFAULT name filter for selected objects which do not match the name or layer filter.

The whole file is a single GENIO model, unless you specify multiple models using layerlists.

SURVCONT creates additional 6D strings for each 12D string and has Options to include a Group ID and exclude the Master Alignment from Cross Sections.

SURVCONT appends to the file additional TRMB group and string names for Trimble instruments.

If the GENIO file is intended for use with MX or other non-Trimble systems, use MOSSOUT instead.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SVIEW

Open or change the state of a view using the command line, an alias or a button.

This command accepts two arguments. The first argument is the view index. The second argument is optional and defines the state of the view window.

If the view is not already open, a new view is opened and made the current view.

View mode	Index
Plan	0
Profile	1
Sheet	2
XSect	3
Super	4
View6	5
View7	6
View8	7

View state	Index
Minimize	0
Restore	1
Maximize	2
Maximize	Not specified

Alias	Command and arguments	Action
Plan	sview 0	Make the plan view current and maximized
RestoreProf	sview 1 1	Make the profile view current and restored to original window

The view names can be configured by VIEWSET.

See also VNEW which creates a new view of the same mode, even when the view mode already exists.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	sview.txt	Toolbox	Field Data Module or Geocomp Update	SDS

SW1

Modify the colour of DTM points for each link that is steeper than the specified % slope.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SYM2BLK

Replace symbols on all selected points with corresponding blocks.

For example, if you have labelled points with symbol 40, SYM2BLK deletes the symbol, and then places block SYM040, with the same location, appearance, size, colour and layer, and attaches the block to the point.

Terramodel symbols are displayed using characters in the symbol font. See the symbol chart. If you export those points to DWG, the CAD user sees 2D text characters from symbol font hiding the 3D points. If the CAD user has not loaded symbol.shx, the CAD program displays substitute letters instead. If you draft with blocks instead, or use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks, the blocks are exported to the DWG file with the points. Then the symbol.shx does not need to be loaded and the blocks have the same elevation as the point.

Commands which place symbols include LABELPOINT and LABPT. GCLPTS can list symbols on points. If you have also labelled the points with text, see GC77 to modify the elevations of the text.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

SYSTEM

Configure system variables in the tmodwin.ini and p3server.ini files.

Company Name|Address|City, State|Phone: A maximum of 80 characters of information about your company for headings of listings and reports.
TSP: Terramodel Search Path. See TSP.
Macro Directory: Where to save and search for keystoke macro files. By default, this is C:\TMCUSTOM\MACROS.
Max objects: The maximum number of objects that the current project file can contain. With sufficient memory, the maximum can be as high as 20,000,000 objects.
Max alpha pts: The maximum number of alphanumeric point IDs that your project can contain.
Escape count: The number of objects drawn per display refresh before Terramodel checks to see if you've pressed the Esc key.
Tml debug level: Set to 0, unless you are requested to enter some other value by someone debugging TMLs.
Prototype: The name of the prototype file. The browse button lets you pick an existing file by name. The location is not used, instead the prototype file is the first project file with that name in the TSP. If the nominated .pro file is not found, the default values used in new projects include Feet and Inches for the measurement units.
Lock file on open: Controls the creation of a project locked status file (.PLK). When enabled, a file with the extension of .PLK is created while the project is open. See REFFILE. In the event the file is not properly closed due to a loss of power, the .PLK file must be manually deleted.
Undo size: The number of objects in the undo buffer, to a maximum of 19999. See UNDO.
Marker size: The size in pixels of the temporary vertex marker.
Aperture: The size of the pick cursor box in pixels. The size is also configured in SEARCH.
Dragging on: Enable display of objects during movement and rotation. See DRAG.
Toolbox autostart: Display the visible toolboxes in the current workspace when you open a project file. Requires CAD module. See TOOLBOX.
Prompt if create pt in Set Cmd: Enable SET to prompt for name, elevation and point number.

None of these settings are stored in the project file. They are all stored in TMODWIN.INI or P3SERVER.INI. Restart Terramodel to use the new values.

Configure the digitizer communication, orient tablet menus and screen areas and orient the mapping area.

For most digitizers connected by a USB port, install and configure the corresponding WinTAB driver for your digitizer first, then select WinTAB in the digitizer models under Setup. A digitizer connected to a serial or parallel port might use some other driver.

Connect and turn on the digitizer and get it ready for use.
Enter TABLET at the command line or From the File menu, select Config System and then Tablet.
Click Setup to set up your digitizer communications.
Turn On the digitizer.
Orient the map.
Orient any Menu.
Use the digitizer to enter data into Terramodel.

On | Off

If the button shows On, the the digitizer tablet is On. If the button shows Off, click the button to turn it On.

Orient map

Coordinate digitizer positions with the project. Locate the lower left and upper right corners of the drawing area on the tablet. Project coordinates locate the corresponding corners on the display.

Once the digitizer is On, click Orient map.
Select the Orientation Method.

2Point

Use this method when the X and Y axis have the same scale.

3Point

Use this method when the X and Y axis have different scales, such as when tracing cross sections or profiles.
Click the View list, and click the project view in which you want to enter points from the digitizer. The map area is active only in the view selected on the dialog box.
Select the Tablet text box for Point 1.
Digitize the lower-left corner of the map area. The selection moves to the Ground text box for Point 1.
Click the hide and pick control on the right side of the text box to enter the mapping coordinates from the screen, or use the Point 1 Ground point coordinate control to enter northing and easting values.
Select the Tablet text box for Point 2 and digitize the upper-right corner of the map area. The selection moves to the Ground text box for Point 2.
Click the hide and pick control on the right side of the text box to enter the mapping coordinates from the screen, or use the Point 2 Ground point coordinate control to enter northing and easting values.
If you selected the 3Point method, repeat the previous 2 steps for point 3.
Click OK to close the dialog box.

Orient menu

Orient menus and screen areas, Enable menus and screen areas, Create new menus, Edit existing menus, Create new screen areas or Delete menus and screen areas.

Once the digitizer is On, click Orient menu.
Select a file from the list. The default is TMODWIN.MNU.
Select the menu to orient.
The text area at the bottom of the dialog box changes to Orienting Menu Name and Digitize Lower-Left Corner. If you have not oriented the menu before, the corner coordinates are 00,00 and 00,00.
Digitize the lower-left and upper-right corners of the menu area.
The selection moves to the next item on the Menu Name list.
To enable a menu or screen area for use:
1. Select the menu or screen area name from the Menu Name list.
2. Select the Enabled check box.
3. An E appears on the Menu Name list following the selected name.
4. Click OK.
To deactivate a menu or screen area:
1. Select the enabled menu or screen area name from the Menu Name list.
2. Clear the Enabled check box to remove the name from the list.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Up to 16 tablet menus or screen areas to be set up and listed, but only the first five you select can be enabled at the same time.

Menu dimensions are listed in rows X columns.

Setup

Before you can use your digitizer to enter data, set up the digitizer by selecting a digitizer button file, the digitizer model, and communication settings.

Ready the digitizer for use.
Select a Button Mapping File (*.BTN) from C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\.
Select the model name of your digitizer. If you are not sure, select WinTAB.
Select communication settings for baud rate, port, parity, number of data bits, and number of stop bits. Refer to the documentation that came with your digitizer.
Click OK.
Click Off to turn on the digitizer and complete setup by orienting menus and by orienting the map area .

Close

Close the command

Add commands you most commonly use to digitizer buttons by editing the button mapping file (*.BTN) in a text editor Save the edited map file with a different file name to create a new file.

Button map files are installed into C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\ folder. Create or edit button map files in this folder.

To create or edit a map file, copy a .BTN file to C:\TMCUSTOM, with a new name and edit there. If this file cannot be selected in Setup, copy the edited file back into C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\ and try again.

To select the new button map file, click Setup, then select the new file from list.

Look at the supplied .BTN files for the format.

For a button to run a command, enter all capital letters for the command, followed by \13 (the ASCII code for the Enter key).

Create different button map files with commands for different digitizer tasks. Switch between button map files at different phases of the project.

When the digitizer is within a screen area, it controls the pointer on the screen like a mouse, except for dragging. Use the digitizer to move the pointer anywhere on the screen and use the pick button to click Terramodel or Windows buttons and menu commands, and even start and control other applications.

Use more than one rectangular screen area at a time. There are no restrictions on location, orientation, or size. However, a larger screen area on the tablet provides finer pointer control on the screen.

The button map file associated with the screen area on your tablet is customizable.

The Digitizer Menu Orientation dialog box includes one defined screen area . To access the screen more conveniently especially on larger digitizer boards, create additional screen areas. A screen area can be any size. Controlling the pointer may be easier or more precise within a larger screen area.

Mark off the new screen area on the tablet.
Run TABLET.
Click the Off button if the digitizer is not turned on.
Click Orient Menu.
Click New.
Enter a Name, such as Screen Area 2.
Set the height and width of the screen area by digitizing the upper-left, lower-left, and lower-right corners of the area on the tablet. Asterisks appear as you digitize each corner. The calculated height and width also appear.
Click OK to close.
Orient and enable the new screen area.
Click OK to close

As well as the included menu templates with the most commonly used commands and keys, create your own menu layouts. For example, to accommodate a large map area, create menus as strips along a tablet edge. Create menus with just the commands you need for each phase of a project.

Attach a template for the new menu to the tablet.
Run TABLET
Click the Off button if the digitizer is not turned on.
Click Orient Menu.
Click New.
Enter a Name. For example: Menu Area 3.
Enter the number of rows and columns you want on the menu.
Configure the height and width of the menu area by digitizing the upper-left, lower-left, and lower right corners of the template. Asterisks marking entered coordinates and the calculated height and width appear.
Click Edit Cells to assign commands to menu cells.
Click OK.
Click OK against
Orient and enable the new menu.
Click OK

Delete an item from the Menu Name list

Run TABLET.
Click the Off button if the digitizer is not turned on.
Click Orient Menu to display the Digitizer Menu Orientation dialog box.
From the Menu Name list, select the name of the item you want to delete.
On the dialog box, click Delete.
Click OK.

From the Edit Menu Cells dialog box, change the commands assigned to existing menus or create assignments for new menus.

To edit menu cells:

Display the Tablet command bar. Click the Off button if the digitizer is not turned on.
Click Orient Menu on the Tablet command bar. The Digitizer Menu Orientation dialog box appears.
Edit an existing menu by selecting the menu name then clicking Edit, or assign commands to cells on a new menu by clicking New and creating a new menu.
Click Edit Cells. Control of the pointer is not available while this dialog box is displayed.
Click on the cell you want to change on the Locate Cell matrix formed by the rows and columns of the selected menu. Cells assigned commands are marked with a black dot. The selected cell is indicated by a white dot. To select another cell, click the new cell with the mouse or enter the row and column numbers in the text boxes.
Click on the command you want to assign to the cell from the menus at the top of the dialog box, or Enter the command name in the text box.
Click on the appropriate button at the bottom of the dialog box to include an Escape, Tab, Space, or Carriage Return (Enter) key stroke with a command. Many Terramodel commands require Enter to activate.
After you complete cell assignments, click OK.
Click OK.
Orient and enable the menu.
Click OK for changes to the menu cells to take effect.
To clear the contents of a cell, select the text in the Cell Contents box and press Backspace to delete it. The dot for that cell is removed from the cell map.

The row and column for the currently selected cell appear in the text boxes on the dialog box. You can select a different cell by typing the row and column numbers in the text boxes.

Refer to your user guides for your digitizer tablet, Chapter 17 of Terramodel User Guide, and pages 40 to 45 of Terramodel Reference Guide.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|System Configuration\|Tablet File\|Config system\|Tablet	Secured	CG 7, 107

TAILING

Create a tailings beach from a spigot object, a existing surface DTM and design settings.

Date	Guide		Source
Custom	Custom		POA

TANCIRCLE

Create a set tangential to one or two circles defined by centres and distances.

Enter a location and corresponding radial distance for one circle.
Enter a location and corresponding radial distance for the other circle. To enter a point only with no circle, enter a radial distance of zero or leave the distance blank.
OK
Temporary lines and circles indicating the tangents and radii are shown.
Graphically select the desired line from the displayed possible solutions.
TANCIRCLE creates the two points joined by a set on the current layer.

If the circles overlap there are two possible solutions. If apart, there are four. If one circle is inside the other, there are none.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Curves\|Tangent circle	Secured	83

TC*

A suite of commands for use with explosives in open-cut mining or quarrying.

The components you require depend on your application (material, number of seams, interfacing with other applications, and so on). A typical suite includes custom development, workspaces such as TC_DRILL.WS and the following TMLs:

TC01: Setup drill hole project variables
TC04: Drill hole pattern layout
TC04A: Create drill holes along pline or set
TC05: Interpolate drill holes to top surface
TC06: Create single drill hole from top
TC07: Delete drill holes
TC08: Change the length of drill hole
TC08A: Change drill hole length relative to surface
TC09: Generate validation report
TC09A: Generate validation report against reference DTM
TC09B: Generate validation report against free surface
TC10: Generate blast summary report
TC11: Identify drill hole
TC12: Export to .CSV file
TC14: Display drill hole symbols and names
TC20: Add drill hole length to name
TC99: Display attributes

Date	Guide		Source
Custom	Custom		POA

TD*

A suite of commands for tile drainage.

The components you require depend on your application. A typical suite includes custom development, workspaces and the following TMLs:

TD01: Create parallel tile drainage
TD_FILT: Show and remove tile drainage deviations
TDINFILL: Create parallel tiles between tiles
TD_LABPT: Label points with text outside a distance from other points

Date	Guide		Source
Custom	Custom		POA

TDS

Start the Tripod Data Systems TDS Survey Link DC program.

TDS command requires "TDS Survey Link DC" module and software which are no longer supplied by Trimble.

Replaced by IMPORT scripts.

Executable date		Menu	Source
N/A		Cogo\|Utilities \|TDS Survey Link DC	N/A

TDTU

Open the Trimble Data Transfer Utility.

Trimble Data Transfer Utility is used to communicate between Trimble survey devices and computers.

Installing Trimble Data Transfer Utility updates devices in the Remote Device Manager used by some Terramodel import and export scripts, and also installs the Trimble Diagnostic Report (DIAG).

Download TDTU 1.57 and Help .PDF files.

Create and edit templates using shapes you have previously defined.

The template editor displays the effect on the roadway cross sections of the templates at various chainages.

Enter shapes in order from the centreline outwards and specify for their Transition types (using the Transition menu), Superelevation status and Alternate status.

Above the cross section display, there are these menus:

File

Create and save templates.

New
Save
Save as...
Save on the fly toggles on or off automatic saving of revisions to a selected template as a new template. When On, as you select a template, move to another station | chainage using the scroll bar and then edit that template, a new template is stored at that new station | chainage.
Exit

Display

Control how the template is displayed in the graphics screen.

AutoAll (toggle)
All
Redraw
Magnify
Zoom
Recenter
Previous

Transition

Apply transitions to either the left or right template shape highlighted in the Template Shapes list box.

None: No transition; any changes in shape apply abruptly at the start of the next template
Template: Transition between two shapes with the same number of points
Subgrade...: Transition to intersect a subgrade material
ROW...: Limit transition to the right-of-way unless above a maximum slope
Horizontal...: Transition to a horizontal alignment
Vertical...: Transition to a vertical alignment
Slope...: Transition to a slope alignment
Horiz/Slope...: Transition to a horizontal and a slope alignment
3D Set...: Transition to a 3D set
MultiHal...: Transition to multiple lines with similar names using wildcards

Settings

Open Road Design Settings (RDDESIGNSET).
Open Road Grid Settings (ROADGRID).

Shape

Open the Shape Editor (SHAPE).

Warnings...

Whenever error conditions are detected, the Warnings Menu item is enabled.

Clear
: Clear all the error conditions so you are no longer warned of the errors.
Details
: Explain the highlighted error condition so you can correct it.
Refresh
: Remove the details to display the original list.

Below the menu, the display shows

Current chainage
Current shape class (select a shape in a class other than subgrade).
Current shape
Cross section
Shape entry for the left and right sides

Create a text object containing one or more lines of text on the current layer.

The text object can include a leader line or a border, and can be a callout by assigning it a subject point and optionally a subject HAL.

Text objects are limited to 4000 characters. Text can include Extended Attribute Text (EAT) codes.

Include $File:name.txt to link to show the contents of an external ASCII file "name.txt". If the text file is not in the same location as the project, include the path.

For columns of text such as coordinates, use a fixed-width font in the Terramodel text style.

TEXT and CALLOUT are examples of commands that use the EAT Code Insertion Aid to insert an EAT code at the current position of the text insertion marker or to replace the currently highlighted text within the underlying dialog box, without having to know or understand the EAT code syntax.

The two list boxes at the middle of the dialog box, labeled Attribute and Field, are referred to below as the left middle list box and the right middle list box respectively. Their usage and their resulting labels change depending on which selections you’ve made within the Code type group and the Options list box. In some cases they are not used and remain blank.

Code Types

Object

Insert within the text string, an EAT code to display a property of the text object itself. When it is selected, the applicable properties of the text object are listed within the Options list box on the left. An EAT code can display either a stored attribute of the text object, the layer on which it resides, or one of the coordinates of its insertion point.

Parent

Insert within the text string, a property of the parent of the text object, i.e., the reference object. The applicable properties of the text object’s parent are listed on the left. EAT codes can display a stored attribute of the parent object, the area of a parent pline or set, its layer, its total length, it name, its perimeter measurement, or its point number or one of its coordinates, if the parent is a point.

Subject

Insert within the text string, a property of the subject of the text object. he properties of the text object’s subject are listed on the left. An EAT code can display a stored attribute of the subject object, the area of a subject pline or set, its layer, its total length, its name, its perimeter measurement, or its point number or one of its coordinates, if the subject is a point.

HAL

Insert within the text string, a property of the subject HAL of the text object. The properties of the text object’s subject HAL are listed on the left. An EAT code can display a stored attribute of the subject object, the area of a subject HAL pline or set, its layer, its total length, its name, or its perimeter measurement. An EAT code can label a station or offset with respect to the subject HAL, in which case, select either Leader line point, Parent, or Subject indicating whether the displayed station or offset is that measured at the location of the leader line’s end poin or at the coordinates of the text object’s parent or subject.

Project

Insert EAT codes that display project data within the text string. The categories are listed on the left. These project data options are discussed below.

Date: Insert the current date within a text string. Commonly used date formats are displayed on the left.
File name: Insert the name of the project file within a text string.
Scale: Insert the current plot scale or vertical exaggeration of a selected view within a text string.
Time: Insert the current time within a text string. Commonly used time formats are displayed on the left.
Title: Insert the project description defined by PROJINFO within a text string.
Variable: Insert project variable contents within a text string. All defined project variables are displayed on the left. Use PROJECTV to view or edit project variables.

To use EAT Code Math, Add +, Subtract -, Multiply * or Divide / a Value. EAT Code Math alters a displayed numeric value by performing a math operation on it. For example, if a curb inlet is represented by a block, where the elevation of the block is set to represent the inlet’s top elevation, create an EAT code that displays that inlet's top elevation. Then, using EAT code math, create another EAT code that displays the inlet’s throat elevation by subtracting a constant 0.83’ from the top elevation. If referenced data is an integer, the resulting number will also be an integer, so operations such as multiplication and division by a real number may not produce the intended result.

Control the desired display precision by the specified number of decimal places, even when no EAT code math is performed.

EAT codes enable you to create text objects that display properties and attributes of themselves or of other objects, or that display the contents of project variables. The displayed text automatically updates to reflect changes in the referenced attribute or property.

The available codes are shown below. Those items shown within brackets [ ] are optional.

Codes that label attributes of the text object itself

\OBJ{X OR X, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: X coordinate of insertion point
\OBJ{Y OR Y, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: Y coordinate of insertion point
\OBJ{Z OR Z, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: Z coordinate of insertion point
\OBJ{L OR L}: Layer
\OBJ{S OR S}: Station of the text insertion point within the profile view
\OBJ{SL OR SL}: Station of the text object's leader line and point
\OBJ{AARGS} **: Designated user definable attribute of the text object **

Codes that label properties and attributes of the object that the text object refers to (its parent)

\PAR{X OR X, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: X coordinate of parent object
\PAR{Y OR Y, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: Y coordinate of parent object
\PAR{Z OR Z, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: Z coordinate of parent object
\PAR{P OR P}: Point number of parent point
\PAR{N OR N}: Name of parent object
\PAR{L OR L}: Layer of parent object
\PAR{R OR R}: Area of the parent closed set or pline
\PAR{E OR E} *: Planimetric perimeter measurement of the parent closed set or pline
\PAR{G OR G} *: Total planimetric length of the parent set or pline
\PAR{AARGS} **: Designated user definable attribute of parent object **

Codes to label properties and attributes of a callout text object’s subject.

\SUB{X OR X, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: X coordinate of subject object
\SUB{Y OR Y, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: Y coordinate of subject object
\SUB{Z OR Z, [NUMBER OR DECIMALS]}: Z coordinate of subject object
\SUB{P OR P}: Point number of subject point
\SUB{N OR N}: Name of subject object
\SUB{L OR L}: Layer of subject object
\SUB{R OR R}: Area of the subject closed set or pline
\SUB{E OR E} *: Planimetric perimeter measurement of the subject closed set or pline
\SUB{G OR G} *: Total planimetric length of the subject set or pline
\SUB{AARGS} **: Designated user definable attribute of subject object **

Codes to label the station and offset of an object with respect to the text object’s subject HAL. Label the station and offset of the text object’s insertion point, of the callout’s subject record or its insertion point, or that of the end of the text object’s leader line.

\HAL{N}

Name of the subject HAL set or pline.

\HAL{R}

Area of the subject HAL if it is a closed set or pline

\HAL{E} *

Planimetric perimeter measurement of the subject HAL if it is closed set or pline

\HAL{G}

* Total planimetric length of the subject HAL set or pline

\HAL{AARGS} **

Designated user definable attribute of subject HAL object **

\HAL{L OR L}

Layer of subject HAL object

\HAL{SARG}

Station of argument (arg) with respect to the subject HAL

ARG = O
: FOR STATION OF TEXT OBJECT
ARG = S: FOR STATION OF TEXT SUBJECT
ARG = L: FOR STATION OF LEADER LINE POINT

\HAL{OARG}

Offset of argument (arg) with respect to the subject HAL***

ARG = O
: FOR STATION OF TEXT OBJECT
ARG = S: FOR STATION OF TEXT SUBJECT
ARG = L: FOR STATION OF LEADER LINE POINT

Codes to label general project information.

\PROJ{D[FORMAT CODES]} ****

Date/time stamp (updated by REDRAW, PLOT and SAVE)

\PROJ{P}

Name of the project file.

\PROJ{T}

Project title

\PROJ{SHVARG, NDEC}

Plot scale of a designated view.

VARG

VIEWING MODE NUMBER

0: Plan view
1: Profile view
2: Sheet view
3: Xsect view
4: Super view
5: View 6
6: View 7
7: View 8

NDEC

NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES

\PROJ{SVVARG, NDEC}

Vertical exaggeration of a designated viewing mode.

VARG

VIEWING MODE NUMBER

0: Plan view
1: Profile view
2: Sheet view
3: Xsect view
4: Super view
5: View 6
6: View 7
7: View 8

NDEC

NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES

The code to label the current contents of a project variable.

\PROJ{V OR V, TYPE, PROJECT VARIABLE NAME}: TYPE: S = STRING, I = INTEGER, D = DOUBLE

The code to create a single text object on multiple lines.

\N: Start a new line. One text object can have multiple lines of text.

*

Display a planimetric measurement, not the slope distance.

The syntax for designating an attribute variable’s arguments is:

	A[,# of decimals]attribute name:field name[,element]

where # of decimals is optional, applying only to real number attributes, attribute name is the name of the attribute, field name is the name of the attribute field, and element is the optional element number used for table attributes.

***

The offset EAT code variable displays several textual components in addition to the offset distance and direction. These display a prefix before the offset distance value, a measurement unit indicator after it, and the offset direction indicator. See UNITSSET Labeling.

****

Optional formatting codes to format a date/time display

MO: month
DA: day
Y: year
H: hour
MI: minute
S: second
DW: day of the week

Create points at the insertion points of text or blocks on the same layer as the text object, with elevation derived from the elevation of the object or digits in the text.

Select "Ht from Text Value", to use numeric text to set the elevation of the point from the value of the text. This is useful for converting 2D plans, where the elevations are presented as text labels, to 3D. If the text includes non-numeric characters, the elevation may be set to *.

Select "Ht from Point Ht", to set the elevation of the point to match the elevation of the text or block. This may be useful when data are imported with symbols as 3D text or blocks.

If the insertion point of each text or block object is a constant offset from the true location, MOVE all the created points by that amount. Use the right mouse button to help you pick the "from" and "to" locations.

If you have points on a layer at the desired locations, use GCPTSTXT to replace the elevation by the numeric value of the nearest text within a tolerance.

If you have nearby points with elevations, you may be able to use DTMPTS to interpolate elevations from those points.

See also TEXT2PT, PTBLKS, GCBLKPTS, GCPTSTXT, ELVPLINE, GCCONTXT and ELEVOBJS.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Draw\|Point\|At text	Geocomp Update or $250	314,317

TEXT2PT

Create a single point with the elevation of single selected text at a specific location and with a specific name.

For multiple points, see TEXT2PNT.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

TEXTALIGN

Modify the X or Y value of the insertion points of all selected text so the text objects line up vertically or horizontally.

This is different to ALIGNTXT.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Text\|Align X or Y Modify\|Text alignment	Secured

TEXTALONG

Create a text object along a HAL, with a specified location, text style and text metrics.

The text is created with an Orientation of Along and a Ref Obj of the HAL. To flip the text to the other side of the HAL, modify the Orientation to Along Flipped using EDIT, TEXTMETRICS or GCALONG.

To label a linear feature such as a road or waterway with the HAL name, include the EAT code \PAR{N}.

Create a closed pline representing arrow around the entered text.

The length and direction is determined by two location points.

The width is determined by the selected text style.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

TEXTBACK

Create a hatch block for each selected text object in the specified colour, with a higher record number than all other objects, and then delete and redraft the text with a higher record number still. The text will then display over the hatching and the hatching will display over all other objects.

Each new block is referred to its text, and the block layer is the same as its text layer, to retain visibility in dynaviews.

The hatch block is constrained by a text border. If the text has no enclosing border, the border style is set to rounded rectangle. Use DRAFTSET to configure the border colours and margin.

Any previous hatch blocks that refer to the text are deleted. The new hatches match any new text sizes or locations.

For any text with orientation "Along" or "Along Flipped", the orientation is modified to "Rigid" and the rotation is modified to align with the reference object at that location and time.

Change the case of selected text to Upper, Lower, Sentence or Title.

Upper: CHANGE TO UPPER CASE ALL LETTERS
Lower: change to lower case all letters
Sentence: Change to upper case the first character and change to lower case all other characters.
Title: Change to Uppercase the Initial Letters of the First Word and Words Between Spaces and Change to Lowercase These Common Short Words Without Punctuation: an of or a the is on but for and in

Modify the direction of text objects to new bearings.

Text Objs:: Select text objects
Bearing of Text: Enter a new bearing
Set direction to horizontal: Specify a new bearing of 90°00′00″ or N90E
Undo: UNDO changes
Modify Text Bearings: Modify the direction of selected text objects to the new bearing
Close: Close command with text in the new direction

The initial new bearing is the new bearing from the previous TEXTDIR session.

Adjust the aspect ratio of selected text to fit a space by stretching or shrinking the text width graphically, or by entering a new aspect ratio.

Import text from a .CSV file at locations along an alignment.

Road: Select a registered roadway.
Import Chainage Based CSV file: Browse to select a text file of chainages and text to be imported.
Cancel: Cancel the command.

One multi-line text object is created for each record in the .CSV file. The station | chainage of the insertion point is derived from the value of the first field. The offset is 0.000. The text metrics are from the current text style. The layer and colour is from the current layer.

The lines of text are derived from the other fields on that record.

The Edit button allows you to change text settings. Each option has a check box that must be checked before the option can be revised. When you have finished setting options, click OK.

To mirror the text, for plotting on the back of a sheet, enter the aspect ratio as negative (i.e. -1) .

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Modify\|Text\|metrics Modify\|Text metrics	Secured	90

TEXTRND

Round bearings and distances in selected text.

For each selected text object, round the value of a bearing and a distance to a predefined cadastral standard.

Text Objs

Selected text objects to be rounded

State

Pick a State or Territory from a list to adopt the rounding specifications of the relevant cadastral authority. Geocomp Systems can add more regions as required. Current regional roundings are:

State	Bearings	Distances to 500 m	Distances over 500 m
NONE	Round to 10″	Round to 10 mm	Round to 100 mm
ACT	Round to 10″	Round to 10 mm	Round to 100 mm
NSW	Round to 5″	Round to 5 mm	Round to 5 mm
VIC	Round to 10″	Round to 10 mm	Round to 100 mm
QLD	Round to 10″	Truncate to 1 mm	Truncate to 1 mm
TAS	Round to 10″	Round to 10 mm	Round to 10 mm
NT	Round to 10″	Round to 5 mm	Round to 5 mm

Search for Both Bearing and Distance on the same line

Specify whether a single text record can have both a bearing and a distance.

OK

Modify the selected text.

Cancel

Cancel without modifying any text

The first sequence of characters on a line of text that includes digits and a degree sign (\176), or an EAT code with a bearing, is treated as a bearing; the first sequence that includes a decimal point, or an EAT code with a distance, is treated as a distance. Any remaining bearings, distances or EAT codes, and any other characters such as letters, numbers, spaces, brackets and new lines, are not modified.

Dimensions can be manually entered by TEXT.

Text with bearings or distances can be created by LABELSEG using \SEG EAT codes and by GCDIMLOT using \BRG and \DIST EAT codes. The displayed dimensions are rounded according to UNITSSET.

For two point \SEG codes, TEXRND computes dimensions between the points. All other rounded bearings and distances are computed from the displayed text.

TEXTRND expands these EAT codes into plain text.

LABELTABLE creates a table of dimensions rounded using UNITSSET. To round by TEXTRND, EXPLODE into plines and text first.

Distances are only considered during rounding of bearings, where the distances can be determined.

Change the rotation of selected text objects.

Select the text objects and the angle of rotation.

Each text object will be rotated about its insertion point.

Select the current text style from the list of text styles in the project.

Click Edit to open STYLESET.

Swap the text between two text records.

See also TXTSWAP which swaps the text location, rotation and subject.

TML date			Source	GC
29/10/08			Field Data Module	91

TEXTWRAP

Remove or insert hard return characters in selected text objects to wrap the line lengths to a text width.

Replace the last space in a line of text before the specified text-width with a hard return to create as many or as few new lines as required.

To shorten or lengthen lines, enter a text width in units of the current view.
To keep existing new lines, select "Keep ALL Hard Returns".
To keep new paragraphs separated by two new lines, select select "Keep ALL Hard Returns" and "Keep Adjacent Hard Returns Only".
To create single lines of text, remove all hard returns by specifying a longer text-width.

EAT codes are not decoded. Words and EAT codes are broken if strings of characters between spaces are longer then the specified width.

Text properties, such as insertion point location, height, font, aspect and justification, are not modified.

To search for or replace a hard return, use SNR command and specify character \010.

Tile the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views and centre by chainage from a selected roadjob alignment.

An alias to CENVIEW.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Window\|Tile centred by chainage Window\|Tile centered by station	Geocomp Update or $200

TILEHORIZ

TileHoriz is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY TILEHORIZONTAL which simulates the Tile horizontal command in the Window menu.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Window\|Tile horizontal File\|Macro\|Play\|tilehorizontal	Field Data Module or Geocomp Update

TILEVERT

TileVert is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY TILEVERTICAL which simulates the Tile vertical command in the Window menu.

Macro date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Window\|Tile vertical File\|Macro\|Play\|tilevertical	Field Data Module or Geocomp Update

TMANAGER

Create, copy, delete, import or export finish surface templates, and assign templates to roadways.

Templates can be exported to Road Template Library (RTL) files, and imported.

The list box shows all of the currently defined templates for the specified roadway, including the station | chainage at which the template starts, its name, and the number of shapes it contains on the each side.

Road job: Select a road job.
Roadway: Select a roadway.
Name: Edit the name of the highlighted template.
New: Enter a new template.
Import template: Import templates from a external Roads Template Library (.RTL).
Export template: Export templates to .RTL file.
Edit...: Open the Template Editor (TEMPLATE).
Copy...: Copy a template to another roadway at a station | chainage, and segment number if there is a station | chainage equation.
Delete: Delete the highlighted template.
Close: Close the Template Manager

See also GCTPLATE, COPYTEMP and NEWTEMPS.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|Template manager... Channel\|Channel design\|Template manager...	Field Data Module	413

TMCUSTOM

Add C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ folder to the Terramodel Search Path in the current TMODWIN.INI.

Geocomp Updates M and N create new folders C:\TMCUSTOM\ and C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\, if not already present, and installs their TMLs and other files for new and updated commands into C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\. These commands are not available to you until you add C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ to the Terramodel Search Path by TMCUSTOM command.

C:\TMCUSTOM\ is the recommended location for your user-configurable files such as prototypes and blocks.

Use GCHELP to check that these folders are on the TSP, TSP to check whether your custom files are on the TSP, and EDITINI or GCHELP to edit the TSP.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update

TMGIS

Turn Terramodel into a GIS.

Open the TML List in a new window or tab in your default browser.

The TML List is the file you are reading now.

The latest TML List is here: www.geocomp.com.au/support/terramodel/tmllist.

Geocomp Updates include a local copy which does not require the Internet. This can be opened by:

Select the GCHELP toolbar button then select TML List
Enter TMLLIST at the command line,
Select TML List from the Help menu, or
Select Documents from the Help menu, and then select TML List.

To update your local list, ask Geocomp Systems for the latest Geocomp Update.

Import a Terramodel .TMX which has been exported from another Terramodel project.

Browse: Browse to select the TMX file to import
Read: Import the contents of the TMX file
Cancel: Cancel the command

All object information is transferred, with the exception of project settings, and other items listed below.
Transferred objects retain their full CAD properties, including layer names, colors, views, linetypes, and reference objects.
If an object in the TMX is on a new layer, the layer is created with the point colour, line colour and linetype of the layer the object was on when the TMX was created. If the layer already exists, the layer properties are unchanged.
If the .TMX contains external blocks, corresponding .BLK files are created in the current project folder.
If a layer in the TMX file does not exist in the destination file, TMXIN creates it.
Linetypes that have not already been loaded into the project are replaced by SOLID. Use LINETYPESET to Load required linetype definitions first.
Layer lists are not transferred.
External blocks and their definitions are transferred and maintain their external status unless an internal block with the same name already exists.
Internal blocks and their definitions are transferred, unless the internal block name has already been defined, in which case existing definition is used.
Definitions of selected blocks only are exported unless any selected block contains another block object, in which case all block definitions in the source project are exported to .TMX.
Blocks within blocks can result in very large TMX files and missing external block messages.
External blocks are defined by the .BLK file in the TSP. If a .BLK is not found, a new external block file .BLK is created in the current project directory.
Block names of hatches can change when read in by TMXIN. When a hatch block is created by TMXIN, the next available hatch block number is used.
Blocks attached to points lose their attachment.
Point number integrity is maintained in the destination file unless a duplicate point ID would result, in which case, a new point is created with the next available numeric point number.
If a point exists in the destination project that has the same point number, X, Y, and Z values, the existing point is used, the color, name and other properties of the existing point are changed to values imported from the TMX.
Point and segment attribute labels are transferred, including label segment style definitions.
Table objects and settings are not transferred.
When a dynaview is exported, the boundary is also transferred.
An object that is the subject or a HAL of a text object that is being exported is also transferred.
Points that are used by sets that are exported are also transferred.
Set properties (including set smoothness) are transferred.
Pline properties (including spiral and parabolic curves) are transferred
Hidden set segments loose their hidden status.
Cut and fill slope values in sets are not transferred.
Text font definitions are not transferred. Any text with fonts that are undefined in the project file are changed to TMODELF font.
Reference object numbers are only transferred if both the parent and subject are in the same TMX. To transfer a VAL with its subject HAL, select objects to export from both Plan and Profile views

Export a .TMX file containing the names, colours and linetypes of all layers in the current project (.PRO).

To export objects to .TMX, use TMXOUT.

To copy a reference project (.PRO), see PCOPY.

To export a layer list, use LLRPT.

TML date	Guide
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

TMXOUT

Export a Terramodel exchange .TMX file to be imported into another Terramodel project (.PRO).

Select Objects to export objects and the point colour, line colour and linetype of the layers of the objects.

Browse: Select the name and path of a .TMX file.
Objs: Select the objects to export to the .TMX file
Save: Export to the .TMX file.
Cancel: Cancel the command

All object information is transferred, with the exception of project settings, and other items listed below.
The transferred objects retain their full CAD properties, including layer names, colors, views, linetypes, and reference records.
Layers that do not exist in the destination file are created.
Linetypes that have not already been loaded into the project are replaced by SOLID. Use LINETYPESET to load required linetype definitions from .LIN files first or use PCOPY to copy linetype definitions with objects from a .PRO instead of a .TMX.
External blocks and their definitions are transferred and maintain their external status unless an internal block with the same name already exists.
Internal blocks and their definitions are transferred, unless the internal block name has already been defined, in which case existing definition is used.
External blocks and their definitions are transferred and maintain their external status unless an internal block with the same name already exists.
Internal blocks and their definitions are transferred, unless the internal block name has already been defined, in which case existing definition is used.
Blocks attached to point objects lose their association.
Point number integrity is maintained in the destination file unless a duplicate point ID would result, in which case, a new point is created with the next available numeric point number.
If a point exists in the destination project that has the same point number, X, Y, and Z values, the existing point is used, the color, name and other properties of the existing point are changed to values imported from the TMX.
Point and segment attribute labels are transferred, including label segment style definitions.
Table objects and settings are not transferred.
When a dynaview is exported, the boundary is also transferred.
An object that is the subject or a HAL of a text object that is being exported is also transferred.
Points that are used by sets that are exported are also transferred.
Set properties (including set smoothness) are transferred.
Pline properties (including spiral and parabolic curves) are transferred.
Hidden set segments loose their hidden status.
Cut and fill slope values in sets are not transferred.
Text font definitions are not transferred. Any text with fonts that are undefined in the project file are changed to TMODELF font.
To retain references between objects, select both objects to export to the same .TMX. For example, to keep the reference between horizontal and vertical alignments, select from both the Plan and Profile views
Some faulty data are removed, similar to CLEANUP.
External blocks are embedded into the .TMX.
To export a .TMX file containing the names, colours and linetypes of all layers in the current project (.PRO), select no objects, and select "Export layer information only" when prompted; or use TMXLAYER.

Toggle the "Display links" setting in LINKSET then REDRAW the display.

Use LINKSET to select the layers first.

To remove the links from the project, use REMOVELINKS.

To refresh the DTM, use any command that reforms DTMS such as DTMUPDT, DTMALL or GCDTMALL.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $0	143

TOGQUICK

Toggle the "Quick contours" setting in LINKSET then REDRAW the display.

Use LINKSET to select the layers and CONTOURSET to set the contour interval first.

To refresh the DTM, use any command that reforms DTMS such as DTMUPDT, DTMALL or GCDTMALL.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $0	110

TOGSLOPE

Toggle the "Show triangle slope" setting in LINKSET then REDRAW the display.

Use LINKSET to select the layers first.

To refresh the DTM, use any command that reforms DTMs such as DTMUPDT, DTMALL or GCDTMALL.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $0	325

TOOLBOX

A toolbox is a user-definable arrangement of command buttons which float over the Terramodel window. A workspace is a group of toolboxes in specific sizes and screen positions, saved in a .ws file.

TOOLBOX command displays open toolboxes in the current workspace.

Run TOOLBOX command at the command line or from the multi-tool icon on the toolbar. Start TOOLBOX whenever you open Terramodel by selecting "Toolbox autostart" in SYSTEM.

Each command button can include a user-defined title, icon, pop-up note (tool tips) text, left mouse command and right mouse command. The commands can be aliases. Leave the mouse over the button to see the pop-up notes.

Toolbox Help explains how to edit, create and import buttons, toolboxes and workspaces.

To open Toolbox Help,

Use HELPTOOLBOX command (if a recent Geocomp Update has been installed), or
Select Toolbox from the Index submenu in the Help menu (if a recent Geocomp menu file has been selected), or
From Help... in the Workspace menu, if WinHelp32 is installed and the Windows version is earlier than 10.

To open the workspace menu, left-click on the small - symbol at the top left of any toolbox.

New button: Add a new button to the current toolbox
Toolboxes...: Open and close, import, rename, delete or create new toolboxes in the current workspace
Open Workspace: Open a workspace (.ws) file.
Save Workspace: Save changes to the current workspace, otherwise your changes to the workspace will be lost when you close Terramodel.
Save Workspace As...: Save the current workspace with a new (.ws) name.
Help...: Display Toolbox help, if enabled.
About: Show the licence agreement, copyrights and trademarks. See Toolbox Help for more details.
Exit ToolBox: Closes the current workspace including all open toolboxes.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTOOLBOX	Toolbar	Secured

TP01

Setup project variables for pipeline design optimisation.

Pipeline Design Optimisation is a suite of commands that minimise joins, segments and earthworks in long pipeline construction projects.

The TMLs have names starting with TP and are in the category of Pipe optimisation. The components you require depend on the fluid, (such as water, gas or slurry) and the specifications (such the maximum 3D deflection and available joints). A typical suite includes custom development, workspaces such as TP_PIPE.WS, attribute definition files such as TP_PIPE.ADF, and blocks for valves.

TML date			Source
Custom			POA

TP02

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

TML date			Source
Custom			POA

TP10

Report the number of standard lengths, number of bends and 3D angle between pipe segments.

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

Places air valve blocks at positive-to-negative grade changes and scour valve blocks at negative-to-positive grade changes.

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

Create obstructions in profile view using pipe centreline and obstruction layer list.

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

TML date			Source
Custom			POA

TPCENVIE

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

Create long section plots of pipeline showing pipe bearing, land owner, geotechnical information, pipe cover and pipe grade.

Part of the Pipeline Design Optimisation suite.

TPSetout is a survey program for hand-held calculators written by Michael Gunter.

Supported data types include:

Points (.pta)
Triangles (.tsa)
Horizontal alignment (.hza)
Vertical alignment (.vta)
Crossfall (.cfa)
String lines (.hla)
Lane descriptions (.ldf)
Vertical adjustments (.vtb)
Vertical offsets (.clo)
Simple batter (.bta)
Complex batter (.btb)

See also GCPTAIN for importing TPsetout .PTA survey files. See also TPSTKOUT for TPStakeout for Leica Total Stations.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

TPSTKOUT

Supported data types include:

Points (.pta)
Triangles (.tsa)
Horizontal alignment (.hza)
Vertical alignment (.vta)
Crossfall (.cfa)
String lines (.hla)
Lane descriptions (.ldf)
Vertical adjustments (.vtb)
Vertical offsets (.clo)
Simple batter (.bta)
Complex batter (.btb)

TPStakeout, by Michael Gunter, is a survey program available for Leica TPS Total Stations. See also TPSETOUT.

See also GCPTAIN for importing TPsetout/TPStakeout .PTA survey files.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

TRACEBDY

Select the lines that describe the boundary and then select the centre point. A set is created around the bounding lines.

Gaps less than 0.5 units are crossed automatically. If you want to control this maximum snap distance, or report areas or create plines or hatching, use GCTRACE instead. Geocomp Update aliases TRACEBDY and TRACE to GCTRACE.

A typical application is creating a closed set from supplied linework representing a subdivision lot.

See also LOTJOIN to create multiple sets from multiple centres, AUTOSET to create a clockwise set from points and QSET to quickly key in a lot boundary.

In Terramodel Help, this command is called Trace.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Draw\|Set\|Trace enclosing boundary	Field Data Module

TRAV2D

Create 2D points by entry of bearings and distances.

Enter values from a single standpoint quickly without using the mouse or tab keys.

To change the standpoint, type a point number or use a mouse.

If Line is selected, the points are linked to the previous point by a set segment.

In Trav mode, the dimension is from the previously created point. In Rad mode, it is from the Stand point.

Specify a deflection angle and scale factor, to save you having to rotate and scale afterwards, if entering values from a cadastral plan or switching between ground and GPS units.

If a point with the same X, Y and Z already exists, you are prompted whether to create a new point.

Create points and set segments on the current layer by radiating or traversing from a known point by known bearings and distances.

The default vertical angle modes are established in the Angles setting of Units Settings (UNITSSET). They can be overridden by typing any of the available abbreviations for vertical angle input.

Only traverse around arcs with central angles less than 360°.

Setup point

Locate a point that represents the initial location.

Distance mode

Specify Horizontal or Slope for the default mode to enter distances.

OK

Bearing 3d

Brg: Enter a bearing
Dist: Enter a distance
Vert: Enter a vertical angle
3d: Create a new point at the bearing, distance and vertical angle from the setup point, create a set segment from the setup point to the new point, and make the new point the new setup point
Close: Close without creating the point

Bearing 2d

Brg: Enter a bearing
Dist: Enter a distance
Vert: Ignore this field
2d: Create a new point at the bearing and distance from the setup point, create a set segment from the setup point to the new point, and make the new point the new setup point

BackSight

Brg: Enter a bearing away from the setup point to a reference point
BackSight: Establish the backsight for horizontal angle readings
Close: Do not change the backsight bearing

Break back

Create a curve which is not tangential

Back sight brg

Enter a new back sight bearing. The default is the bearing of the current leg.

PC

Enter two of these arc properties: Radius, Chord, Arc Length, Delta, Tangent, Mid-ord, External, Degree of curvature, Direction or curve (left or right)

OK: Create the arc, from the setup point (PC) to the point of tangency (PT) and move the setup to the end point
Close: Close without creating the arc

Close

Connect

Connect to an existing point

Point: Locate a point
Connect: Create a set segment to the point
Close: Close

Sideshot3d

Create a 3D sideshot

Brg: Enter a bearing
Dist: Enter a distance
Vert: Enter a vertical angle
3d: Create a new point at the bearing, distance and vertical angle from the setup point and create a set segment from the setup point to the new point
Close: Close without creating the new point

Sideshot2d

Create a 2D sideshot

Brg: Enter a bearing
Dist: Enter a distance
Vert: Ignore
2d: Create a new point at the bearing and distance from the setup point and create a set segment from the setup point to the new point
Close: Close without creating the new point

PC

Create an arc from the point of curvature

PC/PI/PT

Enter two of these arc properties: Radius, Chord, Arc Length, Delta, Tangent, Mid-ord, External, Degree of curvature, Direction or curve (left or right)

OK: Create an arc from the point on curvature
Close: Close without creating the arc

Close

PI

Create a curve from the point of intersection

PC/PI/PT

Enter two of these arc properties: Radius, Chord, Arc Length, Delta, Tangent, Mid-ord, External, Degree of curvature, Direction or curve (left or right)

OK: Create an arc from the point of intersection
Close: Close without creating the arc

Close

PT

Create a curve from the point of tangency

PC/PI/PT

Enter two of these arc properties: Radius, Chord, Arc Length, Delta, Tangent, Mid-ord, External, Degree of curvature, Direction or curve (left or right)

OK: Create an arc from the point of tangency
Close: Close without creating the arc

Close

Create a pline by entry of bearings and distances.

In Trav mode, the distance is from the end of the new segnent. In Rad mode, the distance is from the start Location.

Specify a bearing, distance, deflection angle and scale factor.

See also TRAV2D, TRAVERSE, BLDG and BUILDING.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

TRAVUTM

Create points by entry of bearings and ellipsoidal distances.

Elevations can be interpolated from N-values.

If adjusting for N-values, use AUSGEOID to import a latitude and longitude grid of N-values, or import a .TMX of such a grid.

Trim a line or arc segment by a distance or to an intersection.

If points on a set have elevations, the elevation of the moved or added end points is linearly interpolated along the set.

Spiral curves and vertical curves cannot be trimmed.

To bdy: Specify whether to trim to boundaries or a distance.
Boundaries: Select boundaries
Distance: Enter a distance
Line: Select a pline or set to be trimmed
Add pt: If a set, create a point at the new end and retain point at the old end
Move pt: If a set, move the old end point to the new location
Trim: Trim the pline or set
Close: Close the command

Calculate solutions of a triangle, given any three known values, and display the solutions in a dialog box or report editor.

Calculated solutions are shown as ghosted text. No objects are created.

The calculated solutions are displayed using the settings in UNITSSET.

Known values

Select which three known triangle properties to enter. Select from:

Side, side, side
Angle, side, angle
Side, angle, angle
Angle, side, area
Side, angle, side
Side, side, area

Side A | Side B | Side C

Enter the known values for any of the triangle sides.

Angle a | Angle b | Angle b

Enter the known values for any of the interior angles.

Area

If known, enter the area of the triangle.

Perimeter

Display the calculated perimeter of the triangle.

Calculate

Calculate and display the triangle properties.

Report

Calculate and report the triangle calculations in P3Pad.

Done

Close the command

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Cogo\|Utilities\|Triangle solutions	Secured

TRISWAP

Swap links in adjacent triangles by creating a breakline.

Select a DTM layer to be isolated with links displayed and quick contours turned off.

Select locations inside two adjacent triangles to be swapped.

Select Close to stop swapping triangles and isolating the layer.

TRISWAP creates a new breakline between the points opposite the common triangle side with colour 56 and name "TriSwap Breakline".

The triangles are only swapped if they are adjacent and the common side is a not a breakline or is a breakline previously created by TRISWAP.

The initial default layer is the current layer.

To see the directions of fall, turn on "Show triangle slope" in LINKSET.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update

TRMBGRID

Specify a DTM layer and the origin, extents, intervals and bearing of the grid.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
08/02/22	trmbgrid.txt		Trimble or Geocomp Update	221

TRMBROAD

Export a roadway alignment and cross sections.

For most Trimble instruments, TRMBROAD has been replaced by Trimble Roading 3D (DC) script (EXPORT), GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.

.TTA files are useful for exporting alignments to Trimble Quantm Alignment Planning.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
08/02/22	trmbroad.txt		Trimble or Geocomp Update	80

TRMBTIN

Replaced by EXPORT Trimble DTM (TTM).

TTM files are typically used in Trimble SiteVision.

For any selected set or pline segment, report the horizontal length as the "grid distance" and the scaled distance as "true distance".

In Settings, enter a scale factor and a precision to be stored as project variables.

If measurement units are set to Feet, TRUEDIST reports the distance in both feet and miles. If Meters, reports in "Meters".

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
20/01/16	truedist.txt		Wendell	44+17

TSP

List the files and folders on the Terramodel Search Path.

Terramodel searches through the Terramodel Search Path (TSP) for files such as prototypes, TMLs, blocks and toolbar buttons.

The top panel shows the folders of in the TSP in order. The second panel shows the first examples in the TSP of each file name that matches the Files filter, and the location where they were found.

The TSP is made up from the location of the current project, then the TSP= folders specified in TMODWIN.INI and then finally the Terramodel software folder.

To find a file with a particular name, or list only files using wildcards such as *.WS or PROTO*, enter the characters into "Files" and press Enter.

GCHELP shows the location of the TMODWIN.INI in use, for example C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Locale\English\TMODWIN.INI (or a copy in the VirtualStore). Edit using EDITINI. The maximum length of the TSP= value is 256 characters.

By default Terramodel includes C:\TMCUSTOM\ in TSP=, but the folder is not used unless the user creates it and place files into it. Geocomp Update N creates C:\TMCUSTOM\ and C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ and installs files and folders into C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\. To enable Geocomp Update N commands after installation, run TMCUSTOM once to add C:\TMCUSTOM\Geocomp\ to the beginning of TSP= and thus take precedence over other folders.

Use EDITINI to add your own location to the TSP for your own configuration files such as prototypes, blocks and BMP files. EDITINI removes folders from the TSP that cannot be found on the computer.

SYSTEM and GCHELP show the characters entered into the TSP= field. TSP shows only paths and files Terramodel actually finds in the Terramodel Search Path. Differences are due to confusion such as typos, missing folders and duplicate TMODWIN.INI files. EDITINI deletes invalid folders from TSP=.

If a block is not found as an internal block, or as an external block anywhere on the TSP, BLOCK will then search for external blocks defined as .BLK files in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Blocks. In the same way, if a command you enter at the command line is neither a Terramodel command, nor a .TML in the Terramodel Search Path, nor an ALIAS to such a command or TML, Terramodel will continue the search in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\TMLs.

Some file types are not looked for on the TSP but in fixed locations instead. This includes font (.FNT) files which are in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Fonts and AutoDraft Configuration files (.ADC) which are at the project variable specified by AUTODRAFT.

Windows can take and use a copy of TMODWIN.INI into VirtualStore for each user. If Terramodel is not consistently using the one TMODWIN.INI, change the Properties of the desktop shortcut to "Run as administrator", in which case Terramodel will always use the TMODWIN.INI under the installed Locale, such as C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Locale\English\, unless the TMODWIN environmental variable has been configured.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	File\|System Configuration\|Search Path Browser	Secured	CG 2

TXTHTDIF

Recompute numerical values in selected text with segment points.

The text must include HD, SD, VD, DX, DY, DZ, XDiff, YDiff, ZDiff, EDiff, NDiff, % SLOPE, % GRADE, or the coordinate labels specified in VIEWSET.

Text objects that link segment points are created by LABELSEG and LABGRADE.

For example, use LABGRADE to label vertical differences with VD between multiple pairs of points. Then, after any points have been moved, use TXTHTDIF to replace those parts of the text showing differences, without replacing the rest of the text.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

TTXOUT

Replaced by Trimble Roading 3D (DC) script (EXPORT), GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Secured

TUNNELDTM

Transform between "wrapped" and "unwrapped" tunnel coordinate systems.

Form a DTM of a tunnel wall once it has been "unwrapped".

The DTM is relative to the current roadway.

DTM layer: Select a layer containing the tunnel points. Multiple layers can contain tunnel data.
Wrap: Transform the coordinates of a layer of "unwrapped" tunnel data to true 3D coordinates.
Unwrap: Transform the coordinates of a layer of "wrapped" tunnel data to "unwrapped" so that the DTM elevations will be relative to the current roadway.

Carefully read the Tunnel Training Guide before using TUNNELDTM.
Make sure the layer is correctly set to "wrapped" or "unwrapped" according to the nature of the tunnel data before you import or copy that data onto that layer. Use GCWRAP to correct an incorrect status without transforming points.
TUNNELDTM needs the Roadway module.
Do not edit the HAL or VAL while the points are "unwrapped".
Do not form a DTM of wrapped tunnel data.
The Tunnels menu is included in tunnel.m and geocomp+.m menu files.
3DVISUALISER, RDX, XSHEET, EARTHWRK, ROADDTM and XSECTIONEDT commands all automatically allow for the "wrapped" or "unwrapped" status of the layer.
See also COLORCODE and SHAPE.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	HELPTM and Tunnel Training Guide	Tunnels\|Wrap/Unwrap DTM	Secured	343

Display objects, DTMs and images in a perspective view.

Display objects, DTMs and images in Terramodel project files in Terramodel Visualizer.

Using TV 2.05,

Move around the project
Rotate the project
Define flight paths
Record movies
Display textures such as grass, sand, pavers and water
Display points, sets and plines
Display multiple DTMs
Add colour, light and shade effects
Add structures such as buildings, pipes and bored holes
Add trees
Add background images such as sky
Drape orthophoto images
Edit points while viewing in perspective
Visualize tunnels

Terramodel Visualizer is a separate application. Download from Geocomp Systems. Try TV by working with one of four included demonstration projects. Pictures from these projects are included at the end of the Terramodel User Guide (UG). To use TV with your project, you need the TV Base module. Some features also require the Image manager, TV OrthoDrape, TV Surface Editor or TV Stereo modules.

Visualizer Help is available from the Help menu in Visualizer, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPTV command.

Select a point of curvature (PC), back bearing (back tangent) from the first point and point of tangency (PT) for the new arc and create an arc through the two points and a radius point.

All objects are placed on the current layer using the point and object colours of that layer.

Command date		Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09		Cogo\|Curves\|2 points+line	Secured	19

TXTIN

Create one text object for each line in an ASCII file.

If your text is numeric, use a fixed-width font such as TMODELF so that digits line up vertically.

To import a file of symbols exported from Terramodel, select a text style that uses the symbol font.

To import a text file as a single linked object, see TEXT.

To import columns of text into a table, use CSV2TAB.

To import text at stations | chainages, use TEXTIMPT.

To export columns of data from a spreadsheet application to be imported into Terramodel, Save as Formatted text (space delimited) (.PRN) to be imported into TXTIN or TEXT, or as Text (tab-delimited) (.TXT) or CSV (Comma-delimited) (.CSV) to be imported by CSV2TAB or Import ASCII points (IMPORT).

Browse: Select an ASCII file containing text
Quick view: View the text file contents before you import
Loc: Locate the upper left corner of the text
Style: Specify the text style
Rotation: Specify any rotation in degrees from due north
Txtin: Create one text object for each line in the file, starting at the specified location
Cancel

Command date		Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09		File\|Misc. Import\|Text File\|Misc. Import/Export\|Text Import	Secured	92

TXTOUT

Export text objects in descending northing order and explode EAT codes to normal text.

Replaced by GCTXTOUT which can also export in columns.

See also LISTTEXT which sorts by easting.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		File\|Misc .Export\|Text File\|Misc. Import/Export\|TMX Export	Secured

TXTREFEL

Modify the elevation of text records to match the elevation of the reference object.

For example, if you label a point with EAT code text, the elevation of the text will be 0.000 or *. If you export this to CAD, the text object will have a different elevation to the point so will not be seen next to the point in 3D. If you run TXTREFEL on the text before you export, the text will have the same elevation as the points.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	9

TXTSCALE

Modify the size of selected text objects by a scale factor.

Select "Scale Offsets" move the insertion points by also scaling the X and Y offsets to any RefObj (parent) points. LABPT labels parent points with text.

To fix the insertion points, do not select "Scale Offsets".

To scale around a single origin, see GCSCALE.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	HELPTM	Modify\|Text\|Scale Modify\|Text scale	Geocomp Update or $200	92

TXTSWAP

Swap the text between two text records. Specify whether or not to swap location, rotation or subject. Close to finish swapping.

See also TEXTSWAP which swaps the text location but not the rotation or subject.

See also BEARTEXT which reverses bearings in text.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	91

Open Terramodel User Guide.

See also other documents (DOCUMENTS), the TML List (TMLLIST) and Reference Guide (RG).

Date		Menu	Source	GC
April 2002		Help\|User Guide	Secured	GC1007UG.PDF

UNDER

Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road given a maximum degree of curvature (R).

Select a segment (Mid Seg:) of a profile at a location under the 'middle' of a road where there is sufficient cover then a second segment to the left or right of the Mid segment and a radius.

Create a profile of two back-to-back curves of the nominated radius starting at the Mid segment and working outwards either left or right. Repeat for the other side of the road.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

UNDO

Undo changes to objects made the last command. Repeat to undo each change made by previous commands.

Undo reverses the changes made, one command at a time. Each time Undo is executed, the effect of preceding command is reversed. Continue to Undo until either you have reversed all of the desired modifications, or the limit of the Undo buffer is reached. If you attempt to exceed the limit of the Undo buffer, you will receive the message "Undo buffer overflow", and you will no longer be able to reverse your changes. Undo never partially reverses a command. If an entire command cannot be reversed, then none of the objects changed by that command are reversed.

Use REDO to reverse the effect of the last UNDO.

The number of objects that can be undone is limited by the size of the Undo buffer specified in SYSTEM up to a maximum of 19,999. If you want to be able to reverse larger changes, you should first SAVE the current project file.

RDE and SAVE commands flush the Undo buffer.

Undo restores changes regardless of view, so what is being undone may not be obvious.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Edit\|Undo	Field Data Module	255

UNHIDE

Reveal all segments in selected sets which have been hidden and reported them to MessageScroll.

HIDE toggles the status of a set segment between hidden and revealed. This status is a persistent property of the segment.

Revealed segments which are OFF or on invisible layers remain off or invisible. The Ignore Hide setting in DISPLAYSET reveals all segments, even hidden ones.

REVEAL can be an alias for UNHIDE.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		Modify\|On/Off\|Reveal set segments	Geocomp Update or $200

UNITBLK

Display a selected block at the cursor scaled by 1, 2 or three points and insert at a location.

Any dimension in the block equal to 1.00 unit will be created in the project with that dimension at 1.00 project units multiplied by the scale factor.

UNITBLK command
Settings
Enter or select the name of a block in the project or browse to select an external .BLK file
Choose how to locate and scale the block by 1, 2 or 3 locations
OK
Select 1, 2 or 3 locations using the mouse
Select more locations to insert same block again
Close when finished

Pt.1:: Locate the insertion point and change the cursor to display the selected block in the cursor colour.
Pt. 2:: Specify an optional second location.
Pt. 3:: Specify an optional third location.
Settings: Specify the block, scaling, rotation and colour.
Close: Close the command without inserting any more blocks.

The scale factors determine the dimensions of the inserted block along its axes.

Unequal scale factors distort the block, for example stretching a pit or gate.

Configure display and entry modes, number of decimal places for various units, chainage format, degree of curvature, angle modes, distance modes, unit labels, and unit conversion factors in the current project.

To avoid future incorrect labels, conventions, units and assumptions in reports, also check and configure these values carefully in your prototype project. Also use MEASUNIT to check project and sheet units and GCHELP to check which prototype is in use.

Distance mode

Specify the default mode to report and enter distances to be horizontal or slope

Direction mode

Specify the default mode to report and enter directions

North Azimuth: based on a north azimuth, where 0°00’00" is due north and positive rotation is clockwise
South Azimuth: based on a south azimuth, where 0°00’00" is due south and positive rotation is clockwise
East Azimuth: based on an east azimuth, where 0°00’00" is due east and positive rotation is clockwise
Bearing: based on a bearing

Angle mode

Specify the default mode to report and enter angles

Units

Degrees

Decimal degrees with 360 to a circle

Grads

Grads, gradians or gons with 400 to a circle

Mils

Mils with 6000 to the circle

DegMinSec

Degrees minutes and seconds with 360 to a circle in one of these formats

ddd,mmm,sss: degrees, minutes and seconds separated by commas, spaces or both
dddmmss: packed format with no spaces or commas
ddd.mmss: decimal separator format commonly used on calculators

Default entry

Select default entry mode for bearings and vertical angles

Bearings: Select Angle-Left, Angle-Right, Deflection-Left, Deflection-Right, North-Azimuth or South-Azimuth. Refer to Bearing Control in the User Guide.
Vertical angles: Select Zenith, 2D, Horizontal, Nadir, Percent Slope, Ratio horiz:vert or Vertical distance. Refer to Vertical (Angle) Control in the User Guide.</

Chainage | Station format

Select a format for chainage | station values from 0000.00, 00+00.00, 00+000.00 or 00+0000.00.

Degree of curve definition

Enter an arc or chord length

Temperature and Atmos. pressure

Select temperature and pressure units from those defined under Labeling

Precision...

Decimal places

Set the default display precision by decimal places of coordinates, elevations, distances, chainages | stations, horizontal angles, vertical angles, % slopes, slope ratios, atmospheric pressures, basic areas, alternative areas, volumes and temperatures.

Use variable precision

Use variable precision to vary areas, distance and bearings by ranges, or use the specified numbers of decimal places.

Areas...: Enter ranges of variable precison to display Areas
Distances...: Enter ranges of variable precison to display Distances
Bearings...: Enter ranges of variable precison to display Bearings
Basic area: Select and enter ranges for the basic areas which are the project units squared.
Alternate area: Select and enter ranges for the alternate areas defined in conversion factor settings and labelling.
Upper limit: Modify the upper limit of ranges of displayed area, distance or bearing values. Any Upper limit value that is less than the current Upper limit value is assumed to be the lower limit of the current range. The * symbol stands for Infinity.
Round to: Select the precision for this range of displayed values.
Show 0's: Display any trailing zeros up to the value set in Round to. Leave this box unchecked to ignore trailing zeros.
Show dec.: Display a decimal point after a number with no placeholders after the decimal. Leave this box unchecked to display an integer number (with no decimal point).
Round: Perform normal rounding up or down when a number with the selected precision is displayed.
Truncate: Truncate a number to the selected precision.
New range: Add a new range.
Delete range: Highlight and remove a range from the list.
OK: Save your edits of the display range settings
Cancel: Return to Displayed precision settings without saving any edits to ranges.

Labeling...

Measurement unit identification text

Length options: Enter characters for up to five length suffix labelling options for use in commands such as LABELSEG and GCDIMLOT.
Basic area: Enter text for the suffix to indicate the unit of basic areas. For example, Sq. ft. or m². To enter ², hold down the Right-ALT key while typing 0178 with the numeric keypad.
Alt area: Enter text for the suffix to indicate the unit of areas greater than the sq. units/alternate area value defined in Conv. factors. For example, Acres or Ha.
Volume: Enter text for the suffix to indicate the unit of volume. For example, Sq. yds. or m³. To enter ³, hold down the Right-ALT key while typing 0179 with the numeric keypad.
Temperature/Atmos. pressure: Enter text for suffixes to indicate temperature and pressure units.

Offset EAT code format

Label format: Enter the order of the horizontal offset value {VAL} and direction {DIR} and any literal text such as commas, spaces or distance units. The {VAL} is substituted by the EAT code \HAL{O,x}. The x is substituted by the number of decimal places of distance configured in Precision.
Dir. Left: Enter any characters to replace {DIR} for a left offset. These characters might include "Left" or "-".
Dir. right: Enter any characters to replace {DIR} for a right offset. These might include "Rt." or nothing at all.

Zero Offset Notation

Enter any characters to indicate when the offset value is zero. These might include "Zero offset" or "0.000".

Conversion factors...

meters/foot: Set the conversion factor for converting feet to meters to either International Foot (0.3048) or U. S. Survey foot (12/39.37 = 0.304800609601).
Sq. Units/Alternate Area:: Use 43560 for acres and 10000 for hectares.
Cubic Units/Volume Unit:: Use 1 cubic metre per cubic metre or 27 cubic feet per cubic yard.

For example, if a point has horizontal offset of 1.123m to the left, and the Offset EAT Code Format has "Label format" of O/S={DIR}{VAL}m, and "Dir. left" of -, then the text object would be defined as O/S=-\HAL{O,3}m and displayed as O/S=-1.123m.

If the measurement units, unit labels and conversion factors do not match, the areas and volumes on reports will be wrong.

If you use MEASUNIT to "Convert" the units in a project, UNITSSET settings for units are reset to defaults for metres and feet.

Display precision settings have no effect on the accuracy of the data stored in the project file or calculations based on that data.

EDITINI can match the precision of coordinates in coordinate scroll with their precision in UNITSSET.

UNITSSET affects output from commands such as AREA, CURVESOL, CUTFILL, DTMSHOT, GC02, GC27, GCDAMVOL, GCDIMLOT, GCLABLOT, GCTABLE, GCTRACE, GCXLINES, LABELLOT, LABELSEG, LABELTABLE, LABGRADE, SHADOW, SLOPE, TEXTRND and TRISOL. See also STAORCHN.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Settings\|Units settings	Field Data Module	44

UPDATE

Open a web page where you can download the latest Terramodel and Geocomp Updates.

TML date	Guide	Menu	Source
08/02/22	Update	Help\|Updates	Geocomp Update

UPGRADE

Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules. The upgrade code is supplied by your Trimble Terramodel dealer.

Start Terramodel with your Sentinel key attached first.

Upgrade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY UPGRADE which opens the Products dialog in ABOUT command.

MacroPlay requires CAD module. If you won't have CAD module until after you enter the upgrade code, use ABOUT command then select Products...

Macro date		Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22		Help\|About\|Products\|Upgrade File\|Macro\|Play\|upgrade	User-definable	GC M

USTN2MOS

Modify the start chainages of selected records to match the chainage from the selected HAL and, if the layer name matches an integer value in Column C of the specified CSV file, set the object name to match the value in Column A.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $150

VALDATA

Create or edit a vertical alignment through entry of intersection point (IP) coordinates and curve data into a table.

Double-click on a field to edit.

VAL: Select an existing pline and open the table.
New: Open the table to enter a new pline.
OK: Create the new pline or modify the existing pline.
Cancel: Cancel changes.

Alignment

New: Start a new alignment
Save: Save changes to the pline
Report: Report to P3Pad using Alignment report from REPORTS.
Exit: Exit the data entry table.

Edit

Edit: Undo changes.
Delete: Delete a row.
Insert: Insert a row.
Go to...: Select the row before a station | chainage.

Display

Redraw or zoom the display.

Name

Enter the name of the pline. The name of any registered HAL can also be modified.

The curve types are:

POB: Point of Beginning: Enter the starting chainage | station and elevation.
ARC: Circular curve: Enter the chainage | station, elevation and radius of the PVI.
Point: Point of Vertical Intersection (PVI): Enter the chainage | station and elevation of the PVI.
Vertical: Parabolic vertical curve: Enter the chainage | station and elevation of the PVI and the vertical curve length.

Column names can be configured in ABBREVSET.

All the IPs after the nominated point are shifted by the horizontal and vertical difference to the new point.

This is useful when the vertical alignment needs to be updated because the horizontal alignment is lengthened or shortened. It can also be used to raise or lower all or part of a profile.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $150	412

VALMANAGER

Vertical alignments in the profile define the elevations that the design will follow.

The table shows all the registered vertical alignments, with their names, record numbers and numbers of offsets. Select any alignment to edit.

Vertical alignment

Display or edit the name and record of any registered vertical alignment.

Name: Change the name of the registered alignment.
Pline/Set: Enter or select the set or pline to be registered as the VAL.

Close

Close the alignment manager

Delete

Delete the highlighted registered VAL from the list.

New alignment...

Create a new registered alignment by specifying a HAL record and the name of the registered alignment. The default name is the object name, or HALn if the object has no name.

Offsets...

Close

Close the alignment offset manager

New...

Chainage | station: Enter the chainage | station from which the offset begins
Vertical offset: Enter the vertical offset to be applied to the alignment from this chainage | station to the next offset.
OK: Create the new chainage | station offset
Cancel: Cancel changes to this offset

Delete

Delete the chainage | station offset

Alignment type

The VAL Manager uses the same dialog as SLOPEMANAGER. If the Alignment Type is set to Slope, change the alignment type to Profile. The manager continues to display the alignments of the chosen type until you select the other type, regardless of whether you select the Slope Manager or Val Manager command.

See also GCACTIVE, HALMANAGER, VERTALIGN and GCVALOFF.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Alignments\|VAL manager... Tunnels\|Alignments\|VAL manager... Channel\|Alignments\|VAL manager...	Field Data Module

VARIABLE

List, edit, export and import all project variables.

Project variables can be displayed on EAT text, including variables you create. Do not use VARIABLE to modify variables that you have not created, unless you know what is likely to happen. If in doubt, ask for help.

Use SAVE to save the current objects and project variables before using VARIABLE.

Save to File

Save all the project variables to a comma-separated file with extension .VAR.

Read from File

Read all the project variables from a comma-separated file with extension .VAR to create new and to update the values of variables in the current project.

Filter

Filter the list by entering project variable names with wildcards.

New

Enter a new project variable

Edit

Edit a project variable.

Name: Enter the project variable name of up to 27 characters
Type: Select Integer, Double or String
Value: Enter the new value

Delete

Delete the highlighted project variable

Report

Report the details of the project variables that match the filter to P3Pad.

Close

Close without further changes to project variables

See also PROJECTV, PROJINFO, PRJINFO, SYSTEM, EDITINI and DISPFEAT.

Command date	Guide		Source
23/03/23	HELPTM		Field Data Module

VARIOFF

Insert points into a variable offset line at nominated intervals, so that the offset varies linearly between the points in the set.

The interval is measured along the HAL and the offsets from the HAL. Both the HAL and variable offset line can be either a pline or a set. The variable offset line cannot contain curves. The lines must be in the same general direction.

The points in the variable offset line can be drawn using point snapping modes, including chainage and offset and coordinates. They can also be entered using GC65 or GC65FILE.

HAL: Select a horizontal alignment from which to offset
Variable offset line: Select a pline or set along which the new points are to be created
Interval: Enter the interval between the new points.
OK: Add points or vertices into the variable offset line at the interval
Cancel: Cancel the command

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	UG	View\|Close view	Field Data Module	0

VERTALIGN

Use registered alignments with commands such as ROADJOB.

See also VALMANAGER to create and delete registered alignments, add chainage equations or enter alignment offsets.

Command date	Guide		Source
12/03/09	HELPTM		Field Data Module

VICRDSEC

The computed cross sections are placed in the XSect View. They can then be replotted, converted to surfaces and so on.

The cross section plot style is assumed to be similar to the VicRoads style. Other styles can be interpreted provided the data types are separated by layer.

Import the Horizontal alignment into the plan view
Make the HAL the active alignment
Import cross section plots into the plan view.
GCSCALE all the data in the plots in X and Y so that the new scale is 1:1.
VICRDSEC
Select the cross section plot data to be considered, typically by Window.
Select the layer containing the existing surface cross sections
Select the layer containing the design surface cross sections
Select the layer containing the chainage labels
Select the layer containing the datum lines

The chainage values are derived from the chainage text below each section. The horizontal offset is measured from a vertical line found near the chainage label. The datum elevation is derived from the datum label. The section elevations are computed above the datum line.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

VIEWPORT

Turn on objects inside the field of view, and turn off others. Turning off objects you are not working with can speed up many processes, especially when you have millions of points.

The field of view is determined by how much you have zoomed in and where.

Layer or Layer List: Select a layer or layer list. Only objects on these layers will be modified.
Set ViewPort: Turn ON objects on the layer(s) that are inside the field of view, and turn off objects that are entirely outside.
Clear Viewport: Turn on all objects on layer(s).

Other properties that control visibility such as layer visibility, hidden segments, active alignments and display settings are not changed.

This "viewport" is not the same as a vport, saved view, view mode or dynaview.

Rotate any plan view by specifying direction of the top of the screen by bearing.

The rotation affects the active plan view window or the first plan view window subsequently opened.

The current orientation is displayed in the title bar.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	View\|Rotate view	Field Data Module

VIEWSCAL

Enter a plan view scale or select Default for Pt Labels to change the plan view scale so point labels can easily read and then redraw the display.

VIEWSCAL can be used with arguments in a toolbox button or on the command line, for example:

VIEWSCAL 0: Default for Pt Labels
VIEWSCAL 0 2500: Change Plan view scale from anything to 1:2500
VIEWSCAL 2: Change Plan view scale from 1:500 to 1:1000 (autoscaled blocks and text are twice the size)
VIEWSCAL 0.5: Change Plan view scale from 1:1000 to 1:500 (autoscaled blocks and text are half the size)
VIEWSCAL -2: Change Plan view scale from 1:1000 to 1:500 (autoscaled blocks and text are half the size)

Use the "Default for Pt Labels" button to adjust the Plan view scale so that point labels created by F7, F8, F9 and F11 or refreshed by GCREDRAW are a convenient size.

The new scale takes into account the sheet units and the Point Label Height set by EDITINI. This button does not adjust the view scale if the view scale is fixed in EDITINI.

Control the view mode name, coordinate labels, ordering of X and Y, vertical exaggeration and plot scale for each view.

These settings are stored with the project file. Each view mode can be displayed in multiple views.

Plan: Plan view coordinates are Eastings, Northings and Elevations or, with Y before X, Northings, Eastings and Elevations. Units are Project Units such as metres or feet configured by Measurement Units (MEASUNIT).
Profile: Profile view coordinates are Stations | Chainages, Elevations and Offsets. "Auto reference off" and "Use Vertical Exaggeration are On".
Sheet: Use "Sheet coordinates" is On, so the units are sheet units such as "cm" or "in" configured by Measurement Units (MEASUNIT) and the Plot Scale is 1.0.
Xsect: Cross section view coordinates are offsets, elevations and Chainages | Stations. "Auto reference off" and "Use Vertical Exaggeration are On".
Super: Superelevation view coordinates are Stations | Chainages, Superelevation %, and Offset. "Auto reference off" and "Use Vertical Exaggeration" are On.
View6, View7 and View 8: These view are user-definable. FLIPUP uses View6 by default.

View name: Edit the name of the view mode up to 10 characters long. The name appears in the display heading, in reports and in labels.
X coordinate label: Typically East for Eastings in Plan, Chainage | Station in Profile, Offset on Xsect, and X in Sheet.
Y coordinate label: Typically North for Northings in Plan, Elevation in Profile and Xsect, and Y in Sheet.
Z coordinate label: Typically Elev in Plan, Offset in Profile, Chn | Sta for Xsect view, and Z in Sheet.
Plot scale: Enter the plot scale for the view. This value is used together with Measurement Units (MEASUNIT) to scale text and plotboxes from ground units to sheet units. Set plot scale to 1 for the Sheet view.
Y before X: Turn on for a Northing,Easting convention. Turn off for Easting, Northing.
Use sheet coordinates: Turn on in a Sheet view only to set the Plot scale to 1.0 and use Sheet Units.
Auto reference off: Turn on to refer objects created in views such as Profile to the current active alignment.
Use vertical exaggeration: Apply a vertical exaggeration. Turn on for Profile and Cross section views even when the VE=1.0. Vertical curves cannot be entered into profiles unless this is enabled.
Vertical exaggeration: Enter the vertical exaggeration of the Y axis with respect to the X axis for displays. For example, if the plot scale is 50, and the vertical exaggeration is 5, in the profile view the scale for elevation (on the Y axis) would be displayed at 1:50 and the scale for chainage (along the X axis) would be displayed at 1:10. Changes to vertical exaggeration are not visible until the next View All (ALL) or the view is reopened.

Control whether objects on a layer are visible.

Use with an argument in an alias or toolbox button.

Usage: VISLYR layername

Don't use with layer names that contain spaces. Only characters before any space are considered.

The visibility status is shown and can also be controlled by LAYERSET.

Invisible objects cannot be selected by Window, Crossing or Record, but can be selected by Colour.

Commands which can hide objects without making layers invisible include OFF, HIDE, ACTIVE, ACTIVECHAINAGE, DYNAVIEW and DISPLAYSET.

Open a new window in Plan, Profile, Sheet, Xsect, Super, View6, View7 or View8 and make that the current view.

Select Grab to open a new view window, with extents from two locations in the current view.

All the original views are retained, thus enabling multiple views of the same data at different scales.

Pan by complete screens in the current view.

As shown in the following table, type in VPAN, a space, a digit indicating direction, another space and the number of screens to pan at once.

VPAN 8 1

VPAN 1 1

VPAN 2 1

VPAN 7 1

VPAN 9 .5

VPAN 3 1

VPAN 6 1

VPAN 5 1

VPAN 4 1

If you want to use a mouse to move to a location, select PAN, RPAN or GC34.

Left-click on the VPAN toolbox from Geocomp.ws, or right-click to pan or zoom in the opposite direction.

See also GCPAN which uses keystrokes that match the arrangement of numeric keypad buttons on a computer.

TML date		Menu	Source	GC
29/10/08		Toolbox	Field Data Module	133

VRECALL

Zoom to a different location in the current view mode, by selecting the number of a previously saved view.

To save a view with a number from 1 to 6, use VSAVE.

To recall a saved view in a different view mode, use SVIEW or VNEW to make that view mode current first.

To zoom to the location of the previous view in the same view mode, see PREVIOUS.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	View\|Recall view	Field Data Module	145

VRESTORE

Restore the current view to the state before it was last either minimised or maximised.

Import groupings, transformations and indexed face sets from VRML97 files.

Place on a nominated layer, or use node names for layers.

Create a set for each imported face, or just create the points.

Form a VRML model from sets or a DTM.

These models can be displayed in perspective from any viewpoint.

The VRML file format can be displayed in web browsers using VRML or X3D plug-ins such as Cortona.

Control whether the surface colours are diffuse, emissive or specular. The colour is derived from the set or the layer.

The objects are nodes of type Indexed Face Set, with names from layers. The format is VRML97. Refer to the built-in help file for more details.

For a DTM, the front of the faces is viewed from above. To export a VRML DTM with no triangles inside a dead area, use DTM2XML then IMPORT the XML again first.

For sets, the front of the faces is determined by the clockwise or anti-clockwise direction of the sets. SHOWDIR shows the direction of a set, REVERSE and SHOWDIRN does both. Arcs are replaced with a single chord and 2D points are ignored.

VRMLIN and VRMLOUT require 32-bit Windows. To install VRMLIN and VRMLOUT commands, open C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP\Alt\Trimble\Terramodel\TMVRML.ZIP and follow the instructions in tmvrml_readme.pdf.

See also VRMLIN, 3DVISUALISER and Visualizer.

TML date	Guide		Source
08/02/22	tmvrml_readme		Geocomp Update

VSAVE

Save the view mode and coordinates of the current view with a number from 1 to 6.

Recall saved views by VRECALL.

Use to define road alignments by constant slope such as for haul roads.

The start must be within a triangle, not at a DTM point.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	FC W

WORDPAD

Open the Microsoft WordPad document editor.

See also GCREPORT which opens the P3Pad editor and NOTEPAD which open a text editor.

Alias date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
08/02/22	built-in	Toolbar	Windows	201

WORDWRAP

Create a closed pline connecting the ends of xlines.

Road:: Select Xlines by selecting a roadway.
Delete old?: Delete any boundary previously created by XLINEBDY for this roadway. These are identified by group 8888 and can be on any layer.
OK: Create a closed pline with group 8888 that connects the ends of xlines that refer to the main alignment of the selected roadway.
Cancel: Close command without creating the boundary.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

XLINES

Create xlines along plines or sets with default extents on the current layer.

Xlines are plines that define the locations of cross sections along an alignment.

Set the current layer to XLINES (for example).
Select the active horizontal alignment (ACTIVE or GCACTIVE).
XLINES command.
Select the HAL.
Select the Default Type.
Modify or accept the default left and right Xline extents.
Select another Xline type.
Create the Xlines.
Change the xline type or default extents and create any additional xlines.

Horizontal alignment

Select the horizontal alignment record. The default is the active alignment, if any.

Xline

Type

Check the defaults then select an Xline type, other than Defaults.

Defaults

Left | Right: Enter the default left and right offsets for all Xline creation and roadway reporting commands including RDXLINES, ROADSPOT and GC42AB.
OK: Accept changes to the default offsets
Cancel: Do not accept changes

HAL Pts

Begin | End: Enter beginning and ending chainages | stations.
Xline: Create xlines perpendicular to the HAL at each of the PC, PT, TS, SC, SS, LS, ST and PI points with no arcs, to the default left and right offsets.
Cancel: Do not create Xlines.

Interval

Begin | End: Enter beginning and ending chainages | stations.
Int: Enter the interval.
Xline: Create Xlines perpendicular to the HAL at the interval and within the range to the default left and right offsets.
Close: Do not create Xlines.

Point

Point: Enter a location or use the mouse to create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at the mouse location to the default left and right offsets.
Xline: Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at the entered location to the default left and right offsets.
Close: Do not create Xlines.

Chainage | Station

Enter a chainage | station or use the mouse to create at the mouse location a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL to the default left and right offsets.
Xline: Create a cross section line perpendicular to the HAL at the entered chainage to the default left and right offsets.
Close: Do not create Xlines.

Pline

Pline: Select one or more plines, one at a time.
Xline: If the plines cross the HAL, modify the plines into Xlines by changing the names to XLINE and referring the plines to the alignment.
Close: Do not modify the plines.

Close

Close the command

XLINES creates Xlines which are plines that:

Have only straight segments
Have the name XLINE (in capital letters)
Refer to a horizontal alignment
Cross the alignment to which it refers

If, and only if, any pline meets all these conditions it is an Xline, regardless of visibility, layer, colour, number of segments or direction.

Create xlines along a HAL at selected points within a maximum offset and left and right extents.

The TML name is XLIN_PTS. If XLINPTS does not run from the command line, create an alias from XLINPTS to XLIN_PTS or enter XLIN_PTS.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $250

XML2ADC

Convert a table of feature codes in .XML into an ASCII AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file and create new layers for use with AUTODRAFT.

XML File:: Select an .XML file with a CodeDictionary in the format specified for ADAC (Asset Design As Constructed) by Institute of Public Works Engineering Australasia (IPWEA).
Create layers: Create new layers in the current project
OK: Import the XML file
Cancel: Close without importing

To convert your feature code list from .XML to .ADC and use in AutoDraft:

Obtain a Code Dictionary
Use XML2ADC to convert point and line codes in the .XML to an .ADC in ASCII format
Edit the .ADC in a text editor, if you want
Open the .ADC in the AutoDraft Editor
Edit or add any extra information using the AutoDraft Editor
Save the binary .ADC file
Use the binary .ADC with AUTODRAFT.

The AutoDraft Editor saves .ADC files in a binary .ADC format that can only be opened by AutoDraft.

Export cross sections extracted from a DTM to an ASCII file with file extension .XSC .

Specify HAL and chainage range, whether to extract sections at Xlines, Interval or Breaks (DTM links), the left and right extents and the file format and name.

HAL

Select a horizontal alignment

DTM

Select a DTM layer from which to extract sections

Begin | End

Enter beginning and eding chainages or accept the defaults

XSect

Export points at every DTM link between the specified left and right offsets or Xline extents at chainages located...

Breaks: where the HAL crosses any DTM link
Intervals: at the specified interval
Xlines: at Xlines

File format

Select the cross section file format, then name and path, and export the .XSC file

Points: Enter the order, precision and separators of fields or select fields .3N .3E .3Z 8D or .4E .4N .4Z 8D.
Roads: Terramodel Roads .XSC file

The points file format uses fields P,N,E,Z,D,X,O or S to define your fields in that same way that ASCII points EXPORT does. For example, [4E .4N .4Z .4X .4O 8D] exports the file with records containing space-separated Easting, Northing, Elevation, Chainage and Offset to 4 decimal places and a Name of up to 8 characters.

Digitize cross sections from paper plans using a digitizer after establishing a roadway and configuring the digitizer using TABLET first.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|XSection digitizer... Channel\|Channel design\|XSection digitizer	Secured	402

XSECTIONEDT

Add, edit or delete cross-sections in Roadjobs.

The horizontal scroll bar located across the top of the window moves to chainages | stations along the road job. Advance to the cross-section at the next xline by clicking on the scroll bar to the right of the button. Click on the scroll bar to the left of the button to go to the previous cross-section. Drag the button to any location at an xline.

Advance the editor by one step interval by clicking on the left or right arrow buttons at each end of the scroll bar. For road jobs less than 32676 project units in length, the step interval is 1 project unit. For road jobs up to 326760 units, 10 units, and so on.

Resize the editor window by dragging its edges.

Chainage | station: Enter the chainage | station along the main alignment for the cross-section you would like to edit. The chainage that you move to using the scroll bar will be displayed here. If you enter a chainage that has no corresponding stored data and no xline, you will be given the option of having the cross-section interpolated.
Original | modified surface: Select a surface to list the Offset and elevation. If you have made changes, additions, or deletions to the surface, the word Modified is used. The slopes of associated with the selected surface will be labeled in the graphics screen if Labels are turned on in ROADGRID.
Data origin: "Sliced DTM data" means interpolating the cross-section from the listed DTM surface. "Stored surface data" means the surface is composed of offset, elevation pairs entered manually or imported from an ASCII file. Editing values associated with the [Design] surface, do not update the cross-section because the values in the design are shown. To change these by hand, first convert the design points to points on the finish surface using Convert Design in the Edit menu of the XSection Editor.
Off, elev: Enter or edit offset, elevation pairs for each data point in a cross-section. When you click in one of these point controls a marker is displayed on the graphics screen at that point. When editing stored cross-sections, specifying the coordinates of the points on the cross-section or their locations using any of the horizontal and vertical data entry modes allowed when defining shapes in SHAPE.
Ptcode: Enter or edit a descriptor (point code) for each data point in a cross-section.
Auto-tie: Indicate a segment using an indicated slope, specifying that slope using one of the horizontal and vertical data entry modes allowed when defining shapes in SHAPE. If the Auto-tie check box is checked, that segment is tied to ground.
Direction: Indicate the direction in which the tie segment projects. Use Auto only if you do not know the direction.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source	GC
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|XSection editor... Channel\|Channel design\|XSection editor...	Field Data Module	421

XSECTIONMAN

Manage cross sections for roadways and channels.

Edit, add and delete cross-sections, import and export sections, and assign them to a road job.

Use XLINES, RDXlines or GCXLINES to create Xlines first.

Station | Chainage: Display the stations | chainages of cross-sections at Xlines.
Data type: Show "Stored" if the cross-section shows stored data (data not obtained from a DTM), or "Skip" if the cross-section corresponds to the beginning or ending of a skip range.
Station | Chainage range: Select a range of 500 stations | chainages for display.
Edit...: Click Edit... or double-click on the station | chainage to open the XSection Editor (XSECTIONEDT).
New...: Open the XSection Editor (XSECTIONEDT) to manually enter a cross-section.
Delete: Delete the xline, or all cross-section points, or both for the highlighted cross-section.
Import xsection...: Open Xsection Import (IMPORTXS) to import a file of (stored) cross-section data.
Export xsection...: Open Xsection Export (EXPORTXS) to export selected cross-section data to a file.
Change road job: Open Road Job Manager (ROADJOB) to change the current road job.

Command date	Guide	Menu	Source
12/03/09	HELPTM	Roads\|Road design\|XSection manager... Channel\|Channel design\|XSection manager...	Field Data Module	413

XSECTPTS

XSECTPTS turns points on and off in XSect view, which might not be the current view.

See also ACTIVE, ACTIVECHAINAGE, ONALL and OFFALL.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

XSECTRPT

Report the total sloping distance along selected cross section surfaces.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

XSHEET

Create road cross-sections at each xline in the Xsect view, and display the cross sections as dynaviews in the Sheet view.

There are settings for properties of sheets, columns, cross sections, tables and layer names. These settings can be exported and imported.

All values are in sheet units unless otherwise noted. Use MEASUNIT to select cm or inch sheet units for best results.

Hal

Select a horizontal alignment. The default is the active alignment.

Chainage or Station Range

Select beginning and ending chainages. The defaults are from the alignment.

Settings

Sheet properties

Column Properties

Enter the height, width, separation and offsets of columns of cross sections. The width times the maximum number of columns plus separations must be less than the width in Sheet Properties. Select Axis labels and Grids to create a labelled grid over each column.

XSection Properties

Specify the scale, placement, labels and table of cross sections.

Scale: Enter the horizontal and vertical scale.
Match scales: Set the XSect view scales to match the plot scales.
Placement in Columns: Configure the order and separation of cross sections.
Centerline Offset

Centered: At the centre of the column, locate the centreline (0.00 offset from the alignment).
Auto: At the centre of the column, locate halfway between the left and right extents of the section.
Offset from column: At the entered offset from the left of the column, locate the centreline.

Axis Labels

Create labelled axes over each section.

Chainage (or Station) Label

Label each section with the chainage (\STA\) and additional text. For example, in the template field enter "Ch=\STA\" to create the label "Ch=100.00".

Table Settings

Label each section with a table of offsets and elevations.

Side box labels

Include a side box with layer names

Table Datum Level

Locate the vertical datum of the top of the table, by the nearest major grid, an offset below the minimum elevation or an absolute elevation.

Label Datum

Enter the description and number of decimal places for the datum label.

Table Rows

label the Horizontal Offset, Northing, Easting, Design elevation or elevation difference between two surfaces.

Swap order of Table Rows

Turn on for offset and existing surface at the bottom of the table; off for them at the top.

Interval settings

Create columns of labels at even offset intervals, breaks in slope, where two surfaces intersect (catch) or at crossing HALs to be selected when creating the sections. crossing 3D HALS.

Block Name

Select a block to insert at crossing HALS if 3D.

Label header

Create labels in a box above the datum showing Chainage, Scale factors, Centreline coordinates or direction.

Tick and Dropline settings

Mark all Profiles with tick marks: Insert short tick mark plines
Mark vertical lines with Tick Mark: Insert tick marks or drop lines from the specified surface

Erase ALL Cross Section Sheets and Dynaviews

Erase all previous cross sections from the Sheet View, for all alignments, or not.

Overwrite ALL other Cross Section Sheets for Alignment

Overwrite all cross sections for the alignment, or add new cross sections.

All the cross-section of a particular alignment at a particular station | chainage is displayed in the dynaview. To have two distinct sets of cross-section sheets associated with the same alignment, use two distinct alignments, or employ layer lists to control the visible contents.

Select DTM layers from a list of valid and formed DTMs. The selected layer that was first created will be the existing surface.

For each Xline, create plines in the XSect view for each surface, add any labels, tables or grids, create a plotbox and create a dynaview in the Sheet view.

Cancel

Cancel without creating any more sections.

Layer names and colours are from the selected DTM layers.

If you have created cross-section sheets using PLANSET or RDX that are based on a road job employing this same alignment as its main alignment, and "Overwrite ALL other Cross Section Sheets for Alignment" is selected, those cross-section sheets will be deleted as the new cross-section sheets are created by XSHEET. In general, if you have the ROADWAY module, use the RDX command as opposed to XSHEET to create cross-section sheets.

Create cross section plots in Geocomp-style which is similar to XSHEET but with an extra Geocomp settings button that labels the table differently.

TML date			Source	GC
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200	492

XSHILO

See also LCN, SHEETXS, STOREXS and VICRDSEC.

			Source
			Hamilton

XSLABEL

Label the location, size, offset, and elevation of strings and obstructions, defined by sets or plines in the Plan view which intersect cross-sections already created by RDX, RDXGC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC.

Choose from Pipe Labels, 2D labels and 3D labels. Control the settings of added text, lines and blocks. Create labels on current layer or obstructions layer. Delete or retain previously created labels.

XSHEET and RDX create cross-sections in the XSect view and create dynaviews of those cross-sections in sheets in the Sheet View. XSLABEL adds labels to these cross-sections, registered to the appropriate cross-sections. Use ACTIVESTATION | ACTIVECHAINAGE to display the cross-section at a particular chainage | station.

Hal

Select the alignment

Settings

Selection

Select Pipe Labels, 2D Lines or 3D Lines. Configure the labelling settings for each selection.

Add block

Insert a block in the cross-section at each crossing location.

Text style

Select the text style for the labels.

Lines

Configure leader lines drawn from the block labels to the text labels.

Draw line: Add a leader line.
Line length: Specify the length of the leader line in sheet units.
Line below: Draw the leader line vertically below, otherwise draw above.

Name

Label with names; for pipes, the pipe attribute name; for 2D and 3D lines, the name of each selected line. The location is to the Left, Center or Right of the leader line.

Elevation

Label with elevation. The Location is to the Left, Center or Right of the leader line.

Offset

Label with offset distance from the alignment. The Location is to the Left, Centre or Right of the leader line.

Close

Save the current XSLabel plotting configuration.

Pipe labels

Label pipes in Plan view that have attributes defined using commands in the Pipe menu.

2D lines

Label 2D sets or plines in Plan view that define horizontal offsets from the HAL, and a DTM layer from which to interpolate elevations.

3D lines

Label 3D sets or plines in Plan view that define horizontal offsets from the HAL, and elevations interpolated from the sets or plines.

Close

Close without creating any more labels.

If settings for Pipe, 2D lines or 3D lines include "Add Block", blocks with one of these pre-defined names are added to the labels:

Pipe_cir: A circular pipe for pipe labels
Pipe_arc: An arch-shaped pipe for pipe labels
Pipe_rt: A rectangular (box-shaped) pipe for pipe labels
Pipe_tpz: A trapezoidal channel for pipe labels
Xsblock: A block for 2D and 3D lines
User-defined: A block matching the name of the 2D or 3D line

PIPE_CIR, PIPE_ARC, PIPE_RT and PIPE_TPZ blocks are illustrated in this block chart.

PIPE_CIR, PIPE_ARC and PIPE_RT blocks are scaled to the internal dimension of the pipe, with the invert at the centre bottom.

XSBLOCK is by default a circle with the insertion point at the bottom. Edit this block to change the size, insertion point, colours, labels, and so on.

If the name of the set or pline consists of exactly three elements delimited by semicolons, the name is parsed as follows:

block_name;block_scale;z_offset_in_project_units

For example, if waterpipe250.blk is on the TSP, and "Add Block" is enabled for 3d lines, and a selected 3D set with the name

waterpipe250;0.25;0.1

, intersects an Xline, click "3d lines" to insert the waterpipe250 block, scaled by 0.25, into the XSect view, with the insertion point at the horizontal offset of the set and vertical offset 0.1 above the elevation of the set, at the chainage | station of the Xline.

The block used is an internal block with the specified name, or the first corresponding .BLK in the TSP or in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Blocks.

The predefined blocks are in C:\TMCustom\Geocomp and C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Blocks.

If you define or modify your own block, create an internal block or place your .BLK file in C:\TMCustom\Geocomp.

Each of the default predefined pipe blocks are scaled to one unit internal diameter with the invert at the centre bottom. You may need to modify the block to suit your shape or insertion point.

If the insertion point of the block falls outside the dynaview, the block is not visible in the sheet view. Increasing the minor vertical grid spacing, in Cross Section column grid settings, may help because this controls the datum.

The intersection of the lines are based on the centreline chainage of the cross section. For skewed or non-linear cross-sections, this intersection may not fall where the line crosses the xline.

Export cross sections as ASCII files from points using xlines.

Select the HAL, points and a chainage tolerance.

Each point inside the tolerance of an xline inside the chainage range is exported onto the cross section file.

HAL

Select the HAL along which to interpolate the cross sections.

Points

Select points to be written to file.

Chainage | Station tolerance

Enter the distance a point can be from the xline and still be included. Each point within the tolerance is exported after being projected onto the xline.

XsOut

Begin | End

Enter chainage | station range

XSout

XsOut output file format. There are two formats, both of which use .XSC as the file extension.

Points: Enter field designation characters P,N,E,Z,D,X,O or S to define fields similar to EXPORT. For example, ".4E .4N .4Z .4X .4O 8D" exports the file as space-separated Easting, Northing, Elevation, Chainage and Offset to 4 decimal places and 8 characters of Description/Name.
Roads: Terramodel Roads .XSC file.
OK: Select a file name and location and save the output .XSC file.
Cancel: Cancel selecting format.

Close

Close selecting range.

Close

Close the command

Report, between specified chainages in road job, the chainage differences and the incremental and cumulative average end areas of the existing surface.

The Roadjob must be registered with the Roadjob Manager (ROADJOB).

Only one phase is included in the total.

XSURAREA is similar to SURFAREA but with options for chainage interval, phases, headings and footers.

TML date			Source
08/02/22			Geocomp Update or $200

XTOCL

Define walls for Visualizer (TV) using pipes.

Select a new layer
Create a closed set for the building footprint
Create a vertical set from the bottom to the top of the building
Give the vertical set a name
Run XTOCL
Pick the sets, the vertical set name and the number of points per arc
Select location of the first point in the vertical set.
Save the project
Add the "pipe" to the .GTT file
Save the GTT file

Visualizer

Create or open a TV Environment
Add the Terramodel project file
Turn on pipes and sets.

For an illustrated example, see How to create a solid building in Terramodel Visualizer from its plan outline using pipes.

TML date	Guide		Source	GC
08/02/22	XTOCL		Trimble or Geocomp Update	MM 8

XVOLUMES

Report roadway to a .CSV file in detail.

Reports can include every material in every surface, subgrade and closed shape at every chainage for every phase.

Shrink/Swell factors shown for every material.

Incremental or accumulative

Optionally include five heading lines and a footer.

Resize the active view by a factor of 0.5 around the centre of the display.

ZI is an ALIAS to "MAGNIFY 1.5".

Resize the active view by a factor of 2 around the centre of the display.

ZO and F6 commands and Function key F6 ALIAS to "MAGNIFY 0.5".

Resize a part of the active view defined by two locations to a larger scale.

The mouse can also be used to zoom if it has a scroll wheel that is correctly configured. If the "Scroll inactive windows" feature for mouse and touchpad devices in Windows 10 Settings interferes with the wheel in Terramodel, turn this off.

Zoom the active view to an approximate scale entered when prompted or by an argument.

The current view scale is not changed, only the zoom level.

TML date		Menu	Source
08/02/22		View\|Zoom to scale	Geocomp Update or $250

This table lists abbreviations for some Terramodel manuals referred to in the blue table above. See also DOCUMENTS.

Abbreviation	Name
ACC	9.3 Accelerator Class
ADD 9.7	9.7 User Guide Addendum
FDM UG	Field Data Module User Guide
RG	9.3 On-Line Reference Guide
UG	10.1 User Guide Revision A

Code	Where to get the TML files, what support is available and whether you need to pay extra
Field Data Module	Field Data Module (FDM) commands are issued by Trimble and are included in every installation of Terramodel 10.61. FDM commands do not require the purchase of any modules, the attachment of a Sentinel Security key, the installation of other software from Trimble, Geocomp Systems, Sentinel, or anywhere else, or any payment. Terramodel 10.61 can be downloaded from Geocomp Systems and from Trimble, and may be supplied with survey equipment or other software. Installing a Geocomp Update replaces some of these commands with updated or alternative commands that require Customer Care Membership.
Secured	Secured commands are issued by Trimble and are included in every installation of Terramodel 10.61. These commands require at least one module, other than Field Data module, on a physical Sentinel Security key that enables the modules to run on one computer at a time. This key is issued with a Terramodel software licence purchased from a Trimble dealer such as Geocomp Systems. USB keys attach to a USB port and are labelled with “Sentinel”, “TRIMBLE” and a serial number. Parallel port keys are also in use. Security keys are also known as locks or dongles. For more detail about keys, refer to our dongles page. Support and Updates for these commands are available for free to current members of the Trimble Terramodel Active Members Support Program or Geocomp Systems Customer Care. Contact a Trimble dealer or Geocomp Systems to join. Installing a Geocomp Update replaces some of these commands with updated or alternative commands that require Customer Care Membership. Membership requires at least one module secured to a Sentinel key.
HDMS	HDMS commands are included in the Hydrographic Data Management System (HDMS) module of Terramodel. HDMS is written by Geocomp Systems and has been distributed by Geocomp Systems, Trimble Marine dealers and Reson dealers. HDMS can be included with the Terramodel sale or added afterwards. HDMS is installed with Geocomp Update K or later. Terramodel installations without Geocomp Update require HDMS to be installed from a separate CD. HDMS commands are secured by the HydroProTools module on a Sentinel security key. If you were issued a HDMS registration file instead, please contact Geocomp Systems to transfer the registration from the file to your key. If you have a Terramodel licence with HDMS module, email Geocomp Systems to register your licence for free Customer Care Membership including upgrades and support for 12 months from the time of sale. Use ABOUT command to check the modules on your key.
Trimble or Geocomp Update	These commands are issued "as-is and "unsupported" by Trimble have been modified and included with Geocomp Updates. Geocomp Updates are issued free of charge for Terramodel licences registered with with Geocomp Systems that have current Customer Care Membership. Membership requires at least one module secured to a Sentinel key.
Geocomp Update or $	These commands are included in Trimble Terramodel 10.61 and modified versions are installed with Geocomp Update. Geocomp Updates are issued free of charge for Terramodel licences registered with with Geocomp Systems that have current Customer Care Membership. Membership requires at least one module secured to a Sentinel key. Current members can obtain updates between releases by emailing Geocomp Systems. To enquire about purchasing a minimum of $500 worth of commands without Customer Care, contact Geocomp Systems. Include your Terramodel key number, the TMLs you want and the prices listed for them above (in USD). Payment can be made by Visa or MasterCard. Customisation, updates, support and bulk discounts are also available by arrangement.
Geocomp Update or $	These commands are not included in Trimble Terramodel 10.61. They are included in the current Geocomp Update. Geocomp Updates are issued free of charge for Terramodel licences registered with with Geocomp Systems that have current Customer Care Membership. Membership requires at least one module secured to a Sentinel key. Current members can obtain updates between releases by emailing Geocomp Systems. To enquire about purchasing a minimum of $500 worth of commands without Customer Care, contact Geocomp Systems. Include your Terramodel key number, the TMLs you want and the prices listed for them above (in USD). Payment can be made by Visa or MasterCard. Customisation, updates, support and bulk discounts are also available by arrangement.
Geocomp Update or geocomp.com.au or Thales	These applications install, remove or test the Sentinel System Drivers that Terramodel needs to read the Sentinel hardware licence keys (dongles). They are available from Thales and Trimble and are also included with the Terramodel 10.61 installation and Geocomp Updates from Geocomp Systems. See also our Geocomp Systems Dongle page.
$	These are specialist commands available from Geocomp Systems at the price shown in USD for a single command licenced to a single key. Call or email Geocomp Systems for specifications, scope, requirements, sales, rent, consultancy, processing and so on.
POA	These “Price on Application” commands are available from Geocomp Systems. Call or email Geocomp Systems for price, specifications, scope and requirements.
NFS	These specialist commands by Geocomp Systems are not for sale, but are available for use by our consultants to process your data. Call or email Geocomp Systems for details.
Trimble	These aliases included in Geocomp Updates launch separately installed applications that have been issued by Trimble and are or were available from Trimble.com or Geocomp Systems.
Hamilton	These commands were written by or for Tim Hamilton of Hamilton Programming. They were were distributed via TMLStore.com. These are now available from Geocomp Systems. Call or email Geocomp Systems for details.
Metz	These commands were written by Jennifer Metz and are included in Geocomp Updates by agreement.
Wendell	These commands were written by Jerome A. Wendell for Wencomp and are included in Geocomp Updates by agreement.

Root synchronization
(name and location user-defined)

C:\Trimble Sync

Device
(name user-defined)
(multiple devices allowed)

ACU SCS900 Crew 1

Trimble SCS900 Data

Site
(name user-defined)
(multiple sites allowed)

Designs
(multiple designs allowed)

Work Order
(multiple work orders allowed)

Work Orders

TMLs (Terramodel Macro Language programs) are created to extend the capability of Terramodel for Windows, demonstrate features or solve a specific problem. They may be largely undocumented and are provided as-is for your use.

Additional files such as blocks or mapping files are required with some TMLs. Many TMLs require Terramodel to be licensed for relevant modules.

Terramodel Macro Language (TML) is based on “C” and is described in the TML Macro Language help file supplied with Terramodel. Terramodel Macro Language is quite different to the Trimble Macro Language (also TML) used by Business Center. Geocomp Systems and other companies can write custom Terramodel TMLs and provide training in Terramodel TML development.

Continuous development means that this list can never be entirely complete, accurate or current.

Terramodel is copyright © Trimble. Geocomp Updates are copyright © Geocomp Systems. Commands on this list are written by Trimble, Geocomp
Systems and various other parties. Author’s notes, source and manuals may show copyright, date and other information. Check with Geocomp Systems or Trimble if you have any queries.

Purchase of an individual command from Geocomp Systems includes support for 12 months. If you report a fault with the command within that time, and we agree that it is a fault, we may repair, replace or refund entirely at our discretion, subject to Geocomp Systems Standard Terms and
Conditions for which the applicable law is that of the State of Victoria, Australia.

See also the Disclaimer of
Warranty in the Terramodel User Guide (UG) and
the end user licence agreement entered into during installation of
Terramodel.

This document is:

- - - - Available from www.geocomp.com.au/support/terramodel/tmllist
        Compiled from various sources including Trimble, TML authors, clients and ourselves
        Edited by Garth Coverdale
        Copyright © Geocomp Systems Pty Ltd 2023.